Liaison XL Service Manual 2.0 (M0200008696) Revision 02

Service Manual Technical Instructions

Chemiluminescence Analyzer LIAISON®XL (Ref. I0050) LIAISON®XL LAS (Ref. I0050LAS) DiaSorin S.p.A. Strada per Crescentino snc 13040 - Saluggia (VC) Italy

IMPORTANT

The information contained herein is based on experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter as aquired by DiaSorin S.p.A. DiaSorin is not liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages resulting from the use and/ or misuse of the contained information, be it negligence or other fault.

DiaSorin S.p.A. Strada per Crescentino - 13040 Saluggia (Vercelli) - Italy www.diasorin.com

M0200008696, 07-2013 Liaison® XL Service Manual 2.0 - Revision 02

DiaSorin S.p.A. All rights reserved

Description of Changes

Description of Changes Chapter

Change Description

1

Chapter 1.4.3.1. Safety note concerning the hand held barcode reader – PN A0179 added.

2

Chapter 2.1.2. Information about instruments without cabinet drawers removed.

3

4

Chapter 3.2.1. Standard supply with PN I0050 updated (introduction of hand held barcode reader – PN A0179, update of rack label pages). Chapter 3.3.3. Lubrication of cuvette supply metal sheet added during manual inspection. Chapter 4.4.4. Accessory packing list updated (introduction of the lid for LIAISON® XLine by pass). Chapter 5.2. Maintenance procedure updated: -

Revision of the sequence of the activities.

-

Chapter 5.2.5. Introduction of the annual inspection of the incubator belt.

-

Chapter 5.2.6. Introduction of the periodic lubrication of cuvette supply metal sheet.

-

Chapter 5.2.8. Introduction of the periodic replacement of the debubbler filter.

-

Chapter 5.2.10. Introduction of the periodic replacement of the stirrer sliding bearings.

-

Chapter 5.2.11. Introduction of the periodic maintenance of the pipettor rods.

-

Chapter 5.2.13. Introduction of the periodic calibration of washer bubble sensors.

5

Chapter 5.5.3.3. Calibration of washer bubble sensors added to monthly inspection visit for high volume customers.

7

Table 7.3-3. Elimination of “Pipettor #3” position (no more in use).

8

Chapter 8.11.1. Teaching of the wash position updated according to the procedure to use with the wash station – PN 100000458. Chapter 9.3.6. Procedures for assembly and removal of left top cover updated with new pictures.

9

Chapter 9.3.8.3. Picture of the right top cover (for instruments with SN ≥ 2210000251) added. Chapter 9.3.10.3. Picture of the back covers assembly added.

11

Chapter 11.3.4.3 and 11.3.5.3. Re-calibration of cuvette presence sensor transport and execution of sequences via Service Software added after the assembly of the incubator belt. Chapter 11.3.18. Procedures for assembly and removal of pusher I-W (bearing block) added. Chapter 11.3.19. Procedures for assembly and removal of gates I-W

LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

TOC - I

Description of Changes added. Chapter 11.3.20. Procedures for assembly and removal of lower mechanism I-W added. Chapter 11.3.21. Procedures for assembly and removal of pusher W-I (bearing block) added. Chapter 11.3.22. Procedures for assembly and removal of gates W-I added. Chapter 11.3.23. Procedures for assembly and removal of lower mechanism W-I added. Chapter 11.3.24. Procedures for assembly and removal of motor cable IW added. Chapter 11.3.25. Procedures for assembly and removal of chute assembly added. Chapter 11.3.26. Procedures for assembly and removal of cuvette supply assembly added. Chapter 11.4.3. Teaching of I-W pusher added. Chapter 11.5.2. Check of gates added.

12

14

Chapter 12.3.4. Procedures for assembly and removal of drawer separators added. Chapter 14.3.10. Procedures for assembly and removal of spindle drive coupling added. Chapter 14.4.3.1. Procedure for the calibration of the PMT module updated. Chapter 15.3.1.3. Backup of “LiaisonXL.coo” file and requalification of instrument after pipettor replacement added. Chapter 15.3.12. Picture with better explanation of Y-motor removal added.

15

Chapter 15.3.21. Procedures for assembly and removal of slide bearings of sample probe added. Chapter 15.3.22. Procedures for assembly and removal of slide bearings of OLV probe added. Chapter 15.3.23. Procedures for assembly and removal of the sample probe adapter tube added.

16

Chapter 16.3.5. Procedures for assembly and removal of rack guides added. Chapter 16.3.6. Procedures for assembly and removal of push push mechanism added. Chapter 17.3.3. Procedures for assembly and removal of stirrer and sliding bearings updated.

17

Chapter 17.3.6.4, 17.3.6.6, 17.3.6.8. Assembly of reagent area temperature sensors updated. Chapter 17.5.1.1. Procedure for check of the reagent area stirring updated.

19

TOC - II

Chapter 19.4.2 and 19.4.3.3. A note regarding the need to wet the syringe tip before mounting it has been added.


Description of Changes Chapter 21.2. Information about instruments without cabinet drawers removed. Chapter 21.3.8. Procedures for assembly and removal of presence sensors DI Water and Wash Buffer containers added.

21

Chapter 21.3.9. Procedures for assembly and removal of sensor solid waste case added. Chapter 21.4.1.4. Functional check of presence sensors DI Water and Wash Buffer containers added. Chapter 21.7. Direct drain configuration updated (new rules with 10m tubings added). Chapter 22.3.1. Chapter updated after the introduction of 3-layer tubes. Chapter 22.3.1.3. Layout of the connections between WPRP tubes and washer module updated (see Figure 22.3-13). Chapter 22.3.1.3. Layout of the connections between aspiration tubings and WAP updated (see Figure 22.3-20).

22

Chapter 22.3.6.3, 22.3.7, 22.3.10 and 22.3.14. Removal and assembly of DI soak line, Wash Buffer soak line, cleaning solution soak line and left waste out tubing updated with the introduction of coils. Chapter 22.3.18. Procedures for assembly and removal of reagent module tube added. Chapter 22.3.19. Procedures for assembly and removal of incubator overflow tube added. Chapter 22.3.20. Procedures for assembly and removal of debubbler filter added.

24

Chapter 24.2.1.2. Configuration of “new” hand held barcode reader added. Chapter 24.5.1.3. Test Statistics description added. Chapter 25.2. Reference to lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass added. Chapter 25.3.2. Additional supply with PN I0050LAS updated with the introduction of the lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass. Chapters 25.3.3.10, 25.4.3, 25.8.1.3 and 25.8.3.10. Caution related to the removal of safety repairs before using Teacher Software added. Chapters 25.3.3.10, 25.4.3 and 25.8.3.10. Backup of “LiaisonXL.coo” file added.

25

Chapter 25.4.2.2. Positioning in case of interface with LIAISON® XLine added. Chapter 25.4.6. Integration test updated. Chapter 25.7.6. Procedures for assembly and removal of LAS left side repair added. Chapter 25.7.7. Procedures for assembly and removal of lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass added. Chapter 25.8.3.3. Unpacking of LIAISON®XL LAS pipettor added. Chapter 25.8.3.5. Packing of the dismounted LIAISON®XL pipettor added. Chapter 25.8.3.6. System modification for upgrade from LIAISON®XL to


TOC - III

Description of Changes LIAISON®XL LAS updated. Chapter 26.1. Installation Qualification check list updated. Chapter 26.4. 6-Months Maintenance check list updated. Chapter 26.5. 12-Months Maintenance check list updated.

26

Chapter 26.6. FSE Monthly Visit check list (for high volume customers) added. Chapter 26.7. LIAISON®XL LAS Integration check list updated. Chapter 26.8. LIAISON®XL LAS Upgrade check list updated.

TOC - IV

27

Chapter 27.2. Hand held barcode reader (PN A0179) added.

28

Chapter 28.1.3. Accessory packing list updated with the introduction of the lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass.

29

Chapter 29.6. Allowed ranges for parameters 10b, 10c, 10d updated.


Table of Contents

Table of Contents Table of Contents ............................................................................................ I 1

Introduction ..................................................................................... 1-1

1.1

Intended use ....................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2

Typographical Conventions .............................................................................. 1-2

1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4

Display of Warnings and Notes .................................................................................................. 1-2 Used Warning Symbols.............................................................................................................. 1-3 Other Symbols ........................................................................................................................... 1-4 Special Fonts ............................................................................................................................. 1-6

1.3

LIAISON® XL Warranty ....................................................................................... 1-7

1.4

Hazard Instructions ............................................................................................ 1-8

1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.4.10

General Safety ........................................................................................................................... 1-8 Electrical Hazards .................................................................................................................... 1-10 Physical Hazards ..................................................................................................................... 1-13 Mechanical Hazards................................................................................................................. 1-14 Biological Hazards ................................................................................................................... 1-15 Chemical hazards .................................................................................................................... 1-17 Spill clean-up ............................................................................................................................ 1-17 Maintenance Work ................................................................................................................... 1-17 Disposal and Disinfection ......................................................................................................... 1-20 Caution on electromagnetic wave interference ........................................................................ 1-22

1.5

Evaluation of Residual risk for Field Service Engineer ................................ 1-24

1.6

Instrument Labeling and Safety Labels ......................................................... 1-25

1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4

Pipettor Labels ......................................................................................................................... 1-25 Disconnect Main Power ........................................................................................................... 1-26 COM Port Labels...................................................................................................................... 1-27 “Do not open cover” Label........................................................................................................ 1-27

2

Overview .......................................................................................... 2-1

2.1

System Overview ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5

2.2

Overview .................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Overview Cabinet ....................................................................................................................... 2-3 System Modules......................................................................................................................... 2-4 Electrical Connections................................................................................................................ 2-5 LIAISON® XL LAS System ......................................................................................................... 2-6

Liquid Connections ............................................................................................ 2-7


TOC - I

Table of Contents

2.3

Electric Circuit Overview ................................................................................... 2-8

2.4

Grounding scheme .......................................................................................... 2-10

3

LIAISON®XL Installation ................................................................. 3-1

3.1

Safety .................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2

Installation Preparation ..................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3

3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8

3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9

Standard supply with PN I0050 .................................................................................................. 3-2 Additional Material required for Installation ................................................................................ 3-3 Required tools ............................................................................................................................ 3-4

Installation Qualification.................................................................................... 3-4 Visual inspection before unpacking ........................................................................................... 3-4 Unpacking, visual inspection and inventory ............................................................................... 3-4 Manual Inspection .................................................................................................................... 3-11 System set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3-12 Sample rack configuration........................................................................................................ 3-15 Control rack configuration ........................................................................................................ 3-20 Pipettor and rack teaching ....................................................................................................... 3-21 Fluidic Setup ............................................................................................................................ 3-21

Operation Qualification ................................................................................... 3-22 Reagent Bay ............................................................................................................................ 3-22 Sample Bay .............................................................................................................................. 3-22 Starter Reagent Bay................................................................................................................. 3-23 Incubator .................................................................................................................................. 3-23 Pipettor ..................................................................................................................................... 3-23 Back-up of system configuration .............................................................................................. 3-24 System Verification .................................................................................................................. 3-24 Final Test ................................................................................................................................. 3-24 Printout customization .............................................................................................................. 3-26

4

LIAISON®XL Removal ..................................................................... 4-1

4.1

Safety .................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2

Preparation of sodium hypochlorite solution .................................................. 4-2

4.3

Data deleting and Decontamination ................................................................. 4-3

4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5

4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 TOC - II

Decontamination of Liquid Waste Containers ............................................................................ 4-3 Removal of cuvettes................................................................................................................... 4-4 Removal of other consumables and disposables ...................................................................... 4-4 Cleaning procedures .................................................................................................................. 4-5 Confirm decontamination ........................................................................................................... 4-5

Packaging of the System ................................................................................... 4-6 Preparation ................................................................................................................................. 4-6 Packing of the system .............................................................................................................. 4-12 Packing covers ......................................................................................................................... 4-22 Packing of Accessories ............................................................................................................ 4-42 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Table of Contents

5

Maintenance Schedule ................................................................... 5-1

5.1

Safety .................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.2

6-Months and 12-Months Maintenance ............................................................ 5-2

5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.15

5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5

5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4

List of required material.............................................................................................................. 5-2 System Cleaning ........................................................................................................................ 5-2 PC & Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 5-2 Preparation for maintenance of internal modules ...................................................................... 5-3 Maintenance of the incubator belt .............................................................................................. 5-3 Maintenance of the inner parts .................................................................................................. 5-8 Maintenance of the washer module ......................................................................................... 5-11 Maintenance of the pumps and tubings ................................................................................... 5-11 Maintenance of the cabinet (waste and tank areas) ................................................................ 5-12 Maintenance of the reagent module ........................................................................................ 5-12 Maintenance of the pipettor ..................................................................................................... 5-13 Cleaning of other surfaces ....................................................................................................... 5-14 System Restore & Periodic Recalibrations .............................................................................. 5-14 Backup of system configuration ............................................................................................... 5-15 Requalification test ................................................................................................................... 5-15

Instrument re-qualification after service visit ................................................ 5-16 Background and rationales ...................................................................................................... 5-16 Service interventions ................................................................................................................ 5-16

Cleanings and lubrications during service visits .......................................... 5-17 Inspection of the reader lid and spindle assemblies, cleaning activities .................................. 5-17 Inspection of the reader inner mechanism, cleaning activities ................................................ 5-19 Lubrication of downholder and metal sheets ........................................................................... 5-19 Instrument recovery and test ................................................................................................... 5-19 Activities traceability on SGAT (only for subsidiaries) ............................................................. 5-19

Maintenance procedure for high throughput customers.............................. 5-20 500-1000 results/day................................................................................................................ 5-20 Over 1000 results/day .............................................................................................................. 5-21 Procedures ............................................................................................................................... 5-21 Traceability ............................................................................................................................... 5-23

6

Troubleshooting and Error Messages .......................................... 6-1

6.1

Error Definitions ................................................................................................. 6-2

6.1.1 6.1.2

Error Message structure............................................................................................................. 6-2 Error Classification / Severity ..................................................................................................... 6-4

6.2

Device Driver Definition ..................................................................................... 6-5

6.3

Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor (02h) ....................................................... 6-8

6.3.1

Virtual Device Driver Monitor: Error List..................................................................................... 6-8

6.4

Flashlight Virtual Device Driver (04h; 4dec) .................................................. 6-11

6.5

Virtual Device Driver Service (05h; 5dec) ...................................................... 6-13


TOC - III

Table of Contents 6.5.1

6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6 6.6.7 6.6.8 6.6.9 6.6.10 6.6.11 6.6.12

Virtual Device Driver Service: Error List................................................................................... 6-13

Command Codes for Service Software .......................................................... 6-17 Command Codes Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor ........................................................... 6-17 Command Codes Cuvette Supply ............................................................................................ 6-18 Command Codes Incubator ..................................................................................................... 6-19 Command Codes Washer ........................................................................................................ 6-20 Command Codes Reader ........................................................................................................ 6-21 Command Codes Sample Module ........................................................................................... 6-23 Command Codes Reagent Module .......................................................................................... 6-24 Command Codes Front Module ............................................................................................... 6-25 Command Codes Cabinet Module ........................................................................................... 6-26 Command Codes Starter Reagent Pump ................................................................................ 6-27 Command Codes WDP Pump ................................................................................................. 6-28 Command Codes WAP and WPRP Pump............................................................................... 6-29

7

Service Software ............................................................................. 7-1

7.1

Basic Functions ................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 7.1.8 7.1.9

7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2

7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7

7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8

7.5 TOC - IV

General Statement ..................................................................................................................... 7-1 Before Starting the Service Software ......................................................................................... 7-1 General Buttons ......................................................................................................................... 7-2 Log Files ..................................................................................................................................... 7-3 "Jump to" Drop Down Field ........................................................................................................ 7-3 Common Control ........................................................................................................................ 7-4 Device is Busy Window .............................................................................................................. 7-6 Use of the Service Software ...................................................................................................... 7-7 About Service Software (Version) .............................................................................................. 7-7

Main Menu........................................................................................................... 7-8 Hex View Parameter ................................................................................................................ 7-10 Port Status ............................................................................................................................... 7-11

Incubator ........................................................................................................... 7-12 Main and Move Tab ................................................................................................................. 7-12 Main and Sensor Tab ............................................................................................................... 7-15 Main and Temperature Tab...................................................................................................... 7-17 Main and Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................... 7-18 Parameter Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7-22 Teach Tab ................................................................................................................................ 7-26 Setting of standard sequences ................................................................................................ 7-29

Front and Loading Units .................................................................................. 7-31 Main and Reagent Temperature Tab ....................................................................................... 7-31 Main and Miscellaneous Tab ................................................................................................... 7-33 Main and Front cover ............................................................................................................... 7-35 Reagent Tab ............................................................................................................................ 7-37 Sample Tab .............................................................................................................................. 7-39 Start Reagent A and B Tab ...................................................................................................... 7-43 Cabinet Tab .............................................................................................................................. 7-45 Parameter Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7-48

Reader ............................................................................................................... 7-49 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Table of Contents 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6

7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.6 7.6.7 7.6.8

Main and Measure Tab ............................................................................................................ 7-49 Sequence Tab .......................................................................................................................... 7-52 Sensor Tab ............................................................................................................................... 7-54 Main and Prime Tab ................................................................................................................. 7-56 Parameter Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7-58 Teach Tab ................................................................................................................................ 7-59

Pipettor ............................................................................................................. 7-61 Main and Pump Tab ................................................................................................................. 7-61 Main and Misc Tab ................................................................................................................... 7-64 Main and Sensor Tab ............................................................................................................... 7-66 Move Tab ................................................................................................................................. 7-68 LLD Right Arm Tab .................................................................................................................. 7-71 LLD Left Arm Tab ..................................................................................................................... 7-73 Parameter Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7-76 Parameter Tab (Diluter Pump ID 0x91) ................................................................................... 7-77

7.7

System .............................................................................................................. 7-79

7.8

Washer .............................................................................................................. 7-82

7.8.1 7.8.2 7.8.3 7.8.4

Main and Liquid Tab................................................................................................................. 7-82 Main and Sensor Tab ............................................................................................................... 7-85 Main and Move Tab ................................................................................................................. 7-87 Parameter Tab ......................................................................................................................... 7-89

8

Teaching of Pipettor ....................................................................... 8-1

8.1

General Statement ............................................................................................. 8-1

8.2

Safety .................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.3

Overview ............................................................................................................. 8-2

8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3

Overview Teacher Menu ............................................................................................................ 8-2 Teaching sequence .................................................................................................................... 8-3 Description of teach window and key board buttons ................................................................. 8-4

8.4

Log In .................................................................................................................. 8-6

8.5

Sample Probe Reference ................................................................................... 8-7

8.5.1

8.6 8.6.1

8.7 8.7.1

8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2

8.9

Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................... 8-7

Reagent Probe Reference.................................................................................. 8-8 Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................... 8-8

DiTi Module ......................................................................................................... 8-9 Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................... 8-9

Eject Position ................................................................................................... 8-11 Teaching Sequence of X-Y-ZMax .............................................................................................. 8-11 Teaching Sequence of ZStart Position ....................................................................................... 8-12

Sample Module ................................................................................................. 8-13


TOC - V

Table of Contents 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3

8.10 8.10.1

8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2

8.12 8.12.1

8.13 8.13.1

8.14 8.14.1

8.15 8.15.1 8.15.2

8.16 8.16.1

Teaching Preparation ............................................................................................................... 8-13 Teaching Sequence X – Y ....................................................................................................... 8-13 Teaching Sequence ZMax ......................................................................................................... 8-15

Dispensation Position for Sample Probe ....................................................... 8-16 Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................. 8-16

Wash and Waste Position of Reagent Probe ................................................. 8-17 Teaching Sequence Wash Position ......................................................................................... 8-17 Teaching Sequence Wash Position ......................................................................................... 8-19

Dispensation Positions for Reagent Probe.................................................... 8-21 Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................. 8-21

Ancillary Reagent ............................................................................................. 8-22 Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................. 8-22

Reagent Module ............................................................................................... 8-23 Teaching Sequence ................................................................................................................. 8-23

Rack Selection.................................................................................................. 8-25 Rack Window ........................................................................................................................... 8-25 Sample Rack Teaching ............................................................................................................ 8-27

Transfer of Coordinates .................................................................................. 8-35 Transfer Sequence................................................................................................................... 8-35

9

Covers .............................................................................................. 9-1

9.1

Safety .................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.2

Overview ............................................................................................................. 9-2

9.3

Replacements and Repair ................................................................................. 9-5

9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9 9.3.10 9.3.11 9.3.12 9.3.13 9.3.14

9.4

Replacement left Blind Cover .................................................................................................... 9-5 Replacement right Blind Cover .................................................................................................. 9-6 Replacement left Side Cover ..................................................................................................... 9-7 Replacement right Side Cover ................................................................................................... 9-8 Left Top Cover (old design)........................................................................................................ 9-9 Replacement left Top Cover (new design)............................................................................... 9-12 Replacement of Monitor ........................................................................................................... 9-15 Replacement of right Top Cover .............................................................................................. 9-18 Replacement rear Slotted Cover .............................................................................................. 9-23 Replacement Back Upper and Lower Covers (optional).......................................................... 9-24 Replacement Cabinet Cover .................................................................................................... 9-27 Replacement Extensible Board ................................................................................................ 9-30 Visual Alarm (optional) ............................................................................................................. 9-31 Mounting Printer Support (optional) ......................................................................................... 9-32

Cover alignment ............................................................................................... 9-42

9.4.1 9.4.2

Overview .................................................................................................................................. 9-42 Adjusting side covers ............................................................................................................... 9-46

TOC - VI


Table of Contents 9.4.3 9.4.4

Adjusting blind covers .............................................................................................................. 9-47 Adjusting Cabinet Doors .......................................................................................................... 9-52

10

Cuvette Loading Assemblies ....................................................... 10-1

10.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 10-2

10.3

Replacements and Repair ............................................................................... 10-3

10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6

10.4

Replacement of Sorter ............................................................................................................. 10-3 Replacement Sorter Presence Sensor .................................................................................... 10-6 Replacement Auger and funnel ............................................................................................... 10-8 Replacement Motor of Auger ................................................................................................. 10-14 Replacement of Starter Heating Tubes.................................................................................. 10-16 Replacement Cuvette Supply CU PCB .................................................................................. 10-19

Adjustment and Calibration .......................................................................... 10-21

10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 10.4.5

10.5

Adjustment of distance Sorter Pot to Incubator Chute........................................................... 10-21 Levelling of the sorter pot ....................................................................................................... 10-23 Calibration of sorter vibration (parameter #30) ...................................................................... 10-24 Calibration of Sorter Cuvette Presence Sensors ................................................................... 10-27 Check Temperature of Starter Heating Tubes ....................................................................... 10-27

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.1

10.6

Cuvette Supply (11h, 17d): Error List..................................................................................... 10-28

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 10-37

10.6.1

Cuvette Supply CU PCB ........................................................................................................ 10-37

11

Incubator Module .......................................................................... 11-1

11.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 11-1

11.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 11-2

11.2.1 11.2.2

11.3

Overview Incubator .................................................................................................................. 11-2 Sensor Overview at Incubator .................................................................................................. 11-3


11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 11.3.5 11.3.6 11.3.7 11.3.8 11.3.9 11.3.10 11.3.11 11.3.12

Replacement of Incubator Lid .................................................................................................. 11-4 Replacement Incubator Module ............................................................................................... 11-5 Replacement of Incubator Isolation Foam ............................................................................. 11-11 Replacement of the Belt, Incubator Transport ....................................................................... 11-13 Replacement Incubator Belt Motor ........................................................................................ 11-23 Replacement Sensor, Cuvette Presence Transport .............................................................. 11-25 Replacement Init Belt Light barrier......................................................................................... 11-27 Replacement Motor, Cuvette Supply ..................................................................................... 11-29 Replacement Init Sensor, Cuvette Supply Light barrier ......................................................... 11-31 Replacement Chute Upper or Lower Presence Sensors ....................................................... 11-32 Replacement Temperature Sensor Incubator ........................................................................ 11-33 Replacement Motor Pusher I-W ............................................................................................. 11-34


TOC - VII

Table of Contents 11.3.13 11.3.14 11.3.15 11.3.16 11.3.17 11.3.18 11.3.19 11.3.20 11.3.21 11.3.22 11.3.23 11.3.24 11.3.25 11.3.26

11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3

11.5 11.5.1 11.5.2

11.6 11.6.1

11.7 11.7.1 11.7.2

Replacement of Pusher I/W Home, Light barrier ................................................................... 11-37 Replacement of Motor Pusher W-I......................................................................................... 11-38 Replacement of Pusher W-I Home, Light barrier ................................................................... 11-41 Replacement Incubator CU PCB ........................................................................................... 11-42 Replacement Incubator Distributor CU .................................................................................. 11-43 Replacement Pusher I-W (Bearing Block I-W)....................................................................... 11-44 Replacement Gates I-W ......................................................................................................... 11-45 Replacement Lower Mechanism I-W ..................................................................................... 11-46 Replacement Pusher W-I (Bearing Block W-I)....................................................................... 11-50 Replacement Gates W-I ......................................................................................................... 11-51 Replacement Lower Mechanism W-I ..................................................................................... 11-53 Replacement Motor Cable Pusher W-I .................................................................................. 11-58 Replacement Chute Assembly ............................................................................................... 11-61 Replacement Cuvette Supply Assembly ................................................................................ 11-62

Check and Verification .................................................................................. 11-63 Calibration of Incubator Belt ................................................................................................... 11-63 Calibration of Cuvette Presence Sensors .............................................................................. 11-64 Teaching of the I-W pusher .................................................................................................... 11-65

Check and Verification .................................................................................. 11-71 Check Temperature ............................................................................................................... 11-71 Check Gates .......................................................................................................................... 11-72

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 11-74 Incubator (12h; 18dec): Error List .......................................................................................... 11-74

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 11-86 Incubator CU PCB.................................................................................................................. 11-86 Incubator Distributor PCB ...................................................................................................... 11-88

12

Disposable Tip Module ................................................................. 12-1

12.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 12-1

12.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 12-2

12.3


12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 12.3.5

12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2

Replacement of Disposable Tip Drawers................................................................................. 12-3 Replacement of Disposable Tip Module .................................................................................. 12-4 Replacement of Snap Lock ...................................................................................................... 12-8 Replacement of Drawer Separators....................................................................................... 12-10 Preliminary Steps ................................................................................................................... 12-10

Check and Adjustment .................................................................................. 12-12 Adjust Snap Lock Switch........................................................................................................ 12-12 Check Switch of Disposable Tip Drawers .............................................................................. 12-12

12.5


12.6


12.6.1

Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 12-13

TOC - VIII


Table of Contents

13

Washer Module.............................................................................. 13-1

13.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-2

13.2.1

13.3

Liquid Distribution Overview..................................................................................................... 13-3

Replacement and Repair ................................................................................. 13-4

13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.3.4 13.3.5 13.3.6 13.3.7

13.4

Replacement of Washer Module .............................................................................................. 13-4 Replacement of Washer Motor Lift .......................................................................................... 13-6 Replacement of Bearing at left Lift ......................................................................................... 13-10 Replacement of Bearings and/ or Init Sensor at right Lift ...................................................... 13-14 Replacement of Bubble Sensor ............................................................................................. 13-18 Replacement of Washer Guiding Bushings ........................................................................... 13-19 Replacement of Washer CU .................................................................................................. 13-22


13.4.1

13.5

Calibration of Washer............................................................................................................. 13-26


13.5.1

13.6

Washer (13h; 19dec): Error List ............................................................................................. 13-29


13.6.1

Washer CU PCB .................................................................................................................... 13-32

14

Reader Module .............................................................................. 14-1

14.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 14-1

14.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 14-2

14.2.1

14.3


Replacements and Repairs ............................................................................. 14-5

14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 14.3.4 14.3.5 14.3.6 14.3.7 14.3.8 14.3.9 14.3.10

14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3

14.5 14.5.1

Replacement of Reader Lid ..................................................................................................... 14-5 Replacement of Spindle Motor and Metal Plate ...................................................................... 14-9 Replacement of Spindle ......................................................................................................... 14-11 Replacement of Spindle Sensor Home .................................................................................. 14-13 Replacement of Reader Module ............................................................................................ 14-15 Replacement of Toothed Rack .............................................................................................. 14-18 Replacement of PMT Module ................................................................................................ 14-20 Replacement of Lift Motor and/ or Lift Sensor and/ or inner parts of Reader ........................ 14-24 Replacement of Reader CU PCB .......................................................................................... 14-33 Replacement of Spindle Drive Coupling ................................................................................ 14-38

Adjustment and Calibration .......................................................................... 14-40 Mechanical Adjustment of Spindle ......................................................................................... 14-40 Calibration of the Spindle Position ......................................................................................... 14-42 Calibrations of Reader Module .............................................................................................. 14-44

Check and Verification .................................................................................. 14-46 Temperature check Starter Reagent Tube ............................................................................ 14-46


TOC - IX

Table of Contents

14.6


14.6.1

14.7

Reader (14h; 20dec): Error List ............................................................................................. 14-47


14.7.1

Reader CU PCB ..................................................................................................................... 14-59

15

Pipettor........................................................................................... 15-1

15.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 15-1

15.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 15-2

15.2.1

15.3



15.3.1 15.3.2 15.3.3 15.3.4 15.3.5 15.3.6 15.3.7 15.3.8 15.3.9 15.3.10 15.3.11 15.3.12 15.3.13 15.3.14 15.3.15 15.3.16 15.3.17 15.3.18 15.3.19 15.3.20 15.3.21 15.3.22 15.3.23

15.4 15.4.1

15.5 15.5.1 15.5.2 15.5.3

15.6 15.6.1 15.6.2 15.6.3 15.6.4 15.6.5

TOC - X

Replacement of Pipettor........................................................................................................... 15-5 Replacement of Top Cover Supporter ................................................................................... 15-12 Replacement of Sample Probe .............................................................................................. 15-14 Replacement of OLV Probe ................................................................................................... 15-17 Replacement of Timing Belt X-Axis Sample Probe ............................................................... 15-27 Replacement of Timing Belt X-Axis OLV Probe .................................................................... 15-33 Replacement of X-Motor Right Side ...................................................................................... 15-40 Replacement of X-Motor Left Side ......................................................................................... 15-41 Replacement of X-Home Sensor Left and Right Arm ............................................................ 15-42 Replacement of Y-Belt Sample Probe ................................................................................... 15-44 Replacement of Y-Belt OLV-Probe ........................................................................................ 15-46 Replacement of Y-Motor Sample Probe and OLV Probe ...................................................... 15-50 Replacement of Y-Home Sensor at Sample Probe ............................................................... 15-53 Replacement of Z-Motor at Sample Probe ............................................................................ 15-55 Replacement of Z-Home Sensor at Sample Probe ............................................................... 15-57 Replacement of Z-Motor OLV-Probe ..................................................................................... 15-59 Replacement of Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB at Sample Probe ......................................................... 15-61 Replacement of YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB at OLV-Probe .......................................................... 15-63 Replacement of X-Sledge PCB .............................................................................................. 15-66 Replacement of Pip CU PCB ................................................................................................. 15-68 Replacement of Slide Bearings of Sample Probe .................................................................. 15-69 Replacement of Z Rod and Bearings of OLV Probe .............................................................. 15-70 Replacement of the Sample Probe Adapter Tube ................................................................. 15-72

Adjustment and Calibration .......................................................................... 15-76 Adjustment of toothed belt tension......................................................................................... 15-76

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 15-81 Air pipettor Pump (90h; 144dec): Error List ........................................................................... 15-81 Error Messages: OLV (FChex; 252dec)................................................................................. 15-84 Pipettor (FDh; 253dec): General Error List ............................................................................ 15-85

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 15-91 Overview Pipettor PCBs Connections (Among Each Other) ................................................. 15-91 PIP CU PCB ........................................................................................................................... 15-92 X-Sledge 2 PCB ..................................................................................................................... 15-93 OLV-Probe: Y-Z-Sledge-R CU PCB ...................................................................................... 15-94 Sample Pipettor: Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB .................................................................................... 15-95 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02


ZS PIP CU PCB ..................................................................................................................... 15-96

16

Sample Module .............................................................................. 16-1

16.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 16-1

16.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 16-2

16.3


16.3.1 16.3.2 16.3.3 16.3.4 16.3.5 16.3.6

16.4

Replacement of Sample Module .............................................................................................. 16-3 Replacement of Ambient Temperature Sensor ....................................................................... 16-6 Replacement of Barcode Scanner ........................................................................................... 16-7 Replacement Sample Module CU PCB ................................................................................. 16-10 Replacement of Rack Guides ................................................................................................ 16-12 Replacement of Push Push Mechanism ................................................................................ 16-14


16.4.1

16.5

Calibration of Sample Module ................................................................................................ 16-16


16.5.1

16.6

Sample Module (16h; 22dec): Error List ................................................................................ 16-18


16.6.1

Sample Module CU PCB........................................................................................................ 16-24

17

Reagent Module ............................................................................ 17-1

17.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 17-1

17.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 17-2

17.3

Replacement and Repair ................................................................................. 17-3

17.3.1 17.3.2 17.3.3 17.3.4 17.3.5 17.3.6 17.3.7 17.3.8 17.3.9 17.3.10

17.4 17.4.1

17.5 17.5.1

17.6

Replacement of Reagent Module ............................................................................................ 17-3 Replacement of Stirrer Motor ................................................................................................... 17-8 Replacement of Stirrer and Sliding Bearings ......................................................................... 17-11 Replacement of Fan Set ........................................................................................................ 17-16 Replacement of Cooling Module ............................................................................................ 17-18 Replacement of Temperature Sensors .................................................................................. 17-21 Replace Reagent Module CU PCB ........................................................................................ 17-29 Replacement of 13-Fold-RFID Antenna................................................................................. 17-32 Replacement of Quad RFID Antenna .................................................................................... 17-34 Replacement of Micro Switch Bay ......................................................................................... 17-35

Adjustment and Calibration .......................................................................... 17-38 Calibration of Reagent Module .............................................................................................. 17-38

Check and Verification .................................................................................. 17-38 Check Reagent Module.......................................................................................................... 17-38



TOC - XI


17.7 17.7.1 17.7.2 17.7.3

Reagent Module (17h, 23dec): Error List ............................................................................... 17-40 RFID Module (40h; 64dec): Error List .................................................................................... 17-43

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 17-48 Reagent Module CU PCB ...................................................................................................... 17-48 13-FOLD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB ............................................................................................ 17-50 QUAD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB ................................................................................................ 17-50

18

Starter Reagent Module ................................................................ 18-1

18.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 18-1

18.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 18-2

18.2.1

18.3 18.3.1 18.3.2 18.3.3 18.3.4

18.4 18.4.1

18.5 18.5.1 18.5.2

18.6 18.6.1


Replacement and Repairs ............................................................................... 18-4 Replacement of Starter Reagent Module................................................................................. 18-4 Replacement of Valves, Starter Reagent................................................................................. 18-7 Replacement of Starter Bubble Sensor and Tubing ................................................................ 18-9 RFID Starter CU PCB ............................................................................................................ 18-11

Adjustment and Calibration .......................................................................... 18-13 Calibrations of Starter Reagent Module ................................................................................. 18-13

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 18-14 Starter Reagent Module (45; 46h): Error List ......................................................................... 18-14 RFID Module (40h; 64dec): Error List .................................................................................... 18-20

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 18-21 RFID Starter CU PCB ............................................................................................................ 18-21

19

Pumps ............................................................................................ 19-1

19.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 19-1

19.2

Pumps Overview .............................................................................................. 19-2

19.3

Starter Pump..................................................................................................... 19-4

19.3.1 19.3.2 19.3.3 19.3.4 19.3.5 19.3.6 19.3.7

19.4 19.4.1 19.4.2 19.4.3 TOC - XII

Overview .................................................................................................................................. 19-4 Replacement of Aspiration Starter Pump 1.............................................................................. 19-5 Replacement Aspiration Starter Pump 2.................................................................................. 19-8 Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 19-10 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-10 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 19-10 Electric Connections, Switches and Signals .......................................................................... 19-13

Syringe Reagent Pump (SRP) ....................................................................... 19-16 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-16 Replacement of SRP.............................................................................................................. 19-17 Replacement of Syringe of SRP ............................................................................................ 19-20 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Table of Contents 19.4.4 19.4.5 19.4.6 19.4.7

19.5 19.5.1 19.5.2 19.5.3 19.5.4 19.5.5 19.5.6

19.6 19.6.1 19.6.2 19.6.3 19.6.4 19.6.5 19.6.6

19.7 19.7.1 19.7.2 19.7.3 19.7.4 19.7.5 19.7.6

19.8 19.8.1 19.8.2 19.8.3

19.9 19.9.1 19.9.2 19.9.3

19.10

Replacement of Valve of SRP ............................................................................................... 19-23 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-25 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 19-26 Electric Connections, Switches and Signals .......................................................................... 19-30

Washer Dispense Pump (WDP)..................................................................... 19-31 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-31 Replacement of WDP............................................................................................................. 19-32 Calibration .............................................................................................................................. 19-34 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-34 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 19-35 Electric Connections, Switches and Signals .......................................................................... 19-37

Wash Probe Rinsing Pump (WPRP) ............................................................. 19-40 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-40 Replacement of WPRP .......................................................................................................... 19-41 Replacement of WPRP Tubes ............................................................................................... 19-44 Calibration of WPRP or WAP Pumps .................................................................................... 19-46 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-47 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 19-48

Wash Aspiration Pump (WAP) ...................................................................... 19-51 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-51 Replacement of WAP ............................................................................................................. 19-52 Replacement of WAP Tubes .................................................................................................. 19-56 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-58 Calibration of WAP Pump ...................................................................................................... 19-58 Troubleshooting: Peristaltic Pump: Error List......................................................................... 19-58

Wash Probe Aspiration Pump (WPAP) ......................................................... 19-59 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-59 Replacement of WPAP .......................................................................................................... 19-61 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-63

Reagent Probe Rinsing Pump (PRP) ............................................................ 19-64 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-64 Replacement of PRP.............................................................................................................. 19-66 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-67

Liquid Waste Pump (LWP)............................................................................. 19-68

19.10.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-68 19.10.2 Replacement of LWP ............................................................................................................. 19-70 19.10.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-71

19.11

Washer Distribution Valve Block (WDVB) .................................................... 19-72

19.11.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 19-72 19.11.2 Replacement of WDVB .......................................................................................................... 19-73 19.11.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 19-76

20

Front Module ................................................................................. 20-1

20.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 20-1


TOC - XIII

Table of Contents

20.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 20-2

20.3


20.3.1 20.3.2 20.3.3 20.3.4 20.3.5 20.3.6 20.3.7 20.3.8 20.3.9 20.3.10

20.4 20.4.1

20.5 20.5.1

20.6 20.6.1 20.6.2 20.6.3 20.6.4

Replacement of Front Module .................................................................................................. 20-3 Replacement of Front Cover CU PCB ..................................................................................... 20-7 Replacement of LED Display Reagent PCB ............................................................................ 20-9 Replacement of LED Display Diti PCB .................................................................................. 20-10 Replacement of LED Display Starter PCB ............................................................................. 20-11 Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Cuvette Reservoir .......................................................... 20-12 Replacement of Top Cover Flap Sensor................................................................................ 20-13 Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Sample Module .............................................................. 20-14 Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Reagent Module............................................................. 20-16 Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Starter Reagent Module ................................................. 20-18

Check and Verification .................................................................................. 20-20 Function check Front Module ................................................................................................. 20-20

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 20-21 Front Cover CU (20h, 32dec): Error List ................................................................................ 20-21

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 20-23 Front Cover CU PCB.............................................................................................................. 20-23 LED Display Reagent PCB .................................................................................................... 20-24 LED Display Diti PCB ............................................................................................................. 20-25 LED Display Starter PCB ....................................................................................................... 20-26

21

Cabinet Module ............................................................................. 21-1

21.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 21-1

21.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 21-2

21.2.1

21.3 21.3.1 21.3.2 21.3.3 21.3.4 21.3.5 21.3.6 21.3.7 21.3.8 21.3.9

21.4 21.4.1 21.4.2

21.5 21.5.1

21.6 TOC - XIV


Replacements and Repair ............................................................................... 21-4 Replacement of Cleaning and Waste Valves........................................................................... 21-4 Replacement Cabinet CU PCB ................................................................................................ 21-8 Replacement Level Sensor DI Water..................................................................................... 21-10 Replacement Level Sensor Wash Solution............................................................................ 21-12 Replacement Level Sensor Left and Right Waste ................................................................. 21-14 Replacement Left Drawer ...................................................................................................... 21-18 Replacement Right Drawer .................................................................................................... 21-20 Replacement Presence Sensor Di Water and Wash Buffer Container ................................. 21-22 Replacement of Solid Waste Sensor ..................................................................................... 21-25

Adjustment and Calibration .......................................................................... 21-26 Calibration of Cabinet............................................................................................................. 21-26 Adjustment of drawer handles ............................................................................................... 21-28

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 21-30 Cabinet (22h; 34dec): Error List ............................................................................................. 21-30

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals ............................................... 21-36 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02


21.7

Cabinet CU PCB .................................................................................................................... 21-36

Direct Drain Configuration ............................................................................ 21-39

21.7.1 21.7.2 21.7.3

Preliminary steps.................................................................................................................... 21-39 Installation .............................................................................................................................. 21-39 Parameter setting ................................................................................................................... 21-42

22

Tubing ............................................................................................ 22-1

22.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 22-1

22.2

Overview ........................................................................................................... 22-1

22.2.1 22.2.2 22.2.3

22.3

Overview Tubing Set ................................................................................................................ 22-1 Overview other Tubings ........................................................................................................... 22-6 Liquid Distribution Overview..................................................................................................... 22-7

Replacement of Tubes ..................................................................................... 22-8

22.3.1 22.3.2 22.3.3 22.3.4 22.3.5 22.3.6 22.3.7 22.3.8 22.3.9 22.3.10 22.3.11 22.3.12 22.3.13 22.3.14 22.3.15 22.3.16 22.3.17 22.3.18 22.3.19 22.3.20

Replacement of Washer Module Tubes................................................................................... 22-8 Replacement of Waste Internal Tube .................................................................................... 22-22 Replacement of WDP - WDVB Tubing .................................................................................. 22-24 Replacement of WBCV - WDP TUBING ................................................................................ 22-25 Replacement of DeBubbler .................................................................................................... 22-27 Replacement of DI Soak Line, Tubing ................................................................................... 22-30 Replacement of Cleaning Solution Soak Line Tubing ........................................................... 22-32 Replacement of Supply Cleaning Bottle, Tubing ................................................................... 22-34 Replacement of DICV - PRP Tubing...................................................................................... 22-36 Replacement Wash Buffer Soak Line .................................................................................... 22-38 Replacement of Supply Wash Buffer Tubing ......................................................................... 22-40 Replacement of Supply Water Tubing ................................................................................... 22-41 Replacement of LWP - PIP RINSE STATION ....................................................................... 22-42 Replacement of Waste Out Tubings ...................................................................................... 22-44 Replacement of Aspirate Reagent - WAP.............................................................................. 22-46 Replacement of PRP - SRP Tubing ....................................................................................... 22-48 Replacement of Aspirate Starter Pump, Blue and Red Tubings............................................ 22-50 Replacement of Reagent Module Tube ................................................................................. 22-52 Replacement of Incubator Overflow Tube ............................................................................. 22-54 Replacement of Filter ............................................................................................................. 22-55

23

Electrical Components ................................................................. 23-1

23.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 23-1

23.2

Replacement ..................................................................................................... 23-2

23.2.1 23.2.2 23.2.3 23.2.4

23.3 23.3.1

23.4

Replacement of COP XL PCB ................................................................................................. 23-2 Replacement of Main Supply Unit ............................................................................................ 23-6 Replacement of Fuses of Main Switch................................................................................... 23-13 Replacement USB HUB PCB ................................................................................................ 23-15

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 23-16 COP (00h): Error List ............................................................................................................. 23-16



TOC - XV


Master COP PCB ................................................................................................................... 23-22 Overview USB HUB PCB ....................................................................................................... 23-25

24

Software and Firmware Topics .................................................... 24-1

24.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 24-1

24.2

LIAISON®XL PC System................................................................................... 24-2

24.2.1 24.2.2 24.2.3 24.2.4

24.3 24.3.1 24.3.2 24.3.3 24.3.4

24.4 24.4.1 24.4.2 24.4.3 24.4.4

24.5 24.5.1 24.5.2 24.5.3 24.5.4

24.6 24.6.1 24.6.2 24.6.3

24.7 24.7.1 24.7.2 24.7.3

24.8 24.8.1 24.8.2 24.8.3 24.8.4

Handheld Barcode Reader configuration ................................................................................. 24-3 24-6 Touchscreen calibration ........................................................................................................... 24-6 Keyboard and mouse remote detection ................................................................................... 24-8

LIAISON®XL Software .................................................................................... 24-11 Software Packages ................................................................................................................ 24-11 Software and Firmware Installation/ Update .......................................................................... 24-12 Software structure .................................................................................................................. 24-14 Files and information required to perform troubleshooting activities ..................................... 24-17

LIAISON®XL Antivirus .................................................................................... 24-19 Antivirus Installation ............................................................................................................... 24-19 Antivirus Update ..................................................................................................................... 24-19 Antivirus functioning and Virus detection ............................................................................... 24-19 Antivirus management ........................................................................................................... 24-21

FSE Functionalities ........................................................................................ 24-22 Main UI FSE Buttons.............................................................................................................. 24-22 FSE Editable Parameters....................................................................................................... 24-30 Printout Report Customization ............................................................................................... 24-36 Readable Access Rights File ................................................................................................. 24-38

LIS Connection ............................................................................................... 24-39 LIS Configuration ................................................................................................................... 24-40 Connection Scheme ............................................................................................................... 24-44 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 24-45

Bomgar ........................................................................................................... 24-46 Bomgar setup ......................................................................................................................... 24-46 Correct usage of Bomgar and restrictions ............................................................................. 24-46 Traceability ............................................................................................................................. 24-46

Acronis® .......................................................................................................... 24-47 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 24-47 BIOS setting ........................................................................................................................... 24-47 Backup creation ..................................................................................................................... 24-48 Backup recovery .................................................................................................................... 24-51

25

LIAISON®XL LAS ........................................................................... 25-1

25.1

Safety ................................................................................................................ 25-1

TOC - XVI


Table of Contents

25.2 25.2.1 25.2.2 25.2.3

25.3 25.3.1 25.3.2 25.3.3 25.3.4

25.4 25.4.1 25.4.2 25.4.3 25.4.4 25.4.5 25.4.6

25.5 25.5.1 25.5.2 25.5.3 25.5.4

LIAISON®XL LAS Overview ............................................................................. 25-2 Liquid connections ................................................................................................................... 25-6 Electric circuit overview ............................................................................................................ 25-6 Grounding scheme ................................................................................................................... 25-6

LIAISON®XL LAS installation .......................................................................... 25-7 Safety ....................................................................................................................................... 25-7 Additional supply with PN I0050LAS........................................................................................ 25-7 LAS Installation Qualification ................................................................................................... 25-8 LAS Operational Qualification .................................................................................................. 25-9

LIAISON®XL LAS Integration......................................................................... 25-10 Preliminary steps.................................................................................................................... 25-10 System positioning and levelling ............................................................................................ 25-11 Teaching of LAS position ....................................................................................................... 25-14 LAS safety repair installation ................................................................................................. 25-15 Instrument connection ............................................................................................................ 25-16 Integration test ....................................................................................................................... 25-16

LIAISON®XL LAS Removal ............................................................................ 25-20 Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 25-20 Data deleting and Decontamination ....................................................................................... 25-20 Cover removal ........................................................................................................................ 25-20 Packaging of the LAS system ................................................................................................ 25-21

25.6

LIAISON®XL LAS Maintenance ..................................................................... 25-21

25.7

LIAISON®XL LAS covers................................................................................ 25-22

25.7.1 25.7.2 25.7.3 25.7.4 25.7.5 25.7.6 25.7.7

25.8 25.8.1 25.8.2 25.8.3

Replacement of LAS Cover.................................................................................................... 25-22 Replacement LAS left Blind Cover......................................................................................... 25-22 Replacement LAS left Side Cover ......................................................................................... 25-23 Replacement of LAS safety repairs ....................................................................................... 25-25 Replacement of LAS lid.......................................................................................................... 25-26 Replacement of LAS left side repair ...................................................................................... 25-28 Replacement of lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass ................................................................... 25-29

Replacements and Repair ............................................................................. 25-32 Replacement of LAS Pipettor ................................................................................................. 25-32 Replacement of Top Cover Supporter ................................................................................... 25-39 Upgrade from LIAISON®XL to LIAISON®XL LAS .................................................................. 25-41

26

Service Check Lists ...................................................................... 26-1

26.1

LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Installation Qualification (IQ) ...................... 26-1

26.2

LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Operational Qualification (OQ) ................... 26-5

26.3

LIAISON®XL/ Liaison®XL LAS Uninstallation ................................................. 26-9

26.4

6-Months Maintenance .................................................................................. 26-12

26.5

12-Months Maintenance ................................................................................ 26-17


TOC - XVII

Table of Contents

26.6

FSE Monthly Visit (for high volume customers).......................................... 26-22

26.7

LIAISON®XL LAS Integration......................................................................... 26-26

26.8

LIAISON®XL LAS Upgrade............................................................................. 26-29

27

Technical Data ............................................................................... 27-1

27.1

Power Requirements ....................................................................................... 27-1

27.2

Laser of the Bar Code Scanners ..................................................................... 27-2

27.3

Computer and Connections ............................................................................ 27-4

27.4

Dimensions and Weight................................................................................... 27-4

27.5

System Clearance ............................................................................................ 27-5

27.6

Environmental Conditions............................................................................... 27-5

27.7

Noise Emission ................................................................................................ 27-6

27.8

Temperature Ranges ....................................................................................... 27-6

27.9

Water quality..................................................................................................... 27-6

27.10

Packaging ......................................................................................................... 27-7

27.10.1 System and Cabinet in one box ............................................................................................... 27-7

28

Appendix A .................................................................................... 28-1

28.1

Packing List ...................................................................................................... 28-1

28.1.1 28.1.2 28.1.3

System packing list .................................................................................................................. 28-1 Covering packing list ................................................................................................................ 28-1 Accessory packing list .............................................................................................................. 28-2

28.2

Consumable and Accessories ........................................................................ 28-4

28.3

Spare Parts ....................................................................................................... 28-4

29

Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol ........................................... 29-1

29.1

Purpose ............................................................................................................. 29-1

29.2

Related documents .......................................................................................... 29-1

29.3

Overview ........................................................................................................... 29-1

29.4

General Information and Specification .......................................................... 29-1

29.4.1 29.4.2 TOC - XVIII

Transfers initiated from LIAISON® XL ...................................................................................... 29-2 LIS initiated transfers ............................................................................................................... 29-3 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Table of Contents

29.5

Limitations ........................................................................................................ 29-3

29.6

Setup ................................................................................................................. 29-4

29.7

Implementation parameters “Complete Protocol” ........................................ 29-7

29.8

Parameters to satisfy ....................................................................................... 29-7

29.9

Logical Structure of the Message Level Protocol ......................................... 29-8

29.10

Incoming transmission examples................................................................. 29-10

29.10.1 Test orders ............................................................................................................................. 29-10 29.10.2 Test Results ........................................................................................................................... 29-14

29.11

Data Record Usage ........................................................................................ 29-17

29.11.1 29.11.2 29.11.3 29.11.4 29.11.5 29.11.6 29.11.7 29.11.8 29.11.9

29.12

Message Header Record ....................................................................................................... 29-17 Patient Information Record .................................................................................................... 29-18 Test Order Record ................................................................................................................. 29-21 Result Record ........................................................................................................................ 29-28 Result Comment Record ........................................................................................................ 29-32 Query Record ......................................................................................................................... 29-38 Message Terminator Record ................................................................................................. 29-40 Scientific Record .................................................................................................................... 29-41 Manufacturer Information Record .......................................................................................... 29-41

Tools for Troubleshooting............................................................................. 29-43

29.12.1 ASTM 1381 Layer .................................................................................................................. 29-43 29.12.2 ASTM 1394 Layer .................................................................................................................. 29-43

29.13

LIAISON®XL Specific LIS Protocol Implementation .................................... 29-43

29.13.1 Scope ..................................................................................................................................... 29-43 29.13.2 General remarks .................................................................................................................... 29-43 29.13.3 Known differences.................................................................................................................. 29-44

30

Glossary ......................................................................................... 30-1


TOC - XIX

1. Introduction

1 Introduction The purpose of this document is to provide all technical instructions to allow a correct installation, maintenance, repair and uninstallation of the LIAISON®XL and LIAISON®XL LAS Analyzers. This document is intended for Field Service Engineers (FSEs) for training and performing field service.

1.1

Intended use

The LIAISON®XL is a fully automated chemiluminescence analyzer performing the complete sample processing (sample pre-dilutions, sample and reagent dispensing, incubations, wash processes, cuvette transports) as well as the measurement and evaluation. The instrument is controlled via the Windows PC LIAISON®XL software. This software, which was specifically designed for this purpose, allows the user to process the pre-defined assays. The clear structure with intuitive user-guidance allows simple and quick operation of daily routine jobs. For LIAISON®XL LAS see what is reported below. This manual covers the following products: •

LIAISON®XL: Diagnostic System that measures chemiluminescence. It is intended strictly for professional In-vitro-Diagnostic use. It is to be used only with Chemiluminescence Immunoassays, authorized by DiaSorin S.p.A. for the LIAISON®XL Analyzer.

•

LIAISON®XL LAS: Modified version of the LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System, designed to allow compatibility with certain types of laboratory automation systems.

If not specifically indicated, all references to LIAISON®XL reported in this manual are intended also for LIAISON®XL LAS. Specific indications are given in case of procedures applying only to LIAISON®XL instruments. Procedures specifically related to LIAISON®XL LAS instruments are reported in Chapter 25.

Please check with DiaSorin S.p.A the compatibility between a laboratory automation system and LIAISON®XL LAS.

LIAISON®XL and LIAISON®XL LAS systems were developed and tested according to the regulations of the IvD Directive. They are intended strictly for professional In-vitroDiagnostic use. They are to be used only with Chemiluminescence Immunoassays, authorized by DiaSorin S.p.A. for the LIAISON®XL Analyzer. Any changes to the instrument that are not authorized by the manufacturer will lead to the loss of the conformity to the applicable regulations the manufacturer has declared. In this case, the customer is responsible for the fulfilment of the applicable regulations.


Page 1-1

1. Introduction

1.2

Typographical Conventions

The warnings, notes and symbols described hereafter are used in the current manual, on the instrument and on its packaging.

1.2.1

Display of Warnings and Notes

The signal word "Danger" and a relating symbol point to imminent dangers. The non-observance of a danger warning is imminent and will result in death or at least serious irreversible injuries. A damage of the system or an adverse effect on the system function cannot be excluded.

The signal word "Warning" and a relating symbol point to potential dangers. The non-observance of a warning is potential and can result in death or at least serious irreversible injuries. A damage of the system or an adverse effect on the system function cannot be excluded.

The signal word "Caution" and a relating symbol point to potential dangers/ problems. The non-observance of safety instructions can result in minor injuries. A damage of the system or an adverse effect on the system function cannot be excluded.

The signal word "Caution" points to potential problems. The non-observance of a safety instruction can result in damage of the system or an adverse effect on the system function.

The signal word "Note" points to potential problems. The non-observance of notes can result in an adverse effect on the system function (result deterioration).

Page 1-2


1. Introduction

1.2.2

Used Warning Symbols

Caution, risk of danger to person or damage to equipment! Consult instructions for use!

Biohazard!

Electrical hazard!

Laser hazard!

Caution, hot surface!

Crush hazard!

Cut injury hazard!

Automatic start-up!

Power Supply characteristics Weight label Do not put any weight on the flaps. Do not lean onto the flaps. Maximum supported load for extensible board.

Maximum supported load for the printer support


Page 1-3

1. Introduction

Water Tank

Wash Solution Tank

Cleaning Solution Tank

Liquid Waste Tank

Indication of the location of Main Switch / Emergency Stop button

Disconnect main power connector before servicing!

Close the drawer* * available on instruments with cabinet drawers Don’t step* * available on instruments with cabinet drawers Stumble hazard* * available on instruments with cabinet drawers Table 1.2-1: Warning Symbols

1.2.3

Other Symbols

Manufactured by

Date of manufacture

In Vitro Diagnostic

Page 1-4


1. Introduction Lot number

Expiration date

Temperature limitations

CE mark

ID number

Serial number

Canadian Standards Association

RoHS compliance

Consult instructions for use!

Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment In the European Union, electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with other household-type waste. It must be collected separately. Please observe the relevant legal regulations effective in your country.

Left side HIBC Barcode (according to secondary data structure of ANSI/HIBC 2.3 – 2009 standard) E.g.: +$+22100000020% Right side HIBC Barcode (according to primary data structure of ANSI/HIBC 2.3 – 2009 standard) E.g.:: +E125I005000

COM 2 Port Label COM 4 Port Label Table 1.2-2: Other Symbols


Page 1-5

1. Introduction

1.2.4

Special Fonts

Typology

Description

Example

LEDs and Signal Lamps

LEDs (light emitting diode) and Power LED, Error LED signal lamps are printed in special type.

Menu items and fields

Menu items and fields are printed in spaced and slanted type

File menu

Buttons

Buttons are printed in spaced type.

Open button.

Keys

Keys are printed in slanted type.

Press Enter

File examples

File examples are printed in typewriter font.

DRIVER=C:\SERVICE\D RIVERS

Table 1.2-3: Typology

Page 1-6


1. Introduction

1.3

LIAISON® XL Warranty

DiaSorin warrants instruments sold by DiaSorin or any of its related company to be free from defects in workmanship and materials during normal use by the original purchaser. Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by DiaSorin, this warranty shall continue for a period of one year, commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date of shipment to the original purchaser, or until title is transferred from the original purchaser, whichever occurs first (the "Warranty Period"). This Warranty does not cover defects or malfunctions which: (1) are not reported to DiaSorin S.p.A during the Warranty Period and within one week of occurrence; (2) result from chemical decomposition or corrosion; (3) are caused primarily by failure to comply with any requirements or instruction contained in the applicable DiaSorin S.p.A User Manual; or (4) result from maintenance, repair, or modification, performed without DiaSorin's authorization; (5) related to normal wear and tear. DiaSorin S.p.A’s liability for all matters arising from the supply, installation, use, repair, and maintenance of the instrument, whether arising under this Warranty or otherwise, shall be limited solely to the repair or (at DiaSorin S.p.A’s sole discretion) replacement of the instrument or of components thereof. Replaced parts shall become the property of DiaSorin S.p.A. In no event shall DiaSorin be liable for injuries sustained by third parties, consequential damages, and/or lost profits. The warranty does not cover the software included in the system, which is subject to the warranty stated in the Software License Agreement. The warranty is country dependent, based on local legal requirements. THE FOREGOING IS THE SOLE WARRANTY MADE BY DIASORIN S.p.A REGARDING THE INSTRUMENT, AND DIASORIN SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IMPLIED FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.


Page 1-7

1. Introduction

1.4

Hazard Instructions

The following hazard instructions must be observed at all times, both before and during operation and during maintenance. Handling of the Service Manual The Service Manual is provided for field service engineers safety and gives important instructions for the handling of the system described. Read all instructions! LIAISON®XL is designed and manufactured in accordance with the safety requirements for electronic and medical systems. It is the operators responsibility to comply with local and national laws, regulations and laboratory procedures for installation and operation of the instrument.

1.4.1

General Safety

Non-Observance of Hazard Instructions The non-observance of hazard instructions can result in serious personal injuries and material damages. •

Follow all hazard instructions included in this manual.

•

Follow all warnings marked on the instrument.

Function of the Instrument Please follow closely the steps contained in the individual instructions to achieve a correct functioning of the instrument.

Use of the System according to Intended Use only Improper use of the system can produce erroneous results, produce damage to the system and incur personal injuries.

Page 1-8

•

The handling and maintenance of the system must only be performed by trained and authorized personnel.

•

Before servicing the system, the Instruction for Use Manual and the Service Manual must be completely read and understood.

•

The instrument must only be used in accordance with the intended use as described in this manual.

•

Use only the consumables and accessories specifically produced for the instrument (e.g. disposable tips, cuvettes, integrals).


1. Introduction •

For maintaining safety, do not modify the LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System, do not use parts either than the specified ones and do not remove the safety devices.

The manufacturer assumes no liability for any damages, including those to third parties, caused by improper use or handling of the system.

Danger due to Overheating Improper place of installation/operation of the system may cause fire or serious system damage in case of overheating. •

Select the place of installation of the system so that the ventilation slots are not blocked or covered.

•

Select the place of installation of the system so that air can circulate.

•

Never cover ventilation slots.


Page 1-9

1. Introduction

1.4.2

Electrical Hazards

The LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System does not pose uncommon electrical hazards to operators if it is installed and operated without alteration and is connected to a power source that meets required specifications (see chapter 27.1 on page 27-1). Electrocution/Fire Hazard! Non-observance of rules and regulations can cause serious personal injuries with deadly consequences and material damages. National rules and legal regulations for the safe electrical operation of the system must be observed.

Electrocution/Fire Hazard! The wrong operation voltage can cause serious personal injuries with deadly consequences and material damages (e.g. fire). •

Before connecting the system to the mains supply, check the operating voltage is correct.

•

The instrument must operate with the type of power source indicated on the dedicated label positioned near the switch. If there are doubts regarding the type of power available, consult an authorized technical person of the laboratory or the local electric power company.

Electrocution/Fire Hazard! Improper connection of the system and the peripheral devices to mains supply can cause serious personal injuries with deadly consequences and material damages (e.g. fire).

Page 1-10

•

Use only connection and extension cables with a protective earth conductor and sufficient capacity (performance, power) to connect the system and the peripheral devices to the mains supply.

•

Use a properly grounded electrical outlet of correct voltage and current handling capability.

•

Never interrupt the grounding contacts.

•

Grounding of the system and its peripheral devices to the same protective earth potential must be ensured.

•

The use of a power strip shall be limited to DiaSorin approved configurations (refer to DiaSorin Common Technical Note 3).

•

Where appropriate, the Analyzer is installed with additional external switch for residual current circuit-breakers with over-current protection.

•

Where appropriate, the Analyzer is integrated in UPS device.


1. Introduction

Electrocution/Fire Hazard! Damaged connecting cables can cause serious personal injuries with deadly consequences and material damages (e.g. fire). •

Damaged connecting cables must be replaced immediately!

•

No objects may be placed on the connecting cables.

•

Connecting cables must be laid so that they cannot be squeezed or damaged.

•

Connecting cables must be laid so that they do not lay in accessible or drivable areas.

High Voltage! The touching of high voltage parts or cables can result in serious personal injuries with deadly consequences. •

Never touch high voltage parts with instrument on.

•

Separate the system from the mains supply before maintaining or cleaning it.

•

Be careful! The following parts can be under high voltage during operation: o

UPS device (110-240V, high current)

o

Main supply unit (110-240V, high current)

o

Enclosure metal part in Single Fault conditions (132V r.m.s., low current)

o

Photomultiplier (PMT) (~ 1000 Volts, low current)

o

Liquid Waste Pump (LWP) (~ 100 Volts, low current)

Electrocution/Fire Hazard! Defective systems can result in serious injuries with deadly consequences and material damages (e.g. fire). •

Separate immediately the defective system from the mains supply, if a safe usage is no longer possible.

•

Secure the defective system against reconnection.

•

Label the defective system clearly as being defective.

Electrocution! Working with electrical devices on wet floors can cause serious injuries with deadly consequences and material damages due to electrocution. •

Surfaces (e.g. floors) must be dry when working with the system.

•

Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or communication components.

•

Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands.


Page 1-11

1. Introduction

Danger of Electrocution If the system is not separated from the mains supply before maintenance works, this can cause serious injuries with deadly consequences due to electrocution. Additionally, there is the danger that the system starts and causes injuries (e.g. contusion, cuts etc.) to the person working with the system. •

Determine and correct the cause of a blown fuse or thrown circuit-breaker before attempting to resume operations of the system.

•

Separate the system from the mains supply and secure it against restarting before replacing fuses.

•

Spare fuses must match the values (nominal voltage, nominal current and type) specified by the manufacturer.

•

Never repair or bridge blown fuses.

•

Never short-circuit the fuse holder.

Danger of Electrocution or Mechanical Injuries If the system is not separated from the mains supply before maintenance works, this can cause serious injuries with deadly consequences due to electrocution. Additionally, there is the danger that the system starts and causes injuries (e.g. contusion, cuts etc.) to the person working with the system. •

Switch off the system, separate it from the mains supply and protect it against restarting. When system is secured start cleaning, disinfection, maintenance or repair works.

•

Make sure that nobody works on the system and that all covers are attached and closed before reconnecting the system to the mains supply.

•

Do not disconnect any electrical connection while the power is on.

•

Disconnect the power cord before cleaning major liquid spills. Clean spilled fluids immediately.

Danger due to Improper Place of Installation Improper place of installation of the system can cause accidents with serious injuries with deadly consequences, fire or serious system damages, because the system cannot be switched off or be separated from the mains supply.

Page 1-12

•

Ensure that the power supply and mains switch/ emergency stop are easily accessible in the place of installation of the system.

•

Ensure UPS proper ventilation.

•

The Analyzer is not designed and constructed to be operated in a potentially explosive atmosphere, so it must not be installed and used in a laboratory with potentially explosive atmosphere. Field Service Engineer must verify with the end user that the place chosen for installing th Analyzer fulfils such requirements. The responsibility of such check is in charge of the end user.


1. Introduction

1.4.3

Physical Hazards

1.4.3.1

Laser Hazards

Eye Injuries due to Laser Radiation Laser radiation causes eye irritations when the laser beam is looked for a long period of time. •

Never look directly into the laser beam!

•

Do not use optical devices.

•

Take off watches and mirroring jewellery before operating the laser.

•

Be careful during operation and testing of the class 2 lasers present on the instrument (the bar code scanner) and on the hand held barcode scanner - PN A0179 or the class 1 laser of the old hand held barcode scanner - PN A0096 supplied with the instrument.

Wrong usage of operating elements or adjustments or the non-observance of processes can cause a dangerous emission of laser radiation.

1.4.3.2

Heavy Objects

Follow supplied instructions for a safe unpacking and placement of the Analyzer during installation (see chapter 3) as well as uninstallation (see chapter 4). Use proper lifting techniques when handling full tanks (water, wash and waste). Use care when handling the containers to reduce the risk of injury. High Weight Improper lifting/carrying of the system may cause the system to fall down. Falling down may cause serious injuries to the personnel or serious material damages. •

Observe the technical specifications of the system (see chapter 27.4 on page 27-4) to avoid misjudgements.

1.4.3.3

Trip Hazards

The LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System is equipped with power cords and various computer connectors. To avoid tripping hazards, ensure cords are properly stowed. In the event of a damage, prejudice or personal injury occurred in connection with the use of the LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System, the Field Service Engineer shall immediately contact the local DiaSorin Representative.


Page 1-13

1. Introduction

1.4.4

Mechanical Hazards

The LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System is an automated system that operates under computer control. As with most automated equipment, there is potential for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical components whenever the system is in operation. The LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System minimizes mechanical hazards by providing guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components, and encoding the software with safety features. During servicing of the Analyzer, a Field Service Engineer is potentially exposed to the following moving mechanical components: •

Pipettor arms and probes

•

Cuvette loading assemblies

•

Incubator

•

Washer

•

Reader

•

Spindle

Basic elements of mechanical safety include, but are not limited to:

Page 1-14

•

Avoid contact with the sharp metal edges.

•

Never bypass or override a safety device.

•

Never allow any part of your body to enter a range of mechanical movement during system operation.

•

Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch on the system.

•

Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the system.

•

The right pipettor probe, the washer probes and the reader probe are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious material. Adopt all safety precautions required when servicing such areas.

•

Do not attempt to resolve a cuvette jamming in the cuvette loader and pot area when the Analyzer is running.

•

Use caution when performing cleaning, maintenance or service in general.

•

Be aware that, in the event of a system malfunction or an unexpected sequence of movements, reflex actions could occur, causing injury.


1. Introduction

1.4.5

Biological Hazards

Performing the following activities, Field Service Engineers may be exposed to potentially infectious materials: •

Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls;

•

Cleaning spills;

•

Handling and disposing of waste;

•

Performing maintenance procedures;

•

Performing cleaning procedures.

During servicing it is important to pay particular attention to the potentially contaminated parts listed below: •

Solid and liquid waste areas, tanks, bin and bag;

•

Solid waste intermediate container;

•

Solid waste tube (from instrument to waste container);

•

Liquid waste tubes (from pumps to waste tanks);

•

Left arm tip waste tube;

•

Left arm edge;

•

Right arm needle;

•

Right arm washing station;

•

Washer and reader aspiration needles and tubes;

•

Washer Aspiration Pump (WAP) tubes;

•

Washer Probe Aspiration Pump (WPAP) tubes;

•

Incubator cover (especially near dispensing points);

•

Incubator belt and closer area;

•

Washer and reader assemblies (especially internal parts);

•

Sample area, sample and control racks (in case of spillage);

•

Reagent loading area (in case of spillage);

•

Reagent cover (in case of spillage);

•

Disposable tip area (in case of spillage);

•

Any surfaces in case of spillage.

The following information help the technicians in minimizing the impact of the exposure. Field Service Engineers should consider all clinical samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and used reaction vessels and consumables (e.g. tips) that contain humansourced material as potentially infectious. They should also consider all system surfaces or components that have come in contact with human-sourced material as potentially infectious. No known test method can offer complete assurance that products derived from human-sourced material will not transmit infection. Therefore, all products derived from human-sourced materials and system components exposed to human-sourced materials should be considered potentially infectious.


Page 1-15

1. Introduction

Risk of infection! Parts, with contact to potentially infectious liquid, must be treated as potentially infectious. Improper handling of infectious parts can cause skin irritations, illnesses and possible death. •

Observe local and national provisions, legislation and laboratory regulations.

•

Use appropriate disposable gloves.

•

Use an appropriate lab coat.

•

Use an appropriate eye protection.

•

Avoid contact between skin/mucous membrane and samples/test reagents or parts of the instrument.

•

Do not pipette by mouth.

•

Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics or handle contact lenses when handling human-sourced material or contaminated system components.

•

Clean and disinfect the system immediately if potentially infectious material has been spilled.

•

Any reagent spills should be washed with a chemical use sodium hypochlorite solution with 0.5% active chlorine (e.g. dilution 1:10 of a solution at 5% active chlorine) and disposed of as though potentially infectious.

•

All samples, biological reagents and materials used in the assays must be considered potentially able to transmit infectious agents. They should therefore be disposed of in accordance with the prevailing regulations and guidelines of the agencies holding jurisdiction over the laboratory, and the regulations of each Country.

•

Liquid waste must be decontaminated with a chemical use sodium hypochlorite solution with 0.1% active chlorine (e.g. dilution 1:50 of a solution at 5% active chlorine) for at least half an hour.

•

Do not use broken or chipped tubes or bottles.

•

Observe the instructions in the package inserts for a correct use of the reagents.

Organic Solvents Reagent containers and hoses for system liquid and waste can be seriously damaged by organic solvents and become unusable. •

Never use organic solvents.

Handling of Cleaning/ Disinfection Products Pay attention when handling cleaning/ disinfection products, because they are harmful as indicated on the bottle.

Page 1-16

•

Read the instructions of the products before use.

•

Do not use products undiluted!


1. Introduction

1.4.6

Chemical hazards

Field Service Engineer may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents, calibrators and controls. Exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following instructions provided in the assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert) and on product-specific labels, and product-specific MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). In general, observe the following precautions when handling chemicals: •

Consult MSDS for safe use instructions and precautions.

•

Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious gloves, protective eye wear, and clothing.

•

Maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.

•

Seek medical attention if irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure.

1.4.7

Spill clean-up

Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices and follow instructions in the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). In general, safe work practices for cleaning spills include: •

Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves, eye wear and lab coat.

•

Absorb the spill with absorbent material.

•

Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.

•

Wipe the area clean with an appropriate disinfectant (see chapter 1.4.5 on page 1-15).

1.4.8

Maintenance Work

Unapproved Maintenance Works Unapproved or inaccurately performed maintenance works can result in serious personal injuries and material damages. •

Only perform maintenance procedures described in this manual.

•

Follow closely the steps contained in the individual instructions.

•

For the maintenance works, only use original parts approved by DiaSorin.

•

Tests and maintenance works specified by the manufacturer must be performed to ensure the safe operation of the system and the proper functioning of the system.

•

All service and maintenance works which are not described in this instruction must be performed by qualified and authorized service technicians.

•

Any changes made to the instrument that are not authorized by the manufacturer will lead to the loss of guarantee (see chapter 1.3 on page 1-7).


Page 1-17

1. Introduction

Danger of Electrocution due to not correct replacement of instrument parts Not correct re-placement of instrument parts may cause spillage of liquid on PCB or electrical cables. •


•

Follow closely the steps contained in the individual instructions.

•

For the maintenance works, only use original parts approved by DiaSorin.

•

Tests and maintenance works specified by the manufacturer must be performed to ensure the safe operation of the system and the proper functioning of the system.

•

All service and maintenance works which are not described in this instruction must be performed by qualified and authorized service technicians.

•

Any changes made to the instrument that are not authorized by the manufacturer will lead to the loss of guarantee (see chapter 1.3 on page 1-7).

Danger of Electrocution or Mechanical Injuries during Required Maintenance Works on the Voltage-Carrying System If the system cannot be separated from the mains supply during required maintenance works, additional precautions must be taken to avoid serious injuries with deadly consequences due to electrocution or injuries by the system (e.g. contusion, cuts etc.) due to electrocution. •

Only switch on the system if this is explicitly required.

•

Only explicitly described protective covers may be opened.

•

Perform the maintenance works with highest caution.

•

Never touch electrical connecting contacts.

•

Please note that mechanical components (e.g. pipettor) can move unexpectedly.

Danger of Electrocution or Mechanical Injuries by Missing or Opened Protective Covers To avoid serious injuries with deadly consequences due to electrocution or injuries by the system (e.g. contusion, cuts etc.), protective covers may only be opened or removed for certain maintenance procedures and with the highest level of caution.

Page 1-18

•


•

Make sure that nobody works on the system and that all covers are attached and closed before reconnecting the system to the mains supply.

•

Make sure that all covers are attached before switching on the instrument.

•

Switch off the system, separate it from the mains supply and protect the system against restarting, if protective covers/gears are missing.

•

Make sure that the motion of the pipettor and the transport chain of incubator have stopped before opening covers and/or accessing the working area of the instrument.


1. Introduction •

Avoid touching the pipettor, the transport chain of incubator and other moving parts while the system is in operation.

•

Perform all maintenance procedures with the highest level of caution.

Sharp Edges! Sheet metal parts and PCBs located behind protective covers might have sharp edges. Contact might lead to injuries. •

Use caution at corners and edges!

Liquid in the System Liquid which gets into the system can cause illnesses with deadly consequences in case of contact. The system can be damaged by liquids. •

Switch off the system.

•

Separate the system from the mains supply.

•

Wear suitable protective clothing.

•

Clean, disinfect and dry the system according to the applicable local and national provisions, legislation and laboratory procedures.

Defects in the Liquid System Defect or leaky tubes, syringes, valves or pumps lead to deterioration of the pipetting results and consequently corruption of final results. Furthermore incorrectly flushed tips can cause mixing up of sample material. •

Check the system on drops and ponding.

•

Check tubes, syringes, valves or pumps periodically.


Page 1-19

1. Introduction

1.4.9

Disposal and Disinfection

Unsuitable Sterilisation Method Containers and components for liquids or waste are seriously damaged at autoclaving. Disinfect the containers and components with a suitable disinfection method.

Cleaning or Disinfection Observe the following aspects during cleaning or disinfection because otherwise breakdowns or damages can be the result. •

Liquid cleaning or disinfection solutions may only be used with a moistened cleaning tissue. They may not be poured into or sprayed into the system.

•

Cleaning or disinfection solutions and procedures must be approved.

•

Cleaning or disinfection solutions must not come into contact with bearings and guides, as otherwise the greasy film may dissolve!

•

Cleaning or disinfection solutions must not be used in the proximity of circuit boards, light barriers and perspex surfaces!

Handling/Cleaning of Optic Surfaces Optic surfaces (e. g. scanners, lenses, sensors) must be free of dust and fat. •

Do not touch any optic surfaces.

•

Only clean the optic surfaces with a softy and lint-free cloth.

•

Do not use any aggressive detergents (e.g. acetone).

Disposal of Infectious Waste Potential infectious material and all parts that may come in contact with potential infectious material must be disposed according to the local and national provisions, legislation and laboratory procedures.

Disposal The instrument, the packaging material, and all parts that have been replaced must be disposed according to the applicable local and national provisions, legislation and laboratory procedures. For more information about disposal, contact the manufacturer.

Page 1-20


1. Introduction

Touch Screen Cleaning Improper cleaning could damage the touch screen surface. •

Use soft clothes with neutral detergent or with ethanol to clean the touch screen.

•

Do not use any chemical solvent, acidic or alkali solution.

•

Do not allow liquid from soaking into the joint of film and glass which may result in peeling or malfunctioning.

Battery Handling The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injuries: •

Do not attempt to recharge the battery.

•

Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60°C (140°F).

•

Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.

•

Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

•

Replace only with the spare designated for this product.


Page 1-21

1. Introduction

1.4.10 1.4.10.1

Caution on electromagnetic wave interference Electromagnetic wave interference given by LIAISON®XL to other equipment

The use of the LIAISON®XL Analyzer may interfere with radio and television reception. Use the cables attached at the installation for connection between the devices in the system. The proper use of the specified cables minimizes electromagnetic wave interference. Installation and service of the system or changes in the installation may never be performed by non-authorized persons approved by DiaSorin S.p.A. Movable multiple plug sockets different from the configuration created by DiaSorin authorized personnel are not allowed. ® However, there is no guarantee that the LIAISON XL Analyzer will not cause electromagnetic wave interference.

a. When the LIAISON®XL Analyzer may be the cause, turn off the power of this Instrument and check radio and television reception. b. If it is improved, the LIAISON®XL Analyzer probably is the cause.

1.4.10.2

Electromagnetic wave interference that may be given to the LIAISON®XL Analyzer

If the LIAISON®XL Analyzer is used near equipment that generates strong electric and magnetic field, noises may enter the Instrument to affect the performances and functions. Use the cables attached at the installation for connection between the devices in the system. The proper use of the specified cables minimizes electromagnetic wave interference. Installation and service of the system or changes in the installation shall be performed only by authorized persons approved by DiaSorin S.p.A. Movable multiple plug sockets different from the configuration created by DiaSorin authorized personnel are not allowed. ® However, there is no guarantee that the LIAISON XL Analyzer will not be affected by Electromagnetic Wave Interference.

a. When other equipment may be the cause, turn off the power of the equipment and check the functions of the LIAISON®XL Analyzer. b. If they are improved, Interference from the equipment is probably the cause.

Page 1-22


1. Introduction

Try the following to correct the issues. a. Move the LIAISON®XL Analyzer further away from the equipment that may be the cause. b. Connect the power cord of the LIAISON®XL Analyzer to an outlet that is on a different circuit from the equipment that may be the cause. c.

Check that electromagnetic wave interference does not affect the other equipment, which is connected with this analyzer.

Transient Emissions and Interference Resistance This instrument meets all requirements described in standard IEC 61326 on transient emissions and interference resistance. •

This instrument was developed and tested according to CISPR11 Class A. It can cause radio interference in domestic environments. In this case it may be required to take action to eliminate such interference.

•

Before setup and operation of the instrument, the electromagnetic environment shall be evaluated.

•

Do not use the instrument in the proximity of sources with excessive electromagnetic radiation (e.g. unshielded, deliberately operated high frequency sources) since they could interfere with the proper operation of the instrument.

1.4.10.3

Radio Interferences

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Instructions for Use and Service Manual, may cause harmful interferences to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interferences. In which case, the user will be required to correct the interferences at his own expense.

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This equipment does not exceed Class A limits per radio noise emissions for digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Operation in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception, requiring the owner or operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference.


Page 1-23

1. Introduction

1.5

Evaluation of Residual risk for Field Service Engineer

The aim of this section is to bring to Field Service Engineer attention to the status of residual risks, despite the inherent safe design measures, safeguarding and complementary protective measures adopted by the Manufacturer to lower the risks to an acceptable level. Field Service Engineer must read carefully the section “Safety residual risks for User” contained in LIAISON®XL User Manual as well as the present chapter in order to understand the residual risks and learn the recommended instructions to work and service safely on the LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System. If further clarification should be needed, it is recommended to contact the local DiaSorin representative. Design of the Analyzer to facilitate handling The LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System and its component parts are capable of being handled, transported, packaged and stored safely, without damage. The Analyzer is either wheels and/ or handles equipped to facilitate its handling during unpacking and positioning at customer site.

Protection against mechanical hazards The LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System and its components and fittings are stable enough to avoid overturning, falling or uncontrolled movements during transportation, assembly, dismantling and any other action involving the machinery. The various parts of the Analyzer and their linkages are able to withstand the stresses to which they are subject when used. The durability of the materials used is adequate for the nature of the working environment foreseen by DiaSorin S.p.A., in particular as regards the phenomena of fatigue, ageing, corrosion and abrasion. To date, there is no evidence of parts showed to be weak. A remaining mechanical hazard is related to moving parts.

Handling of left top cover When the technician is logged in the software with a FSE access right, the monitoring of the left top cover sensor is disabled, so the Analyzer does not stop moving when the cover is opened. Field Service Engineer must pay particular attention when interacting with the Analyzer for servicing and maintenance purposes.

Page 1-24

•

Left top cover shall be opened only when required for particular service activity.

•

Never insert hands or head inside instrument when pipettors or other instrument parts are running.

•

Move in a safe position pipettor arms before operating on internal instrument parts, as possible far away from working area.

•

Pay attention to internal potentially cutting parts (pipettor arms, right pipettor needle, sharp angles and edges).


1. Introduction

1.6

Instrument Labeling and Safety Labels

Missing Warnings Missing or unreadable warning labels or type labels can result in non-identified dangers. This can cause serious personal injuries and material damages. •

Check the system on missing or unreadable warning labels and type labels.

•

Missing or unreadable warning labels or type labels must be replaced.

The detailed description of the greatest part of the labels applied to the Analyzer is reported in LIAISON®XL User Manual. The following paragraphs will report the description of some additional labels not accessible to the user but in some circumstances visible to the field service engineer; the main rules related to the placement of the “Do not open cover” label are also reported.

1.6.1

Pipettor Labels

In addition to those available on the front of pipettor arms, general warning labels are also positioned on the right and left sides of pipettor module, just under the side covers.

Figure 1.6-1: Right side view without cover


Page 1-25

1. Introduction

Figure 1.6-2: Left side view without cover

1.6.2

Disconnect Main Power

A disconnect power symbol is placed under the right side cover, just above the main switch. It is associated also to a second label reporting the sentence “Disconnect power before opening” in different languages. The purpose of these labels is to inform the field service engineer about the need to disconnect the system from the mains supply before servicing the power supply module.

Figure 1.6-3: Disconnect Main Power labels

Page 1-26


1. Introduction

1.6.3

COM Port Labels

Two labels, identifying the default configuration of the available serial ports, are applied on the back side of the LIAISON®XL PC (“COM 2” and “COM 4”, see Figure 1.6-4).

Figure 1.6-4: COM port labels

1.6.4

“Do not open cover” Label

Customers are never allowed to open the left top cover of the analyzer while the system is running. As a reminder for the users, a label containing this message shall be applied by the service technicians on each LIAISON®XL analyzer during the installation (see Figure 1.6-5). In X direction the label shall be aligned to the centre of the left top cover: a distance of ~ 31.5cm shall be measured between the left/ right border of the label and the left/


Page 1-27

1. Introduction right border of the cover. In Y direction, the label shall be aligned to the bottom border of the upper part of the cover.

Figure 1.6-5: “Do not open cover” label positioning A multi-language set of labels (cod. A0129) is provided as an accessory with each analyzer. Depending on the country of installation, the service technician shall choose the proper version (i.e. the proper language) to apply onto the system.

Page 1-28

Language

Language Code

Bulgarian

BG

Chinese

ZH

Czech

CS

Danish

DA

English

EN

Estonian

ET

Finnish

FI

French

FR

German

DE

Greek

EL

Hungarian

HU

Italian

IT

Latvian, Lettish

LV


1. Introduction Lithuanian

LT

Norwegian

NO

Polish

PL

Portuguese

PT

Romanian

RO

Slovak

SK

Spanish

ES

Swedish

SV

Turkish

TR

Table 1.6-1: Multi-language set for “Do not open cover” label


Page 1-29

2. Overview

2 Overview The purpose of this section is to provide an overview of the instrument components.

2.1 2.1.1

System Overview Overview

Figure 2.1-1: System overview


Page 2-1

2. Overview

Figure 2.1-2: System overview with printer support mounted

No.

Description

1

Left Top Cover

2

Right Top Cover

3

Touch screen

4

Reservoir for cuvettes

5

Drawers for disposable tip trays

6

Loading bay for sample racks

7

Loading bay for reagents (integrals or ancillary reagents)

8

Area for starter reagents

9

Extensible board

19

Printer support Table 2.1-1: System overview

Page 2-2


2. Overview

2.1.2

Overview Cabinet

Figure 2.1-3: Cabinet overview No.

Description

1

Left drawer

2

Liquid waste tank, Left

3

Liquid waste tank, Right

4

Cleaning solution tank

5

Waste basin

6

Solid waste drawer

7

Right drawer

8

Water tank

9

Intermediate tank (Water)

10

Wash solution tank

11

Intermediate tank (Wash solution)

12

PC

13

Cabinet doors Table 2.1-2: Cabinet with drawers overview


Page 2-3

2. Overview

2.1.3

System Modules

Figure 2.1-4: Module overview No.

Description

1

Cuvette transport (Auger)

2

Cuvette orientation mechanism (Sorter)

3

Disposable Tip Drawers

4

Loading bay for sample racks

5

Reader

6

Loading bay for reagents and ancillaries

7

Incubator and Wash / Waste station

8

Washer

9

Pump Rack

10

Starter Reagent Pumps

11

Sample Probe (Left Arm)

12

Reagent Probe (Right Arm) Table 2.1-3: Module overview

Page 2-4


2. Overview

2.1.4

Electrical Connections

Figure 2.1-5: Circuit board overview

Figure 2.1-6: Cabinet CU PCB


Page 2-5

2. Overview No.

Description

1

Cuvette Supply CU PCB

2

PIP CU PCB

3

Incubator CU PCB

4

COP CU

5

Cabinet CU PCB Table 2.1-4: Circuit board overview

2.1.5

LIAISON® XL LAS System

See chapter 25.2 on page 25-2 for the overview of the system.

Page 2-6


2. Overview

2.2

Liquid Connections

Figure 2.2-1: Liquid overview LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 2-7

2. Overview

2.3

Electric Circuit Overview

See module chapters for detailed information of the electric connections (boards, pumps, valves, sensors etc.), switches and LEDs.

Figure 2.3-1: Electric connections overview (only boards) For details regarding the connections of the single PCBs refer to:

Page 2-8

•

Master COP PCB and USB HUB PCB (see chapter 23.4 on page 23-22);

•

Cuvette Supply CU PCB (see chapter 10.6 on page 10-37);

•

Incubator CU PCB and Incubator Distributor PCB (see chapter 11.7 on page 11-86);

•

Washer CU PCB (see chapter 13.6 on page 13-32);

•

Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7 on page 14-58);

•

Pipettor PCBs (see chapter 15.6 on page 15-91);

•

Sample Module CU PCB (see chapter 16.6 on page 16-24); LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

2. Overview •

Reagent Module PCBs (see chapter 17.7 on page 17-48);

•

RFID Starter CU PCB (see chapter 18.6 on page 18-21);

•

Front Cover PCBs (see chapter 20.6 on page 20-23);

•

Cabinet CU PCB (see chapter 21.6 on page 21-36).


Page 2-9

0V + 24 V

COP supports limited circuits

O V connected to conductive chassis/earth via the mounting holes.

The earth point is screwed firmly on the conductive rear wall/chassis of the housing.

L1

AC power input switch with line filter

24 volt switching power supply

Earth

earth point

High voltage side

GND

…

Module 3

Module 2

0V + 24 V 0V + 24 V 0V

Module 1

0V

+ 24 V

Ground connection to conductive chassis via PCB boards.

0V + 24 V

GND

Page 2-10 L1

AC powe plug

2.4

N

Low voltage side

2. Overview

Grounding scheme

N

+ 24 V

Figure 2.4-1: LIAISON®XL grounding scheme


3. LIAISON®XL Installation

®

3 LIAISON XL Installation As the LIAISON®XL system is a complex system and contains delicate electrical and mechanical components it must be unpacked and installed by a qualified service engineer. The procedures reported in this chapter allow to complete the installation of LIAISON®XL analyzers successfully. For LIAISON®XL LAS instruments refer to chapter 25.3 on page 25-7.

3.1

Safety

Non-Observance of Safety Instructions The non-observance of safety instructions can result in serious personal injuries and material damages. •

Follow all safety instructions (see chapter 1.4 on page 1-8).

•

Follow all working instructions included in this manual.

•


Falling down of the system Due to improper place of installation of the system, the system can fall down. If the system falls down, the user can be seriously injured or the system can be seriously damaged. •

Position the system on a plane and levelled floor.

•

Observe the technical specifications of the system (see chapter 27.4 on page 27-4).

Check System During the installation of the system, always follow the steps indicated in LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Installation Qualification (IQ, see chapter 26.1 on page 26.1) and Operational Qualification (OQ, see chapter 26.2 on page 26-5) check lists. The proper execution and compilation of these check lists will ensure the proper installation of the instruments.


Page 3-1


3.2

Installation Preparation

Pre-Site Inspection visit for installation A Pre-Site Inspection form has to be used during the preliminary visit at the customer site in order to evaluate the customer facilities and the laboratory accessibility and requirement for a proper instrument installation. See LXL-TN-20 for details.

3.2.1

Standard supply with PN I0050

The standard supply for PN I0050 is the following :

Page 3-2

•

Instrument with cables (schuko plug 220 Volt, serial from USB to COP)

•

N° 1 front module

•

N° 1 top cover left

•

N° 1 top cover right

•

N° 1 side cover left

•

N° 1 side cover right

•

N° 1 cabinet cover

•

N°1 blind cover left

•

N°1 blind cover right

•

N°1 rear slotted cover

•

Computer with power cable (schuko plug 220 Volt)

•

Monitor with cables (RGB, Touchscreen, Power Supply 24 Volt)

•

Keyboard and mouse (to be used only by Field Service Engineers during Service activities)

•

N° 1 DI Water 10L tank

•

N° 2 Wash Buffer solution 10L tanks

•

N° 1 Cleaning solution 2L tank

•

N° 2 Liquid waste tanks

•

N° 10 Sample racks

•

N° 1 PN A0129 - LXL TOP COVER LABEL MULTILANGUAGE

•

N° 1 PN A0179 (or PN A0096) - EXTERNAL BARCODE SCANNER FOR LIAISON XL

•

N° 1 PN X0025 - SOLID WASTE BAG LIAISON XL (SET OF 50)

•

LABEL SET FOR SAMPLE RACK

•

HANDLE LABEL PAGE 1

•

HANDLE LABEL PAGE 2

•

N° 1 PN A0128 - INTEGRAL RACK HOLDER LIAISON XL


3. LIAISON®XL Installation •

N° 1 PN A0055 – SAMPLE TUBE TOOL

•

N° 1 PN A0107 - ANCILLARY ADAPTOR FOR LC (SET OF 2)

•

N° 1 PN A0109 - CONTROL RACK LIAISON XL (SET OF 2)

•

N° 2 PN A0118 - SAMPLE RACK ADAPTER LIAISON XL (totally 120 adapters, see chapter 3.3.5 on page 3-15 for details)

•

N° 1 PN A0120 - SAMPLE RACK HOLDER LIAISON XL

•

N° 1 PN A0119 - WASTE TANK BULK LIAISON XL (no longer supplied/ needed with serial numbers > 2210000275, due to the presence of the extractible drawers)

•

N° 1 PN A0162 - LIAISON XL - SOLID WASTE BIN

Barcode scanner with PN A0179 replaced the one with PN A0096. The reason of the change was the end-of-life of the previous model. The two barcode scanners offer the same performance for the reading of bidimensional barcodes for control definition.

Other accessories, such as: • Back Covers (PN 7222060000) • Printer (PN A0112) • Printer Support (PN 7222001300) • UPS (PN I0066) • Direct Drain kit (PN 3641000185) • Multiplug (PN A0029) are NOT delivered by standard supply and, if required, need to be ordered and managed separately (see LXL-TN-20 for the Pre-Site Inspection).

3.2.2

Additional Material required for Installation Product Code

Quantity

Description

319101

2

LIGHT CHECK

319113

3

LIAISON XL NPAT KIT

X0016

1

LIAISON XL CUVETTES

X0015

1

LIAISON XL TIPS

319200

3

STARTER KIT

319100

1

WASH SYSTEM LIQUID

Table 3.2-1: Additional material required for Installation


Page 3-3


The above listed material is sufficient for the Field Service Engineer installation only and MUST be ordered separately. Anything required for the Customer Training, Start up, Routine (Assays, Controls, additional Consumables, etc..), MUST be ordered separately as well.

3.2.3

Required tools

The following tools are required to perform the installation: •

Set of hexagon socket wrench (Allen key)

•

Set of cross slotted screw driver

•

Set of slotted screw driver

•

Set of screw wrench

•

Side cutter

•

Leveller.

3.3

Installation Qualification

Packaging Keep the packaging to allow for safe transportation in case the system must be shipped in the future.

3.3.1

Visual inspection before unpacking

1. Verify the transport box is without damages. 2. Verify the indication of transport tilt and shock monitors.

3.3.2

Unpacking, visual inspection and inventory

1. Remove all screws of the shipping box marked with the stamp “Open here”. 2. Set the draw door (A) carefully onto the floor.

Page 3-4



Front Module/Draw Door of the package will fall over after unscrewing it.

3. Unscrew the wooden board (B), put the foot angles (C) of the loading ramp upright and set wooden board (B) into the cut out.

Figure 3.3-1: Loading Ramp


Page 3-5



Page 3-6



4. Remove two angle foams.

Figure 3.3-3: Shipping box


Page 3-7

3. LIAISON®XL Installation 5. Remove left and right side stop detents (1, 2).

Figure 3.3-4: Side stop for left side

Figure 3.3-5: Side stop for right side

Page 3-8


3. LIAISON®XL Installation 6. Lift system with lever up and remove foot stop detents (3).

Figure 3.3-6: Remove foot stop detents

7. Set the loading ramp (A) in front of the container. 8. In front of the loading ramp set the chamfered wooden ramp.


Page 3-9


Attention: Take care when pulling system out of the transport box. System is very heavy.

9. Move system carefully out of the box and let it slowly down the loading ramp.

Figure 3.3-7: Empty container 10. Visually inspect that the chassis is without damages or gaps. 11. Visually inspect that no visible cuts are present in the system or pipetting tubing. 12. Open the cover box and visually inspect that the covers are without damages or gaps. 13. Open accessory box and check parts according to the packing lists (see chapter 28-1).

Page 3-10



3.3.3

Manual Inspection

1. Remove securing foams (5) of pipettor arms. 2. Remove cable ties (4) of pipettor arms.

Figure 3.3-8: Sample Pipettor

Figure 3.3-9: OLV probe pipettor


Page 3-11

3. LIAISON®XL Installation 3. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in x direction. 4. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in y direction. 5. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in z direction. 6. Remove protection tape from cuvette reservoir and place front cover connect cable in safe correct position (to be mounted later). 7. Remove washer module and perform the lubrication of the incubator downholder, the left and middle metal sheets and the cuvette supply metal sheet (see chapter 5.2.6 on page 5-8).

Figure 3.3-10: Cuvette reservoir

3.3.4 3.3.4.1

System set-up WPRP and WAP set up

1. Plug tubes of WAP and WPRP into the pumps. 2. Assemble WPRP Tubes (see chapter 19.6.3.3 on page 19-46). Assemble WAP Tubes (see chapter 19.7.3.3 on page 19-58). 3.3.4.2

Assemble Covers

1. Install the cuvette waste tube. 2. Assemble Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.3 on page 9-28). 3. Assemble Extensible Board (see chapter 9.3.12.3 on page 9-30). 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 6. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). Page 3-12


3. LIAISON®XL Installation 7. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.3 on page 9-14). 8. Apply the “Do not open cover” label onto the left Top Cover (see chapter 1.6.4 on page 1-27). 9. Assemble Monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.3 on page 9-16) and place the cables for the following connection of the PC. 10. Connect the computer to the LIAISON®XL, External USB PCB and monitor. 11. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 12. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 13. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 14. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 15. Assemble rear Slotted Cover (see chapter 9.3.9.3 on page 9-23). 16. Install upper and lower back covers (if needed, see chapter 9.3.10.3 on page 9-25). 17. Install the printer support (if needed, see chapter 9.3.14 on page 9-32). 18. Check the proper alignment of the covers (see chapter 9.4 on page 9-42). 3.3.4.3

System levelling and stabilization

1. Remove the incubator lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 2. Place the leveller in the middle of the incubator (dispense verification position for gravimetric tests) as shown in Figure 3.3-11.

Figure 3.3-11: Instrument levelling 3. Adjust the instrument by levelling the adjustable feet using the nuts (see Figure 3.3-12) until the leveller is in adjustment.


Page 3-13


Figure 3.3-12: Feet adjustment 4. Assemble the incubator lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 5. Be sure to have stabilized the instrument according to the caution reported below. Stabilization of the instruments with the cabinet drawers System can stand on the 2 back wheels and the 2 front feet. It is not possible to leave the instrument on the 4 wheels, at least the 2 front feet shall be moved down. Stabilization of the instruments without the cabinet drawers System can stand on 4 wheels however the brakes on the wheels have to be locked.

3.3.4.4

Tank set-up

1. Fill water tank and put it into the instrument. 2. Fill wash solution tank and put it into the instrument. 3. Insert waste containers into the basin and connect them to their sensors and tubings. 4. If needed, perform the adjustment of drawer handles (see chapter 21.4.2 on page 21-28). In case the water/ wash main containers don’t fit properly into the drawer or don’t contact properly the intermediate containers, the adjustment of the framework and the handle of the right drawer is necessary.

Page 3-14


3. LIAISON®XL Installation 3.3.4.5

Consumable set-up

1. If available, place the solid waste bin into the waste case. 2. Put a solid waste bag into the dedicated case. 3. Put starter reagent bottles into the dedicated module. 4. Put tip trays into the dedicated drawers. 5. Put cuvettes into the dedicated reservoir. 6. Plug in and turn on LIAISON®XL system. 7. Open the left Top Cover. 8. Open the dialogue Incubator of Service Software and initialize with All Dialog Controlled Modules. 9. In Basic Operations panel of Main and Move sub-dialogue, press Auger On button. 10. Wait until the sorter pot is filled with cuvettes (the auger stops automatically). 11. In Basic Operations panel of Main and Move sub-dialogue, press Sorter On button. 12. Wait until the incubator chute is completely filled with cuvettes, then press Sorter Off button. 13. In Basic Operations panel of Main and Move sub-dialogue, press Load Cuvette button. Repeat this operation until a cuvette is effectively loaded into the incubator. When no cuvettes are detected by the lower presence sensor of the chute, it is no more possible to load cuvettes into the incubator. In this case it is necessary to activate again the sorter moving cuvettes to the chute before continuing the loading. 14. In Basic Operations panel of Main and Move sub-dialogue, press again Sorter On button. 15. Wait until the incubator chute is completely filled with cuvettes, then press again Sorter Off button. 16. Close the left Top Cover.

3.3.5 3.3.5.1

Sample rack configuration Configuration of the proper adapter

15mm spacers (cod. A0118) can be assembled together in order to realize adapters with different heights that shall be used with different typologies of sample tubes. 2 bags of 15mm spacers (containing 60 pieces each) are provided by default in the accessory box of each instrument. In case more spacers are needed to complete the proper configuration of customer sample racks, service technicians shall order them separately. The number of spacers needed to complete the configuration of customer sample racks shall be estimated by service technicians during the pre-site inspection.


Page 3-15

3. LIAISON®XL Installation The table below reports the different allowed configurations, with the associated total heights that can be obtained; for each configuration, the information regarding the heights of the supported tubes are also indicated. For tubes higher than 85mm no spacers shall be used. Number of spacers

Picture

Adapter height [mm]

Adapter height [steps]

Supported tube heights [mm]

1

15mm

300

76mm – 85mm

2

25mm

500

66mm – 75mm

3

35mm

700

56mm – 65mm

4

45mm

900

up to 55mm

Table 3.3-1: Height of different spacer configurations 3.3.5.2

Configuration of sample racks

Adapters with different heights (i.e. assembled using a different number of spacers) shall be used to customize the different rack typologies supported by LIAISON®XL system. The table below reports the configuration associated to each standard rack typology.

Page 3-16


3. LIAISON®XL Installation Rack ID

Inner Diameter [mm]

Tube Height [mm]

Number of spacers

A

10mm

86mm - 100mm

0

B

15mm

86mm - 100mm

0

E

13mm

86mm - 100mm

0

F

12mm

86mm - 100mm

0

I

11mm

86mm - 100mm

0

J

9mm

56mm - 65mm

3

K

8mm

≤ 55mm

4

L

Used only for DiaSorin glass vials.

55 ± 0.5mm

3

N

7mm

≤ 55mm

4

P

Used only for pediatric tubes

Q

6mm

≤ 55mm

4

W

14mm

86mm - 100mm

0

4 (+ Eppendorf adapter)

Table 3.3-2: Number of spacers associated to each standard rack typology LIAISON®XL system supports also 5 additional rack typologies (G, H, X, Y and Z) that shall be properly configured in case the customer requirements are not satisfied by the characteristics (in term of tube height and inner diameter) of the standard rack typologies reported in Table 3.3-2. In this situation the proper customization of the sample racks shall be performed measuring the height of the customer tubes and configuring the proper adapter according to the rules presented in Table 3.3-1. In any case it is important to consider that the maximum number of spacers that can be assembled together is always equal to 4. For 75mm high tubes, it is recommended to customize an X rack by inserting 2 spacers in each position of the sample rack and by teaching properly the Zmax (see chapter 8.15 on page 8-25).


Page 3-17


Configuration procedure

1. Push the top part of a spacer into another one (see Figure 3.3-13).

Figure 3.3-13: Assembly of 2 spacers 2. If needed, repeat point 1 in order to assemble 1 or 2 additional spacers (see Figure 3.3-14). To identify the proper number of spacers to assemble: •

For standard racks, refer to Table 3.3-2.

•

For customized racks, refer to Table 3.3-1.

Figure 3.3-14: Assembly of additional spacers 3. Verify the tightness of the assembly. 4. Push the adapters configured with the proper number of spacers into each position of the sample rack.

Page 3-18


3. LIAISON®XL Installation 5. Verify that the bottom border of the lower spacer is in contact with the floor of the sample rack (refer to the red circle of Figure 3.3-15). If needed, an Allen key can be used to push the spacers to their final position. If a blockage is verified during the insertion, move the spacers a little further up, then push them down again with the help of the sample rack spring.

Figure 3.3-15: 15mm spacers positioning 6. Complete the customization of the sample racks by applying the proper barcode ID labels (see Figure 3.3-16) and rack ID labels (see Figure 3.3-18).

Figure 3.3-16: Barcode ID positioning


Page 3-19


3.3.6

Control rack configuration

Different rack IDs shall be used with control bottles of the kits packed in Italy/ Germany and the control bottles of the kits packed in USA. The reason of this difference is that USA manufacturing uses control bottles different from those used in Italy and Germany. Refer to the information reported on the package to verify the country in which the kit was manufactured. The two C racks provided as standard supply (see chapter 3.2.1 on page 3-2) shall be used with control bottles of kits manufactured in Italy and Germany. To run controls of kits produced in USA, at least one of the two available C racks shall be configured as “D” one. D.rac file and the associated information in BottleTypes.txt are properly set by default in each system with SW version 4.0.0.2 or higher installed, so to complete the configuration of the D rack it is only necessary to perform the following steps: 1. Replace the “C” Barcode ID label with the “D” one. 2. Replace the “C” Rack ID label with the “D” one. 3. Perform the configuration of the LLD check for the D rack (see chapter 8.15.2.5 on page 8-34). If more control racks are needed, it is possible to order them as additional spare parts (cod. A0109).

Figure 3.3-17: Barcode ID of rack C

Page 3-20



Figure 3.3-18: Rack ID positioning

3.3.7

Pipettor and rack teaching

1. Complete the teaching of the pipettor via Teacher Software (see chapter 8). 2. If needed, perform the teaching of customized sample racks (G, H, X, Y and Z racks, see chapter 8.15). 3. Close Teacher Software and turn the system power switch off.

3.3.8

Fluidic Setup

Before rinsing, make sure that all tube connections and fittings are properly assembled. During the complete rinsing process, take care that there are no leaks (tube connections glued, inserted, rotated etc.). 1. Open the dialogue Washer in the Service Software and initialize with Complete System. During the rinsing with all liquids, take care that the liquid system is tight. Liquid must be aspirated. Liquid may not return.

3.3.8.1

Water Fill up

1. Enter 80 sec. in the section Rinse+Aspirate of the Main and Liquid sub dialogue and rinse the system with the button Execute. The liquid should now contact the washer.


Page 3-21


Wash Buffer Fill up

1. Move to System dialogue. 2. In Priming area, press Washer button. The system will rinse the wash buffer automatically. 3.3.8.3

Pipettor Fill up

1. In Priming area of System dialogue, press Pipettor button. 2. Take care during rinsing that the wash station does not overflow. 3. Repeat this operation two times. 3.3.8.4

OLV Calibration

1. Open the sub dialogue Main and Sensor in the Pipettor dialogue. 2. Push the button Execute in the section OLV Calibration. The calibration is successful if an OK is indicated in the field Result. 3.3.8.5

Fill up of Starter Tubes

1. Verify that starter reagent containers are positioned in the starter reagent module Set A, Starter 1 and Starter 2 positions: 2 containers of each typology of starter shall be positioned. 2. Open the dialogue System and start priming with the button Starter. This will prime each bottle for starter 1 and 2.

3.4

Operation Qualification

3.4.1

Reagent Bay

1. Via Service Software, initialize the reagent bay (see chapter 7.4 on page 7-31). 2. Check status diodes of all lanes (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20). 3. Check the presence sensors and the RFID antennas of all lanes (see chapters 17.5.1.2 and 17.5.1.3 on page 17-39). 4. Verify that each position of the reagent area cools down to the allowed range (11-15 °C, see chapter 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39).

3.4.2

Sample Bay

1. Via Service Software, initialize the sample bay (see chapter 7.4 on page 7-31). 2. Check barcode scanner configuration (see chapter 16.4.1.1 on page 16-16). 3. Check status diodes of all lanes (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20). 4. For all lanes, check the presence sensors and perform a barcode reading test using customer barcoded vials (see chapter 16.4.1.2 on page 16-17). 5. Plug in the external handheld barcode reader and configure it (see chapter 24.2.1 on page 24-3).

Page 3-22



3.4.3

Starter Reagent Bay

1. Via Service Software, initialize the starter reagent bay (see chapter 7.4 on page 7-31). 2. Check status diodes of all lanes (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20). 3. Check the RFID antennas of all positions (see chapter 18.4.1.2 on page 18-13). 4. Verify that starter tubes heat up to the allowed range (35.5-37.5 °C, see chapter 10.4.5 on page 10-27).

3.4.4

Incubator

1. Via Service Software, initialize the incubator (see chapter 7.3 on page 7-12). 2. Verify that incubator temperature heats up to the allowed range (36.5-38.5 °C, see chapter 11.5.1 on page 11-71). 3. Load cuvettes into the incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.1 on page 7-29) 4. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the Incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.5 on page 7-30). 5. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from Incubator into the Waste (see chapter 7.3.7.4 on page 7-29).

3.4.5

Pipettor

1. Open the dialogue Pipettor of Service Software and initialize with All Dialog Controlled Modules. 3.4.5.1

LLD test of right arm

1. In lane 1, lane 12 and lane 25 of the reagent area, load integrals with at least 1 position filled with liquid and 1 empty position. 2. In ancillary bay, equip at least 1 bottle filled with liquid and 1 empty bottle. 3. Open the dialogue Pipettor of Service Software and initialize with All Dialog Controlled Modules. 4. In LLD Right Arm sub-dialogue, set an LLD test for all the previously indicated positions (see also chapter 7.6.5 on page 7-71). For the ancillary bottles, set also the correct bottle type using the dedicated Ancillary Rack dropdown field. 5. In LLD panel, set 10 cycles. 6. Press Execute button. 7. Once completed the test, verify the obtained results: •

The detections/ not detections of liquid shall be aligned to what set at point 1 and point 2;

•

For each position with liquid detected, the condition “Delta Z < 30” shall be verified.


Page 3-23


LLD test of left arm

1. In lane 1, lane 5 and lane 10 of the sample area, load racks with at least 1 tube filled with liquid and 1 empty tube. 2. In ancillary bay, equip at least 1 bottle filled with liquid and 1 empty bottle. 3. Verify that a tray completely filled with tips is equipped in the back position of the right DiTi drawer. 4. In LLD Left Arm sub-dialogue, set an LLD test for all the previously indicated positions (see also chapter 7.6.6 on page 7-73). For the ancillary bottles, set the correct bottle type using the dedicated Ancillary Rack drop-down field; for the sample racks, set the correct ID using the dedicated Sample Rack dropdown field. 5. In LLD panel, set 10 cycles. 6. Press Execute button. 7. Once completed the test, verify the obtained results: •

The detections/ not detections of liquid shall be aligned to what set at point 1 and point 2;

•

For each position with liquid detected, the condition “Delta Z < 30” shall be verified.

3.4.6

Back-up of system configuration

1. Perform backup of LiaisonXL.coo file on the instrument memory stick. 2. Perform backup of “.rac” files on the instrument memory stick.

3.4.7

System Verification

1. Initialize the instrument via LIAISON®XL Main UI.

3.4.8 3.4.8.1

Final Test Instrument setup

Before testing: •

All units must be properly installed and checked for the HW performances;

•

The instrument shall reach a stable thermal condition;

•

The instrument shall be fully primed with approved and valid Starters, Wash Liquid and Water.

3.4.8.2

Materials

See chapter 3.2.2 on page 3-3 for details. Final_Test_Liaison_XL.xls spreadsheet shall be also available to collect all data. This file is attached to LXL-TN-17 technical note.

Page 3-24



Background Wash (BGW)

Procedure The following procedure applies: 1. Run Service 10 BG task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule); 2. Open D:\LiaisonXL\Data\Maintenance\LightChecks.txt file and check results; 3. Collect and process the sets of data with the dedicated spreadsheet. Acceptance criteria Refer to LXL-TN-17 for details.

The execution of Service 10 BG maintenance task represents the easiest way to run Background final test. Anyway, it is possible to run the test also using other maintenance tasks (e.g. 3 BG + 3 BG + 3 BG + 1 Background to run 10 consecutive Background tests). In any cases, the successful execution of 10 consecutive Background shall be always achieved.

3.4.8.4

Light Check Right and Left (LC Ri/Le)

Procedure The following procedure applies: 1. Prepare 3 bottles of Light Check solution, following the Instructions for Use inserted in the package; 2. Pour the content of the 3 bottles into 1 bottle only, in order to run the complete test without need to change the ancillary; 3. Run Service 10 LCL 10 LCR task from dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule); 4. Open D:\LiaisonXL\Data\Maintenance\LightChecks.txt file and check results; 5. Collect and process with the dedicated spreadsheet data from all series.

The execution of Service 10 LCL 10 LCR maintenance task represents the easiest way to run Light Check final test. Anyway, it is possible to run the test also using other maintenance tasks (e.g. 3 LCR + 3 LCR + 3 LCR + 1 LCR to run 10 consecutive Light Check Right tests). In any cases, the successful execution of 10 consecutive LCL and 10 consecutive LCR shall be always achieved.


Page 3-25

3. LIAISON®XL Installation Acceptance criteria Refer to LXL-TN-17 for details. 3.4.8.5

NPAT testing: MP1s1c

Procedure The following procedure applies: 1. For the procedure refer to LIAISON®XL NPAT kit (319113) IFU provided with the kit; 2. Collect and process with the dedicated spreadsheet data obtained. Acceptance criteria Refer to LXL-TN-17 for details.

3.4.8.6

NPAT Testing: MP3s1c

Procedure The following procedure applies: 1. For the procedure refer to LIAISON®XL NPAT kit (319113) IFU provided with the kit; 2. Collect and process with the dedicated spreadsheet data obtained. Acceptance criteria Refer to LXL-TN-17 for details.

3.4.8.7

Data collection

1. Perform back up of log files. 2. Perform raw data printout and backup. 3. Verify that Final_Test_Liaison_XL.xls file has been completed and signed.

3.4.9

Printout customization

1. Install the printer (if necessary, see LXL-TN-42 for details). 2. Perform printout customization (if required by the customer, see chapter 24.5.3 on page 24-36).

Page 3-26


4. LIAISON®XL Removal

4 LIAISON®XL Removal As LIAISON®XL system is a complex system and contains delicate electrical and mechanical components, it must be packed by a qualified service engineer. The procedures reported in this chapter allows to complete the removal of LIAISON®XL analyzers successfully. For LIAISON®XL LAS instruments refer to chapter 25.5 on page 25-20.

4.1

Safety



•


•


Check System During the uninstallation of the system, always follow the steps indicated in LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Uninstallation check list (see chapter 26.3 on page 26-9). The proper execution and compilation of this check list will ensure the proper uninstallation of the instruments.

Instrument reinstallation If a removed instrument shall be reinstalled, always replace the washer needles and all tubings of DI water and wash solution lines (see chapter 22 for details).


Page 4-1


4.2

Preparation of sodium hypochlorite solution

The execution of some procedures to perform during instrument removal foresees the use of a sodium hypochlorite solution that shall be prepared according to the procedures reported below.

Instruction to prepare 2 L of solution at 0.5÷0.9% active chlorine: 1.

Fill the cleaning solution bottle with 1.8 L of water;

2. Add 200 mL of a sodium hypochlorite solution (e.g. bleach) with a 5÷9% content of active chlorine. In case the available sodium hypochlorite should have a different titer, please adjust the dilution accordingly; 3. Place the proper cap and briskly mix the container.

Instruction to prepare 1 L of solution at 0.5÷0.9% active chlorine: 1.

Fill the cleaning solution bottle with 0.9 L of water;

2. Add 100 mL of a sodium hypochlorite solution (e.g. bleach) with a 5÷9% content of active chlorine. In case the available sodium hypochlorite should have a different titer, please adjust the dilution accordingly; 3. Place the proper cap and briskly mix the container.

Page 4-2



4.3

Data deleting and Decontamination 1. Delete patient database. 2. Empty Liquid Waste Containers, add hypochlorite solution (see chapter 5 of LIAISON®XL User Manual) and load them back into the system. 3. Run Service Decontamination2 task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 4. Switch the liquid waste tank. 5. Run Clean-up Washer task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule), in order to decontaminate the second liquid waste line also.

The current version of Clean-up Washer task asks to use Liqui-Nox® in place of sodium hypochlorite solution. This indication shall be ignored during instrument removal, sodium hypochlorite solution shall be used to run the task. 6. Empty starter, cleaning, water and wash containers and intermediate containers. 7. Load empty containers into the system and empty liquid lines (using the procedures of chapters 3.3.8.1, 3.3.8.2, 3.3.8.3 and 3.3.8.5). 8. Remove all containers from the system.

4.3.1

Decontamination of Liquid Waste Containers

The procedure reported in this section shall be applied only when liquid waste containers shall be shipped with the analyzer. Otherwise, it is possible to dispose the tanks without performing this additional decontamination.

The below reported procedure shall be applied only once the liquid waste containers have been emptied according to the procedure described in Chapter 5 of LIAISON®XL User Manual. In particular it is necessary to verify that at least 200mL of commercial hypochlorite or bleach are loaded in each container at the beginning of the procedure. 1. Disconnect the sensor connectors of both containers. 2. Disconnect the liquid connectors and remove the containers. 3. Unscrew the caps of the containers. 4. Add DI water until both containers are completely filled. 5. Screw the caps back and wait for at least 30 minutes (during this period it is possible to continue with the decontamination of the other parts of the instrument). 6. Empty the containers and rinse them thoroughly with DI water. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 4-3

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 7. Repeat the previous operation at least two more times for each container.

To ensure an adequate rinsing, it is recommended to fill the tanks at least at half volume. Water to be used has to be defined according to CLSI guidelines for laboratory water (“Instrument Feed Water” type, see chapter 27.9 on page 27-6).

4.3.2

Removal of cuvettes

1. Open the dialogue Incubator of Service Software and initialize with All Dialog Controlled Modules. 2. In Spindle Movement panel of Main and Move sub-dialogue, set “for 30 Cuvettes Positions” and press Rotation button. 3. Perform cuvette unload (see chapter 7.3.7.2 on page 7-29). 4. Quit the Service Software, switch off the Analyzer and disconnect it from the mains supply. 5. By hands, remove all cuvettes from the reservoir. 6. By hands, remove all cuvettes from sorter pot, cuvette chute and cuvette supply. 7. Connect the Analyzer to the mains supply and switch it on. 8. Open the dialogue Incubator of Service Software and initialize with All Dialog Controlled Modules. 9. In Basic Operations panel of Main sub-dialogue, press Auger On button. Wait ~ 15-20 minutes until all cuvettes in the auger are moved to the sorter pot. 10. Press Auger Off button. 11. Quit the Service Software, switch off again the instrument and disconnect it from the mains supply. 12. Remove the remaining cuvettes from the sorter pot.

4.3.3

Removal of other consumables and disposables

1. Remove all tubes out of the sample racks. 2. Remove all integrals out of the reagent module. 3. Remove all ancillaries out of the ancillary bay. 4. Remove all disposables tips out of the disposable tip drawers. 5. Remove and dispose the solid waste bag. 6. Remove and dispose (if possible) the solid waste bin. 7. Remove and dispose (if possible) the waste tank bulk (if previously installed). 8. Remove and dispose the cuvette waste tube. 9. Remove and dispose the wash/ waste station.

Page 4-4



4.3.4

Cleaning procedures

Pipettor, primary and intermediate tanks shall be cleaned using the procedures reported in Chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual but using sodium hypochlorite solution in place of Liqui-Nox® one. 1. Clean the pipettor, the analyzer interior, the primary and intermediate tanks and the covers (refer to chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual). 2. Using tissues soaked with a solution of sodium hypochlorite clean: a) The incubator cover (inner and outer); b) Washer “blue” top plate (inner and outer); c) Washer needles (externally); d) Reader lid (inner and outer); e) Reader aspiration needle (externally); f)

Cabinet (waste and tank areas);

g) Solid waste case; h) The top surface of the tip waste tube; i)

Liquid waste tanks (externally, if it is necessary to ship them with the instrument);

j)

Solid waste bin (if not disposed);

k) Waste tank bulk (if not disposed). 3. Using tissues soaked with an alcoholic/ disinfectant solution clean: a) Auger Cover; b) Sorter pot; c) Reagent Module (inner and outer, cover included); d) Cuvette Reservoir; e) Disposable Tip Module and Drawers; f)

Inner parts of Left and Right Top Covers;

g) Cabinet (PC area).

4.3.5

Confirm decontamination

1. Complete the certificate of the decontamination (included in DiaSorin Common Technical Note 1). 2. Add the certificate of decontamination to the transportation documents.


Page 4-5


4.4

Packaging of the System

4.4.1

Preparation

At least two persons are required for packing the instrument. 1. Remove the printer support (if previously installed, see chapter 9.3.14 on page 932). 2. Remove upper and lower back covers (if previously installed, see chapter 9.3.10.2 on page 9-24). 3. Remove rear Slotted Cover (see chapter 9.3.9.2 on page 9-23). 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 8. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.5.2 on page 9-9). 9. Remove Monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.2 on page 9-15). 10. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18). 11. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 12. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 13. Remove Extensible Board (see chapter 9.3.12.2 on page 9-30). 14. Remove Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.2 on page 9-27).

Page 4-6


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 15. Move the Sample Pipettor (1) into the middle position and secure with one cable tie (2). 16. Overdraw the foam (3) at the rear bar and the foam (4) at the front bar.

Figure 4.4-1: Fix Sample Pipettor 17. Push the OLV probe pipettor (5) 3/4 up and fasten it with one cable tie (6). 18. Overdraw the foam (7) at the rear bar and the foam (8) at the front bar.

Figure 4.4-2: OLV probe pipettor


Page 4-7

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 19. Overdraw foam (9) over the front pipettor guide.

Figure 4.4-3: Front pipettor guide 20. Insert racks into the sample module.

Figure 4.4-4: Sample Module, racks

Page 4-8


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 21. Remove the caps of WAP (11) and WPRP (10). Put them into a bag and add it to the shipping box. 22. Unplug on one side the tubes of the pumps.

Figure 4.4-5: Unplug tubes of WPRP pump

Figure 4.4-6: Unplug tubes of WAP pump


Page 4-9

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 23. Push gently the reader (13) and the washer (14) down.

Figure 4.4-7: Washer and reader 24. Coil up the USB cable (15) and put it onto the right side. 25. Fix USB Hub cable (17) onto the cable holders.

Figure 4.4-8: USB cable.

Page 4-10


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 26. Fix cuvette reservoir with residue free tape (16) onto frame.

Figure 4.4-9: Fix cuvette reservoir


Page 4-11


4.4.2 4.4.2.1

Packing of the system Overview packing material

1. Foam angles (1).

Figure 4.4-10: Foam angles 2. Foot stop detents (2).

Figure 4.4-11: Foot Stop detents

Page 4-12


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 3. Side stop detents (3).

Figure 4.4-12: Side stop detents

4. Lever (4), for lifting system up.

Figure 4.4-13: Lever


Page 4-13

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 4.4.2.2

Packing of the system

1. Remove all screws of front cover (loading ramp) of the shipping container. Front cover will fall over after unscrewing its screws.

Disposable tip drawers shall be packed with the instrument.

2. Remove all packing material out of the shipping container. 3. Unscrew the wooden board (B), put the foot angles (C) of the loading ramp (A) upright and set wooden board (B) into the cut out.


Page 4-14



Figure 4.4-15: Loading ramp


Page 4-15

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 4. Overdraw the cover foil over the system.

Figure 4.4-16: System with cover foil 5. Set the loading ramp (A) in front of the container. 6. In front of the loading ramp set the chamfered wooden ramp. 7. Push the system carefully into the shipping container.

Page 4-16



Figure 4.4-17: Empty shipping container

Figure 4.4-18: System in the shipping container


Page 4-17

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 8. Lift system with lever (4) up and slide foot stop detents (2) in.

Figure 4.4-19: Mount foot stop detents

Figure 4.4-20: Foot stop detents

Page 4-18


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 9. Set side stop detents (3) in and fasten screws.

Figure 4.4-21: Side stop detent, left side

Figure 4.4-22: Side stop detent, right side


Page 4-19

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 10. Slide wooden ramp into the slot. 11. Fasten wooden side covers onto the shipping container.

Figure 4.4-23: Wooden ramp 12. Fix system with two angle foams. (chamfer (D) is in the box.)

Figure 4.4-24: Angle foams

Page 4-20


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 13. Fasten the wood angles with the board and close the shipping box with enclosed screws.

Figure 4.4-25: Shipping container ready to close front module.

Figure 4.4-26: Shipping box with labels


Page 4-21


4.4.3

Packing covers

1. Foam (5) for back covers.

Figure 4.4-27: Packing foam for back panel 2. Place foam pieces (5a) on the bottom of the container.

Figure 4.4-28: Foams on the bottom

Page 4-22


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 3. Set lower back cover carefully onto the foam pieces (5a). 4. Insert foam (5b) onto lower back cover.

Figure 4.4-29: Foams onto lower back cover

Figure 4.4-30: Foams onto lower back cover

5. Set the upper back cover carefully onto the foam pieces (5b).


Page 4-23


Figure 4.4-31: Upper back cover positioning 6. Set the foam pieces (5a) on top of the upper back cover.

Figure 4.4-32: Foams onto upper back cover

Lower and upper back covers are optional, so steps 2 to 6 apply only in case they are present. If they are not available, follow the same procedure to place foams (5a) and (5b) on the bottom of the container.

Page 4-24



Figure 4.4-33: Back covers foam positioning – back covers not available


Page 4-25


7.

Lay left side panel carefully into the container, outside facing down.

Figure 4.4-34: Insert side panel left into container

Figure 4.4-35: Side panel left in container

Page 4-26


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 8. Foam for side panel.

Figure 4.4-36: Foam side panel 9. Be aware of the recess clearance of the foam.

Figure 4.4-37: Foam side panel


Page 4-27

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 10. Insert foams (6) for side panel into container. Take care of the orientation of the cut out. The cut out is for the latch of the side panel.

Figure 4.4-38: Foam for side panel positioned into the container 11. Insert rear slotted cover into the middle and fix it with two foam pieces (7).

Figure 4.4-39: Rear Slotted Cover

Page 4-28


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 12. Lift right side panel into container.

Figure 4.4-40: Right side panel 13. Foam pieces (8-11) for top covers.

Figure 4.4-41: Foam pieces for top covers


Page 4-29

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 14. Insert foam pieces (8-11) for top covers

Figure 4.4-42: Foam pieces for top covers 15. Lift carefully left top cover onto foam pieces.

Figure 4.4-43: Left top cover

Page 4-30


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 16. Set right top cover carefully onto the foam.

Figure 4.4-44: Right top cover 17. Overdraw over each gas spring (12) thread an air bubble wrap (13).

Figure 4.4-45: Cover for gas spring


Page 4-31

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 18. Coil the cables of the right top cover and fix them with a cable tie (14).

Figure 4.4-46: Right top cover 19. Foams for extensible board

Figure 4.4-47: Foams (15-16) for extensible board

Page 4-32


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 20. Slide foams (15-16) onto extensible board and set it on the left top cover.

Figure 4.4-48: Extensible keyboard 21. Foams for cabinet cover.

Figure 4.4-49: Foams for cabinet cover


Page 4-33

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 22. Insert one foam piece (17) for cabinet cover into the box.

Figure 4.4-50: Foam for cabinet front cover 23. Slide cabinet cover carefully into the foam piece inside the box.

Figure 4.4-51: Cabinet front cover

Page 4-34


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 24. Slide second foam (18) into cabinet front cover and let it carefully down.

Figure 4.4-52: Insert the second foam



Page 4-35

4. LIAISON®XL Removal 25. Insert foam piece into left side of cabinet front cover door.

Figure 4.4-54: Cabinet front cover 26. Insert foam piece into right side of cabinet front cover door.


Page 4-36


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 27. Front module holder. (21)

Figure 4.4-56: Front module holder 28. Insert front module holder into foam pieces.

Figure 4.4-57: Front module holder 29. Insert front module carefully into the foam pieces.

Figure 4.4-58: Front module


Page 4-37


Figure 4.4-59: Front module in place

Figure 4.4-60: Foam pieces for blind covers

Page 4-38


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 30. Insert foam pieces for blind covers.

Figure 4.4-61: Foam piece for blind covers 31. Insert blind covers into foam pieces.

Figure 4.4-62: Insert left blind cover


Page 4-39


Figure 4.4-63: Insert right blind cover 32. Lay a foam piece (24) onto the highest point of the front module.

Figure 4.4-64: All covers in box

Page 4-40


4. LIAISON®XL Removal 33. Lay the cover onto the box.

Figure 4.4-65: Cover box 34. Fasten with screw at stamp Open here on top and on side of the box.

Figure 4.4-66: Closed box


Page 4-41


4.4.4

Packing of Accessories

The accessories to pack are the following:

Page 4-42

•

Two waste containers (if not disposed before);

•

One water container;

•

Two wash solution containers;

•

One cleaning container;

•

Lever (see Figure 4.4-13);

•

Ancillary tray and two light check adapters;

•

Integral holder;

•

Sample rack holder;

•

Waste tank bulk (if present and not disposed before);

•

Two control racks;

•

Sample tube tool;

•

External barcode reader;

•

PC;

•

Monitor cardboard including: o

USB stick

o

Blue caps and tubes of WPRP pump

o

Gray caps and tubes of WAP pump

o

Power cable

o

Monitor.

•

LAS lid (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments);

•

LAS lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments);

•

LAS safety repair set (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments);

•

LAS left side repair (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments).



Figure 4.4-67: Accessory box


Page 4-43

5. Maintenance Schedule

5 Maintenance Schedule The LIAISON®XL and the LIAISON®XL LAS systems were designed to be as maintenance free as possible. However, given the functional, precision and reliability requirements of the complex applications the systems are used for, regular care and attention are necessary to maintain the high quality of system performance. For some components regular maintenance procedures could not be avoided in the design process. The standard maintenance intervals given below assume a working time of the instrument of 8 hours/day, 5 days/week, 500 results/day, in a normal laboratory environment. Maintenance intervals should be shortened in case of more intense usage of the instrument (see chapter 5.5 on page 5-20 for details) or usage in demanding environmental conditions (dust, heat, humidity). The description of requalification, cleaning and lubrication procedures to be performed during service visits are also reported in chapter 5.3 and chapter 5.4.

5.1

Safety

Improper Maintenance Work Improper maintenance work can result in serious personal injuries and material damages. •


•

Follow the work instructions included in this manual.

•

Take off watches and jewellery before performing any maintenance works.

Maintenance responsibility Defective parts that result from the non-fulfillment of proper maintenance intervals are the sole responsibility of country specific distributors. DiaSorin S.p.A. is not liable for defective parts due to non-performance of required maintenance intervals.

Check System During the periodic maintenance of the system, always follow the steps indicated in 6Months Maintenance (see chapter 26.4 on page 26-12) and 12-Months Maintenance (see chapter 26.5 on page 26-17) check lists. The proper execution and compilation of these check lists will ensure the completion of the proper periodic maintenance of the instruments.


Page 5-1


The below reported procedure shall be applied for the execution of both 6-month and 12-month maintenances. The differences between the operations to perform every 6 months and those to execute every 12 months are highlighted in the dedicated steps.

5.2

6-Months and 12-Months Maintenance

5.2.1

List of required material

•

Set of hexagon socket wrench (Allen key)

•

Set of cross slotted screw driver

•

Set of slotted screw driver

•

Set of screw wrench

•

Side cutter.

•

Spindle adjustment tool.

5.2.2

System Cleaning

1. Empty Liquid Waste Containers, add hypochlorite solution (see chapter 5 of LIAISON®XL User Manual) and load them back into the system. 2. Empty cleaning solution bottle and rinse it thoroughly with DI water. 3. Prepare 1L of Liqui-Nox® solution, following the procedure described in chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual. 4. Run Service Decontamination1 task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule), without considering the last two prompts (press Accept in both cases). 5. Remove all cuvettes from the system (see chapter 4.3.2 on page 4-4). 6. Remove all integrals out of the reagent module. 7. Remove the ancillary bottles and the ancillary tray. 8. Remove all disposable tips out of the disposable tip drawers. 9. Remove and dispose the solid waste bag.

5.2.3

PC & Accessories

1. Clean PC, printer, magnetothermic and UPS (if present). 2. Adjust Touch screen calibration (see chapter 24.2.2 on page 24-6). 3. Perform the Database back-up task. 4. Perform the AllLogArchives back-up task. 5. Check that databases (Results/ All, Results/ Archived, Results/ Deleted, Results/ Calibrations, Maintenance/ Log) have not reached dimensions that compromise the proper browsing of the database. In case this condition is verified, clean up the databases:

Page 5-2


5. Maintenance Schedule •

Reduce as much as possible the items in the Results/ All page (i.e. delete unnecessary results according to customer feedback);

•

Reduce as much as possible the items in the Results/ Archived page (i.e. delete unnecessary results according to customer feedback);

•

Reduce as much as possible the items in the Results/ Calibrations page (i.e. remove all Unused calibrations);

•

Delete all items from Results/ Deleted page;

•

Delete all unused group definitions (according to customer feedback);

•

Delete all unused control definitions (according to customer feedback);

•

Delete Maintenance/ Log (according to customer feedback).

6. Check that at the least 20% of D:\ partition of the hard disk is free. If this condition is not verified, delete .the items present in D:\LiaisonXL\Data\ Temp_archives. 7. Check printer functionalities (if present). 8. Check UPS functionalities (if present). 9. Check the functionality of the magnetothermic – earth leakage switch by using the test button available on the switch. 10. Run Antivirus application (see section 24.4.3 on page 24-19).

5.2.4

Preparation for maintenance of internal modules

1. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 2. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 3. Open top covers. 4. Move pipettor arms to a safe location. 5. Remove the incubator cover (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4).

5.2.5

Maintenance of the incubator belt

The procedure reported in this chapter shall be applied only in case of 12-month maintenance.

The maintenance of the incubator belt shall be performed using a lint free cloth and isopropanol. 1. Without removing the belt from the incubator, check:


•

The upper incubator guides (1).

•

The belt junction.

•

The holes responsible for the mechanical coupling with the pulleys.

Page 5-3

5. Maintenance Schedule 2. In case of detected damages or cracks or belt not moving properly, the incubator belt or the incubator guides shall be replaced (see chapter 11.3.4 on page 11-13) during a new visit after having the spare part available.

Figure 5.2-1: Check of the upper incubator guides

Figure 5.2-2: Belt junction

Page 5-4



Figure 5.2-3: Belt holes 3. Without removing the belt from the incubator, check the drive and the guide pulleys: all bearings responsible for the mechanical coupling with the belt shall be present. 4. If some bearings are missing, the pulley shall be replaced during a new visit after having the spare part available.

Figure 5.2-4: Bearings of the drive pulley


Page 5-5


Figure 5.2-5: Bearings of the guide pulley 5. In case the belt and the pulleys are found dirty during the previous inspection, remove the incubator belt (see chapter 11.3.4.2 on page 11-13) and perform the next actions using a lint free cloth soaked with isopropanol: •

Clean the inner surfaces of the belt.

•

Clean the outer surfaces of the drive pulley.

•

Clean the outer surfaces of the guide pulley.

•

Clean the upper (1) and lower (16) incubator guides.

•

In case the lower guides (16) are found damaged, they shall be replaced during a new visit after having the spare parts available.

Figure 5.2-6: Cleaning of the belt

Page 5-6



Figure 5.2-7: Cleaning of the drive pulley

Figure 5.2-8: Cleaning of the guide pulley


Page 5-7


Figure 5.2-9: Check and cleaning of the lower incubator guides 6. If previously removed, assemble the incubator belt (see chapter 11.3.4.3 on page 11-17).

5.2.6

Maintenance of the inner parts

The cleanings described below shall be performed using Liqui-Nox® solution. See chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual for the preparation. 1. Remove the washer module. 2. Remove the reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 3. Remove the incubator downholder. 4. Remove the spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 5. Clean the spindle. 6. Clean the spindle channel of the reader. 7. Clean the reader lid (inner and outer). 8. Clean the spindle channel of the incubator. 9. Clean the incubator downholder and the associated metal spring (Figure 5.2-10).

Figure 5.2-10: Downholder metal spring Page 5-8


5. Maintenance Schedule 10. Using a tissue light soaked with silicon spray, lubricate the surfaces of the downholder in contact with cuvettes moving into the spindle channel (Figure 5.2-11). Replace the downholder if required (i.e. the cuvettes can’t slide regularly and smooth with this part mounted, maybe due to crystallizations or too high friction).

Figure 5.2-11: Incubator downholder – Area to lubricate 11. Clean the gates of W-I and I-W pushers. 12. Clean the 3 metal sheets (left, middle, right) under the incubator downholder (Figure 5.2-12,Figure 5.2-13 and Figure 5.2-14). 13. Using a tissue light soaked with silicon spray, lubricate the left and the middle metal sheets (Figure 5.2-12 and Figure 5.2-13). Replace them if required (i.e. the cuvettes can’t slide regularly and smooth with this part mounted, maybe due to crystallizations or too high friction).

Figure 5.2-12: Left metal sheet


Page 5-9


Figure 5.2-13: Middle metal sheet

Figure 5.2-14: Right metal sheet

In case a fold is found while lubricating these parts, they need to be replaced. 14. Clean the cuvette supply metal sheet. 15. Using a tissue light soaked with silicon spray, lubricate the cuvette supply metal sheet in contact with cuvettes (Figure 5.2-15).

Page 5-10



Figure 5.2-15: Cuvette supply metal sheet 16. Clean the incubator cover. 17. Clean the top surface of the tip waste tube.

5.2.7

Maintenance of the washer module

The cleanings described below shall be performed using Liqui-Nox® solution. See chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual for the preparation. 1. Remove the reader needle and the washer needles. 2. Remove washer-WAP and reader-WAP aspiration tubings (see chapter 22.3.1.2 on page 22-8). 3. Remove the washer adjustment blocks. 4. Replace washer guiding bushings (see chapter 13.3.6 on page 13-19). 5. Clean the washer “blue” top plate (inner and outer). 6. Clean the adjustment blocks. 7. Assemble the adjustment blocks. 8. Assemble new washer-WAP and reader-WAP aspiration tubings (see chapter 22.3.1.3 on page 22-15). 9. Assemble new washer and reader needles.

5.2.8

Maintenance of the pumps and tubings

1. Replace syringe of SRP pump (see chapter 19.4.3 on page 19-20). 2. Check valve of SRP pump (see chapter 19.4.4 on 19-23): o

In case the working period of the valve is less than 3 years for regular instruments or 1 year for high volume instruments, inspect and if necessary replace it;

o

In case a working period of 3 years for regular instruments or 1 year for high volume instruments is reached, replace it in any cases.


Page 5-11

5. Maintenance Schedule 3. Replace tubings of WPRP and WAP pumps (see chapters 19.6.3 and 19.7.3). 4. Replace the filter of the debubbler (see chapter 22.3.20 on page 22-55). 5. Inspect and if necessary replace all other tubings (with the exception of starter reagent tubings) – see chapter 22.

5.2.9

Maintenance of the cabinet (waste and tank areas)

The cleanings described below shall be performed using Liqui-Nox® solution. See chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual for the preparation. 1. Remove all tanks and intermediate tanks from the cabinet. 2. Remove the waste basin and clean it. 3. Remove the solid waste bin (if present) and clean it. 4. Clean the cabinet inner parts (drawers, waste and tank areas). 5. Clean the solid waste case. 6. Put water primary and intermediate tanks back into the cabinet. 7. Put wash solution primary and intermediate tanks back into the cabinet. 8. Insert the waste basin back into the cabinet. 9. Insert waste containers back into the cabinet and connect them to their sensors and tubings. 10. If present, insert the solid waste bin back into the cabinet. 11. Insert a new bag into the solid waste case.

5.2.10

Maintenance of the reagent module

1. Remove the reagent module cover. 2. Remove the stirrer and the sliding bearings (see chapter 17.3.3.2 on page 17-11). 3. Inspect the removed bearings: if one or more bearings are worn, replace the stirrer. 4. Dispose the sliding bearings previously dismounted. 5. Clean the reagent module (inner and outer, cover included) using an alcohol/ disinfectant solution. During the cleaning of the reagent module, be sure to remove any residual of dust between the fins and in the holes hosting the sliding bearings. 6. Assemble new sliding bearings and mount the stirrer (see chapter 17.3.3.3 on page 17-15). 7. Assemble the reagent module cover.

Page 5-12



5.2.11

Maintenance of the pipettor

The maintenance of the pipettor shall be performed using lint free cloth, isopropanol and oil (PN 72229616).

Before using the oil, the isopropanol must be evaporated or wiped off from the rods. Do not apply too much oil on the rods, because of potential system contamination. 1. Inspect and if necessary replace Z bearings of the sample probe (see chapter 15.3.21 on page 15-69). 2. Inspect and if necessary replace Z bearing of the OLV probe (see chapter 15.3.22 on page 15-70). 3. Wipe the whole length of the X and Y pipettor rods (see Figure 5.2-16) with a lint free cloth soaked with isopropanol. 4. Wipe all rods with a lint free cloth soaked with oil. A thin film of oil shall remain. 5. Verify the proper behavior moving both pipettor modules 5 times in axial Xdirection and 5 times in axial Y-direction.

Figure 5.2-16: Pipettor rods- X and Y directions


Page 5-13


5.2.12

Cleaning of other surfaces

The cleanings described below shall be performed using an alcohol/ disinfectant solution. 1. Clean the auger cover. 2. Clean the sorter pot. 3. Clean the disposable tip drawers. 4. Clean the cuvette reservoir. 5. Clean the cabinet (PC area). 6. Clean inner parts of left and right top covers.

5.2.13

System Restore & Periodic Recalibrations

1. Perform the calibration of the belt (only in case of belt removed during 12month maintenance, see chapter 11.4.1 on page 11-63). 2. Check the calibration of the cuvette presence sensor transport (only in case of belt removed during 12-month maintenance, see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64). 3. Assemble the spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 4. Check the calibration of the spindle position (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42). 5. Assemble the reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 6. Assemble the downholder of the incubator module. 7. Assemble the washer module. 8. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the Incubator (only in case of belt removed during 12-month maintenance, see chapter 7.3.7.5 on page 7-30). 9. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from Incubator into the Waste (only in case of belt removed during 12-month maintenance, see chapter 7.3.7.4 on page 7-29). 10. Assemble the incubator cover (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 11. Check the reagent integrals stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1 on page 17-38). 12. Put tip trays into the dedicated drawers. 13. Put cuvettes into the dedicated reservoir. 14. Load cuvettes into the system (see chapter 3.3.4.5 on page 3-15). 15. Check washer needle height calibration (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26). 16. Calibrate the washer bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2 on page 13-28). 17. Calibrate the starter bubble sensors (see chapter 18.4.1.3 on page 18-13). 18. Check pipettor teaching (see chapter 8). 19. Check the teaching of LAS aspiration position (only for LIAISON®XL LAS instruments, see chapter 25.4.3 on page 25-14). 20. Perform LLD test of right arm (see chapter 3.4.5.1 on page 3-23). 21. Perform LLD test of left arm (see chapter 3.4.5.2 on page 3-23).

Page 5-14


5. Maintenance Schedule 22. Prime tubings of system via Service Software (see chapter 3.3.8 on page 3-22).

5.2.14

Backup of system configuration

1. Perform backup of LiaisonXL.coo file on the instrument memory stick. 2. Perform backup of “.rac” files on the instrument memory stick.

5.2.15

Requalification test

1. Run Service 3 BG task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 2. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 10.00%. 3. Run Service 3 LCR task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 4. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. 5. Run Service 3 LCL task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 6. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. 7. Perform the calibration and the control of one of the kits available at customer site. 8. Verify that the obtained values are in range. 9. Perform raw data printout and backup. 10. Disable all customer calibrations, using Disable button available in Main UI (Main category Results, sub-category Calibrations). 11. Inform the customer that all kits in use must be recalibrated. For the re-run rules in case of failures of tests, please refer to LXL-TN-17.

The successful execution of 3 consecutive BG, 3 consecutive LCL and 3 consecutive LCR shall be always achieved.


Page 5-15


5.3

Instrument re-qualification after service visit

During a Field Service intervention some parts of the instrument (assembly, sensor, motor, pump, tubing, etc.) may be replaced and/or re-adjusted to troubleshoot and solve the problem on the instrument. Depending on the activities performed, before releasing the instrument to run patient sample, a final re-qualification (similar to the one described in section 5.2.15) may be required, as well as the reagent integral re-calibration. These activities are specified in Table 5.3-1.

5.3.1

Background and rationales

The Service actions detailed in chapter 5.3.2: •

are assumed to involve critical instrument components for the core characteristics of assay performance (i.e.: pipettor, incubator, washer, reader) and, due to this, are deemed to require (where specified in chapter 5.3.2) a specific re-qualification related to the area of interest;

•

for the same reason, are deemed to require re-calibration of the assays used by the Final User potentially impacting the assay calibration RLU levels.

All the other Service actions not explicitly listed in chapter 5.3.2 are implicitly deemed not to require any specific re-qualification/ re-calibration, since not deemed to be involving or impacting on core instrument functionalities impacting on assay performance.

5.3.2 Assembly involved

Service interventions Reagent Integral re-calibration required

Test required (Repetition)

Part/ intervention

LCL

LCR

-

3

3

Yes

Incubator

Belt replacement include pulley, motor)

Pipettors

Left pipettor

-

3

-

Yes

Right pipettor probe and related electronics (OLV) and fluidics

-

-

3

Yes

SRP syringe and/or SRP three-way valve

-

-

3

Yes

Wash (WDP)

3

-

-

Yes

Washer Distribution Valve Block (WDVB) Washer module, washer motor, Z rods, bearings Starter pump

3

-

-

Yes

3

-

-

Yes

3

3

3

Yes

Heated starter lines

3

3

3

Yes

Measure chamber, Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) and related electronics

3

3

3

Yes

Washer

Reader

dispense

(to

BG

pump

Table 5.3-1: Service interventions

Page 5-16



Table 5.3-1 lists all parts for which a kit re-calibration is required upon conclusion of a service intervention. This information is deemed as a better clarification of the information reported in the assay IFU. The FSE shall guarantee that at least the first kit re-calibration is successfully completed before the service call is closed. Kit re-calibration is deemed not required when the object of the intervention is a part not listed in Table 5.3-1. In such a case FSE may inform the end user that the kit recalibration is not needed. Anyway the end user has the right to decide if performing or not the kit re-calibration.

The results of the requalification activities must be specified in the Service records (for Subsidiaries only: SGAT Ws), together with a detailed description of the Service activities performed on the analyzer.

3 repetitions mean “3 successful consecutive repetitions”. See LXL-TN-17 for re-rerun rules.

5.4

Cleanings and lubrications during service visits

In order to avoid possible cuvette jams, at the end of each service visit, before performing the system requalification indicated in chapter 5.3, it is required to perform also the operations described in the following chapters.

5.4.1

Inspection of the reader lid and spindle assemblies, cleaning activities

1. Remove the reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5) and, if needed, clean it with paper cloth and DI water. An example of a reader lid with crystallizations that need to be cleaned is represented in Figure 5.4-1.

Figure 5.4-1: Example of reader lid with crystallizations LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 5-17

5. Maintenance Schedule 2. If required, unscrew also the two starter heated tubing from the lid of the reader and clean them as well. 3. Check the spindle and if crystallizations are present clean it with paper cloth and DI-water, turning the motor joint while wiping. An example of a spindle with crystallizations that need to be cleaned is represented in Figure 5.4-2.

Figure 5.4-2: Spindle with crystallizations 4. Check the reader channel and if crystallizations are present clean it with paper cloth and DI-water, removing any presence of crystallization. An example of a reader channel that needs to be cleaned is represented in Figure 5.4-3.

Figure 5.4-3: Reader channel that needs to be cleaned

Page 5-18



5.4.2

Inspection of the reader inner mechanism, cleaning activities

Once the reader channel has been checked and cleaned, in case evident sign of crystallyzation of inner mechanism are present, remove the reader assembly (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15) and clean the bottom of the reader with a paper cloth and DI-water. Dismount the reader inner mechanism (see chapter 14.3.8.2 on page 14-24) and clean all the inner parts with paper cloth and DI-water, removing any presence of crystallization. Once all parts involved are clean and dry, re-mount the inner mechanism of the reader (see chapter 14.3.8.3 on page 14-30).

5.4.3

Lubrication of downholder and metal sheets

Using a tissue light soaked with silicon spray, perform the lubrication of the downholder (see Figure 5.2-11), the left and middle metal sheets (see Figure 5.2-12 and Figure 5.2-13) and the cuvette supply metal sheet (see Figure 5.2-15). Replace them if required (i.e. the cuvettes can’t slide regularly and smooth with this part mounted, maybe due to crystallizations or too high friction).

In case a fold is found while lubricating these parts, they need to be replaced.

5.4.4

Instrument recovery and test

After remounting of all dismounted assemblies, only in case the spindle has been removed perform its calibration (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42). Then perform some incubator sequences using Service Software: 1. In any cases, run twice a sequence of 30 cuvettes from the Incubator into the Waste (see chapters 7.3.7.3 and 7.3.7.4 on page 7-29). 2. Only in case the spindle has been removed, perform also twice a sequence of 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the Incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.5 on page 7-30). 3. In case the inner mechanism has been removed perform also 30 cycles Up/Mid/Down of reader shutter movement (see chapter 7.5.1 on page 7-49).

5.4.5

Activities traceability on SGAT (only for subsidiaries)

Depending on the cleaning activities performed on those assemblies, the correct field in SGAT ERROR CODES has to be selected after the Main Fault selection while completing that parts of the Work Sheet. Here below the possibilities: Category

Component

Type Fault

Type Action

Reader

Reader Assembly

Dirty

Cleaned

Reader

Shutter Mechanism

Dirty

Cleaned

Reader

Spindle Assembly

Dirty

Cleaned

Reader

Reader Lid

Dirty

Cleaned

Table 5.4-1: Activities traceability on SGAT LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 5-19


5.5

Maintenance procedure for high throughput customers

Maintenance Procedures described in section 5.2 are generally suitable for a customer running up to 500 results/ day (see also introduction of this chapter). In case of an higher throughput, those procedures will have to be performed with an higher frequency, and further inspection visits might be required as well. Purpose of this chapter is to describe a dedicated maintenance procedure (User and Service) to be applied for LIAISON® XL and LIAISON® XL LAS high throughput customers, whereby the system is cleaned and the relevant parts are checked/ changed with a frequency that reasonably guarantees continuity of operations. Two scenarios will be considered: •

500-1000 results/day;

•

over 1000 results/day.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide guidelines only, therefore the implementation is not mandatory unless different agreement with Corporate Service is defined.

5.5.1

500-1000 results/day

For those systems it is required to: •

No changes in the USER Maintenance

•

Increase the frequency of the PM activities: o

•

3 PM visits/year are required (i. e. alternately performing the 6 and 12 Months PM every 4 months)

Perform additional FSE monthly visit: o

Monthly inspection visits include a check and review of some areas of the instrument in order to ensure the system cleanliness and calibrations. The activities to perform are detailed in chapter 5.5.3.

Activities

Daily

Weekly

Monthly

Every 4 months

Every 8 months

Every 12 months

User Activities (no change) User Weekly Maintenance User Monthly Maintenance

X X FSE Activities

Monthly Inspection visit 6 Months PM procedure 12 Months PM procedure

Page 5-20

X

X

X X


5. Maintenance Schedule 3-way valve replacement

X Table 5.5-1: 500/1000 results/day maintenance

5.5.2

Over 1000 results/day

For those systems it is required to: •

•

Increase the frequency of USER Maintenance: o

the monthly procedure shall be done weekly;

o

the weekly procedure shall be done daily.

Increase the frequency of the PM activities: o

•

4 PM visits/year are required (i. e. alternately perform the 6 and 12 Months PM every 3 months)

Perform additional FSE monthly: o

Monthly inspection visits include a check and review of some areas of the instrument in order to ensure the system cleanliness and calibrations. This activities are detailed in chapter 5.5.3.

Activities

Daily

Weekly

Monthly

Every 3 months

Every 6 months

Every 9 months

Every 12 months

User Activities User Weekly Maintenance User Monthly Maintenance

X X FSE Activities

Monthly Inspection visit

X

6 Months PM procedure

X

12 Months PM procedure

X X

X

3-way valve replacement

X Table 5.5-2: over 1000 results/day maintenance

5.5.3 5.5.3.1

Procedures User Maintenance (over 1000 results/day)

The following procedures shall be applied: •

Daily -> Execute the current Weekly procedure.

•

Weekly -> Execute the current Monthly procedure.


Page 5-21


The increasing of User Maintenance activities will have to be fine tuned with the customer routine, without compromising the workflow in the laboratory.

5.5.3.2

FSE Maintenance

The following procedures shall be applied: •

6 Months PM -> Execute the current 6 Months PM Procedure according to chapter 5.2 and the check list of chapter 26.4;

•

12 Months PM -> Execute the current 12 Months PM Procedure according to chapter 5.2 and the check list of chapter 26.5;

•

Every 12 months -> Always replace the 3-way valve (unless already done within the previous 3 months).

5.5.3.3

FSE Monthly inspection visit

1. General System cleaning -> Sample & Reagent Area, Starter Reagent Area, Cuvette path (spindle, washer and reader channels, metal sheets, pusher gates) and Pipettors (left pipettor tip, OLV probe). The parts shall be cleaned according to what reported in chapter 8 of User Manual and chapters 5.2.6, 5.2.10, 5.2.12 of this manual. 2. Lubrication -> Lubrication of the metal sheets, the cuvette supply and the downholder (see chapter 5.2.6 on page 5-8). 3. Washer needle guiding bushings check -> Check the washer needle guiding bushings. Replace them only if required (see chapter 13.3.6 on page 1319). It is required in case of leaking or if they are worn. 4. Washer aspiration needles check -> Check the washer aspiration needles (see chapter 22.3.1 on page 22-8). Replace them only if required. It is required in case they are damaged or bent. 5. Washer aspiration tubings check -> Check the washer aspiration tubings Replace them only if required (see chapter 22.3.1 on page 22-8). It is required in case they are damaged. 6. WAP and WPRP tubings check -> Check the WAP and WPRP tubings Replace them only if required (see chapters 19.6.3 on page 19-44 and 19.7.3 on page 19-56). It is required in case they are damaged. 7. Washer needle height calibration -> Calibrate the washer needles height (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26). 8. Washer bubble sensors calibration -> Calibrate the washer bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2 on page 13-28). 9. Starter bubble sensors calibration -> Calibrate the starter bubble sensors (see chapter 18.4.1.3 on page 18-13). 10. SRP syringe -> Replace the syringe (only for High Throughput customers, over 1000 determinations/day) 11. Pipettor Coordinates -> Checking & teaching (if needed, see chapter 8 and chapter 25.4.3 on page 25-14).

Page 5-22


5. Maintenance Schedule 12. Review the instrument error list (Events Log on User Interface) and if there is a problem perform dedicated troubleshooting activities. 13. BG -> Perform 3 single BG (results shall be in range according to chapter 5.2.15). 14. LCL and LCR -> Perform 3 LCL and 3 LCR (results shall be in range according to chapter 5.2.15). This intervention, without any unexpected issues, should take approximately 4 hours.

In case of any adjustment/repair activities, it is required to Disable all customer calibrations; the customer must be informed of the needs to re-calibrate them (if possible, the FSE shall stay at the customer site until the completion of the recalibration activity).

5.5.4

Traceability

All FSE activities shall be reported in SGAT with the following Ws types: •

6 & 12 months PM activities -> Preventive Maintenance Ws

•

Monthly Inspection Visit -> Scheduled Visit (High Volume) Ws

The implementation of dedicated “Check List” on SGAT will be evaluated later on.


Page 5-23

6. Troubleshooting and Error Messages

6 Troubleshooting and Error Messages The engineer's guide to recovery! Don't panic!

This troubleshooting guide tries to give to a field service engineer field procedures to diagnose and localize the various possible causes for an error condition on the instrument. Obviously it is necessary to use observation skills and common sense to localize the cause for an error, as this document can only address those error conditions identified during product development phases. Feedbacks on field experiences using this document are highly welcome to improve future updates of this document. The process of problem localization usually goes through several levels. The ® LIAISON XL system is equipped with various software tools to aid problem diagnostics on several levels. 1. Several recovery and information tools in the main software are available and can be accessed by lab personnel to help diagnosing with e.g. telephone assistance. 2. The service software can address each individual module and can perform sensor read-outs and individual component actions. The pipettors require specialized software tools for alignment and diagnostic purposes; for this reason a specific Teacher Software is also available. 3. Many boards are equipped with signalling LEDs that show the state of e.g. a sensor.


Page 6-1

6- Troubleshooting and Error Messages

6.1

Error Definitions

6.1.1

Error Message structure

An error message shows up like: 6.1.1.1

Service Software Error Code

Service Software Error Code is always in hexadecimal (hex):

Device ID

Command ID

Severity

SubUnit ID Error Code

16

02

03

00

03

Table 6.1-1: Service Software Error Code •

Device ID is in hexadecimal

•

Command ID is the command movement of e.g. initializing (see chapter 6.6 on page 6-17)

•

Severity: is the error message type.

•

SubUnit ID is the sub unit of a module.

•

Error Code is the detectable error of the module in hexadecimal.

Figure 6.1-1: Error Message

Page 6-2


6. Troubleshooting and Error Messages 6.1.1.2

User Software Event ID

User Software Event ID is always in decimal (dez):

Module ID

SubUnit ID Event Number

064

001

00070

Table 6.1-2: User Software Event ID •

Model ID is in decimal

•

SubUnit ID is the sub unit of a module in decimal.

•

Event Number is the detectable error of the module in decimal.

Figure 6.1-2: User Software, Error Message, this screen shot is just an example.


Page 6-3


6.1.2

Error Classification / Severity

The module can classify different error message types. The three error classes are defined as warnings, critical errors and fatal errors. 6.1.2.1

Message (00)

A message shows no errors. 6.1.2.2

Warning (01)

A warning describes an error message which has no effect to the result of the concerned assay. This means for example a malfunction that can be directly detected and solved by a module of the system. 6.1.2.3

Critical Errors (02)

A critical error describes an error message which has a possible effect to the result of a single assay. Other assays can continue to be executed without any effect. 6.1.2.4

Fatal Errors (03)

A fatal error is occurred if a malfunction of the module has effected the whole process. The whole process has to be stopped.

Page 6-4



6.2

Device Driver Definition

Module Device Device Description ID. ID. Hex code

Dec code

00

00

COP

02

02

Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor (Sensors)

03

03

Valves, virtual device driver controlling DICV and WBCV

04

04

Flashlight virtual device driver

05

05

Virtual Device Driver Service

11

17

Cuvette supply module

No of Sub Assembly

Sub Assemblies

0

General

1

Pipettor

2

Central parts possibly blocking incubation ring / wash transport except for pipettor (cuvette pushers, cuvette loading)

3

Incubation ring except for parts covered by base

4

Wash transport and reader unit

5

Cuvette loading and cuvette supply

6

Washing solution lines (WDP pump, cleaning valves, WAP)

7

Starter reagents

8

Reagent / sample loading

9

Front module, beeper

0

Cuvette supply module itself, general functions

1

Motor auger

2

reserved

3

reserved

4

Heater Tube A1

5

Heater Tube A2

6

Heater Tube B1

7

Heater Tube B2

0

Incubator Module itself, general functions.

(Auger, Sorter and Tube Heaters)

12

18

Incubator


Page 6-5


13

19

Washer

14

20

Reader

16

17

22

23

Sample Module

Reagent Module

18

24

Flexible tube module for aspiration

20

32

Front module

22

34

Cabinet

26

38

Sample Rack Sensor Module

30

48

Starter reagent 1, pump set A

31

49

Starter reagent 1, pump set B

32

50

Starter reagent 2, pump set A

33

51

Starter reagent 2, pump set B

34

52

Wash Displacement Pump (WDP)

35

53

WAP

Page 6-6

1

Heater Incubator

2

Pusher Incubator-Washer

3

Transport

4

Pusher Washer - Incubator

5

Cuvette Loader

6

Heater Tube 1

7

Heater Tube 2

8

Cuvette Supply, Upper Sensor

9

Cuvette Supply, Lower Sensor

0

Reader Unit Default Functions

1

Shutter and Aspiration Lift

2

Transport Drive (Spindle)

3

Raw Data Transmission

4

Starter Pump A2

5

Starter Pump B2

0

Sample / Disposable tip unit

1

Barcode Scanner

0

Reagent Unit

1

Stirrer

2

Temperature Control

0

Cabinet-Module itself, generalfunctions.

1

Water Control

2

Wash Buffer Control

3

Liquid Waste Control

4

So Waste Control

0

Default for sample rack sensor module

1

Rack sensors


6. Troubleshooting and Error Messages 36

54

WPRP

40

64

RFID Reagent Compartment

45

46

69

70

Starter Reagent Rack A

Starter Reagent Rack B

90

144

Air Pipettor Pump, left arm

91

145

Diluter Pump (VP), for reagent probe, (right arm)

FC

252

Optical Liquid Verification (OLV)

FD

253

Pipettor

FE

254

Air pipettor module for sample probe

0

Default for RFID reader

1

RFID reader

2

Antenna

0


1

RFID reader

2

Antenna

3

Aspiration control

0


1

RFID reader

2

Antenna

3

Aspiration control

0

Default for pump general functions.

1

Plunger

2

Valve

Table 6.2-1: Device Driver Definition


Page 6-7


6.3

Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor (02h)

6.3.1

Virtual Device Driver Monitor: Error List

Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor is used for the continuous monitoring of the power supply of all modules connected to the COP PCB, this driver communicates via a read/write function interface with the central operating processor (COP) to receive commands or send responses, respectively.

Description

Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor Decimal

2

Hexadecimal

02

For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error codes for User and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

Service Software User Software

Cause:

Corrective Action:

00

00

NO MESSAGE

02

03

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

02

03

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.

Error Code

02

Sub Unit

Severity

Event ID

hexadecimal Device ID

decimal

Check syntax- / sequence. 2.0.3

Page 6-8

02

03

00

03

PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE

Check parameter range. Inva parameter passed with command.

02

02

04

PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE

Exchange module.

02

03

05

EEPROM READ

Error on reading EEPROM.

PARAMETER READ FAILURE

If parameter saved, exchange module.


6. Troubleshooting and Error Messages 2.0.6

2.0.7

02

02

03

01

00

00

06

07

VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE

Central power supply is out of range.

UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT

•

Check fuses / replace fuses

Supply voltage out of range (%1 mV).

•

Check cable / replace cable

•

Check power supply

•

Check power supply to system

•

Exchange module.

VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE Supply voltage back in range (%1 mV)

Central power supply is back in range.

02

03

08

THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER

Check cables / airflow.

02

01

09

POSITIONING PROBLEM

Mechanics tight or blocked.

POSITION REACHED SEVERAL RETRIES 02

03

0A

DRIVE NOT MOVING

Drive did not move properly.

TARGET NOT REACHED

Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

02

03

0B

ABNORMAL TERMINATION COMMAND

02

03

0C

SELFTEST ERROR

02

03

0D

WRONG COMMAND PARAMETER VALUE

02

03

0E

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

02

03

0F

COMMAND NOT IMPLEMENTED

Do not try again.

02

03

10

EXECUTION TIMEOUT

02

03

11

ILLEGAL PARAMETER

Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

02

03

12

PARAMETER NOT FOUND

Set correct parameter index.

Exchange module.

Select correct parameter index. 02

03

13

PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED

Set authorization.

02

03

14

PARAMETER WRONG CODE

Enter va access code.

INVA AUTHORIZATION 02

03

15

ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE

Set correct parameter type.

02

03

16

ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH

Enter parameter in correct length.


Page 6-9

6- Troubleshooting and Error Messages 2.0.32

2.0.33

02

02

03

01

00

00

20

21

CIRCUIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE Power supply of CAN connector is OUT OF RANGE out of range. •

Check fuse

•

Power down

•

Check connection cables

•

Exchange module

CIRCUIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE Power supply of CAN connector is BACK IN RANGE back in range. Table 6.3-1: Virtual Device Driver Monitor, error list

Page 6-10



6.4

Flashlight Virtual Device Driver (04h; 4dec)

Flashlight Virtual Driver is used for signalling using the flashlight connected to the COP PCB, this driver communicates via a read/write function interface with the central operating processor (COP) to receive commands or send responses, respectively.

Description

Flashlight Virtual Device Driver Decimal

4

Hexadecimal

04

For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

User Software

Service Software

decimal

In Hex code Sub Unit

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Severity

4.0.2

Cause:

Device ID

Event ID

04

00

00

00

No message

04

03

00

01

Not initialized

Send init command.

04

03

00

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code. Check syntax- / sequence.

4.0.3

04

03

00

03

PARAMETER VALUE OUT OF RANGE

Check parameter range. Inva parameter passed with command.

04

02

00

04

Parameter write failure

Exchange module.

04

03

00

05

Parameter read failure

If parameter is saved, exchange module.

04

03

00

06

Under voltage detect

Central power supply is out of range.

04

01

00

07


Voltage back in range.

•


•


•

Check power supply

•

Check power supply to system

•

Exchange module

Message only.

Page 6-11


4.0.14

04

03

00

08

Thermal protection driver

Check cables.

04

01

00

09

Position reached several retries


04

03

00

0A

Drive not moving, target not reached.

Check mechanic.

04

03

00

0B

Abnormal termination command

04

03

00

0C

self test failure

Exchange module.

04

03

00

0D

Wrong command parameter value

Check syntax, check sequence and value

04

03

00

0E

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

04

03

00

0F

Command not implemented

.

04

03

00

10

Execution time-out

04

03

00

11

Illegal parameter


04

03

00

12

Parameter not found.

Select correct parameter index.

04

03

00

13

Parameter access not allowed.

Set authorization.

04

03

00

14

Inva authorization

Enter correct code.

04

03

00

15

Inva parameter type


04

03

00

16

Wrong parameter length.


Table 6.4-1: Flashlight Virtual Device Driver, error list

Page 6-12



6.5

Virtual Device Driver Service (05h; 5dec)

Virtual Device Driver is used for performing more complex functions on the instrument, e.g. initialization of complete system. This module is communicating via a read/write function interface with the central operating processor (COP) to receive commands or send responses, respectively.

Description:

This module communicates via a CAN interface with the central operating processor (COP).

Virtual Device Drive Service Decimal

5

Hexadecimal

05

For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

6.5.1

Virtual Device Driver Service: Error List

User Software

Service Software

decimal

In Hexadecimal Corrective Action:

00

00

NO MESSAGE

05

03

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

05

03

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.

00

Error Code

05

Sub Unit

Severity

5.0.2

Cause:

Device ID

Event ID

Check syntax / sequence. 5.1.2

05

03

01

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

5.2.2

05

03

02

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.3.2

05

03

03

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.4.2

05

03

04

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND



Page 6-13

6- Troubleshooting and Error Messages 5.5.2

05

03

05

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.6.2

05

03

06

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.7.2

05

03

07

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.8.2

05

03

08

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.9.2

05

03

09

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


5.0.3

05

03

00

03


Check parameter range.

5.1.3

05

03

01

03



5.2.3

05

03

02

03



5.3.3

05

03

03

03



5.4.3

05

03

04

03



5.5.3

05

03

05

03



5.6.3

05

03

06

03



5.7.3

05

03

07

03



5.8.3

05

03

08

03



5.9.3

05

03

09

03



05

02

04


Exchange module.

05

03

05

EEPROM READ

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module.

05

03

06


05

01

07

VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

05

03

08


•


•


•

Check power supply

•

check power supply to system

•

Exchange module


TSD PROTECTION 05

01

09

POSITIONING PROBLEM

05

03

0A

DRIVE NOT MOVING

Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

Page 6-14



5.0.14

5.1.14

5.2.14

5.3.14

5.4.14

5.5.14

5.6.14

5.7.14

5.8.14

5.9.14

5.1.16

05

03

0B

05

03

0C SELFTEST ERROR

05

03

0D WRONG COMMAND PARAMETER VALUE

05

03

05

05

05

05

05

05

05

05

05

03

03

03

03

03

03

03

03

03

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0E

ABNORMAL TERMINATION COMMAND Exchange module.

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

Unable to execute command.

Command execution not possible at current state.

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.



0F


Do not try again.

10

EXECUTION TIMEOUT

Command not completed in time.

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

0E

05

03

05

03

05

03

11

ILLEGAL PARAMETER


05

03

12

PARAMETER NOT FOUND


01

Select correct parameter index. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 6-15

6- Troubleshooting and Error Messages 05

03

13


Set authorization.

05

03

14


Enter va access code.

INVA AUTHORIZATION

5.6.32

05

03

15



05

03

16



05

02

20

NOT ENOUGH CUV

Priming wash buffer not applicable due to missing cuvettes.

06

Not enough cuvettes available. 5.7.32

05

02

07

20

NOT ENOUGH CUV Not enough cuvettes available.

5.3.33

05

02

03

21

REFILL RING SUSPENDED Replenishment of ring suspended due to missing cuvettes.

5.7.34

05

02

07

22

INSUFFICIENT STARTER Insufficient starter reagent detected while priming.

5.0.35

05

02

00

23

INTEGRITY SYSTEST Integrity error(s) occurred during system test.

Priming starter reagents not applicable due to missing cuvettes due to missing cuvettes. Filling incubation ring not applicable due to missing cuvettes.

Air detected while aspiration of starter reagent.

Irregular events occurred during system test.

Table 6.5-1: Virtual Device Driver Service, error list

Page 6-16



6.6

Command Codes for Service Software

6.6.1

Command Codes Virtual Device Driver Power Monitor

Command code is shown in hexadecimal code.

Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request

Reads the status of the virtual device

02h

Init

Starts initialising drives

03h

Move

N/A - moves the drive to its target-position

04h

Emergency stop

N/A - turns off everything

05h

Standby

N/A - virtual device enters standby-state

06h

Resume

N/A - virtual device leaves standby-state

07h

Read sensor

Reads a single sensor

08h

Set actor

N/A - turns the selected output on or off

09h

Reserved

0Ah

Reserved

0Bh

Set default parameter

N/A

0Ch

Read EEPROM

N/A

0Dh

Write EEPROM

N/A

0Eh

Get software version

Returns the version of the software

0Fh

Read error

N/A - read saved errors

10h

Reset error

N/A - delete all saved errors

11h

Move relative

N/A - delete all saved errors

12h

Get parameter type

N/A - returns information about the parameter

13h

Get parameter

N/A - reads the selected parameter from module

14h

Set parameter

N/A - writes the selected parameter to module

15h

Parameter index

N/A - returns min and max parameter index

16h

Unlock parameter

N/A - access to protected parameter

17h

Define ramp

N/A - defines ramp parameters, starts recalculation

18h

Stop

N/A - stops movement

Table 6.6-1: Command codes, virtual device driver power monitor


Page 6-17


6.6.2

Command Codes Cuvette Supply


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request

Reads the status of the module

02h

Init

Starts Subassembly

03h

unused

04h

Emergency stop

Turns off everything

05h

Standby

Module enters standby-state

06h

Resume

Module leaves standby-state

07h

Read sensor

Reads a single binary sensor

08h

Set actor

Turns the selected output on or off

09h

unused

0Ah

unused

0Bh


Initializes the parameter-set to software defaults

0Ch

Read EEPROM

Reloads the saved parameter to module

0Dh

Write EEPROM

Saves the parameters to EEPROM

0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error

Delete all saved errors

11h

Move relative

Moves drive relative to actual position

12h

Get parameter type

Returns information about the parameter

13h

Get parameter

Reads the selected parameter from module

14h

Set parameter

Writes the selected parameter to module

15h

Parameter index

Returns min and max parameter index

16h

Unlock parameter

Access to protected parameter

17h

Define ramp

Defines parameter for ramp, starts recalculation.

18h

Stop

Stops movement and heater Table 6.6-2: Command codes, cuvette supply

Page 6-18



6.6.3

Command Codes Incubator


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Init

Starts initializing of drives

03h

Move

Moves the drive to its target-position

04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor


0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM


0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error


11h

Move relative


12h

Get parameter type


13h

Get parameter


14h

Set parameter


15h

Parameter index


16h

Unlock parameter


17h

Define ramp


18h

Stop

Stops movement

20h

Position cuvette

Positions the cuvette to the working-position

21h

Work

Perform cuvette transfer

22h

Calibrate

Calibrates the analog cuvette sensor

23h

Current off

Switches off current for transport motor

24h

Calibrate init position

Calibrates transport init position. Has to be done before teaching positions

Table 6.6-3: Command codes, incubator


Page 6-19


6.6.4

Command Codes Washer


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Init


03h

Move


04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor


0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM


0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error


11h

Move relative


12h

Get parameter type


13h

Get parameter


14h

Set parameter


15h

Parameter index


16h

Unlock parameter


17h

Define ramp


18h

Stop

Stops movement

20h

Aspirate

Washer waits until aspiration complete

21h

Work

Moves to aspiration-position

22h

Calibrate, Home

Moves to init-position

23h

Save work position

Save the actual position as work position

24h

Switch valve on

Switch one valve on and all others off

25h

Switch all valves off

Switch all valves off

2Ah

Calibrate Aspiration Control Sensors

Calibrates the aspiration control sensors

Table 6.6-4: Command codes, washer

Page 6-20



6.6.5

Command Codes Reader


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Init

Starts initializing all subassemblies excl. Pump

03h

Move


04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor


09h

Read parameter


0Ah

Write parameter


0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM


0Eh



12h

Get parameter type

Reads Information about the selected Parameter

13h

Get parameter

Reads a formatted Parameter from module RAM

14h

Set parameter

Writes a formatted Parameter to module RAM

15h

Get Parameter index

Return the min and the max Index of the Parameters

16h

Unlock parameter

Sets access authorization to locked parameters

20h

Unused 0

21h

Define ramp

Defines parameter for ramp, starts recalculation

22h

Stop

Stops movement

23h

Move Shutter

Moves the Shutter to Target Position

24h

Not used

25h

Save Position

Saves the actual Position as Motor Position (for Teaching)

26h

Move Transport

Moves Transport n Position forward

27h

Start dark count measurement

Starts one dark count measurement

28h

Start RLU measurement

Starts one complete measurement

Table 6.6-5: Command codes, Reader


Page 6-21


Code

Name

Description

29h

Get Flash Data

Transmit all data, for this command the device base address +1 is used

2Ah

Send Pump Command Send a Command to the injection pump

2Bh

HV On

Switch the high voltage of the PMT on

2Ch

HV Off

Switch the high voltage of the PMT off

2Dh

LED On

Switch the reference LED on

2Eh

LED Off

Switch the reference LED off

2Fh

Check_Cuvette

Checks if a cuvette is in the Lumo. Table 6.6-6: Command codes, Reader

Page 6-22



6.6.6

Command Codes Sample Module


Code

Description

00h

Automatic Response

01h

Status Request

02h

Initialise

03h

Move

04h

Emergency stop

05h

Standby

06h

Resume

07h

Read Sensor

08h

Set Actor

09h

Read Parameter

0Ah

Write Parameter

0Bh

Set default Parameter

0Ch

Read EEPROM

0Dh

Write EEPROM

0Eh

Get Software Version

20h

Open/Close Shutter

30h

Activate Barcode Scanner

31h

Deactivate Barcode Scanner

32h

Barcode Scanner Status

33h

Read Barcode Scanner Parameter

34h

Write Barcode Scanner Parameter

35h

Barcode Scanner Firmware Version

36h

Barcode Scanner Start Polygon

37h

Barcode Scanner Set Focus

38h

Barcode Scanner Service

40h

Transparent Mode Table 6.6-7: Command codes, sample module


Page 6-23


6.6.7

Command Codes Reagent Module


Code

Description

00h

Automatic Message

01h

Status Request

02h

Initialise

03h

Move

04h

Emergency stop

05h

Standby

06h

Resume

07h

Read Sensor

08h

Set Actor

0Bh

Set default Parameter

0Ch

Read EEPROM

0Dh

Write EEPROM

0Eh

Get Software Version

10h

Read Error

12h

Get Parameter Type

13h

Get Parameter

14h

Set Parameter

15h

Get Index

16h

Unlock Parameter Table 6.6-8: Command codes, reagent module

Page 6-24



6.6.8

Command Codes Front Module


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Initialise

Starts initializing the module

03h

Move

Command not supported

04h

Emergency stop

Display general system error.

05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor

Reads all cover and flap sensors

08h

Set actor

Command not supported.

0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM

Reads parameter-set from EEPROM

0Dh

Write EEPROM

Writes parameter-set to EEPROM

0Eh



12h

Get parameter type


13h

Get parameter

Reads a formatted Parameter from module RAM

14h

Set parameter

Writes a formatted Parameter to module RAM

15h

Get Parameter index

Return the min and the max Index of the Parameters

16h

Unlock parameter

Sets access authorization to locked parameters

Table 6.6-9: Command codes, front module


Page 6-25


6.6.9

Command Codes Cabinet Module


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Initialise

Starts initializing of actors and controls.

04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor


0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM

Saves the parameter- to EEPROM

0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error


12h

Get parameter type


13h

Get parameter

Reads the selected parameter from module.

14h

Set parameter


15h

Get Parameter index


16h

Unlock parameter


20h

Get filling levels

Returns the filling levels of the containers.

Table 6.6-10: Command codes, cabinet module

Page 6-26



6.6.10

Command Codes Starter Reagent Pump


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Initialise


03h

Move


04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor


0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM


0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error


12h

Get parameter type

Returns Information about the selected Parameter

13h

Get parameter


14h

Set parameter


15h

Get Parameter index


16h

Unlock parameter


17h

Define Ramp


18h

Stop

Stops movement

20h

Aspirate

Aspirate liquid

21h

Dispense

Dispense liquid

22h

Aspirate backwards

Aspirate liquid from output

23h

Dispense backwards

Dispense liquid from input

24h

Empty

Empty pump

25h

Calibrate

Calibrate init offset

26h

Fill

Aspirate liquid to absolute value

27h

Fill backwards

Aspirate liquid to absolute value from output

Table 6.6-11: Command codes, starter regent pump


Page 6-27


6.6.11

Command Codes WDP Pump


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Initialise


03h

Move


04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor


0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM


0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error


12h

Get parameter type


13h

Get parameter


14h

Set parameter


15h

Get Parameter index


16h

Unlock parameter


17h

Define Ramp


18h

Stop

Stops movement

20h

Aspirate

Aspirate liquid

21h

Dispense

Dispense liquid

22h

Aspirate backwards

Aspirate liquid from output

23h

Dispense backwards

Dispense liquid from input

24h

Empty

Empty pump

25h

Calibrate

Calibrate init offset Table 6.6-12: Command codes, WDP

Page 6-28



6.6.12

Command Codes WAP and WPRP Pump


Code

Name

Description

01h

Status request


02h

Initialise

Starts initializing

03h

Move

Start the pump for a given number of rotations.

04h

Emergency stop


05h

Standby


06h

Resume


07h

Read sensor


08h

Set actor

Start and stop the pump.

09h

Read serial number

Returns serial number

0Ah

Read article number

Returns article number

0Bh



0Ch

Read EEPROM


0Dh

Write EEPROM


0Eh



0Fh

Read error

Read saved errors

10h

Reset error


12h

Get parameter type


13h

Get parameter


14h

Set parameter


15h

Get Parameter index


16h

Unlock parameter


17h

Define Ramp


18h

Stop

Stops the movement during continuous move.

19h

Get Power

Returns max power consumption.

1Ah

Reset

Restart to Kernel

25h

Calibrate

Calibrates init sensor. Index pin must not be in front of sensor. Table 6.6-13: Command codes, WAP, WPRP


Page 6-29

7. Service Software

7 Service Software This chapter describes basic functions of the Service Software.

7.1 7.1.1

Basic Functions General Statement

This chapter contains descriptive information of the windows, fields and buttons of Service Software. For related calibration procedures, see the calibration sections of the individual modules.

The software allows to control necessary functions of the instrument and to perform adjustments of the function parameters.

The Service Software is used to perform a part of the final testing of the instruments during installation. In addition, the service engineer can use it as a tool to check infield instruments and adjust them if required.

7.1.2

Before Starting the Service Software

If it is necessary to switch from the Main User Interface (Main UI) or the Teacher Software to the Service Software, shut down the previously used software. Then switch the machine off for about 10 sec, restart the system and open Service Software. The same procedure shall be applied also to switch from Service Software to Main UI or Teacher Software. This chapter refers to LIAISON®XL systems only and is valid up to Service Software Version 1.6.3.0.


Page 7-1

7. Service Software

7.1.3

General Buttons

General buttons which apply on most dialogue windows:

Button

Description About this driver. Shows module driver name and version number.

Extended protocol button. If the extended protocol mode is activated, the low level commands will be shown additionally in hexadecimal code in the log files. The log files are saved as .txt in D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\Log\Sessio n directory. Report automatic messages. Enabled: Receives the driver dialogue automatic messages, that will be shown as pop ups on the screen; a log entry is also saved. Disabled: Receives the driver dialogue automatic messages, that will be saved as a log entry but not shown as pop ups. Note: When the system occasionally is sending too many automatic messages, and the Report automatic messages is enabled, it can happen that the pop up messages interfere the use of Service Software. The device stops immediately, without finishing the last action or command. The device will terminate in a not initialized mode.

The device stops once finished the last action or command. The device will terminate in ready (initialized) condition. Exit the dialogue.

Table 7.1-1: Description of buttons

Page 7-2


7. Service Software

7.1.4

Log Files

During each Service Software session, log files (related to different module drivers) are automatically created and saved in directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ \ServiceSoftware\Log\Session. A log file related to a specific module driver is created every time the related service dialogue is opened for the first time during a session. The log files are saved as “.txt” files and show every command executed, with a short description of the activity. If the extended log mode is activated (using the dedicated Extended protocol button), low level commands will be shown additionally in hexadecimal code (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2). Each log file is saved as .txt.

An additional log file is created every time a session is started and enfolds all low level commands, independently from the used driver dialogue of Service Software. This log file is saved as GS_COMLOG_.txt. These files can be sent for further analysis to service center or to the manufacturer.

7.1.5

"Jump to" Drop Down Field

This drop down field appears in all dialogue windows and allows to navigate quickly between modules. The selection of a module from the drop down menu opens the respective dialogue.

Figure 7.1-1: Drop down field


Page 7-3

7. Service Software

7.1.6

Common Control

Figure 7.1-2: Common Control Common Control panel, available in all module dialogues, is composed by the three buttons (with related drop-down fields) described in the following table. Sub assemblies may also be initialized, without initializing the entire module, by expanding the module menu and selecting the desired sub-part (e.g. Incubator Module is expanded and Transport Driver is selected if only this sub assembly shall be initialized).

Group

Button / Fields

Sub assemblies that will be initialized.

Common Control Initialize All Dialogue All modules that could be used in the Controlled Modules opened dialogue are initialized.

Complete System

All module drivers are initialized.

Pipettor

Diluter Pump Air Pipettor Pump

Incubator Module

Pusher I – W Driver Pusher W-I Driver Transport Driver Cuvette Supply Driver Auger and Sorter Driver Heater Parts

Reader

Spindle Driver Shutter Driver Starter Pump A1 Starter Pump A2

Page 7-4


7. Service Software Washer Module

Lift and WPAP Part WAP WPRP WDP

Get module firmware version

Reagent Module

RFID Reagent

Sample Module

Scanner

Cabinet Module

-

Front module

-

Starter Reagent Rack A

Pumps

Starter Reagent Rack B (Opt.)

Pumps The firmware version number of the selected module is shown. The movement of the mouse over the read out field shows the complete output.

Get module status

The current status of the selected module (e.g. ready/ not initialized, temperature in range / out of range) is shown. The movement of the mouse over the read out field shows the complete output. Table 7.1-2: Common control buttons


Page 7-5

7. Service Software

7.1.7

Device is Busy Window

Figure 7.1-3: Device is busy

Group

Button / Field

Description

Sequence Information No information appears for single commands. Information about current sequence is available (e.g. Cycle Movement). STOP

The device stops immediately without finishing the last action or command. The device will terminate in a not initialized mode.

CANCEL

The device stops once finished the last action or command. The device will terminate in a ready (initialized) condition.

Device ID - Subassembly

Displays steps in process.

To Proceed

Table 7.1-3: Device is busy

Page 7-6


7. Service Software

7.1.8

Use of the Service Software

If it is necessary to switch to Service Software from Main UI or Teacher Software, close the previously used application. Then switch the machine off for about 10 sec, restart the system and open Service Software. To start gSERVICE.EXE, double click the icon or select the menu item in the Windows start menu. Before the application starts, you must enter the Service Software user name and password.

Figure 7.1-4: Service login The user name will become the default value used in reports, but can be overwritten. The technician shall insert the default User Name and Password, it is not possible to reset them. If the user name and the password are not entered, the software does not start.

7.1.9

About Service Software (Version)

The "i" icon available in each service dialogue opens the menu item About Liaison XL: a box, showing the versions of different components, is displayed.

Figure 7.1-5: About Liaison XL


Page 7-7

7. Service Software

7.2

Main Menu

The selection of an option in Available Drivers panel and the pressure of Load Module Driver button start the module and open the related service dialogue.

Figure 7.2-1: Main Menu

Group

Button / Field

Description

Available Drivers Available Drivers panel

Incubator Front and Loading Units Reader Pipettor System Washer

Load Module Driver

Page 7-8

The selection of the desired option in Available Driver panel and the pressure of Load Module Driver button start the module and open the related service dialogue.


7. Service Software Low Level Commands

When the Low Level Commands button is pressed, a dialogue box is displayed, to allow the service personnel to select or enter lowlevel commands.

Hex View

The pressure of this button opens Hex View Parameter dialogue.The service technician can use this function in order to enable/disable the communication report between Analyzer and Service Software . (GS_COMLOG_.txt) . It is also possible to customize the information reported in the log file.

Port Status

Returns the current status of the communication port.

Terminate Program

Unloads all active drivers and exits the service program.

Table 7.2-1: Main Menu


Page 7-9

7. Service Software

7.2.1

Hex View Parameter

Figure 7.2-2: hex view window A Service Software log file is automatically created during each Service Software session and stored in D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\Log\Session directory.

Group

Button / Fields

Description

Port Number Time Type of Entry Log Details

Check or un check log details reported in Communication panel of Service Software main dialogue.

Read Write Device Messages Lines History

Log File

Enable log file

Check or uncheck to enable/disable the update of the low level log file (GS_COMLOG_.txt log file)

File Name

Shows log file name.

Enable alternate hex viewer

Another additional hex viewer appears.

Alternate Hex viewer stay always on top

The alternate hex viewer stays always on top.

Table 7.2-2: Hex view These settings can be adjusted after every start of Service Software. After Service Software has been closed, manufacturing settings are restored.

Page 7-10


7. Service Software

7.2.2

Port Status

Shows the actual status of the com port.

Figure 7.2-3: Status of Com Port

Port Status

Message

Trace Byte

byte tracing is running

Trace Record

record tracing is running

Not Init

communication not initialized

Error

port error

Wr Data

data in write buffer

Rd Data

data in read buffer

SERPROT2_Rec Timeout

receiver timeout

SERPROT2_Tr Timeout

transmit timeout

SERPROT2_Rec Err

receiving error

SERPROT2_Tr Err

transmitting error

SERPROT2_Rec Full

remote station sending and receiving buffer is full

SERPROT2_Rec Init

receiver is initializing

SERPROT2_Tr Init

transmitter is initializing

==0

port ok and idle Table 7.2-3: Port Status


Page 7-11

7. Service Software

7.3 7.3.1

Incubator Main and Move Tab

Figure 7.3-1: Window: Incubator: Main and Move Tab Main Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Common Control (see chapter 7.1.6 on page 7-4) Table 7.3-1: Common Control in Main Tab

Page 7-12


7. Service Software

Group

Button / Field

Description

Basic Operations Push I-W

Moves Pusher Incubator – Washer.

Push W-I

Moves Pusher Washer - Incubator.

Load Cuvette

Loads cuvette from Supply with presence check of a cuvette. Highly recommended

Sorter On

Switches the module on. During the movement of the sorter, if the level sensor does not detect cuvettes, the auger also starts moving.

Sorter Off

Switches the module off.

Auger On

Switches the module into automatic mode. The auger starts moving only if the level sensor of the sorter does not detect cuvettes; otherwise, the auger does not move.

Auger Off

Switches automatic mode off.

Table 7.3-2: Incubator: Select Device in Main Tab Move Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Incubator Cuvette Handling Cuvette

Choose the cuvette number that will move to a selected position. Cuvette positions 0-79, as those available on the transport belt, can be selected.

Move to position Initial


(3)

Pusher I-W

(4)

Cuvette Supply

(5)

Pusher W-I

(6)

Pipettor #0

(0)

Pipettor #1

(1)

Pipettor #2

(2)

Move the chosen cuvette to Cuvette Supply position.

Move the chosen cuvette to the selected position. Be Aware: Pipettor #3 position is no more in use and shall not be selected.

Page 7-13

7. Service Software

Incubator positions Perform with the Pusher I-W selected Pusher W-I cuvette. Insert

Move the chosen cuvette number to the selected position and perform the selected action. (push a cuvette from the incubator to the washer, push a cuvette from the washer to the incubator, insert a cuvette from the cuvette loader)

Dispose

The transport belt moves the cuvette to pusher I – W. Pusher IW pushes the cuvette to the spindle and the spindle will run till cuvette will be ejected.

Enable

Random movement of the transport in 20 sec. cycle.

Idle Movement

Be Aware: no regular transport movement is possible when idle movement is enabled. Disable

Stops random movement.

Spindle Movement Rotation For n Cuvette Positions

Scroll bar

Moves the spindle for the entered amount of positions. If 30 positions are chosen, the spindle runs empty. (all cuvettes are moved out). Cuvette Positions 1 -30, as those available on the spindle, can be selected.

Table 7.3-3: Incubator: Move Tab

Page 7-14


7. Service Software

7.3.2

Main and Sensor Tab

Figure 7.3-2: Incubator Sensor Tab Sensor Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Init. Light Barriers Init. Pusher W-I Init. Pusher I-W Init Cuvette Supply Init. Inc. Transport

If the field shows “in”, the modules are at the init-position.

Read

Executes readout

Transport

Cuvette sensor of transport: it detects the presence of a cuvette in the belt position in front of the cuvette loader.

Cuvette Sensors

Range: • without cuvette: 0.6-1.2V Rows


• with cuvette: 2.0-4.0V

Page 7-15

7. Service Software CS Lower (Cuvette Sensor Lower Slide)

Cuvette supply slide lower sensor: it detects the presence of a cuvette in the lower part of the cuvette chute. Range: • without cuvette: 0.6-1.2V • with cuvette: 2.0-4.0V

CS Upper (Cuvette Sensor Upper Slide)

Cuvette supply slide upper sensor: it detects the presence of a cuvette in the upper part of the cuvette chute. Range: • without cuvette: 0.6-1.2V • with cuvette: 2.0-4.0V

CS Sorter (Cuvette Sensor Sorter)

Cuvette sensor of the sorter. Range: • without cuvette: 0.6-1.2V • with cuvette: 2.0-4.0V

Columns

Status

Shows if cuvettes are detected (presence) or not (absence) by each sensor.

Voltage

Shows actual voltage amount.

Read

Executes readout.

Cuvette Sensor Calibration Calibrate: Transport

Calibration must be done without any cuvettes in the system.

CS Lower CS Upper CS Sorter Cal Value

The calibration value will be shown.

Power Supply Voltage Inc. Power 1

Shows voltages supplied to incubator. Heater Foil 1. 23.5V to 24.5V

Inc. Power 2

Shows voltages supplied to incubator. Heater Foil 2. 23.5V to 24.5V

CVS Power

Cuvette Supply PCB power. 23.5V to 24.5V

Read

Executes readout. Table 7.3-4: Incubator: Sensor Tab

Page 7-16


7. Service Software

7.3.3

Main and Temperature Tab

Figure 7.3-3: Incubator, Main and Temperature Tab Temperature Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Incubator Heater On

Switches incubator heater on.

Tube Heaters On

Switches starter tube heaters 1 and 2 on.

All Heaters Off

Switches all heaters off.

Heater Control

Actual Temperature Values Incubator Temp. (°C)

Shows temperature of the incubator heater. In range interval: 36.5°C to 38.5°C

Tube 1 Temp. (°C)

Shows temperature of the single tube heater. 35.5°C to 37.5°C

Tube 2 Temp. (°C)

Shows temperature of the single tube heater. 35.5°C to 37.5°C

Read

Executes readout.

Table 7.3-5: Incubator: Main and Temperature Tab


Page 7-17

7. Service Software

7.3.4

Main and Sequence Tab

Figure 7.3-4: Incubator, Main and Sequence Tab Sequence Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

From

Indicates the first cuvette position of the interval the sequence will be applied to.

To

Indicates the last cuvette position of the interval the sequence will be applied to.

Cuvettes to Process

Regular (no checks) Starts the predefined cycles.

Start

Page 7-18

With Presence Check

Highly recommended: before starting a cycle the presence of cuvettes in the selected. positions is checked.


7. Service Software No. of Cycles

Enter number of cycles to run. When a cycle is finished, the system restores the initial configuration (e.g. the selected cuvettes are moved to waste) and the same cycle starts again until the number of set cycles will be completed. 1: the set sequence will be performed only one time (default setting). 0: “until abort” option. The execution of cycles will continue until CANCEL button in Device is Busy window will be pressed.

Load

From Supply

Cuvettes are loaded from supply to transport.

From Washer

Cuvettes are loaded from washer to transport. Spindle starts moving, then Pusher W – I pushes each cuvette into the transport.

Regular check

The selected cuvettes are moved from the transport to the washer. Then the spindle moves each cuvette to the Pusher W-I that then pushes it back to the transport.

Refill Counter

Shows after how many "through washer" cycles the old cuvettes shall be exchanged.

Through Washer

When value 0 is set (regular check) the cuvettes are not exchanged with new ones after the conclusion of the "through washer" cycle. Note. Refill Counter (with a setting different from 0) works only when Load and Unload buttons are not marked. Note. This functionality can be used properly only selecting a number of cycles that is a multiple of the value set as refill counter.


Page 7-19

7. Service Software The selected cuvettes are moved from Transport with Pusher I-W to the Spindle. Each time a cuvette is pushed, the spindle moves one position further.

Unload

To Waste

After all the selected cuvettes have been placed in the wash channel, they are moved to the waste bin.

Load (from Supply)

•

Selected cuvettes are loaded from supply to transport.

•

Cuvettes are unloaded with Pusher I-W to Spindle.

•

Spindle moves each cuvette to Pusher W-I position.

•

Pusher W-I loads Transport via Spindle.

•

Selected cuvettes are loaded from supply to transport.

•

Transport will be unloaded with Pusher I-W to Spindle.

•

Selected cuvettes are loaded from Spindle with Pusher W-I to transport.

•

Cuvettes are unloaded with Pusher I-W to Spindle.

•

Spindle moves each cuvette to Pusher W-I position.

•


•

Selected cuvettes are loaded from Spindle with Pusher W-I to transport.

•


Mixed selections

- Through Washer

Load (from Supply) - Unload

Load (from Washer) - Through Washer

Load (from Washer) - Unload

Page 7-20


7. Service Software Through Washer

•

Selected cuvettes are unloaded from transport with Pusher I-W to Spindle.

•

Spindle moves cuvette to Pusher W-I position.

•


•


- Unload

Movement without Cuvette Note: It is important that no cuvettes are left in the system, because a continuous running of the modules will be started. Start

Starts the chosen cycle.

Pusher W-I Pusher I-W Inc. Transport Shutter Spindle

Selection can be: one, several or all. This cycle will run until CANCEL button in Device is Busy window will be pressed.

Washer Lift

Table 7.3-6: Incubator: Main and Sequence Tab


Page 7-21

7. Service Software

7.3.5

Parameter Tab

Figure 7.3-5: Incubator: Parameter Tab

Changing any parameters can be dangerous to machine and operator. Before changing any parameters consult the manufacturer.

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM): this is the computer memory that can retain the stored information even when not powered. RAM: when the computer is shut down, everything contained in RAM is lost.

Procedure for Authorization:

If a teach parameter shall be changed: 1. Transmit the authorization code for a group of teach parameters (inserting it in the dedicated field and then pressing Set button). 2. Change value and write it into RAM, in order to give the firmware the possibility to use the new value. 3. Overwrite NVM for permanent storage, saving the parameter even when power is off.

Page 7-22


7. Service Software Parameter Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Drop down menu:

Selection of devices.

Device

Predefined Parameter Shortlist Drop down menu

Predefined parameters are listed.

Parameter No.

Enter parameter No. to be addressed.

Contents

Current value of the selected parameter, after READ button is pressed.

New Value

Enter new value to change the content with.

Read

Starts read out of parameters.

Write

The new value of the parameter is written into RAM and will be used immediately (if Write button is grey, press first Read button).

RAM

RAM is a volatile memory, if the new value is not saved into the NVM the data will be lost once the system will be switched off. Value Range and Type Default

Value set by factory.

Max. (Lower Limit)

Predefined lower and upper limits of the parameter are shown.

Min. (Upper Limit)


Page 7-23

7. Service Software Type (Value Type)

Available Parameter Types (maximum possible ranges with given data type, if not limited from the Firmware) Float (floating point number), all other value types are Integer. 4. Word 2 Byte (0 to 65535) 5. Short 2 Byte (-32768 to 32767) 6. Word 4 Byte (0 to 4294967295) 7. Long 4 Byte (-2147483648 to 2147483647) 8. Float 4 Byte (±3.4e ±38 (~7 digits)) 9. Byte 1 Byte (0 to 255) 10. Char 1 Byte (-127 to 128) 11. Double 8 Byte (± 1.7e ± 308 (~15 digits))

Protection

None – free access Read-only – only for read out Teach – needs teach authorization Teach parameters can be changed only if the authorization is granted.

Authorization Code

Authorization Code is entered in the box. The code is for a specified group. • Code 1, writing rights for all parameters of type “Teach”.

Set (Set Authorization)

The entered authorization code is sent to the software. If the entered code is wrong, a failure message shows up.

Cancel (Cancel Authorization)

Protected mode is activated, it is no longer possible to modify teach parameters.

File Load and Send

Page 7-24

Option to load and send parameter files to the module.


7. Service Software Save

Option to save parameters from module device into a file.

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Reload

The RAM parameters are reloaded from NVM.

Overwrite

All RAM parameters are written to NVM and saved permanently.

Set to factory default values

Not recommended.

RAM

All parameters will be replaced with the manufacturer default settings.

Table 7.3-7: Incubator: Parameter Tab


Page 7-25

7. Service Software

7.3.6

Teach Tab

Figure 7.3-6: Incubator Teach Tab The below listed keys may be used to teach the positions of the incubator. The keyboard buttons work only when the Keyboard Control check is marked.

Figure 7.3-7: Keyboard Control Keyboard Buttons

Page 7-26

The “move” arrow buttons on the dialogue may also be used to move the belt in left/right directions. Step size can be changed by entering a value in the dedicated box or by dragging the available slides.


7. Service Software Button

Description

Button

Description

N/A

N/A

Move Transport - Left

Move Transport - Right

N/A

N/A

Decrease step size

Increase step size

Together with +/- buttons to perform 10 steps movements

Together with +/- button to perform 100 steps movements.

Table 7.3-8: Incubator keyboard buttons Teach Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

e.g.:Incubator( ID )

Select available devices.

Teach Select Device Select Drive

Select available drive.

Select Position

A list of positions to select is shown.

Incremental Positioning Arrow Buttons

The device moves by the shown step size with reference to the current position and the selected device. The highlighted buttons are active while the grey ones are inactive (depending on the selected device).


Keyboard Control

Keyboard control is activated.

Slider Step Size

Using the sliders, it is possible to set the step size of the teach movement.

Page 7-27

7. Service Software Move Step Size

The desired step size shall be set in the box. A step size adjusted using the sliders is also shown.

Options for selected Device and Drive Shows Options for selected device and drive.

Reload NVM

Reloads parameter set from NVM.

Calculate and set other Positions

Calculates and set from the special teach position the values for the next positions.

Calibrate Init

Starts a special command for the firmware to calibrate the Init.

Overwrite NVM

Overwrites NVM parameters with values saved in RAM memory.

Save Current Axis Position / Get Encoder Pos.

Up / Down Left / Right

Save

Saves the position shown in the associated box.

All

Saves all the positions displayed in the boxes.

Get

Shows each encoder current position.

All

Shows all encoder current positions.

Back / Forw.

Move Axis to Position / Get Stored Teach Position

Up / Down Left / Right Back / Forw.

Move

Moves selected drive to the position entered in the box.

All

Moves all drives to the positions displayed in the boxes.

Get

Retrieves the stored teach position.

All

Retrieves all stored teach positions Table 7.3-9: Incubator: Teach Tab

For teaching instructions, see Calibration of Incubator (see chapter 11.4.1 on page 11-63).

Page 7-28


7. Service Software

7.3.7

Setting of standard sequences

The following chapters present a detailed description of the most common sequences that can be set using commands available in Sequence tab of Move dialogue of Incubator service window. 7.3.7.1

Incubator Load

1. Using dedicated scroll bars, set From: 0 and To: 79. 2. Select Load button and check from Supply option. 3. Verify that Unload and Through Washer buttons are deselected. 4. Verify that with Presence Check option is selected. 5. Verify that No. of Cycles incremental field is set to 1. 6. Press Start button. 7.3.7.2

Incubator Unload

1. Using dedicated scroll bars, set From: 0 and To: 79. 2. Select Unload button and check to Waste option. 3. Verify that Load and Through Washer buttons are deselected. 4. Verify that No. of Cycles incremental field is set to 1. 5. Press Start button. 7.3.7.3

Load cuvettes into a selected number of positions

1. Select the interval of cuvette positions the command shall be applied to using dedicated From and To scroll bars. 2. Select Load button and check from Supply option. 3. Verify that Unload and Through Washer buttons are deselected. 4. Verify that with Presence Check option is selected. 5. Verify that No. of Cycles incremental field is set to 1. 6. Press Start button. 7.3.7.4

Unload cuvettes from a selected number of positions

1. Select the interval of cuvette positions the command shall be applied to using dedicated From and To scroll bars. 2. Select Unload button and check to Waste option. 3. Verify that Load and Through Washer buttons are deselected. 4. Verify that No. of Cycles incremental field is set to 1. 5. Press Start button.


Page 7-29

7. Service Software 7.3.7.5

Move a selected number of cuvettes through washer

1. Select the interval of cuvette positions the command shall be applied to using dedicated From and To scroll bars. 2. Select Through Washer button. 3. Verify tha Load and Unload options are deselected. 4. Verify that No. of Cycles incremental field is set to 1. 5. Verify that Refill counter incremental field is set to 0. 6. Press Start button.

Page 7-30


7. Service Software

7.4

Front and Loading Units

7.4.1

Main and Reagent Temperature Tab

Figure 7.4-1: Main and Reagent Tab Main Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Common Control (see chapter 7.1.6 on page 7-4) Stirrer mode Stop

Immediate stop of the stirrer.

Start

Starts stirrer.

Auto

The stirrer starts running when at least 1 integral is entered into the reagent area and stops when the reagent area is empty.

Table 7.4-1: Front and Loading Units: Common Control in Main Tab


Page 7-31

7. Service Software

Reagent Temperature Tab

Group

Button / Field

Description

Temperature and Cooling operating Data

Row

Left

Shows readout of left peltier module.

Middle

Shows readout of middle peltier module.

Right

Shows readout of right peltier module.

Ambient

Shows readout of ambient sensor. (i.e. the sensor positioned on the back of the sample area)

Actual Temp.

Shows the current temperature of the module. Depends on the ambient air temperature.

Column

Correct Temp.

Shows the corrected temperature. The reported value is calculated and depends on ambient temperature and cooling factor. In range: 11.2°C < Correct Temp. < 14.8°C Out of range: Correct Temp < 10.8°C Correct Temp. > 15.2°C Note: The verification of the values reported in Correct Temp column allows service technicians to evaluate the proper functioning of different Peltier modules.

Duty Factor

Shows power of cooling units in percent. Expected values: 0% - 100%

Seebeck Volt

Shows the output voltage generated by the temperature difference between warm and cold sides of each peltier element. Expected value > 100mV

Supply Volt

Shows current supplied voltage. 21 - 27 V

Read

Starts reading procedure.

Check Button

The check of the button allows to report the ambient temperature value (always indicated in Miscellaneous panel) in Reagent Temperature panel also.

Table 7.4-2: Main and Reagent Temperature Tab

Page 7-32


7. Service Software

7.4.2

Main and Miscellaneous Tab

Figure 7.4-2: Main and Miscellaneous Tab


Page 7-33

7. Service Software Miscellaneous Tab

Group

Button / Field

Description

Reagent Sensors Stirrer Light barrier

Shows if light barrier is IN or OUT. The position (IN or OUT) is assumed by the motor adapter. The sensor is located on the righthand side of the reagent module.

Stirrer Index Pulses

Shows the moves/minutes. Pulse range: 148 - 168

Stirrer Mode

Shows the current mode of the stirrer: Auto, Start or Stop.

Read

Starts readout of stirrer lightbarrier.

Tip Tray Sensor Left

Tray is opened or closed.

Tip Tray Sensor Right

Tray is opened or closed.

Ambient Temperature

Shows ambient temperature

Sample Sensors

(i.e. the temperature read by the sensor positioned on the back of the sample area). Power Supply Voltage

Shows current supplied voltage. +23.5V to +24.5V

Read

Starts readout of sample sensors.

Table 7.4-3: Main and Miscellaneous Tab

Page 7-34


7. Service Software

7.4.3

Main and Front cover

Figure 7.4-3: Main and Front cover


Page 7-35

7. Service Software

Front cover Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Sensors CUV Sample Rack Flap Reagent Rack Flap

Displays sensor data.

Starter rack

(Possible options: opened/ closed).

Top cover Read

Starts readout of sensor data.

Drop down Field

Possible choices:

LED’S Rack

All Ancillary Rack Reagent Rack Sample Rack Disposable Tip Starter Rack (4 Lanes) Starter Rack (8 Lanes) ON

Switch LEDs on and off.

OFF Lane

Drop down field

Selects the lanes of each module whose LEDs shall be turned on/ switched off (using ON and OFF buttons).

Test

A sequence is performed: one-by-one all LEDs are turned on and switched off.

Button

System beeper is turned on.

Beeper

Table 7.4-4: Main and Front cover Tab

Page 7-36


7. Service Software

7.4.4

Reagent Tab

Figure 7.4-4: Reagent Tab


Page 7-37

7. Service Software Reagent Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Pos x (x= 1-4)

Selects a position in the Ancillary Bay.

Reagent Bay Anc. (Ancillary)

Chooses the antenna for RFID operation. Reagent

Lane x (x = 1-25)

Selects a lane of the Reagent Bay. Chooses the antenna for RFID operation.

Read Rack Sensors

Usually an auto read out is performed; if not, press this button to read the sensors.

Front Cover Indication

Enables front cover LED of the selected lane. In case no front cover is mounted and tests of the reagent module shall be done, it is possible to disable it.

RFID Operation Input switched to

Shows current antenna selection.

Get Reader IC Info

Shows Reader IC info: Type Ident, Serial Number, RsMaxP

Test TAG Read/Write (for the antenna indicated in Input switched to field.)

Shows the Article Number of the selected integral/ancillary. R/W: checks if reading and writing function is working. (shows “pass” or “fail”).

Table 7.4-5: Reagent Tab

Page 7-38


7. Service Software

7.4.5

Sample Tab

Figure 7.4-5: Sample Tab Sample Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Select Lane to scan

Selects a lane of the Sample Bay.

Scan Operation

(Lane = 1-10) Read Rack Sensors

Usually an auto read out is performed; if not, press this button to display the current status of the sample compartment.

Front Cover Indication

Enables front cover LED of selected lane. In case no front cover is mounted and tests of the sample module shall be done, it is possible to disable it.


Focus switched to

Indicates the lane the scanner is currently focused on.

Sum of detected rack occupations.

Shows sum of detected insertion/ extraction of sample racks.

Page 7-39

7. Service Software Scan Report

Shows information regarding lane occupation (insertion/extraction of racks). Shows rack type. Shows information of detected barcodes.

Extended (Check Box)

Gives more information about the scan of the lane (rack).

Code

Using the drop down menus, it is possible to select the barcode formats that the scanner will be able to read.

Scan Configuration

Supported options:

Range

•

2/5 Interleaved

•

Code 39

•

Code 128, EAN 128

•

Codabar

This field can be used to set a range for the length of the selected barcode type. Acceptable barcodes shall be composed by 3 to 17 characters.

Page 7-40


7. Service Software Checksum

If checksum is used with the code type selected, select either Verify, Display or both. Verify checksum: This option enables the check digit calculation. If the calculated check digit does not correspond to the check digit in the bar code, the bar code is ignored. The use of a check digit greatly improves the security of a bar code. Not verify checksum: This option disables the check digit calculation. This option is required when the bar codes do not contain a check digit or contain an invalid check digit. Display checksum: This option enables the transmission of the check digit together with the data characters. If the check digit calculation is disabled, the scanner cannot differentiate anymore between a (valid) check digit and a data character. It will therefore transmit all data characters of the label, including what could constitute a check digit. Not display checksum: This option disables the transmission of the check digit. If the check digit calculation is disabled, the scanner cannot differentiate between a (valid) check digit and a data character. It will therefore transmit all data characters of the label, including what could constitute a check digit. !Important. The use of Display option is meaningful only when Verify option is also enabled. NOTE. Checksum settings related to Code 128, EAN 128 typologies cannot be modified: Verify option is always enabled while Display option is always disabled.

Read


Select this button to display the code types information stored in the EEPROM of the barcode scanner.

Page 7-41

7. Service Software Write

Select this button to write the code types information into the EEPROM of the barcode scanner.

Enable Monarch Codabar

Select this option to read Monarch Codabar symbologies as well as other types of Codabar barcode symbologies. !Important. The standard configuration of the scanner foresees to leave this option disabled, in order not to have difficulties in reading non-monarch Codabar symbologies of poor quality. The option shall be enabled only when: • Customer barcodes are Monarch Codabar; • Some difficulties in Codabar reading are detected and it is necessary to try to implement a counteraction.

Range Example This area provides examples of valid range values that can be defined for a selected barcode type, together with their related valid barcode lengths. Table 7.4-6: Sample Tab

Page 7-42


7. Service Software

7.4.6

Start Reagent A and B Tab

Figure 7.4-6: Starter Reagent A Tab Start Reag Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

1

Displays sensor current status.

2

• Target with fluid: <=1.5V

3

• Target without fluid: >=3.5V

Sensors

4 Supply Voltage

Displays the current supplied voltage. +23.5V to +24.5V

Read All

Starts read out of the 4 available bubble sensors.

Drop down menu

Choose between Starter Reagent Bottles 1-4.

Aspiration


Page 7-43

7. Service Software Calibrate

Calibrates the selected bubble sensor. The tube shall be checked firstly with liquid inside before sending the calibration command to the starter reagent PCB. After successful execution of the command, the sensor voltage is stored. Now the liquid shall be removed from the tube, in order to read again the sensor voltage.

Cal. Value

Digital Potentiometer In case the calibration was a success, in the field Cal.Value the calibration value is shown.

Check

Starts check for voltages with or without liquid.

Voltage with/without Liquid

Displays voltage levels measured with and without liquid in front of the selected sensor. After the calibration or checking of the bubble sensors have been completed, the related values are shown in this field: • with liquid <=1.5V • without liquid>=3.5V

Valve Starter Valve 1

Right Left

Starter Valve 2

Switch starter valves

Right Left

RFID Antenna Selection and Operation Reagent

A starter bottle can be selected.

Selection

Displays the selection.

Get Reader IC Info

Starts read out of reader IC.

RsMaxP Type Ident

Displays data of IC.

Serial No. Test TAG Read/Write (for the bottle indicated in Input switched to field)

Shows the Article Number of the currently selected bottle. R/W: checks if reading and writing function is working. (shows “pass” or “fail”)

Table 7.4-7: Start Reag Tab

Page 7-44


7. Service Software

7.4.7

Cabinet Tab

Figure 7.4-7: Cabinet Tab Cabinet Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Cabinet Inflow Area Container

Water

DICV valve switches to Water tank.

Level

Displays filling level of Water containers (tank and intermediate container).

Status

Green - OK Yellow - Running empty •

Threshold: 30 %

Red - Empty •

Threshold : 13 %

Grey - Not connected Container


Wash Buffer

WBCV valve switches to Wash Buffer.

Level

Displays filling level of Wash Buffer containers (tank and intermediate container).

Page 7-45

7. Service Software Status

Green - OK Yellow - Running empty •

Threshold: 30 %

Red - Empty •

Threshold: 12 %

Grey - Not connected Cleaning Solution

DICV, CS to System

DICV valve switches to cleaning solution tank.

WBCV, CS to Washer

WBCV valve switches to cleaning solution tank.

Cabinet Outflow Area Waste Container

Summary Status of Both Containers

Evaluation of both containers together. Red is full and green is OK Green – OK Yellow - Running full •

Threshold: 70 % (the sum of both containers is considered)

Red - Full •

Threshold: 84 % (the sum of both containers is considered)

Grey - Not connected Container

Container

Left Waste

Switches LWDV valve to Left Waste.

Level

Displays filling level of Left Waste container (in percentage).

Right Waste

Switches LWDV valve to Right Waste.

Level

Displays filling level of Right Waste container (in percentage).

Water

Displays status of Water containers.

Presence Status

Possible values: Both/ Nothing Wash Buffer

Displays status of Wash Buffer containers. Possible values: Both/ Nothing.

Liquid Waste

Displays status of Liquid Waste tanks. Possible values: Both/ Left/ Right.

Page 7-46


7. Service Software Solid Waste

Displays status of Solid Waste container. Possible values: Pushed In/ Pulled Out.

Read all

Starts readout of all containers. Table 7.4-8: Cabinet Tab


Page 7-47

7. Service Software

7.4.8

Parameter Tab

Figure 7.4-8: Parameter Tab


For explanation and overview see Parameter Tab (see chapter 7.3.5 on page 7-22).

Page 7-48


7. Service Software

7.5

Reader

7.5.1

Main and Measure Tab

Figure 7.5-1: Main and Measure Tab Main Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Common Control As described (see chapter 7.1.6 on page 7-4) Table 7.5-1: Common Control in Main Tab Basic Movements Group

Button / Field

Description

Basic Movements

Shutter Movement


Up

Highest position. Spindle is free moving.

Down

Bottom position. Steel needle is dipped into cuvette.

Chamber close Position

Opaque (middle position)

Page 7-49

7. Service Software Up / Mid / Down Cycle

Drives through all positions in continuous running mode. The cycle can be stopped pressing Cancel button in Device is busy window. !Important. After the pressure of Cancel button, the shutter doesn’t come back to the init position. Execute an initialization of the module before performing any other operations.

Spindle Movement

Rotation For n Cuvette Positions.

Moves the spindle with the entered amount of positions. If 30 positions are chosen, the spindle runs empty. (All cuvettes will be moved out). !Important. The spindle movement shall be performed only with the shutter in up (init) position.

Scroll bar

Cuvette positions 1 - 30, as those available on the spindle, can be selected.

Rotation Cycle

The spindle rotates until Cancel button in Device is Busy window is pressed. !Important. The rotation cycle shall be performed only with the shutter in up (init) position.

Flash Data Get Flash Data from last The latest measurement performed Measure by the reader is shown in a chart and cached in memory buffer. Table 7.5-2: Basic Movements Tab Measure Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Start

Starts a reference LED measurement.

Measurement

The associated value is reported in the dedicated field positioned under the button. The dark count is excluded from the performed measure.

Page 7-50

Measurement Time

In sec.

Time frame of measurement.

High Voltage

On

Switches high voltage on.

Off

Switches high voltage off. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

7. Service Software Read

Shows current high voltage. This shown value must be in the area of the photo multiplier Operating Point +/-10V. Range: 900-1200V

Dark Count

Read

Dark count measurement (measurement length: 2sec.) Chamber closed •

Target: 10 -200

Shutter down position •

Target: 10 - 200

Difference between Chamber close and shutter down positions. •

Target max.100

Reference LED Luminance in %

The luminance (in percentage) of the internal LED that shall be used during a measurement can be set. The functionality shall not be used by FSE.

On / Off

Switch internal reference LED ON/OFF The functionality shall not be used by FSE. Table 7.5-3: Measure Tab


Page 7-51

7. Service Software

7.5.2

Sequence Tab

Figure 7.5-2: Sequence Tab

Page 7-52


7. Service Software Sequence Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Measurement with Cuvette Movement Measured Value

Shows the result of the performed measure. The dark counts are already subtracted from measurement reading.

Dark Count

Shows dark count reading of the latest measurement.

Counted Delay

Control for injection delay (internal time emitter of PC)

Start

Starts the set measurement.

Get flash data

Receives flash data of the latest reading and displays them in a chart.

None

No injection is performed during the measurement.

Set A

Use Set A to inject starters (using Pump 1 and Pump 2) during the measurement.

Measurement Time

Sec. scroll bar

The required measurement time can be set.

Injection Delay

Sec. scroll bar

The required injection delay can be set.

Injection

! Important. In the current version of Service Software, the direct insertion of an injection delay value in the dedicated field doesn’t work properly. Always set the time using the dedicated scroll bar. Table 7.5-4: Sequence Tab


Page 7-53

7. Service Software

7.5.3

Sensor Tab

Figure 7.5-3: Sensor Tab

Page 7-54


7. Service Software Sensor Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Logical and Analog Sensors Init Shutter Drive

Displays the current status of the shutter (in/ out).

Init Spindle Drive

Displays the current status of the spindle (in/ out).

High Voltage

Shows current high voltage. This shown value must be in the area of the photo multiplier Operating Point +/-10V. Range: 900-1200V

Supply Voltage

Displays the current supplied voltage. +23.5V to +24.5V

Tube Temp 1 / 2

Display temperatures of starter tubes (1 and 2). 35.5°C to 37.5°C

Read

Starts reading.

Calibrate Pump A1 Pump A2 Pump B1

Calibrates chosen starter reagent pump.

Pump B2 Table 7.5-5: Sensor Tab


Page 7-55

7. Service Software

7.5.4

Main and Prime Tab

Figure 7.5-4: Prime Tab

Page 7-56


7. Service Software Prime Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Prime

This operation shall be performed to fill starter 1 tubes with liquid.

Initialization

Initializes devices that participate to prime.

Use n cuvettes

The number of cuvettes to perform the prime can be set.

Pump A1

2x400µl of liquid will be injected in each cuvette. Pump A2 Prime

This operation shall be performed to fill starter 2 tubes with liquid.

Initialization

Initializes devices that participate to prime.

Use n cuvettes

The number of cuvettes to perform the prime can be set. 2x400µl of liquid will be injected in each cuvette.

Table 7.5-6: Prime Tab


Page 7-57

7. Service Software

7.5.5

Parameter Tab

Figure 7.5-5: Parameter Tab


For explanation and information see Parameter Tab (see chapter 7.3.5 on page 7-22).

Page 7-58


7. Service Software

7.5.6

Teach Tab

Figure 7.5-6: Teach Tab


Page 7-59

7. Service Software The below listed keys may be used to teach the positions of the reader shutter and the spindle. The keyboard buttons work only when the Keyboard Control check is marked.

Figure 7.5-7: Keyboard Control Keyboard Buttons

The “move” arrow buttons on the dialogue may also be used to move the spindle in left/ right direction or the reader shutter in up/ down direction. Step size can be changed by entering a value in the dedicated box or by dragging the available slides.

Button

Description

Button

Description

N/A

N/A

Move spindle left

Move spindle right

Lift up reader shutter

Move down reader shutter

Decrease step size

Increase step size

Together with +/- buttons to perform 10 steps movements

Together with +/- button to perform 100 steps movements.

Table 7.5-7: Reader keyboard buttons

For teaching instruction see Calibrations of Reader Module (see chapter 14.4.3 on page 1444).

For explanation and information see Teach Tab (see chapter 7.3.6 on page 7-26).

Page 7-60


7. Service Software

7.6 7.6.1

Pipettor Main and Pump Tab

Figure 7.6-1: Pipettor Main and Pump Tab


Page 7-61

7. Service Software Main Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Common Control (see chapter 7.1.6 on page 7-4) Prime Operation Prime Right Arm

A prime of the right arm is performed.

Prime Cycle

The number of prime cycles to perform once pressed Prime Right Arm button can be set.

One Prime Cycle includes:

With reference to the single prime cycle, it is possible to set both the number of SRP cycles and the activation time of PRP.

SRP Cycles PRP Time (s) KNF

Table 7.6-1: Pipettor: Common Control in Main Tab Pump Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

SRP Diluter Pump Initialization

Regular Init command. Pump motor, valve and piston are initialized.

Valve

Switches SRP valve to following positions: •

In

•

Out

•

Bypass

Aspirate

By pressing Execute button, the entered volume of liquid (in µl) will be aspirated from Input (from tube connection SRP to PRP) or from Output (from right arm tube).

Dispense

By pressing Execute button, the entered volume of liquid (in µl) will be dispensed into Waste position or in the current position of the pipettor (No Pip movement). ! Important. The selection of No Pip Movement can cause the flood of the system.

PRP Pump Switch on

Page 7-62

PRP is switched on for the entered amount of seconds.


7. Service Software Into Waste Position

PRP dispenses liquid into waste position. LWP also starts automatically.

No. of Pipettor Movements

PRP dispenses liquid in the current position of the pipettor. ! Important. The selection of No Pip Movement can cause the flood of the system.

Waste Pump Switch on

LWP is switched on for the entered amount of seconds.

DI Cleaning Valve DI Cleaning Valve

DICV is switched to: •

Water (System)

•

Cleaning fluid

Table 7.6-2: Pipettor: Pump Tab


Page 7-63

7. Service Software

7.6.2

Main and Misc Tab

Figure 7.6-2: Pipettor Main and Misc Tab

Page 7-64


7. Service Software Misc Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

XY - Random Movement Execute

Starts the execution of the cycles.

with Z - movement

After each XY movement, a Zmovement is performed in the pipettor home position. Home position for left arm: •

Eject position

Home position for right arm: • Arm

Wash position

Choose which arm shall perform the random movement. Possible choices:

Cycles

•

Both

•

Right

•

Left

Choose how many cycles shall be performed in random mode. Each cycle foresees the execution of 1 movement of the selected arm to each position that can be reached. Table 7.6-3: Pipettor: Misc Tab


Page 7-65

7. Service Software

7.6.3

Main and Sensor Tab

Figure 7.6-3: Pipettor Main and Sensor Tab

Page 7-66


7. Service Software Sensor Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

24V Supply

Supply Voltage.

Left Arm

Current measured voltage: Range: 21V - 27V 7V Supply

Generates 7V on the PCB. Current measured voltage: Range: 7V ± 5%

3.6V Supply

Supply voltage for Head PCB. Current measured voltage: Range: 3.56V ± 3%

Tip Sensor

Shows if a tip is picked up (Present) or not (Absence) by left arm.

Read

Starts readout of left arm sensors.

Result

Sensor test OK or Error

LED Current

Adjusts current of the LED.

OLV Calibration

Adjustment of the LED current to the compensation of the ideal band and aging effects of the sensor system. Range: 10-13% Fluid Air cutoff

Determination of the critical limit of air fluid for digitalization of the sensor signal.

Fluid signal

Signals are used to create a curve for the Fluid Air Cut off.

Air Signal Execute

Starts OLV calibration Table 7.6-4: Pipettor: Sensor Tab


Page 7-67

7. Service Software

7.6.4

Move Tab

Figure 7.6-4: Pipettor Move Tab

When a field or a coordinate is chosen by double clicking on it, the selected arm will move. If the pipettor will meet barriers during the movement, damages of the analyzer and personal injuries can happen.

Move Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Fix Coordinates Left Arm Init Eject Dispense LAS

Page 7-68

The selection of an option moves Left Arm to the chosen position. Note. In case of selection of LAS option on LIAISON®XL instruments, the left arm moves to a position near to the left reagent dispensation one. In any case do not perform this selection on LIAISON®XL instruments. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

7. Service Software Fix Coordinates Right Arm Init Wash Waste

The selection of an option moves Right Arm to the chosen position.

Disp. Left Front Disp. Mid. Front Disp. Right Front Disp. Back Bay Reagent Ancillary Sample Tips Right Top Tips Right Mid.

•

First select a bay, using Bay drop-down menu.

•

Then, if necessary, select a rack typology, using Rack drop-down menu.

•

Double click into the field to start the movement to the selected position.

Tips Right Bottom Tips Left Top Tips Left Mid.

Remark. If the ancillary bay is chosen, the arm selection is triggered by a single click into the grid.

Tips Left Bottom Rack Choose a rack typology for the selected bay. Remark. In case of customization of a new sample rack, the execution of the procedure described in chapter 8.15.2.5 allows to update the rack list available in the drop-down menu. Ancillary Choose the ancillary bottle type that shall be used for LLD evaluation. It is possible to choose among: •

Light Check (LC) bottle

•

HCV bottle

•

HBsAgQ diluent

Check Buttons Left Arm

The check buttons show which arm is selected.

Right Arm

Only for ancillary bay it is possible to select the arm manually. Remark. If the ancillary bay is chosen, the arm selection is triggered by a single click into the grid.

Coord. No.:


Page 7-69

7. Service Software A single click into the grid shows the chosen coordinate number and activates the selected arm. Left Arm Tip Eject

Moves to eject position and ejects the tip to solid waste bag.

Tip Pick Up

Be aware of the pipettor position. No movement of the arm. The pipettor picks a tip up at the current position.

LLD

Be aware of the pipettor position. No movement of the arm. The pipettor checks LLD at the current position.

Right Arm LLD

Be aware of the pipettor position. No movement of the arm. The pipettor checks LLD at the current position. Table 7.6-5: Pipettor: Move Tab

Page 7-70


7. Service Software

7.6.5

LLD Right Arm Tab

Figure 7.6-5: LLD Right Arm Tab

LLD Right Arm Tab

Group

Button / Field

Description

New

Clears whole list.

Clear Result

Clears following results in list:

List Control

•

Cycles

•

Delta Z

•

No LLD

Load

Loads list file from the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftw are\Data\Driver\LLDList.

Save

Saves list file to the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftw are\Data\Driver\LLDList.

Report

Creates an HTML report for printout. The report is saved in the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftw are\Log\Reports\LLD

LLD


Page 7-71

7. Service Software Execute

Starts to execute the set cycles. The order presented in the list is followed.

Cycles

Sets the number of LLD detections that shall be performed for each position indicated in the list.

Coord. List and Results List

Bay

The selected bay is indicated here. Possible choices:

Track

•

Ancillary

•

Reagent

The selected lane is indicated here. Possible choices: •

Reagent bay: lanes 1 to 25.

•

Ancillary bay: lane 1

Tube

The desired position in the selected lane is indicated here.

Coord. No.

Shows coordinate number of the chosen position.

Cycles

Shows the total amount of completed cycles.

Delta Z

Maximum variance between LLD detections. Maximum allowed value: < 30

No LLD

Shows the total amount of not detected LLDs.

Up

Moves the chosen row (or rows) up or down in the list, in order to change the sequence of execution of LLD detections.

Down Delete

Deletes marked row (or rows) from the list.

Ancillary

Grid of ancillary bay. Double click on a position to add it to LLD list.

Reagent

Grid of reagent bay. Double click on a position to add it to LLD list.

Ancillary Rack:

Choose ancillary bottle typology. It is possible to choose among:

Reagent Rack

•


•

HCV bottle

•

HBsAgQ diluent

Choose integral layout typology: •

Rack Type 7

Table 7.6-6: LLD Right Arm Tab Page 7-72


7. Service Software

7.6.6

LLD Left Arm Tab

Figure 7.6-6: LLD Left Arm Tab

LLD Left Arm Tab

Group

Button / Field

Description

New

Clears whole list.

Clear Result

Clears following results in list:

List Control

•

Cycles

•

Delta Z

•

No LLD

Load

Loads list file from the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\Dat a\Driver\LLDList

Save

Saves list file to the directory. D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\Dat a\Driver\LLDList

Report

Creates an HTML report for printout. The report is saved in the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\Log \Reports\LLD

LLD


Page 7-73

7. Service Software Execute

Starts to execute the set cycles. The order presented in the list is followed.

Cycles

Sets the number of LLD detections that shall be performed for each position indicated in the list.

Max.

Shows the maximum number of cycles that can be performed for each position indicated in the list.

Cord. List and Results List

Bay

Track

The selected bay is indicated here. Possible choices: •

Ancillary

•

Sample

The selected lane is indicated here. Possible choices: •

Sample bay: lanes 1 to 10.

•

Ancillary bay: lane 1

Tube

The desired position in the selected lane is indicated here.

Cord. No.

Shows coordinate number of the chosen position.

Cycles

Shows the total amount of completed cycles.

Delta Z

Maximum variance between LLD detections. Maximum allowed value: < 30

No LLD

Shows a total amount of not detected LLDs.

Up Down

Moves chosen row (or rows) up or down in the list, in order to change the sequence of execution of LLD detections.

Delete

Deletes marked row (or rows) from the list.

Ancillary

Grid of ancillary bay. Double click on a position to add it to LLD list.

Sample

Grid of sample bay. Double click on a position to add it to LLD list.

Ancillary Rack:

Choose ancillary bottle typology. It is possible to choose among:

Sample Rack:

•


•

HCV bottle

•

HBsAgQ diluent

Choose sample rack typology. Remark. In case of customization of a new sample rack, the execution of the procedure described in chapter 8.15.2.5 allows to update the rack list available in the drop-down menu.

Page 7-74


7. Service Software Disposable Tip Requirements

Indicates the number of disposable tips that are needed to execute the entered list of tests. It is possible to swap the trays: a click on a cell of the table selects the tray to change, while a double click indicates the tray to assign. Table 7.6-7: LLD Left Arm Tab


Page 7-75

7. Service Software

7.6.7

Parameter Tab

Figure 7.6-7: Window: Pipettor: Parameter Tab



Page 7-76


7. Service Software

7.6.8

Parameter Tab (Diluter Pump ID 0x91)

Figure 7.6-8: Window: Pipettor: Parameter Tab (Diluter)


Parameter Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Device Selection of devices. Predefined Parameter Shortlist Drop down menu

Predefined parameters will be listed.

Parameter No.

Enter parameter No. to be addressed.

Contents

Actual content of parameter, after Read button is pressed.

RAM


Page 7-77

7. Service Software New Value

Enter new value to change the content with.

Read

Starts read out of parameters.

Write

The new value of a parameter is written into RAM and will be used immediately. RAM is a volatile memory, if it is not saved into the NVM, the data will be lost once the system has been switched off. (If Write button is grey, press first Read button)

Value Option Integer Unsigned Signed 2 Byte 4 Byte

Definition of the current parameter type. Float (floating point number), all other value types are Integer.

Float File Load and Send

Option to load and send parameter files to the module.

Save

Save parameters from module device into a file.

Non-Volatile Memory Reload

Reload the RAM parameter from NVM.

Overwrite

All RAM parameters will be written to NVM.

Set to factory default values

Not recommended.

RAM

All parameters will be replaced with the manufacturer default settings.

Table 7.6-8: Pipettor: Parameter Tab (Diluter Pump)

Page 7-78


7. Service Software

7.7

System

Figure 7.7-1: System Main Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Common Control (see chapter 7.1.6 on page 7-4) Table 7.7-1: Test Procedure: Common Control in Main Tab

Follow the instructions of the upcoming screens.

System must be completely taught before starting the execution of the tests available in this window.


Page 7-79

7. Service Software System Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Execute

Starts the checked tests.

Pipettor Random Movement

It starts an endurance test for the pipettor.

Test

Each arm is moved 10 times to each available position; after each movement in X and Y directions, a Z movement in home position is also performed. Home position for left arm: •

Eject position

Home position for right arm: •

Wash position

At the end of the test, a report will be generated and saved in the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\L og\Reports Pipettor LLD Test

It starts a defined LLD test. 1. Enter racks equipping 100mm tubes into sample module: •

Lane 1, tube position 1, without DI water.

•

Lane 5, tube position 7, with DI water.

•

Lane 10, tube position 12, without DI water. 2. Enter racks into reagent module:

•

Lane 1: tube position 1 with DI water and tube position 7 without DI water

•

Lane 12: tube position 1 without DI water and tube position 4 with DI water

•

Lane 25. tube position 1 without DI water and tube position 7 with DI water 3. Enter Light Check bottles into ancillary bay:

•

Bottle pos 1 without DI water

•

Bottle pos 4 with DI water

At the end of the test, a report will be generated and saved in the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\L og\Reports !Important In order to prevent possible crashes of pipettor arms, this test shall be executed equipping only 100mm sample tubes and Light Check bottles.

Page 7-80


7. Service Software Incubator Washer Test

It starts an endurance test with movements of the incubator, the pushers and the spindle. At the end of the test, a report will be generated and saved in the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\ServiceSoftware\L og\Reports

Priming Starter

Primes each bottle for starter 1 and 2. !Important The test shall be performed equipping all 4 positions of the starter reagent area with bottles.

Washer

The system rinses the washer buffer automatically.

Pipettor

The system rinses the pipettor. Take care during rinsing that the wash station does not overflow. Table 7.7-2: System Tab


Page 7-81

7. Service Software

7.8 7.8.1

Washer Main and Liquid Tab

For tokens or abbreviations see Glossary.

Figure 7.8-1: Washer, Main and Liquid Tab

Main Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

Common Control (see chapter 7.1.6 on page 7-4) Basic Movement

Page 7-82

Lift Home

Upper position of washer lift.

Lift Down

Lower position, with the needles inside the cuvettes.


7. Service Software Lift Home / Down Cycle

Drives through all positions in automatic mode. The cycle can be stopped pressing Cancel button in Device is busy window. !Important. After the pressure of Cancel button, the washer lift doesn’t come back to the init position. Execute an initialization of the module before performing any other operations.

Prime Prime

A prime cycle of all washer tubes is performed.

Washer height Calibration

Residual volume calibration: the height of washer needles can be correctly adjusted.

Calibration

Table 7.8-1: Washer: Common Control in Main Tab Liquid Tab Group

Button / Field

Description

On for xx seconds, 0 = manual off WPRP On

Switches WPRP on. ! Important. In order not to flood the instrument, it is always necessary to switch WPAP on before turning on WPRP also.

Enter number field

Enter a number between 0 and 25.5. If value "0" is set, WPRP remains turned on until WPRP Off button is pressed. If a value different from "0" is set, WPRP remains turned on for the number of seconds set.

WPRP Off

Switches WPRP off.

WAP On

Switches WAP on.

Enter number field

Enter a number between 0 and 25.5. If value "0" is set, WAP remains turned on until WAP Off is pressed. If a value different from "0" is set, WAP remains turned on for the number of seconds set.

WAP Off LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Switches WAP off.

Page 7-83

7. Service Software WPAP On

Switches WPAP on.

Enter number field

Enter a number between 0 and 25.5. If value "0" is set, WPAP remains turned on until WPAP Off button is pressed. If a value different from "0" is set, WPAP remains turned on for the number of seconds set.

WPAP Off

Switches WPAP off.

Execute

WPRP and WPAP are turned on contemporaneously

For n sec.

Enter a number between 0 to 99 sec.

Port 1 - Port 5

Switches the valve to the selected port.

Rinse + Aspirate

Switch WDVB to

WB Cleaning Valve WBCV is switched to: •

Wash buffer (System)

•

Cleaning fluid

WDP Aspirate Execute

Starts aspiration

Volume n 000µl

Volume to aspirate (in µl).

Speed n00µl/s

Speed of aspiration (in seconds). Do not change this value, to prevent wrong behavior.

Dispense Execute

Starts dispense.

Number of

The amount the cycle will be repeated.

Residual Vol.

The pump is emptied: the remaining volume of liquid is dispensed through the input port (i.e. towards wash buffer tank).

Volume n 000µl

Volume of dispensation (in µl).

Speed n00µl/s

Speed of dispensation (in seconds). Do not change this value, to prevent wrong behavior.

Draw back nµl

Draw back of dispensation.

Table 7.8-2: Washer: Liquid Tab Page 7-84


7. Service Software

7.8.2

Main and Sensor Tab

Figure 7.8-2: Main and Sensor Tab Main and Sensor Tab

Group

Button / Field

Description

Miscellaneous Init Washer Drv. Init WAP Init WPRP

Shows current positions of washer lift, WAP and WPRP. Possible values: "In", "Out"

Supply Voltage

Shows current supplied voltage.

Read

Starts readout of the init positions.

WPRP

Calibration of WPRP pump.

Calibration

Calibration target value: 10 -220 See Calibration of WPRP or WAP Pumps (see chapter 19.6.4 on page 1946). WAP

Calibration of WAP pump. Calibration target value: 10 -220 See Calibration of WAP Pump (see chapter 19.7.5 on page 19-58).


Page 7-85

7. Service Software WDP

Calibration of WDP.

Aspiration Sensor Asp. Calib.

Calibration of aspiration (bubble) sensors. The related calibration values are reported in Calib. Values field.

Calib. Values

Shows logical condition. See chapter 13.4.1.2 for the allowed range.

Voltage

Shows current voltage. See chapter 13.4.1.2 for the allowed range.

Read

Starts readout.

Table 7.8-3: Washer: Main and Sensor Tab

Page 7-86


7. Service Software

7.8.3

Main and Move Tab

Figure 7.8-3: Main and Move Tab Main and Move Tab

Group

Button / Field

Description

Washer Lift Movements Home

Moves washer lift to home position. (Upper position)

Down

Wash lift moves down, inserting the needles into the cuvettes.

Home / Down Cycle

Drives through all positions in continuous running mode. The cycle can be stopped pressing Cancel button in Device is busy window. !Important. After the pressure of Cancel button, the washer lift doesn’t come back to the init position. Execute an initialization of the module before performing any other operations.

Shutter Movement Up


Highest position of reader shutter: spindle is free moving.

Page 7-87

7. Service Software Down

Bottom position of reader shutter: steel needle is dipped into cuvette.

Chamber Close Position

Opaque (middle position)

Up / Mid / Down Cycle

Drives through all positions in continuous running mode. The cycle can be stopped pressing Cancel button in Device is busy window. !Important. After the pressure of Cancel button, the shutter doesn’t come back to the init position. Execute an initialization of the module before performing any other operations.

Spindle Movement Rotation For n Cuvette Positions

Moves the spindle for the entered amount of positions. If 30 positions are chosen, the spindle runs empty (all cuvettes are moved out). ! Important. The spindle movement shall be performed only with the washer lift and the reader shutter in up (home) positions.

Scroll Bar

Cuvette Positions 1-30, as those available on the spindle, can be selected.

Rotation Cycle

The spindle rotates until Cancel button in Device is Busy window is pressed. ! Important. The rotation cycle shall be performed only with the washer lift and the reader shutter in up (home) positions.

Table 7.8-4: Washer: Main and Move Tab

Page 7-88


7. Service Software

7.8.4

Parameter Tab

Figure 7.8-4: Washer: Parameter Tab




Page 7-89

8. Teaching of Pipettor

8 Teaching of Pipettor 8.1

General Statement

If it is necessary to switch from the Main User Interface (Main UI) or the Service Software to the Teacher Software, shut down the previously used software. Then switch the machine off for about 10 sec., restart the system and open the Teacher Software. The same procedure shall be applied to switch from Teacher Software to Main UI or Service Software. This chapter refers to LIAISON®XL systems only and is valid up to Teacher Software Version 4.44. It is necessary to use an external keyboard for teaching!

8.2

Safety



•

Follow all safety instructions included in this manual.

•


Use of the Software Use LIAISON®XL Teacher Software only to perform described operations.

Function of the Instrument Please follow closely the steps contained in the individual instructions to achieve a perfect function of the instrument.


Page 8-1


8.3 8.3.1

Overview Overview Teacher Menu

Figure 8.3-1: Teacher menu Teach points of each module are shown with red dots.

Page 8-2


8. Teaching of Pipettor Button / Position

Description

Pick Tip

Takes a tip from the right drawer in the right rear position.

Eject Tip

Ejects the tip in the eject position.

Racks

Allows to teach the different racks.

Init

Initializes all modules needed.

Transfer

Transfer of coordinates to COP.

Reference Left

Teach Reference Point for Sample Probe Reference.

Reference Right

Teach Reference Point for Reagent Probe Reference.

Quit

Ends Teaching Program

1

Diti Module

2

Eject Position

3

Sample Module

4

Ancillary Bay

5

Reagent Module

6

Wash and Waste Position

7

Dispensation positions for Reagent Probe (Pipettor)

8

Dispensation position for Sample Probe (Pipettor)

LAS

LAS aspiration position (button available only if LIAISON®XL LAS option is set). Table 8.3-1: Teacher overview

8.3.2

Teaching sequence

When the complete teaching of the pipettor probes of a system shall be performed, it is necessary to execute all the steps indicated in Table 8.3-2. Step

Point to teach

Reference section

1

Sample Probe reference

Section 8.5

2

Reagent Probe reference

Section 8.6

3

DiTi drawers

Section 8.7

4

Tip eject position

Section 8.8

5

Sample module

Section 8.9

6

Sample dispensation

Section 8.10

7

Wash/ waste position

Section 8.11

8

Reagent dispensation

Section 8.12

9

Ancillary bay

Section 8.13

10

Reagent module

Section 8.14

12

G, H, X, Y and Z racks (if necessary)

Section 8.15

Table 8.3-2: Teaching sequence LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 8-3


8.3.3

Description of teach window and key board buttons

The teach window is a standard window that appears once selected a position of the instrument to teach.

Figure 8.3-2: Adjust Position The 3 main sections of the teach window are: Step size

Lets the technician adjust the size of the movement each time the dedicated keyboard buttons (see Table 8.3-3) are pressed.

Prev. Z

Moves the pipettor arm to the last “Z” position taught for a particular teach point. The pressure of Prev. Z button does not affect any previously adjusted “X” or “Y” coordinates. Moving down the pipettor arms using Prev. Z button may cause a crash. Be sure that the end position is safe.

OK and Cancel

Lets the technician confirm or cancel any adjustments set for a particular teach point. 8.3.3.1

Step size

In “Step size” section the user may adjust the size of the steps in 2 ways: 1. The mouse may be placed on the arrows to raise or lower the step size. 2. “+” or “-“ buttons on the keyboard may be used to increase or minimize the size of the movements for the item to be taught. “+” = larger step sizes, “-“ = lower step sizes. The “X”, “Y”, and “Z” symbols found on the left side of this section inform the technician of the current step size chosen. Each time the step size is changed, the technician may view the new settings in this area. 8.3.3.2

Prev. Z

In “Prev. Z” section the technician may select to move the arm directly to the last taught “Z” position. Before taking this decision there are several things that shall be considered: 1. The last taught “Z” position shall be higher than the floor of the current position.

Page 8-4


8. Teaching of Pipettor 2. The “X” and the “Y” positions shall be set so that the complete movement of the “Prev. Z” may be accomplished. The “X”, “Y”, and “Z” symbols found above the Prev. Z button show numbers on the side. Each of these numbers represents the number of steps currently moved from the references of each axis. Each time a movement is made, it is automatically added to the current value and may be viewed here in real time. 8.3.3.3

OK and Cancel

When the technician has completed the teaching of a position, OK button must be pressed to confirm that the teaching has been completed. Once OK button has been pressed, the taught coordinates are saved in LiaisonXL.coo file, so it is no more possible to restore the previous coordinates without reteaching the position. If a mistake has been made, the technician may Cancel the complete teaching process. 8.3.3.4

Keyboard Buttons

The below listed keys shall be used to teach the positions of the system. Button

Description

Button

Description

It moves always half of the remaining distance (in Z direction).

Z – Movement up.

X – Movement to the right.

Z – Movement down.

X – Movement to the left.

Change Step size down.

Y – Movement to the rear.

Change Step size up.

Y – Movement to the front.

Drives to actual taught End Position in Z.

Table 8.3-3: Keyboard Buttons


Page 8-5


8.4

Log In 1. Switch the instrument on and wait approximately 10 seconds. 2. Start Teacher Program by pressing short cut button Teacher Software. 3. No password is needed, just press OK Button.

Figure 8.4-1: Log In 4. Teacher Menu appears, see Overview Teacher Menu. The teaching cannot be started until all low-level communication has been completed. When starting the software, wait until the communication window has stopped transmitting data before pressing any buttons.

Page 8-6



8.5

Sample Probe Reference

8.5.1

Teaching Sequence

Before starting with teaching, the cover of the incubator module has to be removed.

1. Press Sample Probe Reference button to start teaching sequence. 2. Sample Probe moves close to the Reference Point and Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.5-1: Adjust Reference Position 3. Teach "X” and “Y” coordinates. The edge of the left arm shall be aligned to the centre of the milled edge. 4. Teach “Z” position. The tip adapter must be as close to the assembly as possible: move down the adapter until the surface of the reference position is barely touched, then raise it up of 2-3 steps (with the step size set to the minimum value). The tip holder is not allowed to touch the surface at all, it is always necessary to verify the possibility to move the edge freely.

Figure 8.5-2: Teach Diti adapter at sample probe reference


Page 8-7


8.6

Reagent Probe Reference

8.6.1

Teaching Sequence

Before starting with teaching, the cover of the Incubator module has to be removed.

1. Press Reagent Probe Reference button to start teaching sequence. 2. Reagent Probe moves close to the Reference Point and Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.6-1: Adjust Reference Position 3. Teach "X” and “Y” coordinates. The edge of the right arm shall be aligned to the centre of the milled edge. 4. Teach “Z” position. The edge of the needle must be as close to the assembly as possible: move down the needle until the surface of the reference position is barely touched, then raise it up of 2-3 steps (with the step size set to the minimum value). The needle is not allowed to touch the surface at all, it is always necessary to verify the possibility to move the edge freely.

Figure 8.6-2: Teach reagent probe at reagent probe reference

Page 8-8



8.7

DiTi Module

8.7.1

Teaching Sequence

1. Press first into the left Diti Module field to start teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.7-1: Adjust tip positions 2. The Sample Probe moves over the first teaching position. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The Sample Probe must center the middle of the first reference position (on the right rear side of left Diti Module drawer). 4. Teach “Z” position. The Sample Probe is not allowed to touch the reference position at all: put a piece of 80g/m2 paper on the reference position of the DiTi module and then move the Sample Probe down until the surface of the paper is barely touched. 5. When the first teaching position is confirmed with the OK button, the Sample Probe moves over the second teach point and the same procedure as in steps 3 and 4 shall be done.

Figure 8.7-2: Teaching diti module 6. Once completed the teaching of the second teach point of left DiTi Drawer, press OK button: the Teacher Software saves the taught points and Overview Teacher Menu appears again.


Page 8-9

8. Teaching of Pipettor 7. The same procedure shall be performed for the right Diti Module Drawer: press the related field in Overview Teacher Menu to start the teaching sequence and then repeat steps 2 – 6.

Figure 8.7-3: Teaching DiTi module

The other tray icons available in Overview Teacher Menu could be used to teach a single DiTi tray. This possibility is currently not meaningful for a service engineer, to complete the teaching of the drawers it is only necessary to teach the 4 available reference positions.

Page 8-10



8.8

Eject Position

8.8.1

Teaching Sequence of X-Y-ZMax

1. Press into the Eject Position field to start teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.8-1: Eject Position 2. The Sample Probe moves over the teaching position. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The tip adapter of the Sample Probe must be aligned to the center of the eject tube. 4. Teach “ZMax” coordinate. Move the tip adapter down into the eject tube till a small light gap (1±0.1mm) is shown between the bottom border of the Sample Probe and the top part of the ejection tube.

Figure 8.8-2: Eject Position 5. Press OK button to save the taught point: Adjust Position window related to Z-start coordinate appears automatically.


Page 8-11


8.8.2

Teaching Sequence of ZStart Position

6. This is only a height adjustment. 7. Move the tip adapter into the eject tube till a small gap (1±0.1mm) remains between the ejection mechanism, triggered by hand, and the upper surface of the ejection tube.

Figure 8.8-3: Eject Position Z-Start

Figure 8.8-4: Z-Start Position

Page 8-12



8.9

Sample Module

8.9.1

Teaching Preparation

1. Ensure that a tip tray is placed in the rear position of the right tip drawer and that a tip is inserted in the rear right position of that tray. 2. In Overview Teacher Menu, select Sample Module field to start the teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears at every teaching point.

Figure 8.9-1: Sample Area

8.9.2

Teaching Sequence X – Y

3. Teach the head of the Diti Adapter in the middle of the first reference point on the rear left of the sample module: the teaching of these coordinates shall be performed without picking up tips. 4. Preliminary teaching of Z coordinates: move the DiTi Adapter down, until the surface of the reference point is barely touched. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the second teaching point, on the front left of the sample module

Figure 8.9-2: Sample Area, first teaching point


Page 8-13


Figure 8.9-3: Sample area, second teaching point 6. Answer Yes to the following question.

Figure 8.9-4: Tip present? 7. Then a tip will be automatically picked up.

Page 8-14



8.9.3

Teaching Sequence ZMax

8. The Sample Probe will move over the first teaching position.

Figure 8.9-5: Sample Module, ZMax-Position 9. It is necessary to teach three ZMax - points: •

1st: Left rear

•

2nd: Left front

•

3rd: Right front

During the teaching of all the three points, the sample probe is not allowed to touch the bottom surface at all: put a piece of 80 gr/ m2 paper on the reference positions of the sample module and then move the probe down until the surface of the paper is barely touched. 10. When teaching of Sample Module is completed, eject the tip by pressing OK button at the appearing window.

Figure 8.9-6: Eject Tip?


Page 8-15


8.10 8.10.1

Dispensation Position for Sample Probe Teaching Sequence

Before starting with teaching, the cover of the incubator has to be removed.

1. Press the red dot of the Sample Probe field to start the teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.10-1: Cuvette Position SPP 2. Sample Probe moves close to the Teaching Point. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The edge of the DiTi Adapter must be as close as possible to the rounding in the bracket, but it is not allowed to touch the bracket in X and Y directions at all.

Figure 8.10-2: Bracket with teaching point (red dot)

Figure 8.10-3: Teach bracket

Page 8-16


8. Teaching of Pipettor 4. Teach “Z” direction. Move the Sample Probe down until the surface of the bracket is barely touched, then move 2-3 steps back (up). The tip holder is not allowed to touch the surface at all, it is always necessary to verify the possibility to move the edge freely. 5. After the setting has been completed, press OK button in Adjust Position dialogue.

8.11 8.11.1

Wash and Waste Position of Reagent Probe Teaching Sequence Wash Position

Before starting with teaching, the cover of the Incubator module has to be removed.

1. Press into the Wash and Waste field to start teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.11-1: Washer position 2. The Reagent Probe will move first to the wash teaching point. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. Using the dedicated keys, carefully move the needle above the middle of the wash hole. 4. Teach “ZMax” coordinate. Using the dedicated keys, carefully move the needle down, until the distance Z = 4.8 ± 0.1cm from the bottom border of the needle adapter to the upper border of wash and waste module is achieved: The teaching reported above is related to the instruments mounting the wash station PN 100000458 (see LXL-TN-72 for additional information).


Page 8-17


Figure 8.11-2: Wash position

Figure 8.11-3: Measure distance – “new” wash station

5. Press OK button, in order to move the Reagent Probe to ZStart position: Adjust Position window for the teaching of this coordinate appears. 6. Using the dedicated key, carefully move the needle down until the distance Z = 9.8 ± 0.1cm from the bottom border of the needle adapter to the upper border of the wash and waste module is achieved. 7. Press OK button , in order to move the pipettor to the waste position. Page 8-18



Figure 8.11-4: Measure Z position

8.11.2

Teaching Sequence Wash Position

1. After teaching the Wash position, it is necessary to teach the Waste position. 2. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The needle of the right arm shall be centered over the drain hole. 3. Teach “ZMax” coordinate. Move the Reagent Probe down until a distance of Z = 10.1 ± 0.1cm from the bottom border of the needle adapter to the upper border of the wash and waste module is achieved.

Figure 8.11-5: Waste Position


Page 8-19


Figure 8.11-6: Washer, teach position

Page 8-20



8.12 8.12.1

Dispensation Positions for Reagent Probe Teaching Sequence

Before starting with teaching, the cover of the incubator has to be removed. 1. Press into one of the the red dots of the Reagent Probe to start the teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears. The selection of each red dot allows to complete the teaching of a single reagent dispensation position.

Figure 8.12-1: Cuvette Position RPPI 2. The Reagent Probe moves close to the chosen teaching point. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The edge of reagent needle must be as close as possible to the rounding in the bracket, but it is not allowed to touch the bracket in X and Y directions at all. 4. Teach “Z” coordinate. Move the Reagent Probe down until the surface of the bracket is barely touched, then move 2-3 steps back (up). The needle is not allowed to touch the surface at all, it is always necessary to verify the possibility to move the edge freely. 5. After the setting has been completed, press OK button in the Adjust Position dialogue. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 for all teach points.

Figure 8.12-2: Cuvette Bracket, teach point is red dot

Figure 8.12-3: Dispensation Position


Page 8-21


8.13 8.13.1

Ancillary Reagent Teaching Sequence

Before starting with teaching, the cover of the reagent area has to be removed. 1. Press into Ancillary Reagent field to start teaching sequence: Adjust Position windows appears.

Figure 8.13-1: Ancillary Reagent 2. The Reagent Probe moves over the first teaching position, on the rear side of the ancillary bay. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The needle of the Reagent Probe must be taught into the middle of the reference hole.

Figure 8.13-2: Teach Position 4. Teach “Z” coordinate. The Reagent Probe is not allowed to touch the bottom surface at all: put a piece of 80g/m2 paper on the reference hole and then move the Reagent Probe down until the surface of the paper is touched. 5. Press OK button to move the Reagent Probe to the next teaching point, on the front side of the ancillary bay. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to teach the second reference point.

Page 8-22



8.14 8.14.1

Reagent Module Teaching Sequence

Before starting with teaching the cover of the reagent module has to be removed.

1. Press into the Reagent Module field to start teaching sequence: Adjust Position window appears.

Figure 8.14-1: Reagent Module 2. The Reagent Probe moves close to the first teaching point (1), on the rear left side of the Reagent Module. It is possible to notice the milled gap available on each teaching point. 3. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates. The needle shall be positioned on the right rear corner of the reference gap, but it is not allowed to touch the fins of the reagent area at all. 4. Teach “Z” coordinate. Move the reagent needle down, until the surface of the reference gap is barely touched, then raise it up of 2-3 steps. The needle is not allowed to touch the surface at all, it is always necessary to verify the possibility to move the edge freely. 5. Press OK button to move the Reagent Probe to the next teaching point. 6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to teach the remaining 8 reference positions of the reagent area.


Page 8-23


Figure 8.14-2: Reagent Module, rear side

Figure 8.14-3: Reagent Module, front side

Page 8-24



8.15 8.15.1

Rack Selection Rack Window

The standard ”.rac” files loaded into the system by default shall not be modified: any modifications of these files can cause possible crashes of pipettor probes and wrong behaviours of the system. All functionalities described below shall be used only for the teaching of customized racks (G, H, X, Y and Z racks).

Figure 8.15-1: Rack selection Button / Position

Description

Existing Rack Files

Shows the existing “.rac” files.

New Rack File Name

Enter new name for “.rac” file.

Area to edit Rack File

Drop down field, with possible choices: •

Reagent Area

•

Ancillary Area

•

Sample Area

Track to edit Rack File

The lane where the rack will be taught shall be selected. The available options depend on what selected in Area to edit Rack File.

Add

Opens window Rack Definition.

Edit

Opens window Rack Definition. Table 8.15-1: Rack selection


Page 8-25


Figure 8.15-2: Rack Definition Button / Position

Description

Number of Positions

Allows to set the number of positions of the customized rack.

Range: 1 - 32 Rack Width (No. of lanes) Range: 1 – 9

Allows to set the width (in number of lanes) of the customized rack.

Show

Shows teaching coordinates of different rack positions.

Use interpolation

Enables interpolation option: the teaching of the first and the last positions of the rack allows to set automatically coordinates for all intermediate positions.

Teach

Opens Adjust Position window for the teaching of the selected position.

Arrow buttons

Allows to select the rack position to teach.

Done

Indicates if the selected position has been already taught or not.

Tube Surface [mm^2]

! Important. This field and the associated button shall not be used, the sections of the tubes to teach shall be set using BottleTypes.txt file (see section 8.15.2.4 on page 8-32).

Range 1 - 9999 Apply to all

Table 8.15-2: Rack definition

Page 8-26



8.15.2

Sample Rack Teaching

Before teaching customized rack typologies, it is always necessary to verify the proper teaching of left and right reference positions (see chapter 8.5 and 8.6) and sample area (see chapter 8.9).

8.15.2.1

Case 1: cylindrical tubes with standard inner diameter

The procedure reported in this section can be applied in place of that described in chapter 8.15.2.2 every time the following criteria are verified: •

It is not possible to use one of the standard racks indicated in Table 3.3-2.

•

The inner diameter of the tubes to use is equal to one of those associated to standard rack typologies (indicated in Table 3.3-2).

1. Using the information of Table 3.3-2, identify the rack typology which has the same inner diameter of the tubes to use. 2. Move to D:\LiaisonXL\Data folder and select the “.rac” file of the previously identified rack typology. 3. Create a copy of the previously identified “.rac” file, renaming it with one of the customized rack IDs: G.rac, H.rac, X.rac, Y.rac and Z.rac are the options to choose among. 4. Open Teacher Software and press Pick Tip button. 5. Press Racks button of Overview Teacher Menu. 6. In Area to edit Rack File drop-down menu, select Sample Area. 7. In Track to edit Rack File drop-down menu, select 01. 8. Verify that no racks are equipped in lane 1 of the sample area. 9. In Existing Rack Files panel, select the previously created customized “.rac” file and then press Edit button. 10. In Rack Definition window, check Use Interpolation option. 11. Press Teach button. 12. In Adjust Position window that appears, press Prev.Z button. 13. Measure the height of the customized tube and, using the information indicated in Table 3.3-1, state the number of spacers to use to configure each position (Spcust). 14. Using the information reported in Table 3.3-1, verify what is the the number of steps (stepcust ) associated to the number of spacers Spcust calculated at previous point 15. Using the information reported in Table 3.3-2, verify what is the standard number of spacers (Spst) associated to the standard tube typology having the same inner diameter of the customized one. 16. Using the information reported in Table 3.3-1, verify what is the number of steps (stepst ) associated to the number of spacers Spst calculated at previous point


Page 8-27

8. Teaching of Pipettor 17. Calculate the difference Delta = stepcust - stepst 18. Using dedicated keys of the keyboard, move Zmax coordinate of tube position 1 according to the following rules: •

If Delta > 0, move left arm up for the number of steps calculated at point 17;

•

If Delta < 0, move left arm down for the number of steps calculated at point 17.

Example 1. For the creation of a X.rac file for tubes with 10mm inner diameter and 75mm height: •

A copy of the A.rac, named X.rac, shall be created;

•

2 spacers (Spcust) shall be used to configure each position;

•

The associated number of steps (stepcust) is 500 steps;

•

The standard number of steps (Spst) to consider is equal to 0 (i.e. the number associated to the A.rac);

•

The associated number of steps (stepst) is 0 steps;

•

Delta = 500 steps – 0 steps = 500 steps.

•

Zmax coordinates of the X.rac shall be moved up by 500 steps.

Example 2. For the creation of a Y.rac file for tubes with 9mm inner diameter and 75mm height: •

A copy of the J.rac, named Y.rac, shall be created;

•

2 spacers (Spcust) shall be used to configure each position;

•

The associated number of steps (stepcust) is 500 steps;

•

The standard number of spacers (Spst) is equal to 3 (i.e. the number associated to the J.rac);

•

The associated number of steps (stepst) is 700 steps;

•

Delta = 500 steps – 700 steps = - 200 steps.

•

Zmax coordinates of the Y.rac shall be moved down by 200 steps. 19. Press OK button: Adjust Position window for the teaching of Zstart appears. 20. In Adjust Position window for the teaching of Zstart, press Prev.Z button and then OK button, leaving the coordinate unchanged. 21. Repeat points 12-18 to teach tube position 12 also. 22. Press OK button in order to save the taught coordinates and close Adjust Position window. 23. In lane 1, equip a sample rack customized with the proper number of spacers, with at least 1 tube onboard. 24. Uncheck Use Interpolation option. 25. Using the dedicated arrow buttons available in Rack Definition window, select the rack position where the tube is placed and press Teach button. 26. In Adjust Position window, press Prev.Z button. 27. Moving the tube up and down, a gap shall be verified between the inner bottom of the tube and the edge of the tip (Figure 8.15-3). 28. Repeat point 19 and 20.

Page 8-28


8. Teaching of Pipettor 29. Press OK button of Rack Definition window. 30. Press OK button of Rack Selection window. 31. Press Eject Tip button. 32. Perform transfer of coordinates (see chapter 8.16.1 on page 8-35). 33. Close Teacher Software and perform the setting of BottleTypes.txt file (see chapter 8.15.2.4 on page 8-32). 34. Perform the configuration of the LLD check for the customized rack (see chapter 8.15.2.5 on page 8-34).

Figure 8.15-3: Zmax check 8.15.2.2

Case 2: cylindrical tubes with not standard inner diameter

1. In Overview Teacher Menu, press Tip Pick button. 2. In Overview Teacher Menu, press Rack button. 3. In New Rack File Name field, insert the name of the rack to teach: G.rac, H.rac, X.rac, Y.rac and Z.rac are the options to choose among. 4. In Area to edit Rack File drop-down menu, select Sample Area option. 5. In Track to edit Rack File drop-down menu, select 01. 6. Press Add button: Rack Definition window will appear. 7. In Number of Positions field, insert 12. 8. In Rack Width field, insert 1. 9. Check Use Interpolation option: once positions 1 and 12 have been taught, the software will be able to set automatically the remaining rack coordinates. 10. In Tube Surface field, leave the default setting. 11. Evaluate the inner diameter of the cylindrical section of the tubes to use (d) and calculate the associated section (S). 12. For the estimation of the Zmax volume (VZmax) of the tubes, consider the following rules: • 100µL for cylindrical tubes with inner diameter equal or less than 10mm; LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 8-29

8. Teaching of Pipettor • 200µL for cylindrical tubes with inner diameter greater than 10mm. 13. Using the previously identified volume, estimate the coordinate for the setting of Zmax and calculate the related number of steps to teach. Remember that 1mm = 20steps. Example 3. Cylindrical Tube with 10mm inner diameter: •

VZmax: 100µL

•

d: 10mm

•

S: 78.5mm2

•

Zmax (in mm): 100µL / 78.5mm2 = ~ 1.27mm

•

Zmax (in steps): 1.27mm · 20steps/mm = ~ 25steps

Zmax

VZmax

d Figure 8.15-4: Cylindrical Tube Model 14. Press Teach button: Adjust Position window for the teaching of X, Y and Zmax coordinates of rack position 1 appears. 15. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates of rack position 1. The edge of the tip shall be aligned to the center of the tube. 16. Teach “Zmax” coordinate of rack position 1. Move the left arm with the previously picked up tip down, until the surface of the tube is barely touched. Then raise it up for the number of steps previously calculated. 17. Press OK button: Adjust Position window for the teaching of Zstart coordinate appears. 18. Teach “Zstart” coordinate. The edge of the tip shall be aligned to the upper border of the tube. 19. Press OK button: Adjust Position window for the teaching of X, Y and Zmax coordinates of rack position 12 appears. 20. Repeat points 15, 16, 17 and 18 for rack position 12 also. 21. Press OK button in order to save the taught coordinates and close Adjust Position window. 22. Press OK button of Rack Definition window. 23. Press OK button of Rack Selection window. 24. Press Eject Tip button. 25. Perform transfer of coordinates (see chapter 8.16.1 on page 8-35). 26. Close Teacher Software and perform the setting of BottleTypes.txt file (see chapter 8.15.2.4 on page 8-32). 27. Perform the configuration of the LLD check for the customized rack (see chapter 8.15.2.5 on page 8-34). Page 8-30


8. Teaching of Pipettor 8.15.2.3

Case 3: not standard conical tubes

The following procedure shall be applied for the teaching of conical tubes different from Eppendorf 9.5mm (inner diameter of cylindrical section) x 35mm (height) ones. For this specific typology of tubes, standard P.rac is already available in the system. 1. In Overview Teacher Menu, press Tip Pick button. 2. In Overview Teacher Menu, press Rack button. 3. In New Rack File Name field, insert the name of the rack to teach: G.rac, H.rac, X.rac, Y.rac and Z.rac are the options to choose among. 4. In Area to edit Rack File drop-down menu, select Sample Area option. 5. In Track to edit Rack File drop-down menu, select 01. 6. Press Add button: Rack Definition window will appear. 7. In Number of Positions field, insert 12. 8. In Rack Width field, insert 1. 9. Check Use Interpolation option: once positions 1 and 12 have been taught, the software will be able to set automatically the coordinates of the other rack positions. 10. In Tube Surface field, leave the default setting. 11. Press Teach button: Adjust Position window for the teaching of X, Y and Zmax coordinates of rack position 1 appears. 12. Teach “X” and “Y” coordinates of rack position 1. The edge of the tip shall be aligned to the center of the tube. 13. Teach “Zmax” coordinate of rack position 1. Move the left arm with the previously picked up tip down, until the surface of the tube is barely touched. Then raise it up by 3mm (i.e. 60steps). 14. Teach “Zstart” coordinate. The edge of the tip shall be aligned to the upper border of the tube. 15. Press OK button: Adjust Position window for the teaching of X, Y and Zmax coordinates of rack position 12 appears. 16. Repeat points 12, 13, 14 and 15 for rack position 12 also. 17. Press OK button in order to save the taught coordinates and close Adjust Position window. 18. Press OK button of Rack Definition window. 19. Press OK button of Rack Selection window. 20. Press Eject Tip button. 21. Perform transfer of coordinates (see chapter 8.16.1 on page 8-35). 22. Using a pipette, estimate the volume of liquid underneath Zmax coordinate (VZmax). 23. Estimate the section of the base (SZmax) of Zmax cone (i.e. the “blue” cone of Figure 8.15-5). This section shall then be used for the setting of BottleTypes.txt file (see chapter 8.15.2.4 on page 8-32). 24. Measure the height (h) of the conical section. 25. Measure the inner diameter (d) of the cylindrical portion of the tube and estimate the associated section (S).


Page 8-31

8. Teaching of Pipettor 26. Close Teacher Software and perform the setting of BottleTypes.txt file (see chapter 8.15.2.4 on page 8-32). 27. In order to prevent possible adverse effects due to mechanical tolerances and imprecision of the conical model, communicate to the customer a dead volume (Vd) 2 times VZmax. In any cases, a minimum Vd equal to 50µL shall be always guaranteed. Example 4. Conical Tube with VZmax = 30µL: •

VZmax: 30µL

•

Zmax: 3mm

•

SZmax: 3 · 30µL / 3mm = 30mm2

•

Vd = 2 · 30µL = 60µL

d VZmax h

VZmax Zmax

S SZmax

Figure 8.15-5: Conical Tube Model 28. Perform the configuration of the LLD check for the customized rack (see chapter 8.15.2.5 on page 8-34). 8.15.2.4

BottleTypes.txt setting

BottleTypes.txt file shall be updated every time a new rack typology shall be configured on a LIAISON®XL analyzer; the setting of the parameters available in BottleTypes.txt file allows to define the dimensions of the different sections of the rack vials. The editing of BottleTypes.txt file shall be performed once completed the teaching of pipettor coordinates using Rack Selection window of Teacher Software (see previous chapters). Opening the file, available in directory D:\LiaisonXL\Data\, the information reported below shall be edited for each new rack typology: ;”Name” Rack Bottle Type “N”: “Step1”, “Surface1”; “Step2”, “Surface2”; (other values if necessary) The meaning of the different fields to insert is described in Table 8.15-3.

Page 8-32


8. Teaching of Pipettor Function

“Name”

“N”

“StepN” N= 1,2,3…

“SurfaceN” N= 1,2,3…

Description The name of the rack (the same set also in Rack Selection window of Teacher Software) shall be indicated. Possible options: “G”, “H”, “X”, “Y”, “Z”. The bottle type ID shall be indicated, according to the rule indicated in Table 8.15-4. Z coordinates (in number of steps) of each section to define shall be indicated. The value to insert shall be defined starting from the top and going down until Zmax coordinate (0 steps) is reached. !Important Remember that 1mm = 20steps. The surface (in mm2) of each section to define shall be indicated. Table 8.15-3: BottleTypes.txt Legenda

Rack Name

Bottle Type ID

G

8

H

9

X

25

Y

26

Z

27

Table 8.15-4: Bottle Type IDs The definition of cylindrical vials (case 1, chapter 8.15.2.1 and case 2, chapter 8.15.2.2) is completed with the definition of the section (S) at Zmax coordinate (i.e. coordinate 0). The setting of sections in BottleTypes.txt file shall be always performed using integer values.

Example 5 – Configuration of BottleTypes.txt to create an X.rac for the cylindrical tube of Example 3 (see Figure 8.15-4): S= 78.5mm2 ; X Rack Bottle Type 25: 0, 78; For the definition of conical vials (case 3, section 8.15.2.3) it is necessary to set at least 2 sections, one at Zmax and one at the beginning of the cylindrical section: the software is then able to use an interpolation method to complete the definition of the vial. In case of more complex vials, it is necessary to indicate a parameter set (Z coordinate with the associated surface) for each sudden change of section (e.g. a step profile) detected. Example 6 – Configuration of BottleTypes.txt to create an Y.rac for the conical tube of Example 4 (see Figure 8.15-5): S=78.5mm2, h=10mm, Zmax=3mm, LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 8-33

8. Teaching of Pipettor SZmax=30mm2. In order to complete the activity, it is necessary to estimate the distance between Zmax and the beginning of the cylindrical section: h - Zmax = 7mm (140steps). ; Y Rack Bottle Type 26: 140, 78; 0, 30; 8.15.2.5

Configuration of LLD check for customized sample racks

The following procedure shall be applied every time a new rack typology is customized: 1. Move to D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\Service\Driver directory. 2. Open L2_PipettorUnit.ini file. 3. Go to [Sample Racks] section of the file.

[Sample_Racks] Rack0=a|12|A Rack1=b|12|B Rack2=c|9|C Rack3=e|12|E Rack4=f|12|F Rack5=i|12|I Rack6=j|12|J Rack7=k|12|K Rack8=l|12|L Rack9=n|12|N Rack10=p|12|P Rack11=q|12|Q Rack12=w|12|W Figure 8.15-6: Sample Rack section of L2_PipettorUnit.ini file – standard setting 4. Add 1 row containing the following information “RackID” =“.rac name” | “Number of positions” | “Rack name”

Page 8-34



Function

Description The Rack ID number shall be indicated. It is necessary to consider the last ID available in the list and increment it by 1.

“RackID” “.rac name”

The name of the .rac file (as set during rack teaching, see chapters 8.15.2.1, 8.15.2.2, 8.15.2.3) shall be indicated.

“Number of positions”

The number of positions available in the customized sample rack (9, 12) shall be indicated.

“Rack name”

The name of the rack (i.e the indication that will be reported in Service Software) shall be indicated. Table 8.15-5: L2Pipettor.ini Legenda

Example 7 – Configure the LLD for an X rack, starting from the standard setting of the L2_PipettorUnit.ini (13 rack files available). Rack13=x|12|X Example 8 – Configure LLD for an Y rack, starting from the setting of the L2_PipettorUnit.ini reached at the end of example 7. Rack14=y|12|Y

8.16 8.16.1

Transfer of Coordinates Transfer Sequence

1. Press Transfer button in Overview Teacher Menu to transfer the taught coordinates to COP.

Figure 8.16-1: Transfer


Page 8-35

9. Covers

9 Covers This chapter describes LIAISON®XL covers in detail. In the first section of the chapter ’Safety’ notes concerning these modules are specified, while the next section gives a short overview about their positions. The section ’Replacement and Repairs’ contains information about maintenance and repair of all covers, while the last section gives some information regarding their adjustment and alignment.

9.1

Safety



•


•



Page 9-1

9. Covers

9.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of LIAISON®XL covers.

Figure 9.2-1: Front view

No.

Description

1

Left Blind cover

2

Left Top cover

3

Right Top cover

4

Right Blind cover

5

Front Module (see chapter 20 on page 20-1)

6

Cabinet covers

7

Extensible Board Table 9.2-1: Front view

Page 9-2


9. Covers

Figure 9.2-2: Left (1) and right (4) blind, inside view

Figure 9.2-3: Right side cover


Page 9-3

9. Covers

Figure 9.2-4: Back covers

No.

Description

8

Side cover

9

Rear Slotted cover

10

Back lower cover

11

Back upper cover Table 9.2-2: Side and back view

Page 9-4


9. Covers

9.3

Replacements and Repair

This section contains instructions for the repair of LIAISON®XL covers. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted follow the instructions in the individual sections.

9.3.1 9.3.1.1

Replacement left Blind Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 9.3.1.2

Remove left Blind Cover

1. Lift left top cover up. 2. Pull left blind cover (1) carefully out of the snap locks (3).

Figure 9.3-1: Left Blind Cover


Page 9-5

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-2: Left and right blind covers 9.3.1.3

Assemble left Blind Cover

1. Plug the left blind cover (1) into the snap locks (3) of the system.

9.3.2 9.3.2.1

Replacement right Blind Cover Preliminary steps


Remove right Blind Cover

1. First open left top cover, then right top cover with opened lock screw (see Figure 9.3-19). 2. Pull right blind cover (2) carefully out of the snap locks (3).

Figure 9.3-3: Left and right blind 9.3.2.3

Assemble right Blind Cover

1. Plug the right blind cover (1) into the snap locks (3) of the system.

Page 9-6


9. Covers

9.3.3 9.3.3.1

Replacement left Side Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5) 9.3.3.2

Remove left Side Cover

1. Pull left Side Cover from the bottom up carefully out of the snap locks (8). 2. Lift left Side Cover out of the two pin holders (9) and set it aside.

Figure 9.3-4: Left side cover 9.3.3.3

Assemble left Side Cover

1. Hang the left Side Cover into the two pin holders (9). 2. Let snap locks (8) engage from top to bottom.


Page 9-7

9. Covers

9.3.4 9.3.4.1

Replacement right Side Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6) 9.3.4.2

Remove right Side Cover

1. Pull right Side Cover from the bottom up carefully out of the snap locks (6). 2. Lift right Side Cover out of the two pin holders (7) and set it aside.

Figure 9.3-5: Right side cover 9.3.4.3

Assemble right Side Cover

1. Hang the right Side Cover into the two pin holders (7). 2. Let snap locks (6) engage from top to bottom.

Page 9-8


9. Covers

9.3.5

Left Top Cover (old design)

This procedure applies to LIAISON®XL instruments with SN < 2210000251.

9.3.5.1

Preliminary steps


Remove left Top Cover

1. Open left Top Cover (1). 2. Open lock pins (2, 3) of left (5) and right (6) pneumatic cylinders. 3. Lift left Top Cover up till it is out of the lock (4) and slide it to the left. 4. Lift left Top Cover up and set it aside.

Figure 9.3-6: Left Top Cover – old design


Page 9-9

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-7: Left Top Cover, right pneumatic cylinder

Figure 9.3-8: Left Top Cover, left pneumatic cylinder

Page 9-10


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-9: Top cover lock 9.3.5.3

Assemble left Top Cover

1. Slide left top cover into the holders, slide it into the notch (4) for the lock. 2. Set pneumatic cylinders left (5) and right (6) into the holders, set the lock pins (2, 3) in and secure them.


Page 9-11

9. Covers

9.3.6

Replacement left Top Cover (new design)

This procedure applies to: •

LIAISON®XL instruments with SN ≥ 2210000251

•

LIAISON®XL LAS instruments.

New left top covers cannot be mounted on instruments with SN < 2210000251. The pipettor mounted on these instruments is not compatible with the new design of the left top cover (the modification described in TB 2210035 is not implemented on these instruments).

9.3.6.1

Preliminary steps


Remove left Top Cover

Pneumatic Cylinder are in counterpressure Take care of the dismantling order. The pneumatic cylinders (2) and (3) are assembled with counterbalance.

1. Open left Top Cover (1). 2. Pull left top cover a bit down and unscrew the bolts (5) holding up the left and right gas springs (2). 3. Unscrew the nuts (6) of left and right oil brakes (3). 4. Lift left Top Cover up till it is out of the lock (4) and slide it to the left. 5. Lift left Top Cover up and set it aside.

Page 9-12


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-10: Left Top Cover – New design

Figure 9.3-11: Gas spring and Oil brake – right side


Page 9-13

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-12: Gas spring and Oil brake – left side

Figure 9.3-13: Top cover lock 9.3.6.3

Assemble left Top Cover

1. Slide left top cover into the holders, slide it into the notch (4) for the lock. 2. Fix the left and right oil brakes (3) with a nut (6). 3. Screw the bolts (5) holding up left and right gas springs (2).

Page 9-14


9. Covers

9.3.7 9.3.7.1

Replacement of Monitor Preliminary steps


Remove Monitor

1. Unscrew four screws (2) of monitor. 2. Lift monitor (1) up, unplug cables and set it aside.

Figure 9.3-14: Monitor


Page 9-15

9. Covers 9.3.7.3

Assemble Monitor

Be aware of the mounting direction, monitor cable is on top.

1. Lift monitor up, plug monitor cable (3), power cable (5) and USB cable (4) in and fasten monitor onto right top cover. 2. First screw all four screws (2) slightly in, then fasten them.

Figure 9.3-15: Monitor rear view 3. If the monitor has a loose fit or it is moving too easily, fasten nut (6) (inside right top cover)

Page 9-16


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-16: Inside right top cover, monitor holder


Page 9-17

9. Covers

9.3.8 9.3.8.1

Replacement of right Top Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 5. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9.3.8.2

Remove right Top Cover

1. Unplug monitor cable (2), monitor USB cable (3) and monitor power cable (4) from the PC (1).

Figure 9.3-17: Monitor cables unplug

Page 9-18


9. Covers 2. Remove monitor cables from cable clips (5). 3. Coil up the monitor cables and keep them close to the right top cover.

Figure 9.3-18: Remove monitor cables


Page 9-19

9. Covers 4. Remove Monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.2 on page 9-15). 5. Open left top cover. 6. Open lock screw (6) of right top cover. 7. Open right top cover (8).

Figure 9.3-19: Right top Cover, inside view 8. Open lock pins of left (9) and right (10) pneumatic cylinders. 9. Lift right top cover up till it is out of the lock (11) and slide it to the right. 10. Lift right top cover (8) up and set it aside.

Figure 9.3-20: Right Top Cover – “old” design

Page 9-20


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-21: Right Top Cover – “new” design

The position of the cover lock (11) is different in the two designs of the right top cover: it is positioned at the right side in the “old” solution and at the left side in the “new” one.


Page 9-21

9. Covers

9.3.8.3

Assemble right Top Cover

1. Slide right top cover into the holders, slide it into the notch (11) for the lock. 2. Set pneumatic cylinders left (9) and right (10) into the holders, set the lock pins in and secure them. 3. Close lock screw (6) of right top cover. 4. Assemble Monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.3 on page 9-16). 5. Connect monitor cables onto monitor and PC. 6. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 7. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).

Page 9-22


9. Covers

9.3.9 9.3.9.1

Replacement rear Slotted Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove back upper cover (if installed, see chapter 9.3.10.2 on page 9-24). 9.3.9.2

Remove rear Slotted Cover

1. Loosen three screws (2) of rear aeration cover (1). 2. Remove rear aeration cover (1). 3. Screw the screws (2) light back on.

Figure 9.3-22: Rear view 9.3.9.3

Assemble rear Slotted Cover

1. Loosen three screws (2). 2. Set rear aeration cover (1) in and align it to the system. 3. Fasten three screws (2) and check if cover is aligned to the system 4. Assemble back upper cover (if installed, see chapter 9.3.10.3 on page 9-25)


Page 9-23

9. Covers

9.3.10 9.3.10.1

Replacement Back Upper and Lower Covers (optional) Preliminary steps


Remove Back Upper and Lower Covers

1. Move first back upper cover (2) a bit up on the left and right side and lift it carefully up.

Figure 9.3-23: Removing upper back cover

Figure 9.3-24: Hooks of back cover

Page 9-24


9. Covers 2. Then move the lower cover (1) a bit up on the left and right side and lift it carefully up.

Figure 9.3-25: Remove lower back cover 9.3.10.3

Assemble Back Upper and Lower Cover

1. Set first the hooks (3) of the back lower cover (1) into the bottom slots (1a) and then set the upper hooks into the slots. 2. Set next the hooks (3) of the back upper cover (2) into the bottom slots (2a) and then set the upper hooks into the slots.


Page 9-25

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-26: Assemble back covers

Page 9-26


9. Covers

9.3.11 9.3.11.1

Replacement Cabinet Cover Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 5. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 6. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 9.3.11.2

Remove Cabinet Cover

When loosing the screws of the cabinet cover, it may fall off.

1. Loosen screws (3) at right and left sides of the cover (1) and lift the locking plates up. 2. Lift cover out of the holding pins (2) and set it aside.

Figure 9.3-27: Cabinet Cover


Page 9-27

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-28: Cabinet, Cover right side 9.3.11.3

Assemble Cabinet Cover

1. Adjust the bore (4) so that a rounding profile can be seen and slightly fasten the screws (3).

Figure 9.3-29: Cabinet Cover detail view

Page 9-28


9. Covers 2. Set the cabinet cover into the holding pins (2) and loosen screws (3). 3. Slide the locking plates (5) down and fasten screws (3).

Figure 9.3-30: Cabinet, cover 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).


Page 9-29

9. Covers

9.3.12 9.3.12.1

Replacement Extensible Board Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 5. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 6. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 9.3.12.2

Remove Extensible Board

1. Draw extensible board (1) out. 9.3.12.3

Assemble Extensible Board

1. Push extensible board (1) in. 2. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 3. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).

Figure 9.3-31: Extensible Board

Page 9-30


9. Covers

9.3.13 9.3.13.1

Visual Alarm (optional) Preliminary steps


Remove Visual Alarm

1. Unscrew visual alarm (1). 2. Remove cable out of cable holders (2) and unplug cable out of COP CU slot J16 (3, see also Figure 23.4-1).

Figure 9.3-32: Visual Alarm 9.3.13.3

Assemble Visual Alarm

1. Slide visual alarm through the hole and fasten with screw (1). 2. Lay cable into the cable holders. 3. Plug cable into slot J16 at COP CU (3, see also Figure 23.4-1). 4. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).


Page 9-31

9. Covers

9.3.14

Mounting Printer Support (optional)

9.3.14.1

Technical Specifications

•

Dimensions of the support: 418mm(L) x 390mm(H)

•

Maximum weight capacity: 20 kg

9.3.14.2

Required tools

•

Set of Allen keys

•

Crosstip screwdriver size 1 (PZ)

•

Cordless screwdriver incl. drill Ø 6mm

•

Countersinking cutter for Ø 6mm

9.3.14.3

Components

Component

Meaning

Number

Middle side panel support (9)

Premounted sheet metal

1

Side support (22)

Metal plate, not premounted

1

Stiffening block (21)

POM block 60x20x10 mm

2

Catch Plate (13)

Metal plate 52x52 mm with bores

3

Printer support (14)

White part to place the printer

1

Carrier (24)

Metal profiles in 90°

1

Mounting rail (16)

Metal plate 90° angled

1

Washer (16)

Washer ID 5.3 mm Form A (small), not chamfered

2

Screw (16)

Allen Screw M5x40

2

Washer (10, 23)

Washer ID 4.3 mm Form B (big), chamfered on one side

7

Screw (10)

Philipps Screw D4x12

5

Screw (21)

Allen Screw M4x12

2

Screw (12)

Allen Screw M3x8

6

Screw (23)

Allen Screw M4x8

2

Screw (25)

Allen Screw M6x10

2

Washer (25)

Washer ID 6.4 mm Form A (small), not chamfered

2

Slot nut (21, 23)

Mounting guide M4

4

Slot nut (25)

Mounting guide M6

2

Table 9.3-1: Printer support components

Page 9-32


9. Covers 9.3.14.4

Preliminary steps


Assemble Printer Support

1. Unscrew two screws (3) at each of four snap locks (2) and remove them. Hold on to the snap locks and screws.

Figure 9.3-33: Right side cover


Page 9-33

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-34: Snap lock 2. Drill a hole through the domes (4) on the right side cover (1), and free the holes of burrs.

Figure 9.3-35: Side Cover

3. Screw the side panel carrier (9) with five screws (10) onto right side cover (1). Be aware of the orientation. Notch (11) of the side panel carrier is on the upper left side.

Page 9-34


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-36: Side panel carrier mounted 4. Assemble the snap lock (2) onto snap lock holder plate (13) with two screws (12).

Figure 9.3-37: Assemble snap lock plate 5. Assemble the three pre mounted snap lock holder plates (13) onto the right side cover. Be aware of the orientation of the snap lock holder plates.


Page 9-35

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-38: Snap locks assembled 6. Fix the printer support (14) with two screws (25) each with a washer to the slot nuts which are inside the profile of the carrier (24).

Figure 9.3-39: Printer support mounting 7. Assemble printer support (14) with two screws (16) and a washer each, onto the right side cover (1).

Page 9-36


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-40: Printer support assembled on right side cover

Figure 9.3-41: Right side cover, inside view 8. Screw the spring element (17) with two screws (18) onto fastening angle housing (19).


Page 9-37

9. Covers

The assembly of the spring element is shown without aluminium profile.

Figure 9.3-42: Spring element, without aluminium profile

Figure 9.3-43: Spring element, with aluminium profile 9. Mount the side support (22) onto the aluminium profile with a threaded stone (21), a screw and washer (23) on both sides. • The side support (22) is mounted 7mm +/-1mm above the hems. The distance must be measured from the bottom edge of the side support to the abutting edge of the profile. • A junction plate with threaded stones and a screw is mounted beneath the side support. Be aware of the orientation of the side support.

Page 9-38


9. Covers

7mm ± 1mm

Figure 9.3-44: Aluminium profile

Figure 9.3-45: Aluminium profile positioning 10. Hang the two panel screws of the side panel carrier (9) in the keyholes of the side support (22). 11. Snap the spring elements of the fastening angles (17) into the snap locks (13). In case they do not, then move the fastening angles to fit the contact. 12. Assemble right side cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 13. Assemble right blind cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).


Page 9-39

9. Covers

Figure 9.3-46: Mounting side cover onto aluminium profile 9.3.14.6

SGAT activities (for subsidiaries only)

New instrument installation The Printer Support assembling has to be described among the installation activities. Use the Machine Configuration PRINTER item selecting the option according to your needs (see Figure 9.3-47). Discharge the part from your stock.

Installation as a spare part In case of Printer Support installation on a system already installed, a dedicated Scheduled Visit WS is needed. Update the Machine Configuration PRINTER item selecting the option according to your needs (see Figure 9.3-47). Discharge the part from your stock.

Machine configuration Select the appropriate option using the PRINTER item (see Figure 9.3-47). EXTER. SUPPORT is the Printer Support.

Page 9-40


9. Covers

Figure 9.3-47: SGAT printer item


Page 9-41

9. Covers

9.4

Cover alignment

9.4.1 9.4.1.1

Overview Adjusting sequence

1. Left and right top covers (1) are unchangeable. 2. Upper and lower back covers (optional) are unchangeable. 3. Adjust rear slotted cover to left and right top covers and then to upper back cover. 4. Adjust first left and right side covers (1). 5. Adjust left and right blind (2) covers to left and right side covers. 6. Adjust front cover (3) to blinds. 7. Adjust cabinet (4-6) to blinds. 8. Adjust cabinet doors: start with left (4) and right (6) doors (depending on which door shows the biggest gap), at last middle door (5). 9.4.1.2

Allowed gap tolerances

Figure 9.4-1: Front view

Page 9-42


9. Covers No.

Tolerance

A

3.5 + 1 mm

B

3.0 + 1 mm

C

3.5 + 0.5 mm

D

4.5 + 0.5 mm

E

3.5 + 0.5 mm Table 9.4-1: Tolerances of front cover

Figure 9.4-2: Right side top view No.

Tolerance

F

2.0 + 1 mm

G

3.0 + 1 mm

Table 9.4-2: Tolerances of right side top cover


Page 9-43

9. Covers

Figure 9.4-3: Left and right views

No.

Tolerance

H

3.5 + 1 mm

Table 9.4-3: Tolerances of right side cover

Page 9-44


9. Covers 9.4.1.3

Adjusting points

Figure 9.4-4: Left side view w/o cover

No.

Tolerance

1a

Side cover, holes for side cover

1b

Side cover adjustment in and out / up and down

1c


1d


1e


2a

Blind adjustment in and out

2b

Blind adjustment in and out, to the left and right

2c


2d


3a

Front cover adjustment in and out

4a

Cabinet adjustment in and out and blind adjustment Table 9.4-4: Adjusting positions


Page 9-45

9. Covers

9.4.2

Adjusting side covers

1. Remove the side cover to adjust (left or right). 2. Loose the 2 screws fixing the aluminium frame to the side cover (1) and adjust it up and down. This procedure allows to align the side covers up/ down.

Figure 9.4-5: Side cover – up/ down adjustment 3. Loose the 2 nuts of the pins used to hang the side cover onto the instrument. Move the pins in/ out in order to align the side covers against the top covers. 4. If needed, move also the side cover fixations available on the instrument (references 1a-1e of Table 9.4-4).

Page 9-46


9. Covers

Figure 9.4-6: Side cover – in/ out adjustment

9.4.3

Adjusting blind covers

1. Remove the blind cover to adjust (left or right). 2. Loose screws of snap lock spring (2a), push snap lock spring to the front/ back and fasten screws. 3. Loose screws of snap lock spring (2b), push snap lock spring to the front/ back and to the left/ right and fasten screws. 4. To adjust the bottom part of the blind covers, use the adjusting points (4a) available on the cabinet.


Page 9-47

9. Covers

Figure 9.4-7: Adjusting points for blind covers

Figure 9.4-8: Adjusting blind covers, top side

Page 9-48


9. Covers

Figure 9.4-9: adjusting blind cover, bottom side 5. Check the gaps of the blind covers, according to the references given in chapter 9.4.1.2. In any case the gaps must be big enough that: • The adjacent left or right (7) top cover is not touching the blind by opening or closing the cover. • The flap of the Loading Bay for Reagent (3) is not touching or scratching the right blind (2) when opening or closing the flap. • The flap of the cuvette reservoir is not touching the left blind.


Page 9-49

9. Covers

Figure 9.4-10: Right side blind, top view

Figure 9.4-11: Flap Loading Bay for Reagents

Page 9-50


9. Covers In the bottom of the instrument, blind covers are adjustable only in X- direction. The production tolerances consist of at least +/- 5mm, so a gap in Z- direction cannot be avoided.

Figure 9.4-12: Bottom blind - 5mm displacement downwards.

Figure 9.4-13: Bottom blind - 5mm displacement upwards.


Page 9-51

9. Covers

9.4.4

Adjusting Cabinet Doors

In this chapter information about the adjustment of cabinet doors can be found. •

Left door (4) shall be adjusted to the left blind cover, without striping the cover on opening the door.

•

Right door (6) shall be adjusted to the right blind cover without striping the cover on opening the door.

•

Middle door (5) shall not stripe the left door at all.

•

Height of the doors shall be even and in the middle.

To begin with the adjustment of the cabinet doors, the gaps of the left and right cabinet doors have to be examined. On which side the biggest gap shows up, that is where to start with the adjustment. 9.4.4.1

Right Cabinet Door

1. Just loose the screws of the hinge (6a) of the cabinet door (6) a little bit, so that the door is just holding itself. 2. Close door and push door carefully to the correct place, so the door is not striping the right blind. 3. It is also possible to move carefully the door up and down when opened. 4. Once verified the proper alignment, close the screws of the hinge (6a).

Figure 9.4-14: Right cabinet door adjustment

Page 9-52


9. Covers

Figure 9.4-15: Right cabinet door scratch against right blind cover


Page 9-53

9. Covers 9.4.4.2

Left Cabinet Door

1. Just loose the screws of the hinge (4b) of the cabinet door (4) a little bit, so that the door is just holding itself. 2. Close door and push door carefully to the correct place, so the door is not striping the left blind (2). 3. It is also possible to move carefully the door up and down when opened. 4. Once verified the proper alignment, close the screws of the hinge (4b).

Figure 9.4-16: Left cabinet door adjustment

Page 9-54


9. Covers

Figure 9.4-17: Left cabinet door scratch against left blind cover 9.4.4.3

Middle Cabinet Door

1. Just loose the screws (5a) of the cabinet door (5) a little bit, so that the door is just holding itself. 2. The middle cabinet door (5) shall not touch the left (4) or the right (6) door at all. 3. It is also possible to move carefully the door up and down when opened. 4. Once verified the proper alignment, close the screws of the hinge (5a).

Figure 9.4-18: Middle cabinet door adjustment


Page 9-55

10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies

10 Cuvette Loading Assemblies This chapter describes the cuvette loading assemblies in detail. In the first section of the chapter ’Safety’ notes concerning these modules are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing these modules. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of these modules (sections "Replacement and Repair", "Adjustment and Calibration" and "Troubleshooting"). In the last section Cuvette Supply PCB layout is described. Because of their connection with Cuvette Supply PCB, the procedures for the removal and the assembly of starter heating tubes are also reported in this chapter.

10.1

Safety



•


•



Page 10-1


10.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of cuvette loading assemblies.

Figure 10.2-1: Cuvette Supply No

Description

1

Auger

2

Auger Chute

3

Sorter Pot

4

Sorter Plate

5

Sorter Presence Sensor

6

Cuvette Supply CU PCB Table 10.2-1: Overview Cuvette Supply

Page 10-2



10.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the cuvette loading assemblies. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

10.3.1 10.3.1.1

Replacement of Sorter Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a safe location. 10.3.1.2

Remove Sorter

1. Unscrew one screw (2) of sorter pot (1).

Figure 10.3-1: Sorter


Page 10-3

10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies 2. Unplug motor cable (7) out of circuit board (6).

Figure 10.3-2: Circuit Board 3. Unscrew three screws (5) of sorter (3). Take care of the auger chute during disassembly.

4. Lift sorter (3) out of system.

Page 10-4



Figure 10.3-3: Sorter 10.3.1.3

Assemble Sorter

1. Lift new sorter (3) into system. Take care of the auger chute during assembly.

2. Screw three screws (5) of sorter table (3) loose in. 3. Perform the levelling of the pot (see chapter 10.4.2 on page 10-23) 4. Adjust the distance between sorter pot and incubator chute (see chapter 10.4.1 on page 10-21) 5. Fasten sorter pot (1) with one screw (2) onto sorter table (3). 6. Plug motor cable (7) onto circuit board (6). 7. Perform the calibration of sorter vibration - parameter #30 (see chapter 10.4.3 on page 10-24). 8. Perform the calibration and the reading of the cuvette presence sensor (see chapter 10.4.4 on page 10-27).


Page 10-5


10.3.2 10.3.2.1

Replacement Sorter Presence Sensor Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 10.3.2.2

Remove Sorter Presence Sensor

1. Unplug sorter presence sensor out of cuvette supply CU PCB slot J10 (see chapter 10.6.1 on page 10-37). 2. Unscrew screw (1) of sorter angle plate (2). 3. Press the plastic pins of the sensors (3) together and remove the sensors.

Figure 10.3-4: Sorter Presence sensor

Page 10-6


10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies 10.3.2.3

Assemble Sorter Presence Sensor

1. Press the plastic pin of the sorter presence sensor together and push it into the holes. 2. Fasten sorter angle plate (2) with one screw (1) onto sorter . 3. Plug sorter presence sensor onto cuvette supply CU PCB slot J10 (see chapter 10.6.1 on page 10-37). 4. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Perform the calibration and the reading of the cuvette presence sensor (see chapter 10.4.4 on page 10-27).

Figure 10.3-5: Sorter Presence Sensor


Page 10-7


10.3.3 10.3.3.1

Replacement Auger and funnel Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 8. Remove all cuvettes out of cuvette reservoir and auger. 10.3.3.2

Remove Auger and funnel

1. Remove funnel cover from the two holding clips (9) available on the funnel (2).

Figure 10.3-6: Funnel cover removal 2. Remove auger cover from the upper (10) and the two lateral (11) guides.

Page 10-8



Figure 10.3-7: Auger cover – upper hook

Figure 10.3-8: Auger cover – lateral hooks 3. Remove cuvette loading flap from the keyhole (6) available on the funnel.


Page 10-9


Figure 10.3-9: Cuvette loading flap removal 4. Unscrew two screws (3) of cuvette funnel (2) and lift it carefully out of the auger.

Figure 10.3-10: Remove funnel 5. Unplug cable (5) of auger (1) from cuvette supply CU PCB (4).

Page 10-10



Figure 10.3-11: Unplug auger connection

6. Do not open the screws (7), the auger (1) is loosely pushed in.

Figure 10.3-12: Auger bottom mount 7. Unscrew one screw (8) of auger (1).


Page 10-11


Figure 10.3-13: Unscrew auger of frame

Take care of the auger chute during disassembly.

8. Lift auger (1) carefully out of the system.

Page 10-12



10.3.3.3

Assemble Auger and funnel

1. Lift auger (1) carefully into the system and slide it into screws (7). 2. Fasten one screw (8) of auger (1). 3. Plug cable (5) of auger (1) into circuit board (4). 4. Lift cuvette funnel (2) carefully into auger (1) and fasten two screws (3). 5. Place the cuvette loading flap into the funnel, inserting it into the dedicated keyhole (6). 6. Fix the auger cover to the upper (10) and lateral (11) guides. 7. Fix the funnel cover using two holding clips (9). 8. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 9. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 10.3.3.4

Setting of FW parameters

The redesigned auger (as described in this chapter) is installed on instruments with SN ≥ 2210000251. This auger transports considerably more cuvettes than the old one. Therefore the speed of the auger needs to be changed; the firmware version supplied with SW 3.1.5.5 or higher is required to run the new auger. When replacing an old auger by the redesigned one, the following settings have to be ensured: 1. On the service window Incubator of Service Software, select the tab Parameter. 2. From the pickup list choose Auger & Sorter & Tube Heaters ID0x11. 3. Change the parameter 10 from 80 to 20, then press Write. 4. Change the parameter 11 from 20 to 80, then press Write. 5. Change the parameter 20 from 800 to 200, then press Write. 6. Change the parameter 21 from 800 to 200, then press Write. 7. Change the parameter 164 from 2000 to 10000, then press Write. 8. Change the parameter 165 from 500 to 200, then press Write. 9. Press Overwrite.


Page 10-13


10.3.4 10.3.4.1

Replacement Motor of Auger Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove Auger (see chapter 10.3.3.2 on page 10-8). 10.3.4.2

Remove Motor of Auger

1. Loose screw (2) of motor (1). 2. Unplug motor cable (3). 3. Open setting straps (4). 4. Loose four screws (5).

Figure 10.3-14: Motor of Auger

Page 10-14



Figure 10.3-15: Unplug motor cable

Figure 10.3-16: Remove auger motor 10.3.4.3

Assemble Motor of Auger

1. Screw four screws (5) of motor (1), in order to mount it onto auger (Pay attention to the orientation of the cable outlet). 2. Close setting straps (4). 3. Screw the screw of the axle (2). 4. Plug motor cable (3) into the new motor (1). 5. Assemble Auger (see chapter 10.3.3.3 on page 10-13) into the system.


Page 10-15


10.3.5 10.3.5.1

Replacement of Starter Heating Tubes Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 10.3.5.2

Remove Starter Heating Tubes

The positions of the starter heating elements (3) and (6) are important. If they are not layed down in the same position, a collision with the pipettor arm can be verified.

6. Unscrew fitting (6) and fitting (7) from starter pump 1 (1). 7. Unscrew fitting (3) and fitting (4) from starter pump 2 (2).

Figure 10.3-17: Remove heating tubes of starter pumps

Page 10-16

Position No.

Description

1

Starter pump 1

2

Starter pump 2


10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies 3-4

Starter 2 heating tube with cable connector (J3)

5

To starter reagent 2 (red)

6-7

Starter 1 heating tube with cable connector (J2)

8

To starter reagent 1 (blue) Table 10.3-1: Aspirate Starter heating tubes 8. Unplug heater cable connectors (J2 and J3) from the Cuvette Supply CU PCB (see chapter 10.6.1 on page 10-37).

Figure 10.3-18: Cuvette Supply CU PCB


Page 10-17


Assemble Starter Heating Tubes

1. Plug in the heater cable connectors (J2 and J3) into the Cuvette Supply CU PCB. 2. Tighten by hand fitting (6) and fitting (7) - starter pump 1 (1). 3. Tighten by hand fitting (3) and fitting (4) - starter pump 2 (2). 4. Prime starter tubes (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22) 5. Perform the reading of the temperature of starter heating tubes (see chapter 10.4.5 on page 10-27). Once completed the assembly, perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 10-18



10.3.6 10.3.6.1

Replacement Cuvette Supply CU PCB Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. Enter LIAISON®XL Service Software and go to Parameter dialogue of Incubator service window. 3. Read the value of sorter parameter #30 (see chapter 10.4.3.1 on page 10-25) and take note of it. 4. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 5. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 6. Open the left top cover. 7. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 10.3.6.2

Remove Cuvette Supply CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of cuvette supply CU PCB (1). 2. Loosen two screws (2) and remove circuit board.

Figure 10.3-19: Cuvette Supply CU PCB 10.3.6.3

Assemble Cuvette Supply CU PCB

1. Set new cuvette supply CU PCB (1) into the guide rail (3), push circuit board up and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug all cables in, according to what indicated in “Electrical Connections, Switches and Signals” section (section 10.6.1).


Page 10-19


Set Cuvette Supply CU PCB Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Perform the calibration and the reading of the cuvette presence sensor (see chapter 10.4.4 on page 10-27). 3. Perform the reading of the temperature of starter heating tubes (see chapter 10.4.5 on page 10-27). 4. In case of an “old” auger equipped, perform the setting of the FW parameters (see the Technical Note of the SW version installed on the system). 5. Restore parameter #30 at the same value set before the FW upgrade (see chapter 10.4.3.1 on page 10-25).

Page 10-20



10.4

Adjustment and Calibration

In this section information about the adjustment and calibration of certain components can be found.

10.4.1

Adjustment of distance Sorter Pot to Incubator Chute

1. Unscrew two screws (3) of cover plate (2) and remove cover plate.

Figure 10.4-1: Sorter 2. Screw the rear two level adjustment screws (5) of the sorter clockwise down.

Figure 10.4-2: Sorter


Page 10-21

10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies 3. Sorter pot and chute have to be aligned with a little distance in between (no touching). 4. Adjust distance between sorter pot and chute by 2mm and drop of 1mm by adjusting the front level adjustment screw (4).

Figure 10.4-3: Close up sorter slide

Figure 10.4-4: Sorter slide, height adjustment 5. After adjusting the sorter pot hand tighten the rear level adjustment screws (5) onto the sorter plate (7). 6. Fasten three screws (6) of sorter plate (7).

Page 10-22



Figure 10.4-5: Sorter pot 7. Set cover plate in and fasten two screws (3) of cover plate (2).

10.4.2

Levelling of the sorter pot

1. Place the leveller on the sorter table.

Figure 10.4-6: Leveller positioning 2. Adjust the sorter table by levelling the three screws shown in Figure 10.4-7 until the leveller is in adjustment.


Page 10-23


Figure 10.4-7: Pot levelling

10.4.3

Calibration of sorter vibration (parameter #30)

This procedure can be applied both to old (Figure 10.4-8) and new versions of sorter pots (Figure 10.4-9). Different adjustment ranges are allowed for the 2 typologies: • •

12600 – 14800 for new pots; 12300 - 12500 for old pots.

a)

b) ®

Figure 10.4-8: LIAISON XL pot – Old designs

Page 10-24



a)

b) Figure 10.4-9: LIAISON® XL pot – New designs

10.4.3.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL Main User Interface. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Replace the sorter (see chapter 10.3.1 on page 10-3). 5. After the replacement of the sorter, switch on the system power and enter the LIAISON®XL Service Software. 6. Open the LIAISON® XL Service Software Main dialogue and double click on Incubator. The Incubator dialogue is opened. 7. Clicking on the Parameter tab, the Parameter dialogue is opened. In the drop down menu select Auger & Sorter & Tube Heaters. 8. In the Parameter field enter parameter 30. With the Read button the actual content of this parameter is shown. Whenever Firmware Upgrade is performed in a LIAISON® XL system, parameter #30 will be overwritten by the default value (13500). In order not to lose the result of the calibration, take note of the set value before starting the FW upgrade and then restore it after the conclusion of the upgrade. When upgrading from software version 4.0.0.2 or higher, the parameter will be restored after the Firmware Upgrade.

Parameter range for adjustment The value of parameter #30 should not exceed the range 12600–14800 (for new versions of pots, see Figure 10.4-9) and 12300-12500 (for old versions of pots, see Figure 10.4-8). Frequencies higher than the allowed range can result in a too strong vibration that could cause cuvettes falling out of the spiral coil. Frequencies lower than the allowed range could originate a vibration too slow to move the cuvettes efficiently.


Page 10-25


Coarse adjustment

1. Fill the sorter pot with cuvettes until the bottom is covered (approx. 50 cuvettes). 2. Mark one cuvette with e.g. a permanent marker and place it at a defined position, e.g. in front of the pot cuvette sensor. 3. Switch back to the Incubator main dialogue. In the Basic Operations field, press the button Sorter On to start the sorter pot. 4. Observe the marked cuvette until it has performed a complete cycle on the bottom of the sorter pot and measure the elapsed time using a stop watch. The time should be 15 – 20 seconds. 5. Press the button Sorter Off to stop the sorter pot. 6. If the time is outside the defined range, move back to Parameter dialogue and increase or decrease parameter #30 in increments of 50. Do this until the time for a full cycle of a cuvette lies within the range of 15 to 20 seconds. 7. Press Write button and then Overwrite button in order to register the new value of parameter #30. The cuvette that is used to measure the time should not go up the ramp since may slow down the movement of the cuvette; furthermore this cuvette shall not be used for regular assay execution.

10.4.3.3

Fine adjustment

After the coarse adjustment is done and the cuvette takes between 15 and 20 seconds per cycle, a fine adjustment shall be performed, in order to improve further the behavior of the sorter pot. 1. Fill the sorter pot with about 50 cuvettes and make sure that all cuvettes are at the bottom of the sorter pot. 2. Remove all cuvettes from the outlet channel of the sorter pot. 3. Press the button Sorter On to start the sorter pot. 4. Observe the behavior of the transported cuvettes. They should not fall out of the spiral coil of the sorter pot during the transport due to too strong vibrations. 5. While the pot is switched on, measure the time until 10 cuvettes have entered the outlet channel of the sorter pot. This time should be shorter than 140 seconds. 6. If the time is longer than 140 seconds, increase or decrease parameter #30 in increments of 20, until it takes less than 140 seconds until 10 cuvettes entered the outlet channel. 7. Press Write button and then Overwrite button in order to register the new value of parameter #30.

Page 10-26



10.4.4

Calibration of Sorter Cuvette Presence Sensors

The calibration of the cuvette sensors is done in Service Software at Main and Sensor tab of Incubator dialogue (see chapter 7.3.2 on page 7-15). A drop down field is available to chose the sensor to calibrate. Calibration must be done without any cuvettes in the system. Make reference to chapter 11.4.2 for a detailed description of the procedure.

10.4.5

Check Temperature of Starter Heating Tubes

1. Open the dialogue Incubator in the Service Software and initialize with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. System must be switched on and initialized for at least approximate 10 minutes to be operational for read-out of temperature. 3. Read out temperature at Main and Temperature tab (see section 7.3.3 on page 7-17).

Sensor

Temperature Range

Tube 1 temp (Starter tube A1)

35.5°C to 37.5°C

Tube 2 temp (Starter tube A2)

35.5°C to 37.5°C

Table 10.4-1: Temperature range


Page 10-27


10.5

Troubleshooting

For explanation of the number system of severity numbering see Error Definitions (see chapter 6.1 on page 6-2).

10.5.1

Cuvette Supply (11h, 17d): Error List

Cuvette Supply Module Decimal

17

Hexadecimal

11

For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

User Software

Service Software

Event ID

Device ID

Severity

Sub Unit

Error Code

In decimal In hexadecimal

17.0.0

11

00

00

00

Cause:

Corrective Action:

NO MESSAGE

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module executed command with no error.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater executed command with no error. 17.1.0

11

00

01

00

NO MESSAGE Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater executed command with no error.

17.2.0

11

00

02

00


17.3.0

11

00

03

00


Page 10-28





10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies 17.4.0

11

00

04

00


17.5.0

11

00

05

00


17.6.0

11

00

06

00


17.7.0

11

00

07

00


17.0.1

17.1.1

17.2.1

17.3.1

17.4.1

11

11

11

11

11

03

03

03

03

03

00

01

02

03

04

01

01

01

01

01

11

03

05

01

11

03

06

01


Cuvette Supply is not initialized.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command



NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command



NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command



NOT INITIALIZED

Tube 1 Heater received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

NOT INITIALIZED

NOT INITIALIZED Tube Heater is not initialized



Send init-command

Tube Heater is not initialized 17.6.1


NOT INITIALIZED

Tube Heater is not initialized 17.5.1


Tube 2 Heater received a command which can only be executed after initialization. Tube 3 Heater received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

Page 10-29


11

03

07

01

NOT INITIALIZED Tube Heater is not initialized

17.0.2

17.1.2

17.2.2

17.3.2

17.4.2

11

11

11

11

11

03

03

03

03

03

00

01

02

03

04

02

02

02

02

02

Tube 4 Heater received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.

Cuvette Supply received an unknown command.

Check syntax / sequence.

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.



UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.



UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.



UNKNOWN COMMAND

Tube 1 Heater received an unknown command

Tube Heater received an unknown command.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received an unknown command.





17.5.2

11

03

05

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND Tube Heater received an unknown command.

Tube 2 Heater received an unknown command Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

17.6.2

11

03

06

02



17.7.2

11

03

07

02



17.0.3

11

03

00

03

PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received a parameter value out of range

Page 10-30

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received a parameter value out of range. Check parameter range.



17.0.5

11

11

02

03

00

00

04

05

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater had a write failure of permanent parameter.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module had a write failure of permanent parameter.

EEPROM WRITE FAILURE

Exchange Cuvette Supply PCB.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater had a read failure of permanent parameter

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module had a read failure of permanent parameter and is using default values.

EEPROM READ PARAMETER READ FAILURE

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange Cuvette Supply PCB.

17.0.6

17.0.7

11

11

03

01

00

00

06

07

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater supply voltage out of range (%1 mV).

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module detected supply voltage out of range.


•

check fuses / replace fuses

UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT CHN 1

•

check cable / replace cable

•

check power supply

•


•

exchange Cuvette Supply PCB

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater supply voltage back in range (%1 Main Module detected supply mV). voltage back in range. VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE CHN 1

17.0.12

11

03

00

0C

Cuvette Supply found an error during self test

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module found an error during self test

17.1.12

11

03

01

0C



17.2.12

11

03

02

0C



17.3.12

11

03

03

0C



17.4.12

11

03

04

0C

Tube Heater found an error during self test

Tube 1 Heater found an error during self test Change Heater Tube.

17.5.12

11

03

05

0C




Page 10-31


11

03

06

0C



17.7.12

11

03

07

0C



17.0.13

11

03

00

0D

Cuvette Supply received a Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater command parameter value out of Main Module received a range. command with a parameter value which is out of range.

17.1.13

11

03

01

0D


17.2.13

11

03

02

0D


17.3.13

11

03

03

0D


17.4.13

11

03

04

0D

Tube Heater received a Tube 1 Heater received a command parameter value out of command with a parameter value range. which is out of range

17.5.13

11

03

05

0D


17.6.13

11

03

06

0D


17.7.13

11

03

07

0D


17.0.14

11

03

00

0E

COMMAND EXECUTION Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater is unable to execute command.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

17.1.14

11

03

01

0E

Cuvette Supply is unable to execute command

Cuvette Supply can not execute command during actual state

17.2.14

11

03

02

0E



17.3.14

11

03

03

0E



17.4.14

11

03

04

0E

Tube Heater is unable to execute Tube 1 Heater can not execute command command during actual state

Page 10-32



11

03

05

0E


17.6.14

11

03

06

0E


17.7.14

11

03

07

0E


17.0.15

11

03

00

0F

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received a command which is not implemented.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received a command which is not implemented.

17.1.15

11

03

01

0F


Cuvette Supply received a command which is not implemented yet.

17.2.15

11

03

02

0F



17.3.15

11

03

03

0F



17.4.15

11

03

04

0F


Tube 1 Heater received a command which is not implemented yet.

17.5.15

11

03

05

0F



17.6.15

11

03

06

0F



17.7.15

11

03

07

0F



17.0.16

11

03

00

10

EXECUTION TIMEOUT

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module reached a time-out during command execution

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater reached a time-out during command execution 17.1.16

11

03

01

10

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater reached a time-out during command execution

Cuvette Supply reached a timeout during command execution

17.2.16

11

03

02

10



17.3.16

11

03

03

10



17.4.16

11

03

04

10


Tube 1 Heater reached a time-out during command execution


Page 10-33


11

03

05

10



17.5.16

11

03

06

10



17.6.16

11

03

07

10



17.0.17

11

03

00

11

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received an illegal parameter type definition.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received an illegal parameter type definition.

ILLEGAL PARAMETER


Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received an invalid parameter index.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received an invalid parameter index.

PARAMETER NOT FOUND


17.0.18

11

03

00

12

Select correct parameter index. 17.0.19

11

03

00

13

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received an un authorized access to parameter.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received an un authorized access to parameter.


Set authorization.

ACCESS TO PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED 17.0.20

11

03

00

14

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received a wrong parameter unlock code.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received a wrong parameter unlock code.


Enter valid access code.

INVA AUTHORIZATION 17.0.21

11

03

00

15

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received a command with illegal parameter type. ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received a command with illegal parameter type. Set correct parameter type.

17.0.22

11

03

00

16

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater received a command with illegal parameter length. ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module received a command with illegal parameter length. Enter parameter in correct length.

17.0.31

11

00

00

1F

CAN Status Message.

--

17.4.32

11

02

04

20

Tube Heater temperature is out of range.

Tube 1 Heater detected tube 1 temperature is out of range.

Page 10-34



11

02

05

20


Tube 2 Heater detected tube 2 temperature is out of range

17.6.32

11

02

06

20



17.7.32

11

02

07

20



17.4.33

11

03

04

21

Tube Heater temperature is now in range

Tube 1 Heater detected tube 1 temperature is back in range

17.5.33

11

03

05

21



17.6.33

11

03

06

21



17.7.33

11

03

07

21



17.4.34

11

03

04

22

Tube Heater measured temperature fails plausibility check

Tube 1 Heater temperature sensor fails plausibility check.







Tube Heater given ambient temperature fails plausibility check

Tube 1 Heater given ambient temperature fails plausibility check

17.5.34

17.6.34

17.7.34

17.4.35

11

11

11

11

03

03

03

03

05

06

07

04

22

22

22

23

Change Heater Tube.

Change Heater Tube.

Change Heater Tube.

Change Heater Tube.

Change Heater Tube. 17.5.35

11

03

05

23


Tube 2 Heater given ambient temperature fails plausibility check Change Heater Tube.

17.6.35

11

03

06

23



17.7.35

11

03

07

23




Page 10-35


11

02

00

25

Cuvette Supply can not calibrate sensor.

Cuvette Supply / Tube Heater Main Module can not calibrate sensor.

Table 10.5-1: Cuvette supply, error list

Page 10-36



10.6

Electric Connections, Switches and Signals

This section shows an overview of the cuvette supply PCB. See chapter 2.3 on page 2-8 for an overview of the complete electric circuit of the system.

10.6.1

Cuvette Supply CU PCB

Figure 10.6-1: Cuvette Supply CU PCB


Page 10-37

10. Cuvette Loading Assemblies Number

Connection/Description

J1

Master COP (J31 - Power/CAN-Bus)

J2

Heating Tube 1

J3

Heating Tube 2

J4

Unused

J5

Download Connector

J6

Auger Motor

J7

Unused

J8

Unused

J9

Sorter Motor (Oscillator)

J10

Oscillations Level Sensor (Sorter Presence Sensor)

J11

Unused Table 10.6-1: Connections of the Cuvette Supply CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 10.6-2: LEDs of the Cuvette Supply CU PCB

Page 10-38


11. Incubator Module

11 Incubator Module This chapter describes incubator module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning incubator are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of the different parts of the module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Adjustment and Calibration”, “Check and Verification” and Troubleshooting’). In the last section, the layouts of Incubator PCB and Incubator Distributor PCB are described.

11.1

Safety



•


•



Page 11-1


11.2

Overview

11.2.1

Overview Incubator

This section shows an overview of the components of incubator module.

Figure 11.2-1: Incubator, top view

No

Description

1

Incubator

2

Cuvette chute

3

Cuvette supply

4

Drive pulley

5

Pusher W-I (washer - incubator)

6

Dispense verification position (For gravimetric tests)

7

Wash and Waste Position for right arm

8

Pusher I-W (incubator - washer)

9

Guide pulley

10

Downholder Table 11.2-1: Overview incubator

Page 11-2



11.2.2

Sensor Overview at Incubator

Figure 11.2-2: Overview, sensors

No

Description

11

Presence Sensor, cuvette chute upper Detects the presence of a cuvette in the upper part of the chute.

12

Presence Sensor, cuvette chute lower Detects the presence of a cuvette in the lower part of the chute.

13

Cuvette supply, home sensor (light barrier) Identifies the position of the cuvette supply mechanism.

14

Presence Sensor cuvette transport Detects the presence of a cuvette in the position in front of the cuvette supply loader.

15

Pusher W-I home sensor (light barrier) Identifies the position of the W-I pusher.

16

Init sensor, transport (light barrier) Identifies the position of the belt. A small reference hole is present on the belt: when the belt is in the init position, this hole shall be aligned to the init light barrier.

17

Distributor PCB

18

Temperature sensor

19

Pusher I-W home sensor (light barrier) Identifies the position of the I-W pusher. Table 11.2-2: Overview incubator


Page 11-3


11.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the incubator system. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

11.3.1 11.3.1.1

Replacement of Incubator Lid Preliminary Steps


Remove the Incubator Lid

1. Loose the three screws (1), lift at the front carefully up and slide it out to the front.

Figure 11.3-1: Incubator 11.3.1.3

Assemble the Incubator Lid

1. Thread the lid into the washer module groove and fasten three screws (1).

Page 11-4



11.3.2 11.3.2.1

Replacement Incubator Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11) 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 11.3.2.2

Remove the Incubator Module

1. Pull the tube (4) of the wash station out of the liquid waste pump (5).

Figure 11.3-2: Liquid Waste Pump


Page 11-5

11. Incubator Module 2. Twist the wash station (2) while pulling it out of the guide way.

Figure 11.3-3: Remove washer out of incubator 3. Unplug five cables (J3, J4, J6, J7 and J12) of incubator module CU on the back board and take them out of the cable clips (13) and (14). 4. Also take the cables further down out of the cable clips.

Figure 11.3-4: Incubator Module CU

Page 11-6


11. Incubator Module 5. Unscrew three screws (15) of incubator module (1).

Figure 11.3-5: Incubator module 6. Lift the disposable tip waste tube (16) out of the system.

Figure 11.3-6: Disposable Tip waste tube 7. Lift the incubator module (1) carefully out of the system. Be careful while lifting out, the module is heavy. Do not put the incubator module down onto motor or encoder. Do not bend cables or tubes.


Page 11-7


11.3.2.3

Assemble Incubator Module

1. Put the incubator module (1) into the machine and screw the three screws loose onto the frame. Push the incubator module to the front and right and fasten the three screws (15). 2. Push the wash station (2) into the guide way. 3. Push the tube of the wash station (4) into the liquid waste pump (5). 4. Lay the cables into the cable holders (13) and (14). 5. Plug the cables (J3, J4, J6, J7 and J12) as shown in Table 11.3-1 and in Figure 11.3-7. 6. Also clip the cables into the cable holders further down in the system.

Slot No.

Description

J4

Heater

J3

Heater

J7

Motor

J6

Encoder

J12

Incubator Distribution intern Table 11.3-1: Connections of incubator PCB

Page 11-8



Figure 11.3-7: Incubator CU PCB 7. Insert the disposable tip dropping (16) into the system. 8. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 9. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 10. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 11. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 12. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 13. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 14. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 15. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 16. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 17. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 18. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 19. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-9

11. Incubator Module 11.3.2.4

Set Incubator Module

1. If necessary (new incubator installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 2. If necessary (new incubator installed), perform the teaching of incubator module positions (see chapter 11.4.1 on page 11-63). 3. If necessary (new incubator installed), perform the calibration of cuvette presence sensors (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64). 4. If necessary (new incubator installed), adjust washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26). 5. If necessary (new incubator installed), check the temperature of the incubator (see chapter 11.5.1 on page 11-71). If necessary (new incubator installed), once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 11-10



11.3.3

Replacement of Incubator Isolation Foam

11.3.3.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 17. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 11.3.3.2

Remove the Incubator Isolation Foam

1. Remove following cables out of cable holders (7) • Heating foil cable (3) • Drive motor cable (4) • Heating foil cable (5) • Flat ribbon cable (6) • Encoder cable motor (8) 2. Unscrew three screws (2) and remove them including the washers. 3. Lift the incubator carefully out of the isolation foam.


Page 11-11


Figure 11.3-8: Cover

11.3.3.3

Assemble Incubator Isolation Foam

1. Lift the incubator carefully into the isolation foam. Damaged Cables Be careful that the cables are inside the guidances in the foam and are not damaged.

2. Fasten incubator into isolation with three screws (2) and a washer each. 3. Fix cables (3, 4, 5, 6 and 8) into cable holders (7). 4. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 5. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 6. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 7. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 8. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8) 9. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 10. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 11. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 12. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 13. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 14. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 15. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 16. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-12



11.3.4 11.3.4.1

Replacement of the Belt, Incubator Transport Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 11.3.4.2

Remove Belt, Incubator Transport

1. Unscrew twelve screws of six rail supports (1) and remove the rail supports.

Figure 11.3-9: Top view


Page 11-13

11. Incubator Module 2. Unscrew three screws (4) of guide pulley (6). Do not lose the three washers, they are very important for later adjustments and have a special measure.

Figure 11.3-10: Guide Pulley 3. Fasten three screws (4) to keep drive pulley from turning.

Figure 11.3-11: Fasten drive pulley 4. Unscrew screw (11) of guide pulley (6).

Page 11-14



Figure 11.3-12: Unscrew screw of guide pulley 5. Unscrew nut (3) of drive pulley (2).

Figure 11.3-13: Unscrew nut of drive pulley

6. Unscrew two screws (4) of drive pulley. 7. Insert two screws (4) into conical washer (5) and remove conical washer evenly out, unscrewing the screws.


Page 11-15


Figure 11.3-14: Remove conical washer 8. Remove the screws (4) previously used to block the drive pulley and to remove the conical washer and put them in their home position. 9. Lift transport belt straight carefully out while holding drive pulley (2) and guide pulley (6).

Figure 11.3-15: Loose, guide pulley and drive pulley 10. Hold pulley by side to span the belt during lifting up.

Page 11-16



11.3.4.3

Assemble Belt Incubator Transport

1. Lift belt transport with drive and guide pulley carefully into the incubator. Do not cant over the pulleys. The belt transport must sit completely in the bottom rails (16). 2. In order to obtain a proper alignment, it is possible to move the belt carefully into the guidance with a small Allen key. (Do not damage the belt).

Figure 11.3-16: Belt transport

Figure 11.3-17: Lower guide

Figure 11.3-18: Incubator with belt transport inserted


Page 11-17

11. Incubator Module 3. Screw the screw (11), only loosing it into the guide pulley (6). The below reported order shall be followed during the assembly: • Axle (8) • Washer (9) • Lock washer (10) • Screw (11) • Slide block (12) (Nut inside the isolation)

Figure 11.3-19: Axle, washer, lock washer and nut

Figure 11.3-20: Assemble guide pulley

Page 11-18


11. Incubator Module 4. Loosen screw (13) so the washer (14) can move freely. Arbor is pressing with the spring force against guide pulley to tense the transport chain.

Figure 11.3-21: Tension spring 5. Ensure that the belt is completely inserted in the lower guides (16). 6. Use the three screws (4) and remove the adjusting washers (15) for the next step.

Figure 11.3-22: Secure screws and adjusting washers


Page 11-19

11. Incubator Module 7. Insert an adjusting washer (15) on each hollow.

Figure 11.3-23: Fixing drive pulley 8. Turn drive pulley over the adjusting washers (the drive pulley must overlay plane on the adjusting washers) and fasten with three screws (4).

Figure 11.3-24: Fasten drive pulley

Page 11-20


11. Incubator Module 9. Insert conical washer (5) with rotary chamfer on top. 10. Fasten nut (3) with the fingers and then fasten screw with wrench by turning it clockwise 45°.

Figure 11.3-25: Drive pulley 11. Fasten screw of guide pulley (11) with slide block (12).

Figure 11.3-26: Incubator


Page 11-21

11. Incubator Module 12. Fasten screw (13) back to the initial position. Arbor shall not more pressing against guide pulley. 13. Unscrew the three screws (4) out of the drive pulley and remove the adjusting washers (15). 14. Fasten the adjusting washers (15) close to the guide pulley with the same three screws (4). 15. Fasten six rail supports (1) with two screws each and a washer. Be aware of the correct orientation of the rail supports and the position of the belt inside the guiding.

Figure 11.3-27: Incubator with rail support 16. Perform the calibration of the belt (see chapter 11.4.1 on page 11-63). 17. Check the calibration of the cuvette presence sensor transport (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64). 18. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the Incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.5 on page 7-30). 19. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from Incubator into the Waste (see chapter 7.3.7.4 on page 7-29). 20. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 11-22



11.3.5 11.3.5.1

Replacement Incubator Belt Motor Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8) 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 17. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 18. Remove Belt, Incubator Transport (see chapter 11.3.4.2 on page 11-13). 11.3.5.2

Remove Incubator Belt Motor

1. Unscrew four screws (2) of belt motor (1). 2. Remove motor.

Figure 11.3-28: Remove Drive Motor 3. Unplug cables (motor and encoder). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 11-23


Assemble Incubator Belt Motor

1. Plug cables (motor and encoder) onto the new motor. 2. Insert motor (1) and fasten with four screws (2). Be aware of the cable outlet.

Figure 11.3-29: Assembly of drive motor 3. Assemble Belt Incubator Transport (see chapter 11.3.4.3 on page 11-17). 4. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 5. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 6. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 7. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 8. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 9. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 10. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 11. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 12. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 13. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 14. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 15. Perform the calibration of the belt (see chapter 11.4.1 on page 11-63). 16. Check the calibration of the cuvette presence sensor transport (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64). 17. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 18. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the Incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.5 on page 7-30). 19. Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from Incubator into the Waste (see chapter 7.3.7.4 on page 7-29). 20. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 11-24



11.3.6 11.3.6.1

Replacement Sensor, Cuvette Presence Transport Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 11.3.6.2

Remove Sensor, Cuvette Presence

1. Unscrew emitter (2, red and black cable) and receiver (1, green and white cable) of presence sensor.

Figure 11.3-30: Sensor Cuvette Presence


Page 11-25

11. Incubator Module 2. Unplug cuvette presence sensor connector (slot J13, black) at distribution PCB.

Figure 11.3-31: Distributor PCB 11.3.6.3

Assemble Sensor, Cuvette Presence Transport

1. Loop cuvette presence sensor through by fixing them with the old one together and pull the new with the old sensor carefully through. 2. Remove the fixation between the old and the new sensor and leave only the new one in the system. 3. Fasten emitter (2, red and black cables) and receiver (1, green and white cable) of presence sensor. 4. Plug connector into Slot (J13, black) of incubator distributor PCB (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 5. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 6. Perform calibration and reading of the sensor (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64).

Page 11-26



11.3.7 11.3.7.1

Replacement Init Belt Light barrier Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4) 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 17. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 18. Remove the Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.2 on page 11-11). 11.3.7.2

Remove Init Belt Light barrier

1. Unplug connector (J12, white) of belt init sensor from distribution PCB. 2. Unscrew emitter (2, red and black cable) and receiver (1, green and white cable) of init sensor.

Figure 11.3-32: Belt Init sensor


Page 11-27


Assemble Init Belt Light barrier

1. Fasten emitter (2, red and black cable) and receiver (1, green and white cable) of init sensor. 2. Lay the emitter cable underneath of the incubator to the distributor PCB. 3. Plug connector (J12, white) of belt init sensor onto the distributor PCB. 4. Assemble Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.3 on page 11-12). 5. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 6. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 7. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 8. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 9. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 10. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 11. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 12. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 13. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 14. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 15. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 16. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 17. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-28



11.3.8 11.3.8.1

Replacement Motor, Cuvette Supply Preliminary Steps


Remove Motor, Cuvette Supply

1. Remove screw (1) from connecting rod (2).

Figure 11.3-33: Remove connecting rod 2. Unplug motor cuvette supply connector (J6, yellow) at incubator distribution PCB (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 3. Tie up motor cable with a wire. 4. Thread old motor cable with tied wire carefully through the incubator. Do not remove the wire afterwards, you need it for the new motor cable.


Page 11-29

11. Incubator Module 5. Unscrew two screws (4) of motor and remove motor.

Figure 11.3-34: Remove motor cuvette supply 11.3.8.3

Assemble Motor, Cuvette Supply

1. Move motor in and fasten motor with two screws (4). Be aware of the motor cable connection orientation. 2. Tie up new motor cable with a wire. 3. Thread new motor cable with tied wire through the incubator. 4. Plug connector (J6) of motor cuvette supply into the distributor PCB, (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 5. Fasten connection rod (2) with one screw (1) onto the motor. 6. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-30



11.3.9 11.3.9.1

Replacement Init Sensor, Cuvette Supply Light barrier Preliminary Steps


Remove Init, Cuvette Supply Light barrier

1. Unscrew two screws (2) of cuvette supply init sensor (1). 2. Unplug cuvette supply init sensor connector at incubator distribution PCB (slot J7, yellow) (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 3. Tie up sensor cable with a wire. 4. Thread old sensor cable with tied wire through the incubator. Do not remove the wire afterwards, you need it for the new sensor cable.

Figure 11.3-35: Sensor 11.3.9.3

Assemble Init, Cuvette Supply Light barrier

1. Tie up new sensor cable and thread it carefully through the incubator. 2. Thread sensor carefully through the incubator. 3. Plug in sensor cable into incubator distribution PCB slot J7 (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 4. Fasten sensor (1) with two screws (2). 5. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-31


11.3.10 Replacement Chute Upper or Lower Presence Sensors 11.3.10.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove Chute Upper or Lower Presence Sensors

1. Unscrew defect sensor of upper or lower chute on both sides. 2. Unplug sensor connector at incubator distribution PCB (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88) at: • slot J14 (red) for lower sensor; • slot J15 (yellow) for upper sensor. 3. Tie up sensor cable with a wire. 4. Thread old sensor cable with tied wire through the incubator. Do not remove the wire afterwards, you need it for the new sensor cable. 11.3.10.3

Assemble Chute Upper or Lower Presence Sensors

1. Fasten new upper or lower sensor onto chute. 2. Tie up sensor cable with the wire. 3. Thread new sensor cable with tied wire through the incubator. 4. Plug sensor connector in at incubator distribution PCB at: • slot J14 (red) for lower sensor; • slot J15 (yellow) for upper sensor. 5. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 6. Perform calibration and reading of the sensor (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64).

Page 11-32



11.3.11 11.3.11.1

Replacement Temperature Sensor Incubator Preliminary Steps


Remove Temperature Sensor Incubator

1. Unscrew cable holder (1) and pull temperature sensor carefully out. 2. Unplug sensor connector at slot J16 (white) of incubator distribution PCB. 3. Do not remove old heat conducting paste out of the bore.

Figure 11.3-36: Temperature Sensor 11.3.11.3

Assemble Temperature Sensor Incubator

1. Plug sensor connector into slot J16 (white) of incubator distribution PCB. 2. Fill heat conducting paste in the bore. 3. Insert the sensor into the filled bore and fix sensor with the cable holder (1). The sensor have to be inside the paste, not in an air inclusion. 4. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 5. Check the temperature of the incubator (see section 11.5.1 on page 11-71).


Page 11-33


11.3.12 11.3.12.1

Replacement Motor Pusher I-W Preliminary Steps


Remove Motor Pusher I-W

1. Unscrew two screws (2) of pusher I-W (1). 2. Slide pusher rod out and lift pusher out. 3. Unplug two connectors sensor (J5, red) and motor (J4, red).

Figure 11.3-37: Pusher I-W 4. Unscrew four screws (5) of motor plate (6). 5. Lift pusher motor with light barrier carefully out. 6. Unhook motor cable (12) out of motor plate (11). 7. Unscrew four screws (9) of motor (10).

Page 11-34



Figure 11.3-38: Pusher I-W motor plate 11.3.12.3

Assemble the Motor Pusher I-W

1. Screw new motor (10) with four screws (9) onto motor plate (11). Note the direction of the motor connector. It must be on the same side as the light barrier (13). 2. Stick the assembled motor plate (6) into the bolts (14) and tighten it with four screws (5) onto the incubator. Note that the bolt (16) of the lower mechanism set I-W must stick into the cam disk (15) of the motor.


Page 11-35


Figure 11.3-39: Motor pusher I-W installation positions 3. Lift pusher I-W (1) in and slide pusher rod in. Note that the bolt of the pusher I-W (1) must stick into the cam disk (15) of the motor. 4. Fasten pusher I-W (1) with two screws (2) onto incubator. 5. Plug two connectors sensor (J5, red) and motor (J4, red) into circuit board. 6. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-36



11.3.13 11.3.13.1

Replacement of Pusher I/W Home, Light barrier Preliminary Steps


Remove Pusher I/W Home, Light barrier

1. Unplug sensor cable (J5, red) at incubator distribution PCB. 2. Unscrew two screws of sensor (1) and remove sensor.

Figure 11.3-40: Pusher I/W light barrier 11.3.13.3

Assemble Pusher I/W Home, Light barrier

1. Fasten new sensor (1) with two screws, 2. Plug sensor cable (J5, red) into incubator distribution PCB. 3. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-37


11.3.14 11.3.14.1

Replacement of Motor Pusher W-I Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4) 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 11.3.14.2

Remove Motor Pusher W-I

1. Unscrew two screws (2) of pusher W-I (1). 2. Slide pusher rod out and lift pusher out.

Figure 11.3-41: Pusher W-I 3. Unscrew four screws (3) of motor plate (4). 4. Unscrew four screws (5) and remove motor (6) from motor plate (4).

Page 11-38



Figure 11.3-42: Motor Pusher W-I 5. Unplug the motor cable connector (7) from the motor (6). 11.3.14.3

Assemble Motor Pusher W-I

1. Plug the motor cable connector (7) into the new motor (6). 2. Screw new motor (6) with four screws (5) onto motor plate (4). Note the direction of the motor connector. It must be on the same side as the light barrier (8). 3. Stick the assembled motor plate (4) into the bolts (9) and tighten it with four screws (3) onto the incubator. Note that the bolt (10) of the lower mechanism set W-I must stick into the cam disk (11) of the motor.


Page 11-39


Figure 11.3-43: Motor positions 4. Lift pusher W-I (1) in and slide pusher rod in. Note that the bolt of the pusher W-I (1) must stick into the cam disk (11) of the motor. 5. Fasten pusher W-I (1) with two screws (2) onto incubator. 6. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 7. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-40



11.3.15 11.3.15.1

Replacement of Pusher W-I Home, Light barrier Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 5. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 6. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 11.3.15.2

Remove Pusher W-I Home, Light barrier

1. Unscrew two screws of sensor. 2. Unplug sensor connector of incubator distribution PCB (slot J3, white), (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 3. Tie up sensor cable with a wire. 4. Thread old sensor cable with tied wire through the incubator. Do not remove the wire afterwards, you need it for the new sensor cable. 11.3.15.3

Assemble Pusher W-I Home, Light barrier

1. Tie up new sensor cable and thread it carefully through the incubator. 2. Thread sensor cable carefully through the incubator. 3. Plug in sensor cable into incubator distribution PCB (slot J3, white), (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 4. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 5. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-41


11.3.16 11.3.16.1

Replacement Incubator CU PCB Preliminary Steps


Remove Incubator CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of incubator CU circuit board (1). 2. Loosen three screws (2) and remove circuit board.

Figure 11.3-44: Incubator CU PCB 11.3.16.3

Assemble Incubator CU PCB

1. Set new incubator CU PCB (1) into the guide rail (3), push incubator CU PCB up and fasten with three screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board (see chapter 11.7.1 on page 11-86). 11.3.16.4

Set Incubator CU Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Perform the Calibration of the belt init and belt positions (see chapter 11.4.1.2 on page 11-63). 3. Perform calibrations and reading of all cuvette presence sensors (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64).

Page 11-42



11.3.17 11.3.17.1

Replacement Incubator Distributor CU Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 11.3.17.2

Remove Incubator Distributor CU

1. Unplug all cables of incubator distributor CU (1). 2. Loosen two screws (2) and take circuit board out.

Figure 11.3-45: Incubator distributor CU 11.3.17.3

Assemble Incubator Distributor CU

1. Set new incubator distributor CU (1) in and fasten two screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 11.3.17.4

Calibrate Incubator Distributor CU Light Sensors

1. Perform reading of all cuvette presence sensors (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 1164). 2. Check the temperature of the incubator (see section 11.5.1 on page 11-71). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 11-43


11.3.18 11.3.18.1

Replacement Pusher I-W (Bearing Block I-W) Preliminary Steps


Remove Pusher I-W

1. Unscrew two screws (2) of pusher I-W (1). 2. Slide pusher rod out and lift pusher out.

Figure 11.3-46: Installed pusher I-W 11.3.18.3

Assemble the Pusher I-W

1. Lift pusher I-W (1) in and slide pusher rod in. Note that the bolt of the pusher I-W (1) must stick into the cam disk (3) of the motor. 2. Fasten pusher I-W (1) with two screws (2) onto incubator. 3. Calibrate the pusher I-W (see chapter 11.4.3 on page 11-65). 4. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-44



11.3.19 Required Tools

•

Replacement Gates I-W

Removable thread locker (as Loctite 243)

11.3.19.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove the Incubator downholder. 11.3.19.2

Remove Gates I-W

1. Remove the four screws (1).

Figure 11.3-47: Installed gates I-W 2. Remove both gates (2 + 3). 11.3.19.3

Assemble the Gates I-W

1. Insert the left gate (2) => marker I-W LI. Note that the bolt of the lower driver mechanism (driver plate) must stick into the hole of the gate (see the red arrow in Figure 11.3-47). 2. Insert the left gate (3) => marker I-W RE. Note that the bolt of the lower driver mechanism (driver plate) must stick into the hole of the gate (see the red arrow in Figure 11.3-47). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 11-45

11. Incubator Module 3. Moisten the threads of the screws (1) with a bit of thread locker and screw them into the incubator. Remove remaining thread locker. Torque down the gates with the screws to finger tightness. Fix the gates thus that it is possible to move them easily back and forth by hand. 4. Check Gates (see chapter 11.5.2 on page 11-72). 5. Assemble the Incubator downholder. 6. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 7. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4) .


•

Replacement Lower Mechanism I-W


11.3.20.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 17. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 18. Remove the Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.2 on page 11-11)

Page 11-46



11.3.20.2

Remove Lower Mechanism I-W

1. Remove both brackets (1) of the pusher (2).

Figure 11.3-48: Installed lower mechanism I-W 2. Remove the pusher (2).

Figure 11.3-49: Driver plates 3. Remove the four screws (3). 4. Remove both driver plates (4) with slide bearings (5).


Page 11-47


11.3.20.3

Assemble the Lower Mechanism I-W

1. Prepare both driver plates (4) with a cylinder bolt (6) and four slide bearings (7).

Figure 11.3-50: Driver plate 2. Insert the prepared driver plates (4) into the incubator. Note that the longer bolt of the driver plates (4) must stick into the hole of the gates (8).

Figure 11.3-51: Gates 3. Moisten the threads of the screws (3) with a bit of thread locker and screw them into the incubator. Remove remaining thread locker. 4. Check the movability of the driver plates and gates. 5. Insert both slide bearings (5) onto the installed driver plates (4). 6. Insert the pusher (2). Note that the bolt of the pusher (2) must stick into the cam disk (9) of the motor and both slide bearings (5) must stick into the guidances of the pusher (2). 7. Moisten the threads of the screws (1) with a bit of thread locker. Page 11-48


11. Incubator Module 8. Install both brackets (1) and tighten the screws. Remove remaining thread locker. 9. Assemble Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.3 on page 11-12). 10. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 11. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 12. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 13. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 14. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8) 15. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 16. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 17. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 18. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 19. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 20. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 21. Check Gates (see chapter 11.5.2 on page 11-72). 22. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 23. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-49


11.3.21 11.3.21.1

Replacement Pusher W-I (Bearing Block W-I) Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 11.3.21.2

Remove Pusher W-I

1. Unscrew two screws (2) of pusher W-I (1). 2. Slide pusher rod out and lift pusher out.

Figure 11.3-52: Installed pusher W-I 11.3.21.3

Assemble the Pusher W-I

1. Lift pusher W-I (1) in and slide pusher rod in. Note that the bolt of the pusher W-I (1) must stick into the cam disk (3) of the motor. 2. Fasten pusher W-I (1) with two screws (2) onto incubator. 3. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 4. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-50




•

Replacement Gates W-I


11.3.22.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove the Incubator downholder. 11.3.22.2

Remove Gates W-I

1. Remove the four screws (1).

Figure 11.3-53: Installed gates W-I 2. Remove both gates (2 + 3).


Page 11-51


11.3.22.3

Assemble the Gates W-I

1. Insert the left gate (2) => marker W-I LI. Note that the bolt of the lower driver mechanism (driver plate) must stick into the hole of the gate (see the red arrow in Figure 11.3-53). 2. Insert the left gate (3) => marker W-I RE. Note that the bolt of the lower driver mechanism (driver plate) must stick into the hole of the gate (see the red arrow in Figure 11.3-53). 3. Moisten the threads of the screws (3) with a bit of threadlocker and screw them into the incubator. Remove remaining threadlocker. Torque down the gates with the screws to finger tightness. Fix the gates thus it is possible to move them easily back and forth by hand. 4. Check Gates (see chapter 11.5.2 on page 11-72). 5. Assemble the Incubator downholder. 6. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 7. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-52




•

Replacement Lower Mechanism W-I


11.3.23.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 17. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 18. Remove the Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.2 on page 11-11).


Page 11-53


11.3.23.2

Remove Lower Mechanism W-I

1. Remove both brackets (1) of the pusher (2).

Figure 11.3-54: Installed lower mechanism W-I 2. Remove the pusher (2).

Figure 11.3-55: Driver plates

Page 11-54


11. Incubator Module 3. Remove the four screws (3). 4. Remove both driver plates (4) with slide bearings (5). 11.3.23.3

Assemble the Lower Mechanism W-I

1. Prepare both driver plates (4) with a cylinder bolt (6) and four slide bearings (7).

Figure 11.3-56: Driver plate 2. Insert the prepared driver plates (4) into the incubator. Note that the longer bolt of the driver plates (4) must stick into the hole of the gates (8).

Figure 11.3-57: Gates 3. Moisten the threads of the screws (3) with a bit of thread locker and screw them into the incubator. Remove remaining thread locker. 4. Check the movability of the driver plates and gates.


Page 11-55

11. Incubator Module 5. Insert both slide bearings (5) onto the installed driver plates (4). 6. Insert the pusher (2). Note that the bolt of the pusher (2) must stick into the cam disk (9) of the motor and both slide bearings (5) must stick into the guidances of the pusher (2). While the pusher (2) is inserted, the coupling with the fork mechanism (10) must be respected. Looking to the incubator from the bottom side (see Figure 11.3-58), the pusher shall be placed in front of the fork mechanism (10).

Figure 11.3-58: Coupling of pusher and fork mechanism 7. Moisten the threads of the screws (1) with a bit of thread locker. 8. Install both brackets (1) and tighten the screws. Remove remaining thread locker. 9. Assemble Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.3 on page 11-12). 10. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 11. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 12. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 13. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 14. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8) 15. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 16. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4).

Page 11-56


11. Incubator Module 17. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 18. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 19. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 20. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 21. Check Gates (see chapter 11.5.2 on page 11-72). 22. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 23. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-57


11.3.24 11.3.24.1

Replacement Motor Cable Pusher W-I Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 12. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 15. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 16. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 17. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 18. Remove the Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.2 on page 11-11).

Page 11-58



11.3.24.2

Remove Motor Cable Pusher W-I

1. Unplug the connector motor (J2, white) of incubator distributor PCB (5).

Figure 11.3-59: Unplug connectors for pusher W-I 2. Unplug the motor cable connector (1) from the motor (2) and remove the motor cable.

Figure 11.3-60: Motor cable pusher W-I (bottom side)


Page 11-59


Assemble Motor Cable Pusher W-I

1. Plug the motor cable connector (1) into the motor (2). 2. Push the motor cable through the notch (3). 3. Note the cable laying of the motor cable. 4. Plug the connector motor (J2, white) into circuit board (5). 5. Assemble Incubator Isolation Foam (see chapter 11.3.3.3 on page 11-12). 6. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 7. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 8. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 9. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 10. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8) 11. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 12. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 13. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 14. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 15. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 16. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 17. Check the teaching positions for pipettor (see chapter 8). 18. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 11-60



11.3.25 11.3.25.1

Replacement Chute Assembly Preliminary Steps


Remove Chute Assembly

1. Unscrew chute sensors on both sides (1). 2. Unscrew two screws (3) and remove chute (2).

Figure 11.3-61: Incubator Chute 11.3.25.3

Assemble Chute Assembly

1. Set new chute (2) into the incubator and fasten it with two screws (3). 2. Attach sensors (1) and fasten them. 3. Adjust the distance Sorter Pot to Incubator Chute (see chapter 10.4.1 on page 1021). 4. Check the calibration of chute upper and lower presence sensors (see chapter 11.4.2 on page 11-64).


Page 11-61


11.3.26 11.3.26.1

Replacement Cuvette Supply Assembly Preliminary Steps


Remove Cuvette Supply

1. Remove the screw (2) from the center of the cuvette supply assembly (1).

Figure 11.3-62: Cuvette Supply Assembly 2. Unplug cuvette supply motor (slot J6, yellow) and init sensor (slot J7, yellow) connectors at incubator distribution PCB (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88). 3. Tie up motor and sensor cables with a wire. 4. Thread old motor and sensor cables with tied wire through the incubator. Do not remove the wire afterwards, you need it for the new motor and sensor cables. 5. Remove the module carefully (take care of the loading pusher). 11.3.26.3

Assemble Cuvette Supply

1. Place the module carefully into its position. 2. Tie up new motor and sensor cables and thread them carefully through the incubator. 3. Fix the screw (2) into the center of the cuvette supply assembly (1). 4. Plug cuvette supply motor (slot J6, yellow) and init sensor (slot J7, yellow) connectors at incubator distribution PCB (see chapter 11.7.2 on page 11-88).

Page 11-62


11. Incubator Module 5. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

11.4

Check and Verification


11.4.1 11.4.1.1

Calibration of Incubator Belt First Initialization

1. Open Service Software, go to Incubator dialogue and initialize once selected All Dialogue Controlled Modules. (It is possible that at the first initialize a failure occurs. The init sensor is not calibrated yet, just ignore this message this time.) 2. Move to Parameter dialogue, set Code to 1 and press Set button. 11.4.1.2

Calibration of the belt init and belt positions

1. Calibration of belt init. • Move to Teach dialogue. In the window Options for selected Device and Drive double click onto Calibrate Init. • Save the received value by double click onto Overwrite NVM in the same window. 2. Adjustment of the Teach positions. • At the Teach dialogue, in the window Get stored Teach positions, click onto Get button. • Move the belt to the pre-adjusted position by clicking onto the Move button. • Loosen fixing screw (1) at the teach pin.

Figure 11.4-1: Incubator, teach pin • Move the belt with the step buttons left/ right so far that the teaching pin is free and moves without clamping in the teach hole in the belt. • Save new position in Save current Axis position by pressing onto the Save button. Click onto Overwrite NVM to save new position again. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 11-63

11. Incubator Module Adjustment target of teach position: 1590 - 1610 • Move teach pin to original position and fasten fixing screw (1). 3. Calculation of other transfer positions. • In the window Options for selected Device and Drive double click onto Calculate and set other positions. • The ascertained positions are to be saved by double clicking onto Overwrite NVM.

11.4.2

Calibration of Cuvette Presence Sensors

1. Open Service Software, go to Incubator dialogue and initialize once selected All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Assure that, during the calibration, no cuvette is present in front of the actual light barrier. For the calibration of cuvette presence transport sensor, verify that an empty cuvette holder sits in front of the transport light barrier. If this is not the case, move an empty cuvette holder via Service Software to the position Cuvette Supply (using the dedicated button available in Main and Move tab of Incubator dialogue). 3. Go to Main and Sensor tab and select the sensor to teach using Cuvette Sensor Calibration drop-down menu. 4. Press Calibrate button. 5. Save the received values with upcoming window. 6. Verify read voltage levels (both with and without cuvettes) pressing Read button in Cuvette Sensors panel. 11.4.2.1

Settings of Cuvette Presence Sensors

Description

Presence Target of cuvette

Calibration cuvette presence sensor transport.

without

0.6 - 1.2

with

2.0 - 4.0

without

0.6 - 1.2

with

2.0 - 4.0

without

0.6 - 1.2

with

2.0 - 4.0

without

0.6 - 1.2

with

2.0 - 4.0

Calibration chute lower presence sensor.

Calibration chute upper presence sensor

Calibration sorter presence sensor

Table 11.4-1: Setting incubator light barriers

Page 11-64



11.4.3 11.4.3.1

Teaching of the I-W pusher Calibration flow chart

The flow chart shown in this chapter describes the workflow calibration process, followed by the single items definition. The detail of those items are listed in the procedure steps at chapter #11.4.3.3. The parameter #17 of the incubator module must be taught in order to allow the cuvette pushing by the pusher I/W without putting too much force on the cuvette. The exceeding force can be detected by visually check the pusher I/W behavior when pressing the cuvette into the washer; if the movement is forced the pusher shaft drifts vertically.

Although the parameter #17 is a teach parameter, it is currently set to the standard value of 675 after each firmware download, the parameter must be reset to the right value after the firmware download


Page 11-65

11. Incubator Module Flow chart

Page 11-66



Items definition

Test Run: test of a single cuvette movement performed by the Service SW. The test steps are the following:

Run Test − Push a cuvette into the washer channel by using the Move dialogue (Figure 11.4-2) − Choose a cuvette by selecting the Cuvette No. (1) − Press Pusher IW on Move to Position menu (2) − By the menu Perform with selected cuvette press Push I-W to push the cuvette into the washer channel (3)

1

2 3 Figure 11.4-2

− While the pusher is moving check if the shaft makes a vertical movement (Figures 11.4-3 and 11.4-4), few mm might be enough to affect the reliability of the mechanism.

Figure 11.4-3

Figure 11.4-4

Pusher Moving:


The terms “moving” refers to a vertical (z direction) movement of the pusher. If it happens the insertion of the cuvette can be potentially affected.

Page 11-67


Verification Run:

“qualification” test that has to be performed in order to check the effectiveness of the calibration. The test steps are the following:

Run Verification − Perform cycles tests, run 2 time 30 cuvettes from the incubator through the washer back to the incubator by using the Sequence dialogue (Figure 11.4-5) − Set the number of cuvette to be used by selecting the Cuvette to Process – From and To. (1)

1

− click the option Through Washer (2)

2 4

− Set as 2 the No. of Cycles (3)

3

− Press Start to run the test (4) Figure 11.4-5

− Perform cycle test, run 2 time 30 cuvettes from incubator into the waste by using the Sequence dialogue (Figure 11.4-6) − Set the number of cuvette to be used by selecting the Cuvette to Process – From and To. (1)

1

− Tick the options Unload and to Waste (2)

4 3

2

− Set as 2 the No. of Cycles (3) Press Start to run the test (4)

Figure 11.4-6 − Both cycles tests must be completed without any cuvette crash to prove that cuvettes are transferred without any issues.

Page 11-68



11.4.3.2

Preparation

7. Exit the LIAISON XL system software. 8. On the right side of the system, turn off the system power switch. 9. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 10. Remove the incubator lid as described in Liaison XL Service Manual, chapter 11.3.1.2. 11. Plug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 12. Turn on the system power switch

11.4.3.3

Teaching of the pusher I-W

To teach the pusher I/W proceed as follow: 1. Open the Service Software – Incubator – Main and press Initialize to activate the module (Figure 11.4-7);

Figure 11.4-7

2. Perform the “Run Test” according to the instruction provided in the Run Test definition; 3. According to the flow chart if the pusher is not moving vertically proceed with the next step (#4) while if it is moving go to #10; 4. On Service SW in the incubator module move to the tab Parameter and check the value of parameter #17; 5. If the value is lower than 682 go to #7, while the value is equal or higher than 682 proceed with the next step (#6); 6. Perform the step “Run Verification” according to the instruction provided in the Run Verification definition. If the cuvettes are transferred without any issue the calibration is considered completed, go to #17; 7. Given that the parameter #17 value is lower than 682 increase it for 1 step and store the new value; 8. Repeat the “Run Test” step according to the instruction provided in the Run Test definition;


Page 11-69


Before running the test Initialize the module in order to ensure the usage of the right settings. 9. Repeat steps #7 and #8 until the pusher is not moving vertically but the value of parameter #17 is equal to 682, or the Pusher is moving; proceed as follow: •

Pusher is not moving and parameter #17 = 682  Run Verification as described at #6;

•

Pusher is moving  proceed with the next step:

10. In the Service SW of the Incubator module move to the table Parameter and check the value of parameter #17; 11. If the value is higher than 666 go to #13, while the value is equal or lower than 666 proceed with the next step (#12); 12. Even though the Pusher is moving perform the step “Run Verification” according to the instruction provided in the Run Verification definition. If the cuvettes are transferred without any issues the calibration is considered completed, go to #4.17;

From the in-house procedure evaluation this test case (Par #17 ≤ 666) would never happens.

13. Given that the parameter #17 value is higher than 666 decrease it of 1 step and store the new value; 14. Repeat the “Run Test” step according to the instruction provided in the Run Test definition;

Before running the test Initialize the module in order to ensure the usage of the right settings. 15. Repeat the steps #13 and #14 until the pusher is not moving or the value of parameter #17 is equal or lower than 666; 16. Perform the step “Run Verification” according to the instruction provided in the Run Verification definition. If the cuvettes are transferred without any issue the calibration is considered completed, go to #17; 17. Finally assemble the incubator lid as described in the Liaison XL Service Manual, chapter 11.3.1.3.

Page 11-70



11.5


In this section information about the testing of certain components can be found.

11.5.1

Check Temperature

1. Open the dialogue Incubator in the Service Software and initialize with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. System must be switched on and initialized for at least 30 minutes to be operational for read-out of temperature. 3. Go to Main and Temperature tab and press Read button. 4. Check the temperature value reported in Incubator Temp. box

Sensor

Temperature Range

Incubator temperature

36.5°C to 38.5°C

Table 11.5-1: Temperature range


Page 11-71



•

Check Gates

Sheet of paper 80 gr/m2

11.5.2.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove the Incubator downholder 9. Plug the system power plug into the right side of the system. 10. Start the system. 11. Start the Service Software. 11.5.2.2

Check with Service Software

1. Open the dialogue Incubator in the Service Software. 2. Press on the All Dialogue Controlled Modules button to initialise the incubator module 3. Go to Main and Sequence tab. 4. Verify that “0” is set in From and “79” in To scroll bars. 5. Activate the Unload and the to Waste checkboxes. 6. Press the Start button to remove all cuvettes from the incubator. 7. To start the movement of the gates press on the Push I-W and Push W-I buttons respectively 3 times each. Observe the clearance between the two gates after the positioning. 8. Repeat the positioning (point 8 of the procedure) two more times and observe the clearances. The maximum clearance should not exceed ~0.1 mm dimension. This means that a 80g/m2 paper folded into two pieces cannot be inserted between the two gates. In case of issues detected during this check:

Page 11-72

•

As first action, the gates shall be replaced (see chapter 11.3.19 or chapter 11.3.22) during a new visit after having the spare part available.

•

If the proper clearance is still not verified, the lower mechanism of the gate shall be replaced (see chapter 11.3.20 or chapter 11.3.23) during a new visit after having the spare part available.



Assemble

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL Service Software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Assemble the Incubator downholder. 5. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 6. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 11-73


11.6

Troubleshooting


11.6.1

Incubator (12h; 18dec): Error List

Incubator Module Decimal

18

Hexadecimal

12

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in (see chapter 6.6.3 on page 6-19). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for user and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

In Hexadecimal

Event ID

SubUnit ID Error Code

In Decimal

Severity

Service Software

Device ID

User Software

Cause:

Corrective Action:

18.0.0

12

00

00

00

NO ERROR

Incubator Main Module executed command with no error.

18.1.0

12

00

01

00

NO ERROR

Heater executed command with no error.

18.2.0

12

00

02

00

NO ERROR

Pusher Incubator Washer executed command with no error.

18.3.0

12

00

03

00

NO ERROR

Transport executed command with no error.

18.4.0

12

00

04

00

NO ERROR

Pusher Washer Incubator executed command with no error.

18.5.0

12

00

05

00

NO ERROR

Pusher Supply executed command with no error.

Page 11-74


11. Incubator Module 18.6.0

12

00

06

00

NO ERROR

Heater Tube 1 is removed from Incubator.

18.7.0

12

00

07

00

NO ERROR


18.8.0

12

00

08

00

NO ERROR

Supply Upper Sensor executed command with no error.

18.9.0

12

00

09

00

NO ERROR

Supply Lower Sensor executed command with no error.

18.0.1

12

03

00

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command Incubator Main Module received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.1.1

12

03

01

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Heater received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.2.1

12

03

02

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Pusher Incubator Washer received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.3.1

12

03

03

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Cuvette Transport received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.4.1

12

03

04

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Pusher Washer Incubator received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.5.1

12

03

05

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Pusher Supply received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.6.1

12

03

06

01

NOT INITIALIZED


18.7.1

12

03

07

01

NOT INITIALIZED


18.8.1

12

03

08

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Supply Upper Sensor received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.9.1

12

03

09

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Supply Lower Sensor received a command which can only be executed after initialization.

18.0.2

12

03

00

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence. Incubator Main Module received a unknown command.


Page 11-75


12

03

01

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Heater received a unknown command.

18.2.2

12

03

02

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Pusher Incubator Washer received a unknown command.

18.3.2

12

03

03

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Cuvette Transport received a unknown command.

18.4.2

12

03

04

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Pusher Washer Incubator received a unknown command.

18.5.2

12

03

05

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Pusher Supply received a unknown command.

18.6.2

12

03

06

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


18.7.2

12

03

07

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


18.8.2

12

03

08

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Supply Upper Sensor received a unknown command.

18.9.2

12

03

09

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Supply Lower Sensor received a unknown command.

18.0.3

12

03

00

03


Incubator Main Module received a parameter value out of range.

Parameter value out of range.

Check parameter range. 18.0.4

12

02

00

04

PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE Write failure of permanent parameter.

Incubator Main Module had a write failure of permanent parameter. Exchange Incubator PCB.

18.0.5

12

03

00

05

Read failure of permanent parameter. EEPROM READ

Incubator Main Module had a read failure of permanent parameter and is using default values. Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange Incubator PCB.

18.0.6

12

03

00

06

Supply voltage out of range (%1 mV) VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE

Page 11-76

Incubator Main Module detected supply voltage out of range. •


•

check power cable / replace power cable

•

check power supply

•


•

exchange Incubator PCB LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02


12

01

00

07

Supply voltage back in range (%1 mV). VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

18.3.8

12

03

03

08

Thermal or short circuit protection of driver THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER

Incubator Main Module detected supply voltage back in range. Cuvette Transport detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow.

18.2.9

12

01

02

09

Position reached several retries. POSITIONING PROBLEM

Pusher Incubator Washer needed several retries to reach position. No action.

18.3.9

12

01

03

09


Cuvette Transport needed several retries to reach position. No action.

18.4.9

12

01

04

09


Pusher Washer Incubator needed several retries to reach position. No action.

18.5.9

12

01

05

09


Pusher Supply needed several retries to reach position No action.

18.2.10

12

03

02

0A

Target not reached. DRIVE NOT MOVING

Pusher Incubator Washer could not reach target Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

18.3.10

12

03

03

0A


Cuvette Transport could not reach target. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

18.4.10

12

03

04

0A


Pusher Washer Incubator could not reach target. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

18.5.10

12

03

05

0A


Pusher Supply could not reach target. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.


Page 11-77


12

03

00

0B

Command terminated. ABNORMAL TERMINATION COMMAND

Incubator Main Module terminated command before completion. No action.

18.1.11

12

03

01

0B


18.2.11

12

03

02

0B


Heater terminated command before completion. No action. Pusher Incubator Washer terminated command before completion. No action.

18.3.11

12

03

03

0B


18.4.11

12

03

04

0B


Cuvette Transport terminated command before completion. No action. Pusher Washer Incubator terminated command before completion. No action.

18.5.11

12

03

05

0B


18.6.11

12

03

06

0B


18.7.11

12

03

07

0B


18.8.11

12

03

08

0B


Pusher Supply terminated command before completion. No action. Tube Heater 1 is removed from Incubator. No action. Tube Heater 2 is removed from Incubator. No action. Supply Upper Sensor terminated command before completion. No action.

18.9.11

12

03

09

0B


Supply Lower Sensor terminated command before completion. No action.

18.1.12

12

03

01

0C

SELFTEST ERROR

Heater found an error during self test. Exchange module.

18.6.12

12

03

06

0C

SELFTEST ERROR

Heater Tube 1 is removed from Incubator

18.7.12

12

03

07

0C

SELFTEST ERROR

Heater Tube 2 is removed from Incubator

Page 11-78



12

03

00

0D

Command parameter value out of range. WRONG COMMAND PARAMETER VALUE

Incubator Main Module received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check parameter value.

18.1.13

12

03

01

0D


18.2.13

12

03

02

0D


Heater received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check parameter value. Pusher Incubator Washer received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check parameter value.

18.3.13

12

03

03

0D


18.4.13

12

03

04

0D


Cuvette Transport received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check parameter value. Pusher Washer Incubator received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check parameter value.

18.5.13

12

03

05

0D


18.6.13

18.7.13

18.8.13

12

12

12

03

03

03

06

07

08

0D

0D

0D

12

03

09

0D



Check parameter value.

Command parameter value out of range.





Supply Upper Sensor received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.





WRONG COMMAND PARAMETER VALUE 18.9.13

Pusher Supply received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.

Check parameter value. Supply Lower Sensor received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check parameter value.

Page 11-79


12

03

00

0E

Unable to execute command. COMMAND EXECUTION

Incubator Main Module can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.1.14

12

03

01

0E


Heater can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.2.14

12

03

02

0E


Pusher Incubator Washer can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.3.14

12

03

03

0E


Cuvette Transport can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.4.14

12

03

04

0E


Pusher Washer Incubator can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.5.14

12

03

05

0E


Pusher Supply can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.6.14

12

03

06

0E


Heater Tube 1 is removed from Incubator. Unit busy.

18.7.14

12

03

07

0E


Heater Tube 2 is removed from Incubator. Unit busy.

18.8.14

12

03

08

0E


Supply Upper Sensor can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.9.14

12

03

09

0E


Supply Lower Sensor can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

18.0.15

12

03

00

0F


Incubator Main Module received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.1.15

12

03

01

0F


Heater received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

Page 11-80



12

03

02

0F


Pusher Incubator Washer received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.3.15

12

03

03

0F


Cuvette Transport received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.4.15

12

03

04

0F


Pusher Washer Incubator received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.5.15

12

03

05

0F


Pusher Supply received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.6.15

12

03

06

0F


Heater Tube 1 is removed from Incubator Do not try again.

18.7.15

12

03

07

0F


Heater Tube 2 is removed from Incubator Do not try again.

18.8.15

12

03

08

0F


Supply Upper Sensor received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.9.15

12

03

09

0F


Supply Lower Sensor received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

18.0.16

12

03

00

10

Command execution time-out. EXECUTION TIMEOUT

Incubator Main Module reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.

18.1.16

12

03

01

10


Heater reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.

18.2.16

12

03

02

10


Pusher Incubator Washer reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.

18.3.16

12

03

03

10


Cuvette Transport reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.


Page 11-81


12

03

04

10


Pusher Washer Incubator reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.

18.5.16

12

03

05

10


Pusher Supply reached a timeout during command execution. Restart module.

18.6.16

12

03

06

10


Tube Heater 1 is removed from Incubator. Restart module.

18.7.16

12

03

07

10


Tube Heater 2 is removed from Incubator. Restart module.

18.8.16

12

03

08

10


Supply Upper Sensor reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.

18.9.16

12

03

09

10


Supply Lower Sensor reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module.

18.0.17

12

03

00

11

Illegal parameter type definition. ILLEGAL PARAMETER

Incubator Main Module received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

18.0.18

12

03

00

12

Invalid parameter index. PARAMETER NOT FOUND

Incubator Main Module received an invalid parameter index. Set correct parameter index. Select correct parameter index.

18.0.19

12

03

00

13

Access to parameter not allowed. PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED

Incubator Main Module received an un authorized access to parameter. Set authorization.

18.0.20

12

03

00

14

Wrong parameter unlock code. PARAMETER WRONG CODE INVA AUTHORIZATION

Page 11-82

Incubator Main Module received a wrong parameter unlock code. Enter valid access code.



12

03

00

15

Illegal parameter type in command. Incubator Main Module received a command with ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE illegal parameter type. Set correct parameter type.

18.0.22

12

03

00

16

Illegal parameter length in command. ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH

Incubator Main Module received a command with illegal parameter length.

WRONG PARAMETER LENGTH


18.0.31

12

00

00

1F

CAN Status Message

--

18.1.32

12

02

01

20

Incubator temperature is out of range.

Heater detected incubator temperature is out of range.

TEMPERATURE OUT OF RANGE Check cable. 18.6.32

12

02

06

20




12

02

07

20




12

01

01

21

Incubator temperature is now in range.

Heater detected incubator temperature is back in range.

TEMPERATURE BACK IN RANGE No action. 18.6.33

12

01

06

21




12

01

07

21




18.6.34

18.7.34

12

12

12

03

03

03

01

06

07

22

22

22


Measured temperature fails plausibility check.

Heater temperature sensor fails plausibility check.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAILS PLAUSIBILITY CHECK

Check temperature sensor.









Page 11-83


12

03

01

23

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE FAILS PLAUSIBILITY CECK

Heater given ambient temperature fails plausibility check. Sent valid ambient temperature.

18.6.35

12

03

06

23


Heater Tube 1 is removed from Incubator. Sent valid ambient temperature.

18.7.35

12

03

07

23


Heater Tube 2 is removed from Incubator. Sent valid ambient temperature.

18.3.36

12

03

03

24

Transport blocked by cuvette pushers. TRANSPORT BLOCKED BY PUSHER

18.0.37

12

03

00

25

Cuvette Transport can not move because it is blocked by one or more pusher. Initialize pushers.

CUVETTE SENSOR CAN NOT BE Incubator Main Module can not CALIBRATED calibrate sensor. Check hardware. Remove cuvettes from sensor.

18.5.38

12

02

05

26

CUVETTE POSITION IN TRANSPORT ALREADY FULL

Pusher Supply can not insert cuvette because target is already full. Calibrate cuvette sensor. Check cuvettes in transport.

18.5.39

12

02

05

27

CUVETTE LOADER EMPTY

Pusher Supply has no cuvette. Fill up cuvettes.

18.5.40

12

03

05

28

CUVETTE LOADER MOVEMENT FAILURE

Pusher Supply could not move correctly. Mechanics tight or blocked.

18.5.41

12

02

05

29

No cuvette inserted in transport. NO CUVETTE LOADED INTO TRANSPORT

18.2.42

12

02

02

2A

PUSHER CAN NOT MOVE, BECAUSE TRANSPORT IS NOT READY

Pusher Supply inserted no cuvette. Loader movement, but cuvette was not in place. Pusher Incubator Washer can not move because transport is not in ready state. Do not send pusher commands while transport is not ready.

Page 11-84



12

02

04

2A


Pusher Washer Incubator can not move because transport is not in ready state. Do not send pusher commands while transport is not ready.

18.5.42

12

02

05

2A


Pusher Supply can not move because transport is not in ready state. Do not send pusher commands while transport is not ready.

18.3.43

12

01

03

2B

Init position of Incubator changed since last calibration.

Cuvette Transport detected misalignment of init sensor.

INIT POSITION NOT IN TEACHED Calibrate init of transport, PLACE teach incubator belt. 18.5.44

18.5.45

18.8.46

12

12

12

00

05

01

00

2C

2D

08

2E

Cuvette loader is ready to insert cuvette.

Pusher Supply is ready to insert cuvette.

CUVETTE LOADER READY AFTER LOADING

No action.

Cuvette loader is not ready because no cuvette available.

Pusher Supply is not ready because ther is no cuvette.

CUVETTE LOADER HAS NO CUVETTES AFTER LOADING

Check cuvette supply.

CUVETTE SUPPLY EMPTY

Supply Upper Sensor detected upper position empty.

Fill up cuvettes.

No user action. 18.9.46

12

00

09

2E

CUVETTE SUPPLY EMPTY

Supply Lower Sensor detected upper position empty. No user action.

18.8.47

12

00

08

2F

CUVETTE SUPPLY FULL

Supply Upper Sensor detected upper position full. No user action.

18.9.47

12

00

09

2F

CUVETTE SUPPLY FULL

Supply Lower Sensor detected upper position full. No user action.

Table 11.6-1: Incubator, error list


Page 11-85


11.7


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the module. See chapter 2.3 on page 2-8 for an overview of the complete electric circuit of the system.

11.7.1

Incubator CU PCB

Figure 11.7-1: Incubator CU PCB

Page 11-86



Number


J1


J2

Download Connector

J3

Heatfoil 1

J4

Heatfoil 2

J5

Unused

J6

Belt Motor Encoder

J7

Belt Motor

J8

Unused

J9

Unused

J10

Unused

J11

Unused

J12

Incubator Distributor PCB (J1) Table 11.7-1: Connections of the Incubator CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 11.7-2: LEDsof the Incubator CU PCB


Page 11-87


11.7.2

Incubator Distributor PCB

Figure 11.7-2: Incubator Distributor PCB

Page 11-88


11. Incubator Module Number


J1

Incubator CU PCB (J12)

J2

Pusher W-I

J3

Home Sensor Pusher W-I

J4

Pusher I-W

J5

Home Sensor Pusher I-W

J6

Cuvette Supply Motor

J7

Init Sensor Cuvette Supply

J8

Unused

J12

Init Sensor Belt

J13

Sensor Cuvette Transport

J14

Sensor Cuvette Chute Lower

J15

Sensor Cuvette Chute Upper

J16

Temperature Sensor

J17

Unused Table 11.7-3: Connections of the Incubator Distributor PCB


Page 11-89

12. Disposable Tip Module

12 Disposable Tip Module This chapter describes disposable tip module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning disposable tip module are specified,. while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair” and “Adjustment and Calibration”,). In the last section the layout of the switches of disposable tip module is described.

12.1

Safety



•


•


Single-use Single-use tips may not be used repeatedly.


Page 12-1


12.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of disposable tip module.

Figure 12.2-1: Disposable Tip Module

No

Description

1

Left drawer

2

Right drawer

SW1

Left drawer snap lock

SW2

Right drawer snap lock Table 12.2-1: Overview diti module

Page 12-2



12.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the disposable tip module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

12.3.1 12.3.1.1

Replacement of Disposable Tip Drawers Preliminary Steps


Remove Disposable Tip Drawers

1. Pull out drawers (3 and 5) to the stop. 2. Lift stop (4) a bit up and remove drawer.

Figure 12.3-1: Disposable Tip Adapter 12.3.1.3

Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers

1. Push disposable tip drawers (3 and 5) in.


Page 12-3


12.3.2 12.3.2.1

Replacement of Disposable Tip Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12.3.2.2

Remove Disposable Tip Module

1. Unplug connector (1) out of loading bay for sample racks.

Figure 12.3-2: Unplug snap lock out of

Page 12-4


12. Disposable Tip Module 2. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 3. Loose two front screws (2).

Figure 12.3-3: Diti drawer, front view


Page 12-5

12. Disposable Tip Module 4. Loose two rear screws (6).

Figure 12.3-4: Diti drawer, rear view 5. Lift the back of the disposable tip module up to overcome the positioning pin, pull slightly to the front. 6. Lift the complete assembly up and remove it. 7. Unscrew 2 screws (8) and remove handle (7).

Figure 12.3-5: Remove handle

Page 12-6


12. Disposable Tip Module 12.3.2.3

Assemble the Disposable Tip Module

1. Put the disposable tip module (1) onto the screws. Slide it to the holes of the disposable tip drawer till the key holes (2 and 6) snap in and push it carefully to the rear till the positioning pin (3) snaps in. 2. Fasten 4 screws (2 and 6).

Figure 12.3-6: Diti module position 3. Plug the connector of the disposable tip module into the loading bay for sample racks at slot J4. 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 7. Perform the teaching of the DiTi module (see chapter 8.7 on page 8-9).


Page 12-7


12.3.3 12.3.3.1

Replacement of Snap Lock Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 9. Remove Disposable Tip Module (see chapter 12.3.2.2 on page 12-4). 12.3.3.2

Removal of Snap Lock

1. Unplug cable (3) of snap lock. 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of snap lock and remove snap lock.

Figure 12.3-7: Replace snap lock

Page 12-8



Assemble Snap Lock

1. Set new snap lock (1) in and screw two screws (2) loose on. 2. Plug cable (4, black; 5, brown) onto snap lock. 3. Perform snap lock adjustment (see chapter 12.4.1 on page 12-12). 4. When adjustments are successfully done fasten screws (2).

Figure 12.3-8: Snap Lock 5. Assemble the Disposable Tip Module (see chapter 12.3.2.3 on page 12-7). 6. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 7. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Perform the teaching of the DiTi module (see chapter 8.7 on page 8-9).


Page 12-9


12.3.4

Replacement of Drawer Separators

12.3.5

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 9. Remove Disposable Tip Module (see chapter 12.3.2.2 on page 12-4). 12.3.5.1

Removal of Drawer Separators

The notch of the separator faces to the front of the system 1. Unscrew two screws (2) of drawer separators and remove drawer separators.

Figure 12.3-9: Replace drawer separator

Page 12-10



Assemble Drawer Separators

1. Set new drawer separator (1) square in and fasten two screws (2) and a washer. 2. Assemble the Disposable Tip Module (see chapter 12.3.2.3 on page 12-7). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Perform the teaching of the DiTi module (see chapter 8.7 on page 8-9).


Page 12-11


12.4

Check and Adjustment

Fot the teaching of the DiTi Module see chapter 8.7 on page 8-9.

12.4.1

Adjust Snap Lock Switch

1. Push the DiTi drawers in till the closing contacts are hooked in the snap lock (1). 2. Pull the snap lock to the rear (see the white arrow in the figure), so the spring of the snap lock is slightly prestressed. Fasten the screws (2) of the snap lock and closing contacts in that position.

Figure 12.4-1: Adjust snap lock 3. Now check the interaction of snap lock and closing contacts.

12.4.2

Check Switch of Disposable Tip Drawers

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 12.4.2.1

Check Switch of Disposable Tip Drawers

1. Move to Main and Miscellaneous tab. 2. Close the two disposable tip drawers. 3. Push the button Read in the section Sample Sensors. In the dialogue, the message Close must be indicated in the boxes related to Tips Tray sensors left and right. 4. Now pull out the drawers successively and push the button Read afterwards each time. In the pulled out state, the display must change to Open.

Page 12-12



12.5

Troubleshooting

For this module was no trouble shooting written, because it has no moving parts and it uses no circuit board. If a problem occurs with misalignment then reteach DiTi Module (see chapter 8.7 on page 8-9).

12.6


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the module. See chapter 2.3 on page 2-8 for an overview of the electric circuit.

12.6.1

Switch No.

Description

1

Snap Lock

2

Closing contact

3

Black cable

4

Brown cable Table 12.6-1: Snap Lock

Figure 12.6-1: Snap Lock


Page 12-13

13. Washer Module

13 Washer Module This chapter describes washer module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning washer are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Adjustment and Calibration”, “and “Troubleshooting”). In the last section washer PCB layout is described.

13.1

Safety



•


•



Page 13-1

13. Washer Module

13.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the washer module.

Figure 13.2-1: Washer module

Figure 13.2-2: Washer module, rear view

Page 13-2


13. Washer Module No

Description

1

Lift motor

2

Lift left

3

Lift right

4

Aspiration Needle

5

Bubble sensor

6

Init Sensor

7

Washer CU PCB Table 13.2-1: Overview washer

13.2.1

Liquid Distribution Overview

See chapter 2.2 for an over view of the liquid connections.


Page 13-3

13. Washer Module

13.3

Replacement and Repair

This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the washer module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

13.3.1 13.3.1.1

Replacement of Washer Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save location. 6. Remove incubator cover (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 13.3.1.2

Remove Washer Module

1. Unscrew three screws (2) of washer module (1). Do not remove them because they are attached to the washer.

Figure 13.3-1: Washer, removal

If the washer module will be replaced, the bubble sensors must be recalibrated. 2. Lift the washer module carefully up (take care of the tubes, do not bend them) and set it carefully aside.

Page 13-4


13. Washer Module 13.3.1.3

Disassemble Tubes of Washer Module

Do not bend or damage any tubes while disassembling or assembling the washer module. 1. Remove Washer Tubes (see chapter 22.3.1.2 on page 22-8). 2. Unscrew fittings and pull all tubes out of the washer module.

Figure 13.3-2: Washer 3. Lift washer module up and unplug all cables except motor cable (J7) and sensor cable (J8). See section 13.6.1 for the detail of the connections. 13.3.1.4

Assemble Washer Module

Take attention to the tube length. Lay always the longest tubes to the rear side and to the longest distance of the pumps. 1. Plug all cables in, except motor (J7) and sensor cable (J8), not unplugged before. 2. Assemble Washer Tubes (see chapter 22.3.1.3 on page 22-15). 3. Set washer module in and fasten with three screws (2). 4. Assemble the incubator cover (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 5. If necessary (new washer installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 6. If necessary (new washer installed), adjust washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26). 7. If necessary (new washer installed), perform the calibration of bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2 on page 13-28). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 13-5

13. Washer Module

13.3.2 13.3.2.1

Replacement of Washer Motor Lift Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save position. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 13.3.2.2

Remove Washer Motor Lift

1. Unplug motor cable out of washer CU PCB at slot (J7). 2. Loosen two threaded pins (2) of coupling.

Figure 13.3-3: Lift Motor

Page 13-6


13. Washer Module 3. Unscrew three screws (4) of motor.

Figure 13.3-4: Motor

Figure 13.3-5: Motor

4. Unscrew three screws (6) of left side.

Figure 13.3-6: Washer left lift 5. Unscrew screw (7) of left toothed rack (8) and pull left lift (9) carefully out.


Page 13-7

13. Washer Module

Figure 13.3-7: View of left lift 6. Pull drive shaft (5) out of the washer module. 7. Pull washer lift motor (1) out of the washer module.

Page 13-8


13. Washer Module

13.3.2.3

Assemble Washer Motor Lift

1. Set motor in and fix with three screws (4), without fastening them completely. 2. Set left lift (9) in and slide drive shaft (5) into coupling, 3. Fasten left toothed rack (8) with one screw (7). 4. Fasten left lift with three screws (6). 5. Fasten two threaded pins (2). 6. The gear of the drive shaft (5) shall be oriented above the toothed bar. The toothed racks must be parallel oriented, so that all needles got the same height. 7. Insert a paper piece 80g/m2 between motor gear and toothed rack. Press motor gear onto toothed rack and fasten three screws (4). Remove paper. Secure the three screws with lacquer.

Figure 13.3-8: Adjust drive shaft 8. Plug the motor cable into washer CU PCB slot (J7). 9. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 10. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). Check washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26).

Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16)..


Page 13-9

13. Washer Module

13.3.3 13.3.3.1

Replacement of Bearing at left Lift Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove Washer Motor Lift (see chapter 13.3.2.2 on page 13-6). 13.3.3.2

Remove Bearing left Lift

1. Push lift (1) to the upper position. 2. Remove needles (4) out of lift (3). 3. Unscrew lift left (1) screw (5).

Figure 13.3-9: Washer, lift in upper position

Page 13-10


13. Washer Module 4. Unscrew three screws (6) of left lift (1)

Figure 13.3-10: Washer, left lift 5. Remove drive shaft (7).

Figure 13.3-11: Left lift


Page 13-11

13. Washer Module

Careful when removing the plates (8). There is a spring behind the plate to press the slide bearing onto the toothed rack.

6. Unscrew screws (8) and remove plate and spring carefully.

Figure 13.3-12: Left lift 7. Unscrew four screws (9) of left lift (1).



Page 13-12


13. Washer Module 8. Remove slide bearing (10) and toothed rack (11).

Figure 13.3-15: Toothed rack 13.3.3.3

Assemble Bearing left Lift

1. Slide on toothed rack (11) new slide bearings (10) and set it into the plate. 2. Set opposite plate on and fasten with two screws (9). 3. Turn left lift around and fasten two screws (9). 4. Set springs and plates in and fasten with two screws (8). 5. Set left lift (1) in and fasten with three screws (6). 6. Set left and right lift onto an even surface and fasten left lift (1) with screw (5). The toothed racks must be parallel oriented, so that all needles got the same height. 7. Assemble Washer Motor Lift (see chapter 13.3.2.3 on page 13-9). 8. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 9. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). Check washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26).

Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 13-13

13. Washer Module

13.3.4

Replacement of Bearings and/ or Init Sensor at right Lift

13.3.4.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove Washer Motor Lift (see chapter 13.3.2.2 on page 13-6). 13.3.4.2

Remove Bearings and/ or Init Sensor at right Lift

1. Push lift (3) to the upper position. 2. Remove needles (4) out of lift. 3. Unscrew screw (5) of right lift (2).

Figure 13.3-16: Washer, lift in upper position

Page 13-14


13. Washer Module 4. Unplug init sensor (7) out of Washer CU PCB (J8, see chapter 13.6.1 on page 1332) . 5. Unscrew two screws (8) out of right lift (2) and set washer aside.

Figure 13.3-17: Washer, Init sensor 6. Unscrew two screws (9) out of right lift (2).

Figure 13.3-18: Right Lift


Page 13-15

13. Washer Module

Careful when removing the plates (10). There is a spring behind the plate to press the slide bearing onto the toothed rack.

7. Unscrew two screws (10) of spring loaded plates.. 8. Remove plates and springs.

Figure 13.3-19: Right Lift 9. Unscrew two screws (11) out of right lift (2). 10. Lift plate off.

Figure 13.3-20: Right Lift 11. Remove toothed rack (13) with slide bearings (12). 12. If neccessary remove init sensor (14).

Figure 13.3-21: Right Lift

Page 13-16



Assemble Bearings and/ or Init Sensor at right Lift

1. Slide on toothed rack (13) new slide bearings (12) and set it into the plate. 2. If neccessary set init sensor (14) in. 3. Set opposite plate on and fasten with two screws (11). 4. Turn right lift around and fasten two screws (9). 5. Set springs and plates in and fasten with two screws (10). 6. Set right lift (2) in and fasten with two screws (8). 7. Plug init sensor (7) into slot (J8). 8. Set left and right lift onto an even surface and fasten right lift (2) with screw (5). The toothed racks must be parallel oriented, so that all needles got the same height. 9. Assemble Washer Motor Lift (see chapter 13.3.2.3 on page 13-9). 10. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 11. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). Check washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26).



Page 13-17

13. Washer Module

13.3.5 13.3.5.1

Replacement of Bubble Sensor Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save position. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 13.3.5.2

Remove Bubble Sensor

1. The bubble sensors are soldered onto the washer CU PCB. 2. Therefore to change the bubble sensors the circuit board needs to be changed. 3. Remove the Washer CU (see chapter 13.3.7.2 on page 13-24). 13.3.5.3

Assemble Bubble Sensor

1. Assemble Washer CU (see chapter 13.3.7.3 on page 13-25). 2. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 3. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 4. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 5. Perform the calibration of bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2 on page 13-28).

Page 13-18


13. Washer Module

13.3.6 13.3.6.1

Replacement of Washer Guiding Bushings Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 5. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 6. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 13.3.6.2

Remove Washer Guiding Bushings

1. Push lift (1) to the upper position. 2. Remove needles (2) out of lift.

Figure 13.3-22: Washer lift in upper position


Page 13-19

13. Washer Module 3. Unscrew one screw of adjusting plates (3) and remove three plates.

Figure 13.3-23: Remove block

The washer guide bushings are for single use only. 4. Prize the washer guide bushings (4) out of the washer plate.

Figure 13.3-24: Remove bushing guide

Page 13-20



Assemble Washer Guiding Bushings

1. Slide two o-rings (5) onto each washer guide bushing (4).

Figure 13.3-25: Guide Bushing

2. Moisten the washer guide bushing (4) with distilled water and insert into the washer plate. 3. Set the adjusting plates (3) onto the washer plate and screw the screws loose onto the washer guide bushing. 4. Set needles (2) into the lift. 5. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 6. Adjust washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26). 7. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 13-21

13. Washer Module

13.3.7 13.3.7.1

Replacement of Washer CU Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove the system power plug from the right side of the system. 5. Open the top covers. 6. Move pipettor to a save position. 7. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 8. Remove aspiration needle (1) of reader and put it aside.

Figure 13.3-26: Aspiration needle of reader 9. Hang out the tubes of bubble sensors (2) and lay them carefully aside.

Page 13-22


13. Washer Module

Figure 13.3-27: Washer 10. Loose three screws (5) of wash module and set washer carefully aside.


Page 13-23

13. Washer Module

13.3.7.2

Remove the Washer CU

1. Unplug all cables of circuit board washer (3).

Figure 13.3-28: Washer module rear view 2. Unscrew four screws (4) and take circuit board out.

Figure 13.3-29: Washer, remove circuit board

Page 13-24



Assemble Washer CU

1. Thread washer CU circuit board (3) into back of washer module. 2. Fasten circuit board with four screws (4). 3. Plug all cables onto circuit board, (see chapter 13.6.1 on page 13-32). 4. Put washer module in its home position and fix the three screws (5). Insert the tube of the aspiration probes in a straight line into the bubble sensors. 5. Insert tubes into bubble sensors (2). 6. Hang aspiration needle (1) onto reader. 7. Assemble the incubator lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 13.3.7.4

Set Washer CU PCB Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Perform the calibration of bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2 on page 13-28).


Page 13-25

13. Washer Module

13.4



13.4.1

Calibration of Washer

During the execution of the washer height calibration, the system shall load some cuvettes into the washer line. So, before starting the procedure, it is necessary to verify that: •

Ensure that cuvettes are positioned in the cuvette chute and the cuvette loader of the incubator;

•

Make sure that the cuvette filling level of the sorting pot is sufficient.

13.4.1.1

Adjustment of Washer aspiration position

1. Open the dialogue Washer of Service Software and initialize by selecting All Dialogue Controlled Modules 2. Remove WPAP tubes (red tubes) out of adjustment blocks. 3. Loosen the three adjustment blocks (1) on the washer and push them slightly backwards. 4. In Calibration section of Main dialogue, press the button Washer Height Calibration. Wait until the cuvettes are in the washer channel and the washer lift is lowered.

Figure 13.4-1: Washer, in lowered position

Page 13-26


13. Washer Module 5. Loosen the screws of the six clamping stoppers associated to the needles (2). (The springs of the aspiration needles must be compressed)

Figure 13.4-2: Washer, clamping stopper 6. One after the other, the stoppers are now pushed on the lower shoulder of the adjustment blocks. Tighten the screws. Verify that the needles rest on. Be careful when tightening the clamping blocks so that the needles are not distorted.

7. After all clamping stoppers have been adjusted, the window Washer Adjustment finished can be confirmed with OK.

Figure 13.4-3: Washer


Page 13-27

13. Washer Module 8. Push the three adjustment blocks to the front again and secure them so that the needles do not touch the blocks during their upward / downward movement. 13.4.1.2

Calibration of Bubble Sensors

1. Make sure that there is no liquid in front of the sensors. 2. Open the dialogue Washer of Service Software and initialize by selecting All Dialog Controlled Modules. 3. Now enter the sub dialogue Main and Sensor of Washer dialogue and push the button Asp. Calib. in the window Aspiration Sensors. 4. Verify that the calibration values are inside the allowed range. 5. Read current voltages using Read button. 6. In case of instruments mounting a “new” washer PCB, verify that voltages without liquid (V w/o liquid) are inside the specified range. PN Washer PCB

Calibration range

Voltage w/o liquid range

Voltage w/ liquid range

7221310203 (“old”)

500-800

n.a.

n.a.

7221310300 (“new”)

700-800

2.5 V ≤ V w/o liquid ≤ 3.5 V

0 V ≤ V w/ liquid ≤ V w/o liquid – 0.8V

Table 13.4-1: Ranges for washer bubble sensors calibration


“New” washer PCB (PN 7221310300) is available on instruments with SN ≥ 2210000372.

Software version 3.1.5.5. SP4 or higher is required when the “new” washer PCB (PN 7221310300) is installed.

Page 13-28


13. Washer Module

13.5

Troubleshooting


13.5.1

Washer (13h; 19dec): Error List

Washer Module Decimal

19

Hexadecimal

13

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in (see chapter 6.6.4 on page 6-20). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5). For decoding of error code for user and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

Cause:

Corrective Action:

Error Code

In hexadecimal Sub Unit

Decimal Event ID

Severity

Service Software

Device ID

User Software

19.0.0

13

00

00

00

No error

Washer executed command with no error.

19.0.1

13

03

00

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Washer received a command which can only be executed after initialization. Send init-command

19.0.2

13

03

00

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Washer received a unknown command. Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

19.0.3

13

03

00

03


Washer received a parameter value out of range. Check parameter range.


Page 13-29

13. Washer Module 19.0.4

19.0.5

13

13

02

03

00

00

04

05

Write failure of permanent parameter.

Washer had a write failure of permanent parameter.


Exchange Washer PCB.

Read failure of permanent parameter.

Washer had a read failure of permanent parameter and is using default values.

EEPROM READ

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange Washer PCB. 19.0.6

19.0.7

13

13

03

01

00

00

06

07

Supply voltage out of range (%1 mV).

Washer detected supply voltage out of range.


•



•


•

check power supply

•


•

exchange Washer PCB

Supply voltage back in range (%1 mV).

Washer detected supply voltage back in range

VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE 19.0.8

19.0.9

13

13

03

01

00

00

08

09

Thermal or short circuit protection of driver.

Washer detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver.



Position reached several retries.

Washer needed several retries to reach position.

POSITIONING PROBLEM

No action. 19.0.10

13

03

00

0A

DRIVE NOT MOVING

Washer could not reach target.

TARGET NOT REACHED


19.0.11

13

03

00

0B


19.0.12

13

03

00

0C

Error during self test. SELFTEST ERROR

Washer terminated command before completion. No action. Washer found an error during self test. Exchange module.

19.0.13

13

03

00

0D


19.0.14

13

03

00

0E


Washer received a command with a parameter value which is out of range. Check syntax / sequence/ value. Washer can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

Page 13-30


13. Washer Module 19.0.15

13

03

00

0F


Washer received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

19.0.16

13

03

00

10

Command execution time-out EXECUTION TIMEOUT

Washer reached a time-out during command execution. Restart module

19.0.17

13

03

00

11


Washer received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

19.0.18

13

03

00

12


Washer received an invalid parameter index. Set correct parameter index. Select correct parameter index.

19.0.19

19.0.20

13

13

03

03

00

00

13

14

Access to parameter not allowed.

Washer received an unauthorized access to parameter.


Set authorization.

Wrong parameter unlock code.

Washer received a wrong parameter unlock code.

PARAMETER WRONG CODE INVA AUTHORIZATION 19.0.21

19.0.22

13

13

03

03

00

00

15

16


Illegal parameter type in command.

Washer received a command with illegal parameter type.



ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH IN COMMAND

Washer received a command with illegal parameter length. Enter parameter in correct length.

19.0.32

13

01

00

20

ASPIRATION DETECTION FAILURE

Washer detected wrong aspiration volume. Check aspiration sensors, needles, tubes.

19.0.33

13

03

00

21

ASPIRATION SENSOR FAILED_ CALIBRATION ERROR

Washer could not calibrate aspiration sensor. Check correct position of tube in aspiration sensor. Recalibrate aspiration sensors.

19.0.34

13

02

00

22

SET ASPIRATION DETECTION Washer could not calibrate SENSOR VOLTAGE aspiration sensor. Exchange Washer PCB. Table 13.5-1: Washer, error list


Page 13-31

13. Washer Module

13.6


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the washer module. See chapter 2.3 on page 2-8 for an overview of the complete electric circuit of the system.

13.6.1

Washer CU PCB

Figure 13.6-1: Washer CU PCB

Number


J1


J2

Download Connector

J3

WDVB

J4

Unused

J5

Unused

J6

WPAP

J7

Washer Lift Motor

J8

Init Sensor Washer Lift

J12

Unused

J13

Unused Table 13.6-1: Connections of the Washer CU PCB

Page 13-32


13. Washer Module

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 13.6-2: LEDs of the Washer CU PCB

Number

Description

IC6, IC9, Bubble Sensors IC12, IC17, IC20, IC23, IC24 Table 13.6-3: Sensors of the Washer CU PCB


Page 13-33

14. Reader Module

14 Reader Module This chapter describes reader module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning reader are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Adjustment and Calibration”, “Check and Verification” and Troubleshooting’). In the last section reader PCB layout is described.

14.1

Safety



•


•



Page 14-1

14. Reader Module

14.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of reader module.

Figure 14.2-1: Reader module

No

Description

1

Reader Module

2

Reader Module Lid

3

Blue LED

4

Needle with cap Table 14.2-1: Overview Reader

Page 14-2


14. Reader Module

Figure 14.2-2: Reader, rear view

No

Description

5

Shutter Motor

6

Cover PMT Module Table 14.2-2: Overview Reader, rear view


Page 14-3

14. Reader Module

14.2.1


See chapter 2.2 on page 2-7 for an over view of the complete liquid distribution.

Page 14-4


14. Reader Module

14.3

Replacements and Repairs

This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the Reader. After several repair work, it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

14.3.1 14.3.1.1

Replacement of Reader Lid Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 14.3.1.2

Remove Reader Lid

1. Move the lift to its upper end. 2. Remove needle (2) carefully out of reader (1).


Page 14-5

14. Reader Module

Figure 14.3-1: Reader 3. Unscrew three screws (3) of Reader (1). 4. Hang out top shutter mechanism (4) of Reader lid (1), lift Reader lid up and put it aside.

Page 14-6


14. Reader Module

Figure 14.3-2: Reader, remove

Figure 14.3-3: Reader removed


Page 14-7

14. Reader Module 14.3.1.3

Remove Starter Pump Tubes from Reader Lid

1. Unscrew two screws of each fitting (5) and (6).

Figure 14.3-4: Reader Lid, remove starter tubes 14.3.1.4

Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes

1. Insert Reader lid (1) onto Reader body. 2. Hang top shutter Reader (4) of Reader lid (1) into the Reader lift. 3. Fasten three screws (3) of Reader lid (1). 4. Fasten fittings (5) and (6) to Reader lid (1). 5. If necessary (new reader lid installed), perform the calibration of chamber close position (see chapter 14.4.3.3 on page 14-45). Starter Pump

Fittings on Reader

Left side pump (Starter Pump 2)

Fitting 5

Right side pump (Starter Pump 1)

Fitting 6

Table 14.3-1: Starter tube fittings

The position of the starter heating tubes can change, when the Reader is replaced. This could lead to a collision with the pipettor arm.

If necessary (new reader lid installed), once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 14-8


14. Reader Module

14.3.2 14.3.2.1

Replacement of Spindle Motor and Metal Plate Preliminary Steps


Remove Spindle Motor and Metal Plate

1. Unplug motor connector (J3) and sensor connector (J5) out of Reader CU PCB.

Figure 14.3-5: View of Reader CU PCB


Page 14-9

14. Reader Module 2. Unscrew one set screw (3) of flexible coupling (4). 3. Loosen two screws (2) of metal plate. 14.3.2.3

Assemble Spindle Motor and Metal Plate

1. Fasten two screws (2) of metal plate. 2. Perform mechanical adjustment of the spindle (see chapter 14.4.1 on page 14-40). 3. Connect motor connector (J3) and sensor connector (J5) onto Reader CU PCB. 4. Check Calibration of the Spindle Position (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42).

Page 14-10


14. Reader Module

14.3.3 14.3.3.1

Replacement of Spindle Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 14.3.3.2

Remove Spindle

1. Loosen set screw (2) of coupling (3).

Figure 14.3-6: Remove spindle


Page 14-11

14. Reader Module 2. Unscrew screw (4). 3. Pull spindle (1) carefully out and slide bushing (5) off.

Figure 14.3-7: Assemble spindle 14.3.3.3

Assemble Spindle

1. Slide bushing (5) onto new spindle (1) 2. Slide spindle into coupling (3) and set bushing with spindle into the incubator. 3. Check if the spindle pin is free to move through the middle of the sensor. 4. Faste screw (4). 5. Fasten set screw (2) of coupling (3). 6. Perform Calibration of the Spindle Position (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42). 7. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 8. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 9. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).

Page 14-12


14. Reader Module

14.3.4 14.3.4.1

Replacement of Spindle Sensor Home Preliminary Steps


Remove Spindle Sensor Home

1. Unplug sensor connector (J5) of Reader CU PCB.

Figure 14.3-8: View of Reader CU PCB


Page 14-13

14. Reader Module 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of sensor spindle home (1).

Figure 14.3-9: Remove spindle sensor home 14.3.4.3

Assemble Spindle Sensor Home

1. Connect sensor connector (J5) onto Reader. 2. Fasten sensor (1) with two screws (2). 3. Check if the spindle PIN (3) is moving free through the middle of the sensor.

Page 14-14


14. Reader Module

14.3.5 14.3.5.1

Replacement of Reader Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 8. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 9. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 14.3.5.2

Remove Reader Module

1. Unplug CAN-Cable (J2). 2. Unscrew four screws (2) of Reader module (1).

Figure 14.3-10: Reader module 3. Move the lift to its down position.


Page 14-15

14. Reader Module 4. Lift the Reader module (1) carefully up, bend over to the back and pull it slowly up.

Figure 14.3-11: Reader module

Page 14-16



Assemble Reader Module

1. Insert the Reader module (1) into the positioning pins and fasten with four screws (2).

Figure 14.3-12: Reader module 2. Plug CAN- cable (J2) in. 3. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 4. Perform the calibration of spindle position (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42) 5. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 6. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 7. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 8. If necessary (new reader installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 9. If necessary (new reader installed), perform the setting of PMT module (see chapter 14.4.3.1 on page 14-44). 10. If necessary (new reader and/ or reader lid installed), perform the calibration of the chamber close position (see chapter 14.4.3.3 on page 14-45). If necessary (new reader and/ or reader lid installed), once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 14-17

14. Reader Module

14.3.6 14.3.6.1

Replacement of Toothed Rack Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 8. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 9. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11) 10. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 14.3.6.2

Remove Toothed Rack

1. Unscrew screw (2) of toothed rack (3) from needle holder. 2. Unscrew toothed rack holders (4). 3. Remove toothed rack (3).

Figure 14.3-13: Reader Page 14-18



Assemble Toothed Rack

1. Turn the toothed wheel (5) clockwise to the limit stop (see white arrow of Figure 14.3-14). 2. Set toothed rack (3) into the guiding bearings and push toothed rack onto toothed wheel. 3. Push the guiding rods onto the toothed rack to its end stop. If this is not possible, move the toothed rack one tooth down onto the toothed wheel. 4. Fasten the toothed rack holders (4).

5

Figure 14.3-14: Toothed rack adjustment

Be aware of the toothed rack orientation. 5. Fasten toothed rack onto the needle holder with one screw (2). 6. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 7. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 8. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 9. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 10. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 11. Check the chamber close position (see chapter 14.4.3.3 on page 14-45) Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 14-19

14. Reader Module

14.3.7 14.3.7.1

Replacement of PMT Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 8. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 9. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 10. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 11. Remove the Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.3.9.2 on page 14-33). 14.3.7.2

Remove PMT Module

Do not expose the PMT module to the sun light, cover lens of PMT could be damaged by light exposure. Cover PMT with a cover or a towel. 1. Unscrew two screws (8) of cover (2) and remove PMT module (9) carefully.

Figure 14.3-15: PMT module with cover

Page 14-20



Assemble PMT Module

Do not remove PMT cover before mounting into the Reader. Do not expose the PMT module to the sun light, cover lens of PMT could be damaged by light exposure. 1. Take note of the HV value handwritten onto the PMT module, in the following it will be needed for the setting.

Figure 14.3-16: HV Parameter written onto PMT module 2. Fasten new PMT module (9) with two screws (8) onto cover (2).

Figure 14.3-17: PMT module with cover


Page 14-21

14. Reader Module 3. Plug Reader circuit board (5) into the PMT circuit board and fasten circuit board with two screws (6). (take care that all pins of the connector are engaged)

Figure 14.3-18: Mounting Reader CU PCB

Page 14-22


14. Reader Module 4. Shortly before the PMT module is assembled remove PMT cover (10) 5. Slight the PMT module (9) into the Reader and fasten with the screw (3) and two threaded pins (4).

Figure 14.3-19: Assemble PMT 6. Complete the Assemble the Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.3.9.3 on page 14-36). 7. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 8. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 9. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 10. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 11. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 12. In case of a new PMT, perform the parameter setting for the new PMT (see chapter 14.4.3.1 on page 14-44).

This adjustment is important for a replaced PMT module.



Page 14-23

14. Reader Module

14.3.8

Replacement of Lift Motor and/ or Lift Sensor and/ or inner parts of Reader

14.3.8.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove the reader aspiration needle. 8. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 9. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 10. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11) 11. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 14.3.8.2

Remove of Lift Motor and/or Lift Sensor and/ or inner parts of Reader

1. Unscrew screw (17) of the toothed rack (18) from needle holder

Figure 14.3-20: Upper screw of toothed rack 2. Unplug Blue LED connector (J9) of Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7.1 on page 14-59).

Page 14-24


14. Reader Module 3. Unscrew both screws (19) of the reader back cover (20).

Figure 14.3-21: Reader back cover 4. Remove the reader back cover (20). 5. Unscrew screws (13) of the driving disc (14).

Figure 14.3-22: Driving disc


Page 14-25

14. Reader Module 6. Remove the slide bearing (12) from the driving pin.

Figure 14.3-23: Slide bearing 7. Remove the vertical plate (11) from the housing.

Figure 14.3-24: Vertical plate

Page 14-26


14. Reader Module 8. Remove the upper and the lower bearing (10 + 9), and the shutter shield (7).

Figure 14.3-25: Shutter shield 9. Remove the bearing (5) from the steering wheel (2).

Figure 14.3-26: Steering wheel


Page 14-27

14. Reader Module 10. Loose the set screw (3) and remove the Steering wheel (2).

Figure 14.3-27: Steering wheel Lift Motor

11. If desired to remove the lift motor (21): •

Unplug lift motor connector (J4) of Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7.1 on page 1459).

•

Unscrew the four screws (22).

•

Remove the lift motor (21)

Figure 14.3-28: Shutter motor and shutter sensor Lift Sensor

Page 14-28

12. If desired to remove the lift sensor (23): •

Unplug lift sensor connector (J6) of Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7.1 on page 14-59).

•

Unscrew the screw (24).

•

Remove the lift sensor (23)

•

Remove space plate (25) of lift sensor.


14. Reader Module

Figure 14.3-29: Lift Sensor


Page 14-29

14. Reader Module

14.3.8.3

Assembly of Lift Motor and/or Lift Sensor and/ or inner parts of Reader

Lift Sensor

1. If desired to assemble the lift sensor (23): •

Install the space plate (25)

Be aware that there is only one spacer plate (25) set in.

Lift Motor

Assembly

•

Install the lift sensor (23)

•

Tighten the screw (24).

•

Plug the lift sensor connector (J6) onto Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7.1 on page 14-59).

2. If desired to assemble the lift motor (21): •

Install the lift motor (21)

•

Tighten the four screws (22).

•

Plug the lift motor connector (J4) onto Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7.1 on page 14-59).

3. The steering wheel (2) shall be pushed on the motor shaft and fixed by the set screw (3). The distance from the bottom surface of the wheel to the chassis is 0.5 mm ±0.1 mm. 4. Insert the bearing (5) into the spiral of the steering wheel (2). 5. The shutter shield (7) is pushed in the upper cut-out of the measuring chamber and the driving pin (6) is inserted in the bearing (5) of the steering wheel (see lines in the figure).

Figure 14.3-30: Install shutter shield

Page 14-30


14. Reader Module 6. Install at first the lower bearing (9) and after that the upper bearing (10). Note the orientations! •

The flange of the lower bearing (9) is above.

•

The flange of the lower bearing (10) is below.

Figure 14.3-31: Lower and upper bearing 7. Set the vertical plate (11) into the housing. 8. Set the slide bearing (12) into the driving pin of the vertical plate (11). 9. Set the driving disc (14) onto the axle (16) (the driving disc sits completely on the motor shaft) and fasten it with screw (13). 10. Check for the presence of the additional seal (26) on top of the LED window. When setting the driving disc onto the shaft, it has to be taken care of that the slide bearing sits correctly in the grove. Add a drop of screw lock lacquer green. 11. Close the reader lid (20). The retainer of the lift (21) must be fit into the driving disc notch (see the red arrow in the figure).

Figure 14.3-32: Retainer of the lift and driving disc


Page 14-31

14. Reader Module 12. Tighten both screws (19) of the reader lid (20). 13. Plug Blue LED connector (J9) onto Reader CU PCB (see chapter 14.7.1 on page 14-59). 14. Tighten screw (17) of the toothed rack (18) from needle holder. 15. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 16. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 17. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 18. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 19. Remount the reader aspiration needle. 20. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 21. Check the chamber close position (see chapter 14.4.3.3 on page 14-45). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 14-32


14. Reader Module

14.3.9 14.3.9.1

Replacement of Reader CU PCB Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 8. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 9. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 10. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15). 14.3.9.2

Remove the Reader CU PCB

1. Unplug motor cable (B (J4)), sensor cable (C (J6)), blue LED (A(J9)).

Figure 14.3-33: Reader circuit board


Page 14-33

14. Reader Module 2. Unscrew one screw (3) of cover (2). 3. Loosen two threaded pins (4). 4. Remove cover with PMT module.

Figure 14.3-34: Reader

Page 14-34


14. Reader Module

Do not expose the PMT module to the sun light, cover lens of PMT could be damaged by light exposure. Cover PMT with a cover or a towel. 5. Unscrew two screws (6) of circuit board. (5). 6. Pull circuit board (5) carefully out of the PMT circuit board connector (7).

Figure 14.3-35: PMT module, without cover


Page 14-35


Assemble the Reader CU PCB

Do not remove PMT cover before mounting into the Reader. Do not expose the PMT module to the sun light, cover lens of PMT could be damaged by light exposure. 1. Take note of the HV value handwritten onto the PMT module, in the following it will be needed for the setting.

Figure 14.3-36: HV Parameter written onto PMT module 1. Plug Reader circuit board (5) into the PMT circuit board and fasten circuit board with two screws (6). (take care that all pins of the connector (7) are engaged).

Figure 14.3-37: Mounting Reader CU PCB

Page 14-36


14. Reader Module 2. Slight the PMT module (9) into the Reader and fasten with screw (3) and two threaded pins (4).

Figure 14.3-38: Assemble PMT 3. Plug motor cable (B (slot J4)) sensor cable (C (slot J6)) and blue LED (A (slot J9) onto Reader circuit board. 4. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 5. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 6. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 7. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 8. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4). 14.3.9.4

Set Measurement CU PCB Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Perform the setting of PMT module (see chapter 14.4.3.1 on page 14-44). 3. Perform the calibration of spindle position (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42). 4. Perform the calibration of the chamber close position (see chapter 14.4.3.3 on page 14-45). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 14-37

14. Reader Module

14.3.10 14.3.10.1

Replacement of Spindle Drive Coupling Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 7. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 8. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 9. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 14.3.10.2

Remove Drive Coupling

1. Unscrew set screw (2) of drive coupling (1) and slide it out.

Figure 14.3-39: Drive coupling

Page 14-38



Assemble Drive Coupling

1. Slide drive coupling (1) onto motor shaft. 2. Fasten one screw (2) at drive coupling (1). 3. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 4. Perform the calibration of spindle position (see chapter 14.4.2 on page 14-42) 5. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 6. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 7. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 14-39

14. Reader Module

14.4



14.4.1

Mechanical Adjustment of Spindle

Adjust the flange of the spindle only, by exchanging the flange or when the complete spindle drive were exchanged. 1. Starting Point: new spindle motor and metal plate are mounted or flange was replaced. 2. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 3. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 4. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 5. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 6. Loose two screws (4) of flange (3).

Figure 14.4-1: Loose flange

Page 14-40


14. Reader Module 7. Insert spindle adjustment tool (5) and assemble reader lid (6).

Figure 14.4-2: Spindle flange adjustment 8. Move the flange until the perfect alignment of the tool and the metal plate is verified. 9. Fasten two screws (4) of flange (3). 10. Disassemble reader lid (6) and remove the adjustment tool (5) from the reader line. 11. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 12. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 13. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 14. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 14-41

14. Reader Module

14.4.2

Calibration of the Spindle Position

1. Open the main dialogue Reader of Service Software and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 2. Move to Parameter dialogue, set Code to 1 and press Set button. 3. At the Teach dialogue, in Left/Right row of Move Axis to Position/ Get Stored Teach Position window, click onto Get button to read out the spindle position. 4. Click onto Move button to drive the spindle to that position. 5. Remove the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 6. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4) out of the incubator (set the washer aside and do not remove the tubes). 7. Remove the downholder (2).

Figure 14.4-3: Spindle

Page 14-42


14. Reader Module 8. Insert a cuvette (3) into the transfer position of washer / incubator in the wash channel . Push the cuvette by hand complete to the right onto the spindle.

Figure 14.4-4: Cuvette in position 9. Set step size “5” in Teach dialogue and, using the dedicated arrow buttons, move the cuvette as far as it sits exactly in the middle of the pusher port.

Figure 14.4-5: Calibration of the spindle position 10. Save the taught position pressing onto the Save button available in Save Current Axis Position window. The ascertained position is to be saved definitively by double clicking onto Overwrite NVM button. - Typical Setting: 20 – 200 11. Assemble the downholder (2). 12. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 13. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 14-43

14. Reader Module

14.4.3

Calibrations of Reader Module

1. Open the main dialogue Reader of Service Software and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 14.4.3.1

In case of a new PMT

1. Move to Parameter dialogue, set Code to 1 and press Set button. 2. At the Parameter dialogue, using Predefined Parameter Shortlist, chose out High Voltage Reference (V/2). (This is Parameter No.: 100). 3. Press Read button, in order to read the parameter. 4. Enter the value handwritten onto the PMT module into the New Value field.

Figure 14.4-6: HV Parameter written onto PMT module 5. Press Write button and then save the entered value by clicking onto Overwrite button in Non-Volatile Memory field. 6. Go to Main and Measure tab and press the Read button in High Voltage panel to read out the High Voltage level. 14.4.3.2

Measurement of Dark Count

1. Press the Chamber Close Position in Shutter Movement window of Main dialogue. 2. Click onto the Read button at the Dark Counts field (Main and Measure tab) to read out the value. 3. Press the Down button in the Main dialogue at the Shutter Movement window. 4. Click again onto Read button at the Dark Counts field to read out the value. The maximum difference between the 2 detected values shall not exceed 100.

Page 14-44


14. Reader Module Description

Target

HV PMT (setting of parameter 100)

1800 - 2300

High Voltage Read Out

900 - 1200

Adjustment chamber close position

600 - 660

Measurement Dark Counts

10 - 200

Chamber close position. Measurement Dark Counts

10 - 200

Chamber down position. Difference between chamber close and shutter down positions.

max. 100

Table 14.4-1: Settings Reader 14.4.3.3

Calibration of the chamber close position

1. Move to Parameter dialogue, set Code to 1 and press Set button. 2. At the Teach dialogue, in Up/Down row of Move Axis to Position/ Get Stored Teach Position window, click onto Get button to read out the Reader position. Click onto Move button to drive the Reader to that position.

Figure 14.4-7: Reader Module 3. At Teach dialogue, fix step size “5” and, using up/ down arrow buttons, move the gear rack (1). Position the bow handle of the gear rack (2) so that the hung-in shutter (3) will not move while going downwards. Save this position by clicking onto the Save button available in Save Current Axis Position window.. The ascertained position is to be saved by double clicking onto Overwrite NVM.


Page 14-45

14. Reader Module

14.5



14.5.1

Temperature check Starter Reagent Tube

1. Check of starter reagent temperature is described in chapter 10.4.5.

Page 14-46


14. Reader Module

14.6

Troubleshooting


14.6.1

Reader (14h; 20dec): Error List

Reader Module Decimal

20

Hexadecimal

14

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes Reader (see chapter 6.6.5 on page 6-21). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5). For decoding of error code for user and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

Service Software

Decimal

In hexadecimal

20.0.0

14 00 00 00

NO ERROR

Luminometer Main Subassembly has no error. Message

20.1.0

14 00 01 00

NO ERROR

Luminometer Shutter and Aspiration Probe Drive has no error.

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Sub Unit

Cause:

Severity

Event ID

Device ID

User Software

Message 20.2.0

14 00 02 00

NO ERROR

Luminometer Transport Drive has no Error. Message.

20.3.0

14 00 03 00

NO ERROR

Luminometer Data transmission Subunit has no error. Message

20.4.0

14 00 04 00

Starter Reagent pump executed command with no error.

Starter Reagent pump A2 has no error. Message

20.5.0

14 00 05 00

Starter Reagent pump executed command with no error.


Starter Reagent pump B2 has no error. Message.

Page 14-47

14. Reader Module 20.0.1

14 03 00 01

NOT INITIALIZED

Luminometer Main Subassembly is not initialized. Send init-command

20.1.1

14 03 01 01

NOT INITIALIZED

Luminometer Shutter and Aspiration Probe Drive is not initialized. Send init-command

20.2.1

14 03 02 01

NOT INITIALIZED

Luminometer Transport Drive is not initialized. Send init-command

20.3.1

14 03 03 01

NOT INITIALIZED

Luminometer Data transmission Subunit is not initialized. Send init-command

20.4.1

20.5.1

20.0.2

14 03 04 01

14 03 05 01

14 03 00 02

Starter Reagent pump is not initialized.

Starter Reagent pump A2 is not initialized.

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

Starter Reagent pump is not initialized.

Starter Reagent pump B2 is not initialized

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Luminometer Main Subassembly received an unknown command. Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

20.1.2

14 03 01 02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Luminometer Shutter and Aspiration Probe Drive received an unknown command. Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

20.2.2

14 03 02 02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Luminometer Transport Drive received an unknown command. Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

20.3.2

14 03 03 02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Luminometer Data transmission Subunit received an unknown command. Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

20.4.2

14 03 04 02

Starter Reagent pump received an unknown command.

Starter Reagent pump A2 pump received an unknown command.

UNKNOWN COMMAND


Page 14-48



14 03 05 02

Starter Reagent pump received an unknown command.

Starter Reagent pump B2 pump received an unknown command.

UNKNOWN COMMAND


20.0.3

14 03 00 03


Luminometer received a parameter value out of range. Check parameter range.

20.4.3

14 03 04 03

Starter Reagent pump received a parameter value out of range

Starter Reagent pump A2 received a parameter value out of range. Check parameter range.

20.5.3

14 03 05 03

Starter Reagent pump received a parameter value out of range

Starter Reagent B2 pump received a parameter value out of range. Check parameter range.

20.0.4

14 02 00 04

Write failure of permanent parameter Luminometer had a write failure of permanent parameter. Exchange Reader PCB.

20.4.4

14 02 04 04

Starter Reagent pump had a write failure of permanent parameter.

Starter Reagent pump A2 had a write failure of permanent parameter. Exchange module .

20.5.4

14 02 05 04

Starter Reagent pump had a write failure of permanent parameter.

Starter Reagent pump B2 had a write failure of permanent parameter. Exchange module.

20.0.5

14 03 00 05


Luminometer had a read failure of permanent parameter and is using default values. Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange Reader PCB.

20.4.5

14 03 04 05

Starter Reagent pump had a read failure of permanent parameter.

Starter Reagent pump A2 had a read failure of permanent parameter and is using default values. Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module.

20.5.5

14 03 05 05

Starter Reagent pump had a read failure of permanent parameter.

Starter Reagent pump B2 had a read failure of permanent parameter and is using default values. Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module.


Page 14-49


20.4.6

14 03 00 06

14 03 04 06

Supply voltage CHN 1 out of range (%1 V).

Luminometer detected supply voltage out of range.


•


•


•

check power supply

•


•

exchange Reader PCB

Starter Reagent pump supply voltage Starter Reagent pump A2 detected out of range (%1 mV). supply voltage out of range. VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE

20.5.6

14 03 05 06

14 01 00 07


•


•

check power supply

•


•

exchange module

Starter Reagent pump supply voltage Starter Reagent pump B2 detected out of range (%1 mV). supply voltage out of range. VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE

20.0.7

•

Supply voltage CHN 1 back in range (%1 V).

•


•


•

check power supply

•


•

exchange module

Luminometer detected supply voltage back in range.


14 01 04 07

Starter Reagent pump supply voltage Starter Reagent pump A2 detected back in range (%1 mV). supply voltage back in range. VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

20.5.7

14 01 05 07

Starter Reagent pump supply voltage Starter Reagent pump B2 detected back in range (%1 mV). supply voltage back in range. VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

20.0.8

14 03 00 08

Thermal or short circuit protection of driver. THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER TSD PROTECTION

20.1.8

14 03 01 08


Page 14-50

Luminometer Main Subassembly detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow. Luminometer Shutter and Aspiration Probe Drive detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow.



14 03 02 08


20.3.8

14 03 03 08


20.4.8

14 03 04 08

Starter Reagent pump has a thermal or short circuit protection of driver. THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER TSD PROTECTION

20.5.8

14 03 05 08

Starter Reagent pump has a thermal or short circuit protection of driver. THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER TSD PROTECTION

20.0.9

14 01 00 09


20.1.9

14 01 01 09


20.2.9

14 01 02 09


20.3.9

14 01 03 09


20.4.9

14 01 04 09

Starter Reagent pump had to retry positioning several times. POSITIONING PROBLEM

20.5.9

14 01 05 09

Starter Reagent pump had to retry positioning several times. POSITIONING PROBLEM

20.0.10

14 03 00 0A


Luminometer Transport Drive detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow. Luminometer Data transmission Subunit detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow. Starter Reagent pump A2 detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow. Starter Reagent pump B2 detected thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Check cables / airflow. Luminometer Main Subassembly needed several retries to reach position. Luminometer shutter and aspiration probe drive needed several retries to reach position. Luminometer transport drive needed several retries to reach position. Luminometer Data transmission Subunit needed several retries to reach position. Starter Reagent pump A2 drive needed several retries to reach position. Starter Reagent pump B2 drive needed several retries to reach position. Luminometer main subassembly could not reach target position. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.


Page 14-51


14 03 01 0A


Luminometer shutter and aspiration probe drive could not reach target position. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

20.2.10

14 03 02 0A


Luminometer transport drive could not reach target position. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

20.3.10

14 03 03 0A


Luminometer Data transmission Subunit could not reach target position. Drive did not move properly. Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

20.4.10

14 03 04 0A

Starter Reagent pump did not reach target.

Starter Reagent pump A2 could not reach target position.

DRIVE NOT MOVING


20.5.10

14 03 05 0A

Starter Reagent pump did not reach target.

Starter Reagent pump B2 could not reach target position.

DRIVE NOT MOVING


20.4.11

14 03 04 0B

Starter Reagent pump terminated command.

Starter Reagent pump A2 terminated command before completion.

20.5.11

14 03 05 0B

Starter Reagent pump terminated command.

Starter Reagent pump B2 terminated command before completion.

20.0.12

14 03 00 0C

Error during self test.

Luminometer detect an error during self test.

SELFTEST ERROR

Exchange Reader PCB. 20.4.12

14 03 04 0C

Starter Reagent pump found an error Starter Reagent pump A2 found an during self test. error during self test. SELFTEST ERROR

20.5.12

20.0.13

Page 14-52

14 03 05 0C

14 03 00 0D

Exchange module.

Starter Reagent pump found an error Starter Reagent pump B2 found an during self test. error during self test. SELFTEST ERROR

Exchange module.


Luminometer main subassembly received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.



14 03 01 0D


Luminometer shutter an aspiration probe drive received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.

20.2.13

14 03 02 0D


Luminometer transport drive received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.

20.3.13

14 03 03 0D


Luminometer Data transmission Subunit received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.

20.4.13

14 03 04 0D

Starter Reagent pump received a command parameter value out of range.

Starter Reagent pump A2 received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.

20.5.13

14 03 05 0D

Starter Reagent pump received a command parameter value out of range

Starter Reagent pump B2 received a command with a parameter value which is out of range.

20.0.14

14 03 00 0E


Luminometer main subassembly can not execute command during actual state.

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy. 20.1.14

14 03 01 0E


Luminometer shutter and aspiration probe drive can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

20.2.14

14 03 02 0E


Luminometer transport drive can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

20.3.14

14 03 03 0E


Luminometer Data transmission Subunit can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

20.4.14

14 03 04 0E

Starter Reagent pump is unable to execute command. COMMAND EXECUTION

Starter Reagent pump A2 can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

20.5.14

14 03 05 0E

Starter Reagent pump is unable to execute command. COMMAND EXECUTION

Starter Reagent pump B2 can not execute command during actual state. Unit busy.

20.0.15

14 03 00 0F


Luminometer main subassembly received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.


Page 14-53


14 03 01 0F


Luminometer shutter and aspiration probe drive received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

20.2.15

14 03 02 0F


Luminometer transport drive received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

20.3.15

14 03 03 0F


Luminometer Data transmission Subunit received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

20.4.15

14 03 04 0F

Starter Reagent pump received a command which is not implemented.

Starter Reagent pump A2 received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

20.5.15

14 03 05 0F

Starter Reagent pump received a command which is not implemented.

Starter Reagent pump B2 received a command which is not implemented. Do not try again.

20.0.16

14 03 00 10

Command execution time-out.

Luminometer main subassembly reached a time-out during command execution.

20.1.16

14 03 01 10


Luminometer shutter an aspiration probe drive reached a time-out during command execution.

20.2.16

14 03 02 10


Luminometer transport drive reached a time-out during command execution.

20.3.16

14 03 03 10


Luminometer Data Transmission Subunit reached a time-out during command execution.

20.4.16

14 03 04 10

Starter Reagent pump reached a time-out during command execution.

Starter Reagent pump A2 reached a time-out during command execution.

20.5.16

14 03 05 10

Starter Reagent pump reached a time-out during command execution

Starter Reagent pump B2 reached a time-out during command execution.

20.0.17

14 03 00 11

Illegal parameter type definition

Luminometer main subassembly received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

20.1.17

14 03 01 11


Luminometer shutter and aspiration probe drive received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

Page 14-54



14 03 02 11


Luminometer transport received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

20.3.17

14 03 03 11


Luminometer Data Transmission Subunit received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

20.4.17

14 03 04 11

Starter Reagent pump received an illegal parameter type definition.

Starter Reagent pump A2 received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

20.5.17

14 03 05 11

Starter Reagent pump received an illegal parameter type definition.

Starter Reagent pump B2 received an illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

20.0.18

14 03 00 12


Luminometer received an invalid parameter index. Set correct parameter index. Select correct parameter index.

20.4.18

14 03 00 12

Starter Reagent pump received an invalid parameter index.

Starter Reagent pump A2 received an invalid parameter index.

PARAMETER NOT FOUND

Set correct parameter index. Select correct parameter index.

20.5.18

14 03 00 12

Starter Reagent pump received an invalid parameter index.

Starter Reagent pump B2 received an invalid parameter index.

PARAMETER NOT FOUND


20.0.19

14 03 00 13


Luminometer received an unauthorized access to parameter. Set authorization.

20.4.19

14 03 04 13

Starter Reagent pump received an unauthorized access to parameter. PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED

Starter Reagent pump A2 received an unauthorized access to parameter. Set authorization.

20.5.19

14 03 05 13

Starter Reagent pump received an unauthorized access to parameter. PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED

Starter Reagent pump B2 received an unauthorized access to parameter. Set authorization.


Page 14-55


14 03 00 14


20.4.20

14 03 04 14

Luminometer received a wrong parameter unlock code. Enter valid access code.

Starter Reagent pump received a wrong parameter unlock code.

Starter Reagent pump A1 received a wrong parameter unlock code.




14 03 05 14

Starter Reagent pump received a wrong parameter unlock code.

Starter Reagent pump B2 received a wrong parameter unlock code.




14 03 00 15

Illegal parameter type in command. ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE

Luminometer received a command with illegal parameter type. Set correct parameter type.

20.4.21

14 03 04 15

Starter Reagent pump received a Starter Reagent pump A2 received a command with illegal parameter type. command with illegal parameter type. ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE Set correct parameter type.

20.5.21

14 03 05 15

Starter Reagent pump received a command with illegal parameter type ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE

Starter Reagent pump B2 received a command with illegal parameter type. Set correct parameter type.

20.0.22

14 03 00 16

Illegal parameter length in command. Luminometer received a command with illegal parameter length. ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH Enter parameter in correct length.

20.4.22

14 03 04 16

Starter Reagent pump received a command with illegal parameter length.

Starter Reagent pump A2 received a command with illegal parameter length.



Starter Reagent pump received a command with illegal parameter length.

Starter Reagent pump B2 received a command with illegal parameter length.



20.5.22

14 03 05 16

20.4.31

14 00 04 1F

CAN Status Message.

--

20.5.31

14 00 05 1F

CAN Status Message.

--

20.0.32

14 03 00 20

HIGH VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE

Luminometer detect a High Voltage out of range error.

20.4.32

14 03 04 20

Starter Reagent pump failed in automatic calibration.

Starter Reagent pump A2 failure on automatic calibration detected.

HIGH VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE 20.5.32

14 03 05 20

Starter Reagent pump failed in automatic calibration.

Starter Reagent pump B2 failure on automatic calibration detected.

HIGH VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE

Page 14-56



14 03 00 21

COUNT RATE OVERRUN

Luminometer detected a count rate overrun error while no measurement is running

20.0.34

14 03 00 22

COUNTER READ ERROR

Luminometer detected a counter unit error.

20.0.48

14 02 00 30

INJECTION PUMP FAILURE

Luminometer detected a general starter reagent pump error.

20.0.64

14 03 00 40

Internal Error: Fifo Full.

Luminometer main subassembly detected a internal command fifo overrun.

FIFO FULL 20.1.64

14 03 01 40

Internal Error: Fifo Full. FIFO FULL

20.2.64

14 03 02 40


20.3.64

14 03 03 40


20.0.80

14 03 00 50

Luminometer shutter and aspiration probe drive detected a internal command fifo overrun. Luminometer transport drive detected a internal command fifo overrun. Luminometer data transmission subassembly detected a internal command fifo overrun.

Hardware Error: AD5620 Failure.

Hardware error.

AD5620 FAILURE

Exchange Reader PCB.

20.0.96

14 03 00 60

Hardware Error: Trigger Light barrier. Luminometer detected a internal hardware error. LB TRIGGER FAILURE Mechanical error: Light barrier was not triggered at correct position.

20.1.96

14 03 01 60


20.2.96

14 03 02 60


20.3.96

14 03 03 60


20.0.112

14 02 00 70

Internal Error: No Injection performed.

Luminometer detected no starter reagent injected was performed.

TRIGGER INJECTION FAILURE

Luminometer detected a internal hardware error.





20.1.112

14 02 01 70


Page 14-57


20.3.112

14 02 02 70

14 02 03 70









20.0.128

14 01 00 80

The current dark count value is out of Luminometer dark count average range. algorithm reported current value is out of range. DARKCOUNT OUT OF RANGE

20.0.129

14 03 00 81

3 or more dark count values are out of range. DARKCOUNT3 OUT OF RANGE

20.0.130

14 01 00 82

The Dark count AVE is not valid. DARK COUNT AVE INVALID

Luminometer dark count average algorithm reported 3 or more values are out of range. Luminometer dark count average algorithm reported the average value is invalid.

20.0.131

14 01 00 83

DARKCOUNT AVE EXCEEDS ENVELOPE

Luminometer dark count average algorithm reported the average value is outside the envelope.

20.0.132

14 03 00 84

3 of Y Dark count AVE Values exceeds the envelope.

Luminometer dark count average algorithm reported 3 or more average values are outside the envelope.

DARKCOUNT AVE 3 EXCEEDS ENVELOPE 20.0.133

14 01 00 85

Spikes detected in Flash Curve. SPIKES DETECTED

20.0.134

14 02 00 86

Number of detected Spikes in Flash Curve exceeds limit. NUMBER OF SPIKES EXCEEDS LIMITS

20.0.144

14 03 00 90

No Cuvette detected. CDA FAILED

Luminometer spike removal algorithm detected spikes in the flash curve. Luminometer spike removal algorithm detected more spikes as defined as spike limit.

Luminometer could not detect a cuvette before measurement. Table 14.6-1: Reader, error list

14.7



Page 14-58


14. Reader Module

14.7.1

Reader CU PCB

Figure 14.7-1: Reader CU PCB

Number


J1

Download Connector

J2


J3

Spindle Motor

J4

Lift Motor

J5

Home Sensor Spindle

J6

Home Sensor Lift

J7

Unused

J8

PMT Module

J9

Blue LED

J10

Unused Table 14.7-1: Connections of the Reader CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 14.7-2: LEDs of the Reader CU PCB


Page 14-59

15. Pipettor

15 Pipettor This chapter describes pipettor module in detail. In the first section of the chapter "Safety" notes concerning pipettor are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of these modules (sections "Replacement and Repair", "Adjustment and Calibration" and "Troubleshooting'). In the last section pipettor PCB layouts are described.

15.1

Safety



•


•



Page 15-1

15. Pipettor

15.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of pipettor module.

Figure 15.2-1: Overview Pipettor

No

Description

1


2

OLV Probe (Right Arm)

3

Pipettor CU PCB

4

Lid supporter

5

X-Motor Left

6

X-Motor Right

7

SRP pump (Syringe Reagent Probe) Table 15.2-1: Overview pipettor

Page 15-2


15. Pipettor

Figure 15.2-2: Pipettor, right arm

No.

Description

5

Y/Z Sledge-R CU PCB

6

X-Sledge 2 PCB Table 15.2-2: Circuit board overview, right arm


Page 15-3

15. Pipettor

Figure 15.2-3: Pipettor, left arm

No.

Description

7

Y Sledge ZSP PCB

8

AP Head PCB

9

X-Sledge 2 PCB Table 15.2-3: Circuit board overview, left arm

15.2.1



Page 15-4


15. Pipettor

15.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the pipetting system. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

15.3.1

Replacement of Pipettor

Two people are needed to remove/ assemble the pipettor.

15.3.1.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 8. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.2 on page 9-12). 9. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18) 10. Remove Top Cover Supporter (see chapter 15.3.2.2 on page 15-12). 11. Remove Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.2 on page 15-14) 12. Remove OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.2 on page 15-17).


Page 15-5

15. Pipettor

15.3.1.2

Remove Pipettor

1. Unplug four cables (J10, J11, J12 and J13) of PIP CU PCB (12). 2. Unplug two flat ribbon cables (J2 and J3) of circuit board (12)

Figure 15.3-1: Unplug pip CU PCB 3. Loosen screw (4) and remove ribbon cable holder (3). 4. Remove cables to the left and right sides.

Figure 15.3-2: Pip CU PCB

Page 15-6


15. Pipettor 5. Unscrew screws (7) of rear cover (8).

Figure 15.3-3: Pipettor right rear side

Figure 15.3-4: Pipettor left rear side 6. At right side, remove the face plate (10). 7. At right side, remove the snap lock holder (12) with threaded plates and screws. 8. Remove both threaded plates (13). 9. Repeat points 6, 7, 8 at left side also. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 15-7

15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-5: face plate, threaded plate and snap lock holder – right side 10. Loosen four screws (9) of pipetting module (1) (two on left and two on right side).

Figure 15.3-6: Pipettor left side view

Figure 15.3-7: Pipettor right side view

Page 15-8


15. Pipettor

Take care while setting the pipettor down, do not damage the toothed bars. 11. Two people pull the pipettor carefully forward till they feel that they can lift it up. The pipettor is set in sliding blocks onto a guide way (11) in the frame. 15.3.1.3

Assemble Pipettor

Do not bend or squeeze cables or tubes. 1. Lift pipetting module (1) onto system and thread it into the guide way (11). The pipettor shall not stand over the aluminium profile.

2. Push pipetting module to the rear side and fasten four screws (9).

Figure 15.3-8: Pipettor, guide way, left rear side view


Page 15-9

15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-9: Pipettor, guide way, right front side view 3. At right side, remove face plate (10). 4. At right side, install threaded plates (13). 5. At right side, install the snap lock holder (12) with threaded plates and screws. 6. At right side, install the face plate (10). 7. Repeat points 3, 4, 5, 6 at left side also. 8. Fasten four screws (7) of rear cover (8). 9. Thread cables (J10, J11, J12 and J13) into cable holder and plug cables into PIP CU PCB 10. Plug two flat ribbon cables (J2 and J3) onto circuit board. 11. Set cable holder (3) onto the ribbon cables and fasten screw (4). 12. Assemble OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.3 on page 15-20). 13. Assemble Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.3 on page 15-16). 14. Assemble Top Cover Supporter (see chapter 15.3.2.3 on page 15-13). 15. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). 16. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.3 on page 9-14). 17. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 18. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 19. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 20. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 21. Teaching of Pipettor (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 22. Perform backup of LiaisonXL.coo file on the instrument memory stick. 23. Perform LLD test of right arm (see chapter 3.4.5.1 on page 3-23). 24. Perform LLD test of left arm (see chapter 3.4.5.2 on page 3-24). 25. Run Service 3 LCR task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 26. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. 27. Run Service 3 LCL task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 28. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. Page 15-10


15. Pipettor 29. Perform the calibration of one of the kits available at customer site. 30. Perform raw data printout and backup. 31. Disable all customer calibrations, using Disable button available in Main UI (Main category Results, sub-category Calibrations). 32. Inform the customer that all kits in use must be recalibrated. For the re-run rules in case of failures of tests, please refer to LXL-TN-17.

The successful execution of 3 consecutive LCL and 3 consecutive LCR shall be always achieved.

Kit re-calibration shall be performed according to kit IFU, either by the Final User or by the FSE himself. The FSE shall guarantee that at least the first kit re-calibration is successfully completed before the service call is closed.


Page 15-11

15. Pipettor

15.3.2 15.3.2.1

Replacement of Top Cover Supporter Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 8. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.5.2 on page 9-9). 9. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18). 15.3.2.2

Remove Top Cover Supporter

1. Unscrew two screws (2) at left and right side of top cover supporter (1).

Figure 15.3-10: Top cover supporter left view

Page 15-12


15. Pipettor 2. Slide top cover supporter carefully a bit to the front so the hatches (4) are out of the slot, lift top cover supporter up and set it aside.

Figure 15.3-11: Top cover supporter rear view 15.3.2.3

Assemble Top Cover Supporter

1. Set top cover supporter carefully on top of pipettor and slide it to the back. 2. Fasten two screws (2) at left and right side. 3. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). 4. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.5.3 on page 9-11). 5. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 6. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 7. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 8. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6).


Page 15-13

15. Pipettor

15.3.3 15.3.3.1

Replacement of Sample Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 15.3.3.2

Remove Sample Probe

1. Loosen two screws (3), unlock the connector lock (4) by pulling down and unplug carefully the ribbon cable (2).

Figure 15.3-12: Sample Probe, Gear rack pipettor

Page 15-14


15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-13: Ribbon cable, locked

Take care and hold pipettor, otherwise it will fall down. 2. Loosen both screws (5). 3. When screws are loose, turn pipettor bar (1) and take it out of the holders (6). Take care, bearings (7) will fall down.

Figure 15.3-14: Sample Pipettor


Page 15-15

15. Pipettor 15.3.3.3

Assemble Sample Probe

1. Insert new toothed pipettor carefully. 2. Insert bearings (7) by holding the toothed pipettor and slide bearings until the snap in.

Figure 15.3-15: Bearings 3. Check if bearings are set correctly and fasten pipettor bar (1) with two screws (5). 4. Plug cable (2) in, close connector lock (4) by pushing up and fasten screws (3). 5. In case of new sample probe, run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 6. Perform the Teaching of Sample Probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 15-16


15. Pipettor

15.3.4 15.3.4.1

Replacement of OLV Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor reagent probe over the wash station. 15.3.4.2

Remove OLV Probe

1. Unscrew fitting (2) of SRP pump (1).

Figure 15.3-16: SRP pump


Page 15-17

15. Pipettor 2. Push conical securing ring (3) backward and pull sealing fitting (4) off. 3. Remove conical securing ring (3) and fitting (2).


Figure 15.3-18: Fitting

Page 15-18


15. Pipettor 4. Loosen two screws (13), unlock the connector lock (14) and unplug carefully the ribbon cable (9). 5. Loosen screw (6) of adapter (5). 6. Pull carefully OLV-Adapter including tube out of the toothed rack. Do not bend the tube in anyway. The tube is very sensitive. The bent will stay and reduce the tube diameter.

Figure 15.3-19: OLV adapter, circuit board view.

Figure 15.3-20: OLV adapter


Page 15-19

15. Pipettor 15.3.4.3

Assemble OLV Probe

1. Insert the new OLV-Adapter (5) into the toothed bar and fasten screw (6) carefully. Do not bend the tube in anyway. The tube is very sensitive. The bent will stay and reduce the tube diameter.

Figure 15.3-21: OLV-Adapter - SRP Pump. tube layout

Page 15-20


15. Pipettor 2. Thread tube of OLV-Adapter through the toothed bar.

Figure 15.3-22: OLV-Probe 3. Fasten OLV-Adapter onto toothed bar.

Figure 15.3-23: OLV-Probe LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 15-21

15. Pipettor 4. Push pipettor reagent probe down into Reagent Module and check the radius of tube (10-11). The up and down movement shall be done easily by hand.

Figure 15.3-24: OLV-Probe, tube curve with probe in lower position

Figure 15.3-25: OLV adapter, tube curve with pipettor in upper position

Page 15-22


15. Pipettor 5. Set ribbon cable (9), lock the connector lock (14) and fasten two screws (13) of cable holder.

Figure 15.3-26: OLV adapter, circuit board view.

Figure 15.3-27: OLV-Adapter, ribbon cable


Page 15-23

15. Pipettor 6. Open tube clamp (15) and lift tube up..

Figure 15.3-28: Radius of tube in upper position 7. Thread OLV-Probe tube (16) into tube.

Figure 15.3-29: Tube in tube at OLV probe

Page 15-24


15. Pipettor 8. Slide tube into tube clamp (15) and secure tube.

Figure 15.3-30: Tube holder 9. Insert fitting (2) onto tube. 10. Insert conical securing ring (3) onto tube, small side shows to the fitting. 11. Press sealing fitting (4) carefully onto tube, do not bend tube. 12. Screw fitting (2) in SRP pump (1).



Page 15-25

15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-32: Sealing fitting 13. Plug cable (9) in, close connector lock (14) and fasten screw (13). 14. Perform Teaching of Right Arm (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 15. Prime the Pipettor (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). 16. Perform OLV calibration (see chapter 3.3.8.4 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 15-26


15. Pipettor

15.3.5 15.3.5.1

Replacement of Timing Belt X-Axis Sample Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 5. Remove the blind covers. 15.3.5.2

Remove Rear Timing Belt X-Axis Sample Probe

Take care when removing belt holder, spring is mounted with high pressure and may jump off as well the screws and retainer plate. 1. Unscrew carefully two screws (3) of belt adjustment holder and hold retainer plate (4) and spring (5). 2. Unscrew fixing screw (6)and then pull belt joint (7) out and remove toothed belt. 3. Remove belt (8) out of pipettor.

Figure 15.3-33: Pipettor arm left side view


Page 15-27

15. Pipettor 15.3.5.3

Assemble Rear Timing Belt X-Axis Sample Probe

The toothed belts may not be twisted, the toothed belts must sit correct on the pulleys. Be aware that the spring of the belt joint sits properly before assembling the belt ends. 1. Check the length of toothed belt: it shall be 2.8 meters. If the belt is longer, cut it in the middle of the tooth pitch in order to reach the right length. 2. Guide the toothed belt around the left toothed pulley (1) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-34: Pipettor, rear left view 3. Guide the toothed belt around the right guide pulley (2) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-35: Pipettor, rear right view

Page 15-28


15. Pipettor 4. Set two belt ends with the belt joint (7). 5. Set the spring (5) in, fasten it with the retainer plate (4) and two screws (3). 6. Loosen screw (6) to adjust the belt tension. 7. Adjustment of toothed belt tension (see chapter 15.4.1.1 on page 15-76).

Figure 15.3-36: Assembly of belt 8. Teaching of Sample Probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 15-29

15. Pipettor

15.3.5.4

Remove Front Timing Belt X-Axis Sample Probe

Take care when removing belt holder, spring is mounted with high pressure and may jump off as well the screws and retainer plate.

1. Unscrew carefully two screws (3) of belt adjustment holder and hold retainer plate (4) and spring (5). 2. Pull belt joint (7) out and remove toothed belt. 3. Remove belt (8) out of pipettor.

Figure 15.3-37: Pipettor arm left side view

Page 15-30


15. Pipettor 15.3.5.5

Assemble Front Timing Belt X-Axis Sample Probe

The toothed belts may not be twisted, the toothed belts must sit correct on the pulleys. Be aware that the spring of the belt joint sits properly before assembling the belt ends. 1. Check length of toothed belt: it shall be 2.8 meters. If the belt is longer, cut it in the middle of the tooth pitch in order to reach the right length. 2. Guide the toothed belt around the left toothed pulley (1) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-38: Pipettor, front left view


Page 15-31

15. Pipettor 3. Guide the toothed belt around the right guide pulley (2) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-39: Pipettor, front right view 4. Set two belt ends with the belt joint (7). 5. Set the spring (5) in, fasten it with retainer plate (4) and two screws (3). 6. Loosen screw (6) to adjust the belt tension. 7. Adjustment of toothed belt tension (see chapter 15.4.1.1 on page 15-76).

Figure 15.3-40: Pipettor arm left side view 8. Teaching of Sample Probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).

Page 15-32


15. Pipettor

15.3.6 15.3.6.1

Replacement of Timing Belt X-Axis OLV Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Move pipettor reagent probe over the wash station. 15.3.6.2

Remove Rear Timing Belt X-Axis OLV Probe

Take care when removing belt holder, spring is mounted with high pressure and may jump off as well as the screws and retainer plate.

1. Unscrew carefully two screws (3) of belt adjustment holder and hold retainer plate (4) and spring (5). 2. Unscrew fixing screw (6), then pull belt joint (7) out and remove toothed belt. 3. Remove belt (8) out of pipettor.

Figure 15.3-41: Right pipettor arm view


Page 15-33

15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-42: Right pipettor arm side view

Page 15-34


15. Pipettor 15.3.6.3

Assemble Rear Timing Belt X-Axis OLV Probe

The toothed belts may not be twisted, the toothed belts must sit correct on the pulleys. Be aware that the spring of the belt joint sits properly before assembling the belt ends. 1. Check the length of toothed belt: it shall be 2.8 meters. If the belt is longer, cut it in the middle of the tooth pitch in order to reach the right length. 2. Guide the toothed belt around the left toothed pulley (1) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-43: Pipettor, rear left view 3. Guide the toothed belt around the right guide pulley (2) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-44: Pipettor, rear right view


Page 15-35

15. Pipettor 4. Set two belt ends with the belt joint (7). 5. Set the spring (5) in, fasten it with the retainer plate (4) and two screws (3). 6. Loosen screw (6) to adjust the belt tension. 7. Adjustment of toothed belt tension (see chapter 15.4.1.1 on page 15-76).

Figure 15.3-45: Assembly of belt 8. Teaching of OLV probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).

Page 15-36


15. Pipettor

15.3.6.4

Remove Front Timing Belt X-Axis OLV Probe

Take care when removing belt holder, spring is mounted with high pressure and may jump off as well the screws and retainer plate. 1. Unscrew carefully two screws (3) of belt adjustment holder and hold retainer plate (4) and spring (5). 2. Unscrew fixing screw (6), then pull belt joint (7) out and remove toothed belt. 3. Remove belt (8) out of pipettor.

Figure 15.3-46: Pipettor arm right side view


Page 15-37

15. Pipettor 15.3.6.5

Assemble Front Timing Belt X-Axis OLV Probe

The toothed belts may not be twisted, the toothed belts must sit correct on the pulleys. Be aware that the spring of the belt joined sits properly before assembling the belt ends. 1. Check the length of toothed belt: it shall be 2.8 meters. If the belt is longer, cut it in the middle of the tooth pitch in order to reach the right length. 2. Guide the toothed belt around the left guide pulley (1) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-47: Pipettor, front right view

Page 15-38


15. Pipettor 3. Guide the toothed belt around the right toothed pulley (2) from top on down.

Figure 15.3-48: Pipettor, front right view 4. Set two belt ends with the belt joint (7). 5. Set the spring (5) in, fasten it with the retainer plate (4) and two screws (3). 6. Loosen screw (6) to adjust the belt tension. 7. Adjustment of toothed belt tension (see chapter 15.4.1.1 on page 15-76).

Figure 15.3-49: Pipettor arm right side view 8. Teaching of OLV probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 15-39

15. Pipettor

15.3.7 15.3.7.1

Replacement of X-Motor Right Side Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 15.3.7.2

Remove X-Motor Right Side

1. Unplug X-motor right side (1) at pipettor CU PCB at slots J12 and J13. 2. Unscrew screw (3) of metal bellow coupling (2). 3. Unscrew threaded screw (4) and remove X-motor to the rear.

Figure 15.3-50: X-motor right side 15.3.7.3

Assemble X-Motor Right Side

1. See the new X-motor (1) from the rear into the system, insert the motor shaft into the metal bellow coupling (2) and fasten threaded screw (4). 2. Fasten screw (3) of metal bellow coupling (2). 3. Plug X-motor right side (1) into PIP CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.2 on page 15-92) at slots J12 and J13. 4. Teaching of Pipettor (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).

Page 15-40


15. Pipettor

15.3.8 15.3.8.1

Replacement of X-Motor Left Side Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 15.3.8.2

Remove X-Motor Left Side

1. Unplug X-motor left side (1) at pipettor CU PCB at slot J10 and J11. 2. Unscrew screw (3) of metal bellow coupling (2). 3. Unscrew threaded screw (4) and remove X-motor to the rear.

Figure 15.3-51: X-motor left side 15.3.8.3

Assemble X-Motor Left Side

1. Set the new X-motor (1) from the rear into the system, insert the motor shaft into the metal bellow coupling (2) and fasten threaded screw (4). 2. Fasten screw (3) of metal bellow coupling (2). 3. Plug X-motor (1) right side into PIP CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.2 on page 15-92) at slots J10 and J11. 4. Teaching of Pipettor (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 15-41

15. Pipettor

15.3.9 15.3.9.1

Replacement of X-Home Sensor Left and Right Arm Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 15.3.9.2

Remove X-Home Sensor Left and Right Arm

1. Unplug X-Home Sensor (J4) from X-Sledge 2 PCB (see chapter 15.6.3 on page 1593).

Figure 15.3-52: Pipettor arm rear view

Page 15-42


15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of X-home sensor (1). Sample Probe

Figure 15.3-53: X-Home Sensor, Sample Probe rear view OLV-Probe

Figure 15.3-54: X-Home Sensor, Right Arm rear view 15.3.9.3

Assemble X-Home Sensor Left and Right Arm

1. Fasten X-home sensor (1) with two screws (2). 2. Plug X-Home Sensor connector (J4) onto X-Sledge 2 PCB (see chapter 15.6.3 on page 15-93).


Page 15-43

15. Pipettor

15.3.10 15.3.10.1

Replacement of Y-Belt Sample Probe Preliminary Steps


Remove Y-Belt Sample Probe


1. Unscrew two screws (4), hold the belt tensioner (3) and set it aside.

Figure 15.3-55: Y-Belt Tensioner

Page 15-44


15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew four screws (5) of Y-belt holder (6) and remove Y-belt.

Figure 15.3-56: Y-Belt holder Sample Probe 15.3.10.3

Assemble Y-Belt Sample Probe

1. Thread Y-belt through Y-motor and belt tensioner and fasten belt holder (6) with four screws (5) onto the arm. 2. Set belt tensioner (3) into place and fasten screws (4). 3. Check Tension of Y-Toothed belt (see chapter 15.4.1.2 on page 15-80). 4. Teaching of Sample Probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 15-45

15. Pipettor

15.3.11 15.3.11.1

Replacement of Y-Belt OLV-Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor reagent probe over the wash station. 15.3.11.2

Remove Y-Belt OLV-Probe

Take care when removing belt holder, spring is mounted with high pressure and may jump off as well the screws and retainer plate. 1. Unscrew two screws (4), hold the belt tensioner (3) and set it aside.


Page 15-46


15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew three screws (5) of Z-motor (6).

Figure 15.3-58: Right arm, Z-motor 3. Unplug motor connector (J4) of YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB and remove Z-motor. 4. Unscrew four screws (8) of YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB and pull it carefully aside.


Page 15-47

15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-59: Pipettor, right arm

Page 15-48


15. Pipettor 5. Unscrew four screws (10) of two toothed belt holder (11). 6. Remove belt.

Figure 15.3-60: Toothed belt holders 15.3.11.3

Assemble Y-Belt OLV-Probe

1. Thread Y-belt through Y-motor and belt tensioner and fasten belt holder (11) with four screws (10) onto the arm. 2. Set belt tensioner (3) into place and fasten two screws (4). 3.

Fasten YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB with four screws (8) onto right arm.

4. Fasten Z-motor onto right arm. 5. Insert a piece of paper between Z-motor gear and toothed bar. 6. Press Z-motor against the toothed bar and fasten Z-motor with three screws (5) onto right arm. 7. Remove the piece of paper between the gear and toothed bar. 8. Put a drop of lacquer onto the three screws (5). 9. Connect motor connector (J4) onto OLV-Probe: Y-Z-Sledge-R CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.4 on page 15-94). 10. Check Tension of Y-Toothed belt (see chapter 15.4.1.2 on page 15-80). 11. Teaching of OLV probe (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 15-49

15. Pipettor

15.3.12 Replacement of Y-Motor Sample Probe and OLV Probe 15.3.12.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove Y-Motor Sample Probe and OLV Probe

1. Unplug Y-motor cable (J1) and Y- motor encoder cable (J2) from X-Sledge 2 PCB (see chapter 15.6.3 on page 15-93).

Figure 15.3-61: Pipettor arm rear view

Page 15-50


15. Pipettor


2. Unscrew two screws (4), hold the belt tensioner (3) and set it aside.



Page 15-51

15. Pipettor 3. Unscrew four screws (2) of Y-motor (1)

Figure 15.3-63: Y-Motor 4. Remove the Y-motor (1) tilting it and removing it from the bottom side.

Figure 15.3-64: Y-Motor removal 15.3.12.3

Assemble Y-Motor Sample Probe and OLV Probe

1. Place the Y-motor (1) onto the support from the bottom side. 2. Thread toothed wheel into the belt and fasten new Y-motor (1) with four screws (2) onto the arm. 3. Set belt tensioner (3) into place and fasten screws (4). 4. Plug Y-motor cable (J1) and Y- motor encoder cable (J2) onto X-Sledge 2 PCB (see chapter 15.6.3 on page 15-93). 5. Teaching of Pipettor (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).

Page 15-52


15. Pipettor

15.3.13 15.3.13.1

Replacement of Y-Home Sensor at Sample Probe Preliminary Steps


Remove Y-Home Sensor at Sample Probe

1. Unplug Y-Home Sensor (J5) at Y-Sledge SZP PCB.

Figure 15.3-65: Sample Probe


Page 15-53

15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew Y-Home Sensor (1).

Figure 15.3-66: Sample Probe 15.3.13.3

Assemble Y-Home Sensor at Sample Probe

The sensor has to be mounted straight. Control if the sensor flag is moving inside the light barrier correctly.

1. Fasten new Y-Home Sensor (1) with one screw (2) onto Sample Probe. 2. Plug Y-Home Sensor (J5) at of Sample Pipettor: Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB (see chapter 15.6.5 on page 15-95).

Page 15-54


15. Pipettor

15.3.14 15.3.14.1

Replacement of Z-Motor at Sample Probe Preliminary Steps


Remove Z-Motor at Sample Probe

1. Unplug Z-Motor connector (J3) of Y-Sledge ZSP PCB.

Figure 15.3-67: View onto Y-sledge ZSP PCB


Page 15-55

15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew three screws (2) of Z-motor (1) and remove motor.

Figure 15.3-68: Z-Motor, Sample Probe 15.3.14.3

Assemble Z-Motor at Sample Probe

1. Set new Z-motor in and fasten Z-motor onto Sample Probe. 2. Insert a piece of paper between Z-motor gear and toothed bar. 3. Press Z-motor against the toothed bar and fasten Z-motor with three screws (2) onto left arm. 4. Remove the piece of paper between the gear and toothed bar. 5. Put a drop of lacquer onto the three screws (2). Lay the motor cable carefully, so it will not wedge. 6. Plug Z-Motor connector (J3) onto Sample Pipettor: Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB (see chapter 15.6.5 on page 15-95).

Page 15-56


15. Pipettor

15.3.15 15.3.15.1

Replacement of Z-Home Sensor at Sample Probe Preliminary Steps


Remove Z-Home Sensor at Sample Probe

1. Unplug Z-Home Sensor connector (J4) of Y-Sledge ZSP PCB.

Figure 15.3-69: View onto Y-sledge ZSP PCB


Page 15-57

15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of light barrier (1) and remove sensor.

Figure 15.3-70: Z-Motor, Sample Probe 15.3.15.3

Assemble Z-Home Sensor at Sample Probe

1. Set new Z-home sensor in and fasten sensor onto Sample Probe: 2. Plug Z-home sensor connector (J4) onto Sample Pipettor: Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB (see chapter 15.6.5 on page 15-95).

Page 15-58


15. Pipettor

15.3.16 15.3.16.1

Replacement of Z-Motor OLV-Probe Preliminary Steps


Remove Z-Motor OLV-Probe

1. Unscrew three screws (2) of Z-motor (1).

Figure 15.3-71: Right arm, Z-motor


Page 15-59

15. Pipettor 2. Unplug motor connector (J4) of YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB and remove Z-motor.

Figure 15.3-72: Pipettor, right arm 15.3.16.3

Assemble Z-Motor OLV-Probe

1. Set new Z-motor in. 2. Fasten Z-motor onto right arm. 3. Insert a piece of paper between Z-motor gear and toothed bar. 4. Press Z-motor against the toothed bar and fasten Z-motor with three screws (2) onto right arm. 5. Remove the piece of paper between the gear and toothed bar. 6. Put a drop of lacquer onto the three screws (2). 7. Plug motor connector (J4) onto OLV-Probe: Y-Z-Sledge-R CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.4 on page 15-94).

Page 15-60


15. Pipettor

15.3.17 15.3.17.1

Replacement of Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB at Sample Probe Preliminary Steps


Remove Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB at Sample Probe

1. Unplug all connectors of Y-Sledge SZP PCB.



Page 15-61

15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of cable holder plate (1) and set it aside.

Figure 15.3-74: Sample Probe 3. Unscrew four screws (4) of Y-Sledge ZSP PCB (3) and set circuit board aside.


Page 15-62


15. Pipettor 15.3.17.3

Assemble Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB at Sample Probe

1. Fasten new Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB (3) with four screws (4) onto Sample Probe. 2. Fasten cable holder plate (1) with two screws (2) onto circuit board (3). 3. Plug all connectors onto OLV-Probe: Y-Z-Sledge-R CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.4 on page 15-94).

15.3.18 15.3.18.1

Replacement of YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB at OLV-Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Remove Z-Motor OLV-Probe (see chapter 15.3.16.2 on page 15-59). 15.3.18.2

Remove YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB at OLV-Probe

1. Unplug X-Sledge connector (J3) and unscrew two screws (2) of tube/ cable holder (3).

Figure 15.3-76: OLV Probe


Page 15-63

15. Pipettor 2. Unscrew two screws (4) of cable holder and unplug OLV-Probe connector (J2).

Figure 15.3-77: OLV-Probe 3. Unscrew four screws (5) of YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB (1).

Figure 15.3-78: OLV-Probe, YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB

Page 15-64


15. Pipettor 15.3.18.3

Assemble YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB at OLV-Probe

1. Fasten new YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB (1) with four screws (5) onto OLV-Probe. 2. Plug connector (J2) onto YZ-sledge-R CU PCB and fasten cable holder with two screws (4) onto circuit board. 3. Plug X-Sledge connector (J3) onto OLV-Probe: Y-Z-Sledge-R CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.4 on page 15-94) and fasten cable holder (3) with two screws (2). 4. Assemble Z-Motor OLV-Probe (see chapter 15.3.16.3 on page 15-60). 15.3.18.4

Set YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB Parameters

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412).


Page 15-65

15. Pipettor

15.3.19 15.3.19.1

Replacement of X-Sledge PCB Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. For instruments with SN ≥ 2210000251, remove Y-Motor (see chapter 15.3.12.2 on page 15-50). 15.3.19.2

Remove X-Sledge PCB

1. Unplug cable of Pip CU PCB (4). 2. Loosen two screws (3) of Y cable plastic support (2) (metal angle for instruments with SN < 2210000251). 3. Unplug flat cable (5).

Figure 15.3-79: X-Sledge

Page 15-66


15. Pipettor 4. Unplug Y-motor (J1), Y-encoder (J2) and X-home (J4).

Figure 15.3-80: X-Sledge, rear view 5. Unscrew two screws (6) and remove X-Sledge PCB.. 15.3.19.3

Assemble X-Sledge PCB

1. Set new X-sledge PCB (1) into the guide rail, push circuit board down and fasten two screws (6). 2. Fasten X-sledge PCB to the Y cable support (2) (metal angle for instruments with SN < 2210000251) using two screws (3). 3. Plug flat cable (5) onto X-sledge PCB. 4. Plug all cables onto X-Sledge 2 PCB (see chapter 15.6.3 on page 15-93). 5. Assemble Y-Motor (see chapter 15.3.12.3 on page 15-52). 15.3.19.4

Set X-Sledge PCB Parameters



Page 15-67

15. Pipettor

15.3.20 15.3.20.1

Replacement of Pip CU PCB Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 15.3.20.2

Remove Pip CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of Pip CU PCB (1). 2. Loosen three screws (2) and remove circuit board.

Figure 15.3-81: PIP CU PCB 15.3.20.3

Assemble Pip CU PCB

1. Set new Pip CU PCB (1) into the guide rail (3), push circuit board up and fasten three screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto PIP CU PCB (see chapter 15.6.2 on page 15-92). 15.3.20.4

Set PIP CU PCB Parameters


Page 15-68


15. Pipettor

15.3.21 15.3.21.1

Replacement of Slide Bearings of Sample Probe Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 5. Remove Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.2 on page 15-14). 15.3.21.2

Remove Slide Bearings of Sample Probe

1. Loosen screws (2) of clamping rockers (1) and remove them.

Figure 15.3-82: without Sample Probe 15.3.21.3

Assemble Slide Bearing of Sample Probe

1. Insert clamping rockers (1) and fasten with screws (2). 2. Assemble Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.3 on page 15-16). 3. Perform the teaching of Sample Probe (see chapter 8).


Page 15-69

15. Pipettor


15.3.22

Replacement of Z Rod and Bearings of OLV Probe

15.3.22.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor reagent probe over the wash station. 5. Remove OLV Probe (see page 15.3.4.3 on page 15-17). 15.3.22.2

Remove Z Rod and Bearings

Slide bearing is spring loaded When removing bearing holders, the bearings are mounted with springs. Do not loose them. 1. Unscrew screws (2) of bearing holders and hold onto the Z-Rod (1). 2. Remove Z-Rod carefully and take care of the springs.

Figure 15.3-83: OLV, Z-Rod

Page 15-70


15. Pipettor 15.3.22.3

Assemble Z Rod and Bearings

1. Slide the new slide bearings (3) onto the Z-Rod. 2. Insert springs (4) into the frame. 3. Put on the Z-Rod (1) and set the bearing holders (2) over the slide bearings (3) and fasten the bearing holders (2).

Figure 15.3-84: OLV-Probe 4. Assemble OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.3 on page 15-20). 5. Perform Teaching of Right Arm (see chapter 8). 6. Prime the Pipettor (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). 7. Perform OLV calibration (see chapter 3.3.8.4 on page 3-22).



Page 15-71

15. Pipettor

15.3.23 15.3.23.1

Replacement of the Sample Probe Adapter Tube Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the Liaison®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn off the system power switch. 3. Open the top covers. 4. Move the pipettor arms to save positions.

15.3.23.2

Disassembly of the Sample Probe Adapter Tube

1. Remove the black screw cap carefully.

Figure 15.3-85: Black screw cap

Take care that the o-ring remains in the screw cap.

Page 15-72


15. Pipettor

Figure 15.3-86: O-ring in the screw cap

2. Push the upper part of sample probe tube carefully into the adapter by using a plain tool.

Figure 15.3-87: Top view of the sample probe tube pushed into the adapter

Figure 15.3-88: Bottom view of the pulled out sample probe tube


Page 15-73

15. Pipettor

3. Pull the sample probe tube completely out by hand.

Be very careful not to damage the small o-ring placed beneath the blue protective cover by the cross hole of the probe tube. In this case the module will become leaky.

Figure 15.3-89: Blue protective cover

O-ring

Figure 15.3-90: Small o-ring

Page 15-74


15. Pipettor

Cross hole

Figure 15.3-91: Cross hole of the probe tube

Figure 15.3-92: Tube pulled out completely 15.3.23.3

Assembly of the Sample Probe Adapter tube

4. Reassemble the sample probe tube in reversed order. By introducing the sample tube into the adapter be aware that the ejection tube is inserted into the fork of the ejection mechanism.

Figure 15.3-93: Ejection tube inserted into the fork of the ejection mechanism 5. Perform the teaching of Sample Probe (see chapter 8).



Page 15-75

15. Pipettor

15.4


In this section information about the adjustment and calibration of certain components can be found. For additional adjustments, see Teaching of Pipettor (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).

15.4.1

Adjustment of toothed belt tension

15.4.1.1

Check Tension of the X-Toothed belts and straighten the arms

The same procedure shall be applied both for left and right arm.

1. Loose the compensating screw (1) of the front or back X-belts. 2. Move the arm a couple of times to the left and right. The compensating screw shall not touch the end stop of the slot.

Figure 15.4-1: Pip arm, front view

Page 15-76


15. Pipettor

Figure 15.4-2: Pip arm, rear view

3. If, at left arm side, the compensating screw (1) for the front or the back belt reaches the end stop (without touching it), move the toothed belt (3) of one tooth at the gear (4). If the left end stop position is reached, move the belt one gear to the right; otherwise, if the right end stop position is reached, move the belt one gear to the left.

Figure 15.4-3: Left pipettor side


Page 15-77

15. Pipettor 4. If, at right arm side, the compensating screw (1) for the front or the back belt reaches the end stop (without touching it), move the toothed belt (6) of one tooth at the gear (5). If the left end stop position is reached move the belt one gear to the right; otherwise, if the right end stop position is reached, move the belt one gear to the left.

Figure 15.4-4: Right pipettor side 5. Fasten the compensating screw (1). The tension procedure shall be performed separately for the front and the back X-belts. 6. Loose the tension screw (2) of the front or the back belt tension assembly. The tension screw is now able to move up and down. 7. If the tension screw (2) reaches the upper end stop, move the toothed belt one tooth up at the belt holder. (White arrow shows direction to move the belt, just one tooth a time.)

Figure 15.4-5: Belt tension assembly

Page 15-78


15. Pipettor 8. When the tension screw (2) reaches the lower end stop, move the toothed belt of one tooth down at the belt holder. (White arrow shows direction to move the belt.)

Figure 15.4-6: Belt tension assembly 9. Fasten the tension screw (2).


Page 15-79

15. Pipettor

15.4.1.2

Check Tension of Y-Toothed belt

1. Loosen screws (1), the spring (2) pulls the belt (3) into the correct tension. 2. Fasten two screws (1).

Figure 15.4-7: Adjust Y-Belt

Page 15-80


15. Pipettor

15.5

Troubleshooting


15.5.1

Air pipettor Pump (90h; 144dec): Error List

Air Pipettor Pump Decimal

144

Hexadecimal

90

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in. For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2). User Manual

Service Software

decimal

hexadecimal

NO MESSAGE

The answer contains no warning or error code

90 03 00 01

ERROR NOT INITIALIZED

Module needs to be initialized before executing failed command.

90 03 00 02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Wrong command code.

90 03 00 03


Command Parameter out of range.��

90 02 00 04

EEPROM WRITE

Error while writing EEPROM.

90 03 00 05

EEPROM READ


90 03 00 06


Voltage out of range.

Error Code

90 00 00 00

Sub Unit

Corrective Action:

Severity

Meaning:

Device ID

Event ID


•


•


•

check power supply

•


•

exchange Pip PCB

Page 15-81

15. Pipettor 90 01 00 07


Voltage back in range.

90 03 00 0A

NOT MOVING

Motor overload detected: Drive did not move properly. Motor detect or blocked or not connected.

90 03 00 0E

COMMAND EXECUTION

Drive or module not ready to execute command. e.g. busy with off command.

90 03 00 0F


Unknown command; not implemented or wrong number of parameter. Check command.

90 03 00 10

EXECUTION TIMEOUT

Command execution slope due to too Check execution time.

90 03 00 11

ILLEGAL PARAMETER

Wrong RAM or flash parameter

90 03 00 12

PARAMETER NOT FOUND

Wrong parameter number, use correct parameter number

90 03 00 13


no permission to change flash parameter, set correct one.

90 03 00 14


unknown code, use correct code.

90 03 00 15


(unknown parameter type) use correct parameter type

90 03 00 16


(wrong parameter length) use correct parameter length.

90 00 00 1F

CAN BUS RECOVER

Can status message

90 00 00 20

LLD TRIGGER SET

Trigger was set by level selection.

LLD PLUNGER CLEARED

No action needed.

APH_COM

Internal communication error with Air Pipettor Head (APH) module. Check hardware.

90 03 00 21

Replace Sample Probe. 90 03 00 22

SCTL_TIMEOUT

Internal communication time-out with SCTL module. Check hardware. Replace Sample Probe.

90 03 00 23

INIT_POSITION

Verify of init position failed. Check plunge mechanic.

90 02 00 24

INIT_VALVE

Check valves or wrong cabling. Valve test failed: Valves not correct connected or broken or any kind of plugging.

Page 15-82


15. Pipettor 90 01 00 25

INIT_PLUNGER_STIFF

Check plunge mechanics and valves. Plunger stiff, motor drive near overload: motor may fail soon. (Use able for early recognition of motor problems).

90 01 00 26

INIT_SENSOR_NOISE

Check power supply. Pressure sensor noise bad. Replace Sample Probe.

90 01 00 27

INIT_SENSOR_LEVEL_OOR

Check power supply. Replace Sample Probe..

90 01 00 28

INIT_AIRFLOW

Remove tip if attached, check Tip adapter or pressure sensor. No airflow on init move detected, system might be leaky.

90 03 00 30

POSITION_NOT_REACHED

Check plunge mechanic. Target position not reached within tolerances.

90 03 00 31

SCTL_WATCHDOG_RESET

Check FW of SCTL processor. Check hardware. SCTL watchdog reset, internal communication error.

90 01 00 32

INST_LLD_LEVEL_OSCILLATOR

Cont rate out of range, check mechanic and Air Pipettor Head (APH) module Frequency of C-LLD level oscillator out of range.

90 02 00 33

NOT_ENOUGH_AIR_FOR_LLD

Load air before starting B-LLD. Insufficient air buffered for a B-LLD aspirate air first.

90 02 00 34

TRIGGER_LINE_DEFECT

Check hardware, exchange hardware. Internal trigger line test failed: release trigger line, if remains, change APP PCB.

90 03 00 35

OVERPRESSURE

Tip clogged valves at wrong position Pump overpressure detected, pump stopped.

90 03 00 36

VOLUME PARAMETER NOT SET

Parameter iV9101PosConv not set. Module needs suitable parameter first.

Table 15.5-1: Air pipettor pump module, error list


Page 15-83

15. Pipettor

15.5.2

Error Messages: OLV (FChex; 252dec)

OLV Decimal

252

Hexadecimal

FC


Service Software User Software hexadecimal

Event ID

Sub Unit

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Severity

Cause:

Device ID

decimal

252.0.0

FC

00

00

00

no error

252.0.1

FC

03

00

01

Watchdog reset %1

OLV PCB defect Change YZ-Sledge PCB.

252.0.3

FC

03

00

03

Parameter value out of range

Command parameter out of range

252.0.4

FC

02

00

04


OLV PCB defect.


OLV PCB defect.

252.0.5

FC

03

00

05

Change YZ-Sledge PCB

Change YZ-Sledge PCB

252.0.17

FC

03

00

11

Illegal parameter type definition.

Wrong type used while accessing parameter set.

252.0.18

FC

03

00

12

Invalid parameter index.

Index is not known in parameter set.

252.0.19

FC

03

00

13

Access to parameter not allowed

Permission denied for access to parameter.

252.0.20

FC

03

00

14

Wrong parameter unlock code

Unknown permission code.

252.0.21

FC

03

00

15

Illegal parameter type in command

Wrong type used while writing to parameter set.

252.0.22

FC

03

00

16

Illegal parameter length in command

Parameter length does not fit to parameter type while writing to parameter set.

Table 15.5-2: OLV Messages

Page 15-84


15. Pipettor

15.5.3

Pipettor (FDh; 253dec): General Error List

Pipettor Decimal

253

Hexadecimal

FD


User Software

Service Software

decimal

hexadecimal

Event ID

Severity

Sub Unit

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Device ID

Cause:

253.0.0

FD

00

00

00

No error

253.0.1

FD

03

00

01

Watchdog reset

Pipettor main PCB defect.

253.0.2

FD

03

00

02

Insufficient parameters for command %2, received %3 bytes.

Insufficient command parameters.

Command parameter out of range. Command: %2.

Command parameter out of range.

253.0.3

FD

03

00

03

Software error

Software error.

253.0.4

FD

03

00

04

Communication buffer overflow Communication line temporary offline

253.0.5

FD

03

00

05

No coordinates for position%2. No coordinates for this position. Software error

253.0.6

FD

01

00

06

Non volatile data I/O error: %2

Pipettor main PCB defect.

253.0.7

FD

03

00

07


Pipettor main PCB defect. Flash I/O command parameter error

Flash Parameter error 253.0.8

FD

03

00

08

Read failure of permanent parameter

Pipettor main PCB defect

253.0.9

FD

03

00

09


Wrong type used while accessing parameter set.

253.0.10

FD

03

00

0A

Invalid parameter index

Index is not known in parameter set.

253.0.11

FD

03

00

0B


Permission denied for access to parameter.

253.0.12

FD

03

00

0C

Wrong parameter unlock code. Unknown permission code.


Page 15-85

15. Pipettor 253.0.13

FD

03

00

0D


Wrong type used while writing to parameter set.

253.0.14

FD

03

00

0E

Illegal parameter length in command

Parameter length does not fit to parameter type while writing to parameter set.

253.0.22

FD

03

00

16

Left arm, collision avoided. Coordinate misalignment Moving to coordinate: %2, right arm at coordinate: %3.

253.0.23

FD

03

00

17

Right arm, collision avoided. Moving to coordinate: %2, left arm at coordinate: %3.

Coordinate misalignment

253.0.31

FD

03

00

1F

No connection to wash pump.

Connector to wash pump not plugged

Open connection to specified pump/valve detected

Cable to wash pump defect Wash pump defect

253.0.40

FD

03

00

28

Left arm, pump error (noStr) %2

253.0.41

FD

03

00

29

Right arm, pump error (noStr) %2

253.0.42

FD

03

00

2A

Left arm, pump response timeout.

No response received.

253.0.43

FD

03

00

2B

Right arm, pump response time-out


253.0.44

FD

03

00

2C

Left arm, pump error %2

Pump error.

253.0.45

FD

03

00

2D

Right arm, pump error %2

Pump error.

253.0.46

FD

03

00

2E

OLV controller response timeout, command %2.


253.0.48

FD

03

00

30

Disposable tip dropped. Left arm, disposable tip dropped

FD

03

00

42

Left arm Diluter pump time-out

FD

03

00

42

Left arm Diluter pump time-out

FD

03

00

43

Right arm Diluter pump time-out

FD

03

00

44

No response received within 20 seconds. No response received within 20 seconds. No response received within 20 seconds.

Left arm Diluter pump error

253.0.100 FD

03

00

64

Left arm, X-Motor

Home sensor defect

Home sensor always ON when Home sensor cable defect initializing. Motor unable to move out of sensor

Page 15-86


15. Pipettor 253.0.101 FD

03

00

65

Left arm, Y-Motor

Home sensor defect

Home sensor always ON when Home sensor cable defect initializing. Motor unable to move out of sensor 253.0.102 FD

03

00

66

Left arm, Z-Motor

Home sensor defect


03

00

67

Right arm, X-Motor

Home sensor defect


03

00

68

Right arm, Y-Motor

Home sensor defect


03

00

69

Right arm, Z-Motor

Home sensor defect


03

00

6E

Left arm, X-Motor

Timing belt off

Time-out when initializing

Home sensor defect Motor unable to move

253.0.111 FD

03

00

6F

Left arm, Y-Motor

Timing belt off



253.0.112 FD

03

00

70

Left arm, Z-Motor

Timing belt off



253.0.113 FD

03

00

71

Right arm, X-Motor

Timing belt off



253.0.114 FD

03

00

72

Right arm, Y-Motor

Timing belt off



253.0.115 FD

03

00

73

Right arm, Z-Motor

Timing belt off



253.0.120 FD

253.0.121 FD

03

03

00

00

78

79


Left arm, X-Motor

Excessive friction

Motor overload detected.

Blockade by obstacle

Left arm, Y-Motor

Excessive friction



Page 15-87


253.0.123 FD

253.0.124 FD

253.0.125 FD

253.0.130 FD

03

03

03

03

03

00

00

00

00

00

7A

7B

7C

7D

82

Left arm, Z-Motor

Excessive friction



Right arm, X-Motor

Excessive friction



Right arm, Y-Motor

Excessive friction



Right arm, Z-Motor

Excessive friction



Left arm, X-Motor

Encoder cable defect

No encoder feedback.

Encoder defect Motor does not move

253.0.131 FD

03

00

83

Left arm, Y-Motor




253.0.132 FD

03

00

84

Left arm, Z-Motor




253.0.133 FD

03

00

85

Right arm, X-Motor




253.0.134 FD

03

00

86

Right arm, Y-Motor




253.0.135 FD

03

00

87

Right arm, Z-Motor




253.0.140 FD

253.0.141 FD

253.0.142 FD

Page 15-88

03

03

03

00

00

00

8C

8D

8E

Left arm, X-Motor

High friction at specified position

Position out of tolerance

Timing belt defect

Coordinate: %2.

Timing belt tension out of specs

Left arm, Y-Motor



Timing belt defect

Coordinate: %2.


Left arm, Z-Motor



Timing belt defect

Coordinate: %2.




253.0.144 FD

253.0.145 FD

253.0.150 FD

03

03

03

03

00

00

00

00

8F

90

91

96

Right arm, X-Motor



Timing belt defect

Coordinate: %2.


Right arm, Y-Motor



Timing belt defect

Coordinate:%2.


Right arm, Z-Motor



Timing belt defect

Coordinate: %2.


Left arm, X-Motor


Motor controller response time-out, Register:%2, State: %3. 253.0.152 FD

03

00

98

Left arm, Z-Motor


Motor controller response time-out, Register: %2, State: %3. 253.0.153 FD

03

00

99

Right arm, X-Motor



03

00

9A

Right arm, Z-Motor



03

00

A0

Motor controller watchdog reset


253.0.192 FD

01

00

C0

No bottle shape data at actual position

Bottle shape data missing or coordinate with bottle index out of range.

253.0.194 FD

01

00

C2

Left arm

---

Diluter pump warning 253.0.195 FD

01

00

C3

Right arm

---

Diluter pump warning 253.0.196 FD

01

00

C4

Left arm, pump warning (noStr) %2

---

253.0.197 FD

01

00

C5

Right arm, pump warning (noStr) %2

---

253.0.199 FC

03

00

C7

Right arm, OLV trace analyse. Mismatch between expected and detected pump steps.

Hardware defect, missing connection from pump step output to PCB 22190 (pip main) input.


Page 15-89


01

00

C8

Left arm, X-Motor

Excessive friction

Drive overload detected. Move Motor blocked by obstacle retried successfully. 253.0.201 FD

01

00

C9

Left arm, Y-Motor

Excessive friction


01

00

CA Left arm, Z-Motor

Excessive friction


01

00

CB Right arm, X-Motor

Excessive friction


01

00

CC Right arm, Y-Motor

Excessive friction


01

00

CD Right arm, Z-Motor

Excessive friction

Drive overload detected. Move Motor blocked by obstacle retried successfully. Table 15.5-3: Pipettor, general error list

Page 15-90


15. Pipettor

15.6


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the pipettor module. See chapter 2.3 on page 2-8 for an overview of the complete electric circuit of the system.

15.6.1

Overview Pipettor PCBs Connections (Among Each Other)

Figure 15.6-1: Pipettor PCBs Connections


Page 15-91

15. Pipettor

15.6.2

PIP CU PCB

Figure 15.6-2: PIP CU PCB

Number


J1

Download Connector

J2

X-Sledge 2 PCB Left Arm (J3)

J3

X-Sledge 2 PCB Right Arm (J3)

J4

PRP

J5

Unused

J6

Unused

J7

Unused

J8

LWP

J9

SRP

J10

Encoder X-Motor Left Arm

J11

X-Motor Left Arm

J12

X-Motor Right Arm

J13

Encoder X-Motor Right Arm

J14

Master COP (J26 - Power/CAN-Bus) Table 15.6-1: Connections of the Pipettor CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Left Arm

LED2

Right Arm

LED3

Power Table 15.6-2: LEDs of the Pipettor CU PCB

Page 15-92


15. Pipettor

15.6.3

X-Sledge 2 PCB

Figure 15.6-3: X-Sledge 2 PCB

Number


J1

Y-Motor

J2

Encoder Y-Motor

J3

Pipettor CU PCB: Left Arm: J2 Right Arm: J3

J4

Home Sensor X-Arm

J5

Left Arm: Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB (J1) Right Arm: Y-Z-Sledge-R PCB (J3) Table 15.6-3: Connections of the X-Sledge 2 PCB


Page 15-93

15. Pipettor

15.6.4

OLV-Probe: Y-Z-Sledge-R CU PCB

Figure 15.6-4: YZ-Sledge-R CU PCB

Number


J2

OLV Probe

J3

X-Sledge 2 PCB Right Arm (J5)

J4

Z-Motor Table 15.6-4: Connections of the Y-Z-Sledge-R PCB

Number

Description

IC3

Y-Home Sensor

IC9

Z-Home Sensor Table 15.6-5: Sensors of the Y-Z-Sledge-R PCB

Page 15-94


15. Pipettor

15.6.5

Sample Pipettor: Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB

Figure 15.6-5: Y-Sledge ZSP PCB

Number


J1

X-Sledge 2 PCB Left Arm (J5)

J2

Sample Pipettor (ZS PIP CU PCB, J2)

J3

Z-Motor

J4

Z-Home Sensor

J5

Y-Home Sensor Table 15.6-6: Connections of the Y-Sledge-ZSP PCB


Page 15-95

15. Pipettor

15.6.6

ZS PIP CU PCB

Figure 15.6-6: ZS PIP CU PCB Number


J2

Y-Sledge-ZSB PCB (J2)

J3

P-Motor

J4

Valve

J5

Valve

J6

Valve

J7

AP-Head Connector Table 15.6-7: Connections of the ZSP PIP CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

LLD Positive

LED2

Command Execution

LED3

Power Table 15.6-8: LEDs of the ZSP PIP CU PCB

Number

Switch

Switch Setting/Description

SW1

1

OFF

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF Table 15.6-9: Switches of the ZSP PIP CU PCB

Page 15-96


16. Sample Module

16 Sample Module This chapter describes sample module in detail. In the first section of the chapter "Safety" notes concerning sample bay are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections "Replacement and Repair", "Adjustment and Calibration", "and Troubleshooting' ). In the last section sample PCB layout is described.

16.1

Safety



•


•



Page 16-1

16. Sample Module

16.2

Overview

Figure 16.2-1: Sample Module, front view

Figure 16.2-2: Sample Module, rear view

No

Description

1

Barcode scanner

2

Presence sensors

3

Sensor, ambient temperature

4

Push locks Table 16.2-1: Overview sample module

Page 16-2


16. Sample Module

16.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the sample module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

16.3.1 16.3.1.1

Replacement of Sample Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor to save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 16.3.1.2

Remove Sample Module

1. Unplug two cables (J1 and J4) of sample module. Do not unplug cables J3 and J5.

Figure 16.3-1: Sample Module rear view


Page 16-3

16. Sample Module 2. Loosen two screws (1) at the rear of the sample module, lift the back slightly up to overcome the positioning pin and pull it out to the front.

Figure 16.3-2: Sample Module 16.3.1.3

Assemble Sample Module

1. Lift the sample module onto the screws, slide the holes over the screws (1) and carefully let it snap in. Push the sample module to the rear so that the positioning pin is located in the corresponding hole in the sample module and fasten the screws (1).

Figure 16.3-3: Sample Module space 2. Plug two cables (J1 and J4) of sample module. 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6).

Page 16-4


16. Sample Module 16.3.1.4

Teaching the Sample Module

1. If necessary (new sample module installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 2. Check the teaching positions of the sample module and, if necessary, teach sample module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 3. If necessary (also new scanner installed), configure barcode scanner (see chapter 16.4.1.1 on page 16-16). 4. If necessary (new sample module and scanner installed), check sensors and reading test (see chapter 16.4.1.2 on page 16-17). 5.


If necessary (new sample module installed), check ambient temperature sensor (see chapter 16.4.1.3 on page 16-17).

Page 16-5

16. Sample Module

16.3.2 16.3.2.1

Replacement of Ambient Temperature Sensor Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor to save location. 16.3.2.2

Remove Ambient Temperature Sensor

1. Unplug ambient temperature sensor at J5 of sample module.

Figure 16.3-4: Sample Module rear view 2. Unscrew nut (2) and slide ambient temperature sensor out of cable clamp. 16.3.2.3

Assemble Ambient Temperature Sensor

1. Slide new ambient temperature sensor (1) through the cable holder. 2. Plug ambient temperature sensor onto sample module PCB at slot J5. 3. Fasten nut (2) and adjust ambient temperature sensor upright. 4. Read ambient temperature (see chapter 16.4.1.3 on page 16-17).

Page 16-6


16. Sample Module

16.3.3 16.3.3.1

Replacement of Barcode Scanner Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor to save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 10. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 16.3.3.2

Remove Barcode Scanner

1. Unscrew two screws (2) of scanner connector (1) and unplug connector. 2. Unscrew two cable holders (3) and coil cable off.

Figure 16.3-5: Sample Module rear view


Page 16-7

16. Sample Module 3. Unscrew three screws (4) and remove scanner holder (5) and scanner..

Figure 16.3-6: Sample Module 4. Unscrew three screws (6) and remove barcode scanner.

Figure 16.3-7: Barcode Scanner

Figure 16.3-8: Barcode Scanner

Page 16-8



Assemble Barcode Scanner

1. Fasten barcode scanner with three screws (6) onto scanner holder plate (5). 2. Fasten scanner holder plate (5) onto sample module with three screws (4). 3. Slide scanner cable through the two cable holders (3) and fasten cable holders onto sample module. 4. Plug scanner connector into slot (J3) and fasten scanner connector with two screws (2). 5. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 6. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 7. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 8. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 9. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 10. Check the teaching positions of the sample module and, if necessary, teach sample module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 11. Configure barcode scanner (see chapter 16.4.1.1 on page 16-16). 12. Perform reading test (see chapter 16.4.1.2 on page 16-17).


Page 16-9

16. Sample Module

16.3.4 16.3.4.1

Replacement Sample Module CU PCB Preliminary Steps


Remove Sample Module CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of sample module CU PCB (1). 2. Unscrew five screws (2) and remove circuit board CU PCB.

Figure 16.3-9: Sample module, remove CU PCB 16.3.4.3

Assemble Sample Module CU PCB

1. Set new sample module CU PCB (1), in and fasten five screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board, (see chapter 16.6.1 on page 16-24). 3. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 7. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6).

Page 16-10



Set Sample Module CU PCB Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Check the teaching positions of the sample module and, if necessary, teach sample module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 3. Check sensors and reading test (see chapter 16.4.1.2 on page 16-17). 4. Check ambient temperature sensor (see chapter 16.4.1.3 on page 16-17).


Page 16-11

16. Sample Module

16.3.5 16.3.5.1

Replacement of Rack Guides Preliminary Steps


Remove Rack Guides

1. Push guiding rack to the front and remove it by lifting up. 2. Repeat this for all guiding racks.

Figure 16.3-10: Sample Module top view

Page 16-12



Assemble Rack Guides

The guiding racks can be inserted in one direction only. The long guiding racks belong to the front row. The short guiding racks belong to the rear row. 1. The guiding racks are inserted from the top and then pushed by pressing them down in to the rear wall till they snap in.

Figure 16.3-11: Sample Module

Figure 16.3-12: Guiding rack 2. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 7. Check the teaching positions of the sample module and, if necessary, teach sample module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 16-13

16. Sample Module

16.3.6 16.3.6.1

Replacement of Push Push Mechanism Preliminary Steps


Remove Push Push Mechanism

1. Lift snap lock (2) of push push mechanism (1) up, slide the push push to the rear and remove it by lifting up. 2. Repeat this for all push push mechanisms.

Figure 16.3-13: Push Push mechanism, snap lock

Page 16-14


16. Sample Module

Figure 16.3-14: Sample Module rear view 16.3.6.3

Assemble Push Push Mechanism

1. The push push mechanisms are inserted from the top and then pushed by pressing them down in to the rear wall till the snaps lock in.

Figure 16.3-15: Push Push mechanism 2. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 7. Check the teaching positions of the sample module and, if necessary, teach sample module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 16-15

16. Sample Module

16.4



16.4.1

Calibration of Sample Module

16.4.1.1

Configuration Barcode Scanner

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. In Scan Configuration panel of Sample dialogue, press Read button and check the codes currently loaded into the scanner. 3. Verify the codes set on the scanner. The following configuration represents the standard setting to implement: •

Code 39:

•

Code 128, EAN 128: Range: 3 -17 (checksum verify enabled)

•

Codabar:

Range: 3 -17 (checksum disabled)

Range: 3 –17 (checksum disabled)

4. If specifically requested by the customer, enable also 2/5 Interleaved barcode typology, setting the range according to customer needs. (Max. supported range: 3-17). 5. If specifically requested by the customer, set checksum options also (see chapter 7.4.5 on page 7-39 for details). 6. Save the settings with the button Write. A proper setting of 2/5 Interleaved barcode foresees to limit the set range to the number of digits effectively used by the customer.

See also chapter 4.2.5 of LIAISON®XL User Manual for more information regarding the supported barcodes.

“Mod.16” is the only typology of checksum supported by the system.

Page 16-16



Check Sensors and Reading test

Eye Injuries due to Laser Radiation Laser radiation causes eye irritations when the laser beam is looked for a long period of time. •

Never look directly into the laser beam!

•

Do not use optical devices.

•

Take off watches and mirroring jewellery before operating the laser.

•

Be careful during operation and testing of the class 2 laser present on the instrument (the bar code scanner).

Note that the wrong usage of operating elements or of adjustments or the nonobservance of processes can cause a dangerous emission of laser radiation.

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Address the lanes 1 - 10 in the section Scan Operation one after another. 3. After the selection of the individual lane, a read laser beam must be visible at the scanner. 4. Push a test rack equipped with barcoded tubes in the selected lane of the sample module. 5. In Sample dialogue, SW LED under the selected lane must change to green while the read barcodes shall be indicated in Scan Report panel. 6. Check the read barcodes on completeness.

16.4.1.3

Sensor ambient Temperature

1. Open the sub dialogue Miscellaneous in the dialogue Main and push the button Read in the section Sample Sensors. In Ambient Temperature field a value similar to room temperature should be indicated.


Page 16-17

16. Sample Module

16.5

Troubleshooting


16.5.1

Sample Module (16h; 22dec): Error List

Sample Module Decimal

22

Hexadecimal

16

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in (see chapter 6.6.6 on page 6-23). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).


Event ID

Severity

Sub Unit

Error Code

In hexadecimal Device ID

decimal

Cause:

22.0.0

16 00

00

00

No error

Corrective Action:

No error

NO MESSAGE 22.1.0

16 00

01

00

No error

No error

NO MESSAGE 22.2.0

16 00

02

00

No error

No error

NO MESSAGE 22.0.1

16 03

00

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

22.1.1

16 03

01

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

22.2.1

16 03

02

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

22.0.2

16 03

00

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


Page 16-18


16. Sample Module 22.1.2

16 03

01

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


22.2.2

16 03

02

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


22.0.3

16 03

00

03



22.0.4

16 02

00

04


Exchange Sample PCB.

EEPROM WRITE FAILURE 22.0.5

16 03

00

05




If parameter saved, exchange Sample PCB.

EEPROM READ 22.0.6

16 03

00

06

Supply voltage CHN 1 out of range (%1 V). VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT

22.0.7

16 01

00

07

Supply voltage CHN 1 back in range (%1 V)

•


•


•

check power supply

•


•

exchange Sample PCB

--


16 03

00

08

Thermal or short circuit protection of driver.


THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER 22.0.9

16 01

00

09

POSITIONING PROBLEM


POSITION REACHED SEVERAL TIMES 22.0.10

22.0.12

16 03

16 03

00

00

0A

0C

DRIVE NOT MOVING


TARGET NOT REACHED

Mechanic blocked, cable or motor broken.

Error during self test

Exchange Sample PCB.

SELFTEST ERROR 22.0.13

16 03

0D


Check syntax / sequence/ value.


16 03

00

0E


Command not executable, module not ready. Unit busy.

22.1.14

16 03

01

0E




Page 16-19


16 03

02

0E



22.0.15

16 03

00

0F


Command is not implemented. Do not try again.

22.0.16

16 03

00

10


Command takes too much time.

EXECUTION TIMEOUT 22.0.17

22.0.18

16 03

16 03

00

00

11

12

Illegal parameter type definition.

Wrong parameter type defined.

ILLEGAL PARAMETER



Wrong parameter index defined.

PARAMETER NOT FOUND


22.0.19

22.0.20

16 03

16 03

00

00

13

14

PARAMETER ACCESS NOT ALLOWED



Wrong parameter unlock code was send.


22.0.22

16 03

16 03

00

00

15

16

Set authorization.






Illegal parameter length in command.


ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH 22.1.32

22.1.33

16 00

16 01

01

01

20

21

Rack state of position %1 has changed.

Indicates a removed or inserted integral or ancillary rack.

RACK OCCUPATION CHANGED

Indicates rack occupation changes.

Lane %2 activated, but lane was already occupied or rack inserted but laser was off.

Focused lane is occupied. Scanner activation, when lane is occupied.

LANE OCCUPIED 22.1.37

16 01

01

25

WRONG BARCODE COMMUNICATION FORMAT

Wrong reply format from the scanner. Scanner message too long. Wrong scanner command. Scanner still busy.

22.1.38

16 01

01

26

SCANNER ACTIVATED WITHOUT READING STORED BARCODE

The previously read and stored barcode was not requested by the host. Change scanner.

Page 16-20



16 01

01

27

NO SCANNER COMMUNICATION

No scanner acknowledge receive or scanner answer time-out. Change scanner.

22.1.41

16 01

01

29

NO SCANNER ANSWER

Scanner does not reply. No scanner answer received. Change scanner.

22.1.42

16 01

01

2A

SCANNER TEMP TOO HIGH

Scanner temperature is too high

22.1.43

16 01

01

2B

Scanner takes too long to reach the correct polygon speed.

Maximum polygon on time exceeded.

SCANNER POLYGON TIME EXCEEDED 22.1.44

22.1.45

16 01

16 01

01

01

2C

2D

Scanner takes too long to focus

Maximum focus time exceeded.

SCANNER FOCUS TIME EXCEEDED

Scanner takes too long to focus.

Scanner takes too long to switch on laser diode.

Maximum laser on time exceeded.

SCANNER SWITCH ON LASER TIME EXCEEDED 22.1.46

16 01

01

2E

Scanner takes too long to switch off laser diode.

Maximum laser off time exceeded.

SCANNER SWITCH OFF LASER TIME EXCEEDED 22.1.47

16 01

01

2F

SCANNER POLYGON SPEED NOT OK

Scanner error, speed of polygon is not ok. It is necessary to switch on the scanner polygon before switching on the laser diode.

22.1.48

16 01

01

30

SCANNER NOT FOCUSED

Focussing was not possible. It is necessary to focus the scanner before switching on the laser diode.

22.0.49

16 01

00

31

Scanner takes too long to reset.

Scanner reset time exceeded.

SCANNER RESET TIME EXCEEDED 22.1.49

16 01

01

31

Scanner takes too long to reset.

Scanner reset time exceeded.

SCANNER RESET TIME EXCEEDED 22.1.50

16 01

01

32

SCANNER LASER STILL ON

Laser is on during focussing. Switch off laser diode before stopping the polygon or focusing the scanner.


Page 16-21


16 01

01

33

TIMEOUT WHILE WAIT FOR A RACK

Max. time for loading a rack exceeded. Time rack slide in after activating scanner exceeded time defined by parameter scanner activation time. Scanner deactivated.

22.1.52

16 01

01

34

Time-out waiting for a removed rack.

n.a.

22.1.53

16 01

01

35

Scanner restarted

Automated message after self reactivation of the barcode scanner.

22.1.65

16 01

01

41

1ST POSITION BARCODE MISSING (/A)

First position barcode was not found. Check 1st rack position barcode.

22.1.66

16 01

01

42

NO RACK ID BARCODE FOUND

Rack ID barcode was not found. Check rack ID barcode.

22.1.67

16 01

01

43

POSITION BAROCDE MISSING

Wrong order of position barcode. Insert rack slower and check position of barcode.

22.1.68

16 01

01

44

WRONG EMPTY TUBE BARCODE

Error during decoding empty tube barcode. Check empty tube barcodes

22.1.69

16 01

01

45

SAMPLE BARCODE TOO LONG

Wrong position barcode or barcode length. Decrease the number of sample barcode characters.

22.1.70

16 01

01

46

BARCODE AND CHARACTER DOUBLING FAILED

Double and characters in patient barcodes can not added, caused by too less space or no position barcode. Decrease the number of sample barcode characters

22.1.71

16 01

01

47

Rack position barcodes not continuously present or more sample barcodes read than position barcodes.

Barcode information is not correct. Check barcode label.

CHECK BARCODE ERROR 22.0.80

16 02

00

50

ENVIRONMENT TEMPERATURE IS OUT OF RANGE

Environment temperature is below lower temperature limit or above upper temperature limit. The environment temperature has to be in the range of 15° to 32°C (cool down or heat).

22.0.81

Page 16-22

16 01

00

51

ENVIRONMENT TEMPERATURE IS BACK IN RANGE

Only message.



16 03

01

D0

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT BARSCAN ZYKL

Internal state error in the bar scan driver. Internal Scanner Driver error.

22.1.209

16 03

01

D1

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT GET SCANNERSTATUS BACK GROUND


22.1.210

16 03

01

D2

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT READ PARAMETER BACK GROUND


22.1.211

16 03

01

D3

ERR INTERNAL WRITE PARAMETER BACK GROUND ANZ


22.1.212

16 03

01

D4

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT WRITE PARAMETER BACK GROUND


22.1.213

16 03

01

D5

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT GET BARCODE BACK GROUND


22.1.214

16 03

01

D6

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT START POLYGON BACK GROUND


22.1.215

16 03

01

D7

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT STOP POLYGON BACK GROUND


22.1.216

16 03

01

D8

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT SET FOCUS BACK GROUND


22.1.217

16 03

01

D9

ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT LASER ON BACK GROUND


22.1.218

16 03

01

DA ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT LASER OFF BACK GROUND

Internal Scanner Driver error.

22.1.219

16 03

01

DB ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT SCANNER RESET BACK GROUND


22.1.220

16 03

01

DC ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT RESTORE FACTORY BACK GROUND


22.1.221

16 03

01

DD ERR INTERNAL READ SCANNER STATE


22.1.224

16 03

01

ED ERR INTERNAL DEFAULT WAIT POWER ON


22.1.255

16 03

01

FF

Internal error in the BCL148 driver.

INTERNAL ERROR

Table 16.5-1: Sample Module, error list LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 16-23

16. Sample Module

16.6



16.6.1

Sample Module CU PCB

Figure 16.6-1: Sample module CU PCB

Number


J1


J2

Download Connector

J3

Barcode Scanner

J4

Disposable Tip Rack

J5

Temperature Sensor Table 16.6-1: Connections of the Sample Module CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 16.6-2: LEDs of the Sample Module CU PCB

Number

Description

IC1 - IC10

Rack Present Sensor for Sample Lane 1 - Sample Lane 10 Table 16.6-3: Sensors of the Sample Module CU PCB

Page 16-24


17. Reagent Module

17 Reagent Module This chapter describes reagent module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning reagent bay are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Adjustment and Calibration”, “Check and Verification” and Troubleshooting’ ). In the last section reagent PCB layouts are described.

17.1

Safety



•


•



Page 17-1

17. Reagent Module

17.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of reagent module.

Figure 17.2-1: Reagent Module

Figure 17.2-2: Reagent Module, right side view

No

Description

1

Ancillary tray

2

Motor, shake

3

RFID

4

Peltier module Table 17.2-1: Overview reagent module

Page 17-2


17. Reagent Module

17.3

Replacement and Repair

This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the Reagent Module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

17.3.1 17.3.1.1

Replacement of Reagent Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove all integrals and ancillaries from Reagent Module. 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 17.3.1.2

Remove Reagent Module

1. Remove the ancillary tray. 2. Loose one screw (2) of the Reagent Module Cover (1). Do not remove the screw, it is attached to the cover. Lift the left side up and pull the cover to the left side out to remove it.



Page 17-3

17. Reagent Module 3. Disconnect the CAN cable (J1), power cable (J2), fan cable (Fan1-2; J4) on the right side of the reagent module. 4. Unplug waste tubing connector (4) of WAP pump.

Figure 17.3-2: Reagent Module, right side view 5. Unscrew two front screws (9, do not remove them).


Page 17-4


17. Reagent Module 6. Unscrew left side screw (10, do not remove the screw) and right side screw (11).

Figure 17.3-4: Reagent Module, left side view

Figure 17.3-5: Reagent Module, right side view 7. Push the pipettor to the back. 8. Carefully lift the reagent module, remove it from the system and place it on a protective surface. Do not lift the reagent module on the outside of the frame only.


Page 17-5

17. Reagent Module

Be careful while lifting the reagent module out, it is heavy. Hold the module as represented in Figure 17.3.6

Figure 17.3-6: Reagent module

Page 17-6


17. Reagent Module 17.3.1.3

Assemble Reagent Module

1. Carefully lift the reagent module and put it carefully into the system. At the front of the reagent module are two positioning pins, where the reagent module shall be positioned. Do not squeeze or bend any cables or tubes.

Do not lift the reagent module on the outside of the frame only. 2. Screw left side screw (10) clockwise in. 3. Screw right side screw (11) with ground connector clockwise in. 4. Screw two front screws (9) clockwise in. 5. Connect CAN cable (J1), power cable (J2) and fan cable (Fan1-2; J4) onto the reagent module CU PCB at the right side of the reagent module. 6. Plug waste tubing (4) into the WAP connector. 7. Lift the left side of the reagent module cover (1) up, push it carefully to the right side into the holder and set it down. 8. Fasten one screw (2) of the reagent module cover. 9. Insert ancillary tray. 10. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 11. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 12. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 13. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 14. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 17.3.1.4

Teaching of the Reagent Module

1. If necessary (new reagent module equipped), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 2. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 3. If necessary (new reagent module equipped), check the reagent area stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1 on page 17-38). 4. If necessary (new reagent module equipped), check ancillary switch and RFID (see chapter 17.5.1.2 on page 17-39). 5. If necessary (new reagent module equipped), check switch and RFID integrals (see chapter 17.5.1.3 on page 17-39). 6. If necessary (new reagent module equipped), check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 17-7

17. Reagent Module

17.3.2 17.3.2.1

Replacement of Stirrer Motor Preliminary Steps


Remove Stirrer Motor

1. Open front covers and remove reagent area cover. 2. Unplug motor cable (J23) out of reagent module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 3. Loose the threaded screw (6) of the crank drive (5). 4. Loose three screws (2) and remove motor flange (3) 5. Loose four screws (4) and separate the motor (1) from the flange (3).

Figure 17.3-7: Stirrer motor

Page 17-8


17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-8: Stirrer motor mounted on the reagent module

Figure 17.3-9: Stirrer motor mounted on the flange


Page 17-9


Assemble Stirrer Motor

1. Mount the motor (1) onto the flange (3) fixing four screws (4). 2. Push the new motor (1) from beneath up into the crank drive (5). 3. Fix the motor flange to the reagent area using three screws (2). 4. Verify that the crank drive (5) contacts lightly the crank drive adapter (7) (i.e. without excessive pressure) and tighten the threaded screw (6) firmly. 5. Plug motor cable (J23) onto the reagent module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 6. Remount reagent area cover and close front covers. 7. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Check the reagent area stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1 on page 17-38).

Page 17-10


17. Reagent Module

17.3.3 17.3.3.1

Replacement of Stirrer and Sliding Bearings Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 17.3.3.2

Remove Stirrer and Sliding Bearings

1. Loosen the two screws (4) fixing the reagent module CU PCB (3).

Figure 17.3-10: Screws on the front side of the CU PCB 2. Remove the two screws (5) of the back side of the reagent module CU PCB (3).


Page 17-11

17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-11: Screws on the back side of the CU PCB 3. Carefully move the Reagent Module PCB to the front. If necessary, remove cables or loosen the screw (6) of the grounding cable to move it aside.

Figure 17.3-12: Grounding cable 4. Remove the screw (7) of the crank drive adapter (8).

Page 17-12


17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-13: Removing the screw of the crank drive adapter 5. Raise the crank drive adapter (8) upwards and pull out the stirrer rod (2).

Figure 17.3-14: Turn the crank drive adapter upwards


Page 17-13

17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-15: Pulling out the stirrer rod 6. Loose one screw and remove the reagent module cover. Do not remove the screw, it is attached to the cover. Lift the left side up and pull the cover to the left side out to remove it. 7. Remove the three slide bearings from reagent module fins 2, 14 and 25. Push the bearings out with the finger and with the help of a screw driver from the left side direction (Figure 17.3-17).

Fin 25 Fin 14 Fin 2

Figure 17.3-16: Slide bearing removal

Page 17-14


17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-17: Sliding bearing removal 17.3.3.3

Assemble Stirrer and Sliding Bearings

1. Insert the new sliding bearings in the reagent module fins 2, 14 and 25. Pay attention to the orientation, the bigger side of the bearing (1a) shall be positioned to the right side of the fin (see Figure 17.3-19).

Figure 17.3-18: Sliding bearing


Page 17-15

17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-19: Sliding bearing 2. Push the stirrer rod (2) and the crank driver adapter (8) in. Take care of the correct positioning of the init flag and the light barrier of the Reagent Module PCB. If necessary, lift the PCB slightly upwards during the assembly of the crank drive adapter. 3. Tighten the screw (7) of the crank drive adapter (8). 4. If previously loosened, tighten the screw (6) of the grounding cable. 5. Fasten the two screws (5) of the back side of the reagent module CU PCB (3). 6. Tighten the two screws (4) fixing the reagent module CU PCB (3) at the front side. 7. Check the reagent area stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1 on page 17-38). 8. Assemble the reagent module cover. 9. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 10. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).

17.3.4 17.3.4.1

Replacement of Fan Set Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. Page 17-16


17. Reagent Module 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and ancillaries from Reagent Module. 7. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 8. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 17.3.4.2

Remove Fan Set

1. Unscrew cable holder (2) and lift both fans out. 2. Remove foam from fans. 3. Unplug fan connector (FAN 1-2, J4) out of reagent module CU PCB.

Figure 17.3-20: Fan of reagent module 17.3.4.3

Assemble Fan Set

1. Pull the foam over the new fan. 2. Put both fans (1) into the slot and fasten the cable holder (2) with cable. 3. Plug the fan connector (FAN1-2, J4) onto Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 4. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 5. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 6. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 7. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 10. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 11. Check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 17-17

17. Reagent Module

17.3.5 17.3.5.1

Replacement of Cooling Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and the ancillary rack from Reagent Module. 7. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 8. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 17.3.5.2

Remove Cooling Module

1. Remove the reagent area cover. 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of cooling unit. 3. Unscrew cables of cooling unit at clamping block (7).

Figure 17.3-21: Reagent module

Page 17-18



Assemble Cooling Module

Replace the cooling units only by pairs. 1. Clean the surface at the cooling unit of the reagent module. 2. Fasten new cooling unit onto reagent module. 3. Lay the cables into the grooves of the reagent module. 4. Cut cables to needed length, strip cables and clamp cable terminal sleeve onto end of cables. 5. Connect the cable with the clamping block. (7).

Figure 17.3-22: Overview cooling modules

Cooling Module

Cable color at Module

Clamping block (7)

Cable color for PCB

1

red

1

white

black

2

red

2

black

3

brown

red

4

green

black

5

red

5

black

6

yellow

red

7

gray

black

8

red

8

black

9

2

3

4

5

6

pink

Table 17.3-1: Cable colors for cooling module


Page 17-19

17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-23: Clamping block, reagent module 6. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 7. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 8. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 9. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 10. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 11. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 12. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 13. Check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39).

Page 17-20


17. Reagent Module

17.3.6 17.3.6.1

Replacement of Temperature Sensors Overview Temperature Sensors

•

Temperature sensor (1) = white Remove left cooling modules.

•

Temperature sensor (2) = red Remove middle isolation piece only.

•

Temperature sensor (3) = black Remove right cooling modules.

Figure 17.3-24: Overview temperature sensors 17.3.6.2

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and the ancillary rack from Reagent Module. 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8) 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 13. Remove Cooling Module (see chapter 17.3.5.2 on page 17-18). Only at the side where the temperature sensor is defect.


Page 17-21

17. Reagent Module

17.3.6.3

Remove White Temperature Sensor

1. Remove foam (5) out of reagent module (4).

Figure 17.3-25: Remove foam of cooling module 2. Disconnect sensor cable from slot J22, Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48) 3. Remove the sticker, pull temperature sensor (1) out and clean bore.

Figure 17.3-26: Temperature sensor

Page 17-22



Assemble White Temperature Sensor

1. Fill the drilled hole hosting the white temperature sensor (1) with the standard thermal grease (PN 3641010007) by the syringe from the bottom to the half of the height. The sensor should displace the surplus of thermal grease. Remove any excessive paste.

2. After application of the thermal paste, place the sensor on the bottom of the drilled hole and fix it with the sticker (PN 100000391), in order to guarantee a proper thermal coupling of the sensor to the cooling block (see Figure 17.3-28).

Figure 17.3-27: Fixation of the left (white) sensor 3. Verify the temperature sensor is properly fixed before placing the isolation foam part onto it. 4. Lay sensor cable into the reagent module and plug connector in slot J22, Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 5. Insert foam (5) into the reagent module (4). When reinserting the foam isolation part make sure that the sensor cable is not pulled out of its glued position. The stickers are used for pre-fixation. The final fixation will be ensured when the isolation foam part is also re-installed.

6. Assemble Cooling Module (see chapter 17.3.5.3 on page 17-19). 7. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 8. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 9. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3).


Page 17-23

17. Reagent Module 10. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 11. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 12. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 13. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 14. Check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39). 17.3.6.5

Remove Red Temperature Sensor

1. Pull middle foam piece (6) out.

Figure 17.3-28: Remove middle foam piece 2. Disconnect sensor cable from slot J21, Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 3. Remove the sticker, pull red temperature sensor (2) out and clean bore.

Figure 17.3-29: Red temperature sensor

Page 17-24



Assemble Red Temperature Sensor

1. Fill the drilled hole hosting the red temperature sensor (2) with the standard thermal grease (PN 3641010007) by the syringe from the bottom to the half of the height. The sensor should displace the surplus of thermal grease. Remove any excessive paste.


Figure 17.3-30: Fixation of the middle (red) sensor 3. Verify the temperature sensor is properly fixed before placing the isolation foam part onto it. 4. Lay sensor cable into the reagent module and plug connector in slot J21, Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 5. Insert foam (6) into the reagent module. When reinserting the foam isolation part make sure that the sensor cable is not pulled out of its glued position. The sticker is used for pre-fixation. The final fixation will be ensured when the isolation foam part is re-installed.

6. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 7. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 17-25

17. Reagent Module 8. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 9. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 10. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 11. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 12. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 13. Check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39). 17.3.6.7

Remove Black Temperature Sensor

1. Remove foam piece (7) out.

Figure 17.3-31: Remove foam piece 2. Disconnect sensor cable from slot J20, Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 3. Remove the sticker, pull black temperature sensor (3) out and clean bore.

Figure 17.3-32: Remove black sensor

Page 17-26



Assemble Black Temperature Sensor

1. Fill the drilled hole hosting the black temperature sensor (3) with the standard thermal grease (PN 3641010007) by the syringe from the bottom to the half of the height. The sensor should displace the surplus of thermal grease. Remove any excessive paste.


Figure 17.3-33: Fixation of the right (black) sensor 3. Verify the temperature sensor is properly fixed before placing the isolation foam part onto it. 4. Lay sensor cable into the reagent module and plug connector in slot J20, Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 5. Insert foam (7) into the reagent module. When reinserting the foam isolation parts make surethat the sensor cable is not pulled out of its glued position.


Page 17-27

17. Reagent Module

The sticker is used for pre-fixation. The final fixation will be ensured when the isolation foam part is re-installed.

6. Assemble Cooling Module (see chapter 17.3.5.3 on page 17-19). 7. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 8. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 9. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 10. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 11. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 12. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 13. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 14. Check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39).

Page 17-28


17. Reagent Module

17.3.7 17.3.7.1

Replace Reagent Module CU PCB Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and ancillaries from Reagent Module. 7. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 8. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 17.3.7.2

Remove Reagent Module CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of reagent module CU PCB (1). 2. Loose two screws at the left (2) and two screws at the right (3) and remove circuit board. 3. Behind the two screws at the right side of the PCB (3), PA-washers (4) can be present. Take care not to loose them when removing the PCB.

Figure 17.3-34: Remove reagent module CU PCB


Page 17-29

17. Reagent Module

Figure 17.3-35: PA washer behind the PCB 17.3.7.3

Assemble Reagent Module CU PCB

The light barrier for the frequency detection of the reagent bay stirrer sporadically detected the doubled frequency. Due to manufacturing tolerances the light barrier detected the flag twice but the real frequency of the stirrer was correct. To avoid future occurrences, the manufacturer decided to rework the PCB fixation, raising up the right side of the PCB by two 0.5 mm washers (PA-Washer DIN 125 for M3). With the additional washers, the PCB with the light barrier is slightly shifted to avoid the double-detection. The rework was performed on the following instruments: 2210000354, 2210000356 – 363, 2210000366 – 381, 22100000383 – 392, 2210000394 and higher 1. If available, place the two washers (4) on the screw threads (3) on the right side of the PCB. 2. Set new reagent module CU PCB (1) in and fasten two screws at the left (2) and two screws at the right (3). 3. Plug all cables onto circuit board, (see chapter 17.7.1 on page 17-48). 4. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 5. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 6. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 7. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6).

Page 17-30



Set Reagent Module CU PCB Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 3. Check the reagent area stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1 on page 17-38). 4. Check ancillary switch and RFID (see chapter 17.5.1.2 on page 17-39). 5. Check switch and RFID integrals (see chapter 17.5.1.3 on page 17-39). 6. Check temperature (see section 17.5.1.4 on page 17-39).


Page 17-31

17. Reagent Module

17.3.8 17.3.8.1

Replacement of 13-Fold-RFID Antenna Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and ancillaries from Reagent Module. 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 17.3.8.2

Remove 13-Fold-RFID Antenna

1. Remove foam piece (2) of reagent module (1).

Figure 17.3-36: Remove foam piece

Page 17-32


17. Reagent Module 2. Plug all cables out, see 13-FOLD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB (see chapter 17.7.2 on page 17-50). 3. The 13-Fold RFID Antenna is fixed with double sided adhesive tape onto the reagent module. Pull the defect 13-Fold RFID Antenna (3) and/or (4) out.

Figure 17.3-37: Remove 13.Fold RFID Antenna 17.3.8.3

Assemble 13-Fold-RFID Antenna

The circuit boards have positioning holes and the reagent module got plastic positioning pins. 1. Position the new 13-Fold RFID Antenna (3) and/or (4) at the plastic pins and then fix with double sided adhesive tape in. 2. Plug cables in, see 13-FOLD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB (see chapter 17.7.2 on page 17-50). 3. Set foam piece (2) over the circuit board. 4. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 5. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 6. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 7. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 10. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 11. Check switch and RFID integrals (see chapter 17.5.1.3 on page 17-39).


Page 17-33

17. Reagent Module

17.3.9 17.3.9.1

Replacement of Quad RFID Antenna Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and ancillaries from Reagent Module. 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 17.3.9.2

Remove Quad RFID Antenna

1. Remove foam piece of left side at reagent module. 2. Unplug two cables (2 and 3). 3. QUAD RFID CU PCB is fixed with double sided adhesive tape onto reagent module. Pull carefully CU PCB off.

Figure 17.3-38: View onto QUAD RFID CU PCB 17.3.9.3

Assemble Quad RFID Antenna

The circuit boards have positioning holes and the reagent module got plastic positioning pins. 1. Fix QUAD RFID CU PCB with double sided adhesive tape onto the reagent module, during positioning onto plastic pins. 2. Plug cables (2 and 3) onto circuit board. 3. Set foam piece onto left side of reagent module. 4. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 5. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6).

Page 17-34


17. Reagent Module 6. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 7. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 10. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 11. Check ancillary switch and RFID (see chapter 17.5.1.2 on page 17-39).

17.3.10 17.3.10.1

Replacement of Micro Switch Bay Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the front covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to save location. 6. Remove all integrals and the ancillary rack from Reagent Module. 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 9. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 10. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 11. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 12. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 13. Remove Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.3.7.2 on page 17-29). 14. Remove Stirrer (see chapter 17.3.3.2 on page 17-11) 15. Remove Cooling Modules (see chapter 17.3.5.2 on page 17-18). 17.3.10.2

Remove Micro Switch Bay

1. Remove outer and inner isolation of left (1) and right (2) side at reagent module. 2. Remove carefully isolation RFID (3).


Page 17-35

17. Reagent Module


3. Unscrew sixteen screws (4) of inner hull.

Figure 17.3-40: Reagent Module 4. Lift cooling block out of the inner hull. 5. Remove Micro Switch Bay (5).

Figure 17.3-41: Cooling block

Page 17-36


17. Reagent Module

17.3.10.3

Assemble Micro Switch Bay

The catches must be fully engaged onto the cooling block. 1. Click the micro switch bay into place. 2. Screw the cooling block onto the inner hull with sixteen screws (4). Press the cooling block against the rear panel while fastening the screws. 3. Insert outer and inner isolation of left (1) and right (2) side onto reagent module. 4. Insert carefully isolation RFID (3). 5. Assemble Cooling Module (see chapter 17.3.5.3 on page 17-19). 6. Assemble Stirrer (see chapter 17.3.3.3 on page 17-15). 7. Assemble Reagent Module CU PCB (see chapter 17.3.7.3 on page 17-30). 8. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 9. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 10. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 11. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 12. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 13. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 14. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1). 15. Check ancillary switch and RFID (see chapter 17.5.1.2 on page 17-39). 16. Check switch and RFID integrals (see chapter 17.5.1.3 on page 17-39). 17. Check reagent area stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1 on page 17-38).


Page 17-37

17. Reagent Module

17.4 17.4.1 17.4.1.1

Adjustment and Calibration Calibration of Reagent Module Function of the condensate aspiration

1. Approximate 2-3 ml DI water are poured into the drain of the reagent module with a suitable container so that it is covered with liquid. 2. Now open the Washer dialogue in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 3. Switch on the aspiration pump in the sub dialogue Liquid with the button WAP On. The liquid in the drain of the reagent module must now be aspirated. 4. Switch off the pump with WAP Off directly afterwards.

17.5 17.5.1 17.5.1.1

Check and Verification Check Reagent Module Check Reagent Area Stirring

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. First switch on the reagent stirrer in the section Stirrer Mode with Start. 3. Now open the sub dialogue Miscellaneous in the dialogue Main and read out the value of the Stirrer Index Pulses (Pulse Range 148-168) in the window Reagent Sensors with Read. Before the value can be read out, the stirrer should be switched on for at least 20s. 4. After reading, switch stirrer mode back to Auto. 5. Insert integrals in all 25 lanes of the reagent module and verify the proper rotation of magnetic particle vials. The best scenario to make the check described at point 5 foresees to equip integrals in all 25 lanes at the same time. In case it is not possible to verify this condition (e.g. not enough integrals are available at customer site), perform the test placing in the reagent module at the same time as many integrals as possible (e.g. 10 by 10 or 5 by 5). In any case a check of all 25 lanes shall be done.

Page 17-38



Check ancillary switch and RFID

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Select the dialogue Reagent. Now push the ancillary tray back and forth several times. During that, the green LED in the dialogue must switch. 3. Now, the four RFID readers are checked one after the other. For that, an ancillary is hanged in pos.1 (with RFID TAG) and pushed into the track. 4. Select the Ancillary Pos 1 in the window Reagent Bay and read out and test the TAG in the window RFID Operation with the button Test TAG Read / Write. Pass must be indicated in the window R/W. 5. Repeat this process for positions 2-4. 17.5.1.3

Check switch and RFID integrals

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. An integral equipped with an RFID TAG is pushed into lane 1. Check if the stirrer starts and the green LED belonging to the lane flashes. 3. Now, select lane 1 in the window Reagent Bay and test the TAG with the button Test TAG Read / Write. Pass must be indicated in the window R/W. 4. Repeat this process for the lanes 2 – 25. 17.5.1.4

Check Temperature

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. System must be switched on and initialised for at least one hour to be operational for read-out of temperature. 3. Read out correct temperature, pressing Read button in Main and Reagent Temperature sub-dialogue. 4. Check the values reported in Correct Temp column.

Sensor

Temperature Range

Reagent Module, left

11.0°C to 15.0°C

Reagent Module, middle

11.0°C to 15.0°C

Reagent Module, right

11.0°C to 15.0°C Table 17.5-1: Temperature


Page 17-39

17. Reagent Module

17.6

Troubleshooting


17.6.1

Reagent Module (17h, 23dec): Error List

Reagent Module Decimal

23

Hexadecimal

17

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes Reagent Module (see chapter 6.6.7 on page 6-24). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2). Service Software User Software

23.0.0

17

00 00 00 No Message

No error

23.1.0

17

01 00 00 No Message

No error

23.2.0

17

02 00 00 No Message

No error

23.1.1

17

03 01 01 Stirrer not initialized

Initialize stirrer.

Sub Unit Error Code

Event ID

Severity

In hexadecimal Device ID

decimal

Cause:

Not initialised 23.0.2

17

03 00 02 Unknown command

Corrective Action:

Sent init-command Use correct command ID Check syntax / sequence.

23.1.2

17


Use correct command ID Check syntax / sequence.

23.2.2

17


Use correct command ID Check syntax / sequence.

23.0.3

17

03 00 03 PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE


23.1.3

17



23.2.3

17



23.0.4

17

03 00 04 Write failure of permanent parameter

Exchange Reagent PCB.

EEPROM WRITE FAILURE

Page 17-40


17. Reagent Module 23.0.5

17

03 00 05 Read failure of permanent parameter. PARAMETER READ FAILURE

If parameter saved, exchange Reagent PCB.

EEPROM READ 23.0.6

17

03 00 06 Supply voltage CHN 1 out of range (%1 V). VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT

check fuses / replace fuses check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange Reagent PCB

23.0.7

17

00 00 07 Supply voltage CHN 1 back in range (%1 V)

---


17

03 01 0E Stirrer active. Unable to execute command.

Unit busy.

COMMAND EXECUTION 23.0.16

17

03 00 10 Command execution time-out.



17

03 01 10 Stirrer command execution timeout.



17

03 00 11 Illegal parameter type definition. ILLEGAL PARAMETER

23.0.18

17

03 00 12 Invalid parameter index PARAMETER NOT FOUND

23.0.19

17

03 00 13 Access to parameter not allowed. PARAMETER ACCESS NOT ALLOWED

23.0.20

17

03 00 14 PARAMETER WRONG CODE

Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command. Select correct parameter index. Set correct parameter type. Set parameter authorization. Set authorization. Enter valid access code.


17

03 00 15 Illegal parameter type in command


ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE 23.0.22

17

03 00 16 Illegal parameter length in command. ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH

Enter parameter in correct length. Enter parameter in correct length.

23.0.32

17

00 00 20 Rack occupation changed lane %1 to %2. Rack inserted or removed in/from according lane. RACK OCCUPATION CHANGED Indicates rack occupation changes.

23.0.33

17

03 00 21 Supply voltage CHN 2 out of range (%1 V) UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT CHN2


Check supply check wiring exchange module

Page 17-41

17. Reagent Module 23:0:34

17

01 00 22 Supply voltage CHN 2 back in range (%1 V):

--

VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE CHN2 23:0:35

17

03 00 23 Supply voltage CHN 3 out of range (%1 V): UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT IN CHN3:

23:0:36

17

01 00 24 Supply voltage CHN 3 back in range (%1 V):

Check supply check wiring exchange module --

VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE CHN3 23:0:37

17

02 00 25 Left reagent temperature out of range (%1 °C)

Parameter required reagent temperature in °C 100 ±1°C

23.0.38

17

02 00 26 Middle reagent temperature out of range (%1 °C)


23.0.39

17

02 00 27 Right reagent temperature out of range (%1 °C)


23.0.40

17

01 00 28 All reagent temperatures back in range (%1 °C)

No action.

23.0.41

17

01 00 29 Left seebeck voltage too low (%1 V)

Left peltier elements defect or not connected.

23.0.42

17

01 00 2A Left seebeck voltage too high (%1 V)

Left peltier elements defect or peltier fans defect.

23.0.43

17

01 00 2B Middle seebeck voltage too low (%1 V)

Middle peltier elements defect or not connected.

23.0.44

17

01 00 2C Middle seebeck voltage too high (%1 V).

Middle peltier elements defect or peltier fans defect.

23.0.45

17

01 00 2D Right seebeck voltage too low (%1 V).

Right peltier elements defect or not connected

23.0.46

17

01 00 2E Right seebeck voltage too high (%1 V)

Right peltier elements defect or peltier fans defect.

23.0.47

17

01 00 2F Seebeck voltage difference to high (%1 V)

Peltier elements defect or not connected

23.1.48

17

02 01 30 Stirrer rotation not ok

Check stirrer motor or stirrer rotation sensor.

23.0.49

17

02 00 31 I2C bus to left integral sensor area defect.

Check wiring/connectors to left reagent antennas.

23.0.50

17

02 00 32 I2C bus to right integral sensor area defect.

Check wiring/connectors to right reagent antennas.

23.1.51

17

00 01 33 Stirrer activation changed %1 (0:deactivated, 1:activated)

Indicates a started or stopped stirrer.

23.1.255

17

03 01 FF Internal error

--Table 17.6-1: Reagent Module, error list

Page 17-42


17. Reagent Module

17.6.2

RFID Module (40h; 64dec): Error List

RFID Module Decimal

64

Hexadecimal

40

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in. For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).


Cause:

Corrective Action:

Error Code

40 00 00

Sub Unit

64.0.0

Severity

Event ID

Device ID

decimal

00

No error no message

64.1.0

40 00 01

00

No error no message

64.2.0

40 00 02

00

No error no message

---

40 03 00

01

not initialized

send init-command

64.0.2

40 03 00

02

unknown command

Use correct command ID. Wrong command code. Check Syntax / sequence

64.1.2

40 03 01

02

unknown command


64.2.2

40 03 02

02

unknown command


64.0.3

40 03 00

03



parameter out of range LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 17-43


40 03 01

03



parameter out of range 64.2.3

40 03 02

03



Parameter out of range. 64.0.4

40 02 00

04


Exchange PCB.

Parameter write failure.

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module

64.0.5

64.0.6

40 03 00

40 03 00

05

06


Exchange PCB.

Parameter read failure.

If parameters saved exchange module.

Supply voltage out of range (%1 V).


Under voltage detect.

check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange module

64.0.7

40 01 00

07

Supply voltage back in range (%1 V).

Only message.

Voltage back in range. 64.1.14

40 03 01

0E

Reader unable to execute command. Command execution error.

Command not executable, module not ready. Unit is busy

64.2.14

40 03 02

0E

Antenna unable to execute command. Command not executable, module not ready. Command execution error. Unit is busy

40 03

0F

command not implemented

64.0.16

40 03 00

10

General command execution time-out. Command execution takes too much time. Execution time-out.

64.1.16

40 03 01

10

Reader command execution time-out. Execution time-out.

Do not try again

Command execution takes too much time.

64.2.16

40 03 02

10

Antenna command execution time-out. Command execution takes too much time. Execution time-out.

64.0.17

40 03 00

11

Illegal parameter type definition. illegal parameter

64.0.18

40 03 00

12


Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command Select correct parameter index

Parameter not found. 64.0.19

40 03 00

13


Set parameter authorization.

Parameter access not allowed.

Page 17-44



40 03 00

14



invalid authorization 64.0.21

40 03 00

15

Illegal parameter type in command

Set correct parameter type

invalid parameter type 64.0.22

40 03 00

16



Wrong parameter length. VICC Errors:

Error code sent from VICC Note: Error offset of 20h used.

64.1.33

40 01 01

21

ISO15693 RFID tag error 0x01: The command is not supported.

Check RFID tag type

Error Code sent from VICC The command is not supported i.e. command code is not recognized 40 01

22

Error Code sent from VICC The command is not recognized, i.e. a format error occurred

40 01

23

Error Code sent from VICC The option is not supported

64.1.47

40 01 01

2F

ISO15693 RFID tag error 0x0F: Error with no information given or a specific error code is not supported.

Check RFID tag type.

Error Code sent from VICC Unknown error 64.1.48

40 01 01

30

ISO15693 RFID tag error 0x0F: Error with no information given or a specific error code is not supported.

Check RFID tag type.

Error Code sent from VICC The specified block/page is not available (does not exist) 64.1.49

40 01 01

31

ISO15693 RFID tag error 0x11: The specified block is already locked and thus cannot be locked again.

Check RFID tag type, exchange according integral or ancillary.

Error Code sent from VICC The specified block is already locked and thus cannot be locked again 64.1.50

40 01 01

32

ISO15693 RFID tag error 0x12: The specified block is locked and its content cannot be changed.

Check RFID tag type, exchange according integral or ancillary.

Error Code sent from VICC The specified block is locked and its content cannot be changed


Page 17-45

17. Reagent Module 40 01

33

Error Code sent from VICC The specified block was not successfully programmed

40 01

34

Error Code sent from VICC The specified block was not successfully locked Reader Errors:

64.0.64

40 02 00

40

Reader Message RFID decoder interface

Unable to communicate with Reader IC. Change RFID Reader CU PCB.

RFID decoder interface. Unable to communicate with reader IC. 64.1.64

40 02 01

40

Reader Message RFID decoder interface

Unable to communicate with Reader IC. Change RFID Reader CU PCB.

RFID decoder interface. Unable to communicate with reader IC. 64.0.65

40 02 00

41

Antenna interface. Unable to communicate with antenna. Reader Message Antenna interface

64.2.65

40 02 02

41

Antenna interface. Unable to communicate with antenna. Reader Message Antenna interface

64.1.66

40 02 01

42

RFID write/compare check failure (%1 block number). Reader Message. RFID write/compare check failure.

Unable to communicate with antenna. Change RFID Reader CU PCB Check wiring, check module, exchange PCB. Unable to communicate with antenna. Change RFID Reader CU PCB Check wiring, check module, exchange PCB. Integral or ancillary not inserted correctly. Check RFID tag on integral or ancillary. Writing to RFID tag failed. Verify if one block/page is protected from writing?

64.1.67

40 01 01

43

Wrong RFID tag receive length. Reader Message Wrong VICC receive length

64.1.68

40 01 01

44

Multiple RFID tags in field. Reader Message Multiple VICC in field

Integral or ancillary not inserted correctly. Check RFID tag on integral or ancillary. The answer from the VICC has the wrong length. Maybe the VICC does not have the given number of blocks and answers only with the number of blocks it has. Check RFID tag on integral or ancillary. Multiple RFID tags glued? Check placement of antennas. The command “ISO15693 Read Block(s) with UID” detected more than one VICC in the Reader field

Page 17-46



40 01 01

45

Tag time-out. No answer received from RFID tag. Reader Message.

Integral or ancillary not inserted correctly. Check RFID tag on integral or ancillary.

VICC time-out. No answer received from VICC. 64.1.70

40 01 01

46

RFID reader IC error: No RFID tag found. RFID Reader IC error: No VICC or label found

Integral or ancillary not inserted correctly. Check RFID tag on integral or ancillary. No VICC in the Reader fieldCorrect antenna selected?

64.1.71

40 01 01

47

RFID reader IC error: Checksum error. Integral or ancillary not inserted correctly. Check RFID tag on RFID Reader IC error: Checksum integral or ancillary. error

64.1.72

40 01 01

48

RFID reader IC error: Bit collision error. RFID Reader IC error: Bit collision Error

64.1.73

40 01 01

49

RFID reader IC error: Bit framing error. RFID Reader IC error: Framing error

40 40 00



Custom VICC errors: 50

Reader Message Rack Occupation Changed

40 02

60

Aspirate Control/Calibrate Liquid Level too low

40 01

61

Aspirate Control/Calibrate Liquid level OK

The liquid level of starter reagent is very low. The liquid level of starter reagent is full again.

64.1.192

40 02 01

C0

My-d RFID tag error 0xA0: Error during authentication or wrong MAC.

---

64.1.193

40 02 01

C1

My-d RFID tag error 0xA1: Access --denied. Either read from secure pages without authentication or page is locked and its content cannot be changed.

64.1.241

40 02 01

F1

RFID reader IC error: Bit framing error.


64.1.254

40 02 01

FE

RFID tag internal

---

64.2.255

40 02 02

FF

Antenna internal

--Table 17.6-2: RFID Module, error list


Page 17-47

17. Reagent Module

17.7



17.7.1

Reagent Module CU PCB

Figure 17.7-1: Reagent module CU

Page 17-48

Number


J1

Master COP (J21 - CAN-Bus)

J2

Master COP (J20 - Power)

J3

Unused

J4

FAN 1+2

J6

Download Connector 1

J7

QUAD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB (Ancillaries)

J8

13-FOLD_RFID_ANTENNA PCB (1 - 12)


17. Reagent Module J9

Unused

J10

QUAD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB (Ancillaries)

J11

13-FOLD_RFID_ANTENNA PCB (Integrals 13 - 26)

J12

13-FOLD_RFID_ANTENNA PCB (Integrals 1 - 12)

J13

Download Connector 1

J14

Peltier Modules

J17

Tray Sensors (Microswitch Bay)

J20

Temperature Sensor Left (black sensor)

J21

Temperature Sensor Middle (red sensor)

J22

Temperature Sensor Right (white sensor)

J23

Stirrer Motor

J24

Unused Table 17.7-1: Connections of the Regagent Module CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 17.7-2: LEDs of the Regagent Module CU PCB


Page 17-49

17. Reagent Module

17.7.2

13-FOLD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB

Figure 17.7-2: 13-FOLD-RFID-ANTENNA There will be used two identical boards: •

First PCB with antenna 1 - 12

•

Second PCB with antenna 13 - 26.

Number


J2

Next PCB: First PCB (1 - 12): Second PCB (13 - 26), J4 Second PCB (13 - 26): Unused

J3

Antenna Cable: First PCB (1 - 12): Reagent Module CU PCB (J12) Second PCB (13 - 26): Reagent Module CU PCB (J11)

J4

Previous PCB: First PCB (1 - 12): Reagent Module CU PCB (J8) Second PCB (13 - 26): First PCB (1 - 12), J2 Table 17.7-3: Connections of the 13-FOLD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB

17.7.3

QUAD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB

Figure 17.7-3: QUAD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB

Number


J1

Antenna Cable: Reagent Module CU PCB (J10)

J2

Reagent Module CU PCB (J7) Table 17.7-4: Connections of the QUAD-RFID-ANTENNA PCB

Page 17-50



Micro Switch Bay

Figure 17.7-4: Micro Switch Bay

Number

Connection/Description Reagent Module CU PCB (J17) Table 17.7-5: Connections of the Micro Bay Switch PCB


Page 17-51

18. Starter Reagent Module

18 Starter Reagent Module This chapter describes starter reagent module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning starter reagent bay are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Adjustment and Calibration” and “Troubleshooting”). In the last section RFID starter PCB layout is described.

18.1

Safety



•


•



Page 18-1


18.2

Overview

Figure 18.2-1: Starter Reagent Module

Figure 18.2-2: Starter Reagent bottom view

No

Description

1

Bubble Sensors: 1a: Bubble Sensor Starter 1 (Left) 1b: Bubble Sensor Starter 1 (Right) 1c: Bubble Sensor Starter 2 (Left) 1d: Bubble Sensor Starter 2 (Right)

Page 18-2


18. Starter Reagent Module 2

Valve Starter 1 (Left) Tube labelling: Tube 1: Starter 1 (Right) Tube 3: Starter 1 (Left)

3

ValveStarter 2 (Right) Tube labelling: Tube 1: Starter 2 (Right) Tube 3: Starter 2 (Left)

4

RFID Starter CU PCB Table 18.2-1: Overview starter reagent module

18.2.1




Page 18-3


18.3

Replacement and Repairs

This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the Starter Reagent Module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

18.3.1 18.3.1.1

Replacement of Starter Reagent Module Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 7. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 18.3.1.2

Remove Starter Reagent Module

Do not bend or damage any tubes while disassembly or assembly of the Starter Reagent Module. 1. Remove the bottles by pressing the handles (3) together and lift them up. 2. Move bottles to a safe position. 3. Unscrew two screws (2) of the Starter Reagent Bracket (1).


Page 18-4



Be aware of tube color positions. 4. Lift the Starter Reagent Module a bit up and out, then unplug the CAN-Cable (4), unscrew two fittings (5) and lift the Starter Reagent Module aside.

Figure 18.3-2: Starter Reagent Module, bottom view 5. Unscrew three screws (7) of mounting plate (6).



Page 18-5

18. Starter Reagent Module 18.3.1.3

Assemble Starter Reagent Module

1. Set the mounting plate (6) onto the module and fasten with three screws (7). 2. Plug the CAN cable (4) into the Starter Reagent Module PCB. 3. Screw two fittings (5) into correct position. Check for correct positioning of the tubes. Blue marked tube is on left side. Red marked tube is on the right side. 4. Lift Starter Reagent Module into machine, without damaging any tubes. 5. Fasten two screws (2) of the Starter Reagent Module (1). 6. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 7. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 8. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 9. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 18.3.1.4

Teaching of the Starter Reagent Module

1. If necessary (new starter reagent module equipped), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 2. If necessary (new starter reagent module equipped), recalibrate the bubble sensors (see chapter 18.4.1.3 on page 18-13). 3. Perform starter prime (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22). 4. If necessary (new starter reagent module equipped), perform functional test of valves (see chapter 18.4.1.1 on page 18-13 ). 5. If necessary (new starter reagent module equipped), perform RFID reading test (see section 18.4.1.2 on page 18-13).

Page 18-6



18.3.2 18.3.2.1

Replacement of Valves, Starter Reagent Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 7. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 8. Remove Starter Reagent Module (see chapter 18.3.1.2 on page 18-4). 18.3.2.2

Remove Valves, Starter Reagent

1. Unscrew fittings (1 and 3) of valve (2) and unplug connector (4) of RFID Starter CU PCB (5). 2. Unscrew fittings (7 and 8) of valve (6) and unplug connector (9) of RFID Starter CU PCB (5).

Figure 18.3-4: Starter Reagent Module, bottom view 3. Unscrew valves (2 and 6) with two screws (10) each.


Page 18-7


Figure 18.3-5: Starter Reagent Module, top view 18.3.2.3

Assemble Valve, Starter Reagent

1. Fasten valves (2 and 6) with two screws (10) each onto starter reagent module. 2. Fasten fittings (1 and 3) onto valve (2) and plug connector (4) onto RFID Starter CU PCB (5). 3. Fasten fittings (7 and 8) onto valve (6) and plug connector (9) onto RFID Starter CU PCB (5).

Figure 18.3-6: Valve top view 4. Assemble Starter Reagent Module (see chapter 18.3.1.3 on page 18-6). 5. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 6. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 7. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Perform starter prime (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22). 10. Perform functional test of valves (see chapter 18.4.1.1 on page 18-13).

Page 18-8



18.3.3 18.3.3.1

Replacement of Starter Bubble Sensor and Tubing Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor arms to save location. 5. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 9. Remove Starter Reagent Module (see chapter 18.3.1.2 on page 18-4). 18.3.3.2

Remove Starter Bubble Sensor and Tubing

1. Unplug connectors of: Bubble Sensor Starter 2 (Right) (J6), Bubble Sensor Starter 2 (Left) (J5), Bubble Sensor Starter 1 (Right) (J4) and Bubble Sensor Starter 1 (Left) (J3) of RFID Starter CU PCB (5). 2. Unscrew fittings (1 and 3) of valve starter 1 left (2) and fittings of valve starter 2 right (4). 3. Pull the tubings and cables together carefully out.

Figure 18.3-7: Starter Reagent, Bubble Sensor disassemble


Page 18-9


Assemble Starter Bubble Sensor and Tubing

1. Insert starter bubble sensors. Plug connectors in according to Table 18.3-1. Bubble Sensor

Side

Slot on PCB

Connector color

1a

Bubble Sensor Starter 1

Left

J3

black

1b


Right

J4

white

1c


Left

J5

red

1d


Right

J6

yellow

Table 18.3-1: Bubble Sensor Layout 2. The tubes and the cables must be inserted so that they fall into the edges. That is important for the movements of the tubes and cables. 3. Screw fittings (1 and 3) of valve starter 1 left (2) and fittings of valve starter 2 right (4).

Figure 18.3-8: Starter Reagent, assemble Bubble Sensors 4. Assemble Starter Reagent Module (see chapter 18.3.1.3 on page 18-6). 5. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 6. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 7. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 8. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 9. Perform starter prime (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22). 10. Calibrate the replaced bubble sensors (see chapter 18.4.1.3 on page 18-13).

Page 18-10



18.3.4

RFID Starter CU PCB

18.3.4.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6) 6. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3).. 7. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 8. Remove Starter Reagent Module (see chapter 18.3.1.2 on page 18-4). 18.3.4.2

Remove RFID Starter CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of RFID Starter CU PCB (1). 2. Loose two screws (2) and take circuit board out.

Figure 18.3-9: Remove RFID Starter CU PCB 18.3.4.3

Assemble RFID Starter CU PCB

1. Set new RFID Starter CU PCB (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board, (see chapter 18.6.1 on page 18-21). 3. Assemble Starter Reagent Module (see chapter 18.3.1.3 on page 18-6). 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).


Page 18-11


Set RFID Starter CU PCB Parameter

1. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 2. Perform starter prime (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22). 3. Recalibrate the bubble sensors (see chapter 18.4.1.3 on page 18-13). 4. Perform functional test of valves (see chapter 18.4.1.1 on page 18-13). 5. Perform RFID reading test (see section 18.4.1.2 on page 18-13).

Page 18-12



18.4



18.4.1

Calibrations of Starter Reagent Module

18.4.1.1

Functional test of Change-over valves

1. Open Service Software, go to Front and Loading Units service window and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 2. Go to StartReag dialogue and choose the Starter Reagent A / B tab. In the Valves area, switch one after the other valve a couple of times to Left and Right. The valve must make a switching noise. 18.4.1.2

RFID reading test

3. Open Service Software, go to Front and Loading Units service window and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 4. In RFID Antenna Selection and Operation area of StartReag dialogue, choose one by one Bottles 1 to 4. 5. After a test bottle with RFID Tag is chosen, set the bottle into the position of the Starter Reagent Module. The Tag of the bottle must show backwards to the rear wall. 6. Once inserted the bottle, press Test Tag Read / Write button. 7. If the RFID Tag was read out correctly, label Pass shall appear in R/W window. 18.4.1.3

Calibration of Bubble Sensor

1. Open Service Software go to Front and Loading Units service window and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 2. In Aspiration area of StartReag dialogue, choose one by one Bottles 1 to 4. 3. Fill a test bottle with DI water and insert the appendant sensor. 4. Press Calibrate button to calibrate the sensor and follow the appearing screens. 5. During the single calibration process, pay attention to the sensor, so the fluid gets into the starter tube aspirated and then dispensed back. •

Target with fluid: <=1.5V

•

Target without fluid: >=3.5V


Page 18-13


18.5

Troubleshooting


18.5.1

Starter Reagent Module (45; 46h): Error List

Starter Reagent A Module

Starter Reagent B Module

Decimal

69

70

Hexadecimal

45

46

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in. For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).


45

00 00

70.0.0

46

69.1.0

45

70.1.0

46

69.2.0

45

70.2.0

46

69.3.0

45

70.3.0

46 45

Cause:

00

No error NO MESSAGE

00 01

00

No error NO MESSAGE

00 02

00

No error NO MESSAGE

00 03

00

No error NO MESSAGE

03

Corrective Action:

Error Code

69.0.0

Sub Unit

Event ID

Severity


decimal

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Main module executed command with no error. RFID reader module executed command with no error. Antenna module executed command with no error. Aspirate module executed command with no error. Send init-command

46

Page 18-14


18. Starter Reagent Module 69.0.2

45

70.0.2

46

03 00

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Use correct command ID and command length. Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence.

69.1.2

45

70.1.2

46

03 01

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


69.2.2

45

70.2.2

46

03 02

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


69.3.2

45

70.3.2

46

03 03

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


69.0.3

45

70.0.3

46

69.1.3

45

70.1.3

46

69.2.3

45

70.2.3

46

69.3.3

45

70.3.3

46

69.0.4

45

70.0.4

46

03 00

03

PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE Check parameter range.

03 01

03


03 02

03


03 03

03


02 00

04


Exchange module. Exchange Starter Reagent PCB.

PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE 69.0.5

45

70.0.5

46

03 00

05

Read failure of permanent parameter. EEPROM READ

69.0.6

45

70.0.6

46

03 00

06

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module. Exchange Starter Reagent PCB.

Supply voltage out of range (%1 check fuses / replace fuses V). check cable / replace cable VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE check power supply UNDER VOLTAGEDETECT check power supply to system exchange Starter Reagent PCB.

69.0.7

45

70.0.7

46

01 00

07

Supply voltage back in range (%1 V).

Main Module detected supply voltage back in range.



Page 18-15


45

70.1.14

46

03 01

0E Reader unable to execute command. COMMAND EXECUTION

69.2.14

45

70.2.14

46

03 02

0E Antenna unable to execute command. COMMAND EXECUTION

69.3.14

45

70.3.14

46 45

03 03

0E Aspirate unable to execute command.

45

70.0.16

46

Unit busy. Command not executable, module not ready. Unit busy. Command not executable, module not ready.

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

03

0F


Do not try again.

03 00

10

General command execution time-out.

Command execution takes too much time

46 69.0.16

Command not executable, module not ready.


45

70.1.16

46

03 01

10

Reader command execution time-out.



45

70.2.16

46

03 02

10

Antenna command execution time-out.



45

70.3.16

46

03 03

10

Aspirate command execution time-out.



45

70.0.17

46

69.3.17

45

70.3.17

46

69.0.18

45

70.0.18

46

69.0.19

45

70.0.19

46

03 00

11

Illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter ILLEGAL PARAMETER command.

03 03

11

Illegal parameter type definition. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter ILLEGAL PARAMETER command.

03 00

12



PARAMETER NOT FOUND




03 00

13

PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED 69.1.19

45

70.1.19

46

03 01

13



PARAMETER NOT ALLOWED 69.0.20

45

70.0.20

46

03 00

14



PARAMETER WRONG CODE INVA AUTHORIZATION

Page 18-16



45

70.0.21

46

03 00

15




45

70.0.22

46

03 00

16



ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH VICC ERRORS.

Error code sent from VICC. Note: Error offset of 20h used.

69.1.33

45

70.1.33

46

01 01

21

VICC ERROR. THE COMMAND IS NOT SUPPORTED;

Check RFID tag type on the Bottle and exchange the TAG accordingly.

I:E: COMMAND CODE IS NOT RECOGNIZED 45

01

22

46

VICC ERROR. THE COMMAND IS NOT RECOGNIZED I.E A FORMAT ERROR OCCURED

45

01

23

46 69.1.47

45

70.1.47

46

VICC ERROR. THE OPTION IS NOT SUPPORTED

01 01

2F

VICC ERROR. Error with no information given or a specific error code is not supported.


UNKNOWN ERROR 69.1.48

45

70.1.48

46

69.1.49

45

70.1.49

46

69.1.50

45

70.1.50

46

45 46

01 01

30

VICC ERROR. THE SPECIFIED BLOCK/PAGE IS NOT AVAILABLE (DOES NOT EXIST)

01 01

31

VICC ERROR. THE SPECIFIED BLOCK IS ALREADY LOCKED AND THUS CANNOT BE LOCKED AGAIN.

01 01

32

VICC ERROR. THE SPECIFIED BLOCK IS LOCKED AND ITS CONTENT CANNOT BE CHANGED

01

33




VICC ERROR. THE SPECIFIED BLOCK WAS NOT SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED.


Page 18-17

18. Starter Reagent Module 45

01

34

46

VICC ERROR. THE SPECIFIED BLOCK WAS NOT SUCCESSFULLY LOCKED. READER ERRORS:

69.0.64

45

70.0.64

46

69.1.64

45

70.1.64

46

69.0.65

45

70.0.65

46

69.2.65

45

70.2.65

46

69.1.66

45

70.1.66

46

02 00

40

RFID DECODER INTERFACE Unable to communicate with reader IC.

02 01

40

RFID DECODER INTERFACE Unable to communicate with reader IC.

02 00

41

ANTENNA INTERFACE Unable to communicate with antenna.

02 02

41

ANTENNA INTERFACE Unable to communicate with antenna.

02 01

42

RFID WRITE/COMPARE CHECK FAILURE

Unable to communicate with reader IC. Change RFID reader CU PCB. Check module, Exchange PCB Unable to communicate with reader IC. Change RFID reader CU PCB. Check module, Exchange PCB Unable to communicate with antenna. Change RFID reader CU PCB. Check module, Exchange PCB Unable to communicate with antenna. Change RFID reader CU PCB. Check module, Exchange PCB TAG on bottle is not kept correctly. Check RFID tag position on the bottle and its orientation towards Antenna. Writing to RFID tag failed. One block/page write protected?

69.1.67

45

70.1.67

46

01 01

43

Wrong RFID tag receive length. WRONG VICC RECEIVE LENGTH

TAG on bottle is not kept correctly. Check RFID tag position on the bottle and its orientation towards Antenna. The answer from the VICC has to be wrong length. Maybe the VICC does not have a given number of blocks and answers only with the number of blocks it has.

69.1.68

45

70.1.68

46

01 01

44

Multiple RFID tags in field. MULTIPLE VICC IN FIELD

Check RFID tag on bottle. Multiple RFID tags glued? Check placement of antennas. The command ISO15693 read block(s) with UID detected more than one VICC in the reader field.

69.1.69

45

70.1.69

46

01 01

45

Tag time-out. No answer received from RFID tag. VICC TIMEOUT

TAG on bottle is not kept correctly. Check RFID tag position on the bottle and its orientation towards Antenna.

NO ANSWER RECEIVED FROM VICC

Page 18-18



45

70.1.70

46

01 01

46

RFID reader IC error: No RFID tag found RFID READER IC ERROR NO VICC OR LABLE FOUND

TAG on bottle is not kept correctly. Check RFID tag position on the bottle and its orientation towards Antenna. No VICC in the reader field. Correct antenna selected?

69.1.71

45

70.1.71

46

01 01

47

RFID reader IC error: Checksum error. RFID READER IC ERROR


CHECKSUM ERROR 69.1.72

45

70.1.72

46

01 01

48

RFID reader IC error: Bit collision error. RFID READER IC ERROR


BIT COLISSION ERROR 69.1.73

45

70.1.73

46

01 01

49

RFID reader IC error: Bit framing error. RFID READER IC ERROR


FRAMING ERROR 69.0.80

45

70.0.80

46

00

50

Rack state of position has changed.

TAG bottle from a rack is inserted or removed.

RACK OCCUPATION CHANGED ASPIRATE CONTROL/CALIBRATE 69.3.96

45

70.3.96

46

02 03

60

Bubble for a longer time. AIR FOR LONGER TIME

Air is present for a long time during aspiration, Check the bottle if it is empty / check the tubes to see if there is any blocking. Occurs when measured air time is greater than parameter 114d (50).

69.3.97

45

70.3.97

46

02 03

61

Many bubbles than expected. EXCESS BUBBLES

Too many bubbles are present during an aspiration, check the liquid in the bottle/tube. Occurs when counted bubbles are greater than > parameter 113d (0...1000).

69.3.98

45

70.3.98

46

02 03

62

Unable to calibrate the sensor. ERROR DURING CALIBRATION OF SENSOR

BUBBLE

Sensor cannot be calibrated. Check if liquid is present in the tube, otherwise it is a possible sensor failure or wrong setup. Potentiometer failure or wrong sensor setup.


Page 18-19


45

70.3.99

46

02 03

63

Air present in tube or sensor needs to be calibrated. ERROR DURING INITIALIZATION OF THE BUBBLE SENSORS OF ASPIRATE MODULE

Insert liquid across the aspiration channel, if not present or, see if the sensor needs to be calibrated with respect to the aspirating liquid. Otherwise, it is either damaged aspirate tube or sensor hardware failure. Possible reason can be any one of the following cases. At the startup of the instrument or by the Initialization of the unit an automatic message is reported per each aspirate channel, when no liquid across the bubble sensor along the aspirate channel (can happen during the first time use of the Bottle/channel) sensor not calibrated with respect to the aspirating liquid damaged aspirate tube sensor hardware failure

69.1.192

45

70.1.192

46

02 01

C0 My-d RFID tag error 0xA0: Error Note: Error offset of 20h used. during authentication or wrong MAC. CUSTOM ERRORS FROM VICC

69.1.193

45

70.1.193

46

69.1.241

45

70.1.241

46

69.1.254

45

70.1.254

46

69.1.255

45

70.1.255

46

02 01

C1 My-d RFID tag error 0xA1: --Access denied. Either read from secure pages without authentication or page is locked and its content cannot be changed.

02 01

F1

02 01

FE RFID tag internal

---

02 01

FF Antenna internal.

(ERROR NO: = VICC ERROR + 20H)

RFID reader IC error: Bit framing error.

Wrong command length.

SEE ERROR DOCUMENTATION OF VICC Table 18.5-1: Starter Reagent Module, error list

18.5.2

RFID Module (40h; 64dec): Error List

See RFID Module (40h; 64dec): Error List (see chapter 17.6.2 on page 17-43).

Page 18-20



18.6



18.6.1

RFID Starter CU PCB

Figure 18.6-1: RFID Starter CU PCB

Number


J1


J3

Bubble Sensor Starter 1 (Left)

J4

Bubble Sensor Starter 1 (Right)

J5

Bubble Sensor Starter 2 (Left)

J6

Bubble Sensor Starter 2 (Right)

J7

Valve Starter 1 (Left)

J8

Valve Starter 2 (Right)

J9

Unused Table 18.6-1: Connections of the RFID Starter CU PCB


Page 18-21

18. Starter Reagent Module Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 18.6-2: LEDs of the RFID Starter CU PCB

Number

Switch


SW2

1

OFF

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF Table 18.6-3: Switches of the RFID Starter CU PCB

Page 18-22


19. Pumps

19 Pumps This chapter describes all pumps mounted onto LIAISON®XL analyzer in detail; in the first section a brief overview of the position of the different pumps is given. Then, for each pump, information about repair and calibration ("Replacement and Repair", "Adjustment and Calibration", "Maintenance" and "Troubleshooting") are presented.

19.1

Safety



•


•



Page 19-1

19. Pumps

19.2

Pumps Overview

Figure 19.2-1: Pumps overview

No.

Description

1

Syringe reagent pump (SRP)

2

Washer distribution valve block (WDVB)

3

Washer dispense pump (WDP)

4

Wash probe rinsing pump (WPRP)

5

Washer aspiration pump (WAP)

6

Wash probe aspiration pump (WPAP)

7

Reagent probe rinsing pump (PRP)

8

Liquid waste pump (LWP)

9

Debubbler Table 19.2-1: Pump overview

Page 19-2


19. Pumps

Figure 19.2-2: Starter pumps overview

No.

Description

10

Starter pump 1

11

Starter pump 2 Table 19.2-2: Starter pumps overview


Page 19-3

19. Pumps

19.3 19.3.1

Starter Pump Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the starter pumps.

Figure 19.3-1: Starter Reagent Pump

No

Description

1

Pump

2

Motor

3

Circuit Board Table 19.3-1: Starter Reagent Pump

19.3.1.1

Electrical Circuit Overview

See chapter 23.4.1 on page 23-22 for the detail of the pump connections.

Page 19-4


19. Pumps

19.3.1.2


See chapter 2.2 on page 2-7 for an overview of the complete liquid distribution.

19.3.2 19.3.2.1

Replacement of Aspiration Starter Pump 1 Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5).

The removal of the reader lid avoids possible floodings of the reader module.

19.3.2.2

Remove Aspiration Starter Pump 1

1. Remove the reader lid, to avoid flooding of the reader module. 2. Unscrew fitting (2) and fitting (3) from starter pump 1 (1).


Page 19-5

19. Pumps

Figure 19.3-2: Aspirate Starter Pump 1 3. Loosen three screws (5) of starter pump rack (4) and lift it up. 4. Remove PWR/CAN cable connector J1 from the circuit board (see chapter 19.3.7.1 on page 19-13).

Page 19-6


19. Pumps

19.3.2.3

Assemble Aspiration Starter Pump 1

1. Set the switch (7) of circuit board (6) as shown.

Figure 19.3-3: Starter pump driver board

Figure 19.3-4: Starter pump driver board, switch view 2. Hang starter pump rack (4) into the three screws (5) and fasten them. 3. Fasten fitting (2, blue) and fitting (3) of starter pump 1 (1). 4. Assemble the reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 5. If necessary (new starter pump installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 6. Perform starter prime (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 19-7

19. Pumps

19.3.3 19.3.3.1

Replacement Aspiration Starter Pump 2 Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5).

The removal of the reader lid avoids possible floodings of the reader module.

19.3.3.2

Remove Aspiration Starter Pump 2

1. Unscrew fitting (2) and fitting (3) from starter pump 2 (1).

Figure 19.3-5: Aspiration Starter Pump 2 2. Loosen three screws (5) of starter pump rack (4) and lift it up. 3. Remove PWR/CAN cable connector J1 from the circuit board (see chapter 19.3.7.1 on page 19-13). Page 19-8


19. Pumps

19.3.3.3

Assemble Aspiration Starter Pump 2

1. Set the switch (7) of circuit board (6) as shown.


Figure 19.3-7: Starter pump driver board, switch view

2. Hang starter pump rack (4) into the three screws (5) and fasten them. 3. Fasten fitting (2, red) and fitting (3) of starter pump 2 (1). 4. Assemble the reader lid (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 5. If necessary (new starter pump installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 6. Perform starter prime (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 19-9

19. Pumps

19.3.4

Calibration

This procedure shall be applied during troubleshooting if issues related to the pump have been identified. 1. Open Service Software, go to Reader service window and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 2. Go to Main and Sensor dialogue. 3. In Calibrate panel, press Pump A1 or Pump A2, according to the pump it is necessary to calibrate.

19.3.5

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. The starter pumps are maintenance-free.

Starter Pumps

19.3.6

Troubleshooting

19.3.6.1

Aspiration Starter Reagent Pump, Error List

Starter Reagent Pump (SPa1 -b2, LCMP)

A1

B1

A2

B2

Decimal

48

49

50

51

Hexadecimal

30

31

32

33

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes Starter Reagent Pump (see chapter 6.6.10 on page 6-27). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).


Event ID

Severity

Sub Unit

Error Code

Hexadecimal Device ID

Decimal

Cause:

48.0.0

30

00

00

00

Corrective Action:

Pump executed command with no error. No message

Page 19-10


19. Pumps 48.0.1

30

03

00

01

Pump is not initialized.

Send init-command

Not initialized 48.0.2

30

03

00

02

Pump received an unknown command.

Wrong command code. Check Syntax / sequence.

Unknown command 48.0.3

30

03

00

03

Pump received a parameter value out of range.

Check parameter range

Parameter out of range 48.0.4

30

02

00

04

Pump had a write failure of permanent parameter.

Exchange module

Parameter write failure 48.0.5

30

03

00

05

Pump had a read failure of permanent parameter. Parameter read failure

48.0.6

30

03

00

06

Pump supply voltage out of range (%1 mV). Under voltage detect.

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameters saved exchange module check fuses / replace fuses check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange module

48.0.7

30

01

00

07

Pump supply voltage back in range (%1 mV).

Message.

voltage back in range 48.0.8

30

03

00

08

Starter Reagent pump has a Check cables, airflow thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Thermal protection driver.

48.0.9

30

01

00

09

Pump had to retry positioning several times.


Pump did not reach target.

check mechanic

Mechanics tight or blocked, cable Position reached several retries. or motor broke. 48.0.10

30

03

00

0A

Drive not moving, target not reached. 48.0.11

30

03

00

0B

Pump terminated command.

N/A

Abnormal termination command. 48.0.12

30

03

00

0C

Pump found an error during self test.

Exchange module

Self test failure. 48.0.13

30

03

00

0D

Pump received a command parameter value out of range.

Check syntax / sequence / value

Wrong command parameter value.


Page 19-11

19. Pumps 48.0.14

30

03

00

0E

Pump is unable to execute command.

Unit is busy.

Command execution error. 48.0.15

30

03

00

0F

Pump received a command which is not implemented.

Don’t try again.

Command not implemented. 48.0.16

30

03

00

10

Pump reached a time-out during Restart Module. command execution. Execution time-out.

48.0.17

30

03

00

11

Pump received an illegal parameter type definition.


Illegal parameter. 48.0.18

30

03

00

12

Pump received an invalid parameter index.

select correct parameter index

Parameter not found. 48.0.19

30

03

00

13

Pump received an un authorized set authorization access to parameter. Parameter access not allowed.

48.0.20

30

03

00

14

Pump received a wrong parameter unlock code.

enter correct code

Invalid authorization. 48.0.21

30

03

00

15

Pump received a command with illegal parameter type.

set correct parameter type

Invalid parameter type. 48.0.22

30

03

00

16

Pump received a command with illegal parameter length.

enter parameter in correct length

Wrong parameter length. 48.0.31

30

03

00

1F

CAN Status Message

48.0.32

30

02

00

20

Pump failed in automatic calibration.

N/A

Change the pump.

Init calibration failed. Table 19.3-2: Starter Reagent Pumps, error list

Page 19-12


19. Pumps

19.3.7


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the module. See chapter 23.4.1 on page 23-22 for the detail of the pump connections.

19.3.7.1

Starter Pump Driver Board


Number

Connection

J1

Main in PWR / CAN (to Master COP J36 - Power/CAN-Bus)

J2

Download Monitor

J3

Power Trigger

J4

Power Out

J5

Stepper motor Table 19.3-3: Connections of the starter pump driver board


Page 19-13

19. Pumps Switch No.

Setting of starter pump 1

1

OFF

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF

Table 19.3-4: Starter pump driver board 1, switch setting

Switch No.

Setting of starter pump 2

1

ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF

Table 19.3-5: Starter pump driver board 2, switch setting

LED

Position

1

Power

Table 19.3-6: LED of the starter pump driver board

Page 19-14


19. Pumps


Sensor

Description

1

Home Position Table 19.3-7: Sensor of the stepper pump driver board


Page 19-15

19. Pumps

19.4

Syringe Reagent Pump (SRP)

19.4.1

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the syringe reagent pump (SRP).

Figure 19.4-1: SRP

No.

Description

1

Syringe Reagent Pump

2

Valve

3

Syringe Table 19.4-1: SRP

Page 19-16


19. Pumps

19.4.2

Replacement of SRP

Damage of Syringe or Valve Sealings of syringes or valves can be damaged if they are put into operation in a dry state: •

Fill a small amount of DI water into the syringe or the valve before the installation.

•

Wet the teflon tip of the syringe with DI water before mounting.

19.4.2.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove SRP

1. Unscrew tube fittings (2 and 3).

Figure 19.4-2: SRP


Page 19-17

19. Pumps 2. Loosen screws (4). 3. Lift the pump up, pull the pump carefully out and unplug the cable connector (7).

Figure 19.4-3: SRP

Page 19-18


19. Pumps 19.4.2.3

Assemble SRP

1. Set switch settings of new SRP.

Figure 19.4-4: SRP switch setting

Pos. No.

Switch No.

Description

Switch setting

5

--

Address switch to select 15 different pump addresses

1

6

1

DIP switch to adapt pump settings

ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF

5

OFF

6

OFF

7

OFF

8

OFF Table 19.4-2: SRP switch settings

2. Plug the cable connector (7) into the SRP. Do not bend or squeeze tubes or cables. 3. Insert pump and fasten pump with two screws (4). 4. Fasten tube fittings (2 and 3) by hand. 5. If necessary (new SRP installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 6. Perform Pipettor prime (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 19-19

19. Pumps

19.4.3 19.4.3.1

Replacement of Syringe of SRP Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off, for about 10sec. 3. Switch on the system. 4. Start the Service Software. 5. Open Pipettor dilalogue and initialize selecting All Dialog Controlled Modules. 6. Open Main and Pump sub-dialogue and set the value “300µl” in Aspirate panel. 7. Click onto Execute button. 19.4.3.2

Remove Syringe of SRP

1. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 2. Open top covers. 3. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 4. Release the syringe plunger bracket (4) of the syringe. 5. Carefully turn the syringe (3) counter clockwise out of the valve (2).

Figure 19.4-5: Remove Syringe

Page 19-20


19. Pumps 19.4.3.3

Assemble Syringe of SRP

Damage of Syringe or Valve Sealings of syringes or valves can be damaged if they are put into operation in a dry state. •

Fill a small amount of water into the syringe or the valve before the installation.

•

Wet the teflon tip of the syringe with DI water before mounting. 1. Fill the new syringe (3) with water prior of being fitted into the pump (1). 2. If applicable, carteously insert the plunger (2b) into the syringe barrel (2a).

Figure 19.4-6: Syringe 3. Take care to centre the syringe (2), then carefully turn in clockwise to screw it into the valve. Do not use any tools to fit or tighten the syringe! Do not overwind the thread of the syringe! 4. Gently shift the clamping collar (2c) of the syringe plunger (2b) to fit into the plunger bracket (4). 5. Close and lock the syringe plunger bracket (4).


Page 19-21

19. Pumps

Figure 19.4-7: SRP close up 6. Switch on the system and start the Service Software. 7. Open Main and Pump sub-dialogue and initialize the SRP by clicking on the Initialization button. 8. Perform Pipettor prime (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 19-22


19. Pumps

19.4.4 19.4.4.1

Replacement of Valve of SRP Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open front covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove syringe of SRP (see chapter 19.4.3.2 on page 19-20).

19.4.4.2

Remove Valve of SRP

1. Unscrew the fittings (4) and (5). 2. Remove three screws (6) of valve (2). 3. Remove valve (2).

Figure 19.4-8: Remove Syringe


Page 19-23

19. Pumps 19.4.4.3

Assemble Valve of SRP

Damage of Syringe or Valve Sealings of syringes or valves can be damaged if they are put into operation in a dry state. •

Fill a small amount of water into the syringe or the valve before the installation. 1. If necessary rotate the nose (7) of the new valve. The borehole (see arrow) must be shown to the left side of the valve in rear view.

Figure 19.4-9: Valve, rear view

Do not use any tools to fit or tighten the fittings!

It is important to assemble the valve parallel to the SRP pump. 2. Screw in the fittings (4) and (5). 3. Insert the nose (7) of the valve into the valve guide (10) of the pump and fit the centering pin (8) into the centre hole (9).

Page 19-24


19. Pumps

Figure 19.4-10: Valve fitting of the pump 4. Attach the valve (2) with three screws (6). 5. Assemble Syringe of SRP (see chapter 19.4.3.3 on page 19-21) 6. Switch on the system and start the Service Software. 7. Open Main and Pump sub-dialogue and initialize the SRP by clicking on the Initialization button. 8. Perform Pipettor prime (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

19.4.5

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. SRP

The SRP is maintenance-free.

Syringe and Valve

Check the syringe and the valve of tightness. Change the syringe and the valve according to maintenance schedule .


Page 19-25

19. Pumps

19.4.6

Troubleshooting

19.4.6.1

Syringe Reagent Pump (91h, 145 dec): Error List

General Errors Failure:

Possible Root Cause(s):

Corrective Action:

All pumps in a pump network cannot be initiated.

First pump is defective; defective connecting cable.

Check if the first pump can be initiated (controlled) (replace if required).

Pumped volume is too high

Wrong syringe (volume to high)

Check if overall volume of syringe is correct (replace syringe if required).

Pumped Volume is too small

Wrong syringe (Volume too small);

Check if overall volume of syringe is correct (replace syringe if required).

Check connecting cable or plugin connection (replace if required).

Syringe, valve or tubing leaks.

Pump cannot be Wrong pump address; initiated correctly. wrong pump adjustments; defective connecting cable; defective pump

Check if syringe, valve or tubing is leaking (replace leaking parts if required). Check pump Adresse (adjust correctly if required) Check pump adjustment (adjust correctly if required) Check connection cable (replace if required) Check PCB (replace if required) Check pump (replace if required)

Table 19.4-3: Error List

Page 19-26


19. Pumps Warnings Service Software User Software

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Sub Unit

Cause:

Severity

Event ID


decimal

91

01

00

00

no warning

91

01

01

01

position reached several retries

mechanics tight or blocked

91

01

02

01

position reached several retries

mechanics tight or blocked

91

01

00

02

unknown command

check commands

91

01

01

02

unknown command

check commands

91

01

02

02

unknown command

check commands

91

01

00

03

voltage back in range Table 19.4-4: Warning Messages

Critical Messages Service Software User Software

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Sub Unit

Cause:

Severity

Event ID


decimal

91

02

00

00

no error

91

02

00

01

wrong parameter

check syntax / sequence

91

02

01

01

wrong parameter


91

02

02

01

wrong parameter


91

02

00

02

e2prom write failure

exchange module

91

02

00

03

voltage out of range

check supply / exchange module

91

02

01

02

thermal protection driver

check cable, airflow

91

02

02

02

thermal protection driver

check cable, airflow

91

02

02

20

clot detection

91

02

00

21

no valve

wrong command, do not send valve commands if pump is valveless

91

02

01

21

no valve

wrong command, do not send valve commands if pump is valveless

91

02

02

21

no valve

wrong command, do not send valve commands if pump is valveless Table 19.4-5: Critical Messages


Page 19-27

19. Pumps Fatal Messages Service Software User Software

Sub Unit

Error Code

Cause:

Severity

Event ID


decimal

91

03

00

00

no error

91

03

01

01

not initialized

Corrective Action:

This error occurs if the pump cannot be initialised. Check the pump for possible obstructions or loose connections before you try a new initialisation. The pump does not accept commands as long as it was initialised successfully. Send init-command

91

03

02

01

not initialized

Send init-command

91

03

01

02

drive not moving

This error occurs if a faulty command was given. Correct the command and send it again. check mechanic

91

03

02

02

drive not moving

check mechanic

91

03

01

03

parameter out of range

This error occurs if a faulty parameter () was entered with a command. Correct the parameter and send the corrected command. check parameter range

91

03

02

03

parameter out of range

check parameter range

91

03

01

04

command not executable

This error occurs if the command structure or the communication protocol is faulty. Check the command sequence and repeat the corrected command sequence. check command/response sequence

91

03

02

04

command not executable 2

check command/response sequence

91

03

00

05

E PROM read failure

exchange module

91

03

01

07

execution time-out

This error occurs if the pump was not initialised. To delete the error, initialise the pump. reset device

91

Page 19-28

03

02

07

execution time-out

reset device


19. Pumps 91

03

00

09

Piston overloaded

This error occurs if the injector piston loses steps.The pump must be initialised new, before a normal process can take place.

91

03

00

0A

Valve overloaded

This error occurs if the valve drive loses to many steps. Frequent or repeated errors of this kind indicate that the valve should be replaced. This error can be deleted by initializing the pump new.

91

03

00

0B

Piston movement not allowed

If the valve is in [B]ypass (= flowthrough position) no piston movement commands are allowed.

91

03

00

0D

Symbol sequence is too long for the EEPROM (>63 bytes). Shorten the string.

Symbol sequence is too long for the EEPROM (>63 bytes). Shorten the string.

91

03

00

0E

Excess Pressure

This error occurs in connection with the Clot-Detection, if the pressure becomes excessive e.g. due to a total blockage. This error can only be cleared by a new initialization of the pump. If the error appears also during initialization, the attached line and the needle must be cleaned.

91

03

00

0F

Command overflow

This error occurs if the buffer memory contains too many symbols. Commands in the buffer must be carried out first before further commands can be sent.

91

03

00

32

overpressure

91

03

00

33

under pressure Table 19.4-6: Fatal Messages


Page 19-29

19. Pumps

19.4.7


This section shows an overview of the electric connections and switches of this pump.

Figure 19.4-11: SRP

Pos. No.

Switch No.

Description

Switch setting

1

--

RS232 connector – to PiP PCB, slot J9

--

2

--

Address switch to select 15 different pump addresses

1

3

1


ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF

5

OFF

6

OFF

7

OFF

8

OFF Table 19.4-7: SRP settings


Page 19-30


19. Pumps

19.5 19.5.1

Washer Dispense Pump (WDP) Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the Washer Dispense Pump (WDP).

Figure 19.5-1: WDP

No.

Description

1

WDP

2

Valve

3

Circuit Board

4

Motor Table 19.5-1: WDP overview

19.5.1.1




Page 19-31

19. Pumps 19.5.1.2



19.5.2

Replacement of WDP

19.5.2.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove WDP

1. Unscrew fitting (3) and pull tube off. 2. Pull tube out of fitting (4). 3. Loosen four screws (2), lift pump (1) up and pull it carefully out.

Figure 19.5-2: WDP

Page 19-32


19. Pumps 4. Unplug CAN cable (5) from circuit board (6).

Figure 19.5-3: WDP 19.5.2.3

Assemble WDP

1. Set switch (7) settings of new pump, as represented in the figure.

Figure 19.5-4: WDP, circuit board view

Figure 19.5-5: WDP, switch settings


Page 19-33

19. Pumps Pos. No.

7

Switch No.

Description

Switch setting

1

OFF

2

ON

3


4

OFF OFF

Table 19.5-2: WDP switch settings 2. Plug cable (5, J1) onto circuit board (6). Do not bend or squeeze tubes or cables. 3. Insert new pump (1) and fasten pump with four screws (2). 4. Fasten tube fittings (3 and 4). 5. If necessary (new WDP installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 6. Perform wash buffer fill up (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

19.5.3

Calibration

This procedure shall be applied during troubleshooting if issues related to the pump have been identified. 1. Open Service Software, go to Washer service window and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 2. Go to Main and Sensor dialogue 3. In Calibration panel, press WDP.

19.5.4

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. WDP

Page 19-34

The WDP is maintenance-free.


19. Pumps

19.5.5

Troubleshooting

19.5.5.1

WDP, Error List

WDP Decimal

52

Hexadecimal

34

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes WDP Pump (see chapter 6.6.11 on page 6-28). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5). For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).


Event ID

Severity

Sub Unit

Error Code

Hexadecimal Device ID

Decimal

Cause:

52.0.0

34

00

00

00

Corrective Action:

Pump executed command with no error. No message

52.0.1

34

03

00

01


Send init-command

Not initialized 52.0.2

34

03

00

02


Wrong command code. Check Syntax / sequence.

Unknown command 52.0.3

34

03

00

03


Check parameter range

Parameter out of range 52.0.4

34

02

00

04


Exchange module

Parameter write failure 52.0.5

34

03

00

05

Pump had a read failure of permanent parameter. Parameter read failure


Error on reading EEPROM. If parameters saved exchange module

Page 19-35

19. Pumps 52.0.6

34

03

00

06

Pump supply voltage out of range (%1 mV). Under voltage detect.

check fuses / replace fuses check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange module

52.0.7

34

01

00

07

Pump supply voltage back in range (%1 mV).

Message.

voltage back in range 52.0.8

34

03

00

08

Starter Reagent pump has a Check cables, airflow thermal or short circuit protection of driver. Thermal protection driver.

52.0.9

34

01

00

09



Pump did not reach target.

check mechanic

Mechanics tight or blocked, cable Position reached several retries. or motor broke. 52.0.10

34

03

00

0A

Drive not moving, target not reached. 52.0.11

34

03

00

0B

Pump terminated command.

N/A

Abnormal termination command. 52.0.12

34

03

00

0C


Exchange module

Self test failure. 52.0.13

34

03

00

0D


Check syntax / sequence / value

Wrong command parameter value. 52.0.14

34

03

00

0E


Unit is busy.

Command execution error. 52.0.15

34

03

00

0F


Don’t try again.

Command not implemented. 52.0.16

34

03

00

10

Pump reached a time-out during Restart Module. command execution. Execution time-out.

52.0.17

34

03

00

11

Pump received an illegal parameter type definition.


Illegal parameter. 52.0.18

34

03

00

12


select correct parameter index

Parameter not found.

Page 19-36


19. Pumps 52.0.19

34

03

00

13

Pump received an un authorized set authorization access to parameter. Parameter access not allowed.

52.0.20

34

03

00

14


enter correct code

Invalid authorization. 52.0.21

34

03

00

15


set correct parameter type

Invalid parameter type. 52.0.22

34

03

00

16


enter parameter in correct length

Wrong parameter length. 52.0.31

34

03

00

1F

CAN Status Message

52.0.32

34

02

00

20

Pump failed in automatic calibration.

N/A

Change pump.

Init calibration failed. Table 19.5-3: WDP, error list

19.5.6


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the module. See chapter 23.4.1 on page 23-22 for the detail of the pump connections.


Page 19-37

19. Pumps

19.5.6.1

WDP Driver Board

Figure 19.5-6: WDP driver board

Number

Connection

J1

Main in PWR / CAN (to Master COP J29 - Power/CAN-Bus)

J2

Download Monitor

J3

Power Trigger

J4

Power Out

J5

Motor Table 19.5-4: Connections of the WDP driver board

Switch No.

Setting of WDP

1

OFF

2

ON

3

OFF

4

OFF Table 19.5-5: WDP driver board, switch setting

Page 19-38


19. Pumps LED

Position

1

Power

Table 19.5-6: LED of the WDP driver board

Figure 19.5-7: WDP driver board

Sensor

Description

1

Home Position Table 19.5-7: Sensor of the WDP driver board


Page 19-39

19. Pumps

19.6 19.6.1

Wash Probe Rinsing Pump (WPRP) Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the Wash Probe Rinsing Pump (WPRP).

Figure 19.6-1: WPDP

No.

Description

1

Pumps

2

Circuit board

3

Motor

4

Cable motor - circuit board Table 19.6-1: WPRP

19.6.1.1



19.6.1.2



Page 19-40


19. Pumps

19.6.2 19.6.2.1

Replacement of WPRP Preliminary Steps


Remove WPRP

Take care of rinsing water.

1. Unscrew three fittings (2) and three fittings (3) on the left and right side of WPRP (1). 2. Loosen three screws (4), lift pump up and pull it carefully out to the front.

Figure 19.6-2: WPRP


Page 19-41

19. Pumps 3. Unplug connector (5).

Figure 19.6-3: WPRP 19.6.2.3

Assemble WPRP

1. Set switch (7) settings of new pump, as represented in the figure.

Figure 19.6-4: WPRP, switch setting

Switch No.

Setting of WPRP

1

ON

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF Table 19.6-2: WPRP switch setting

2. Plug connector (5) into plug. 3. If necessary (new WPRP installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). Page 19-42


19. Pumps 4. Perform the calibration of WPRP (see chapter 19.6.4 on page 19-46). 5. Before the new WPRP can be used, the pump tubes and the lids must be set correctly. 6. Press the three pump tube connectors (8) into the pump brackets.

Figure 19.6-5: WPRP with inserted pump tube connectors 7. Pull the tube lids (6) back. Press each lid with two fingers on the riffle together and push it into the guidance on both sides (9). Note the audible click if the set is correct.

Figure 19.6-6: WPRP with opened lid

Do not bend or squeeze tubes or cables. 8. Set pump into the three screws (4) and fasten them. 9. Screw fittings (2) and (3) into pump (1). 10. Perform Water fill up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21).


Page 19-43

19. Pumps

19.6.3 19.6.3.1

Replacement of WPRP Tubes Preliminary Steps


Remove WPRP Tubes


It is not necessary to remove the WPRP. 1. Unscrew three fittings (2) and three fittings (3) on the left and right side of WPRP (1).

Figure 19.6-7: WPRP

Page 19-44


19. Pumps 2. Press each tube lid (6) with two fingers on the riffle together an pull it back.

Figure 19.6-8: WPRP with opened (demounted WPRP) 3. Remove the tube lids (6). 4. Pull the pump tube connectors (8) on both sides out of the pump brackets and remove the tubes.

Figure 19.6-9: WPRP without lids (demounted WPRP)


Page 19-45

19. Pumps 19.6.3.3

Assemble WPRP Tubes

1. Press the three pump tube connectors (8) on both sides into the pump brackets. 2. Press each tube lid (6) with two fingers on the riffle together and push it into the guidance on both sides (9). Note the audible click if the set is correct. Do not bend or squeeze tubes or cables. 3. Screw fittings (2) and (3) into pump (1). 4. Perform Water fill up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21).

19.6.4

Calibration of WPRP or WAP Pumps

Figure 19.6-10: WPRP Init PIN 1. Before the calibration, loosen the pump to calibrate and pull it out of the pump housing a bit, so that the Init PIN (1) is visible. 2. Remove the caps and the subjacent tubes (see section 19.6.3.2 or section 19.7.3.2). 3. Open Service Software, go to Washer service window and initialize by pressing All Dialog Controlled Modules. 4. Now enter the sub dialogue Main and Sensor and push the button WPRP (or WAP) in the window Calibration. Follow the instructions of the opening windows.

Page 19-46

•

Calibration WAP (peristaltic pump, grey), (target 10 – 220).

•

Calibration WPRP (peristaltic pump blue), (target 10 – 220).


19. Pumps

When requested by Service Software (a dedicated pop-up appears), it is necessary to rotate manually the pump in order to verify that the Init PIN will not be in front of the Init sensor.

5. Assemble the tubes and the caps (see section 19.6.3.3 or section 19.7.3.3). 6. Put the pump back into its housing and screw it. 7. Perform Water fill up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21).

19.6.5

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. WPRP

Change the internal pump tubes according to maintenance schedule . See Replacement of WPRP Tubes (see chapter 19.6.3 on page 19-44) for the replacement procedure. All other parts of the pump are maintenance-free.


Page 19-47

19. Pumps

19.6.6

Troubleshooting

19.6.6.1

WPRP Pump and WAP Pump: Error List

WAP

WPRP

Decimal

53

54

Hexadecimal

35

36

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes WAP and WPRP Pump (see chapter 6.6.12 on page 6-29). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).


Event ID

Severity

Sub Unit

Error codes


decimal

Cause:

53.0.0

35/36 00

00

00

54.0.0

Corrective Action:

Pump executed command with no error. NO MESSAGE

53.0.1

35/36 03

00

01

54.0.1 53.0.2


Send init-command

NOT INITIALIZED 35/36 03

00

02

54.0.2



UNKNOWN COMMAND 53.0.3

35/36 03

00

03

54.0.3



PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE 53.0.4 54.0.4

35/36 02

00

04


Exchange module.

PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE ERROR EEPROM WRITE

Page 19-48


19. Pumps 53.0.5

35/36 03

00

05

54.0.5

Pump had a read failure of permanent parameter. EEPROM READ

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module.

PARAMETER READ FAILURE 53.0.6

35/36 03

00

06

54.0.6

Pump supply voltage out of range (%1 mV). VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT

check fuses / replace fuses check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange module

53.0.7

35/36 01

00

07

54.0.7

Pump supply voltage back in range (%1 mV). VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

53.0.8

35/36 03

00

08

54.0.8

Pump has a thermal or short circuit protection of driver.


THERMAL PROTECTION DRIVER TSD PROTECTION 53.0.9

35/36 01

00

09

54.0.9



POSITIONING PROBLEM POSITION REACHED SEVERAL TIMES 53.0.10

35/36 03

00

0A

54.0.10

Wash Aspiration Pump did not reach target. DRIVE NOT MOVING


TARGET NOT REACHED 53.0.11

35/36 03

00

0B

54.0.11 53.0.12

Pump terminated command. ABNORMAL TERMINATION COMMAND

35/36 03

00

0C

54.0.12


Exchange module.

SELFTEST ERROR 53.0.13

35/36 03

00

0D

54.0.13


check syntax / sequence / value


35/36 03

00

54.0.14

0E


Unit busy.

COMMAND EXECUTION


Page 19-49

19. Pumps 53.0.15

35/36 03

00

0F

54.0.15


Do not try again.

COMMAND NOT IMPLEMENTED 53.0.16

35/36 03

00

10

54.0.16

Pump reached a time-out during command execution. EXECUTION TIMEOUT

53.0.17

35/36 03

00

11

54.0.17

Pump received an illegal parameter type definition ILLEGAL PARAMETER

53.0.18

35/36 03

00

12

54.0.18


Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command. Set correct parameter index. Select correct parameter index.

PARAMETER NOT FOUND 53.0.19

35/36 03

00

13

54.0.19

Pump received an un authorized Set authorization. access to parameter. PARAMETER ACCESS NOT ALLOWED

53.0.20

35/36 03

00

14

54.0.20




35/36 03

00

15

54.0.21




35/36 03

00

16

54.0.22



ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH 53.0.31

35/36 00

00

1F

CAN Status Message.

35/36 03

00

20

Pump failed in init sensor calibration.

54.0.31 53.0.32 54.0.32

Check position of index pin. Check init sensor.

FAILED TO CALIBRATE INIT SENSOR Table 19.6-3: WAP, WPRP Pump, error list

Page 19-50


19. Pumps

19.7

Wash Aspiration Pump (WAP)

19.7.1

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the Wash Aspiration Pump (WAP).

Figure 19.7-1: WAP

No.

Description

1

Motor

2

Circuit Board

3

Pumps

4

Cable Motor - circuit board Table 19.7-1: WAP

19.7.1.1



19.7.1.2




Page 19-51

19. Pumps

19.7.2

Replacement of WAP

19.7.2.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove WAP

1. Pull out carefully eight tubes (2) on the left and eight tubes (3) on the right side of WAP (1).

Figure 19.7-2: WAP

Page 19-52


19. Pumps 2. Loosen three screws (4), lift the pump up and pull it carefully out to the front.

Figure 19.7-3: WAP 3. Unplug connector (7) of the pump.

Figure 19.7-4: WAP


Page 19-53

19. Pumps 19.7.2.3

Assemble WAP

1. Set switch (8) settings of new pump, all switches OFF.

Figure 19.7-5: WAP, switch settings

Switch No.

Setting of WAP

1

OFF

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF Table 19.7-2: WAP switch setting

2. Plug in connector (7). 3. If necessary (new WAP installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 4. Perform the calibration of WAP (see chapter 19.6.4 on page 19-46). 5. Before the new WAP can be used, the pump tubes must be set correct and the lids must be set correctly. 6. Press the four pump tube connectors (9) into the pump brackets. Note the installation direction of the pump tube connectors! The thick connectors must be on the right side of the installed WAP.

Page 19-54


19. Pumps

Figure 19.7-6: WAP with inserted pump tube connectors 7. Pull the tube lids (6) back. Press each lid with two fingers on the riffle together and push it into the guidance on both sides (10). Note the audible click if the set correctly.

Figure 19.7-7: WAP with opened lid

Do not bend or squeeze tubes or cables.

8. Set the pump into three screws (4) and fasten them. 9. Plug eight tubes (2) on the left and eight tubes (3) on the right side carefully into WAP (1).


Page 19-55

19. Pumps

19.7.3 19.7.3.1

Replacement of WAP Tubes Preliminary Steps


Remove WAP Tubes


It is not necessary to remove the WAP. 1. Pull out carefully eight tubes (2) on the right and eight tubes (3) on the left side of WAP (1).

Figure 19.7-8: WAP

Page 19-56


19. Pumps 2. Press each tube lid (6) with two fingers on the riffle together an pull it back.

Figure 19.7-9: WAP with opened lid (demounted WAP) 3. Remove the tube lids (6). 4. Pull the pump tube connectors (9) on both sides out of the pump brackets and remove the tubes.

Figure 19.7-10: WAP without lids (demounted WAP)


Page 19-57

19. Pumps 19.7.3.3

Assemble WAP Tubes

1. Press the three pump tube connectors (9) on both sides into the pump brackets. Note the installation direction of the pump tube connectors! The thick connectors must be on the right side of the installed WAP. 2. Press each tube lid (6) with two fingers on the riffle together and push it into the guidance on both sides (10). Note the audible click if the set is correct. Do not bend or squeeze tubes or cables. 3. Plug eight tubes (2) on the right and eight tubes (3) on the left side carefully into WAP (1).

19.7.4

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. WAP

Change the internal pump tubes according to maintenance schedule. See Replacement of WAP Tubes (see chapter 19.7.3 on page 19-56) for the replacement procedure. All other parts of the pump are maintenance-free.

19.7.5

Calibration of WAP Pump

1. For calibration of WAP pump, see chapter 19.6.4 on page 19-46.

19.7.6 19.7.6.1

Troubleshooting: Peristaltic Pump: Error List Error List

See chapter 19.6.6.1 on page 19-48

Page 19-58


19. Pumps

19.8 19.8.1

Wash Probe Aspiration Pump (WPAP) Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the Wash Probe Aspiration Pump (WPAP).

Figure 19.8-1: WPAP

No.

Description

1

Pump

2

Motor

Arrows

Flow direction (IN and OUT) Table 19.8-1: WPAP


Page 19-59

19. Pumps 19.8.1.1


See chapter 13.6.1 on page 13-32 for an overview of the connections.

19.8.1.2



Page 19-60


19. Pumps

19.8.2 19.8.2.1

Replacement of WPAP Preliminary Steps


Remove WPAP

Take care of draining water.

1. Hold pump (1) back and pull out tube (2). 2. Remove hose clamp (3) and pull tube out.

Figure 19.8-2: WPAP


Page 19-61

19. Pumps 3. Loosen two screws (4) of pump (1) and take pump carefully out.

Figure 19.8-3: WPAP 4. Unplug cables (5) and (6) of pump motor.

Figure 19.8-4: WPAP

Page 19-62


19. Pumps 19.8.2.3

Assemble WPAP

1. Unscrew fittings of old pump and screw them onto new pump. Be aware of correct wiring.

2. Plug cables ((5) brown cable/plus) and ((6) black cable/minus) onto pump.

Figure 19.8-5: WPAP 3. Fasten new pump (1) with two screws (4). Check for correct tube connection.

Pos. No.

Description

2

Tube leads from washer (IN)

3

Tube leads to LWDV (OUT) Table 19.8-2: Connection instruction

4. Push tube (2) onto fitting. 5. Push tube (3) onto fitting and secure with hose clamp.

19.8.3

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. WPAP

The WPAP is maintenance-free.


Page 19-63

19. Pumps

19.9 19.9.1

Reagent Probe Rinsing Pump (PRP) Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the reagent Probe Rinsing Pump (PRP).

Figure 19.9-1: PRP

No.

Description

1

Pump

2

Motor

Arrows

Flow direction (IN and OUT) Table 19.9-1: PRP

Page 19-64


19. Pumps 19.9.1.1


See chapter 15.6.2 on page 15-92 for an over view of the electric circuit.

19.9.1.2




Page 19-65

19. Pumps

19.9.2

Replacement of PRP

19.9.2.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove PRP


1. Hold pump back, pull out tube (2) and unscrew fitting (3). 2. Loosen two screws (4) of pump (1) and take pump carefully out.

Figure 19.9-2: PRP 3. Unplug cables (5) and (6) of pump motor (1).

Page 19-66


19. Pumps

19.9.2.3

Assemble PRP

1. Unscrew fitting of old pump and screw it onto new pump. Be aware of correct wiring.

2. Plug cables ((5) brown cable/plus) and ((6) black cable/minus) onto pump.

Figure 19.9-3: WPAP 3. Fasten new pump (1) with two screws (4). Check for correct tube connection.

Pos. No.

Description

2

Tube leads from DICV (IN)

3

Tube leads to syringe reagent pump (SRP) (OUT) Table 19.9-2: Connection instruction

4. Push tube (2) onto fitting. 5. Fasten fitting (3) onto pump. 6. Perform Pipettor prime (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22)

19.9.3

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. PRP

The PRP is maintenance-free.


Page 19-67

19. Pumps

19.10 Liquid Waste Pump (LWP) 19.10.1

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the Liquid Waste Pump (LWP).

Figure 19.10-1: LWP

No.

Description

1

Pump

Arrows

Flow direction (IN and OUT) Table 19.10-1: LWP

On the back side of the pump a power supply unit is installed.

Page 19-68


19. Pumps

19.10.1.1


See chapter 15.6.2 on page 15-92 for an overview of the electric circuit.

19.10.1.2




Page 19-69

19. Pumps

19.10.2

Replacement of LWP

19.10.2.1

Preliminary Steps


Remove LWP


1. Pull the tubes (2) and (3) carefully out.

Figure 19.10-2: LWP

Page 19-70


19. Pumps 2. Loosen two screws (4) and lift pump (1) carefully out. 3. Unplug connector (5) of pump (1).

Figure 19.10-3: LWP 19.10.2.3

Assemble LWP

1. Plug connector (5) onto new pump. 2. Set new pump (1) into screws (4), fix pump and fasten screws (4). Check for correct flow direction, see imprint on pump.

3. Plug tubes into fittings in the right way.

Pos. No.

Description

2

Tube leads from waste station (IN)

3

Tube leads to LWDV (OUT) Table 19.10-2: Connection instruction

19.10.3

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of this pump. LWP

The LWP is maintenance-free.


Page 19-71

19. Pumps

19.11 Washer Distribution Valve Block (WDVB) 19.11.1

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of the Washer Distribution Valve Block (WDVB).

Figure 19.11-1: WDVB

No.

Description

1

Valve block

2

Connector Table 19.11-1: WDVB

Page 19-72


19. Pumps 19.11.1.1


See chapter 13.6.1 on page 13-32 for an overview of the connections.

19.11.1.2



19.11.2 19.11.2.1

Replacement of WDVB Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location.


Page 19-73

19. Pumps

19.11.2.2

Remove WDVB


1. Unscrew all tubes of valve block (1). Put the tubes into a bowl to catch the escaping liquid.

Figure 19.11-2: WDVB (with additional labels) and WDP

Page 19-74


19. Pumps 2. Unscrew both screws (2) and lift valve block (1) out. 3. Unplug connector (3).

Figure 19.11-3: WDVB


Page 19-75

19. Pumps 19.11.2.3

Assemble WDVB

1. Plug connector (3) into WDVB. 2. Insert WDVB (1) into pump block and fasten screws (2). 3. Screw all tubes with their color code correct into WDVB.

Identification

Tube

IN

Tube from WDP

WDP 1

Blue tube

WDP 2

Yellow tube

WDP 3

Red tube

WDP 4

Light blue tube

WDP 5

Green tube Table 19.11-2: Connection instruction

4. Perform wash buffer fill up (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

19.11.3

Maintenance

This section contains instructions for the maintenance of the valve block. WDVB

Page 19-76

The WDVB is maintenance-free.


20. Front Module

20 Front Module This chapter describes front module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning front module are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Check and Verification” and “Troubleshooting”). In the last section related PCB layouts are described.

20.1

Safety



•


•



Page 20-1

20. Front Module

20.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of this module.

Figure 20.2-1: Front module, inside view

No.

Description

1

Front Module

2

Connector

3

Top Cover Flap Sensor

4

LED Display Diti PCB

5

LED Display Starter CU PCB

6

Front Cover CU PCB

7

LED Display Reagent CU PCB

8

Light Barrier, Flap Sample Module

9

Light Barrier, Flap Cuvette Reservoir

10

Light Barrier, Flap Reagent Module

11

Light Barrier, Flap Starter Reagent Module Table 20.2-1: Front module, inside

Page 20-2


20. Front Module

20.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the front module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

20.3.1 20.3.1.1

Replacement of Front Module Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 20.3.1.2

Remove Front Module

1. Loose screw (2) from middle lock of front module. 2. Move lock in sheet down.

Figure 20.3-1: Front module left view


Page 20-3

20. Front Module 3. Pull DiTi drawers left (3) and right (5) out to the stop (4), lift stop up and remove drawers.

Figure 20.3-2: Remove diti module drawer 4. Unplug connector (7) of front module.

Figure 20.3-3: Front module connector

Page 20-4


20. Front Module 5. Loose screw (8) of right lock (9), lift the lock up and fasten lock with screw (8) in the upper position.

Figure 20.3-4: Front module right side view

Front Module is now loose and may fall off. 6. Loose screw (10) of left lock (11), lift the lock up and fasten lock with screw (10) in the upper position.

Figure 20.3-5: Front module left side view


Page 20-5

20. Front Module 20.3.1.3

Assemble Front Module

1. Open cuvette drawer of front module and feed side guides into the funnel while remounting the front covers. 2. Loose screw (8) of right lock (9), lift the lock down and fasten lock with screw (8) in the lower position. 3. Loose screw (10) of left lock (11), lift the lock down and fasten lock with screw (10) in the lower position.

Figure 20.3-6: Cuvette drawer 4. Move lock pin (2) up and fasten it. 5. Plug the connector (7) into the front module. 6. Mount in the drawers left (3) and right (5) onto the disposable tip module. 7. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 8. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 9. If necessary (new front module installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 10. If necessary (new front module installed), check flap sensors (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20). 11. If necessary (new front module installed), check signal transmitter (see chapter 20.4.1.2 on page 20-20). 12. If necessary (new front module installed), check LEDs (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20).

Page 20-6


20. Front Module

20.3.2 20.3.2.1

Replacement of Front Cover CU PCB Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left front cover. 5. Move pipettor to a save place. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 20.3.2.2

Remove Front Cover CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of front cover CU PCB (1). 2. Loose two screws (2) and take circuit board out.

Figure 20.3-7: Replace front cover CU PCB 20.3.2.3

Assemble Front Cover CU PCB

1. Set new front cover CU PCB (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug cable in, Front Cover CU PCB (see chapter 20.6.1 on page 20-23). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6).


Page 20-7


Set Front Cover CU PCB Parameter

1. If necessary (new Front Cover PCB installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 2. Check flap sensors (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20). 3. Check signal transmitter (see chapter 20.4.1.2 on page 20-20). 4.

Page 20-8

Check LEDs (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20).


20. Front Module

20.3.3 20.3.3.1

Replacement of LED Display Reagent PCB Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor to a save place. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 20.3.3.2

Remove LED Display Reagent PCB

1. Unplug all cables of LED Display reagent PCB. 2. Unscrew two screws (2) and take circuit board out. Only exchange the damaged one, there are two circuit boards.

Figure 20.3-8: LED Display Reagent PCB 20.3.3.3

Assemble LED Display Reagent PCB

1. Set new LED Display Reagent PCB in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Connect all cables onto circuit board, (see chapter 20.6.2 on page 20-24). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check LEDs of reagent area (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20).


Page 20-9

20. Front Module

20.3.4 20.3.4.1

Replacement of LED Display Diti PCB Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor to a save place. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 20.3.4.2

Remove the LED Display Diti PCB

1. Unplug all cables of LED Display Diti PCB (1). 2. Loose screw (2) and remove circuit board out.

Figure 20.3-9: LED display diti PCB 20.3.4.3

Assemble the LED Display Diti PCB

1. Set new LED display diti PCB (1) in and fasten screw (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board, (see chapter 20.6.3 on page 20-25). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check LEDs of DiTi drawers (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20). 7. Check cuvette reservoir flap sensor (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20).

Page 20-10


20. Front Module

20.3.5 20.3.5.1

Replacement of LED Display Starter PCB Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open left top cover. 5. Move pipettor to a save position. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 20.3.5.2

Remove the LED Starter Display

1. Unplug all cables of LED display starter PCB (1). 2. Unscrew four screws (2) and take circuit board out.

Figure 20.3-10: LED Display Starter PCB 20.3.5.3

Assemble LED Display Starter PCB

1. Set new LED display starter PCB (1) in and fasten with four screws (2). 2. Plug cable onto circuit board, (see chapter 20.6.4 on page 20-26). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check LEDs of starter reagent area (see chapter 20.4.1.3 on page 20-20).


Page 20-11

20. Front Module

20.3.6 20.3.6.1

Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Cuvette Reservoir Preliminary steps


Remove the Light Barrier, Flap Cuvette Reservoir

1. Unplug light barrier cable (3) from slot J2 of LED display Diti PCB. 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of light barrier flap cuvette reservoir (1).

Figure 20.3-11: Light barrier, cuvette reservoir 20.3.6.3

Assemble Light Barrier, Flap Cuvette Reservoir

1. Set new light barrier flap cuvette reservoir (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug cable onto circuit board slot J2, see LED Display Diti PCB (see chapter 20.6.3 on page 20-25). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check cuvette reservoir flap sensor (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20).

Page 20-12


20. Front Module

20.3.7 20.3.7.1

Replacement of Top Cover Flap Sensor Preliminary steps


Remove the Top Cover Flap Sensor

1. Unplug sensor cable from slot J3 of front cover CU PCB. 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of top cover flap sensor (1).

Figure 20.3-12: Top cover flap sensor 20.3.7.3

Assemble Top Cover Flap Sensor

1. Set new top cover flap sensor (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug cable onto circuit board slot J3, see Front Cover CU PCB (see chapter 20.6.1 on page 20-23). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check top cover flap sensor (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20). LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 20-13

20. Front Module

20.3.8 20.3.8.1

Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Sample Module Preliminary steps

1. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 2. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 3. Ope left top cover. 4. Move pipettor to a save position. 5. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 20.3.8.2

Remove the Light Barrier, Flap Sample Module

1. Unplug light barrier cable from slot J4 of front cover CU PCB. 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of light barrier flap sample module (1).

Figure 20.3-13: Light barrier, sample module

Page 20-14



Assemble Light Barrier, Flap Sample Module

1. Set new light barrier flap sample (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug cable onto circuit board slot J4, see Front Cover CU PCB (see chapter 20.6.1 on page 20-23). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check sample module flap sensor (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20).


Page 20-15

20. Front Module

20.3.9 20.3.9.1

Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Reagent Module Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open top covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save position. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 20.3.9.2

Remove the Light Barrier, Flap Reagent Module

1. Unplug light barrier cable from slot J1 of front cover CU PCB (3). 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of light barrier flap reagent module (1).

Figure 20.3-14: Light barrier, reagent module

Page 20-16



Assemble Light Barrier, Flap Reagent Module

1. Set new light barrier flap reagent (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug cable onto circuit board slot J1, see Front Cover CU PCB (see chapter 20.6.1 on page 20-23). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check reagent module flap sensor (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20).


Page 20-17

20. Front Module

20.3.10 Replacement of Light Barrier, Flap Starter Reagent Module 20.3.10.1

Preliminary steps


Remove the Light Barrier, Flap Starter Reagent Module

1. Unplug light barrier cable from slot J2 of front cover CU PCB (3). 2. Unscrew two screws (2) of light barrier flap starter reagent (1).

Figure 20.3-15: Light barrier, flap starter reagent module

Page 20-18



Assemble Light Barrier, Flap Starter Reagent Module

1. Set new light barrier flap starter reagent (1) in and fasten with two screws (2). 2. Plug cable onto circuit board slot J2, see Front Cover CU PCB (see chapter 20.6.1 on page 20-23). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 6. Check starter reagent module flap sensor (see chapter 20.4.1.1 on page 20-20).


Page 20-19

20. Front Module

20.4



20.4.1 20.4.1.1

Function check Front Module Function check Sensors Flaps

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Make sure that all flaps of the front modules are closed. If the top cover is not assembled yet, the top cover sensor at the front module can be bridged with a magnet. 3. Open the sub-dialogue Main and Front Cover. Push the button Read in the section Sensors. In the dialogue, all flaps must be labelled with Closed. 4. Now open all flaps consecutively and enquire the status of each flap in the dialogue with Read button. Likewise, the top cover is opened or the magnet is removed and read out. 5. The flaps must change to Open. 20.4.1.2

Function check Signal Transmitter

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Open the sub dialogue Main and Front Cover. Push the button On in the section Beeper. The beeper must be audible. 20.4.1.3

Function check LEDs

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units in the Service Software and initialize it with All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Open the starter reagent flap. 3. In the section LED`s of Main and Front Cover sub-dialogue, select the option All in Lane drop down menu and push the button Test. Now, all LEDs must flash and go off again successively from left to right. The sequence starts with the upper long row (Diti Module, Sample Module, Ancillary Bay and Reagent Module) and continues with the LEDs of the starter reagent module. Attention! If only one starter reagent module is installed, those LEDs flash two times.

Page 20-20


20. Front Module

20.5

Troubleshooting

20.5.1

Front Cover CU (20h, 32dec): Error List

Front Module Decimal

32

Hexadecimal

20

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes Front Module (see chapter 6.6.8 on page 6-25). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2). For explanation of the number system of severity numbering see Error Definitions (see chapter 6.1 on page 6-2).

in hexadecimal

32.0.0

20

32.0.1

20

32.0.2

20

Cause:

Corrective Action:

00

00 00

NO ERROR

Main module executed command with no error

03

00 01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

03

00 02

UNKNOWN COMMAND

Use correct command ID and command length.

Error Code

Event ID

Sub Unit

decimal

Severity

Service Software

Device ID

User software

Wrong command code. Check syntax / sequence. 32.0.3

20

03

00 03


Check allowed parameter range.

PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE 32.0.4

20

02

00 04


Exchange module. Exchange Front Module PCB.

PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE ERROR EEPROM WRITE


Page 20-21

20. Front Module 32.0.5

32.0.6

20

20

03

03

00 05

00 06



EEPROM READ

If parameter saved, exchange Front Module PCB.

Supply voltage out of range (%1 V).



check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange Front Module PCB.

32.0.7

20

01

00 07

Supply voltage back in range (%1 V). Main Module detected supply voltage back in range. VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

20

03

00 08



TSD PROTECTION 20

01

00 09

POSITIONING PROBLEM

20

03

00 0A

DRIVE NOT MOVING


32.0.16

20

03

00 0C

SELFTEST ERROR

Exchange module.

20

03

00 0E

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

20

03

00 0F


Do not try again.

20

03

00 10


Command execution takes too much time.


20

03

00 11


32.0.18

32.0.19

32.0.20

20

20

20

03

03

03

00 12

00 13

00 14




PARAMETER NOT FOUND





Set authorization.




20

03

00 15




20

03

00 16

Illegal parameter length in command. Enter parameter in correct length. ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH

32.0.32

20

00

00 20

SENSOR STATE CHANGED OPEN or CLOSE.

Status change of the cover and flap sensors.

Table 20.5-1: Front Cover CU, error list

Page 20-22


20. Front Module

20.6


This section shows an overview of the electronic boards of the module. See chapter 2.3 on page 2-8 for an overview of the complete electric circuit.

20.6.1

Front Cover CU PCB

Figure 20.6-1: Front cover CU PCB Number


J1

Reagent Flap Sensor

J2

Starter Flap Sensor

J3

Top Cover Flap Sensor

J4

Sample Flap Sensor

J5

Download Connector

J6


J7

LED Display Reagent PCB (J1)

J8

LED Display Diti PCB (J1)

J9

Unused Table 20.6-1: Connections of the Front Cover CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1 LED 10

Sample Rack Lane 1 - Sample Rack Lane 10

LED11

Power Table 20.6-2: LEDs of the Front Cover CU PCB


Page 20-23

20. Front Module

20.6.2

LED Display Reagent PCB

Figure 20.6-2: LED Display Reagent PCB There will be used two identical boards: •

First PCB for Integral Lane 1 – 14;

•

Second PCB for Integral Lane 15 - 28.

Number


J1

Next PCB:

J2

•

First PCB (1 - 14): Front Cover CU PCB, J7

•

Second PCB (15 - 28): First PCB (1 - 14), J2

Previous PCB: First PCB (1 - 14): Second PCB (15 - 28), J1 Second PCB (15 - 28): Unused Table 20.6-3: Connections of the LED Display Reagent PCB

Number

Description

LED1 LED14

First PCB (1 - 14): Integral Lane 1 - 14 Second PCB (15 - 28): Integral Lane 15 - 28 Table 20.6-4: LEDs of the LED Display Reagent PCB

Page 20-24


20. Front Module

20.6.3

LED Display Diti PCB

Figure 20.6-3: LED Display Diti PCB

Number


J1

Front Cover CU PCB, J8

J2

Sensor Flap Cuvette Reservoir

J3

LED Display Starter PCB (J1) Table 20.6-5: Connections of the LED Display Diti PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Disposable Tips Drawer 1

LED2

Disposable Tips Drawer 2 Table 20.6-6: LEDs of the LED Display Diti PCB


Page 20-25

20. Front Module

20.6.4

LED Display Starter PCB

Figure 20.6-4: LED Display starter PCB

Number


J1

LED Display Diti PCB (J3) Table 20.6-7: Connections of the LED Display Starter PCB

Number

Description

LED1 LED4

Starter 1 - Starter 4

Table 20.6-8: LEDs of the LED Display Starter PCB

Page 20-26


21. Cabinet Module

21 Cabinet Module This chapter describes cabinet module in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning cabinet are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing this module. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about repair and calibration of this module (sections “Replacement and Repair”, “Adjustment and Calibration” and “Troubleshooting”). In the last section cabinet PCB layout is described.

21.1

Safety



•


•



Page 21-1

21. Cabinet Module

21.2

Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of this module.

Figure 21.2-1: Cabinet overview No.

Description

1

Left drawer

2

Waste Container (left, yellow tube)

3

Waste Container (right, red tube)

4

Bottle Cleaning

5

Waste basin

6

Solid waste drawer

7

Right drawer

8

DI - Water Container

9

DI - Water Intermediate Container

10

Wash Buffer Container

11

Wash Intermediate Container

12

PC

13

Cabinet doors Table 21.2-1: Cabinet with drawers overview

Page 21-2


21. Cabinet Module

Figure 21.2-2: Cabinet, tubing layout

21.2.1




Page 21-3

21. Cabinet Module

21.3


This section contains instructions for the repair of individual components of the cabinet module. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

21.3.1 21.3.1.1

Replacement of Cleaning and Waste Valves Preliminary Steps


Remove DICV, WBCV and Waste Valve

Take care of draining liquid.

1. Carefully unplug first the front tubes (1), (3) and (5). 2. Loosen two screws (2) of wash buffer cleaning valve (WBCV) (1). 3. Unplug side tubes out of valve. 4. Loosen two screws (4) of DI cleaning valve (DICV) (3). 5. Unplug side tubes out of valve. 6. Loosen two screws (6) of waste valve (5). 7. Unplug side tubes out of valve. 8. Take valves out and unplug connector (15).

Page 21-4


21. Cabinet Module

Figure 21.3-1: DICV, WBCV and Waste Valve


Page 21-5

21. Cabinet Module 21.3.1.3

Assemble DICV, WBCV and Waste Valve

1. lnsert WBCV (1) and fasten with two screws (2) 2. Insert DICV (3) and fasten with two screws (4). 3. Insert waste valve (5) and fasten with two screws (6). 4. Check pin-out from valves to connector. 5. Plug connector (15) in.


Figure 21.3-3: Rear view of valve block

Valve

Pin - out

Valve Unit 1 (white)

PIN 1 + 2

Valve Unit 3 (blue)

PIN 3 + 4

Valve Unit 5 (red)

PIN 5 + 6

Table 21.3-1: Pin out at connector (15). Page 21-6


21. Cabinet Module 6. Push all tubes carefully onto the fittings in the right way.


Valve No.

1

3

5

Pos. No.

Tube

Tube color

8

Output to WDP

Transparent

9

Cleaning tube

Yellow

10

Input from wash container

Transparent

11

Output to PRP (KNF)

Blue

12

Cleaning tube

Yellow

13

Input from de-bubbler

Blue

14

Input waste (WAP)

Red

15

Output left

Red (yellow sensor cable) Left Waste Container

16

Output right

Red (red sensor cable) Right Waste Container

Table 21.3-2: Tube connection color code 7. Check change over valves (see chapter 21.4.1.2 on page 21-27).


Page 21-7

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.2

Replacement Cabinet CU PCB

Two models of Cabinet PCB are currently available: the “old” Cabinet PCB (PN 7222210001) and the “new” Cabinet PCB (PN 7222212000). The “new” Cabinet PCB is installed on instruments with SN ≥ 2210000309. The two PCBs differ in the design of the solid waste drawer opened/ closed sensor (see chapter 21.6.1 on page 21-36 for details). The “new” cabinet PCB can only be used on instruments with the new solid waste drawers installed (i.e. SN ≥ 2210000276, as described in TB 2210038). In case the cabinet PCB shall be replaced on instruments with SN < 2210000276, the “old” PCB shall be used. The “old” cabinet PCB can be used both with the “old” and the “new” solid waste drawers.

21.3.2.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove DI Water Container, Wash Buffer Container and Intermediate Tank (Water). 21.3.2.2

Remove Cabinet CU PCB

1. Unplug all cables of cabinet CU PCB (1). 2. Loosen two screws (2) and take circuit board out.

Figure 21.3-5: Cabinet CU PCB

Page 21-8



Assemble Cabinet CU PCB

1. Set new cabinet CU PCB (1) into guide and fasten two screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board. 3. Insert DI Water Container, Wash Buffer Container and Intermediate Tank (Water). 21.3.2.4

Set Cabinet CU PCB Parameter

1. If necessary (new Cabinet PCB installed), run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 24-12). 2. Check filling level sensors (see chapter 21.4.1.1 on page 21-26). 3. Check change over valves (see chapter 21.4.1.2 on page 21-27). 4. Check sensor of solid waste case (see 21.4.1.3 on page 21-27).


Page 21-9

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.3 21.3.3.1

Replacement Level Sensor DI Water Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove DI Water Container and Intermediate Tank (Water). 21.3.3.2

Remove Level Sensor DI Water

1. Unplug cable level sensor DI water (3) out of intermediate tank (water) (1). 2. Draw supply DI water tube (2) out of intermediate tank (water) (1). 3. Unscrew container lid (4) and pull level sensor DI water (5) out of container.

Figure 21.3-6: Intermediate tank (water)

Page 21-10



Assemble Level Sensor DI Water

1. Set new level sensor DI water (5) into intermediate container (water) and fasten with container lid (4).

Figure 21.3-7: Level Sensor DI Water 2. Draw supply DI water tube (2) onto intermediate tank (water) (1). 3. Plug cable level sensor DI water (3) into intermediate tank (water) (1). 4. Insert Intermediate Tank (Water) and DI Water Container into the system. 5. Check level sensor of DI water (see chapter 21.4.1.1 on page 21-26).


Page 21-11

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.4 21.3.4.1

Replacement Level Sensor Wash Solution Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove Wash Solution Container and Intermediate Tank (Wash Solution). 21.3.4.2

Remove Level Sensor Wash Solution

1. Unplug cable level sensor wash solution (3) out of intermediate tank (wash solution) (1). 2. Draw supply wash solution tube (2) out of intermediate tank (wash solution) (1). 3. Unscrew container lid (4) and pull level sensor wash solution (5) out of container.

Figure 21.3-8: Intermediate tank (wash solution)

Page 21-12



Assemble Level Sensor Wash Solution

1. Set new level sensor wash solution (5) into intermediate container (wash solution) and fasten with container lid (4).

Figure 21.3-9: Level Sensor Wash Solution 2. Draw supply wash solution tube (2) onto intermediate tank (wash solution) (1). 3. Plug cable level sensor wash solution (3) into intermediate tank (wash solution) (1). 4. Insert Intermediate Tank (Wash Solution) and Wash Solution Container into the system. 5. Check level sensor of Wash Solution (see chapter 21.4.1.1 on page 21-26).


Page 21-13

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.5 21.3.5.1

Replacement Level Sensor Left and Right Waste Preliminary Steps

6. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 7. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 8. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 9. Remove Waste Containers. 21.3.5.2

Remove Level Sensor Left Waste (yellow)

1. Unscrew cable level sensor waste (4) out of level sensor waste (3). 2. Unscrew nut (5) of level sensor waste (3) out. 3. Unscrew level sensor waste (3) out of waste container (1).

Figure 21.3-10: Left Waste Container

Page 21-14


21. Cabinet Module

Figure 21.3-11: Left Waste container 21.3.5.3

Assemble Level Sensor Left Waste (yellow)

1. Set new level sensor waste (3) into container (1) and screw it into waste container (1). 2. Counter level sensor waste (3) with nut (5). 3. Plug cable level sensor waste (4) into level sensor waste (3) and fasten it. 4. Insert waste container into cabinet. 5. Check level sensor of Left Waste container (see chapter 21.4.1.1 on page 21-26).


Page 21-15

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.5.4

Remove Level Sensor Right Waste (red)

1. Unscrew cable level sensor waste (7) out of level sensor waste (6). 2. Unscrew nut (8) of level sensor waste (6) out. 3. Unscrew level sensor waste (6) out of waste container (2).

Figure 21.3-12: Right Waste Container

Page 21-16


21. Cabinet Module

Figure 21.3-13: Right Waste container 21.3.5.5

Assemble Level Sensor Right Waste (red)

1. Set new level sensor waste (6) into waste container (2) and screw it into waste container (2). 2. Counter level sensor waste (6) with nut (8). 3. Plug cable level sensor waste (7) into level sensor waste (6) and fasten it. 4. Insert waste container into cabinet. 5. Check level sensor of Right Waste container (see chapter 21.4.1.1 on page 21-26).


Page 21-17

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.6 21.3.6.1

Replacement Left Drawer Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove the waste containers and the cleaning solution container. 5. Remove the waste basin. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 8. Remove Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.2 on page 9-27). 21.3.6.2

Remove Left Drawer

1. Unscrew the four screws (2) through the service holes (3). 2. Move the whole drawer (1) to the back and remove it with an upward movement.

Figure 21.3-14: Left drawer removal

Page 21-18



Assemble Left Drawer

1. Fit the four screws (2) with two turns. 2. The mounting brackets of the left drawer shall be fitted in the four previously mounted screws (2). Slid the left drawer forward until the screws are at the stop of the keyhole. 3. Screw the four screws (2) through the four service holes (3).

Figure 21.3-15: Left drawer screws 4. Assemble Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.3 on page 9-28). 5. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 6. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 7. Perform cover alignment (see chapter 9.4 on page 9-42).


Page 21-19

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.7 21.3.7.1

Replacement Right Drawer Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove the water/ wash containers and intermediate containers. 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 7. Remove Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.2 on page 9-27). 21.3.7.2

Remove Left Drawer

1. Unscrew the four screws (2) through the service holes (3). 2. Move the whole drawer (1) to the back and remove it with an upward movement.

Figure 21.3-16: Right drawer removal

Page 21-20



Assemble Left Drawer

1. Fit the four screws (2) with two turns. 2. The mounting brackets of the right drawer shall be fitted in the four previously mounted screws (2). Slid the right drawer forward until the screws are at the stop of the keyhole. 3. Screw the four screws (2) through the four service holes (3).

Figure 21.3-17: Right drawer screws 4. Assemble Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.3 on page 9-28). 5. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-6). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 7. Perform cover alignment (see chapter 9.4 on page 9-42).


Page 21-21

21. Cabinet Module

21.3.8

Replacement Presence Sensor Di Water and Wash Buffer Container

21.3.8.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove Di Water Container and Wash Buffer Container. 21.3.8.2

Remove Presence Sensor

1. Unscrew nut of Presence Sensor Di Water (1) and Wash Buffer Container (2). 2. Unplug Presence Sensor cable out of Cabinet CU PCB slot J6 (see chapter 21.6.1 on page 21-36).

Figure 21.3-18: Presence Sensor Container

Page 21-22



Assemble Presence Sensor

1. Set new Presence Sensor Di Water (1) (blue heat shrink tubing) in and fasten with two nuts (3) and two gear racks (4).

Figure 21.3-19: Presence Sensor DI Water Container

Figure 21.3-20: Presence Sensor head


Page 21-23

21. Cabinet Module 2. Set new Presence Sensor Wash Buffer Container (2) (white heat shrink tubing) in and fasten with two nuts (3) and two gear racks (4).

Figure 21.3-21: Presence Sensor Wash Buffer Container 3. Set DI - Water Container and Wash Buffer Container into the cabinet. 4. Check the sensor that has been assembled (see chapter 21.4.1.4 on page 21-27).

Page 21-24


21. Cabinet Module

21.3.9 21.3.9.1

Replacement of Solid Waste Sensor Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove DI - Water Container, Wash Intermediate Container and Wash Buffer Container out of cabinet. 21.3.9.2

Remove Solid Waste Sensor

1. Remove Cabinet CU PCB (see chapter 21.3.2.2 on page 21-8). 21.3.9.3

Assemble Solid Waste Sensor

1. Assemble Cabinet CU PCB (see chapter 21.3.2.3 on page 21-9).


Page 21-25

21. Cabinet Module

21.4



21.4.1 21.4.1.1

Calibration of Cabinet Function check Filling Level Sensors

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units of Service Software and initialize by pressing All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Connect all containers with the sensors and place them in front of the system. Assure that all the containers (and the intermediate tanks) are empty. 3. Choose dialogue Cabinet and start read out of the current status by clicking on Read all button. Following status is indicated. - LED - Water - Red - LED - Wash Buffer - Red - LED - Waste - Green 4. Turn the intermediate containers (Water, Wash Buffer) with the sensors upside down and read out the status again. - LED - Water - Yellow or Green (at round about 30%) - LED - Wash Buffer - Yellow or Green (at round about 30%) 5. Additional, place the two shuttle containers (Water, Wash Buffer) into the cabinet, so the contact switches are activated and then check again the status with the Read button selected. - LED - Water - Green > 30% - LED - Wash Buffer - Green > 30% 6. Turn the Waste Container 1 upside down. - LED - Waste - Green - % - Waste 1- min. 100% - % - Waste 2 - < 20% 7. Turn the Waste Container 2 upside down. - LED - Waste - Red - % - Waste 1- min. 100% - % - Waste 2 - min. 100%

When turning the waste containers back and after new read out, the new filling level are indicated, but the status of the LED stays at red. To receive the normal operation mode the cabinet shall be initialized again. 8. Fill up at last the two shuttle containers with the proposed fluids (DI Water / Wash Buffer). Place the containers into the cabinet and check if the liquid runs into the intermediate tanks.

Page 21-26


21. Cabinet Module

21.4.1.2

Function check change over valves

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units of Service Software and initialize by pressing All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. In the section Cabinet Inflow Area of Cabinet dialogue switch back and forth between the buttons Water and CS to System and between buttons Wash Buffer and CS to Washer. The relevant valve must change over (audibly). 3. In the section Cabinet Outflow Area of Cabinet dialogue switch back and forth between the buttons Left and Right. The valve must change over (audibly) and the relevant container LED must change over from container 1 to 2. 21.4.1.3

Function check Sensor Solid Waste Case

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units of Service Software and initialize by pressing All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Ensure that the solid waste case is pushed in all the way. Start read out of the current status by clicking on Read all button of Presence Status section of Cabinet dialogue At the window Presence Status the solid waste displays Pushed In. 3. Pull the solid waste container a bit out Start read out of the current status by clicking on Read all button At the window Presence Status the solid waste displays changes to Pulled Out. 21.4.1.4

Function check presence Sensor DI Water and Wash Buffer Containers

1. Open the dialogue Front and Loading Units of Service Software and initialize by pressing All Dialogue Controlled Modules. 2. Remove the container to check (DI water or Wash Buffer) from its position. Start read out of the current status by clicking on Read all button of Presence Status section of Cabinet dialogue. At the section Presence Status the field associated to the removed container displays Intermediate. 3. Reinsert the container to check (DI water or Wash Buffer) into its position. Start read out of the current status by clicking on Read all button. At the section Presence Status the field associated to the inserted container displays Both.


Page 21-27

21. Cabinet Module

21.4.2 21.4.2.1

Adjustment of drawer handles Left drawer adjustment

1. Loosen three screws (2) 2. Push the handle (3) and the framework (4) in (as indicated by the white arrows in the figure) and fasten three screws (2).

Figure 21.4-1: Left drawer adjustment 21.4.2.2

Right drawer adjustment

1. Loosen screws (2) of washer handle (3) and framework (4).

Figure 21.4-2: Right drawer adjustment

Page 21-28


21. Cabinet Module 2. Set containers in, and push containers into the connectors. 3. Push handle (3) and framework (4) against the containers. 4. Fasten screw (2) in the middle. 5. Remove the containers and fasten the remaining two screws (2).

Figure 21.4-3: Water and wash containers against the framework


Page 21-29

21. Cabinet Module

21.5

Troubleshooting


21.5.1

Cabinet (22h; 34dec): Error List

Front Module Decimal

34

Hexadecimal

22

The Command ID in the Service Software code is left out but is shown in Command Codes Cabinet Module (see chapter 6.6.9 on page 6-26). For sub module assembly, see Device Driver Definition (see chapter 6.2 on page 6-5) For decoding of error code for User Software and Service Software, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

Service Software User Software decimal

Corrective Action:

00

00

NO ERROR

22

03

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

34.5.1

22

03

05

01

Cleaning Solution Control is not initialized.

Cabinet has not been initialized yet or a fatal error of the cleaning solution control has occurred.

34.0.2

22

03

00

02

unknown command

Cabinet received an unknown command

34.1.2

22

03

01

02

unknown command

Cabinet: System liquid control received an unknown command.

34.2.2

22

03

02

02

unknown command

Cabinet: Wash buffer control received an unknown command.

34.3.2

22

03

03

02

unknown command

Cabinet: Liquid waste control received an unknown command

34.4.2

22

03

04

02

unknown command

Cabinet: So waste control received an unknown command.

Page 21-30

Error Code

22

Sub Unit

Severity

Cause:

Device ID

Event ID

hexadecimal


21. Cabinet Module 34.5.2

22

03

05

02

unknown command

Cabinet: Cleaning solution control received an unknown command.

34.0.3

22

03

00

03


Cabinet: The transmitted value of a persistent (flash memory) parameter is outside the allowed range. Check parameter range.

34.3.3

22

03

03

03

Liquid Waste Control: Actor is not defined.

Cabinet: The command denotes an actor that does not exist.

34.5.3

22

03

05

03

Cleaning Solution Control: Actor is not defined

Cabinet: The command denotes an actor that does not exist.

34.0.4

22

02

00

04


Cabinet: Writing a parameter to the flash memory failed. Exchange Cabinet PCB.

34.0.5

34.0.6

22

22

03

03

00

00

05

06


Cabinet: Reading a parameter from the flash memory failed.

EEPROM READ



If parameter saved, exchange Cabinet PCB.

Supply voltage out of range (%1 me).

Cabinet: The supply voltage of the cabinet module was detected to be out of range.

VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE UNDER VOLTAGE DETECT

check fuses / replace fuses check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange Cabinet PCB.

34.0.7

22

01

00

07

Supply voltage back in range (%1 me) VOLTAGE BACK IN RANGE

22

03

08


22

01

09

POSITIONING PROBLEM

22

03

0A

DRIVE NOT MOVING

Cabinet: The supply voltage of the cabinet module was detected to be in range (again). Check cables / airflow.


34.0.14

22

03

0B


22

03

0C

SELFTEST ERROR

22

03

0D


22

03

0E

Cabinet unable to execute command

Cabinet cannot execute a command at the current state.

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

00


Exchange module.

Page 21-31


22

03

01

0E

System Liquid Control unable to execute command.

Cabinet: System liquid control cannot execute a command at the current state. Unit busy.

34.2.14

22

03

02

0E

Wash Buffer Control unable to Cabinet: Wash buffer control cannot execute command. execute a command at the current state. Unit busy.

34.3.14

22

03

03

0E

Liquid Waste Control unable to execute command.

Cabinet: Liquid waste control cannot execute a command at the current state. Unit busy.

34.4.14

22

03

04

0E

So Waste Control unable to execute command.

Cabinet: So waste control cannot execute a command at the current state. Unit busy.

34.5.14

22

03

05

0E

Cleaning Solution Control unable to execute command.

Cabinet: Cleaning solution control cannot execute a command at the current state. Unit busy.

34.0.15

22

03

00

0F


Cabinet: The actual command is not implemented. Do not try again.

34.1.15

22

03

01

0F



34.2.15

22

03

02

0F



34.3.15

22

03

03

0F



34.4.15

22

03

04

0F



34.5.15

22

03

05

0F



34.0.16

22

03

00

10

Command execution time-out. Cabinet: The command could not be executed within a reasonable time EXECUTION TIMEOUT

34.1.16

22

03

01

10


34.2.16

22

03

02

10


34.3.16

22

03

03

10


Page 21-32



22

03

04

10


34.5.16

22

03

05

10


34.0.17

22

03

00

11


Cabinet: A persistent parameter has a type like byte, integer,... indicated by a type identifier. The current command requires an unknown parameter type. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

34.0.18

22

03

00

12


Cabinet: Each persistent parameter has an identifier (= index). The current command requires access to an undefined index. Set correct parameter index. Select correct parameter index.

34.0.19

22

03

00

13


Cabinet: There are access rights for each persistent parameter. The current command tries to access a parameter without having the appropriate rights. Set authorization.

34.0.20

22

03

00

14


34.0.21

22

03

00

15

Illegal parameter type in command. ILLEGAL PARAMETER TYPE

Cabinet: Persistent parameters may be locked. The current command tries to unlock a parameter but using the wrong code. Enter valid access code. Cabinet: The current command tries to access a persistent parameter but using the wrong parameter type. Set correct parameter type.

34.0.22

22

03

00

16

Illegal parameter length in command. ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH

34.3.32

22

03

03

20

LIQUID WASTE FULL

Cabinet: The current command tries to access a persistent parameter but using the wrong parameter length. Enter parameter in correct length. Cabinet: The liquid waste containers are either: - both full (>= 99%) - one full, one disconnected - both disconnected. Empty liquid waste.

34.1.33

22

03

01

21

SYSTEM LIQUID EMPTY

Cabinet: The system liquid container level is < 1%. Refill system liquid.

34.2.34

22

03

02

22

WASH BUFFER EMPTY

Cabinet: The wash buffer container level is < 1%. Refill wash buffer.


Page 21-33


22

01

01

30

SYSTEM LIQUID ENTERING YELLOW PHASE

Cabinet: The system liquid container level goes beyond the defined threshold. Refill system liquid.

34.1.49

22

01

01

31

SYSTEM LIQUID ENTERING RED PHASE

Cabinet: The system liquid container level goes beyond the defined threshold. Urgently refill system liquid.

34.2.50

22

01

02

32

WASH BUFFER ENTERING YELLOW PHASE

Cabinet: The wash buffer container level goes beyond the defined threshold. Refill wash buffer.

34.2.51

22

01

02

33

WASH BUFFER ENTERING RED PHASE

Cabinet: The wash buffer container level goes beyond the defined threshold. Urgently refill wash buffer.

34.3.52

22

01

03

34

LIQUID WASTE ENTERING YELLOW PHASE

Cabinet: The liquid waste containers exceeds the defined threshold. Empty liquid waste.

34.3.53

22

01

03

35

LIQUID WASTE ENTERING RED PHASE

Cabinet: The liquid waste containers exceeds the defined threshold. Empty liquid waste:

34.1.54

22

01

01

36

SYSTEM LIQUID MAIN CONTAINER REMOVED

Cabinet: Somebody removed the system liquid main container (10 litres). Re-insert main container a.s.a.p.

34.2.55

22

01

02

37

WASH BUFFER MAIN CONTAINER REMOVED

Cabinet: Somebody removed the wash buffer main container (10 litres). Re-insert main container a.s.a.p.

34.3.56

22

01

03

38

LIQUID WASTE CONTAINER Cabinet: Somebody removed a liquid REMOVED waste container. Re-insert container a.s.a.p.

34.4.57

22

01

04

39

SO WASTE DRAWER PULLED OUT

Cabinet: Somebody pulled out the so waste drawer. Push in so waste drawer.

34.1.58

22

01

01

3A

SYSTEM LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR DISCONNECTED

Cabinet: Somebody disconnected the sensor line off the system liquid intermediate container. Re-connect level sensor a.s.a.p. Check level sensor.

34.2.59

22

01

02

3B

WASH BUFFER LEVEL SENSOR DISCONNECTED

Cabinet: Somebody disconnected the sensor line off the wash buffer intermediate container. Re-connect level sensor a.s.a.p. Check level sensor.

Page 21-34



22

00

01

40

system liquid entering green phase. SYSTEM LIQUID BACK IN GREEN PHASE

34.2.65

22

00

02

41

wash buffer entering green phase. WASH BUFFER BACK IN GREEN PHASE

34.3.66

22

00

03

42

liquid waste entering green phase. LIQUID WASTE BACK IN GREEN PHASE

34.1.67

22

00

01

43

SYSTEM LIQUID CONTAINER REINSERTED.

Cabinet: Somebody replenished the system liquid, the level exceeds the defined threshold. No action. Cabinet: Somebody replenished the wash buffer, the level exceeds the defined threshold. No action. Cabinet: Somebody emptied the liquid waste, the level goes beyond the defined threshold. No action. Cabinet: Somebody inserted the system liquid main container (10 litres). No action.

34.2.68

22

00

02

44

WASH BUFFER CONTAINER Cabinet: Somebody inserted the wash REINSERTED. buffer main container (10 litres). No action.

34.3.69

22

00

03

45

LIQUID WASTE CONTAINER Cabinet: Somebody re-connected a REINSERTED. liquid waste container. No action.

34.4.70

22

00

04

46

SO WASTE DRWAER PUSHED IN

Cabinet: Somebody pushed in the so waste container. No action.

34.1.71

22

00

01

47

SYSTEM LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR RECONNECTED:

Cabinet: Somebody re-connected the system liquid level sensor to the intermediate container. No action.

34.2.72

22

00

02

48

WASH BUFFER LEVEL SENSOR RECONNECTED

Cabinet: Somebody re-connected the wash buffer level sensor to the intermediate container. No action.

37.3.73

22

00

03

49

LIQUID WASTE CONTAINER Cabinet: The liquid waste distribution SWITCHED valve has been switched by the liquid waste control. Possible reasons: - a container became full - a command required switching - initialization of the cabinet. No action. Table 21.5-1: Cabinet, error list


Page 21-35

21. Cabinet Module

21.6



21.6.1

Cabinet CU PCB

Figure 21.6-1: Cabinet CU PCB – old design

Page 21-36


21. Cabinet Module Number


J1


J2

Cabinet Valves

J3

Unused

J4

Level Sensor Water

J5

Download Connector

J6

Water Container and Wash Buffer Container Present Sensors

J7

Level Sensor Waste Container Left

J8

Level Sensor Wash Buffer Container

J9

Unused

J10

Level Sensor Waste Container Right

J11

Level Sensor Cleaning Solution Bottle (Currently not used)

J12

Unused Table 21.6-1: Connections of the Cabinet CU PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 21.6-2: LEDs of the Cabinet CU PCB

Number

Description

IC7

Solid Waste Drawer Opened/Closed Sensor (old design)

IC8

Solid Waste Drawer Opened/Closed Sensor (new design) Table 21.6-3: Sensors of the Cabinet CU PCB

Figure 21.6-2: Cabinet CU PCB – new design LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 21-37

21. Cabinet Module

The only difference between the “old” (PN 7222210001) and the “new” (PN 7222212000) Cabinet PCBs is the design of the solid waste drawer opened/closed sensor. All the other connections are the same.

Page 21-38


21. Cabinet Module

21.7

Direct Drain Configuration

LIAISON®XL analyzer supports also a direct drain configuration, where a waste tube connected to the system allows to dispose liquid waste directly into a collector drain by-passing liquid waste tanks. A dedicated direct drain kit shall be ordered to implement the desired configuration. The tubing provided in the direct drain kit has a length of 10m, with an inner diameter of 6.35mm and an outer diameter of 9.53mm. The black protection conduit has an external diameter of 15.8 mm.

Figure 21.7-1: Direct drain tubing

21.7.1

Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove waste containers. 5. Remove waste out tubings for left and right waste containers (see chapter 22.3.14 on page 22-44). 6. Remove water and wash solution containers and intermediate containers. 7. Pull out the solid waste case.

21.7.2

Installation

1. According to customer needs, cut a tubing of proper length from the 10 meters one provided as spare part. 2. Compare the length of the cut tubing with the maximum installation height that shall be reached. The constraints reported in Table 21.7-1 shall be respected. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 21-39

21. Cabinet Module Tubing length

Maximum height of tubing

Less than 3 meter

90cm (outlet on 80cm)

3 meter up to 5 meter


5 meter up to 10 meter


Table 21.7-1: Relationship between tubing length and maximum installation height

The maximum height of the waste tubing must not exceed 90cm above floor, with the outlet of the tubing on 80cm.

The respect of the constraints of Table 21.7-1 ensures an accurate and uncritical disposal of liquid waste using direct drain.

3. Unplug Internal Waste tube (1) out of Waste Valve (5).

Figure 21.7-2: Remove Internal Waste Tube

If the system has been already used, take care of draining liquid.

Page 21-40


21. Cabinet Module 4. Connect the direct drain tube (2, provided with the kit) to the internal waste tube (1) . 5. Move the direct drain tube through the metal sheet (3) separating the tank area and the solid waste area of the cabinet. 6. Verify that the portion of the tube covered with a conduit is at the left of the metal sheet (i.e. positioned above the solid waste area). 7. Fix the portion of the tube covered with the conduit into the dedicated fitting available onto the separating metal sheet. 8. Move the direct drain tube through the hole of the cabinet floor (4) out of the system.

3

Tubing from the instrument

2 4

Drill hole in the separation sheet metal, position of tube fitting with strain relief.

Hole in the Cabinet Floor: tube goes through and out of the system.

From the separation panel onwards, the tubing is covered by a protection conduit.

Figure 21.7-3: Direct drain connection, back view

Instruments from Serial ID 2210000226 are already manufactured for the implementation of direct drain configuration (i.e. holes are already available into the cabinet). 9. Verify that the direct drain tube reaches the waste collector drain available at customer site. 10. Put the tube into the collector drain. 11. Put water and wash solution containers and intermediate containers back into the cabinet. 12. Push solid waste case in.


Page 21-41

21. Cabinet Module

Direct drain is an optional solution. All systems will be shipped with waste containers. Direct drain configuration can be implemented during installation or at a later point in time.

21.7.3

Parameter setting

1. Plug-in LIAISON®XL system, switch it on and open Service Software. 2. Move to Front and Loading Units service window and initialize selecting All Dialog Controlled Modules. 3. Move to Parameter dialogue and select Cabinet ID 0x22 from Device dropdown menu. 4. In Code field insert 1 value and press Set button. 5. In Parameter field, set 1 and press Read button. 6. In New Value field, set 1 and press Write button. 7. Press Overwrite button in order to save the new setting in NVM also. Direct drain can be used with software version 3.1.5.5 or higher.

To disable direct drain, the parameter 1 in the cabinet firmware needs to be set to 0.

Page 21-42


22. Tubing

22 Tubing This chapter describes the replacement of the tubing of the system.

22.1

Safety



•


•


22.2

Overview

22.2.1

Overview Tubing Set

No

Tubing Description

1

WPAP - Wash Probe Rinse


Page 22-1

22. Tubing

Page 22-2

2

WAP Aspiration tubes ports 1 to 6.

3

Aspirate 6 GND

4

WPRP Pump – Washer

5

Waste internal

6

WDP – WDVB


22. Tubing 7

WBCV – WDP

8

DEBUBBLER AND FILTER

9

CLEANING SOLUTION SOAK L


Page 22-3

22. Tubing

Page 22-4

10

DICV – PRP

11

DI SOAK LINE

12

TUBING, WASH BUFFER SOAK LINE


22. Tubing 13

LWP - PIP RINSE STATION

14

WASTE OUT

15

ASPIRATE STARTER PUMP, BLUE

16

ASPIRATE STARTER PUMP, RED


Page 22-5

22. Tubing 17

WAP TUBE REAGENT MODULE

18

ASPIRATION TUBE READER

Table 22.2-1: Tubing set overview

22.2.2

Page 22-6

Overview other Tubings

No

Tubing Description

1

Washer Injectors

2

SUPPLY CLEANING BOTTLE


22. Tubing 3

SUPPLY WASH BUFFER

4

SUPPLY WATER

5

PRP – SRP

Table 22.2-2: Tubing overview

22.2.3


See chapter 2.1.4 on page 2-5 for an over view of the complete electric circuit.


Page 22-7

22. Tubing

22.3

Replacement of Tubes

22.3.1

Replacement of Washer Module Tubes

22.3.1.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. The procedures reported below are related to 3-layer washer and reader aspiration tubes, introduced with Technical Bulletin 2210147 and included also in the last released PM kit (see Technical Bulletin 2210146). Differently from the tubes previously available, the following differences can be highlighted: •

3-layer tubes can be removed from the needles only by cutting;

•

during the assembly, the stiffness of 3-layer tubes does not allow to insert them into the “grey” clamps available onto the washer module.

22.3.1.2

Remove Washer Tubes

Do not bend or damage any tubes while disassembling or assembling the tubing sets. 1. Unplug tubing WPAP - wash probe rinse port (2) out of the washer (1).

Page 22-8


22. Tubing

Figure 22.3-1: WPAP - Washer Tubes 2. Unplug tubing WPAP - wash probe rinse port (2) out of the WPAP pump (3).

Figure 22.3-2: WPAP


Page 22-9

22. Tubing 3. Disconnect the washer injector tubings (4-8) out of the washer.

Figure 22.3-3: Washer, aspiration tubes 4. Disconnect the washer injector tubings (4 to 8) out of WDVB valve (9).

Figure 22.3-4: WDVB valve

Page 22-10


22. Tubing 5. Move the lift manually up to its mechanical end position. 6. Push the aspiration probes (10) upwards till they are out of the guiding seals. 7. Move them to the front. 8. Cut off WAP Aspiration tubes (11), ports 1 to 6.

Figure 22.3-5: Aspiration probes and tubes

Figure 22.3-6: Cutting of WAP aspiration tubes


Page 22-11

22. Tubing 9. Remove the reader needle (17) out of Reader and cut off the reader aspiration tube.

Figure 22.3-7: Reader

Figure 22.3-8: Cutting of reader aspiration tube 10. In case the washer and the reader aspiration needles shall not be replaced, remove the remaining portions of the cut tubes from the needles, with the help of a tool (e.g. a cutter).

Page 22-12


22. Tubing

Figure 22.3-9: Removal of cut tubes from the needles 11. Remove tubes (11) from bubble sensors (12) and from earthing screw (13). 12. Remove reader aspiration tube (17) from bubble sensor (12).

Figure 22.3-10: Bubble sensors


Page 22-13

22. Tubing 13. Unscrew aspiration tubes from WAP pump. 14. Remove WPRP - Washer tubes (14) out of washer.

Figure 22.3-11: WPRP - Washer tube 15. Remove the WPRP - Washer tubes (15) out of WPRP pump (16).

Figure 22.3-12: WPRP pump

Page 22-14


22. Tubing 22.3.1.3

Assemble Washer Tubes

1. Plug the WPRP - Washer tubes onto WPRP pump (16) and onto the washer, at the rear side of washer (A, B, and C).


Figure 22.3-14: WPRP Pump


Page 22-15

22. Tubing 2. Push the reader aspiration tube (G) onto needle (17) and insert needle into the Reader.

Figure 22.3-15: Reader aspiration needle and tube 3. Insert the reader aspiration tube (G) into the bubble sensor (12). The guiding direction of the tube through the bubble sensor shall always be from the bottom to the top. 4. Insert the aspiration needles (10) into the dedicated positions of the washer module.

Figure 22.3-16: Aspiration probes 5. Plug WAP Aspirate tubes, ports 1 to 6 (A-F) into the aspiration needles.

Page 22-16


22. Tubing 6. Plug WAP Aspirate tubes, ports 1 to 6 (A-F) into bubble sensors (12) and into earthing screw (13). The guiding direction of the tubes through the bubble sensors shall always be from the bottom to the top.

Figure 22.3-17: Bubble sensors 7. Fix the “black” rubber rings of the WAP Aspirate tubes, ports 1 to 6 (A-F) onto the washer plate (18). The tubes shall then be leaded between the “grey” clamps available on the washer module.

Figure 22.3-18: Bubble sensors 8. Adjust the tube length so that at the lowest and highest positions of the washer plate there are no bent tubings.


Page 22-17

22. Tubing

Figure 22.3-19: Tube length check 9. Plug WAP Aspiration tubes, ports 1 to 6 (A-F) and reader aspiration tube (G) into WAP pump.

Figure 22.3-20: WAP

Page 22-18


22. Tubing 10. Plug Aspirate WAP 6 GND tube (H) onto earthing screw (13).

Figure 22.3-21: Aspirate WAP6 GND tube 11. First assemble the injector tubes (4-8) onto WDVB valve (9), see color code of valve.

Figure 22.3-22: WDVB valve LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 22-19

22. Tubing 12. Assemble the injector tubes (4-8) onto washer from right to left, see color code of washer.

Figure 22.3-23: Washer injector to WDVB valve 13. Plug tubing WPAP - wash probe rinse port (2) onto the WPAP pump (3).

Figure 22.3-24: WPAP 14. Plug tubing WPAP - wash probe rinse port (2) onto washer (1).

Page 22-20


22. Tubing

Figure 22.3-25: WPAP - wash probe rinse port 15. Perform the adjustment of washer aspiration position (see chapter 13.4.1.1 on page 13-26). 16. Perform water fill-up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21). 17. Prime washer (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22). 18. In case of new WAP tubings, calibrate the washer bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2 on page 13-28). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 22-21

22. Tubing

22.3.2 22.3.2.1

Replacement of Waste Internal Tube Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 22.3.2.2

Remove Waste Internal Tube

1. Unplug Internal Waste tube (1) out of WAP (2), WPAP (3) and LWP (4) pumps.

Figure 22.3-26: Internal Waste Tube

Page 22-22


22. Tubing 2. Remove Internal Waste tube (1) out of the tube holders (6). 3. Unplug Internal Waste tube (1) out of Waste Valve (5).

Figure 22.3-27: Remove Internal Waste Tube 22.3.2.3

Assemble Internal Waste Tube

1. Plug Internal Waste tube (1) into WAP (2), WPAP (3) and LWP (4) pumps. 2. Thread tube into the tube holders (6) of the system down to the Waste Valve.

Figure 22.3-28: Tubing holders from right side of system 3. Plug Internal Waste tube (1) into Waste Valve (5). 4. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 5. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).


Page 22-23

22. Tubing

22.3.3 22.3.3.1

Replacement of WDP - WDVB Tubing Preliminary Steps


Remove WDP - WDVB Tubing

1. Unscrew connectors from Tubing WDP -WDVB (3) from WDP (1) pump and WDVB (2) valve block.

Figure 22.3-29: WDP - WDVB 22.3.3.3

Assemble WDP - WDVB Tubing

1. Fasten connectors from tubing WDP - WDVB (3) onto WDP (1) pump and WDVB (2) valve block. 2. Prime washer (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 22-24


22. Tubing

22.3.4 22.3.4.1

Replacement of WBCV - WDP TUBING Preliminary Steps


Remove WBCV - WDP Tubing

1. Unplug WBCV - WDP tubing (2) out of WDP (1) pump.

Figure 22.3-30: WDP


Page 22-25

22. Tubing 2. Remove WBCV - WDP tubing (2) out of the tube holders (4). 3. Unplug WBCV - WDP tubing (2) of WBCV (3) valve.

Figure 22.3-31: WBCV 22.3.4.3

Assemble WBCV - WDP Tubing

1. Plug WBCV - WDP tubing (2) onto WBCV (3) valve. 2. Thread the WBCV - WDP tubing (2) into the tube holders (4) up. 3. Plug WBCV - WDP tubing (2) onto WDP (1) pump. 4. Prime washer (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).

Page 22-26


22. Tubing

22.3.5 22.3.5.1

Replacement of DeBubbler Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. Empty the debubbler, using Service Software functionalities. 3. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 4. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 5. Open the top covers. 6. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 22.3.5.2

Remove Debubbler

1. Unplug DeBubbler tube (2) from WPRP (1) pump.

Figure 22.3-32: WPRP


Page 22-27

22. Tubing 2. Lift DeBubbler (3) up and unplug DI Soak Line tube (4).

Figure 22.3-33: DeBubbler 3. Unplug DeBubbler tube (5) from DICV (7).

Figure 22.3-34: DICV

Page 22-28


22. Tubing 22.3.5.3

Assemble Debubbler

1. Plug DeBubbler tube (2) into WPRP (1) pump. 2. Plug DI Soak Line tube (4) into DeBubbler (3). 3. Thread DeBubbler tube into the tube holders at the system. 4. Plug DeBubbler tube (5) into DICV (7). 5. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 7. Perform water fill-up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 22-29

22. Tubing

22.3.6 22.3.6.1

Replacement of DI Soak Line, Tubing Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 22.3.6.2

Remove DI Soak Line, Tubing

1. Lift DeBubbler (3) up and unplug DI Soak Line tube (4).

Figure 22.3-35: DeBubbler

Page 22-30


22. Tubing 2. Unplug DI Soak Line (4) from Water intermediate Container (6).

Figure 22.3-36: DI Soak Line connected with Water intermediate Container 3. Separate the DI Soak Line (4) from the sensor cable (7), removing the coil (8).

22.3.6.3

Assemble DI Soak Line

1. Assemble the DI Soak Line (4) and the sensor cable (7) together using the coil (8). 2. Lift DeBubbler (3) up and plug DI Soak Line tube (4) in. 3. Thread DeBubbler tube into the tube holders at the system. 4. Plug DI Soak Line (4) onto Water intermediate Container (6). 5. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 7. Perform water fill-up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21).


Page 22-31

22. Tubing

22.3.7 22.3.7.1

Replacement of Cleaning Solution Soak Line Tubing Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 22.3.7.2

Remove Cleaning Solution Soak Line Tubing

1. Unplug cleaning solution soak tubing (1) out of cleaning solution container (2).

Figure 22.3-37: Cleaning Solution

Page 22-32


22. Tubing 2. Unplug cleaning solution soak tubing (1) out of WBCV (3) and DICV (4) valves.

Figure 22.3-38: WBCV and DICV 3. Separate the cleaning solution soak tubing (1) from the left waste tubing (5) removing the coil (6). 22.3.7.3

Assemble Cleaning Solution Soak Line Tubing

1. Assemble the cleaning solution soak tubing (1) and the left waste tubing (5) together using the coil (6). 2. Plug cleaning solution soak tubing (1) into cleaning solution container (2). 3. Thread cleaning solution soak tubing into the tube holders. 4. Plug cleaning solution soak tubing (1) into WBCV (3) and DICV (4) valves.


Page 22-33

22. Tubing

22.3.8 22.3.8.1

Replacement of Supply Cleaning Bottle, Tubing Preliminary Steps


Remove Supply Cleaning Bottle, Tubing

1. Unplug cleaning solution soak tubing (2) of cleaning bottle (1).

Figure 22.3-39: Cleaning bottle

Page 22-34


22. Tubing 2. Pull supply cleaning bottle tube (3) out of cleaning bottle (1).

Figure 22.3-40: Supply Cleaning Bottle, tubing 22.3.8.3

Assemble Supply Cleaning Bottle, Tubing

1. Thread supply cleaning bottle tube (3) through the cleaning bottle sealing. 2. Connect cleaning solution soak tubing (2) into cleaning bottle (1).


Page 22-35

22. Tubing

22.3.9 22.3.9.1

Replacement of DICV - PRP Tubing Preliminary Steps


Remove DICV - PRP Tubing

1. Unplug DICV - PRP tubing (1) out of PRP pump (2).

Figure 22.3-41: PRP pump

Page 22-36


22. Tubing 2. Remove DICV - PRP tubing (1) out of the tube holders (4). 3. Unplug DICV - PRP tubing (1) out of DICV valve (3).

Figure 22.3-42: DICV valve 22.3.9.3

Assemble DICV - PRP Tubing

1. Plug new DICV - PRP tubing (1) into PRP pump (2). 2. Thread DICV - PRP tubing into the tube holders (4). 3. Plug new DICV - PRP tubing (1) into DICV valve (3). 4. Prime pipettor (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 22-37

22. Tubing

22.3.10 22.3.10.1

Replacement Wash Buffer Soak Line Preliminary Steps


Remove Wash Buffer Soak Line

1. Unplug wash buffer soak line (1) out of wash intermediate container (2).

Figure 22.3-43: Wash Intermediate Container

Page 22-38


22. Tubing 2. Remove wash buffer soak line (1) out of the tube holders (4). 3. Unplug wash buffer soak line (1) out of WBCV valve (3).

Figure 22.3-44: WBCV 4. Separate the Wash Buffer Soak Line (1) from the sensor cable (5), removing the coil (6). 22.3.10.3

Assemble Wash Buffer Soak Line

1. Assemble the Wash Buffer Soak Line (1) and the sensor cable (5) together using the coil (6). 2. Plug wash buffer soak line (1) into WBCV valve (3). 3. Thread wash buffer soak line into the tube holders (4). 4. Plug wash buffer soak line (1) into wash intermediate container (2). 5. Prime washer (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22).


Page 22-39

22. Tubing

22.3.11 22.3.11.1

Replacement of Supply Wash Buffer Tubing Preliminary Steps


Remove Supply Wash Buffer Tubing

1. Disconnect wash buffer soak line (2) from supply wash buffer tubing (1). 2. Pull supply wash buffer tubing (1) out of container tube (3).

Figure 22.3-45: Supply Wash Buffer 22.3.11.3

Assemble Supply Wash Buffer Tubing

1. Pull supply wash buffer tubing (1) over the container tube (3) (at least 8mm). 2. Connect wash buffer soak line (2) to supply wash buffer tubing (1). 3. Prime washer (see chapter 3.3.8.2 on page 3-22).

Page 22-40


22. Tubing

22.3.12 22.3.12.1

Replacement of Supply Water Tubing Preliminary Steps


Remove Supply Water Tubing

1. Disconnect water soak line (2) from supply water tubing (1). 2. Pull supply water tubing (1) out of container tube (3).

Figure 22.3-46: Supply Water 22.3.12.3

Assemble Supply Water Tubing

1. Pull supply water tubing (1) over the container tube (3) (at least 8mm). 2. Connect water soak line (2) to supply water tubing (1). 3. Perform water fill-up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21).


Page 22-41

22. Tubing

22.3.13 22.3.13.1

Replacement of LWP - PIP RINSE STATION Preliminary Steps


Remove LWP - PIP RINSE STATION

1. Pull waste station (2) out and unplug LWP - PIP rinse station (1) tube.

Figure 22.3-47: Waste station

Page 22-42


22. Tubing 2. Unplug LWP - PIP rinse station (1) tube out of LWP pump (3)

Figure 22.3-48: LWP pump 22.3.13.3

Assemble LWP - PIP RINSE STATION

1. Plug LWP - PIP rinse station (1) tube into waste station (2). 2. Thread LWP - PIP rinse station (1) tube underneath of the incubator to the LWP pump. 3. Plug LWP - PIP rinse station (1) tube into LWP pump (3). 4. Orient the waste station and check waste station teach parameters (see chapter 8.11 on page 8-17).

Figure 22.3-49: Waste station 5. Assemble the Incubator Lid (see chapter 11.3.1.3 on page 11-4).


Page 22-43

22. Tubing

22.3.14 22.3.14.1

Replacement of Waste Out Tubings Preliminary Steps


Remove Waste Out Tubing

1. Unplug waste out tubings (1 and 2) out of Waste Valve (3).

Figure 22.3-50: Waste Tubings

Page 22-44


22. Tubing 2. Remove waste out tubings out of the holders and unplug the tubings (1 and 2) out of the waste containers. 3. Separate the left waste tubing from the cleaning solution soak tubing removing the coil.

Figure 22.3-51: Waste Container 22.3.14.3

Assemble Waste Out Tubing

1. Assemble the left waste tubing and the the cleaning solution soak tubing together using the coil. 2. Plug the waste out tubings into the holders and plug the tubings into the waste containers. 3. Plug the waste out tubings (1 and 2) into the Waste Valve (3).

Figure 22.3-52: Cabinet top view


Page 22-45

22. Tubing

22.3.15 22.3.15.1

Replacement of Aspirate Reagent - WAP Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 22.3.15.2

Remove Aspirate Reagent - WAP Tubing

1. Unplug Aspirate Reagent - WAP tube (2) from WAP pump (1).

Figure 22.3-53: WAP pump

Page 22-46


22. Tubing 2. Disconnect Aspirate Reagent - WAP tube (2) from reagent module tube (3).

Figure 22.3-54: Reagent tube 22.3.15.3

Assemble Aspirate Reagent - WAP Tubing

1. Plug Aspirate Reagent - WAP tube (2) onto WAP pump (1). 2. Connect Aspirate Reagent - WAP tube (2) to reagent module tube (3). 3. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6).


Page 22-47

22. Tubing

22.3.16 22.3.16.1

Replacement of PRP - SRP Tubing Preliminary Steps


Remove PRP - SRP

1. Disconnect PRP-SRP tube (1) out of PRP pump (2) and SRP Pump (3), and remove tube.

Figure 22.3-55: PRP pump

Figure 22.3-56: SRP Pump

Page 22-48


22. Tubing 22.3.16.3

Assemble PRP - SRP

1. Connect PRP-SRP tube (1) into PRP pump (2) and SRP Pump (3). 2. Insert the tube in the same way, like the old one. 3. Prime pipettor (see chapter 3.3.8.3 on page 3-22). Once completed the assembly perform the requalification of the instrument (see chapter 5.3 on page 5-16).


Page 22-49

22. Tubing

22.3.17 Replacement of Aspirate Starter Pump, Blue and Red Tubings 22.3.17.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the left top cover. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 7. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 8. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 9. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 22.3.17.2

Remove Aspirate Starter Pump, Blue and Red Tubings

1. Unscrew fittings of aspirate starter pump blue (1) and aspirate starter pump red (2). 2. Remove tubings out of the tube holders (3).

Figure 22.3-57: Starter Pumps

Page 22-50


22. Tubing 3. Unscrew fittings of aspirate starter pump blue (1) and aspirate starter pump red (2) of starter reagent valves (3 and 4).

Figure 22.3-58: Starter Reagent Module 22.3.17.3

Assemble Aspirate Starter Pump, Blue and Red Tubing

1. Fasten fittings of aspirate starter pump blue (1) and aspirate starter pump red (2) onto starter reagent valves (3 and 4). Be aware of the color orientation at the Starter Reagent Module: On the right side is red tube (2). On the left side is the blue tube (1). 2. Insert tubing into the tube holders (3). 3. Fasten fittings of aspirate starter pump blue (1) and aspirate starter pump red (2) onto starter reagent pumps. Be aware of the color orientation at the Starter Pumps: On the right side is blue tube (1). On the left side is the red tube (2). 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.3 on page 9-7). 6. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 7. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 8. Prime starter tubes (see chapter 3.3.8.5 on page 3-22).


Page 22-51

22. Tubing

22.3.18 22.3.18.1

Replacement of Reagent Module Tube Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor arms to a save location. 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 8. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 9. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 10. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 11. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 22.3.18.2

Remove Reagent Module Tube

1. Unplug Reagent Module tube (2) from Reagent Module (1).

Figure 22.3-59: Reagent tube

Page 22-52


22. Tubing 22.3.18.3

Assemble Reagent Module Tube

1. Plug Reagent Module tube (2) onto Reagent Module (1). 2. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7). 3. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 4. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 5. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 6. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 7. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6). 8. Check the teaching positions and, if necessary, teach reagent module positions (see chapter 8 on page 8-1).


Page 22-53

22. Tubing

22.3.19 22.3.19.1

Replacement of Incubator Overflow Tube Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the waste cabinet doors. 5. Pull waste drawer out. 22.3.19.2

Remove Incubator Overflow Tube

1. Pull incubator overflow tube (1) out of the fitting (3) and pull tube out of solid waste bore (2).

Figure 22.3-60: Incubator to solid waste 22.3.19.3

Remove Incubator Overflow Tube

1. Push the new incubator overflow tube (1) onto the fitting (3) and thread the tube into the waste container bore (2).

Page 22-54


22. Tubing

22.3.20

Replacement of Filter

22.3.20.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. Empty the debubbler, using Service Software functionalities. 3. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 4. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 22.3.20.2

Remove Filter

1. Unplug filter from the DI Soak Line (1) and the debubbler (2).

Figure 22.3-61: Filter


Page 22-55

22. Tubing 22.3.20.3

Assemble Filter

Figure 22.3-62: Hose clamps provided with the filter 1. Add the hose clamps provided with the filter (see Figure 22.3-62) on the DI Soak Line (1) and the debubbler (2) tubings. 2. Plug filter into the DI Soak Line (1) and the debubbler (2) tubing. Verify the proper orientation of the filter, according to Figure 22.3-61. 3. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 4. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 5. Perform water fill-up (see chapter 3.3.8.1 on page 3-21). Hose clamps shall be added after filter replacement in order to prevent possible widenings of the DI Soak Line (1) and the debubbler (2) tubings.

Page 22-56


23. Electrical Components

23 Electrical Components This chapter describes additional electrical components of LIAISON®XL system in detail. In the first section of the chapter “Safety” notes concerning these modules are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts described in the following. This section is followed by a larger part containing information about the repairment of these modules (section “Replacement and Repair”). In the last section PCB layouts are described.

23.1

Safety


Follow all safety instructions, (see chapter 1.4 on page 1-8).

•


•


High Voltage! The touching of high voltage parts or cables can result in serious personal injuries with deadly consequences. •

Never touch high voltage parts.

•

Separate the system from the mains supply before maintaining or cleaning the system.


Page 23-1


23.2

Replacement

This section contains instructions for the repair of individual electrical components of the LIAISON®XL system. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

23.2.1 23.2.1.1

Replacement of COP XL PCB Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save position. 23.2.1.2

Remove COP XL PCB

1. Unplug all cables of COP (1). 2. Loosen four screws (4) for power supply and pull cable shoes out. 3. Loosen five screws (2) and take circuit board out.

Figure 23.2-1: COP XL 23.2.1.3

Assemble COP XL PCB

1. Set new COP circuit board (1) into the guide rail (3), push COP up and fasten five screws (2). 2. Plug all cables and connectors onto circuit board (see figure Figure 23.4-1 on page 23-22). The following slots are shunted: J25 and J26, J27 and J28, J29 and J30. 3. Plug the system power plug and turn the system power switch on. 4. Start the application Usbinterface from the directory C:\Program Files\STRATEC\UsbInterface. The window of Figure 23.2-2 appears. Page 23-2



Figure 23.2-2: Usbinterface window 5. Press Load and, in the window that appears, choose the file Liaison XL.

Figure 23.2-3: LiaisonXL selection 6. Start the download with the Download button. 7. The successful loading operation is confirmed with a dialog. Thereafter, the application can be terminated. 8. Change the new COM Port Liaison XL to COM1 in the Windows Device Manager.


Page 23-3

23. Electrical Components 9. Furthermore the COM Port Intel Aktive Management needs a new free port > COM4. 10. Restart the PC. 11. Run the firmware update of the complete system (see chapter 24.3.2.3 on page 2412). 12. Perform the teaching of pipettor (see chapter 8).

Page 23-4



23.2.1.4

Replacing Fuses of COP CU



•


•


•


•

Always replace blown fuses, do not try to repair them.

•

Never short-circuit the fuse holder. 1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Open the top covers. 5. Move pipettor to a save position.

Although spare fuses are provided with the instrument and the replacement procedure is described, you should be aware that blown fuses are very often indicators of other malfunctions that may be affecting instrument modules, components or wires. If the fuses blow again shortly after their replacement and troubleshooting activities fail, please contact DiaSorin Corporate Service for assistance. 6. Replace the fuses (2) out of the main CU (1).

Figure 23.2-4: Main COP CU


Page 23-5


23.2.2 23.2.2.1

Replacement of Main Supply Unit Preliminary steps

1. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 2. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 3. Open the top covers. 4. Move pipettor to a save position. 5. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 6. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 8. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 9. Remove Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.2 on page 16-3). 10. Remove Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.2 on page 17-3). 11. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 12. Remove Reader Lid (see chapter 14.3.1.2 on page 14-5). 13. Remove Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.2 on page 13-4). 14. Remove Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.2 on page 14-11). 15. Remove Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.2 on page 14-15) 16. Remove the Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.2 on page 11-5). 23.2.2.2

Remove Main Supply Unit

Replacement of Power Supply The power supply contains no serviceable parts! Replace the whole power supply when it is faulty! 1. Lift de-bubbler (1) out and set it aside. 2. Unscrew fittings (2) of syringe reagent probe (SRP). The pumps are still wired and hooked up to the tubes. There can be still water inside the reagent probe.

3. Loosen five screws (3) of pump module and lift it carefully up and to the front.

Page 23-6



Figure 23.2-5: Pump module 4. Loosen bottom screw (4b), move it a little bit down and fasten, otherwise the threaded slide block will fall down. 5. Loosen upper screw (4a), move it a little bit up and fasten it. 6. Lift main switch cover (5) carefully aside.

Figure 23.2-6: Unscrew right side cover


Page 23-7

23. Electrical Components 7. If installed, remove Power Supply liquid protection (18) available above the Power Supply Unit.

Figure 23.2-7: Power Supply liquid protection

The power supply liquid protection has been introduced on instruments with SN ≥ 2210000286 in order to avoid a potential direct contact of liquids (coming from tubing) with the Power Supply module.

Page 23-8


23. Electrical Components 8. Unscrew four screws (6) of main supply unit at rear of cover.

Figure 23.2-8: Unscrew screws 9. Unscrew nut of ground wire (8) Do not throw away all pieces coming from ground wire removal, collect them in order to complete the following assemble procedure (they are not supplied with the new power supply unit to install).

Figure 23.2-9: Main Supply Unit 10. Lift main supply unit (7) out and set it aside the machine. 11. Unscrew and unplug all cables of main supply unit (7).


Page 23-9

23. Electrical Components Position Number

Description

Connected to

9

Brown cable

Power supply COP

10

Black cable

Power supply COP

11

LED

DC on indicator

12

Shutdown

Power supply COP (shutdown)

13

Shutdown

Power supply COP (shutdown)

14

Unused

15

Ground

Ground wire (rear)

16

N

Power supply

17

L

Power supply

Table 23.2-1: Cable connections of main supply unit

Figure 23.2-10: Cable connection 23.2.2.3

Assemble Main Supply Unit

1. Screw and plug all cables onto new main supply unit (7). 2. Lift main supply unit (7) into system. 3. Lift main supply unit up, so the screw holes fit and fasten four screws (6) of main supply unit. 4. Insert ground wire (8) (see follow sequence from bottom to top) and fasten nut.

Page 23-10



Figure 23.2-11: Ground wire assembly

Step

Description

1 (bottom)

Nut

2

Toothed disc

3 (bottom)

washer

4

Ground cable of main switch

5

washer

6

toothed disc

7

nut

8

toothed disc

9

washer

10

Ground cable to main supply unit

11

washer

12

toothed disc

13

nut Table 23.2-2: Earthing cable, mounting sequence 5. Set main switch cover (5) into the system and fasten two screws (4).

The pumps are still wired and hooked up to the tubes.


Page 23-11

23. Electrical Components 6. Set the pump module into the system and fasten five screws (3). 7. Screw fittings (2) and (3) of syringe reagent probe (SRP) in and tighten it. 8. Put de-bubbler (1) into its place. 9. Assemble Incubator Module (see chapter 11.3.2.3 on page 11-8). 10. Assemble Reader Module (see chapter 14.3.5.3 on page 14-17). 11. Assemble Spindle (see chapter 14.3.3.3 on page 14-12). 12. Assemble the Reader Lid and the Starter Pump Tubes (see chapter 14.3.1.4 on page 14-8). 13. Assemble Washer Module (see chapter 13.3.1.4 on page 13-5). 14. Assemble Reagent Module (see chapter 17.3.1.3 on page 17-7) 15. Assemble Sample Module (see chapter 16.3.1.3 on page 16-4). 16. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 17. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 18. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 19. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.3 on page 9-6).

Page 23-12



23.2.3 23.2.3.1

Replacement of Fuses of Main Switch Preliminary steps



•


•


•


•


•

Never short-circuit the fuse holder.

Although spare fuses are provided with the instrument and the replacement procedure is described, you should be aware that blown fuses are very often indicators of other malfunctions that may be affecting instrument modules, components or wires. If the fuses blow again shortly after their replacement and troubleshooting activities fail, please contact DiaSorin Corporate Service for assistance. 1. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 2. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 3. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 4. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8).


Page 23-13


23.2.3.2

Remove Fuses of Main Switch

1. Open fuse box (2) with a screw driver at main switch (1). 2. Remove fuse box.

Figure 23.2-12: Main Switch 3. Remove defective fuses.

Figure 23.2-13: Fuse box 23.2.3.3

Assemble Fuses of Main Switch

Replace Fuses Spare fuses must match the values (nominal voltage, nominal current and type) specified by the manufacturer. •


•

Never short-circuit the fuse holder. 1. Set new fuses into fuse box (2). 2. Slide fuse box into main switch (1).

Page 23-14



23.2.4 23.2.4.1

Replacement USB HUB PCB Preliminary steps

1. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 2. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 3. Move pipettor to a save position. 23.2.4.2

Remove USB HUB PCB

1. Unplug all cables of USB HUB PCB (1). 2. Unscrew four screws (2) and remove circuit board.

Figure 23.2-14: USB HUB PCB 23.2.4.3

Assemble USB HUB PCB

1. Set new USB HUB PCB (1) in and fasten four screws (2). 2. Plug all cables onto circuit board, (see Figure 23.4-3 on page 23-25).


Page 23-15


23.3

Troubleshooting

23.3.1

COP (00h): Error List

For explanation of the error code, event ID and structure, see Error Message structure (see chapter 6.1.1 on page 6-2).

User Service Software Software

Error Code

Corrective Action:

Sub unit

0.0.2

Cause:

Severity

Event ID

In Hexadecimal Device ID

decimal

00

00

00

00

NO ERROR

.

00

03

00

01

NOT INITIALIZED

Send init-command

00

03

00

02

UNKNOWN COMMAND


0.2.2

00

03

02

2

UNKNOWN COMMAND


0.0.3

00

03

00

03


Check parameter range. Invalid parameter passed with command.

0.0.4

00

02

00

04

NV-RAM PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE

Hardware failure

PARAMETER WRITE FAILURE 0.0.5

00

03

00

05

NV-RAM PARAMETER READ FAILURE EEPROM READ FAILURE

Error on reading EEPROM. If parameter saved, exchange module. Hardware failure or permanent parameter not initially set.

00

03

00

06




check cable / replace cable check power supply check power supply to system exchange module

Page 23-16

00

01

00

07


No action.

00

03

00

08




23. Electrical Components 00

01

00

09

POSITIONING PROBLEM


POSITION REACHED SEVERAL TIMES 00

0.1.12

03

00

0A

DRIVE NOT MOVING, TARGET NOT REACHED

00

03

00

0B


00

03

01

0C

SELFTEST ERROR


Hardware failure Exchange module.

0.6.16

00

03

00

0D


Check syntax / sequence / value.

00

03

00

0E

COMMAND EXECUTION

Unit busy.

00

03

00

0F


Do not try again.

00

03

06

10

EXECUTION TIMEOUT

Device out of order; command or response lost during transmission.

Work list command execution time-out (Dev: %3, SA: %6) 0.0.17

00

03

00

11

ILLEGAL PARAMETER

Wrong type used while accessing parameter set. Set correct parameter type in parameter list or set parameter command.

0.0.18

00

03

00

12

PARAMETER NOT FOUND


Invalid parameter index

Select correct parameter index. index is not known in parameter set

0.0.19

00

03

00

13


Permission denied for access to parameter. Set authorization.

0.0.20

00

03

00

14




00

03

00

15


Wrong type used while writing to parameter set. Set correct parameter type.

0.0.22

00

03

00

16

ILLEGAL PARAMETER LENGTH Parameter length does not fit to parameter type while writing to WRONG PARAMETER LENGTH parameter set. Enter parameter in correct length.

0.6.32

00

03

06

20

The device %1 (SA:%4) cannot be addressed.

Wrong device id used or unknown device addressed.

CAN NODE NOT PRESENT


Page 23-17

23. Electrical Components 0.6.33

00

03

06

21

Internal CAN-bus error while command transmission to a device.

CAN communication error.

0.6.34

00

03

06

22

Device [%2,%3,%4] failed registering to CAN-bus, event %5.

Device out of order; connection to CAN-bus broken. Check configuration of CAN node.

CAN NODE REGISTRATION FAILED 0.6.35

00

03

06

23

Connection definition Invalid CAN device definition. [%2,%3,%4]:%5 <-> [%6,%7,%8]:%9 has failed, event %10.

0.6.36

00

03

06

24

Routing definition for device %3:%2 has failed, event %5.

Invalid CAN device definition.

0.6.37

00

03

06

25

Set headless communication for device at port %2 has failed, event %3.


0.6.38

00

03

06

26

Set exclusive read mode at port %2 has failed, event %3.


0.6.39

00

03

06

27

COMMUNICATION TO CAN FAILED

Check cable.

Communication to the device %1 (SA %2) failed, event %3.

Device out of order, time-out occurred while command transmission to device.

0.6.40

00

03

06

28

Link definition [%1,%2] <-> [%3,%4] has failed, event %5.


0.6.41

00

03

06

29

CAN communication system failed, event %1.

Initialization of CAN communication failed.

0.2.48

00

01

02

30

COMMON COP MESSAGE

For debug purposes.

Common COP message: %1.

Check message string of length.

ERROR BUFFER OVERFLOW

Too many error messages stored; message buffer not cleared by CM

0.2.49

00

01

02

31

Error message(s) lost due to buffer overflow. 0.2.50

00

03

02

32

No communication from PC for too long time.

PC does no longer communicate to COP.

0.3.64

00

00

03

40

START OF SUBASSEMBLY COMMAND SEQUENCE

No action.

Timestamp of start command sequence. 0.3.65

00

00

03

41

SUBASSEMBLY COMMAND SEQUENCE COMPLETED Timestamp of end command sequence.

0.3.66

Page 23-18

00

03

03

42

Command cannot be scheduled to work list (block %2, sequence %3), reason %4.

For debug purposes and timing studies. No action. For debug purposes and timing studies. Work list blocked or invalid sequence sent to work list.



00

03

03

43

Pipetting command (id:%5) Work list blocked or invalid cannot be scheduled to work list pipetting command sent to work (block %2, sequence %3), reason list. %4.

0.13.78

00

03

13

4E

Notify handler storage overflow (block %1, sequence %3).

Notification for work list sequence cannot be stored.

0.13.79

00

01

13

4F

No notification registered for event %2 (block %1, sequence %3, time %4).

Cannot find notification for work list event.

0.20.80

00

03

20

50

External non-maskable interrupt.

Internal CPU error.

0.20.81

00

03

20

51

Watchdog timer underflow.

Internal CPU error.

0.20.82

00

03

20

52

Main clock ocsillation stopped.

Internal CPU error.

0.20.83

00

03

20

53

MODULE POWER FAILED

Check supply.

Voltage out-of-range.

Internal CPU error.

0.20.84

00

03

20

54

Undefined instruction occurred.

Internal CPU error.

0.20.85

00

03

20

55

Arithmetic overflow occurred.

Internal CPU error.

0.16.128

00

01

16

80

COORDINATE TARGET DOWNLOAD FAILED

Corrupted or insufficient data for coordinate target

Coordinate target download failed for index %1. 0.12.129

00

03

12

81

SYSTEM CYCLE BELATED System cycle belated by %1 [1/10s].

0.16.130

0.12.131

00

00

03

00

16

12

82

83

Check assay parameters / mechanics. Start of system cycle delayed due to excessive load.

MISSING COORDINATE FOR TARGET INDEX

Missing coordinates for target index.

Coordinate target missing for index %1.

Download coordinates.

SAMPLE ASPIRATION DONE

No action.

Sample aspiration completed (jobId: %1, target: %2).

For debug purposes.

0.14.145

00

03

14

91

Pipettor response time-out. Arm: %1, State: %2.

No response from sample arm.

0.15.145

00

03

15

91

Pipettor response time-out. Arm: %1, State: %2.

No response from reagent arm.

0.14.146

00

03

14

92

Pipettor write sync time-out. Arm: No response from sample arm. %1

0.15.146

00

03

15

92

Pipettor write sync time-out. Arm: No response from reagent arm %1

0.14.147

00

03

14

93

DISPOSABLE TIP EJECT FAILED

Disposable tip eject failed. Teach pipettor coordinates.

Tip eject failed. Arm: %1.


Page 23-19


0.15.148

0.15.149

0.15.150

0.15.151

0.17.160

00

00

00

00

00

00

01

01

00

02

02

02

14

15

15

15

15

17

94

94

95

96

97

A0

NO PRESSURE DATA

Download pressure data.

No pressure data. Arm: %1

No pressure threshold data for sample arm.

NO PRESSURE DATA

Download pressure data.

No pressure data. Arm: %1

No pressure threshold data for reagent arm.

OLV CALIBRATION SUCCEEDED:

No action.

OLV SENSOR CALIBRATION FAILED

Check module.

OLV TRANSPORTATION AIRGAP CALIBRATION FAILED

Check tubing.

REAGENT TEMPERATURE OUT-OF-RANGE TOO LONG

Check module.

Optical Liquid Verification calibration performed without errors.

Calibration of OLV sensor failed.

Calibration of OLV transportation air gap failed.

Temperature of reagent bay out of range too long.

0.17.161

00

03

17

A1

RING TEMPERATURE OUT-OF- Check module. RANGE TOO LONG Temperature of incubation ring out of range too long.

0.17.162

00

03

17

A2

TOO MANY SUBSEQUENT WASHER ASPIRATION FAILURES

Check liquid / module.

TOO MANY SUBSEQUENT CAVITIES WHILE STARTER REAGENT TEMPERATURE OUT OF RANGE

Check module.

RLU measurement failed too many times, check measurement unit

0.17.163

00

03

17

A3

Aspiration at wash probe failed too many times; check wash dispense.

Temperature of starter reagent out of range too many times.

0.17.164

00

03

17

A4

Too many subsequent rlu measurement failures.

0.18.176

00

03

18

B0

Too many cuvettes removed Capacity of intermediate store is while so waste drawer is opened. exceeded.

0.12.192

00

-

12

C0

Maintenance process aborted due to general error.

No action.

0.12.193

00

-

12

C1

Maintenance process aborted due to time-out condition.

No action.

0.12.194

00

-

12

C2

Maintenance process aborted due to missing cuvettes.

No action.

0.12.195

00

-

12

C3

Maintenance process aborted due to offline pipettor.

No action.

0.12.196

00

-

12

C4

Maintenance process completed with integrity errors.

No action.

0.12.197

00

-

12

C5

Maintenance process aborted due to unavailable starter.

No action.

Page 23-20



00

01

12

Fe

FIRMWARE INTERNAL WARNING

For debug purposes

0.12.255

00

03

12

FF

FRIMWARE INTERNAL ERROR

Internal COP error

Table 23.3-1: COP, error list


Page 23-21


23.4



23.4.1

Master COP PCB

Figure 23.4-1: COP XL

Replacing Fuses of COP CU (see chapter 23.2.1.4 on page 23-5). Replacement of Fuses of Main Switch (see chapter 23.2.3.2 on page 23-14). Power Requirements (see chapter 27.1 on page 27-1).

Figure 23.4-2: Power Connection

Page 23-22


23. Electrical Components Number


J1

Download Connector

J3

PC USB

J4 - J15

Unused

J16

Visual Alarm (optional)

J17 – J19

Unused

J20

Reagent Module CU PCB (J2, Power)

J21

Reagent Module CU PCB (J1)

J22

Unused

J23

Incubator CU PCB (J1)

J24

Unused

J25

Unused (shunted to J26)

J26

Pipettor CU PCB (J14)

J27


J28

Washer CU PCB (J1)

J29

WDP

J30


J31

Cuvette Supply CU PCB (J1)

J32

RFID Starter CU PCB (J1)

J33

Sample Module CU PCB (J1)

J34

Reader CU PCB (J2)

J35

Peristaltic Pumps (both pumps, WAP and WPRP are wired to a Ycable)

J36

Starter Pumps

J37

Front Cover CU PCB (J6)

J38

Cabinet CU PCB (J1)

J39

Main Power +24 V

J40

Main Power +24 V

J41

Main Power GND

J42

Main Power GND

J43 - J44

Unused Table 23.4-1: Connections of the Master COP PCB


Page 23-23


Number

Description

LED1

PC COM

LED2

CAN 1

LED3

CAN 2

LED4

System Busy

LED5

Power Table 23.4-2: LEDs of the Master COP PCB

Number

Switch


SW1

1

OFF

2

OFF

3

OFF

4

OFF Table 23.4-3: Switches of the Master COP PCB

Number

Description

F1

Reagent Module, 250VAC F5A

F2


F3


F4

Incubator Module, 250VAC F5A

F5

Incubator Module, 250VAC F5A Table 23.4-4: Fuses of the Master COP PCB

Page 23-24



23.4.2

Overview USB HUB PCB

Figure 23.4-3: USB HUB PCB

Slot

Description

J1

PC Power

J2

PC USB

J3

USB 1

J4

USB 2

J5

USB 3

J6

USB 4 Table 23.4-5: Connections of the USB HUB PCB

Number

Description

LED1

Power Table 23.4-6: LEDs of the USB HUB PCB


Page 23-25

24. Software and Firmware Topics

24 Software and Firmware Topics The features and functionalities offered by LIAISON®XL Main User Interface (Main UI) are detailed in LIAISON®XL User Manual, so a Field Service Engineer (FSE) can use it to get information regarding the available buttons and the procedures for the execution of assays. Furthermore some topics relevant for technicians are not discussed in the User Manual because they don’t give useful information to customers. The main purpose of this chapter is to fulfill this gap: the following sections detail some topics particularly useful for the everyday activities of a Service Engineer not presented in the User Manual. After some safety instructions presented in chapter 24.1, chapter 24.2 contains a brief overview of the main features of PC system: the procedures for the installation of the external barcode reader, the calibration of the touchscreen and the remote detection of physical keyboards and mouses are also presented. In chapter 24.3 some general features regarding Software (SW) structure are reported; the same section gives also some information regarding the installation and updates of SW and Firmware (FW) packages. The same information are reported in chapter 24.4 for the Antivirus installed with the system. In chapter 24.5 some functionalities reserved to FSE profiles are described: the additional windows and buttons available in Main UI for a FSE profile are presented, together with the description of the parameters directly editable in system files. Specific chapters are dedicated to the setting of a connection with a Laboratory Informative System (LIS) (chapter 24.6) to the description of Bomgar application (chapter 24.7) and to a brief introduction to the main functionality of Acronis backup application (chapter 24.8).

24.1

Safety


Follow all safety instructions, see chapter 1.4 on page 1-8.

•

Follow all safety instructions included in this manual.

•


Use of the Software Use the LIAISON®XL system software only to perform described functions.


Page 24-1


It is absolutely forbidden to install softwares different from those specifically foreseen for LIAISON®XL system. The installation of not allowed softwares (e.g. not supported antivirus) brings the system to a not controlled and not validated status.

It is allowed to connect a LIAISON®XL system to a local network only for the following 2 purposes: •

Printing on a network printer;

•

Remotely accessing to the system for troubleshooting purposes (i.e. through a pcAnywhereTMconnection);

Any other network-based activity has not been validated and therefore is not allowed.

24.2

LIAISON®XL PC System

LIAISON®XL PC system includes the following components: •

IBM compatible PC;

•

Touchscreen TFT monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.3 on page 9-16 for the installation);

•

Keyboard;

•

Mouse;

•

Printer (optional);

•

Handheld Barcode Reader;

•

Visual Alarm (see chapter 9.3.13.3 on page 9-31 for the installation).

The card reader available on PC having PN 100000187 was not part of the system validation, so it has not to be used.

In case PN 100000187 is ordered as a spare part, a PC with the SW already installed will be provided. In any cases, after each PC replacement, the field service engineers shall perform the SW update of the most recently released SW version, following the instructions provided in the dedicated Technical Note.

The use of keyboard and mouse devices is allowed only to FSEs, they shall not be accessible to final users.

Page 24-2



The printer is not supplied directly with LIAISON®XL analyzer. A printer shall be purchased separately and installed, following the recommendations described in Technical Note LXL-TN-42. The main features of LIAISON®XL PC system devices are presented in chapter 27.

24.2.1 24.2.1.1

Handheld Barcode Reader configuration Configuration of handheld barcode reader (PN A0096)

Figure 24.2-1: Handheld barcode reader – PN The following procedure shall be performed to complete the installation and the configuration of handheld barcode reader – PN A0096: 1. Take the velcro strips provided with the system and cut 2 pieces of proper length for the fixing of the scanner support. 2. Attach the velcro labels to the cabinet of the system (see Figure 24.2-2).

Figure 24.2-2: Velcro labels for barcode reader support 3. Fix the scanner support to the dedicated velcro labels.


Page 24-3

24. Software and Firmware Topics 4. Connect the scanner to the PC using an USB port. A “beep” signal indicates that the scanner is ready to read codes. 5. Perform the scanning of the “Enable Normal Color Data Matrix Decoding” (see Figure 24.2-3) and “Enable Rectangular Data Matrix Symbol Decoding” (see Figure 24.2-4) code types.These barcodes are also available in “Data Matrix” section of the “Supplemental Configuration Guide” of the device. The right conclusion of a scanning operation is indicated by a “beep” signal coming from the device.

Figure 24.2-3: Enable Normal Color Data Matrix Decoding

Figure 24.2-4: Enable Rectangular Data Matrix Symbol Decoding 6. Perform the scanning of the “Enable Alt-Mode” code (see Figure 24.2-5). This barcode is also available in “Keyboard” section of the “Configuration Guide” of the device. The right conclusion of the scanning operation is indicated by a “beep” signal coming from the instrument.

Figure 24.2-5: Enable Alt-Mode 7. In order to verify that the barcode reader is able to read correctly the 2D barcodes, read the 2D barcode of Figure 24.2-6. The sentence: This is a sample of the 2D “Data Matrix” symbology. This symbology can store a lot of information in a small place. should be shown. Perform this check using the Scan button present in the Diagnostic page of Main UI.

Figure 24.2-6: Testing 2D barcode

In case it should be necessary to reset the handheld barcode reader, scan the “Recall Defaults” code (see Figure 24.2-7). This barcode is also available in “Need to Start Over?” section of the “Configuration Guide” of the device.

Page 24-4



Figure 24.2-7: Testing 2D barcode 24.2.1.2

Configuration of handheld barcode reader (PN A0179)

Figure 24.2-8: Handheld barcode reader – PN A0179 The following procedure shall be performed to complete the installation and the configuration of handheld barcode reader – PN A0179: 1. Connect the handheld barcode reader to the LIAISON®XL PC. 2. Scan “Reset Default Settings” barcode (see Figure 24.2-9).

Figure 24.2-9: Default Settings 3. Scan “Select USB Alternate Keyboard” barcode (see Figure 24.2-10).


Page 24-5


Figure 24.2-10: Select USB Alternate Keyboard

24.2.2 24.2.3

Touchscreen calibration

The following procedure shall be applied to perform the periodic recalibration of the touchscreen: 1. Push Monitor button of Desk Shield window.

Figure 24.2-11: Desk Shield 2. In Touchscreen Control Panel, push Calibrations button.

Page 24-6



Figure 24.2-12: Touchscreen Control Panel 3. By hand, push the cross button available in Touchscreen Calibration. Continue to push the button for several seconds.

Figure 24.2-13: Touchscreen Calibration 4. A message informing the user about the conclusion of the calibration of the first point appears. At the same time a new cross button appears at the right side of the window. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 24-7

24. Software and Firmware Topics 5. Repeat point 3 three more times, considering respectively the cross buttons at the right, bottom and left sides of the Touchscreen Calibration window. 6. Once the calibration of all the 4 points has been completed, a pop-up appears: push Yes button in order to save the settings.

Figure 24.2-14: Calibrations Complete pop-up 7. Press Exit button in Touchscreen Control Panel.

24.2.4

Keyboard and mouse remote detection

LIAISON®XL Main UI has not been validated to be used with physical keyboards and mouses: all different operations shall be performed using the Touchscreen functionality. In case of issues related to routine execution, an activity that shall be performed as troubleshooting from remote access is the verification that no keyboards or mouses have been connected by the user to the LIAISON®XL PC; in order to do this, it is necessary to access to the Desktop and to give a look to the Device Manager. Figure 24.2-15 shows the layout of Device Manager with physical keyboard, touch screen mouse and physical mouse connected. It is possible to notice that the message “HIDcompliant mouse” indicates the connection of a physical mouse; the message “TS2005F-USB Touchscreen (MOUSE)” shall be always reported, it is related to the Touchscreen functionality.

Page 24-8



Figure 24.2-15: Device Manager window The analysis of information of Device Manager window doesn’t allow to differentiate between a physical keyboard (not allowed) and the handheld barcode scanner (allowed): the two devices are detected by the system in the same way. In order to identify the presence of a physical keyboard, it is necessary to give a look to the Properties of the detected device: as indicated in Figure 24.2-16, differently from a physical keyboard, the handheld barcode scanner does not have the Power Management tab.


Page 24-9


Figure 24.2-16: Properties windows

Page 24-10



24.3 24.3.1

LIAISON®XL Software Software Packages

The list of the items that can be installed on a LIAISON®XL PC is presented in Table 24.3-1: the first installation of all these SWs (with the exclusion of pcAnywhereTM) is completed by the manufacturer before shipping the instrument, so a FSE shall not perform any additional actions, unless if it is necessary to perform a reinstallation of the system or a SW/ FW update. In this case, it can be noticed that the greatest part of the items is provided in Main UI installation package, so it is only necessary to follow the related Installation Plan/ Release Note to install/ update them all; once completed the installation/ update of the Main UI package, it is necessary to reinstall/ update separately QC Software, following the procedure described in the related Installation Plan/ Release Note. In addition to the packages available by default on a LIAISON®XL PC, pcAnywhereTM software can be also installed in the system: this configuration is optional and can be performed, where available, following the procedures described in chapter 24.7.


Item

Provided in

LIAISON®XL Main Software

Main UI Installation package

QC Software

QC SW Installation package

Online help

Main UI Installation package

External viewer for backup data

MainUI Installation package

Service Software


Teacher Software


Firmware


Acrobat Reader


Touchscreen Driver


RightsViewer


Antivirus


Page 24-11

24. Software and Firmware Topics Item

Provided in

PC Anywhere(*)

PC Anywhere Installation package

Table 24.3-1: LIAISON®XL SW packages (*) Optional, not installed by default on a LIAISON®XL PC

24.3.2

Software and Firmware Installation/ Update

The following paragraphs are dedicated to the description of SW and FW installation procedures. The default configuration of LIAISON®XL analyzer foresees that the first installation of SW and FW parts is directly completed by the manufacturer; however it is important for a FSE to know SW and FW installation procedures, in order to complete successfully troubleshooting activities requiring the formatting of the PC and the reinstallation of the packages. 24.3.2.1

Pre-requirements

The PC shall be cleaned up before starting the installation. The best way is to perform a standard installation of the operating system before starting the installation of LIAISON®XL SW and FW packages. Before starting the installation of FW and SW packages, it is necessary to verify the presence of the following pre-requirements: • The operating system shall be loaded onto C:\ drive. • The boot physical hard disk shall be partitioned: 1/4 of the disk (labeled C:\) shall be reserved to the installation of the operative system, while the remaining 3/4 (labeled D:\) shall be used for the installation of LIAISON®XL packages (e.g. C:\ size is 50GB and D:\ size is 150GB). Both partitions shall use the NTFS file system. • The second physical hard disk shall be labeled with letter B:\ and shall use the NTFS file system. • The DVD/CD ROM Drive shall be labeled with letter E:\. 24.3.2.2

Software Installation and Update

Refer to version specific Installation Plan/ Release Note. 24.3.2.3

Complete Firmware Update

The firmware update runs by one file. This file will update the complete system. 1. Start file FirmwareUpdate in D:\LiaisonXL\FirmwareUpdate. 2. Internet Explorer opens and the window represented below appears. Page 24-12



Figure 24.3-1: Firmware update window

3. Push RS232 Server button and ensure that it becomes green. 4. Push Firmware Upgrade button.


Page 24-13


24.3.3

Software structure

The list of system main files available in LIAISON®XL SW package is reported in Table 24.3-2; for each file, a description of the contents is also presented. The list of files reported in Table 24.3-2 represents the basic configuration of the system. The available files can change depending on the specific SW version installed.

Path

D:\LiaisonXL\

File name ErrorFile.txt

Main UI software crashes collection

ErrorFileBackupViewer. txt

Backup Viewer software crashes collection

DeskShield

Link to the DeskShield interface

Firmware Update

Link to the “.htm” file for FW update

Service

Link to the Service software

Teacher

Link to the Teacher software

xx-YY

Online Help in xx-YY language (e.g. “en-US”: online help in US English)

Lang

Folder containing all “.pdf” versions of User Manual.

D:\LiaisonXL\Help\

Default folder for file export

D:\LiaisonXL\Share\ D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\AV\

Page 24-14

Contents

Av.bat

Antivirus command line

Clamlog.txt

Antivirus cumulative log file

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\AV\db\

Antivirus definitions

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\Downlo ads\Release\

Firmware files collection

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\Downlo ads\Release\Parameter\

2210-index.htm

Firmware update tool

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\Downlo ads\Release\Parameter\log\

*.\

Folders containing exported firmware parameters

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\RightsVi ewer\

GetAccessRights.bat

Tool to create a human readable access right file (refer to chapter 24.5.4)

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\Service Software\

gService.exe

D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\Teacher \

L2coo.exe

Service Software application Teacher Software application


24. Software and Firmware Topics *.rac

[PCEvents|COPEvents] .err

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\Reports\


Configuration files used to define if a specific event has to be reported only in the Events log, or also in the Messages log. The beeper property of any event is defined here.

LiaisonXL.coo

Teaching coordinates collection

UserCategories.dat

Access Rights file

Users.dat

Access Rights file

Rights.dat

Access Rights file

Reports.xml

Configuration file for printing formats/ layouts (refer to chapter 24.5.3)

*.csv2

Example File used for simulation purposes

Tips.mpc

Defines the Disposable Tip Dimensions

PressureProfiles.txt

Enables/ Disables Pressure Profile thresholds and check.

BottleTypes.txt

Cross section definitions for reagent/ ancillary/ sample tubes (refer to chapter 8.15.2.4)

DarkCounts.txt

Dark count measures: average, single counts and detected spikes are reported.

DeviceVersions.xml

Current device versions (the information is updated every time the system starts up)

DeviceVersionsLastKno wn.xml

Last known device versions (the last information stored in the analyzer)

*.*

Template collection pointed by the “Reports.xml” file

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\FlashCur ves\

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\Maintena nce\

Rack files (sample/integral/ancillary)

Flash curve data collection LightChecks.txt

Back Ground and Light Check results

*.ini

Specific maintenance task settings

*.pmp

Maintenance task

*.mn2

Stores the maintenance task Page 24-15

24. Software and Firmware Topics results exported from the Main Interface.

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\temp\

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\temp\log\

*.TRC

Not human readable communication log file.

LogFile_.txt

Human readable log file

COP_.txt

Core-Dump of COP after halted state (usable for COP troubleshooting)

FinishedJobs.txt

List of measured jobs

PIP_P_.tx t

Left arm Aspiration/ Dispensation pressure profiles check file

PIP_P_Verbose_.txt

Left arm Aspiration/ Dispensation pressure profiles file, verbose version.

PIP_F_.tx t

Right arm Aspiration/Dispensation OLV check file.

PIP_F_Verbose_.txt

Right arm Aspiration/Dispensation OLV check file, verbose version.

C3Bxxxxx

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\LIS

Exhaustive Low-LevelRS232-Log-File.

Log files created when record ASTM1381 is selected in LIS settings. xxxxx indicates the consecutive number of each created log.

C3Rxxxxx

Log files created when record ASTM1394 is selected in LIS settings. xxxxx indicates the consecutive number of each created log.

D:\LiaisonXL\CrashZips\

*.zip

StoreLog output files

D:\LiaisonXL\CrashFiles\

StoreLog temporary folder

D:\LiaisonXL\FastObjects_ DataBase\

Database folder StoreLogs.bat

D:\LiaisonXL\Bin\

Application to create StoreLog backup files. Useful for troubleshooting in case MainUI backups are not working. ! IMPORTANT. If not strictly necessary, never run StoreLogs.bat during the

Page 24-16


24. Software and Firmware Topics execution of a routine. ! IMPORTANT. Once completed the StoreLogs creation, perform a PC reboot before allowing the customer to use the system. ! IMPORTANT. The file is run automatically every time a software crash occurs. L2Main.exe

Main User Interface application. ! IMPORTANT. User Interface shall always be started from the DeskShield.

L2Main.exe.config

Configuration file

Liaison2.config

Setting file (refer to chapter 24.5.2.1).

L2Main.exe.config.def

List of the keys changed during an update/ installation.

Liaison2.config.def

List of the keys changed during an update/ installation.

Table 24.3-2: LIAISON®XL system files

D:\LiaisonXL\Data\LIS directory is not present in the system by default, it is created the first time a LIS connection is established.

24.3.4

Files and information required to perform troubleshooting activities

The aim of this chapter is to list and detail the files to be downloaded from the analyzer and information required in order to perform troubleshooting activities on LIAISON®XL. The list of files that shall be mandatory sent to Corporate Service are presented in chapter 24.3.4.1, chapter 24.3.4.2 and chapter 24.3.4.3. 24.3.4.1

Date and time

It is mandatory to send a detailed description of the issue and of the system behavior with date and time of the occurrences (especially in case of Software issue). 24.3.4.2

Database backup

The Database backup includes all databases for results, events, and system characteristics.


Page 24-17

24. Software and Firmware Topics To know how to create and save a Database backup please refer to chapter 6.7.3 of Liaison®XL User Manual. 24.3.4.3

Troubleshooting backup

Troubleshooting backup includes a selection of files useful for a general troubleshooting. To know how to create and save a Troubleshooting backup please refer to chapter 6.7.3 of Liaison®XL User Manual. 24.3.4.4

Other files and information to be provided

Besides the above files, other information have to be provided depending on the troubleshooting activity to be performed: • In case of availability, movies, videos, pictures and screenshots have to be provided as well in order to help the troubleshooting activities.

• In particular cases Corporate Service can ask for other files (folders, info, other kinds of Backups etc…). 24.3.4.5

Contact address

To send to the Corporate Service the files required it is recommended to be used the FTPS application FILEZILLA (for details see Technical GOP ID # 23.7207). Only in case of not availability of FILEZILLA also the Share Area on the Lab Automation Website can be used. The official mail contact is:

[email protected]

Page 24-18



24.4 24.4.1

LIAISON®XL Antivirus Antivirus Installation

The installation of the Antivirus is performed automatically during SW installation, so it is only necessary to follow the procedure described in the related Installation Plan/ Release Note to complete also this operation.

24.4.2

Antivirus Update

Antivirus updates shall be performed through a dedicated procedure: 1. Go to directory D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\AV\db\ 2. Replace Main.cvd and Daily.cvd files with the new versions supplied with the update. The update of the Antivirus shall only be performed using the manual procedure described above. It is forbidden to perform Internet updates.

Antivirus updates will be distributed periodically by DiaSorin Corporate Service. It is forbidden to perform Antivirus updates without previous authorization of DiaSorin Corporate Service.

24.4.3

Antivirus functioning and Virus detection

LIAISON®XL Antivirus shall be launched on-demand, using the dedicated Virus Scan button available on Desk Shield.

Figure 24.4-1: Virus Scan button

Once the routine starts, a DOS window, with the indication of the scanning progress, appears.


Page 24-19


Figure 24.4-2: Scanning progress window

After the conclusion of the scansion, the associated report is reported in the same DOS window; scansion results are saved in Clamlog.txt available at D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\AV\ path.

Figure 24.4-3: Scansion report window 3. When a virus is detected, contact DiaSorin Corporate Service. No actions are automatically started by LIAISON®XL Antivirus when a virus is detected.

Page 24-20



24.4.4

Antivirus management

Aim of this chapter is to: • Provide a condensed description of the System Protection Measures suitable to customer explanations, tender requirements, and so on (all information are diffusively treated also in the User Manual). • Give additional information to FSE and final user on special procedures (scanning and update management, special care, …). As explained in LIAISON®XL User Manual, chapter § 2.3.2, the system is protected against malware access with a list of system settings. These settings allow an “hardening” of the system structure to minimize the risk that an unknown software enters the PC. Here is a short summary of the mentioned settings: • blockage of ports not strictly required for validated applications; • disabling of the auto-run feature for USB storage device; • indication on forbidden installation of CD-Rom and Floppy disk USB device; • blockage of importing files with extension different than the extensions allowed by the software; Moreover, to increase the security level, a dedicated and specific antivirus is also installed. 24.4.4.1

Antivirus policy

As mentioned before, the antivirus is automatically installed on the LIAISON®XL system. The provided antivirus has been selected basing on software requirements and system restrictions and has been tested and validated during the software validation effort. Due to the need of a dedicated validation procedure, it is forbidden to install on the LIAISON®XL PC another antivirus and / or antimalware. For the same reason, it is forbidden to update the antivirus definitions without a specific official instruction from Corporate Service (i.e. via Technical Note, …). 24.4.4.2

Antivirus management

The antivirus is not working on background, i.e. it is not active at every moment that the system is working, because of the risk associated to an unforeseen action of the antivirus itself. It is indeed possible to start manually the antivirus from a specific icon on the DeskShield (see Figure 24.4-1). By pressing the Virus Scan button the antivirus will be launched. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete the scan of all the drivers. 24.4.4.3

Scan management

For Field Service Engineer. The antivirus shall be launched at least every 6 months, during the Preventive maintenance activity. For final users. There is no special indication for the final user to start the antivirus. It can be left to his/her decision whether to run the antivirus. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 24-21

24. Software and Firmware Topics In case a malware is detected, the embedded antivirus will not automatically remove it. As stated in chapter 24.4.3, DiaSorin Corporate Service has to be contacted for removal operations. Before contacting Corporate Service, it is recommended to retrieve the file Clamlog.txt available at the path D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\AV. 24.4.4.4

Update management

Every 6 months, the antivirus updates and instructions will be periodically released by Corporate Service via a dedicated Technical Note. Validation of the update package will occur internally. Special care when enabling Desktop. When the Desktop is enabled, all the “hardening” feature explained at the beginning of this chapter are not effective. This would lead the system into a “weaker” status subject to malware introduction, for example from infected external devices such as USB drives. For this reason, it is strongly recommended to field personnel to check their own external devices with the antivirus provided with the company laptop prior to the insertion into the LIAISON®XL PC.

24.5

FSE Functionalities

LIAISON®XL supports different privilege levels, that allow to access to different functionalities of the system; for this reason it is important that a FSE understands clearly what are the additional features foreseen for his profile and what are the system parameters he can access to and set. In the next paragraphs, an overview of the additional buttons available in Main UI and of the different system parameters that can be configured is presented.

24.5.1

Main UI FSE Buttons

The list of the additional buttons available in Main UI for the FSE profile is reported in Table 24.5-1, together with the indications of the page and the sub-page where each functionality can be found. Page

Sub-Page

Element

Results

Deleted

All buttons available

Results

Calibration

Delete button

Functionality description Allows to open the subpage and to use all the buttons available in the sub-page (refer to chapter 24.5.1.2). Opens a window that allows to select one or more calibrations to delete (refer to chapter 24.5.1.1). ! IMPORTANT. It is not possible to recover calibrations deleted from this window. Calibrations are supposed to

Page 24-22


24. Software and Firmware Topics be never deleted, unless their number would be so high that scrolling the page becomes problematic. Events

Event Log

Delete button

Definitions

Assays

Import dilutions button

Open a window that allows to select one or more log messages to delete (refer to chapter 24.5.1.1). Allows to import all parameters necessary to set dilutions. Imports sequence for generic maintenance tasks:

Definitions

Assays

Import generics button

• Background; • Light Check of both arms; • Basic Priming Sequence for the right arm. Deletes one or more selected assays.

Definitions

Assays

Delete button

! IMPORTANT. The assignments are checked before deleting assays. Assays that are still part of a profile, group or rerun rule cannot be deleted until they are removed from there. Assays that are part of a combi family can be deleted only after the combi father is deleted. ! IMPORTANT. Delete button can be used only if directly enforced by Corporate Service. Improper use of this button can create issues on the system. To update an assay it is necessary to overwrite it using Import button straight away.

System

Settings

Others - Auto backup path

Allows to define the path used by the system to make the auto-backup.

System

Settings

Others Backup path

Allows to define the path used by the system as a default folder to store the user-requested backup. Deletes the selected user.

System

System


Settings

Test Statistics

Users - Delete button

! IMPORTANT. An FSE profile can delete only users with lower access rights (Lab User, Lab Super or Administrator profiles). Resets all data reported in Test Statistics sub-page.

Reset button

! IMPORTANT. Once pressed the button, it is no more possible to recover the deleted data.

Page 24-23

24. Software and Firmware Topics Allows to open the Windows Toolbar while the SW is running. Diagnostics

Options

Enable Desktop button

! IMPORTANT. Once completed the actvity that required the habilitation of the Desktop, perform a PC reboot before allowing the customer to use the system. This function shall be used as troubleshooting action when right arm failed a liquid detection during aspiration.

Diagnostics

Options

Reset LL 2.lane button

Put the integral for which the problem has been verified in lane 2 and then press this button. The liquid level of the vials for which the failure has been verified is reset to the value of the Remaining Volume. ! IMPORTANT. To get the new liquid level working, it is in any case necessary to extract the integral from lane 2 and to insert it again in the system (in one of the available lanes). Executes the Tool StoreLogs.bat. This tool allows to save a selected set of files for advanced troubleshooting. The files are saved into a “.zip” archive available under the path D:\LiaisonXL\CrashZips.

Diagnostics

Options

Store Logs button

! IMPORTANT. If not strictly necessary, never run StoreLogs.bat during the execution of a routine. ! IMPORTANT. Once completed the StoreLogs creation, perform a PC reboot before allowing the customer to use the system. ! IMPORTANT. The file is run automatically every time a software crash occurs.

Maintenance

Schedule

Delete button

Opens a window that allows to select one or more tasks to delete (refer to chapter 24.5.1.1). Opens the Load dialogue that allows to import saved maintenance tasks from binary files.

Maintenance

Page 24-24

Schedule

Import button

! IMPORTANT. All existing maintenance tasks will be deleted before the system will import saved maintenance tasks.



Maintenance

Log

Delete button

Opens a window that allows to select one or more performed maintenance logs to delete (refer to chapter 24.5.1.1). ! IMPORTANT. It is no more possible to recover maintenance logs deleted from this window.

Table 24.5-1: FSE additional buttons and windows

24.5.1.1

Delete Window

Every time a Delete button is pressed, the window represented in Figure 24.5-1 appears; the meaning of the different options is explained in Table 24.5-2.

Figure 24.5-1: Delete Window Function All Records Range

Description Deletes all entries from the list. Deletes only entries with the specified conditions By, From, and To from the list.

Selected Records

Deletes all selected entries from the list.

Today's Records

Deletes all entries from this day from the list. Table 24.5-2: Delete Window


Page 24-25

24. Software and Firmware Topics 24.5.1.2

Deleted Sub-page

In Results page, a Deleted sub-page is accessible only to FSEs; using this window, it is possible to see and to delete permanently the results moved to this window using Delete buttons available in other Results sub-pages. This page is conceptually equivalent to the Operating System “Trash bin”. The list of the buttons available in this sub-page is reported in Table 24.5-3, together with a description of each functionality.

Function

Delete

Description Open a window that allows to select one or more results to delete. ! IMPORTANT It is no more possible to recover results deleted from this window.

Details

Opens the Result Details display for the selected entry (refer to User ManuaI).

Export

Opens the Export display to export one or more entries to a file (refer to User ManuaI).

Filter

Opens the Select Filter display (refer to User Manual).

Print

Open a window that allows to select one or more results to print. Table 24.5-3: Delete sub-page buttons

Page 24-26


24. Software and Firmware Topics 24.5.1.3

Test Statisitcs

The aim of this paragraph is to clarify the usage of the Test Statistics feature.

Figure 24.5-2: Test Statistics The sub category Test Statistics can be used to get information about the started tests. Among others the LIAISON®XL system shows the amount of test results with the result done or failed for each assay. The functionalities can be available by selecting System and then Test Statistics. The description of the available columns is presented here below. Column description Column Assay

Name of assay.

Successful Cals

Number of successfully performed calibrator determinations (number of replicates of the calibration).

Failed Cals

Number of unsuccessfully performed calibrator determinations (number of replicates of the calibration).

Successful Controls

Number of successfully performed control determinations.

Failed LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Description

Number of unsuccessfully performed control Page 24-27

24. Software and Firmware Topics Controls

determinations. Note. In this context “failed” means “failed during processing”, this is known when the RLU value is available and before the dose is calculated. This means “Overdilution” and “Out of signal range” are counted as “successful”.

Succesful Samples Failed Samples

Number of successfully performed patient sample determinations. Number of unsuccessfully performed patient sample determinations. Table 24.5-4: Column description

Functions Function

Description

Year

Filter: shows only the statistic entries of the selected year.

Month

Filter: shows only the statistic entries of the selected month (select Year first). “All” option allows displaying the entire selected year.

Export

Exports the test statistics to a file (see below for details).

Print

Print the complete list according to the Year/Month selection.

Clear

Clears the Test Statistics list (available at “service” level only). Table 24.5-5: Functions

In SW version 4.0.x Total Records shows the numbers of rows (assays) present in the Test Statistics page. In order to obtain the sum of every value (result) present in the Test Statistics page, it is required to use the Export feature (see below for details).

Export feature Using this feature it is possible to export statistics results in a .txt format only. The file can be then managed for further editing or conversion into other format (i.e. .xls). Pressing the Export button a browser window appears: here it is possible to select the path where the file exported should be stored. A drop down menu is available for that action. In Figure 24.5-3, F:\ or G:\ represent the usual destination paths for USB key.

Page 24-28



Figure 24.5-3: Export destination selection Once selected the path, assign a name to the file using the touch screen keyboard and then press Store.

Figure 24.5-4: File Name assignment

Deleting the Assay Definition will cause the deletion of the correspondent line in the Test Statistics menu. By pressing the Reset button ALL data present in the Test Statistics will be deleted. This feature is available at “servicexl” level ONLY.


Page 24-29


24.5.2

FSE Editable Parameters

In addition to the Main UI functionalities described in chapter 24.5.1, the FSE is allowed also to modify some parameters of system files; in the following paragraphs the parameters that can be configured accessing to system files are described. All parameters not listed in the below reported table shall be eventually modified by using Main UI and not by accessing to system files.

24.5.2.1

Liaison2.config

Liaison2.config file can be accessed in the directory D:\LiaisonXL\bin\Liaison2.config; the parameters that can be set in this file are described in the following paragraphs. Control Columns The setting of these parameters allows to configure the information reported in Controls sub-page of Results page of Main UI. These settings are based on a binary logic: True value enables the reporting of the parameter, False value disables it. In order to ensure a good visualization of the page, it is recommended not to exceed with the number of reported parameters.

Once completed the setting, it is always necessary to check the effective visualization of enabled fields.

Page 24-30

Item

Possible Values

Default Value

Functionality Description

ColCtl_SampleID

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Sample ID

ColCtl_Assay

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Assay

ColCtl_MeasuredDate

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Measured Date

ColCtl_Status

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Status

ColCtl_DilutionFactor

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Dilution Factor

ColCtl_RLU

True/

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the


24. Software and Firmware Topics False

RLU

ColCtl_Result

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Result

ColCtl_Unit

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Unit

ColCtl_QualitativeLabel

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Qualitative Label

ColCtl_Flags

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Flags

ColCtl_SampleLane

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Sample Lane

ColCtl_SamplePos

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Sample Position

ColCtl_ArchivedDate

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Archived Date

ColCtl_UserName

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the User Name

ColCtl_ResultDate

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Result Date

ColCtl_ResultCV

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Result CV

ColCtl_RLUCV

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the RLU CV

ColCtl_SentToLIS

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the information regarding the fact that the result has been sent to LIS or not.

ColCtl_ControlLotNumber

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Control Lot Number

ColCtl_ManufacturerRange

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Manufacturer Range

ColCtl_UserRange

True/

True

Enables/ disables


Page 24-31

24. Software and Firmware Topics False

ColCtl_ControlName

True/ False

the reporting of the User Range True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Control Name

Table 24.5-6: Control Columns Settable Parameters Browser Columns The setting of these parameters allows to configure the information reported in All, Worklist, Ongoing, Done, Archived, Failed and Deleted sub-pages of Results page. For each parameter, it is necessary to indicate the sub-pages where it shall be reported. In order to ensure a good visualization of the page, it is recommended not to exceed with the number of reported parameters.


Page 24-32

Item

Possible Values

Default Value


ColBrw_SampleID

All, Worklist, Ongoing, Done, Archived, Failed, Deleted, Controls

All, Worklist, Ongoing, Done, Archived, Failed, Deleted

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Sample ID

ColBrw_Assay




ColBrw_MeasuredDa te


All, Ongoing, Done, Archived, Failed, Deleted


ColBrw_Status


All, Worklist, Ongoing, Deleted

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Status

ColBrw_DilutionFacto r



Enables/ disables the reporting of the Dilution Factor

ColBrw_RLU


All, Done, Deleted

Enables/ disables the reporting of the RLU



ColBrw_Result


Done, Archived, Deleted

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Result

ColBrw_Unit



Enables/ disables the reporting of the Unit

ColBrw_QualitativeLa bel



Enables/ disables the reporting of the Qualitative Label

ColBrw_Flags


All, Ongoing, Done, Archived, Failed, Deleted

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Flags

ColBrw_SampleLane


Enables/ disables the reporting of the Sample Lane

ColBrw_SamplePos


Enables/ disables the reporting of the Sample Position

ColBrw_ArchivedDat e


Enables/ disables the reporting of the Archived Date

ColBrw_UserName



ColBrw_ResultDate


Enables/ disables the reporting of the Result Date

ColBrw_ResultCV


Enables/ disables the reporting of the Result CV

ColBrw_RLUCV


Enables/ disables the reporting of the RLU CV

ColBrw_SentToLIS


Enables/ disables the reporting of the information regarding the fact that the


Archived

Page 24-33

24. Software and Firmware Topics result has been sent to LIS or not. Table 24.5-7: Browser Columns Settable Parameters

Calibration Columns The setting of these parameters allows to configure the information reported in Calibrations sub-page of Results page. These settings are based on a binary logic: True value enables the reporting of the parameter, False value disables it. In order to ensure a good visualization of the page, it is recommended not to exceed with the number of reported parameters.


Page 24-34

Item

Possible Values

Default Value


ColClb_Assay

True/ False

True


ColClb_MeasuredDate

True/ False

True


ColClb_ExpiryDate

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Expiry Date of the calibration

ColClb_CalID

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Calibration ID

ColClb_Status

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the status of the calibration.

ColClb_KitLot

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Kit Lot

ColClb_KitNumber

True/ False

True

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Kit Number

ColClb_KitExpiration

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Kit Expiration Date



False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the On-Board Stability (OBS) of the kit

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of Starter 1 Lot Number

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Starter 2 Lot Number

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of the Ancillary Lot Number

ColClb_GCCRatio

True/ False

False

Enables/ disables the reporting of Geometrical Check Ratio

ColClb_UserName

True/ False

True


ColClb_KitOBS

True/ False

ColClb_Starter1Lot

True/ False

ColClb_Starter2Lot

True/ False

ColClb_AncillaryLot

True/ False

Table 24.5-8: Calibration Columns Settable Parameters


Page 24-35


24.5.3

Printout Report Customization

LIAISON®XL software allows to customize the layout of the printouts. The fields that can be set are those indicated in Figure 24.5-5: Company Name, Department and Doctor Name and Report Name. In case no updates are done, these default values remain on each printout.

Figure 24.5-5: Report Header To complete the setting, it is necessary to follow this procedure: 1. Go to the directory D:\LiaisonXL\Data\ and select the file Reports.xml. 2. Click onto the file with the right button of the mouse, select the function Open with and choose Notepad option. 3. Select the first section, i.e. the first block starting with , and pay attention to the first field : this field describes the report (e.g. “RPT_Results_ALL.rpt” is for All sub-page of Results page). 4. In line of Reports.xml, replace the default value with the customer’s name (e.g. “Hospital XYZ”). 5. In line of Reports.xml, replace the default value with the customized information (e.g. “Serology Lab”). 6. In line of Reports.xml, replace the default value with the customized information (e.g. “Results ready for validation”). 7. The command lines indicated in Figure 24.5-6 are reported several times in the document (once for each printable report): repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 for each report, selecting subsequently the various sections called .

Page 24-36



RPT_Results_ALL.rpt CrystalReports Results All Company Name Department and Doc Name Printout of all results Sample info displayed in footer Results.All true false true false Figure 24.5-6: Report “.xml” extract

In addition to the already described settings, it is possible to change also the picture reported in report headers (the default option is the DiaSorin logo, as represented in Figure 24.5-5). To modify the default setting it is necessary to: 8. Create a directory C:\Temp. 9. Save an image, named logo.jpg, in the previously created directory. Once performed these steps, the customized picture will be automatically reported in the header of each printable report. logo.jpg picture shall never exceed 120x90 pixels.

In particular cases and for specific problems, it is possible to ask Corporate Service for the implementation of further report customizations.

LIAISON®XL report layouts have been specifically developed to be printed using an A4 format. Other printing formats (e.g. Letter) can be used but can cause the partial deletion of the footer fields (i.e. fields “User” and “Software Version”).


Page 24-37


24.5.4

Readable Access Rights File

To printout human readable Access Rights files it is necessary to follow this procedure: 1. Run GetAccessRights.bat file available in D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\RightsViewer\ directory. 2.

Once completed the routine, close MS-DOS window opened when GetAccessRights.bat file started running.

3.

Verify that ExportedRights.txt file is now available in D:\LiaisonXL\Tools\RightsViewer\ directory.

For a better comprehension of the content, it is recommended to open ExportedRights.txt file using Microsoft Excel.

Page 24-38



24.6

LIS Connection

LIAISON®XL supports 2 different LIS settings: •

a Complete Protocol, to support all LIAISON®XL features;

•

a Reduced Protocol, to be compatible with most of the existing Liaison connections.

The Complete Protocol features new data and options (refer to Main UI) in comparison to those offered by previous Liaison system; otherwise, the Reduced Protocol offers the same functionalities already available on Liaison, thus limiting the traceability measures foreseen for LIAISON®XL. The choice between the two possible configurations depends on the features of the software used as host. The Reduced Protocol can be implemented using a specific combination of parameters and allows to install a LIAISON®XL in place of a Liaison analyzer without introducing any modifications in the existing host interface; otherwise, any change to the Reduced Protocol creates an hybrid configuration that may require a change in the host. So, as a general recommendation: •

Implement the Reduced Protocol when a Liaison analyzer shall be replaced without changes on the host;

•

Implement the Complete Protocol configuration or any other hybrid setting in all other cases, every time a new installation shall be implemented or when there is a need to modify the host in order to use the new features supported by LIAISON®XL.

In case of Reduced Protocol configuration, to maintain the compatibility with Liaison connection, it is necessary that HOST protocols do strictly follow the ASTM prescriptions as stated in the “Liaison® Host Interface Manual”, (rev. B). In case of different configurations, refer directly to chapter 29 for a more detailed description of LIS Interface Protocol.

During the creation of a LIS connection, always check the configuration of the associated COM port (COM 2 or COM 4). The parameters reported in Figure 24.6-1 shall be always set. If needed, perform a reconfiguration of the COM port according to what indicated in the figure.


Page 24-39


Figure 24.6-1: LIS COM port configuration

24.6.1

LIS Configuration

Table 24.6-1 shows the Reduced Protocol configuration. Table 24.6-2 shows the Complete Protocol configuration. Any change to the values of Table 24.6-1 forces the system in a hybrid configuration, that shall be anyway reflected into the host features. Page

Sub-Page

Element

Description

Setting

Allows to set the flag type, according to the number of digits accepted by the host. Possible options: System

LIS/LAS

Result flag style

•

Long: result flags are transmitted as “full size” string

Long

•

Short: results flags are transmitted by a 2 character abbreviation If enabled, some additional information are sent to the host and shall be read on it:

System

Page 24-40

LIS/LAS

Enable Manufacturer Record

•

Integral Kit Number;

•

Integral Expiration Date;

•

Integral Lot Number;

•

Calibration ID;

•

Sample Lane Number;

Off



Definitions

Definitions

Assay > Calculation

Assay > Calculation

Send Replicates to host

Result aspect for host transmission

• Sample Tube Position. Allows to chose if sending to the host the results associated to each replicate and the mean result (Yes setting) or only the mean result (No setting) Allows to define the aspect of the results sent to the host: it is possible to send only the dose (Dose setting), only the qualitative label (Label setting) or both dose and qualitative label (Both setting)

No

Dose

Table 24.6-1: Reduced Protocol Configuration (“Liaison compatible”)

Figure 24.6-2: Reduced Protocol Configuration (“Liaison compatible”) – System > LIS/ LAS window setting


Page 24-41


Figure 24.6-3: Reduced Protocol Configuration (“Liaison compatible”) – Definitions > Assay > Calculation window setting

Page

Sub-Page

Element

Description

Setting

Allows to set the flag type, according to the number of digits accepted by the host. Possible options: System

LIS/LAS

Result flag style

•

Long: result flags are transmitted as “full size” string

Short

•

Short: results flags are transmitted by a 2 character abbreviation If enabled, some additional information are sent to the host and shall be read on it: System

Page 24-42

LIS/LAS


•

Integral Kit Number

•

Integral Expiration Date

•

Integral Lot Number

•

Calibration ID

•

Sample Lane Number

Yes



Definitions

Definitions

Assay > Calculation

Assay > Calculation

Send Replicates to host

Result aspect for host transmission

• Sample Tube Position. Allows to chose if sending to the host the results associated to each replicate and the mean result (Yes setting) or only the mean result (No setting) Allow to define the aspect of the results sent to the host: it is possible to send only the dose (Dose setting), only the qualitative label (Label setting) or both dose and qualitative label (Both setting)

Yes

Both

Table 24.6-2: Complete Protocol Configuration

Figure 24.6-4: Complete Protocol Configuration – System > LIS/ LAS window setting


Page 24-43


Figure 24.6-5: Complete Protocol Configuration – Definitions > Assay > Calculation window setting Once implemented the LIS configuration, it is necessary to start the connection selecting Yes option in LIS module drop-down field of System > LIS/ LAS > LIS subpage.

24.6.2

Connection Scheme

The LIS connection scheme supported by LIAISON®XL analyzer is represented in Figure 24.6-6. Four different configurations can be deployed: setting the dedicated option available in System > Settings > Others subpage, it is possible to choose how the results of the tests shall be transferred to LIAISON®XL archive page (Automatically/ Manually). In the same way the configuration of the dedicated option available in System > LIS/ LAS subpage allows to set how the archived results shall be sent to the host (automatically or not). This flexibility allows end-users to choose whether they want to perform a “validation” step directly on the LIAISON®XL interface or in any external device. The results can be sent to host only from the “Archived” page.

Page 24-44



“Done” or “Failed” page

Automatic

Result Archiving* (Automatically/Manually)

“Archive” page

Automatic

LIS (host)

System Automatically Sends All Results (Y/N)

Figure 24.6-6: LIAISON® XL LIS connection scheme

24.6.3

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting activities related to LIS connections are supported by two dedicated records, named ASTM1381 and ASTM1394. It is possible to enable/ disable each LIS records (ASTM1381 and ASTM1394) enabling/ disabling the dedicated options available in System > LIS/ LAS > LIS subpage: in the default configuration, only ASTM1394 is enabled. The first time a LIS connection is established, D:\LiaisonXL\Data\LIS folder is automatically created: then all the log files related to ASTM1381 (C3Bxxxxx files) and ASTM1394 (C3Rxxxxx files) are stored here. In any case, the easiest way to access these data is to use the LIS dedicated backup from the Main UI.


Page 24-45


24.7

Bomgar

The purpose of this chapter is to describe the characteristics of the SW Bomgar, the new remote access tool available for the LIAISON®XL instruments that allows to connect remotely from a remote PC (REMOTE) to the instrument PC (HOST).

24.7.1

Bomgar setup

The Technical GOP 23.7210 (BOMGAR-Setup of remote access for operators) describes everything that may concern the set up and the main characteristic of the SW Bomgar. The document contains both the operations to be executed on the instrument and the operator’s workstation.

24.7.2

Correct usage of Bomgar and restrictions

The usage of the Bomgar application is only allowed to perform from remote: •

Product and instrument troubleshooting

•

Analytical data monitoring

•

Software and firmware update

The usage of Bomgar shall run in parallel to LIAISON®XL application but, for safety purposes, the system is not allowed to perform tests when a remote access is active. Once completed the activity using Bomgar that required the enabling of the Desktop or the StoreLogs creation, perform a PC reboot before allowing the customer to use the system.

24.7.3

Traceability

In order to have a complete traceability of the usage of Bomgar during an intervention, in the worksheet on SGAT dedicated options are available the “First contact list”. The “First Contacts” available to be selected during the Worksheet opening are highlighted in Figure 24.7-1. In case of Bomgar usage after the opening of the WS, it is possible the change of the First Contact. However, the worksheet has to be completed in the note with all the details of the activities performed using Bomgar.

Page 24-46



Figure 24.7-1: Bomgar First Contacts

24.8 24.8.1

Acronis® Introduction

Acronis® is an integrated software suite that ensures security of all information on a PC. It can backup the operating system, applications, settings and all data, even the entire disk drive or selected partitions. In case a disk drive would become damaged for any reason, the backup data can be recovered. To use Acronis®, it is mandatory to have the physical keyboard and the physical mouse connected and recognized.

24.8.2

BIOS setting

Acronis® application can be used without a specific installation on the system: the backup can be performed directly using the Acronis® CD. In order to do this, the user has to set the boot configuration of the BIOS. BIOS has a built-in setup utility for initial computer configuration; to enter it, it is necessary to press a certain key combination (F9, Del, F1, Ctrl+Alt+Esc, Ctrl+Esc or some others, depending on the BIOS) during the POST (Power-On Self Test) sequence that starts immediately after the computer turns on. Usually the message with the required key combination is displayed during the startup test.


Page 24-47


The time interval during which it is possible to enter the setup utility of the BIOS is quite short. Be ready to press the proper key combination suddenly after the activation of the PC. After the insertion of the CD into the PC, the pressure of the proper key combination opens the setup utility menu included in the BIOS, that allows booting operating systems not only from hard disks, but also from CD-ROMs, DVD-ROMs and other devices. In order to run Acronis® application, it is necessary to set the first booting device as CD: once performed this operation, Acronis® application will open.

24.8.3

Backup creation

1. Load Acronis® CD into the PC. 2. Reboot the PC and perform BIOS setting (see section 24.8.2). 3. The Acronis® software opens. Please click on Acronis True Image Home (Full Version) . The Home window represented below appears.

Figure 24.8-1: Activity Welcome Window 4. In the menu present on the left side of the page, click on Backup option and then choose the tool called Disk and Partition Backup.

Page 24-48



Figure 24.8-2: Disk Backup 5. In Backup Wizard window, check the boxes NTFS (System) (normally already checked by default) and NTFS (LiaisonXL). Then press the Next button. It is not guaranteed that the ID labels associated by Acronis® to different disks are the same used by Windows system. Do not pay attention to ID labels, only ensure to select disks reporting the indications System and LiaisonXL. 6. In Target selection panel, always check Create new backup archive option. 7. Select the backup location using the Browse button and press Next button. Always select a location under the disk called Backup.


Page 24-49


Figure 24.8-3: Target backup archive 8. Before creating a backup, Acronis® makes a list of all files saved into the backup file with extension “.tib”. Press Proceed.

Figure 24.8-4: Summary 9. Check the box Shutdown the computer after completion and check the progress bar for the operation to be completed.

Page 24-50



Figure 24.8-5: Operation status

In case the Shutdown the computer after completion checkbox is not checked, it could result problematic to switch Acronis® off after the requested operations are completed. 10. Press OK in the pop-up that confirms the successful operation completion.

Figure 24.8-6: Confirmation pop-up 11. Remove Acronis® CD, reboot the PC. 12. Enter again the system BIOS and verify that the PC hard disk is set as first booting device.

24.8.4

Backup recovery

Perform this procedure only if necessary. Existing data on the PC may be lost. 1. Load Acronis® CD into the PC. 2. Reboot the PC and perform BIOS setting (see section 24.8.2).


Page 24-51

24. Software and Firmware Topics 3. The Acronis® software opens. Please click on Acronis True Image Home (Full Version) . The Home window represented below appears 4. To replace a backup previously created, please choose Recovery option on the left side of the Acronis® main page and click on the Disk Recovery button in the above part of the page.

Figure 24.8-7: Disk Recovery 5. From the Archive selection page choose the created backup file (*.tib) from the Backup directory, using the Browse button and then press Next.

Page 24-52



Figure 24.8-8: Archive selection 6. In Recovery method window, choose the option Recover whole disks and partitions and press Next. 7. In What to recover window, check the two options System and LiaisonXL in order to restore the same initial conditions saved into the “*.tib” file, then press Next.

Figure 24.8-9: Item recovery selection LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 24-53

24. Software and Firmware Topics 8. In the window below press Next.

Figure 24.8-10: Specify recovery Partition System 9. In the window below press Next.

Figure 24.8-11: Specify recovery Partition Liaison XL Page 24-54


24. Software and Firmware Topics 10. Press Proceed.

Figure 24.8-12: Recovery summary 11. Check the box Shutdown the computer after completion and check the progress bar for the operation to be completed. In case the system asks to reboot, please press Reboot.

Figure 24.8-13: Reboot 12. After the reboot the procedure is complete and it is possible to remove Acronis® CD. 13. Enter again the system BIOS and verify that the PC hard disk is set as first booting device. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 24-55

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25 LIAISON®XL LAS This chapter describes LIAISON®XL LAS analyzer in detail. In the first section of the chapter "Safety" notes concerning LIAISON®XL LAS are specified, while the next section gives a brief overview of the main parts composing the instrument. Chapters 3 and 4 are dedicated to the description of installation and integration test of the instrument, while chapter 5 presents the removal procedures. The information related to the maintenance of the instrument are reported in chapter 6. Chapter 7 gives the detailed description of covers that are specifically used on LIAISON®XL LAS (i.e. not used on LIAISON®XL instruments). Chapter 8 ("Replacement and Repair") presents assembly and removal procedures of LAS pipettor and LAS top cover supporter; at the end of the chapter, the detailed procedure that allows to perfom the upgrade of a LIAISON®XL analyzer to a LIAISON®XL LAS one is also presented.

25.1

Safety

Non-Observance of Safety Instructions The non-observance of safety instructions may result in serious personal injuries and material damages. •

Follow all safety instructions, see chapter 1.4 on page 1-8.

•


•



Page 25-1

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.2

LIAISON®XL LAS Overview

This section shows an overview of the components of LIAISON®XL LAS pipettor module. As can be noticed looking at the pictures, LIAISON®XL LAS is a modified version of the LIAISON®XL Diagnostic System, designed to allow compatibility with certain types of laboratory automation systems. Please check with DiaSorin S.p.A the compatibility between a laboratory automation system and LIAISON®XL LAS. The pipettor module is expanded, in order to allow the sample arm to aspirate samples coming from a laboratory automation system. Additional covers and safety repairs are also present: •

LAS cover: additional cover for the pipettor extension.

•

LAS safety repairs: additional safety repairs to be mounted in case LIAISON®XL LAS is interfaced with Inpeco automation.

•

LAS lid: additional repair to be mounted in case LIAISON®XL LAS shall work without interfacing a laboratory automation system.

•

LAS left side repair: additional repair to be mounted onto the LAS left side cover in case LIAISON®XL LAS shall work without interfacing a laboratory automation system.

•

Lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass: additional repair to be mounted in case LIAISON®XL LAS shall be interfaced with LIAISON® XLine by-pass.

Figure 25.2-1: Overview LIAISON®XL LAS Pipettor (1)

Page 25-2


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.2-2: Overview LIAISON®XL LAS Pipettor (2)

No

Description

1


2

OLV Probe (Right Arm)

3

Pipettor CU PCB

4

Top cover supporter

5

X-Motor Left

6

X-Motor Right

7

SRP pump (Syringe Reagent Pump)

8

LAS Cover Table 25.2-1: Overview LIAISON®XL LAS Pipettor


Page 25-3

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.2-3: LAS cover and safety repairs

Figure 25.2-4: LIAISON®XL LAS – lateral view

Page 25-4


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.2-5: Lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass

Figure 25.2-6: Interface between LIAISON® XL LAS and LIAISON® XLine with lid mounted


Page 25-5

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

No.

Description

8

LAS cover

9

LAS safety repairs

10

LAS lid

11

LAS left side cover

12

LAS left side repair

13

Lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass

14

LIAISON® XLine Table 25.2-2: LAS cover and repairs

25.2.1

Liquid connections

See chapter 2.2 on page 2-7 for details.

25.2.2

Electric circuit overview


25.2.3

Grounding scheme


Page 25-6


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.3

LIAISON®XL LAS installation

As the LIAISON®XL LAS system is a complex system and contains delicate electrical and mechanical components, it must be unpacked and installed by a qualified service engineer.

25.3.1

Safety

Falling Down of the System Due to improper place of installation of the system, the system can fall down. If the system falls down, the user can be seriously injured or the system can be seriously damaged. •

Position the system on a plane and levelled floor.

•

Observe the technical specifications of the system.

Check System During the installation of the system, always follow the steps indicated in LIAISON®XL / LIAISON®XL LAS Installation Qualification (IQ, see chapter 26.1 on page 26-1) and Operational Qualification (OQ, see chapter 26.2 on page 26-5) check lists. The proper execution and compilation of these check lists will ensure the proper installation of the instruments.

25.3.2

Additional supply with PN I0050LAS

Together with what indicated in chapter 3.2.1, the following additional parts are provided with LIAISON®XL LAS instruments: •

N° 1 LAS cover

•

N° 1 LAS safety repair set (PN A0167)

•

N° 1 LAS lid (PN A0168)

•

N° 1 LAS left side repair

•

N° 1 lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass (PN A0178)

Materials indicated in chapters 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 are also needed to complete LIAISON®XL LAS installation. The left side cover and the left blind cover supplied with PN I0050LAS are different from those supplied with PN I00050. See chapter 25.7.2 on page 25-22 and chapter 25.7.3 on page 25-23 for details.


Page 25-7

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.3.3 25.3.3.1

LAS Installation Qualification Visual inspection before unpacking

See chapter 3.3.1 on page 3-4 for details. 25.3.3.2

Unpacking, visual inspection and inventory


WPRP and WAP set up

See chapter 3.3.4.1 on page 3-12 for details. 25.3.3.4

Assemble covers

1. Install the cuvette waste tube. 2. Assemble Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.3 on page 9-28). 3. Assemble Extensible Board (see chapter 9.3.12.3 on page 9-30). 4. Assemble Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.3 on page 20-6). 5. Assemble the Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.3 on page 12-3). 6. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). 7. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.3 on page 9-14). 8. Apply the “Do not open cover” label onto the left Top Cover (see chapter 1.6.4 on page 1-27). 9. Assemble Monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.3 on page 9-16) and place the cables for the following connection of the PC. 10. Connect the computer to the LIAISON®XL, External USB PCB and monitor. 11. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 12. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 13. Assemble LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on 25-24). 14. Assemble LAS left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.3 on page 25-23). 15. Assemble rear Slotted Cover (see chapter 9.3.9.3 on page 9-23). 16. Install upper and lower back covers (if needed, see chapter 9.3.10.3 on page 9-25). 17. Install the printer support (if needed, see chapter 9.3.14 on page 9-32). 18. Check the proper alignment of the covers (see chapter 9.4 on page 9-42). 25.3.3.5

System levelling and stabilization


Tank set-up

See chapter 3.3.4.4 on page 3-14 for details.

Page 25-8


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 25.3.3.7

Consumable set-up


Sample Rack configuration


Control Rack configuration


Pipettor and rack teaching

Before using Teacher Software on LIAISON®XL LAS instruments, always remove (if installed) the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2), the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2), the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.2) and the cover of the LIAISON®XLine by-pass. See chapter 3.3.7 on page 3-21 for details. 25.3.3.11

LAS safety repair installation

1. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.3 on page 25-29). 2. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.3 on page 25-28). 3. Install the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22). 25.3.3.12

Fluidic set-up

See chapter 3.3.8 on page 3-21 for details.

25.3.4 25.3.4.1

LAS Operational Qualification Reagent Bay


Sample Bay


Starter Reagent Bay

See chapter 3.4.3 on page 3-23 for details.


Page 25-9


Incubator


Pipettor


Back up of system configuration


System Verification

See chapter 3.4.7 on page 3-24 details. 25.3.4.8

Final Test


Printout customization


LAS integration


25.4

LIAISON®XL LAS Integration

The procedures described below shall be applied every time a LIAISON®XL LAS instrument shall be interfaced with a laboratory automation. Check System During the LIAISON®XL LAS integration, always follow the steps indicated in LIAISON®XL LAS Integration check list (see chapter 26.7 on page 26-26). The proper execution and compilation of this check list will ensure the successful integration of the instrument.

25.4.1

Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. If installed, remove LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2 on page 25-26). 5. If installed, remove LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2 on page 25-29).

Page 25-10


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.4.2

System positioning and levelling

25.4.2.1

Interface with Inpeco automation

1. Perform the alignment of the instrument with the automation in Y direction: a distance of 377mm – 456mm shall be measured between the rear of the instrument and the pipetting position on the automation. 2. Perform the alignment of the instrument with the automation in X direction: a distance of 15mm shall be measured between the automation right side and the LIAISON®XL LAS left side. 3. Perform the alignment of the instrument with the automation in Z direction: a distance of 20mm shall be measured between the LAS cover and the automation cover. 4. Perform the levelling and the stabilization of the instrument (see chapter 3.3.4.3 on page 3-13).

instrument rear pipetting position 377mm – 456mm

Figure 25.4-1: Reference for LIAISON®XL LAS positioning – Y direction


Page 25-11

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

20mm

15mm Figure 25.4-2: References for LIAISON®XL LAS positioning – X and Z direction 25.4.2.2

Interface with LIAISON® XLine by-pass

1. Perform the alignment of the instrument with the automation in Y direction: a distance of 188mm – 267mm (standard position = 200mm) shall be measured between the rear of the instrument and the rear of the by-pass module. 2. Perform the alignment of the instrument with the automation in X direction: a distance of 20mm shall be measured between the by-pass right side and the LIAISON®XL LAS left side. 3. Perform the alignment of the instrument with the automation in Z direction: a distance of 5mm shall be measured between the LAS cover and the by-pass cover. 4. Perform the levelling and the stabilization of the instrument (see chapter 3.3.4.3 on page 3-13).

Page 25-12


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.4-3: Interface between LIAISON® LAS and LIAISON® XLine


Page 25-13

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.4.3

Teaching of LAS position

Before using Teacher Software on LIAISON®XL LAS instruments, always remove (if installed) the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2), the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2), the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.2) and the cover of the LIAISON®XLine by-pass. 1. If needed to have a better visualization during teaching, remove the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22). 2. In case of interface with LIAISON®XLine, remove (if installed) the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.2) and the cover of the by-pass. 3. Remove the cover of the incubator (see chapter 11.3.1.2 on page 11-4). 4. Plug LIAISON®XL LAS and turn the system power switch on. 5. Open Teacher Software. 6. Verify the proper teaching of Reference Left position. 7. Verify the proper teaching of Reference Right position. 8. Use the Pick Tip function to pick up a disposable tip. 9. Insert a tube into the LAS aspiration position. 10. Press LAS button. The pipettor moves to the stored X-/Y-position. 11. Teach the X-/Y-position to the middle of the tube. 12. Move the pipettor carefully down. Stop when the tip touches the bottom of the tube.

Page 25-14


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.4-4: LAS teach position X/Y/Zmax 13. Move the pipettor 40 steps up to teach the Zmax position. 14. Press OK button. 15. Move the pipettor up to the tube opening to teach the Zstart position. 16. Press OK button. 17. Start Transfer of Coordinates. 18. Close Teacher Software and turn the system power switch off. 19. Perform backup of LiaisonXL.coo file on the instrument memory stick.

25.4.4


1. In case of interface with LIAISON® XLine, install the lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.3 on page 25-31). 2. If previously removed, assemble the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 2522). 3. In case of interface with Inpeco automation, install LAS safety repairs (see chapter 25.7.4.3 on page 25-26). 4. Wait for about 10 sec., then turn the system power switch on and open the LIAISON®XL system software.


Page 25-15

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.4.5

Instrument connection

1. Ensure that the automation module interfaced with LIAISON®XL LAS is off. 2. Ensure that the physical LIS and LAS connections are not plugged in. 3. Ensure that LAS and LIS SW modules are off (Main Category System, subcategory LIS/LAS). 4. Ensure that LIAISON®XL LAS is connected to a LIS using one of the physical COM ports available. 5. Connect LIAISON®XL LAS to the automation using one the physical COM ports available. 6. Take note of the physical COM ports used by LIS and LAS (see chapter 1.6.3 on page 1-27). 7. Ensure that logic COM ports of LAS and LIS displayed in Main Category System, sub-category LIS/LAS match with what verified at point 6. 8. Switch on the automation module interfaced with LIAISON®XL LAS. 9. Enable that LAS and LIS SW modules (Main Category System, sub-category LIS/LAS). 10. Initialize the LIAISON®XL LAS system.

25.4.6 25.4.6.1

Integration test Introduction

The present chapter contains the tests that are intended to be performed by DiaSorin technicians/ FSEs after that the LIAISON®XL LAS has been connected to an automation (i.e. LAS Workcell). The tests have to be performed in order to ensure the LIAISON®XL LAS system correctly works together with the Workcell. All tests can only be performed by qualified and well trained test personnel with full knowledge of the instrument. Workcell technical and authorized personnel is required for the completion of the test. The present chapter has been tailored on LIAISON®XL LAS functionalities. Any performance evaluation (e.g. TAT, workload balance fine-tuning) of the LAS Workcell is out of the scope of the current integration test.

25.4.6.2

Equipment

For each test session to be performed, the following material will be required:

Page 25-16

•

Enough sample tubes for all tests (they can be filled with 1:10 diluted Wash/System Liquid).

•

The required integrals kits (at least one per each LIAISON®XL with at least 10 left determination, calibrations excluded).

•

Consumables (cuvettes, tips, starters, DI Water, Wash Buffer, waste bag).

•

Empty waste tanks.


25. LIAISON®XL LAS •

A database containing the requested assay protocols.

•

An USB stick to backup data.

25.4.6.3

No.

Test steps

Test Step

Expected behavior

Preparation: ensure that

1

2

1. All the LIAISON®XL LAS instruments connected to the WorkCell are ON and in a state they can process tubes diverted from LAS (e.g. in “Ready” status, the pipetting position has been taught). 2. The Data Base of each LIAISON®XL LAS instrument contains all the needed assay protocols for that instrument. 3. The LIS, LAS and LXL SW settings match with the Laboratory requirements (e.g. the decimal point setting, the autoarchive mode, the “host query”/”query all”, the results aspect transmission, the “assay weight” defined in the MiddleWare SW). 4. The assay definition details for the involved tests match with the Laboratory requirements (e.g. LIS alias name, overall replicate number, priority, result aspect, available dilution factors). 5. The involved reagent kits shall be calibrated. 6. The WorkCell is in a state it can receive information from the connected LIAISON®XL LAS and process the tubes. In case of multiple analyzers connected to the LAS system, force one of the connected LIAISON®XL LAS in an Off-Line status.

Only the not available instrument is reported as Off-Line.

Ensure the On-Line/Off-Line status of the LIAISON®XL LAS instruments is correctly reported on the WorkCell/MiddleWare. • For each available instrument the reported information regarding the consumables matches with the information reported in the status summary page of the instrument.

3

Ensure that the Inventory information is correctly reported on the WorkCell (in case the WorkCell supports this feature).


• For each available instrument the reported determinations, regarding the loaded kits, match with the information reported in the inventory page of the instrument. Note. for the Off-Line instrument the information regarding the loaded kits and the consumables could be missing or not updated.

Page 25-17

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

4

Force the Off-Line analyzer to be back OnLine and in a status it can process tubes diverted through LAS.

All the LIAISON®XL LAS systems are correctly reported as On-Line.

Prepare the following testing routine:

5

6

7

•

At least 10 sample tubes per each connected instrument.

•

At least 1 assay programmed for each tube (requested assays can be specific for each connected LIAISON®XL LAS).

Start the prepared routine through the WorkCell

N.A.

The routine starts.

Ensure that:

• The tubes are diverted to the expected analyzers.

• Each tube is diverted to the correct analyzer.

• The tests are received by the analyzer and the tubes pipetted and properly processed.

• All tests are received and processed by each analyzer.

Note. Properly processed means that errors not due to the LIAISON®XL LAS system should not be considered. • The system arms are set off-line. • No further jobs LIAISON®XL LAS.

are

started

by

the

• On-going jobs requiring any pipetting action (if any) will be failed. 8

After one of the instrument has released the first half of the tubes (e.g. 4 or 5 tubes) press the PAUSE button.

• No further tube is diverted (if any) to the involved analyzer, the WorkCell displays the analyzer as not available. • New tubes (if any) will not be routed to the paused LIAISON®XL LAS, instead they will be routed only to the available analyzers (depending on tests availability). Note. Pause one system at 50% of routine completion. • The system arms are set back on-line. • Jobs not yet started (if any) are processed.

9

10

Page 25-18

After 1 minute resume the paused instrument pressing the “CONTINUE” button.

While the routine is on-going, periodically check the transmitted Inventory information (in case the WorkCell supports this feature).

• New tubes (if any) can be diverted to the involved instrument. • The WorkCell displays the analyzer as available. Note. Resume the paused system • For each instrument the reported information regarding the consumables matches with the information reported in the status summary page of the instrument. • For each instrument the reported determinations, regarding the loaded kits, match with the information reported in the inventory page of the instrument.


25. LIAISON®XL LAS • All the started tests are given a result (either failed or done), but for the ones skipped (if any) during the PAUSE test steps. • In case the “auto-archive” option was enabled all failed and done tests have been archived. • In case the “send automatically all result to LIS” option is enabled in combination with the “auto-archive” option then all the results have been successfully transmitted to the MiddelWare and subsequently transmitted to the Host (according to the desired transmission options e.g. replicates, qualitative labels, MW autovalidate options). 11

As soon as the routine finishes check the Result pages.

• In case of “manual archive” and or “manual results transmission” perform the requested actions and ensure all the results are successfully transmitted to the host (according to the desired transmission options e.g. replicates, qualitative labels). • In case the “respond to Host query for results” option is enabled the result are transmitted as soon as they are available no matter if archived or not. Ensure that all the results are successfully transmitted to the host (according to the desired transmission options e.g. replicates, qualitative labels). • The tube disposition in the WorkCell output racks matches with the layout displayed by the MiddleWare/WorkCell in case this functionality is supported.

12

Perform the database and troubleshooting backups to ensure availability of data in case of further investigation are needed.

13

Reboot the system.


Page 25-19

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.5

LIAISON®XL LAS Removal

As LIAISON®XL LAS system is a complex system and contains delicate electrical and mechanical components, it must be packed by a qualified service engineer.

25.5.1

Safety

Check System During the removal of the system, always follow the steps indicated in LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Uninstallation check list (see chapter 26.3 on page 26-9). The proper execution and compilation of this check list will ensure the proper removal of the instruments.

Instrument reinstallation If a removed instrument shall be reinstalled, always replace the washer needles and all tubings of DI water and wash solution lines (see chapter 22 for details).

25.5.2

Data deleting and Decontamination


25.5.3

Cover removal

1. Remove the printer support (if previously installed, see chapter 9.3.14 on page 932). 2. If installed, remove LAS safety repairs (see chapter 25.7.4.2 on page 25-25). 3. Remove the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22). 4. If installed, remove LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2 on page 25-26). 5. If installed, remove LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2 on page 25-29) . 6. If installed, remove LAS lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.2 on page 25-30). 7. Remove upper and lower back covers (if previously installed, see chapter 9.3.10.2 on page 9-24). 8. Remove rear Slotted Cover (see chapter 9.3.9.2 on page 9-23). 9. Remove LAS left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.2 on page 25-23). 10. Remove LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.2 on page 25-24). 11. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 12. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 13. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.2 on page 9-12). Page 25-20


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 14. Remove Monitor (see chapter 9.3.7.2 on page 9-15). 15. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18). 16. Remove Disposable Tip Drawers (see chapter 12.3.1.2 on page 12-3). 17. Remove Front Module (see chapter 20.3.1.2 on page 20-3). 18. Remove Extensible Board (see chapter 9.3.12.2 on page 9-30). 19. Remove Cabinet Cover (see chapter 9.3.11.2 on page 9-27).

25.5.4

Packaging of the LAS system

See chapter 4.4 on page 4-6 for details. Also the LAS cover (1) shall be packed in the dedicated area available inside the box of the instrument.

Figure 25.5-1: LIAISON®XL LAS packed

25.6

LIAISON®XL LAS Maintenance

See chapter 5 for details.


Page 25-21

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.7 25.7.1 25.7.1.1

LIAISON®XL LAS covers Replacement of LAS Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system.

25.7.1.2

Remove LAS Cover

1. Remove the LAS cover (1) loosening the screw (2).

Figure 25.7-1: LAS cover fastening screw 2. Lift the LAS cover (1) out of the two pin holders and set it aside. 25.7.1.3

Assemble LAS Cover

1. Hang the LAS cover (1) into the two pin holders on the top. 2. Tighten the LAS cover fastening the screw (2).

25.7.2 25.7.2.1

Replacement LAS left Blind Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22).

Page 25-22



Remove LAS left Blind Cover

1. Remove two screws (2) of blind adapter (3). 2. Pull left blind cover (1) carefully out of the snap locks.

Figure 25.7-2: Remove blind adapter 25.7.2.3

Assemble LAS left Blind Cover

1. Plug the left blind cover (1) into the snap locks of the system. 2. Insert two screws (2) of blind adapter (3) and fasten them. 3. Assemble LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22).

25.7.3 25.7.3.1

Replacement LAS left Side Cover Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22). 5. Remove LAS left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.2 on page 25-23). 6. If installed, remove the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2 on page 25-29).


Page 25-23


Remove LAS left Side Cover

1. Pull left side cover (1) carefully out of the snap locks. 2. Lift the left side cover (1) out of the two pin holders and set it aside.

Figure 25.7-3: LAS left side cover and left side repair 25.7.3.3

Assemble LAS left Side Cover

LAS left side repair shall be installed only when LIAISON®XL LAS is not interfaced with an automation. 1. Hang the left side cover (1) into the two pin holders on the top. 2. Plug the left side cover (1) into the snap locks. 3. In case of LIAISON®XL LAS not interfaced with an automation, install the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.3 on page 25-29). 4. Assemble LAS left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.3 on page 25-23). 5. Assemble LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22).

Page 25-24


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.7.4 25.7.4.1

Replacement of LAS safety repairs Preliminary steps


Remove LAS safety repairs

1. Remove the LAS front safety repair, unscrewing two screws (1). 2. Repeat the same operation to remove the LAS back safety repair also.

Figure 25.7-4: LAS front safety repair


Page 25-25


Assemble LAS safety repairs

LAS front and back safety repairs shall be installed only in case LIAISON®XL LAS is interfaced with Inpeco automation. 1. Install the LAS front safety repair, tightening two screws (1). 2. Repeat the same operation to install the LAS back safety repair also.

25.7.5 25.7.5.1

Replacement of LAS lid Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22). 25.7.5.2

Remove LAS lid

1. Remove the two screws (1) and the two holders (2) fixing the lid to the LAS cover.

Figure 25.7-5: Screw and holder for lid fixation 2. Slide the LAS lid (3) out of the two guides (4, 5) and the two fixation holes (6, 7).

Page 25-26


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.7-6: Screw and holder for lid fixation 3. If needed, remove the two safety repairs mounted as lid guides, unscrewing two screws (8). 4. Fix the two screws (1) and the two holders (2) back onto the lid (3).

Figure 25.7-7: Safety repair mounted as lid guide LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 25-27


Assemble LAS lid

The same parts used as safety repairs in case of interface with Inpeco automation shall be also installed as guides to place the lid.

LAS lid shall be installed only in case LIAISON®XL LAS is not interfaced with an automation. 1. Remove the two screws (1) and the two holders (2) from the lid (3). 2. Mount the two safety repairs as lid guides, screwing two screws (8). 3. Slide the LAS lid (3) into the two guides (4, 5) and the two fixation holes (6, 7). 4. Fix the lid to the LAS cover, using two screws (1) and two holders (2). 5. Assemble LAS Cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22).

25.7.6 25.7.6.1

Replacement of LAS left side repair Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system.

Page 25-28



Remove LAS left side repair

1. Unscrew two screws (3) and remove the left side repair (2).

Figure 25.7-8: LAS left side cover and left side repair 25.7.6.3

Assemble LAS left side repair

LAS left side repair shall be installed only when LIAISON®XL LAS is not interfaced with an automation. 1. Install the LAS left side repair (2) tightening two screws (3).

25.7.7 25.7.7.1

Replacement of lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass Preliminary steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22).


Page 25-29


Remove lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass

1. Remove the two screws (1) and the two holders (2) fixing the lid to the LAS cover.

Figure 25.7-9: Screw and holder for lid fixation 2. Slide the lid (3) out of the two guides (4, 5) and the two fixation holes (6, 7).

Figure 25.7-10: Screw and holder for lid fixation 3. If needed, remove the two safety repairs mounted as lid guides, unscrewing two screws (8).

Page 25-30


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.7-11: Safety repair mounted as lid guide 4. Fix the two screws (1) and the two holders (2) back onto the lid (3). 25.7.7.3

Assemble lid LIAISON® XLine by-pass

The same parts used as safety repairs in case of interface with Inpeco automation shall be also installed as guides to place the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass.

Lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass shall be installed every time the LIAISON®XL LAS shall be interfaced with a LIAISON®XLine. 1. Remove the two screws (1) and the two holders (2) from the lid (3). 2. Mount the two safety repairs as lid guides, screwing two screws (8). 3. Slide the lid (3) into the two guides (4, 5) and the two fixation holes (6, 7). 4. Fix the lid to the LAS cover, using two screws (1) and two holders (2). 5. Assemble LAS Cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22).


Page 25-31

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.8


This section contains instructions for the replacement and repair of individual components of the LIAISON®XL LAS pipetting system. After several repair works it is required that the individual components are readjusted. Follow the instructions in the individual sections.

25.8.1

Replacement of LAS Pipettor

Two people are needed to remove/ assemble the LAS pipettor.

25.8.1.1

Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.2 on page 9-12). 5. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18). 6. If installed, remove LAS safety repairs (see chapter 25.7.4.2 on page 25-25). 7. Remove LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22). 8. Remove LAS left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.2 on page 25-23). 9. If installed, remove LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.3.2 on page 25-24). 10. Remove LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.2 on page 25-24). 11. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 12. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 13. Remove LAS top cover supporter (see 25.8.2.2 on page 25-39). 14. Remove Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.2 on page 15-14). 15. Remove OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.2 on page 15-17).

Page 25-32


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.8.1.2

Remove LAS Pipettor

1. Unplug four cables (J10, J11, J12 and J13) of PIP CU PCB (12). 2. Unplug two flat ribbon cables (J2 and J3) of PIP CU PCB (12).

Figure 25.8-1: Unplug PIP CU PCB 3. Loosen screw (17) and remove ribbon cable holder (16). 4. Remove cables to the left and right sides.

Figure 25.8-2: Pip CU PCB


Page 25-33

25. LIAISON®XL LAS 5. Remove the three screws (2) and the LAS enlargement brace (1).

Figure 25.8-3: Installed LAS enlargement plate and brace 6. Remove the three screws (4) and the LAS enlargement back plate (3). 7. Remove the cable guide (6) screw with washer (5). 8. Remove the other three cable guide (6) screws with washer (5).

Figure 25.8-4: Cable guide screws with washers 9. Remove face plate (9). 10. Loosen both screws of the LAS top cover bracket (7), move it to the milled edge (8) and remove it. 11. Remove both threaded plates (10). 12. Remove face plate (11). 13. Remove the snap lock holder (12) with threaded plates and screws. 14. Remove both threaded plates (13).

Page 25-34


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-5: LAS top cover bracket (left side)

Figure 25.8-6: Snap lock holder (right side) 15. Loosen four screws (14) of pipetting module (15) (two on left and two on right side).

Figure 25.8-7: Pipettor fastening

Take care while setting the pipettor down, do not damage the toothed bars. 16. Pull the pipettor module (15) carefully and then lift it up. The pipettor is set in sliding blocks onto a guide way in the frame. Use the milled edges on both front sides to hang out the pipettor.


Page 25-35


Assemble LAS Pipettor

Do not bend or squeeze cables or tubes! 1. Lift pipettor module (15) onto system and thread it into the guide way. Use the milled edges on both front sides to remount the pipettor. The pipettor shall not stand over the aluminium profile. 2. Push pipetting module to the rear side. The right rear side of the pipettor module must be pushed to the back panel.

Figure 25.8-8: Pipettor position on the right side 3. Note the distance X between the front side of the right pipettor side and the right front pillar. 4. Adjust the distance between the front side of the left pipettor side and left front LAS enlargement bracket to the same distance X.

Figure 25.8-9: Pipettor position on the left side 5. Tighten the four screws (14). 6. Remove face plate (11). 7. Install both threaded plates (13). 8. Install the snap lock holder (12) with threaded plates and screws. 9. Install face plate (11).

Page 25-36


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 10. Remove face plate (9). 11. Install both threaded plates (10). 12. Install the LAS top cover bracket (7). Use the milled edge (8) to insert it. Adjust and fasten it during assemble of the LAS top cover. 13. Install face plate (9). 14. Tighten the four screws with washer (5) of the cable guide (6). 15. Install the LAS enlargement back plate (3) and tighten the three screws (4). 16. Install the LAS enlargement brace (1) and tighten the three screws (2). 17. Plug the cables (J10, J11, J12 and J13) onto the PIP CU PCB (12). 18. Plug two flat ribbon cables (J2 and J3) onto the PIP CU PCB (12). 19. Set cable holder (16) onto the ribbon cables and fasten screw (17). 20. Assemble OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.3 on page 15-20). 21. Assemble Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.3 on page 15-16). 22. Assemble LAS top cover supporter (see chapter 25.8.2.3 on page 25-40). 23. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). 24. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.3 on page 9-14). 25. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 26. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 27. Assemble LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on 25-24). 28. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.3 on page 25-23). 29. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in x direction. 30. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in y direction. 31. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in z direction. 32. Perform the teaching of pipettor (see chapter 8). 33. Perform backup of LiaisonXL.coo file on the instrument memory stick. 34. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on page 25-24). 35. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.3 on page 25-28). 36. Install the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22). 37. Perform LLD test of right arm (see chapter 3.4.5.1 on page 3-23). 38. Perform LLD test of left arm (see chapter 3.4.5.2 on page 3-24). 39. Run Service 3 LCR task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 40. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. 41. Run Service 3 LCL task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 42. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 25-37

25. LIAISON®XL LAS 43. Perform the calibration of one of the kits available at customer site. 44. Perform raw data printout and backup. 45. Disable all customer calibrations, using Disable button available in Main UI (Main category Results, sub-category Calibrations). 46. Inform the customer that all kits in use must be recalibrated. 47. If needed, perform LAS integration test (see chapter 25.4 on page 25-10).

Before using Teacher Software on LIAISON®XL LAS instruments, always remove (if installed) the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2), the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2), the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.2) and the cover of the LIAISON®XLine by-pass.

For the re-run rules in case of failures of tests, please refer to LXL-TN-17.


Kit re-calibration shall be performed according to kit IFU, either by the Final User or by the FSE himself. The FSE shall guarantee that at least the first kit re-calibration is successfully completed before the service call is closed.

Page 25-38


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.8.2 25.8.2.1

Replacement of Top Cover Supporter Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.2 on page 9-12). 5. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18). 6. If installed, remove LAS safety repairs (see chapter 25.7.4.2 on page 25-25). 7. Remove LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.2 on page 25-22). 8.

Remove LAS left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.2 on page 25-23).

9. If installed, remove LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.3.2 on page 25-24). 10. Remove LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.2 on page 25-24). 11. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 12. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8).

25.8.2.2 Right Side

Remove Top Cover Supporter

1. Remove both screws (2).

Figure 25.8-10: Right top cover supporter (inside) 2. Remove both screws (3). 3. Remove both screws (4) and the right top cover supporter (1).


Page 25-39

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-11: Right top cover supporter (outside) Left Side

4. Remove the three screws (6).

Figure 25.8-12: Left top cover supporter (outside) 5. Remove the three screws (7). 6. Remove both screws (8) and the left top cover supporter (5). 25.8.2.3 Right Side

Assemble Top Cover Supporter

1. Insert the right top cover supporter (1) and tighten both screws (4). 2. Tighten both screws (3). 3. Tighten both screws (2).

Left Side

4. Insert the left top cover supporter (5) and tighten the three screws (7). 5. Tighten the three screws (6). 6. Tighten both screws (8).

General

7. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). 8. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.3 on page 9-14). 9. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8).

Page 25-40


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 10. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 11. Assemble LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on 25-24). 12. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on page 25-24). 13. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.3 on page 25-23). 14. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.3 on page 25-28). 15. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall be interfaced with a LIAISON®XLine, install the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (see chapter 25.7.7.3 on page 25-31). 16. Install the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22). 17. If LIAISON®XL LAS is interfaced with Inpeco automation, install LAS safety repairs (see chapter 25.7.4.3 on page 25-26).

Upgrade from LIAISON®XL to LIAISON®XL LAS

25.8.3

A dedicated kit shall be ordered to perform the upgrade of a LIAISON®XL instrument to a LIAISON®XL LAS one.

If the upgrade to LIAISON®XL LAS shall be performed on LIAISON®XL instruments with SN < 2210000251 the following parts shall be also replaced: •

Top covers

•

Top cover supporter

A dedicated kit shall be ordered to complete the activity.

Check System During the upgrade from LIAISON®XL to LIAISON®XL LAS, always follow the steps indicated in LIAISON®XL LAS Upgrade check list (see chapter 26.8 on page 26-29). The proper execution and compilation of this check list will ensure the successful upgrade of the instrument.

25.8.3.1

Verification of the installed SW version

LIAISON®XL LAS requires the SW version 4.0.0.2 or higher. Verify that a compatible SW version is installed on the instrument before starting the upgrade. If needed, install the most recently released SW version following the procedure reported in the related Technical Note. 1. Check the SW version installed on the LIAISON®XL instrument. 2. If needed, upgade the instrument to the most recently released SW version.


Page 25-41


Preliminary Steps

1. Exit the LIAISON®XL system software. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch off. 3. Unplug the system power plug from the right side of the system. 4. Remove left Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.1.2 on page 9-5). 5. Remove right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.2 on page 9-6). 6. Remove left Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.3.2 on page 9-7). 7. Remove right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.2 on page 9-8). 8. Remove left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.2 on page 9-12). 9. Remove right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.2 on page 9-18). 10. Remove Top Cover Supporter (see chapter 15.3.2.2 on page 15-12). 11. Remove Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.2 on page 15-14). 12. Remove OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.2 on page 15-17). Do not remove completely the Top Cover Supporter, remove only the right and the left panels, leaving installed the back one.

25.8.3.3

Unpacking of the LIAISON®XL LAS Pipettor

1. Remove the screws of the top cover of the transportation box. The positions are marked with an “open here” stamp (see Figure 25.8-14).

Figure 25.8-13: Transportation box

Page 25-42


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-14: Position for the screw

Installation Kit for the LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-15: Top cover of the transport box removed

LIAISON®XL LAS Safety Repairs Box, LIAISON®XL LAS Lid, Lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass

2. Remove the Upgrade Kit for LIAISON®XL LAS (containing all parts to upgrade the LIAISON®XL system, see Figure 25.8-16), the LAS Safety Repair Box, the LIAISON®XL LAS lid and the lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (see Figure 25.8-17).

Figure 25.8-16: Upgrade Kit for LIAISON®XL LAS


Page 25-43

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-17: LIAISON®XL LAS safety repairs box and LIAISON®XL LAS lid

Figure 25.8-18: LIAISON®XL LAS safety repairs 3. Remove the protective foam pieces.

Figure 25.8-19: Protective foam from the rear pipettor cable guide

Page 25-44


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-20: Protective foam elements of the left and the right side of the pipettor

Figure 25.8-21: Remove the protective foam from the left and the right side of the pipettor 4. Lift the pipettor out of the transportation box. 5. Remove the LAS left blind cover, the LAS cover, the LAS left side cover and the LAS left side repair.


Page 25-45

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

LAS blind left

LAS side cover left

Figure 25.8-22: LAS Blind Left and LAS Side Panel Left

LAS cover

LAS blind left

LAS side cover left

Figure 25.8-23: LAS blind left, LAS side cover left and LAS cover

Page 25-46


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 6. Remove the grey and blue protective foams from the pipettor axes.

Figure 25.8-24: Pipettor protective foams 25.8.3.4

Remove LIAISON® XL Pipettor

1. Remove LIAISON®XL Pipettor (see chapter 15.3.1.2 on page 15-6). 25.8.3.5

Packing of the dismounted LIAISON® XL Pipettor

1. Place the two side separation panels of the transport box into the most internal holders.

Figure 25.8-25: Placement of side separation panels 2. Place the dismounted left side cover and left blind cover of the upgraded instrument into the transport box as described above.


Page 25-47

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-26: Overview protective foam elements 3. Wrap the blue and grey elements to the x- and y- axes of the pipettor. Trim them to fit as needed (the grey protection foams might be too long for the original LIAISON®XL pipettor).

Figure 25.8-27: Blue and grey protective foams

Figure 25.8-28: Blue and grey protective foams

Page 25-48


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 4. Place the original LIAISON®XL pipettor into the transport box as shown in Figure 25.8-29.

Figure 25.8-29: Liaison®XL pipettor packed into the transport box 5. Place the protective foam element (see Figure 25.8-30 and Figure 25.8-31) for stabilization of the rear pipettor cable guide.

Figure 25.8-30: Protective foam element for the rear pipettor cable guide


Page 25-49

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-31: Positioning of the protective foam element at the pipettor cable guide 6. Place the protective foam elements (see Figure 25.8-32) to the left and the right sides, between the box and the pipettor (see Figure 25.8-33).

Figure 25.8-32: Lateral protective foam elements

Page 25-50


25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-33: Lateral protective foam elements positioning 7. Close the top cover of the transport box and tighten the screws back, see Figure 25.8-13. The protective foam element shown in Figure 25.8-34 is not needed for the packaging of the LIAISON®XL pipettor. It is just used for fixation of the LIAISON®XL LAS upgrade kit during transport.

Figure 25.8-34: Protective foam element used for fixation of the LIAISON®XL LAS upgrade kit


Page 25-51


System modification

1. Remove both snap lock holders (1) with threaded plates and screws from the left and right topsides of the LIAISON®XL pipettor.

Figure 25.8-35: Pipettor with snap lock holders 2. Install one of the snap lock holders (1) with threaded plates and screws on the right topside of the LIAISON®XL LAS pipettor. 3. Remove both connection screws (3) from the left side.

Figure 25.8-36: Connection screws on the left side

4. Insert three connection screws (6 + 7) into one LAS enlargement bracket (8). This bracket will be used for the rear.

Figure 25.8-37: LAS enlargement bracket with connection screws

Page 25-52


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 5. Insert three connection screws (6 + 7) into one LAS enlargement bracket (9). Additionally, insert two threaded plates (10). This bracket will be used for the front.

Figure 25.8-38: LAS enlargement bracket (front) with connection screws and threaded plates 6. Insert LAS enlargement bracket (8) into the foremost lane of the rear pillar (11). Use the blind adapter provided in the kit (13, see also Figure 25.7-2) to adjust the LAS enlargement bracket. The topside of the LAS enlargement bracket must be on the same level as the topside of the pillar. 7. Tighten all connection screws (6). 8.

Insert LAS enlargement bracket (9) into the foremost lane of the front pillar (12) and repeat steps 6 and 7.

Figure 25.8-39: Installation of both LAS enlargement brackets


Page 25-53

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-40: Adjustment of LAS enlargement bracket 9. Insert two threaded plates (14) into the pillar (12). Both threaded plates (14) should be in the same height as the threaded plates (10).

Figure 25.8-41: Threaded plates in the left front pillar

Page 25-54



Assemble LIAISON®XL LAS Pipettor

1. Assemble LAS pipettor (see chapter 25.8.1.3 on page 25-36). 2. Assemble OLV Probe (see chapter 15.3.4.3 on page 15-20) 3. Assemble Sample Probe (see chapter 15.3.3.3 on page 15-16). 4. Mount LAS blind adapter (13) with four screws (15) onto pillar (12).

Figure 25.8-42: LAS blind adapter 5. Assemble top cover supporter (see chapter 25.8.2.3 on page 25-40). In case of SN < 2210000251, install a Top Cover Supporter compatible with the new design of the left Top Cover. 6. Assemble right Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.8.3 on page 9-22). 7. Assemble left Top Cover (see chapter 9.3.6.3 on page 9-14). In case of SN < 2210000251, install a a left Top Cover - new design. 8. Assemble right Side Cover (see chapter 9.3.4.3 on page 9-8). 9. Assemble right Blind Cover (see chapter 9.3.2.3 on page 9-6). 10. Assemble LAS left Side Cover (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on 25-24). 11. Assemble left Blind Cover (see chapter 25.7.2.3 on page 25-23). 12. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in x direction. 13. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in y direction. 14. Verify that both pipetting arms are gliding smooth and without force in z direction.


Page 25-55

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

25.8.3.8

Serial label replacement

1. Remove the LIAISON®XL serial label placed on the cabinet wall separating the PC area from the tank area.

Figure 25.8-43: Serial label positioning 2. Check the information reported in LIAISON®XL LAS serial label received with the upgrade kit. This label shall report: • The commercial name LIAISON®XL LAS • The catalogue number (REF) of LIAISON®XL LAS (I0050LAS) • The same serial number (SN) reported on the LIAISON®XL label previously removed.

Figure 25.8-44: Serial label for LIAISON®XL to LIAISON®XL LAS upgrade

Page 25-56


25. LIAISON®XL LAS 3. If step 2 is verified successfully, place the LIAISON®XL LAS serial label onto the instrument, in the same position of the removed one. 25.8.3.9

Assemble LAS cover metal bar

The metal bar needed to hang the LAS cover onto the instrument is not mounted on covers provided in the upgrade kits, the assembly shall be performed by service technicians during LIAISON®XL to LIAISON®XL LAS upgrade. 1. Assemble the two hooks (1), using the material provided in the kit (2 washers, 2 screws, 4 nuts). 2. Assemble one washer and one screw (2) on each bar fixing block (3). 3. Perform the adjustment of the cover in Y direction, loosening the screws (2) of the fixing blocks (3) and moving the metal bar left/ right. The bar shall be adjusted in order to align the backside of the LAS cover to the backside cover of the instrument. A reference distance of ~25mm between the sides of the bar and the sides of the fixing blocks should be typically verified.

Figure 25.8-45: LAS cover adjustment – Y direction 4. Perform the adjustment of the cover in Z direction, loosening the nuts (4) of the hooks (1) and moving the hooks up/ down. A reference distance of ~20mm between the metal bar and the hook washer should be typically verified.


Page 25-57

25. LIAISON®XL LAS

Figure 25.8-46: LAS cover adjustment – X direction

Figure 25.8-47: Metal bar monted onto the LAS cover

Page 25-58



LAS configuration

1. Plug the system power plug on the right side of the system. 2. On the right side of the system, turn the system power switch on. 3. Open Service Software. 4. Move to Parameter dialogue of Incubator service window. 5. In Device drop-down menu set COP ID 0x00 option. 6. In Code field insert 2 value and press Set button. 7. In Parameter field, set 1 and press Read button. The value associated to LIAISON®XL setting (50) appears in Contents field. 8. In New Value field, set 114 and press Write button. 9. Press Overwrite button. 10. Close Service Software and switch off the instrument. Before using Teacher Software on LIAISON®XL LAS instruments, always remove (if installed) the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2), the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2), the lid for LIAISON®XLine interface (see chapter 25.7.7.2) and the cover of the LIAISON®XLine by-pass. 11. Wait 10 sec., then switch on again the instrument. 12. Open Teacher Software. 13. Perform the teaching of pipettor (see chapter 8). 14. Perform backup of LiaisonXL.coo file on the instrument memory stick. 15. Close Teacher Software and switch off the instrument. 16. Wait 10 sec., then switch on again the instrument. 17. Open Service Software. 18. Perform LLD test of right arm (see chapter 3.4.5.1 on page 3-23). 19. Perform LLD test of left arm (see chapter 3.4.5.2 on page 3-24). 25.8.3.11


1. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.3.3 on page 25-24). 2. If LIAISON®XL LAS shall not be interfaced with an automation, install the LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.3 on page 25-28). 3. Install the LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3 on page 25-22). Adjust and fasten the LAS top cover bracket (7).


Page 25-59


Instrument re-qualification

1. Run Service 3 LCR task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 2. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. 3. Run Service 3 LCL task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule). 4. For any given series, verify that CV observed is less than or equal to 4.00%. 5. Perform the calibration of one of the kits available at customer site. 6. Perform raw data printout and backup. 7. Disable all customer calibrations, using Disable button available in Main UI (Main category Results, sub-category Calibrations). 8. Inform the customer that all kits in use must be recalibrated. For the re-run rules in case of failures of tests, please refer to LXL-TN-17.


Kit re-calibration shall be performed according to kit IFU. The FSE shall guarantee that at least the first kit re-calibration is successfully completed before closing the upgrade activity.

25.8.3.13

LAS integration

1. Perform LAS integration test (see chapter 25.4 on page 25-10).

Page 25-60


26. Service Check Lists

26 Service Check Lists 26.1

LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Installation Qualification (IQ)

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Installation details

2.1

Installation date

___________________________________________________

2.2

Installed by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________


Page 26-1


4

Visual Inspection before unpacking (see chapter 3.3.1)

Flag

4.1

Transport box without damages.

[ ]

4.2

Transport tilt and shock monitors indication.

[ ]

5

Unpacking, visual inspection and inventory (see chapter 3.3.2)

Flag

5.1

Unpack the instrument.

[ ]

5.2

Chassis without damages or gaps.

[ ]

5.3

No visible cuts in the system or pipetting tubing.

[ ]

5.4

Covers without damages or scratches.

[ ]

5.5

Check parts according to the packing lists (see chapter 28-1).

[ ]

6

Manual inspection (see chapter 3.3.3)

Flag

6.1

Unlock pipettor.

[ ]

6.2

Both pipetting arms in x-axis are gliding smooth and without force.

[ ]

6.3

Both pipetting arms in y-axis are gliding smooth and without force.

[ ]

6.4

Both pipetting arms in z-axis are gliding smooth and without force.

[ ]

6.5

Unlock cuvette reservoir.

[ ]

6.6

Lubricate incubator downholder, left/ middle metal sheets and cuvette [ ] supply metal sheet (see chapter 5.2.6).

7

System set-up (see chapter 3.3.4)

Flag

7.1

Mount tubes and caps of WPRP and WAP.

[ ]

7.2

Install cuvette waste tube.

[ ]

7.3

Install the cabinet cover, the extensible board, the front module, the DiTi drawers and the top covers (see chapter 3.3.4.2).

[ ]

7.4

Apply the “Do not open cover” label onto the left top cover (see chapter 1.6.4).

[ ]

7.5

Install the monitor and place the cables for the following connection of the [ ] PC.

7.6

Connect the computer to the LIAISON® XL, External USB PCB and monitor.

[ ]

7.7

Install the side covers, the blind covers and the rear slotted cover.

[ ]

7.8

Install the back covers (if necessary).

[ ]

7.9

Install the printer support (if necessary).

[ ]

7.10

Check the alignment of the covers.

[ ]

Page 26-2

Note

Note

Note

Note


26. Service Check Lists 7.11

Perform instrument levelling and stabilization (see chapter 3.3.4.3).

[ ]

7.12

Fill water tank and put it into the instrument.

[ ]

7.13

Fill wash solution tank and put it into the instrument.

[ ]

7.14

Check and, if needed, adjust drawer handles (see chapter 21.4.2).

[ ]

7.15

Insert waste containers into the basin and connect them to their sensors and tubings.

[ ]

7.16

If available, place the solid waste bin into the waste case.

[ ]

7.17

Put a solid waste bag into the dedicated case.

[ ]

7.18

Put starter reagent bottles into the dedicated module.

[ ]

7.19

Put tip trays into the dedicated drawers.

[ ]

7.20

Put cuvettes into the dedicated reservoir.

[ ]

®

7.21

Plug in and turn on LIAISON XL system.

[ ]

7.22

Load cuvettes into the system (see chapter 3.3.4.5).

[ ]

8

Rack configuration

Flag

8.1

Configure sample racks (see chapter 3.3.5).

[ ]

8.2

If needed, configure control racks (see chapter 3.3.6).

[ ]

8.3

Barcode ID labels and Rack ID labels placed on all racks.

[ ]

9

Pipettor and rack teaching (see chapter 3.3.7)

Flag

9.1

Complete the teaching of the pipettor via Teacher Software (see chapter 8). [ ]

9.2

If required, perform the teaching of customized sample racks (G, H, X, Y and Z racks, see chapter 8.15.2).

[ ]

10

LAS safety repair installation (on ly in case of LIAISON® XL LAS, see chapter 25.3.3.11)

Flag

10.1

Install the LAS left side repair (only in case of LIAISON® XL LAS not interfaced with an automation).

[ ]

10.2

Install the LAS lid (only in case of LIAISON® XL LAS not interfaced with an automation).

[ ]

10.3

Install the LAS cover (only in case of LIAISON® XL LAS).

[ ]

11

Fluidic set-up (see chapter 3.3.8)

Flag

11.1

Perform fluidic setup via Service Software.

[ ]


Note

Note

Note

Note

Page 26-3

26. Service Check Lists Comments / Observations

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature

Page 26-4



26.2

LIAISON®XL/ LIAISON®XL LAS Operational Qualification (OQ)

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Installation details

2.1

Installation date

___________________________________________________

2.2

Installed by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________


Page 26-5


4

Reagent Bay (see chapter 3.4.1)

4.1

Reagent Bay initialized successfully.

[ ]

4.2

Lane status diodes checked successfully for all lanes (see chapter 20.4.1.3).

[ ]

4.3

Lane sensors checked successfully for all lanes (see chapter 17.5.1.2 and 17.5.1.3).

[ ]

4.4

RFID checked successfully for all lanes (see chapter 17.5.1.2 and 17.5.1.3).

[ ]

4.5

Each position cools down to allowed range (11 – 15 °C).

[ ]

5

Sample Bay (see chapter 3.4.2)

Flag

5.1

Sample Bay initialized successfully.

[ ]

5.2

Check barcode scanner configuration (see chapter 16.4.1.1).

[ ]

5.3

Lane status diodes checked (see chapter 20.4.1.3).

[ ]

5.4

Lane sensors checked (see chapter 16.4.1.2).

[ ]

5.5

Barcode reading tested successfully (with customer barcoded vials).

[ ]

5.6

External handheld barcode reader plug-in and configuration (see chapter 24.2.1).

[ ]

6

Starter Reagent Bay (see chapter 3.4.3)

Flag

6.1

Starter Reagent Bay initialized successfully.

[ ]

6.2

Lane status diodes checked (see chapter 20.4.1.3).

[ ]

6.3

RFID checked successfully for all positions (see chapter 18.4.1.2).

[ ]

6.4

Starter tubes heat up to 35.5 – 37.5 °C (see chapter 10.4.5).

[ ]

7

Incubator (see chapter 3.4.4)

Flag

7.1

Incubator initialized successfully.

[ ]

7.2

Incubator heats up to 36.5 - 38.5 °C (see chapter 11.5.1).

[ ]

7.3

Load cuvettes into the incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.1)

[ ]

7.4

Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the [ ] Incubator (see chapter 7.3.7.5).

7.5

Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator into the Waste (see chapter [ ] 7.3.7.4).

8

Pipettor (see chapter 3.4.5)

Page 26-6

Flag

Flag

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note



Pipettor initialized successfully.

[ ]

8.2

Perform LLD test for right arm (see chapter 3.4.5.1).

[ ]

8.3

Perform LLD test for left arm (see chapter 3.4.5.2).

[ ]

9

Backup of system configuration (see chapter 3.4.6)

Flag

9.1

Backup of “LiaisonXL.coo” file on the instrument memory stick.

[ ]

9.2

Backup of “.rac.” files on the instrument memory stick.

[ ]

10

System Verification (see chapter 3.4.7)

Flag

10.1

Initialize the instrument via LIAISON®XL Main UI.

[ ]

11

Final Test (see chapter 3.4.8)

Flag

11.1

CV% of Background Wash by Series in range.

[ ]

11.2

CV% of Background Wash Average in range.

[ ]

11.3

CV% of Light Check Right by Series in range.

[ ]

11.4

CV% of Light Check Right Average in range.

[ ]

11.5

CV% of Light Check Left by Series in range.

[ ]

11.6

CV% of Light Check Left Average in range.

[ ]

11.7

CV% of NPAT MP1s1c in range.

[ ]

11.8

CV% of NPAT MP3s1c in range.

[ ]

11.9

NPAT MP3s1c/ MP1s1c yeld in range.

[ ]

11.10

Log Files Backup.

[ ]

11.11

Raw data printout and backup.

[ ]

11.12

“Final_Test_Liaison_XL.xls” file completed and signed.

[ ]

12

Printout customization (see chapter 3.4.9)

12.1

Install the printer (if necessary).

12.2

Perform printout customization (if required by the customer, see chapter [ ] 24.5.3).


Note

Note

Note

[ ]

Page 26-7


Comments / Observations

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature

Page 26-8



26.3

LIAISON®XL/ Liaison®XL LAS Uninstallation

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Uninstallation details

2.1

Uninstallation date

___________________________________________________

2.2

Uninstalled by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________


Page 26-9


4

Data deleting (see chapter 4.3)

Flag

4.1

Delete patient database.

[ ]

5

Decontamination (see chapter 4.3)

Flag

5.1

Empty Liquid Waste Containers, add hypochlorite solution (refer to chapter 5 of LIAISON®XL User Manual) and load them back into the system.

[ ]

5.2

Run Service Decontamination2 task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule).

[ ]

5.3

Switch the liquid waste tank.

[ ]

5.4

Run Clean-up Washer task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule), in order to decontaminate the second liquid waste line also.

[ ]

5.5

Empty starter, cleaning, water and wash containers and intermediate containers.

[ ]

5.6

Load empty containers into the system and empty liquid lines (using the procedures of chapters 3.3.8.1, 3.3.8.2, 3.3.8.3 and 3.3.8.5).

[ ]

5.7

Remove all containers from the system.

[ ]

5.8

If not disposed, decontaminate liquid waste containers (see chapter 4.3.1).

[ ]

5.9

Remove all cuvettes from the system (see chapter 4.3.2).

[ ]

5.10

Remove all tubes out of the sample racks.

[ ]

5.11

Remove all integrals out of the reagent module.

[ ]

5.12

Remove all ancillaries out of the ancillary bay.

[ ]

5.13

Remove all disposable tips out of the disposable tip drawers.

[ ]

5.14

Remove and dispose the solid waste bag.

[ ]

5.15

Remove and dispose (if possible) the waste tank bulk (if previously installed).

[ ]

5.16

Remove and dispose (if possible) the solid waste bin (if previously installed).

[ ]

5.17

Remove and dispose the cuvette waste tube.

[ ]

5.18

Remove and dispose the wash/ waste station.

[ ]

5.19

Clean the pipettor, the analyzer interior, the primary and intermediate tanks [ ] and the covers (refer to chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual)

5.20

Perform additional cleanings of contaminated parts (see chapter 4.3.4).

[ ]

5.21

Perform additional cleanings of not contaminated parts (see chapter 4.3.4).

[ ]

5.22

Complete the certificate of the decontamination (included in DiaSorin [ ] Common Technical Note 1).

5.23

Add the certificate of decontamination to the transportation documents.

[ ]

6

System Packing (see chapter 4.4 for LIAISON®XL and 25.5.3/ 25.5.4 for LIAISON®XL LAS)

Flag

Page 26-10

Note

Note

Note



6.1

Prepare the system for the packing.

[ ]

6.2

Pack the housing parts.

[ ]

6.3

Pack the covers.

[ ]

6.4

Pack the accessories.

[ ]


_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature


Page 26-11


26.4

6-Months Maintenance

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Maintenance details

2.1

Maintenance date

___________________________________________________

2.2

Previous Maintenance date

___________________________________________________

2.2

Maintained by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________

Page 26-12



4

System Cleaning (see chapter 5.2.2)

Flag

4.1


[ ]

4.2

Rinse cleaning solution bottle and fill it with “fresh” Liqui-Nox® solution (see chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual for preparation).

[ ]

4.3

Run Service Decontamination1 task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule), without considering the last two prompts (press Accept in both cases).

[ ]

5

PC & Accessories (see chapter 5.2.3)

5.1

Clean PC, printer, UPS and magnetothermic (if present).

[ ]

5.2

Adjust Touch screen calibration (see chapter 24.2.2).

[ ]

5.3

Perform the Database back-up task.

[ ]

5.4

Perform the AllLogArchives back-up task.

[ ]

5.5

Check dimension of databases.

[ ]

5.6

Check D:\ partition of hard disk.

[ ]

5.7

Check Printer functionalities (if present).

[ ]

5.8

Check UPS functionalities (if present).

[ ]

5.9

Check the functionality of the magnetothermic – earth leakage switch.

[ ]

5.10

Run Antivirus application (see chapter 24.4.3).

[ ]

6

Maintenance of the inner parts (see chapter 5.2.6)

Flag

6.1

Clean the spindle.

[ ]

6.2

Clean the spindle channel of the reader.

[ ]

6.3

Clean the reader lid (inner and outer).

[ ]

6.4

Clean the spindle channel of the incubator.

[ ]

6.5

Clean and lubricate the incubator downholder and the metal spring.

[ ]

6.6

Clean the gates of the pushers.

[ ]

6.7

Clean and lubricate the incubator metal sheets.

[ ]

6.8

Clean and lubricate the cuvette supply metal sheet.

[ ]

6.9

Clean the incubator cover.

[ ]

6.10

Clean the top surface of the tip waste tube.

[ ]

7

Maintenance of the washer module (see chapter 5.2.7)

Flag


Note

Note

Note

Page 26-13


Replace washer guiding bushings (see chapter 13.3.6).

[ ]

7.2

Clean the washer “blue” top plate.

[ ]

7.3

Clean and assemble the adjustment blocks.

[ ]

7.4

Replace washer-WAP and reader-WAP aspiration tubings.

[ ]

7.5

Replace washer and reader needles.

[ ]

8

Maintenance of the pumps and tubings (see chapter 5.2.8)

8.1

Replace syringe of SRP pump (see chapter 19.4.3).

[ ]

8.2

Inspect and if necessary replace valve of SRP pump (see chapter 19.4.4).

[ ]

Note: if the valve reached the end of its lifecyle (3 years), replace it in any case. 8.3

Replace tubings of WPRP and WAP pumps (see chapters 19.6.3 and 19.7.3).

[ ]

8.4

Replace the filter of the debubbler (see chapter 22.3.20) and add hose clamps.

[ ]

8.5

Inspect and if necessary replace all other tubings (with the exception of starter [ ] reagent tubings) – see chapter 22.

9

Maintenance of the cabinet (see chapter 5.2.9)

Flag

9.1

Clean the waste basin.

[ ]

9.2

Clean the solid waste bin.

[ ]

9.3

Clean the cabinet inner parts (drawers, waste and tank areas).

[ ]

9.4

Clean the solid waste case

[ ]

10

Maintenance of the reagent module (see chapter 5.2.10)

Flag

10.1

Clean the reagent module (inner and outer, cover included).

[ ]

10.2

Replace the stirrer sliding bearings (see chapter 17.3.3.3).

[ ]

10.3

Inspect the removed bearings: if one or more bearings are worn, replace the stirrer.

[ ]

11

Maintenance of the pipettor (see chapter 5.2.11)

11.1

Inspect and if necessary replace Pipettor Z-bearings of the sample probe.

[ ]

11.2

Inspect and if necessary replace Pipettor Z-bearings of the OLV probe.

[ ]

11.3

Wipe the pipettor rods with a lint free cloth soaked with isopropanol.

[ ]

11.4

Wipe the pipettor rods with a lint free cloth soaked with oil.

[ ]

11.5

Verify the proper behavior moving both pipettor modules 5 times in axial Xdirection and 5 times in axial Y- direction.

[ ]

Page 26-14

Note

Note


26. Service Check Lists 12

Cleaning of other surfaces (see chapter 5.2.12)

Flag

12.1

Clean the auger cover.

[ ]

12.2

Clean the sorter pot.

[ ]

12.3

Clean the disposable tip drawers.

[ ]

12.4

Clean the cuvette reservoir.

[ ]

12.5

Clean the cabinet (PC area).

[ ]

12.6

Clean inner parts of left and right top covers.

[ ]

13

System Restore & Periodic Recalibrations (see chapter 5.2.13)

13.1

Check the calibration of the spindle position (see chapter 14.4.2).

[ ]

13.2

Check the reagent integrals stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1).

[ ]

13.3

Check washer needle height calibration (see chapter 13.4.1.1).

[ ]

13.4

Calibrate the washer bubble sensors (see chapter 13.4.1.2).

[ ]

13.5

Calibrate the starter bubble sensors (see chapter 18.4.1.3).

[ ]

13.6

Check pipettor teaching (see chapter 8).

[ ] ®

13.7

Check LAS aspiration position teaching (only for LIAISON XL LAS instruments, see chapter 25.4.3).

[ ]

13.8


[ ]

13.9


[ ]

14


Flag

14.1


[ ]

14.2


[ ]

15

Requalification Test (see chapter 5.2.15)

15.1


[ ]

15.2


[ ]

15.3


[ ]

15.4

Calibration & Control of customer kit in range.

[ ]

15.5


[ ]

15.6

Disable all customer calibrations, using Disable button available in Main UI (Main category Results, sub-category Calibrations).

[ ]

15.7

Inform the customer that all kits in use must be recalibrated.

[ ]


Note

Note

Page 26-15



_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature

Page 26-16



26.5

12-Months Maintenance

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Maintenance details

2.1

Maintenance date

___________________________________________________

2.2


___________________________________________________

2.2

Maintained by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________


Page 26-17


4

System Cleaning (see chapter 5.2.2)

Flag

4.1


[ ]

4.2

Rinse cleaning solution bottle and fill it with “fresh” Liqui-Nox® solution (see chapter 8 of LIAISON®XL User Manual for preparation).

[ ]

4.3

Run Service Decontamination1 task from the dedicated window of Main User Interface (Main Category Maintenance, sub-category Schedule), without considering the last two prompts (press Accept in both cases).

[ ]

5

PC & Accessories (see chapter 5.2.3)

5.1

Clean PC, printer, UPS and magnetothermic (if present).

[ ]

5.2

Adjust Touch screen calibration (see chapter 24.2.2).

[ ]

5.3

Perform the Database back-up task.

[ ]

5.4

Perform the AllLogArchives back-up task.

[ ]

5.5

Check dimension of databases.

[ ]

5.6

Check D:\ partition of hard disk.

[ ]

5.7

Check Printer functionalities (if present).

[ ]

5.8

Check UPS functionalities (if present).

[ ]

5.9

Check the functionality of the magnetothermic – earth leakage switch.

[ ]

5.10

Run Antivirus application (see chapter 24.4.3).

[ ]

6

Maintenance of the incubator belt (see chapter 5.2.5)

Flag

6.1

Check the incubator upper guides and the incubator belt.

[ ]

6.2

In case of detected damages/ cracks or belt not moving properly, the incubator belt or the incubator guides shall be replaced during a new visit.

[ ]

6.3

Check the drive pulley and the guide pulley.

[ ]

6.4

In case of missing bearings, the pulleys shall be replaced during a new visit.

[ ]

6.5

In case of parts found dirty, clean the incubator belt, the pulleys and the lower [ ] guides.

7

Maintenance of the inner parts (see chapter 5.2.6)

Flag

7.1

Clean the spindle.

[ ]

7.2


[ ]

7.3

Clean the reader lid (inner and outer).

[ ]

7.4


[ ]

Page 26-18

Note

Note

Note



Clean and lubricate the incubator downholder and the metal spring.

[ ]

7.6


[ ]

7.7

Clean and lubricate the metal sheets.

[ ]

7.8

Clean and lubricate the cuvette supply metal sheet.

[ ]

7.9

Clean the incubator cover.

[ ]

7.10

Clean the top surface of the tip waste tube.

[ ]

8

Maintenance of the washer module (see chapter 5.2.7)

Flag

8.1

Replace washer guiding bushings (see chapter 13.3.6).

[ ]

8.2

Clean the washer “blue” top plate.

[ ]

8.3

Clean and assemble the adjustment blocks.

[ ]

8.4

Replace washer-WAP and reader-WAP aspiration tubings.

[ ]

8.5

Replace washer and reader needles.

[ ]

9

Maintenance of the pumps and tubings (see chapter 5.2.8)

9.1

Replace syringe of SRP pump (see chapter 19.4.3).

[ ]

9.2

Inspect and if necessary replace valve of SRP pump (see chapter 19.4.4).

[ ]

Note

Note: if the valve reached the end of its lifecyle (3 years for regular instruments, 1 year for high volume instruments), replace it in any case. 9.3

Replace tubings of WPRP and WAP pumps (see chapters 19.6.3 and 19.7.3).

[ ]

9.4

Replace the filter of the debubbler (see chapter 22.3.20) and add hose clamps.

[ ]

9.5

Inspect and if necessary replace all other tubings (with the exception of starter [ ] reagent tubings) – see chapter 22.

10

Maintenance of the cabinet (see chapter 5.2.9)

Flag

10.1

Clean the waste basin.

[ ]

10.2

Clean the solid waste bin.

[ ]

10.3

Clean the cabinet inner parts (drawers, waste and tank areas).

[ ]

10.4

Clean the solid waste case.

[ ]

11

Maintenance of the reagent module (see chapter 5.2.10)

Flag

11.1


[ ]

11.2

Replace the stirrer sliding bearings (see chapter 17.3.3.3).

[ ]

11.3

Inspect the removed bearings: if one or more bearings are worn, replace the stirrer.

[ ]


Note

Note

Page 26-19


12

Maintenance of the pipettor (see chapter 5.2.11)

12.1

Inspect and if necessary replace Pipettor Z-bearings of the sample probe.

[ ]

12.2

Inspect and if necessary replace Pipettor Z-bearings of the OLV probe.

[ ]

12.3

Wipe the pipettor rods with a lint free cloth soaked with isopropanol.

[ ]

12.4

Wipe the pipettor rods with a lint free cloth soaked with oil.

[ ]

12.5

Verify the proper behavior moving both pipettor modules 5 times in axial Xdirection and 5 times in axial Y- direction.

[ ]

13

Cleaning of other surfaces (see chapter 5.2.12)

Flag

13.1

Clean the auger cover.

[ ]

13.2

Clean the sorter pot.

[ ]

13.3

Clean the disposable tip drawers.

[ ]

13.4

Clean the cuvette reservoir.

[ ]

13.5

Clean the cabinet (PC area).

[ ]

13.6

Clean inner parts of left and right top covers.

[ ]

14

System Restore & Periodic Recalibrations (see chapter 5.2.13)

14.1

Perform the calibration of the belt (only in case of belt removal, see chapter 11.4.1).

14.2

Check the calibration of the cuvette presence sensor transport (only in case of [ ] belt removal, see chapter 11.4.2).

14.3

Check the calibration of the spindle position (see chapter 14.4.2).

[ ]

14.4

Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator through the Washer back to the Incubator (only in case of belt removal, see chapter 7.3.7.5).

[ ]

14.5

Run 2 times 30 cuvettes from the Incubator into the Waste (only in case of belt removal, see chapter 7.3.7.4).

[ ]

14.6

Check the reagent integrals stirring (see chapter 17.5.1.1).

[ ]

14.7


[ ]

14.8


[ ]

14.9


[ ]

14.10


[ ]

[ ] ®

14.11

Check LAS aspiration position teaching (only for LIAISON XL LAS instruments, see chapter 25.4.3).

[ ]

14.12


[ ]

14.13


[ ]

Page 26-20

Note


26. Service Check Lists 15


Flag

15.1


[ ]

15.2


[ ]

16

Requalification Test (see chapter 5.2.15)

16.1


[ ]

16.2


[ ]

16.3


[ ]

16.4

Calibration & Control of customer kit in range.

[ ]

16.5


[ ]

16.6


[ ]

16.7


[ ]

Note


_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature


Page 26-21


26.6

FSE Monthly Visit (for high volume customers)

Refer to chapter 5.5 on page 5-20 for details.

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Maintenance details

2.1

Maintenance date

___________________________________________________

2.2


___________________________________________________

2.2

Maintained by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________

Page 26-22



4

General System Cleaning (see chapter 5.2.6, 5.2.10 of Service Manual and chapter 8 Flag of User Manual)

4.1

Clean the sample module.

[ ]

4.2


[ ]

4.3

Clean the starter reagent module.

[ ]

4.4

Clean the spindle.

[ ]

4.5


[ ]

4.6


[ ]

4.7

Clean the reader lid.

[ ]

4.8

Clean the incubator donwholder and the metal spring.

[ ]

4.9


[ ]

4.10

Clean the incubator metal sheets.

[ ]

4.11

Clean the cuvette supply metal sheet.

[ ]

4.12

Clean the sample probe.

[ ]

4.13

Clean the OLV probe.

[ ]

5

Lubrication (see chapter 5.2.6)

5.1

Lubricate the incubator donwholder.

[ ]

5.2

Lubricate the left and the middle metal sheets.

[ ]

5.3

Lubricate the cuvette supply metal sheet.

[ ]

6

Washer needle guiding bushings check

Flag

6.1

Check washer guiding bushings and replace them if required (see chapter [ ] 13.3.6).

7

Washer aspiration needles check

Flag

7.1

Check the washer aspiration needles and replace them if required.

[ ]

8

Washer aspiration tubings check

Flag

8.1

Check the washer aspiration tubings and replace them if required .

[ ]

9

WAP and WPRP tubings check

Flag


Note

Note

Note

Note

Note

Page 26-23


Check the WAP and WPRP tubings and replace them if required (see chapters [ ] 19.6.3 and 19.7.3).

10

Washer needle height calibration

Flag

10.1


[ ]

11

Washer bubble sensors calibration

Flag

11.1


[ ]

12

Starter bubble sensors calibration

Flag

12.1


[ ]

13

SRP syringe

13.1

Replace syringe of SRP pump (see section 19.4.3, only in case of more than 1000 determinations/ day).

[ ]

14

Pipettor coordinates

Flag

14.1


Note

Note

Note

[ ] ®

14.2

Check LAS aspiration position teaching (only for LIAISON XL LAS instruments, see chapter 25.4.3)

[ ]

15

Error list

Flag

15.1

Review the instrument error list

[ ]

16

Requalification Test

16.1

CV% of Background Wash by Series in range

[ ]

16.2

CV% of Light Check Right by Series in range

[ ]

16.3

CV% of Light Check Left by Series in range

[ ]

16.4

Raw data printout and backup

[ ]

Page 26-24

Note

Note



________________________________________________________________ _

________________________________________________________________ _

________________________________________________________________ _

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature


Page 26-25


26.7

LIAISON®XL LAS Integration

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Maintenance details

2.1

Maintenance date

___________________________________________________

2.2


___________________________________________________

2.2

Maintained by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________

Page 26-26



4

Preliminary steps (see chapter 25.4.1)

Flag

4.1

If installed, remove LAS lid (see chapter 25.7.5.2).

[ ]

4.2

If installed, remove LAS left side repair (see chapter 25.7.6.2).

[ ]

5

System positioning and levelling (see chapter 25.4.2)

Flag

5.1

Perform the alignment of the LIAISON®XL LAS with the automation in Y direction.

[ ]

5.2

Perform the alignment of the LIAISON®XL LAS with the automation in X direction.

[ ]

5.3

Perform the alignment of the LIAISON®XL LAS with the automation in Z direction.

[ ]

6

Teaching of LAS position (see chapter 25.4.3)

Flag

6.1

Perform the teaching of LAS aspiration position.

[ ]

6.2


[ ]

7

LAS safety repair installation (see chapter 25.4.4)

Flag

7.1

Install lid for LIAISON® XLine by-pass (only in case of interface with LIAISON® XLine, see chapter 25.7.7.3).

[ ]

7.2

Install LAS cover (see chapter 25.7.1.3).

[ ]

7.3

Install LAS safety repairs (only in case of interface with Inpeco automation, see [ ] chapter 25.7.4.3).

8

Instrument connection (see chapter 25.4.5)

Flag

8.1

Connect LIAISON®XL LAS to the automation.

[ ]

9

Integration test (see chapter 25.4.6)

9.1

Complete the preparation step.

[ ]

9.2

Ensure the Work Cell reports the correct analyzer status in case of an off-line analyzer.

[ ]

9.3

Ensure the Work Cell reports the correct inventory information in case of online and off-line analyzers.

[ ]

9.4

Ensure the Work Cell reports the correct status information when all the analyzers are on-line.

[ ]


Note

Note

Note

Note

Note

Page 26-27


Prepare the suggested routine.

[ ]

9.6

Start the routine.

[ ]

9.7

Ensure that all tests are received and processed by each analyzer.

[ ]

9.8

Pause one analyzer.

[ ]

9.9

Resume the paused analyzer.

[ ]

9.10

Ensure the Work Cell reports the correct inventory information during the routine.

[ ]

9.11

Check the Results page.

[ ]

9.12

Perform the Database and the AllLog Archives back-up tasks.

[ ]

9.13

Reboot the system.

[ ]


_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature

Page 26-28



26.8

LIAISON®XL LAS Upgrade

1

General

1.1

Type

___________________________________________________

1.2

Serial No.

___________________________________________________

1.3

Software Version

___________________________________________________

2

Maintenance details

2.1

Maintenance date

___________________________________________________

2.2


___________________________________________________

2.2

Maintained by

___________________________________________________

3

Customer details

3.1

Customer name

___________________________________________________

3.2

Contact person name

___________________________________________________

3.3

Company

___________________________________________________

3.4

Address

___________________________________________________

3.5

Phone

___________________________________________________

3.6

Email

___________________________________________________


Page 26-29


4

Check of SW version (see chapter 25.8.3.1)

Flag

4.1

Verify that a SW version ≥ 4.0.0.2 is installed on the system.

[ ]

4.2

If needed, upgrade the system to the most recent SW version .

[ ]

5

Unpacking of the LIAISON®XL LAS pipettor (see chapter 25.8.3.3)

Flag

5.1

Unpack the LIAISON®XL LAS pipettor.

[ ]

6

LIAISON®XL pipettor removal (see chapter 15.3.1.2)

Flag

6.1

Remove the LIAISON®XL Pipettor

[ ]

7

Packing of the LIAISON®XL pipettor (see chapter 25.8.3.5)

Flag

7.1

Pack the LIAISON®XL pipettor.

[ ]

8

System modification (see chapter 25.8.3.6)

Flag

8.1

Mechanically upgrade LIAISON®XL system to LIAISON®XL LAS one.

[ ]

9

LIAISON®XL LAS pipettor installation (see chapter 25.8.3.7)

Flag

9.1

Assemble LIAISON®XL LAS Pipettor.

[ ]

9.2

Assemble sample probe and OLV probe.

[ ]

9.3

Replace “old” top cover supporter with “new” one (only for instruments with [ ] SN < 2210000251).

9.4

Replace “old” left top cover with “new” one (only for instruments with SN < [ ] 2210000251).

9.5

Assemble top cover supporter, top covers, right side cover, right blind cover.

[ ]

9.6

Assemble the LAS left side cover.

[ ]

9.7

Assemble the LAS left blind cover

[ ]

9.8

Both pipetting arms in x-axis are gliding smooth and without force.

[ ]

9.9

Both pipetting arms in y-axis are gliding smooth and without force.

[ ]

9.10

Both pipetting arms in z-axis are gliding smooth and without force.

[ ]

10

Serial label update (see chapter 25.8.3.8)

Page 26-30

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note



Check the REF and the SN reported on the LIAISON®XL LAS serial label. ®

®

[ ]

10.2

Replace the LIAISON XL serial label with the LIAISON XL LAS one.

[ ]

11

Assemble LAS cover metal bar (see chapter 25.8.3.9)

Flag

11.1

Assemble the metal bar onto the LAS cover.

[ ]

12

LAS configuration (see chapter 25.8.3.10)

Flag

12.1

Set COP parameter 1 to LIAISON®XL LAS value (114).

[ ]

12.2

Complete the teaching of the pipettor via Teacher Software (see chapter 8)

[ ]

12.3


[ ]

12.4


[ ]

12.5


[ ]

13

LAS safety repair installation (see chapter 25.8.3.11)

Flag

13.1

Assemble the LAS left side repair (only in case of LIAISON® XL LAS not interfaced with an automation).

[ ]

13.2

Assemble the LAS lid (only in case of LIAISON® XL LAS not interfaced with an automation).

[ ]

13.3

Assemble the LAS cover.

[ ]

14

Instrument requalification (see chapter 25.8.3.12)

Flag

14.1

CV% of Light Check Right by Series <= 4%

[ ]

14.2

CV% of Light Check Left by Series <= 4%

[ ]

14.3

Calibration of customer kit in range.

[ ]

14.4


[ ]

14.5


[ ]

14.6


[ ]


Note

Note

Note

Note

Page 26-31


_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

___________________

___________________________________

Date

Signature

Page 26-32


27. Technical Data

27 Technical Data 27.1

Power Requirements

System Voltage:

100 V – 240 V +/- 10 %

Frequency:

50 - 60Hz

Power consumption:

mean: 400 W (peak: 550 W) mean: 1365 BTU (peak: 1877 BTU)

Input current Range:

6 - 2.5A

Mains supply:

Voltage fluctuation up to +/- 10% of the nominal voltage.

Fuses:

250VAC T6.3AH (High breaking capacity) 5x20mm

PC Voltage:

100 V - 240 V

Frequency:

50 - 60 Hz

Power consumption:

mean: 300 W (mean: 1024 BTU)

Rated input current Range:

8A/ 4A


Page 27-1

27. Technical Data

27.2

Laser of the Bar Code Scanners

System Class:

Class 2 laser product

Communication:

RS 232 C

Supported codes:

Codabar (set as default) Code 39 (set as default) Code 128 / EAN 128 (set as default) 2/5 Interleaved (to be set)

Maximal output radiation:

1.3 mW

Pulse duration:

70 µs Standard: EN 60825-1: 2001-11 35 µs Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 at the date of manufacture.

Emitted wave length:

630 - 670 nm

Reading distance

30 - 310 mm

Handheld Barcode Reader (PN A0096) Class:

Class 1 LED product

Communication:

USB


0.76 mW

Pulse duration:

10 µs to 8000 µs


LED 645 nm

Standards:

ITE Equipment: IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-1 LED: IEC 60825-1:1993+A1+A2 EN 60825-1:1994+A1+A2 Emissions: FCC Part 15, ICES-003, CISPR 22, EN 55022 Immunity: CISPR 24, EN 55024

Page 27-2


27. Technical Data Handheld Barcode Reader (PN A0179) Class:

Class 2 Laser product

Communication:

USB


1 mW

Pulse duration:

12 ms


650 nm

Standards:

Electrical Safety: UL 60950-1, CSA C22.2 No.60950, IEC 60950 Laser Safety: IEC 60825-1:2007 Complies with 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 excepts for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June, 24, 2007. EMI/ RFI: North America (FCC) Part 15 Class B, Canada (IC) ICES-003 Class B, Russia (Gost), European Union EMC Directive, VCCI-Japan, Korean KCC, Taiwan EMC (BSMI), Australia (ACMA).


Page 27-3

27. Technical Data

27.3

Computer and Connections

Hardware: The following specifications are the minimum requirements. Processor:

Intel Dual Core E6550, 2.33 GHz or better

Memory (RAM):

At least 2 GB

Hard disk:

2 physical hard disks (at least 200 GB each)

DVD-ROM burner:

16x, compatible with PC system

Ports:

2 serial RS 232 ports 1 parallel port 1 LAN port At least 6 USB (4 on the rear panel and 2 in the front panel)

Modem:

Internal, 56K

Monitor:

17 inch, touch screen 1280x1024 pixel (VGA connections supported)

Network:

10/ 100 Mb Ethernet

Printer:

USB printer compatible with the installed operating system. Both network and local printers are supported. The printer that shall be used by Main User Interface shall be defined as “default printer”.

Software: Operating system:

27.4

Refer to the release note of the SW version to install/ installed.

Dimensions and Weight Weight

System complete:

Width

315 kg (LIAISON®XL)

150 cm (LIAISON®XL)

325 kg (LIAISON®XL LAS)

172 cm (LIAISON®XL LAS)

695 lb (LIAISON®XL)

59 in*2 (LIAISON®XL)

717 lb (LIAISON®XL LAS)

68 in*2 (LIAISON®XL LAS)

Depth *4

90 cm

Height 150 cm – 165cm *2, 3 (top cover closed) 233 cm – 248cm *2, 3 (top cover opened)

35.5 in*2 *4

59 in – 65 in *2, 3 (top cover closed) 92 in – 98 in *2, 3 (top cover opened)

Table 27.4-1: Dimensions and Weight Page 27-4


27. Technical Data *1

Pound (lb.avdp.,lb.) standard, Kilogramm (kg); (1 lb = 0.45 kg)

*2

Inch (in); Centimeter (cm); 1 in = 25.4 mm = 2.54 cm

*3

Depending on the height of adjustment feet.

*4

Monitor excluded.

27.5

System Clearance 5cm

TOP VIEW

50cm*

60cm with and without printer support 85cm

85cm

* Left lateral clearance is not applicable to LIAISON®XL LAS.

27.6

Environmental Conditions

Environmental Conditions:

This standard applies to equipment designed to be safe at least under the following conditions: Indoor use

Temperature:

Operating: 15 to 32 °C Storage: 5 to 45 °C Transport: -20 °C to +70 °C

Humidity:

Operating: 10 - 85 % non-condensing Storage: 10 - 90 % non-condensing Transport: 10 % - 90 % non-condensing

Pollution Degree:

2 (EN 61010-1:2001)

Installation Class:

2 (EN 61010-1:2001)


Page 27-5

27. Technical Data Sunlight:

No direct sunlight. May mislead optical sensors and affect performance.

Altitude:

Operating up to 3000 m above mean sea level. Storage: as required for air travel.

Dust:

27.7

No excessive dust.

Noise Emission

At Operator Normal Position

63.9 dBA

At Bystanders Positions 61.4 dBA

27.8

Temperature Ranges

Ambient:

15 °C – 32 °C (59°F – 89.6°F)

Incubator:

36.5 °C – 38.5 °C (95°F – 98.6F)

Inside the system:

Ambient temperature ±5°C (±9°F)

Reagent loading bay:

11°C - 15°C (51.8°F - 59°F)

Sample loading bay:

Ambient temperature ±3°C (±5.4°F)

Starter tubes:

35.5 °C – 37.5 °C (91.4°F – 98.6°F)

27.9

Water quality

The water to be used for the dilution and reconstitution of the Liaison XL reagents and consumables should comply to the definition of “Instrument Feed Water”, according to CLSI standard “Preparation and Testing of Reagent Water in the Clinical Laboratory; Approved Guideline – Fourth Edition”. In particular, the water shall contain the following characteristics:

Page 27-6

•

pH: 5.0 – 8.0

•

conductivity: <2 mSi/cm

•

resistivity: > 0.5 M Ohm-cm

•

TOC: < 500 ppb

•

SiO2: <1.0 ppm

•

Bacteria: <10 CFU/m


27. Technical Data

27.10 Packaging 27.10.1

System and Cabinet in one box

See enclosed delivery note for the contents, weights and dimensions. The following tables are for system and cabinet shipped in one box. The covers are still shipped in a separate box.

Number of crates:

2 crates, 1 cardboard box

Crate 1: Contents:

System

Dimensions (WxDxH):

165 cm x 95 cm x 174 cm (for LIAISON®XL) (65 in x 37.5 in x 68.5 in*2) 194 cm x 95 cm x 174 cm (for LIAISON®XL LAS) (76.5 in x 37.5 in x 68.5 in*2)

Weight:

approximate 440 kg (for LIAISON®XL) (app. 970 lb*1) approximate 450 kg (for LIAISON®XL LAS ) (app. 992 lb*1)

Crate 2+3: Contents:

One palette with a crate housing parts and an extra cardboard box on top with accessories

Dimensions (WxDxH):

163 cm x 92 cm x 155 cm (64.2 in x 36.2 in x 61 in*2)

Weight:

approximate 190 kg (app. 419 lb*1)

*1 *2

Pound (lb.avdp.,lb.) standard, Kilogramm (kg); (1 lb = 0.45 kg) Inch (in); Centimeter (cm); 1 in = 25.4 mm = 2.54 cm


Page 27-7

28. Appendix A

28 Appendix A 28.1

Packing List

28.1.1

System packing list

Number of pieces

Description

1

System

1

DiTi drawer right

1

DiTi drawer left

10

Sample racks

2

Intermediate containers with sensors

1

Small ramp

1

Lifting aid system

1

Solid waste bin

1

LAS cover (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments)

28.1.2

Covering packing list

Number of pieces


Description

1

Side cover right

1

Side cover left

1

Slotted rear blind

1

Top cover right

1

Top cover left

1

Extensible board

1

Cabinet cover

1

Front Module

1

Blind right

1

Blind left

Page 28-1

28. Appendix A

28.1.3

Accessory packing list

Number of pieces 2

Wash container with cap

2

Waste container with cap

1

DI container with cap

1

Cleaning bottle

1

PC

1

Monitor

1

Main cable

1

Cuvette waste tube

1

USB stick

3

WPRP caps

4

WAP caps

1

Ancillary tray

20cm

Page 28-2

Description

Self-adhesive Velcro (to mount handheld barcode reader support)

1

Rack Label ID set %A - %Z

1

Ancillary adapter for Light Check (set of 2)

2

LiaisonXL Rack C

2

Sample rack adapter (set of 60 spacers)

1

Sample rack holder

1

Integral holder

1

Waste tank bulk

1

Waste bags (set of 50) & closing bands

1

Handheld barcode reader

1

Sample tube tool

1

“Do not open” cover labels (set of different languages)

1

LAS lid (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments)

1

LAS safety repair set (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments)

1

Lid for LIAISON®XLine by-pass (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments)


28. Appendix A 1


LAS left side repair (only in case of LIAISON®XL LAS instruments)

Page 28-3

28. Appendix A

28.2

Consumable and Accessories

Consumables and Accessories The usage of non-recommended consumables and accessories can produce erroneous results or damages to the system. Use only the consumables and accessories described herein. See "Instructions for use Manual" for consumable instructions for use and handling procedures.

28.3

Spare Parts

See separate spare parts list.

Page 28-4


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol

29 Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol 29.1

Purpose

This chapter is intended to describe the LIS interface for LIAISON®XL, which is for communication to a host computer. The specification shall provide sufficient detail so that a design and an implementation can be derived.

29.2

Related documents

For further information refer to the documents: •

CLSI LIS-1A (prior ASTM E1381). Specification for Low Level Protocol to Transfer Messages Between Clinical Laboratory Instruments and Computer Systems.

•

CLSI LIS-2A (prior ASTM E1394). Specification for Transferring Information Between Clinical Instruments and Computer Systems.

29.3

Overview

This description is intended to specify the interface for exchanging information between the LIAISON®XL instrument and a host computer. This includes both settings to be made to adapt the communication to lab specific properties as well as a description of message content and tools for troubleshooting.

29.4

General Information and Specification

Communication between LIAISON®XL and an external host computer consists of receiving test requests from the host and reporting results back to the host. This is accomplished via an RS232 connection and follows the CLSI LIS-1A (former ASTM1381, low level) and CLSI LIS-2A (former ASTM1394, high level) standards for communication. The LIAISON®XL host interface consists of: •

ASTM 1381 low-level transfer protocol used to transmit or receive messages.

•

Intermediate files used for temporarily storing data received (local to the LIAISON®XL application).

•

Interpretation of data received from the intermediate files and entering into the LIAISON®XL database.

•

Intermediate files used to temporarily store data to be sent to the host.


Page 29-1


There won't be specs for the lower level protocol, since this is described in sufficient detail in ASTM1381. The general procedure related to the communication of the LIAISON®XL with an external host, as well as the specific implementation of the ASTM standards, are described here. The ASTM 1394 defines how the data to be transmitted a represented as a structured message consisting of several records as described below. These messages are then translated into one or more frames that will actually be transmitted according to what described below and ASTM 1381.

29.4.1

Transfers initiated from LIAISON® XL

1. LIAISON®XL communication sessions with a host computer can be initiated on request of the LIAISON®XL operator. •

An operator can upload all or a selection of test results on request through a LIAISON®XL menu selection (Results -> Archived -> Upload). Within the Export Results dialogue the option Export to LIS must be selected.

•

An operator can download all pending test orders from the host (Results -> All or Worklist -> Download Orders button). This is the QueryAll mode, available also when the system is in HostQuery mode.

Figure 29.4-1: Export results dialogue 2. LIAISON®XL can generate query messages during sample loading to query test orders for barcoded or manually entered samples tubes (See System Automatically Queries Host for Worklist in Table 29.6-1). This is the HostQuery mode. 3. The LIAISON®XL can upload patient results whenever results have become available.

Page 29-2



29.4.2

LIS initiated transfers

1. The LIS may send test orders spontaneously (Download mode). This can happen also in HostQuery Mode. 2. The LIS may send queries for results (see Table 29.11-11 for details).

29.5

Limitations

As a consequence of the allowed character set specified for ASTM1381 (it does not allow to transmit non-ASCII characters), for not-ASCII languages like Japanese, Chinese or Greek some information cannot be transmitted (e.g. patient names, demographic information or localized flags or qualitative result labels). LIAISON®XL handles patient Sample IDs case-insensitive. Therefore sample IDs that are received from the host are automatically converted to uppercase. Patient Sample IDs are sent to the host always in uppercase. Allowed characters for Sample IDs are: •

A-Z (a-z is automatically converted to uppercase);

•

0-9;

•

minus (-), dot (.), dollar sign ($), plus (+), percent sign (%), pound sign (#), ampersand (&), equal (=);

•

SIDs starting with a dollar sign ($) denote calibrators and are rejected;

•

SIDs starting with a pound sign (#) denote controls and are rejected.

The ASTM1381 interpreter is set up to perform 2 plausibility checks: •

Strict Parsing. Strict Parsing means that a field in a message received from the host is not allowed to contain more components than those definined in the ASTM1381.xml. Strict Parsing is enabled/disabled in the ASTM1381.xml file. Default is false.

•

Sequence number check. Sequence number check means that the records in the received message have the correct sequence numbering, according to ASTM standard. Sequence number check is enabled/disabled in the ASTM1381.xml file. The corresponding element is "IgnoreSequenceNumberCheck". Set its value to true if sequence number checking should be ignored. Default is true.


Page 29-3


29.6

Setup

The following data is available through the System -> LIS/ LAS -> LIS Dialogue (see Figure 24.6-2 and Figure 24.6-4). By means of this dialogue the interface can be customized. #

Item

Range

Description

1

Instrument ID

Alphanumeric, 1..10 characters, space / and - are included.

This field allows to assign an unique InstrumentID to the LIAISON®XL. It is used to verify that a transmission is intended for the LIAISON®XL and corresponds with the ReceiverID sent in field H10 of the Message Header Record. In messages sent from the LIAISON®XL to the HOST Instrument ID will be sent in field H5 (SenderID) of the Message Header Record.

Default will be the value entered at installation

2

HostID

Alphanumeric, 1..10 characters space / and - are included.

Default is blank 3

ComPORT

2, 3 or 4 Default is 2

4

BaudRate

19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 or 1200

This field allows to assign a name to the host. It will be sent as ReceiverID (H10) in MessageHeaderRecords sent from the LIAISON®XL to the Host. This field specifies the serial port used for host transmissions. Specifies the Baudrate used for transmissions between the LIAISON®XL and the host.

Default is 9600 5

DataBits

7 or 8

Overwrites the ASTM1381 requirements.

Default is 8. 6

StopBits

0 or 1


Default is 1 7

Parity

Even, Odd or None


Default is None 8

Page 29-4

DateTemplate

YYYYMMDD

Must not be changed, in all cases, dates shall be recorded in the YYYYMMDD format as LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol required in the ASTM1394 standard. 9

TimeTemplate

HHMMSS

Must not be changed, in all cases, time shall be recorded in the HHMMSS format as required in the ASTM1394 standard.

10a

Timeout (Query)

Range 30-99999

Within seconds the LIAISON®XL expects a response to a query messages sent to the host. If within seconds transmission of a response has not started yet, the LIAISON®XL will log in Eventlog that no response within timeout + SampleID without test order.

Send Frame Timer (No Response)

Range 15-120

Bad Frame Send Timer (Interframe)

Range 30-120

Busy timer

Range 10-120

10b

10c

10d

Default 60s

Default is 15

Default 30s

Default 10s 11

Delimiters

4 characters, default is |\^&

| is the default Field delimiter

Overwrites the ASTM1381 “Send Frame Timer” Overwrites the ASTM1381 “Bad Frame Send Timer” Overwrites the ASTM1381 “Busy Timer” The delimiters used for outgoing messages. Incoming messages may have different delimiters.

\ is the default repeat delimiter ^ is the default component delimiter & is the default escape delimiter 12

13

Send Automatically Queries Host for Worklist

Y/N

Send Compressed Query

Y/N


Default is N

Default is N

LIAISON®XL will generate query messages during sample loading to query test orders for barcoded patient samples. If Compressed Order Query is on, the query for test orders is generated using repeat delimiters.

Page 29-5


14

15

16

Send Compressed Comments

Y/N

Send Automatically Sends All Results

Y/N

Respond to LIS Query for Results

Y/N

If Compressed Comments is on, the result comment record is generated using repeat delimiters.

Default is N

The LIAISON®XL will upload patient results whenever results have become available in the Archived Browser.

Default is Y

If selected, LIAISON®XL will respond to queries for results.

Default is N 17

Record ASTM1381

Y/N

A protocol file of data transmitted on ASTM1381 level can be recorded.

Default is N 18

Record ASTM 1394

Y/N

A protocol file of data transmitted on ASTM1394 level can be recorded.

Default is Y 19

ON/OFF switch

On/Off

A switch to enable / disable the LIS module.

Default is Off 20

Result flag style

Long/Short

If Long is selected, result flags are transmitted as full size string ("old" Liaison style).

Default is Long

If Short is selected, results flags are transmitted by a 2 character abbreviation. 21


On/Off

If enabled, the system will send extended traceability information.

Default is Off Table 29.6-1: LIS Setup

Page 29-6



29.7

Implementation parameters “Complete Protocol”

The following table lists the parameters configurable in System -> LIS/ LAS -> LIS where: •

Requested. The parameter must be implemented to obtain a LIAISON®XL “Complete protocol”.

•

Optional. The end-user shall be able to choose the preferred value of the parameter without changing the host protocol.

For example, a parameter that has “Requested = Yes” and “Optional = Yes” must be implemented and the end-user shall be able to decide whether to use it or not.

Parameter Result flag style Enable Manufacturer Record Send Compressed Query

Send Compressed Comments

Respond to LIS Query for Results

Choice

Description

Requested

Optional

Short

Results flags are transmitted by a 2 character abbreviation

Yes

No

Yes/No

If enabled, the system will send extended traceability information

Yes

Yes

Yes/No

If Compressed Order Query is on, the query for test orders is generated using repeat delimiters.

Yes

Yes

Yes/No

If Compressed Comments is on, the result comment record is generated using repeat delimiters.

Yes

Yes

Yes/No

If selected, LIAISON®XL will respond to queries for results.

Yes

Yes

Table 29.7-1: Implementation parameters - Complete Protocol Different settings of optional parameters allow to implement different hybrid configurations; for the implementation of the standard configuration of the complete protocol refer to chapter 24.6.

29.8

Parameters to satisfy

These parameters are configurable in Definition -> Assay -> Calculation and the host software must satisfy their use. •

Requested. The parameter must be implemented to satisfy the LIAISON®XL transmission to host.

•

Optional. The end-user shall be able to choose the preferred value of the parameter without changing the host protocol.

For example, a parameter that has “Requested = Yes” and “Optional = Yes” must be implemented and the end-user shall be able to decide whether to use it or not.


Page 29-7

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Parameter

Choice

Description

Requested

Optional

Send replicates to host

Yes/No

Result Replicates to LIS: all Replicates are sent to LIS

Yes

Yes

Result Aspect for host transmission

Dose/ Label/ Both

Result Aspect for LIS transmission. This can be either "Dose", "Label" or "Both"

Yes

Yes

Table 29.8-1: Parameters to satisfy Different settings of optional parameters allow to implement different hybrid configurations; for the implementation of the standard configuration of the complete protocol refer to chapter 24.6.

29.9

Logical Structure of the Message Level Protocol

The blocked stream of data sent between a host computer and the analyzer at a given time is called a message. Messages consist of a hierarchy of records of various types: Level

Segment Name

Identifier (Record TypeID)

0

Message Header Record

'H'

0

Message Terminator Record

'L'

1

Patient Information Record

'P'

1

Query Record

'Q'

1

Scientific Record

'S'

2

Test Order Record

'O'

3

Result Record

'R'

common

Comment Record

'C'

4

Manufacturer Information Record

'M'

Comments

Not allowed LIAISON®XL

for

Contains extended traceability information, if enabled.

Table 29.9-1: Logical structure of the message level protocol A record is identified by the first field of a record, the RecordTypeID. An unknown RecordTypeID causes an error and aborts the interpretation session. That means that this message is ignored by LIAISON®XL and the failed attempt is recorded in the Eventlog. The communication line is considered neutral and a new transmission can be initiated from either side.

Page 29-8


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Most of the various record types are related to each other in a definite hierarchy: •

A lower level record may never appear without the preceding higher level record.

•

Order records must be preceded by a patient record, result records must be preceded by an order record etc.

•

A sequence of records at one level is terminated by the appearance of a record of the same or higher level.

A violation of the record hierarchy will cause an error and aborts the interpretation session. The LIS does not go off line, just that one message is lost. The Error will be logged that the hierarchy rule was ignored. Messages to be transmitted to the host, such as a request for test orders or result data, are first written to a file UPLOAD????.DAT. After all messages for a single action have been written to the file, they are transferred. The upload file is deleted after all contents are successfully transmitted. When there is a failure the UPLOAD????.DAT file is kept and transmission is repeated again. The failure is recorded in the EventLog. Data received from the host is immediately written to the file ASTM????.DAT; after all information is received, the LIAISON®XL begins processing the download file and adding records to the database. If an error occurs during interpretation of data from the host, a message is displayed to the operator. In case the host is switched off or the communication is temporarily interrupted, it may happen that the analyzer tries unsuccessfully to send results. As soon as the communication is restored, LIAISON®XL will try to send the results marked internally as “to be sent” . After a successful transmission, LIAISON®XL stores the name of the current operator and the date and time in the result object. If the system is working in Host-query and there is already a test order for a certain sample, when the operator unloads and reloads again the same rack, a new query shall be sent, to check if other new requests are pending for the same SID. If the LIAISON®XL receives again the same test (i.e. SID + assay) and the old one is either in Worklist or Ongoing, no new items shall be added; otherwise, if the test is either in Done or Archived or Failed, a new Work List Entry (WLE) shall be added.


Page 29-9


29.10 Incoming transmission examples Test orders downloading is used to request test orders from the host that are available for the LIAISON®XL instrument. The download session is initiated by the LIAISON®XL program only by using the Query Record.

29.10.1

Test orders

In case the query for test orders is generated manually by the operator through a LIAISON®XL menu option the query record contains „ALL“ in the „Starting Range ID“ and „Universal Test ID“ fields: LIAISON®XL to Host: (request for test orders from host) manually Structure defined by ASTM 1394

Structure defined by ASTM 1381

(multiple records comprise a single message)

(each record is sent as one or more frames)


Frame 1

Query Record Message Terminator Record

: Frame n

Table 29.10-1: Test orders - LIAISON®XL to Host manually Example: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LIS||P|1 Q|1|ALL||ALL||||||||O L|1|N LIAISON®XL to Host: (request for test orders from host) automatically Structure defined by ASTM 1394





Frame 1

Query Record 1

:

:

Frame n

Query Record m Message Terminator Record Table 29.10-2: Test orders - LIAISON®XL to Host automatically

Page 29-10


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Example: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LIS||P|1 Q|1|SAMPLE01||ALL||||||||O Q|2|SAMPLE02||ALL||||||||O Q|3|BARCODE0815||ALL||||||||O Q|4|12345||ALL||||||||O L|1|N If CompressedOrderQuery is enabled, the query for test orders is generated using repeat delimiters: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LIS||P|1 Q|1|SAMPLE01\SAMPLE02\BARCODE0815\12345||ALL||||||||O L|1|N Host to LIAISON®XL: (response from host includes patient demographics, patient ID, sample ID, and test orders according to the following record hierarchy) The response to requests for test orders is expected to be recieved within seconds after the request has been sent. is to be specified in the System -> LIS/ LAS -> LIS Dialogue. Structure defined by ASTM 1394





Frame 1

Patient Information Record 1 Test Order Record 1

: Frame n

: Test Order Record n : Patient Information Record n Test Order Record 1 : Test Order Record n Message Terminator Record Table 29.10-3: Test orders – Host to LIAISON®XL In case there are no test orders available, the LIS should respond with an empty message containing header and terminator records only. The terminator record should contain an 'I' (no information available) flag in the Termination Code Field.


Page 29-11

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Example: H|\^&|||LIS|||||LXL||P|1 L|1|I It is also possible for the host to reply with a message with „empty“ P and O records: H|\^&|||LIS|||||LXL||P|1 P|1 O|1 L|1|I The comment record is used to return "bad test" etc messages back to the host after download session. After the LIAISON®XL receives all test orders from the host, the records are interpreted. Valid test orders are entered into the work-list database, while invalid test orders are not. After the interpretation segment of the download session, the LIAISON®XL sends a message to the host containing information about all rejected or invalidated test orders as follows: LIAISON®XL to Host: (information about rejected test orders) Structure defined by ASTM 1394





Frame 1


: Frame n

Result Record 1 Comment 1 : Test Order Record n Result Record 1 Comment 1 : Patient Information Record n Test Order Record 1 Result Record 1 Comment 1 : Test Order Record n Result Record 1 Comment 1 Message Terminator Record Table 29.10-4: Test orders – Host to LiaisonXL Page 29-12


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Example: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP^1:10||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||X R|1|^^ÂFP||||||X|||||Liaison C|1|I|BAD_DILUTION|I L|1|N

Reasons for rejection of test orders are: Comment string

Description

BAD_TEST

No match found for the testcode specified in TestOrderRecord, Field 5, Component 4.

QC_SAMPLE_ID

If the SampleID in O3 matches the ID of a control (with or without leading #), the order is rejected. QC material can't be ordered by the host.

BAD_SAMPLE_ID

SampleID field was either empty, too short or too long or it contained invalid characters. SampleID filed was either empty or the SampleID had a leading '$' character. Leading '$' characters designate calibrator materials. Calibrators can't be ordered by the host.

BAD_DILUTION

The dilution specified in TestOrderRecord, Field 5, Component 5 can not be applied to the test specified in TestOrderRecord, Field 5, Component 4.

WRONG_INSTRUMENT

The InstrumentID which is sent in the ReceiverID field of the Message Header Record doesn't match the InstrumentID in the System -> LIS/ LAS -> LIS Dialogue.

OTHER_ERROR

Other error Table 29.10-5: Rejection of test orders


Page 29-13


29.10.2

Test Results

Only the calculated result (concentration calculated from mean of RLU values) is transferred per test. For multiple replicate results the mean is transmitted only. LIAISON®XL to Host: (transmit sample information with corresponding tests and results)






Frame 1


: Frame n

Result Record 1 Comment 1 : Result Record n Comment 1 : Test Order Record n Result Record 1 Comment 1 : Result Record n Comment 1 : Patient Information Record n Test Order Record 1 Result Record 1 Comment 1 : Result Record n Comment 1 : Test Order Record n Result Record 1 Comment 1 :

Page 29-14


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Result Record n Comment 1 Message Terminator Record Table 29.10-6: Test results Example: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||F R|1|^^ÂFP^^DOSE|13.1|IU/ml||H||F||||19980506123145|Liaison C|1|I|CALIBRATION_EXPIRED|I L|1|N A list of comments, which can detail the result in the preceding result record is given in Result Comment Record. Result transmission of mean and single replicates: as two ‘R’ records, one for each replicate, plus the mean as a third ‘R’ record H|\^&|||LXL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||F R|1|^^ÂFP^^REPL|13.0|IU/ml||H||S||||19980506123145|Liaison R|2|^^ÂFP^^REPL|13.2|IU/ml||H||S||||19980506123145|Liaison R|3|^^ÂFP^^DOSE|13.1|IU/ml||H||F||||19980506123145|Liaison C|1|I|CALIBRATION_EXPIRED|I L|1|N In case results cannot be reported, the result is flagged („X“) in the ‘ReportType’ field (Field 26) of the TestOrderRecord and in the ‘Status’ field (Field 9) of the ResultRecord. The reason is then appended in a CommentRecord. Example for transmission of failed results: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||X R|1|^^ÂFP||||||X||||19980506123145|Liaison C|1|I|CLOT_DETECTED|I C|2|I|JOB_FAILED|I L|1|N In case more than one flag occured, they are transmitted using repeat delimiters: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LIS||P|1 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||X R|1|^^ÂFP||||||X||||19980506123145 LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

Page 29-15

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol C|1|I|CLOT_DETECTED\CALIBRATION_EXPIRED\REAGENT_EXPIRED\JO B_FAILED|I L|1|N Queries for test result, which are still in process are transmitted with an „I“ flag („in instrument pending“) in the ‘ReportType’ field (Field 26) of the TestOrderRecord and in the ‘Status’ field (Field 9) of the ResultRecord. Example for transmission of pending results: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||I R|1|^^ÂFP||||||I|||||Liaison L|1|N Corrections of test results are transmitted with a „C“ flag („correction of previously transformed result“) in the ‘ReportType’ field (Field 26) of the TestOrderRecord and in the ‘Status’ field (Field 9) of the ResultRecord. This is the case if a result was changed using the "Change Result" function of the Results Journal. Example for transmission of corrected results: H|\^&|||LXL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||C R|1|^^ÂFP^^DOSE|13.3|IU/ml||H||C||||19980506123145|Liaison L|1|N Results below (above) the calculation limits of the assay are transmitted with a numerical value of lower (upper) limit of the assay range and a '<' ('>') flag in the ‘Result Abnormal Flags’ field (Field 7) of the ResultRecord. Example for transmission of off scale results (“< / > calculation limits): H|\^&|||Liaison|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||F R|1|^^ÂFP^^DOSE|< 0.20|IU/ml||<||F||||19980506123145 R|2|^^ÂFP^ÎNTR|neg|||<||F||||19980506123145 L|1|N

Page 29-16



29.11 Data Record Usage (refer to ASTM 1394, particularly sections 6 through 13) Each record sent by the LIAISON®XL may not contain all fields possible for the record. An 'N' in the “Required” column indicates it is optional.

29.11.1


The Message Header Record is always the first record in an application message. It contains general sender and receiver information. Its hierarchical level is 0. The following tables describe the values each field can contain: they refer respectively to an “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) or an “Incoming” communication (from host to LIAISON®XL).

Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

H1

Record Type ID

Y

'H'

H2

Delimiter Definition

Y

As defined in setup, default is |\^&

H5

Sender Name

N

1..10 characters InstrumentID as defined in the System > LIS/ LAS -> LIS dialogue.

H10

Receiver ID

N

1..10 characters HostID as defined in the System -> LIS/ LAS -> LIS dialogue.

H12

Processing ID

N

Always 1 character; always P

H13

Version No.

N

'1'

H14

Date and Time of Message

N

Always empty, not sent.

Table 29.11-1: Message Header Record - Ongoing

Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

H1

Record Type ID

Y

'H' or 'h'

H2

Delimiter Definition

Y

Recommended using |\^&, but can use any 4 of the ASCII characters allowed

H5

Sender Name

N

Not used for incoming message processing.

H10

Receiver ID

N

1..10 Characters Used to verify that the


Page 29-17

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol transmission is intended for the LIAISON®XL. If sent, it must match the InstrumentID on System -> LIS/ LAS -> LIS dialogue, otherwise ignored. H12

Processing ID

N

Not processed

H13

Version No.

N

Not processed.

H14

Date and Time of Message

N

Not used for incoming message processing.

Table 29.11-2: Message Header Record - Incoming

29.11.2

Patient Information Record

The Patient Information Record is used to supply patient demographic information for order and result records that follow it. Its hierarchical level is 1. The following tables describe the values each field can contain: they refer respectively to an “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) or an “Incoming” communication (from host to LIAISON®XL).

Field Number

Page 29-18

Field Name

Required

Value

P1

Record Type ID

Y

'P'

P2

Sequence Number

Y

1-5 characters. Formatted as a left justified number with a range from 1 through 65535. Equal to the numeric identifier of a patient record within the current outgoing application message. Used for validating the integrity of the application message by ensuring that the message contains all records.

P3

Practice Assigned Patient ID

N

0..11 characters Set to the Patient ID (PID) field of an outgoing LIAISON®XL result entry.

P6

Patient Name

N

0-2 components. Total length of the field is 052 characters. Set to the patient Name field LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol of the result entry. Each name component is separated by the Component Delimiter character (^), for example, Smith^John. Trailing empty name components and trailing Component Delimiter characters are not included. For example, Patient Name is set to Smith for a patient worklist entry with the last name Smith. P6^1

Patient Last Name

N

PatientName if available

P6^2

Patient First Name

N

PatientFirstName if available

P8

Birthdate

N

0 or 8 characters. Set to ANSI X3.30 format of patient date of birth (DOB) in result entry, for example, 19721005 for October 5, 1972. If the patient DOB field is not specified in the worklist or result entry, this field is empty.

P9

Patient Sex

N

1 character. Value set by the Patient Sex field in result entry. If sex is male, field is set to M. If sex is female, field is set to F. If the sex is unknown, the field is set to U. If the sample type is a control, field is blank.

P14

Attending Physician ID

N

0-12 characters. Set to the Physician field of result entry.

Table 29.11-3: Patient Information Record - Outgoing

Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

P1

Record Type ID

Y

'P or 'p'

P2

Sequence Number

Y

1 to any number of characters, with a default value of 0, which is always an invalid Sequence


Page 29-19

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Number. Formatted as a string of ASCII numeric characters. Equal to the numeric identifier of a patient record within the current incoming application message. If the current Sequence Number does not equal the Sequence Number of the expected record, an error is reported.

Page 29-20

P3

Practice Assigned Patient ID

N

0-11 characters. Written to the PID field of imported worklist entries. An empty field causes no change to the database field. A value of two double quotes ("") deletes the database field. This field is used only for user information. The LIAISON®XL system worklist allows the same PID field to exist in multiple worklist entries.

P6

Patient Name

N

0-3 components. (Components 3 and up are ignored.) Written to the patient Name field of the worklist entry. Total length of the field is 0-52 characters. An empty field causes no change to the database field. A value of two double quotes ("") causes the database field to be deleted.

P6^1

Patient Last Name

N

0..26 characters Becomes our PatientName

P6^2

Patient First Name

N

0..26 characters Becomes our PatientFirstName

P8

Birthdate

N

0 or 8 characters representing ANSI X3.30 date format. Written to date of birth (DOB) field in the worklist entry. An empty field causes no change LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol to the database field. A value of two double quotes ("") deletes the database field. Invalid dates are treated as an empty field. This field is used for establishing normal ranges for the sample. P9

Patient Sex

N

0 or 1 character. Written to the Patient Sex field in worklist entry. If Patient Sex value is M, database field is set to male. If Patient Sex value is F, database field is set to female. If Patient Sex value is U, database field is set to unknown. An empty field causes no change to the database field. A value of two double quotes ("") causes the database field to be set to unknown sex. An invalid Patient Sex value causes the database field to be set to unknown sex.

P14

Attending Physician ID

N

0-12 characters. Written to the Physician field of imported worklist entry. An empty field causes no change to the database field. A value of two double quotes ("") deletes the database field. This field is used only for user information.

Table 29.11-4: Patient Information Record - Incoming

29.11.3

Test Order Record

The Test Order Record is used to supply information on a specific sample's test requests. This information is necessary either for ordering tests on a specific sample or for reporting results for tests on a specific sample. An order record is associated with the previous patient record. Its hierarchical level is 2.


Page 29-21

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol The following tables describe the allowable values for each field: they refer respectively to an “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) or an “Incoming” communication (from host to LIAISON®XL).

Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

O1

Record Type ID

Y

Always 'O'

O2

Sequence Number

Y

1 to any number of characters; usually 1. Used for validating the integrity of the application message by ensuring that the message contains all records.

O3

Specimen ID

Y

3-17 characters. Set to Sample ID (SID) field of result entry.

O5

Universal Test ID

Y

List of tests, where each test is described by a multi-component field, separated by a Component Delimiter character (^). Each group of components is separated by a Repeat Delimiter character (\). If the current order record is for submitting a worklist request for a specific sample, this field describes the list of requested tests. If the current order record is for reporting single or multiple result values, this field describes the list of tests whose result values are reported in subsequent result records. The list of tests can contain from one up to the maximum number of tests the ® LIAISON XL system can support including combi tests. Refer to individual components (field components O5^1 through O5^5) for data format information.

O5^1

Page 29-22

Universal Test ID

N

0 characters; always empty.


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol O5^2

Universal Test ID Name

N


O5^3

Universal Test ID Type

N


O5^4

Manufacturers Code

Y

1-8 case-sensitive characters. The defined LIS alias name is used for the test scheduled for the sample.

O5^5

Dilution Ratio

N

The dilution ratio, if the result was obtained from a diluted request: 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or 2500

O5^6

Replicates

N

Always empty

O6

Priority

N

1 character. Value determined by the stat flag in the result entry. If the stat flag is Yes, the Priority field is set to S (Stat). If the stat flag is No, the Priority field is set to R (Routine).

O7

Requested/ Ordered Date and Time

N

In YYYYMMDDHHMMSS format, will be assigned to the RequestDateTime property of the worklist entry.

O12

Action Code

N

0 or 1 character. If the result entry is for a control sample, the Action Code field is set to Q (QC Test Specimen). If the result entry is for a patient sample, the Action Code field is empty

O26

Report Types

Y

Zero or more repetitions of 1 character. • If the outgoing message contains rejected incoming worklist data, the Report Type field contains X (Work Cannot Be Done). •


If the outgoing message contains Page 29-23

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol result data, the Report Type field contains F (Final Results). • If the outgoing message contains data in response to a query, the Report Type field contains Q (Response to a Query). • If the outgoing message is a response to a query for pending results, the Report Type field contains I (Instrument Pending). • Corrections of test results, are transmitted with an „C“ flag. This is the case if a result was changed using the "Change Result" function of the Results Journal. Table 29.11-5: Test Order Record - Outgoing

Field Number

Page 29-24

Field Name

Required

Value

O1

Record Type ID

Y

Can be 'O' or 'o'

O2

Sequence Number

Y

1 to any number of characters, with a default value of 0, which is always an invalid Sequence Number. Formatted as a string of ASCII numeric characters. Equal to the numeric identifier of an order record since the last patient record, which is considered the current patient record. If the current Sequence Number does not equal the Sequence Number of the expected record, an error is reported.


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol O3

Specimen ID

Y

Written to the Sample ID (SID) field of imported worklist entry. Lowercase characters will be automatically converted into uppercase, before further processing.

4-17 characters. O5

Universal Test ID

Y

List of tests, where each test is described by a multi-component field, separated by a Component Delimiter character (^). Each group of components is separated by a Repeat Delimiter character (\). If a test is unknown to the LIAISON®XL system, the test order is rejected to the LIS and processing continues on the list of tests. The list of tests can contain any number of names. If a single Universal Test ID matches a combi test, all tests associated with the combi are automatically added to the list of tests. Refer to field O12, Action Code, for processing of updates and cancellations of the tests specified in this field. Refer to individual components (field components O5^1 through O5^5) for data format information.

O5^1

Universal Test ID

N

0 to any number of characters. This component is always ignored.

O5^2


N

0 to any number of characters. This component is always ignored.

O5^3

Universal Test ID Type

N

0 to any number of characters. This component is always


Page 29-25

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol ignored. O5^4

Manufacturers Code

Y

1-8 case-sensitive characters. If a value exists, this value is used to search the LIAISON®XL test definition database. The LIAISON®XL system searches the test definition database for the matching LIS alias (LIS Name of the assay). If a match is found, that test is selected for the sample, otherwise the test order is rejected to the LIS (unkown test or profile).

O5^5

Dilution Ratio

N

Dilution ratio must be defined for the test. (e.g. 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or 2500) If that dilution ratio is not defined then the order is rejected to the LIS.

The LIS must not use repeat delimiters in this field, multiple dilutions and neat workorders must be sent in individual O records. O5^6

Replicates

N

Number of replicates of the test specifed in O5^4. If this field is empty, default value of the assay is ordered. Note: It is not possible to ask for CombiFathers with sons which have a different number of Replicates.

Page 29-26

O6

Priority

N

1 character. Written to the stat flag in the worklist entry. If the Priority is S, the stat flag is set to Yes (STAT), otherwise to No (No STAT).

O7

Requested/ Ordered Date and

N

The RequestDateTime property of the worklist LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol entry, in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS format.

Time

O12

Action Code

N

1 character. If the order record is for an incoming worklist entry (refer to field O26, Report Type), this field is processed as follows: • If the Action Code is C (Cancel Request) and the worklist entry is in „to do“ or „placed“ status, the tests specified in Universal Test ID field O5 are canceled for the sample specified in field O3 • If the Action Code does not specify Cancel Request, the Action Code is interpreted as a New Request or an Add Request, depending upon the existence of an entry in the LXL system worklist for the Sample ID from field O3. Empty and invalid Action Code fields are interpreted as a New Request or as an Add Request, depending upon the existence of an entry in the ® LIAISON XL system worklist for the Sample ID from field O3.

O26

Report Types

Y

Zero or more repetitions of 1 character. • If the test order is not canceled (See Action Code (Field O12)) then the Report Type is assumed to be O (Order) • If the test order is


Page 29-27

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol canceled (See Action Code (Field O12)) then the Report Type is ignored. Table 29.11-6: Test Order Record – Incoming

29.11.4

Result Record

The Result Record supplies the final test result information for a single test of a specific sample. Results of multiple tests are specified in separate result records. The LIAISON®XL system ignores incoming result records from a remote system. The hierarchical level is 3. The result record is associated with the previous order record. The following table describes the allowable values for each field: only the “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) is in this case available.

Field Number

Page 29-28

Field Name

Required

Value

R1

Record Type ID

Y

Always 'R'

R2

Sequence Number

Y

1-5 characters, formatted as a left justified number, with a range from 1 through 65535. Equal to the numeric identifier of a result record since the last order record. Used to verify the integrity of an application message by ensuring that the message contains all records.

R3

Universal Test ID

Y

A single test name described by 6 components, where each component is separated by a component delimiter character (^). The Universal Test ID specifies the name of the test associated with the result. Refer to the individual omponents (field components R3^1 through R3^5) for data format information.

R3^1

Universal Test ID

N


R3^2


N



29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol R3^3

Universal Test ID type

N


R3^4

Manufacturers Code

Y

1-8 characters. The LIS alias of the test.

R3^5

Dilution Ratio

N

The dilution ratio, if the result was obtained from a diluted request, otherwise empty (e.g. 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or 2500)

R3^6

Result Aspect

Y

0-4 characters. One of 3 possible text strings used to identify the specific aspect of the result being transmitted. The following are possible values and their interpretations: DOSE - Result concentration mean value (in User Defined units, either from a regular test or a quantitative combi result) or the Result index value, from a qualitative test. REPL - Replicate Result concentration value (in User Defined units) or the Replicate Result index value, from a qualitative test.

INTR - (Interpretation), qualitative result label or logical combi result derived from the mean result.

The INTR aspect may be subject of localization and cannot be sent in non-ASCII languages. R4


Data or Measurement Value

N

1-15 characters. If the Result Aspect in R3^6 is DOSE: the concentration valueplus alphanumeric such as Page 29-29

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol "< value", or "> value" . In case there is no assay range defined, the system shall send the result in decimal format, never in scientific notation.

If the Result Aspect in R3^6 is INTR: the qualitative result label or the logical combi result. R5

Units

N

0-6 characters. If the Data Value field (R4) represents a quantitative result, this field is set to the Units field of the definition of the associated test. If the Data Value field represents a qualitative result, the Units field is empty.

If the Data Value field represents an Index result, then the Unit field contains INDEX. R7

Result Abnormal Flags

Y

Zero or more repetitions of 1 character. The repetitions represent some of the LIAISON®XL system result flags and are one of the following: • If the result is flagged as low, this field contains L (Database flag LOW, under a defined normal range). • If the result is flagged as high, this field contains H (Database flag HIGH, over a defined normal range). • If the result is flagged as under

Page 29-30


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol assay range, this field contains < (Database flag UNDER_RANGE, Under the conc. calc limit). • If the result is flagged as over assay range, this field contains > (Database flag OVER_RANGE, over the conc. calc limit). • If the result is both within normal and assay range, i.e. no flags are given, , this field contains “N“

These flags can occur in combination, separated by repeat delimiters (\), if the test has multiple replicates with widely varying results. Refer to Result Comment Record (chapter 29.11.5), for other ® LIAISON XL system result flags. R9

Result Status

Y

One or more repetitions of 1 character. The Result Status field has a value of F (Final). Other values can occur, separated by the repeat delimiter (\): • If the result is sent in response to a query, the field has a value of Q. • If a previously sent result was changed by the system operator and not sent after the change, the result status field has a value of C to indicate correction of a previously


Page 29-31

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol transmitted result. • If a result was sent previously, the result status field has a value of R. Values of R and C do not occur in combination. • If the outgoing message contains rejected incoming worklist data, the Report Type field contains X (Work Cannot Be Done). • If a result is not yet available, the result status field has a value of I (in instrument pending). • If this is a replicate result, the result status field has a value of S (partial result). R13

Date/Time Test Completed

N

14 characters. Set to ANSI X3.43 format of date and time values. in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS form. Hours are in 24hour form.

Table 29.11-7: Result Record - Ongoing

29.11.5

Result Comment Record

The Result Comment Record is used to communicate additional flags beyond those supported by the ‘Result Abnormal Flags’ field of the Result Record. The record is optional, i.e it is not sent when no flags are available for the preceeding result. It is used if a flag other than high (H), low (L), over assay range (>), or under assay range (<) is associated with the result. Each flag generates an additional result comment record. The LIAISON®XL system ignores result data from a remote system. The system ignores incoming result comment records. Its hierarchical level is 4. The result comment record always follows a result record. The following table describes the allowable values for each field: only the “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) is in this case available. The order of flags follows the same priority as in the LIAISON®XL Main UI. Field Number C1

Page 29-32

Field Name Record Type ID

Required Y

Value 1 character; always C.


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol C2

Sequence Number

Y

1-5 characters, formatted as a left justified number, with a range from 1 through 65535. Equal to the numeric identifier of a result comment record within the current outgoing application message. Used to verify the integrity of an application message by ensuring that the message contains all records

C3

Comment Source

N

1 character, always set to ‘I'.

C4

Comment

N

0-60 characters. Result flags map to the values in the following table. If the flags do not exist for the result record, result comment records are not generated for transmission.

This can also be the reason for workorder rejection.

Depending on the system parameter „SendCompressedCom ments“, this field can contain repeat delimiters and multiple comments in one C record. C5

Comment Type

N

1 character; always ‘I'.

Table 29.11-8: Result Comment Record – Ongoing The following table shows the correspondence of text transmitted in the comment code field of the Result Comment Record to the result flags in the result database. Two different sets of strings are supported, according to a system parameter, either a two character abbreviation of a flag or a full size string.

Database Flag

Comment Code Full size (Liaisoncompatible)


Comment Code

Explanation

Abbreviation

Page 29-33


Page 29-34

Mechanical Error

JOB_FAILED

*

A mechanical Error occured on the Analytical Module (AM).

Pipettor offline

JOB_FAILED

*

The job could not be pipetted when needed.

Agitation speed out of range

JOB_FAILED

*

The Magnetic Particle (MP) agitation was out of range while pipetted.

No Cuvette available

JOB_FAILED

*

No Cuvette was available to process the Job.

Liquid Container empty

JOB_FAILED

*

The Liquid Container was empty.

Solid Waste container full

JOB_FAILED

*

Processing aborted due to full container.

Disposable tip not present

JOB_FAILED

*

No Disposable Tips are available for the AM, no arm movement.

Sample not present

JOB_FAILED

S

AM aborted job because of missing Sample (NoRack, Offline).

Ancillary not present

JOB_FAILED

R

AM aborted job because of missing Ancillary (no bollte, offline).

Reagent Integral not present

JOB_FAILED

R

AM aborted job because of missing Integral (no integral, offline).

Timing violation

JOB_FAILED

*

AM aborted job because of pipettor overload.

Washer Aspiration Failure

JOB_FAILED

*

A WAF in the wash-unit was detected.

Incubator temperature out of range

JOB_FAILED

*

Job was aborted due to wrong temperature.

Starter Reagent Temperature out of range

JOB_FAILED

S

Job aborted because Starter Reagent Temperature (SRT) was out-of-range

Cycle Time Normal Dilution Conflict

JOB_FAILED

*

COP aborted job due to resource conflict.

Job Scheduling Failure

JOB_FAILED

*

AM aborted job due to Job Scheduling Failure


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol User Request

JOB_FAILED

*

AM aborted job due to user request

Starter Prime not performed

JOB_FAILED

*

System failed to run a prime cuvette to eliminate a first shot effect.

Interference not solved

JOB_FAILED

*

A reagent interference mitigation failed, test result possibly affected due to reagent interference.

DiTiPickup Failed

JOB_FAILED

*

Pickup of DiTi fail, arm moved

Pipetting Step Sample not executed

JOB_FAILED

*

AM aborted job because Sample was not pipetted (e.g. System paused, e.g. due to cover opened)

Pipetting Step Reagent not executed

ASPIRATION_SKIPPE D

*

AM aborted job because Reagent was not pipetted (e.g. System paused, e.g. due to cover opened)

Sample Integrity Error

JOB_FAILED

S

AM aborted job because of Sample Integrity Error

Reagent Integrity Error

JOB_FAILED

R

AM aborted job because of Reagent Integrity Error

PipNoSample

JOB_FAILED

S

The Sample Pipettor arm found no Liquid

PipNoReagent

JOB_FAILED

R

The Reagent Pipettor arm found no Liquid

Clot detected by sample probe

JOB_FAILED

S

AM aborted job due to clot detection

Internal Error

JOB_FAILED

*

AM aborted job due to an internal error.

High Background

JOB_FAILED

*

RLU after Darkcountsubtraction < 4 or Error from PMT

Aspiration Plausibility

JOB_FAILED

*

PC-Check whether each expected Aspiration (identified by position (lane/tube), JobBelonging and execution Cycle) was performed exactly one time and in time.

Out of Signal

JOB_FAILED

!

Out of WorkingSignalRange


Page 29-35

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Range

for used Recalibration and 1 and 2 Point Qualitative Calibration. Out of MasterSignalRange for FullStandardization. Calibrators are not flagged.

Page 29-36

Overdiluted

DILUTION_ERROR

D

The sample probe was overdiluted. (Only for Samples with Sample Specific Dilution)

Divided by zero

JOB_FAILED

*

For calculation of CombiFather it was divided by zero

Math Error

JOB_FAILED

*

Math Error occured while calculating Dose.

Son Above Assay Range

JOB_FAILED

*

Son Below Assay Range

JOB_FAILED

*

Son Math Error

JOB_FAILED

*

Any combi son has MathError

Reagent OBS Expired

(none)

E

Any used Reagent (Integral, Ancillary) was expired (Onboad-Exiry)

Calibration Expired

CALIBRATION_EXPIR ED

C

The calibration used for calculation was expired

No Calibration

BAD_CALIBRATION

C

No usable calibration found

Below Assay Range

(none)

<

The calculated dose is below the assay range or Kulovic returned "W_CONC_LOW". (dose = "
Above Assay Range

(none)

>

The calculated dose is above the assay range or Kulovic returned "W_CONC_HIGH". (dose = "HighAssayRange") (not for Calibrators). If the higher assay range is not defined, than the LIAISON®XL - Service Manual 2.0 Revision 02

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol concentration of the last Standard is used for quantitative recalibration and full standardization. For other kinds of calibration it is then not used. Below Normal Range

(none)

NL

The calculated dose is below Normal range (not for Calibrators & Controls)

Above Normal Range

(none)

NH

The calculated dose is above normal range (not for Calibrators & Controls)

Control Expired

(none)

QE

The Control Material was expired when measured.

Controls out of Manufactuter Range

BAD_QC

Q

- not generated if the range is empty, for “precision” controls - based on last performance of any control name defined for that assay” - only for samples

QC Below Manufacturer Range

(none)

QL

this is for controls only - in case the control is below assay range, this flag is generated as well - not generated if the control range is empty, for “precision” controls

QC Above Manufacturer Range

(none)

QH

this is for controls only - in case the control is above assay range, this flag is generated as well - not generated if the control range is empty, for “precision” controls

QC Below User Range

(none)

QL

this is for controls only - in case the control is below assay range, this flag is generated as well - not generated if the control range is empty,


Page 29-37

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol for “precision” controls QC Above User Range

(none)

QH

this is for controls only - in case the control is above assay range, this flag is generated as well - not generated if the control range is empty, for “precision” controls.

RLU modified

MODIFIED_MANUALL Y

MM

The RLU was manually modified.

Recalculated

RECALCULATED

RM

The result was recalculated.

CausedRerun

IN_REFLEX_ZONE1

&

This Result coused a rerun. (Sample Only).

Son CausedRerun

(none)

X&

Son Above Normal Range

ABNORMAL_PARENT

XH

Son Below Normal Range

ABNORMAL_PARENT

XL

Table 29.11-9: Database Flag explanation

29.11.6

Query Record

The Query Record is used to request data from host systems. Its hierarchical level is 1. The LIAISON®XL system processes only one received query at a time. If a second query is received while the first is processing, the system cancels the second query. The following tables describe the allowable values for each field: they refer respectively to an “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) or an “Incoming” communication (from host to LIAISON®XL).

Field Number

Page 29-38

Field Name

Required

Value

Q1

Record Type ID

Y

1 character; always Q.

Q2

Sequence Number

Y

1-5 characters, formatted as a left justified number, with a range from 1 through 65535. Equal to the numeric identifier of a query record within the current outgoing application message. Used to verify the integrity of an application message by ensuring that the message


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol contains all records. Q3

Starting Range ID

Y

If the operator requested a worklist, the Sample ID has no restrictions and the field is set to ALL. If the LIAISON®XL system has initiated the worklist requests automatically, the field contains the Sample IDs, in the order from position 1 to 12 in the rack.

Q4

Ending Range ID

N

This field is always empty for all LIAISON®XL system-initiated query records.

Q5

Universal Test ID

N

Always set to ALL

Q13

Request Information Status Code

N

1 character. Always 'O', which is a request for tests and demographics only.

Table 29.11-10: Query Record – Ongoing

Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

Q1

Record Type ID

Y

Can be 'Q' or 'q'

Q2

Sequence Number

Y

1 to any number of characters, with a default value of 0, which is always an invalid Sequence Number. Formatted as a string of ASCII numeric characters. Equal to the numeric identifier of a query record since the last header record, which is considered the current query record. If the current Sequence Number does not equal the Sequence Number of the expected record, an error is reported.

Q3

Starting Range ID

Y

0-17 characters. The Sample ID is used as a criterion for matching the SID field in worklist entries or results.


Page 29-39


If ALL is sent in this field then LIAISON®XL will consider this as "match all" criterion, therefore will send all results from "Done" and "Failed" page (but not calibrators). Q4

Ending Range ID

N

Not processed.

Q5

Universal Test ID

N

0-8 characters. The LIS Alias code is used as a criterion for matching the test code field in worklist entries or results.

Q13

Request Information Status Code

N

When there is an 'X' in Q13, the query is ignored.

Table 29.11-11: Query Record – Incoming

29.11.7

Message Terminator Record

The Message Termination Record is the last record of a message and closes the message. It provides an explanation for ending the message. Its hierarchical level is 0. The following tables describe the allowable values for each field: they refer respectively to an “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) or an “Incoming” communication (from host to LIAISON®XL). Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

L1

Record Type ID

Y

1 character; always L.

L2

Sequence Number

Y

1 character; always 1.

L3

Termination Code

N

1 character, Can be ‘N' or ‘I'. If the ending of themessage is normal, this field is 'N' (Normal). A Termination Code of ‘I’. (No Information Available) is used to reply to a query if no information is available to send in response to the query.

Table 29.11-12: Message Terminator Record – Outgoing

Page 29-40


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

L1

Record Type ID

Y

Can be 'L' or 'l'

L2

Sequence Number

Y

1 to any number of characters, with a default value of 0, which is always an invalidSequence Number. Formatted as a string of ASCII numeric characters. If the current Sequence Number does not equal the Sequence Number of the expected record, a fatal parse error is posted to the event log. This value should always be 1 because multiple termination records not separated by a header record generate a fatal parse error.

L3

Termination Code

N

0 or 1 character, either ‘N' or ‘I'.

Table 29.11-13: Message Terminator Record – Incoming

29.11.8

Scientific Record

This record must not be send.

29.11.9

Manufacturer Information Record

The Manufacturer Information Record is used to send traceability information for a result record. The Manufacturer Information Record is sent immediately after a Result Record, i.e. it always relates to the immediatly preceeding Result Record. The following table describes the allowable values for each field: only the “Outgoing” communication (from LIAISON®XL to host) is in this case available.


Page 29-41

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Field Number

Field Name

Required

Value

M1

Record Type ID

Y

1 character; always M.

M2

Sequence Number

Y

1 character; always 1.

M3

Integral Kit Number

Y

This is the Kit number of the reagent integral used to produce the result. Kit Number is an integer ranging from 0 to 4.294.967.295

M4

Integral Expiration Date

Y

This is the shelf expiration date of the reagent integral used to produce the result. In YYYYMMDD format.

M5

Integral LotNumber

Y

This is the reagent lot number of the reagent integral used to produce the result. Lot Number is an integer ranging from 0 to 4.294.967.295

M6

Calibration ID

Y

This is the internal ID of the calibration used to calculate the result. This is an integer value

M7^1

Sample Lane Number

Y

The lane number from which the sample was aspirated for this test. Lane number ranges from 1 to 10 or "LAS" if sample was aspirated from the LAS spur.

M7^2

Sample Tube Position

Y

The tube position within this lane from which the sample was aspirated for this test. Ranges from 1 to 12 or empty if sample was aspirated from the LAS spur.

Table 29.11-14: Manufacturer Information Record – Outogoing

Page 29-42



29.12 Tools for Troubleshooting 29.12.1

ASTM 1381 Layer

If the “Record ASTM1381” checkbox is checked, then all bytes transmitted are recorded in a CxByyyyy.trc file (x being a placeholder for the COMPort and yyyyy being a counter, such that up to 100000 *.trc files can be stored). The *.trc files have a plain text format and can be viewed with notepad.

29.12.2

ASTM 1394 Layer

If the “Record ASTM1394” checkbox is checked, then all records transmitted are recorded in a CxRzzzzz.trw file (x being a placeholder for the COMPort and zzzzz being a counter, such that up to 100000 *.trc files can be stored). The *.trw files have a plain text format and can be viewed with notepad.

29.13 LIAISON®XL Specific LIS Protocol Implementation 29.13.1

Scope

Scope of the present document is to describe the known issues that can be experienced when a LIAISON®XL (provided with SW V4.0.0.4SP3) is connected to any Host where the protocol has already been tailored on LIAISON® specific LIS implementation. The implementation of LIS functionalities on LIAISON® and LIAISON®XL has been performed in two completely different environments. As main examples: - LIAISON® and LIAISON®XL are implemented in different programming languages, based on different frameworks and integrated in different operating systems, which makes it almost impossible to really compare these two implementations; - LIAISON® and LIAISON®XL database structures are different, which may introduce significantly differences in behavior. For the above mentioned reasons and due to unpredictable Host specific limitations, this document cannot be considered as an exhaustive and complete coverage of all possible LIAISON®XL versus LIAISON® different behavior as far as the Host connection is concerned.

29.13.2

General remarks

•

Each item is detailed in a “Description” paragraph, when appropriate an “Example” and a “Workaround” are provided as well.

•

In case the Description is self explanatory the “Example” may be not given.

•

Even if the scope of this document is to give a clear categorization of each item according to the explained structure, some items could be listed in more than one category.

•

As the Liaison does not show the described situations, the Liaison behavior is obvious and therefore it is not described.


Page 29-43

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol •

As this document is focused on the high-level communication protocol, please note that the Checksum has not be checked for any example and therefore it may differ from the expected value.

•

The given examples are based on assays that may be not available in specific Countries.

29.13.3

Known differences

29.13.3.1

Contention Issue

Description: With contention issue it is intended a situation in which both the Host and the LIAISON®XL are requesting to communicate. LIAISON®XL starts to send data, while the host is still transmitting, by sending an as response to the header record from the host. This is legal and explicitly defined in the ASTM standard (E1381 §6.3.5.1). The host now has the option to ignore the and continue its transmission, or to honor it and send an as confirmation (E1381 §6.3.5.3 and §6.4). In case the host does not follow the ASTM standard and just stops transmitting, i.e. it honors the but it does not issue the for confirmation, the communication can end in a “” loop. Example: 012-02-29, 10:18:52,936

<-

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,030

->

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,092

<- 1H|\^&|||Lia3|||||HOST||P|1|BD

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,217

->

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,280

<- 2Q|1|0169035310||ALL||||||||OB8

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,373

->

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,436

<- 3Q|2|0806471110||ALL||||||||OBA

2012-02-29, 10:18:53,529

->

[…]

Page 29-44

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,027

<- 5Q|12|0283584910||ALL||||||||OF9

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,120

->

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,183

<- 6L|1|N09

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,276

->

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,339

<-

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,432

->

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,495

<-

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,620

-> 1H|\^&||||||||||P|1BA

2012-02-29, 10:18:55,713

<-

2012-02-29, 10:19:05,760

->

2012-02-29, 10:19:25,774

->

2012-02-29, 10:19:26,086

<-

2012-02-29, 10:19:36,164

->

2012-02-29, 10:19:38,036

<-


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Workaround: As it turns out that the Host cannot always properly handle the LIAISON®XL request while it is transmitting data, then we suggest (as a temporary workaround before the Host is adapted to the ASTM standard) to disable the automatic results upload and to manually upload results. The contention scenario may also appear when the user is loading several sample racks: here the Host sends the programmed tests for the already loaded tubes while the LIAISON®XL send a query for the newly loaded tubes. To avoid such scenario, a solution could be to wait for the programmed tests of the first rack to be completely received before loading another rack. 29.13.3.2

Structure Error

Description: ASTM standard gives two prescriptions about how to handle the transmission structure as far as the “H” and “L” are involved: •

ASTM 1394 - §13.1: Terminator record (“L”): This is the last record in a message. A header record may be transmitted after this record (i.e. at the beginning of a new message).

•

ASTM 1394 - §7.1 Header Record (“H”): …must be followed at some point by a terminator record before ending the session or transmitting another Header record. This type of record must always be the first in a transmission.

LIAISON®XL implementation is strictly adherent to the ASTM 1394 - §7.1, so in case multiple H-L records are nested inside the same transmission, LIAISON®XL detects it as an error and doesn’t accept the received message.

Example: 2012-03-27, 13:53:07,849

->

2012-03-27, 13:53:07,911

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:07,942

-> 1H|\^&|||LIS|||||Liaison 9|||1|DD

2012-03-27, 13:53:08,098

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:08,130

-> 2P|1|016990023309|||TEST^TEST|||M|||||B5

2012-03-27, 13:53:08,254

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:08,286 -> 3O|1|016990023309||^^^25OHD^||20120327135235|||||||||N||||||||||O64 2012-03-27, 13:53:08,442

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:08,473

-> 4P|2|016990023809|||TEST^TEST1|||M|||||2A

2012-03-27, 13:53:08,598

<-

[…] 2012-03-27, 13:53:12,030

-> 0P|12|016990024409|||TEST^TEST11|||N|||||EC

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,154

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,186 -> 1O|1|016990024409||^^^25OHD^||20120327135235|||||||||N||||||||||O64 2012-03-27, 13:53:12,342

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,373

-> 2L|1|N05

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,466

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,498

-> 3H|\^&|||LaborEDV|||||Liaison 9|||1|DF

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,622

<-


Page 29-45

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol 2012-03-27, 13:53:12,654

-> 4P|1|016990024909|||TEST1^TEST|||F|||||6A

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,778

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:12,810 -> 5O|1|016990024909||^^^25OHD^||20120327135241|||||||||N||||||||||O6A 2012-03-27, 13:53:12,966

<-

[…] 2012-03-27, 13:53:16,928

-> 2P|12|016990025609|||TEST11^TEST|||F|||||D4

2012-03-27, 13:53:17,053

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:17,084 -> 3O|1|016990025609||^^^25OHD^||20120327135241|||||||||N||||||||||O66 2012-03-27, 13:53:17,240

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:17,271

-> 4L|1|N07

2012-03-27, 13:53:17,365

<-

2012-03-27, 13:53:17,396

->

Workaround: N.A. 29.13.3.3

Results sent in batch of 10

Description: Results may be sent to the Host in batch of ten results within a single transmission (i.e. between an and the ). In case more than ten results have to be sent to the Host (e.g. the user selects 21 results from the “Results  Archive” page) then the LIAISON®XL will use the necessary number of transmissions (e.g. for 21 results the structure … will be repeated 3 times). Please note that ASTM does not describe whether the results shall be sent in one or more packages, therefore all possible approaches shall be considered equally allowed.

Example: 2012-04-10, 13:44:57,453

<- 1H|\^&|||LIAISON XL5|||||LaborEDV||P|1|2A

2012-04-10, 13:44:57,515

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:57,578

<- 2P|1|10159591270||||||M|||||34

2012-04-10, 13:44:57,640

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:57,703

<- 3O|1|101595912709||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA2

2012-04-10, 13:44:57,796

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:57,859 <4R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|13.9|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410103939B9 2012-04-10, 13:44:57,952

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,015

<- 5P|2|10159590410||||||F|||||97

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,077

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,139

<- 6O|1|101595904109||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA0

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,233

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,295 <7R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|9.06|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104000AA

Page 29-46

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,389

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,451

<- 0P|3|09117412431||||||M|||||7E



->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,576

<- 1O|1|091174124319||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F99

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,670

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,732 <2R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|8.25|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104020A7 2012-04-10, 13:44:58,826

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,888

<- 3P|4|10159591440||||||F|||||51

2012-04-10, 13:44:58,951

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,013

<- 4O|1|101595914409||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA2

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,107

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,325

<- 6P|5|10159590350||||||F|||||5E

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,387

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,450

<- 7O|1|101595903509||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA4

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,543

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,606 <0R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|11.0|ng/mL||N||F||||201204101041039A 2012-04-10, 13:44:59,699

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,762

<- 1P|6|10159590390||||||M|||||9D

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,824

->

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,887

<- 2O|1|101595903909||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA3

2012-04-10, 13:44:59,980

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,199

<- 4P|7|10159590290||||||F|||||DC

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,261

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,323

<- 5O|1|101595902909||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA5

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,417

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,635

<- 7P|8|10159591430||||||M|||||2C

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,698

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,760

<- 0O|1|101595914309||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F9D

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,854

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:00,916 <1R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|16.9|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104206AD 2012-04-10, 13:45:01,010

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,072

<- 2P|9|10159591420||||||F|||||C6

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,135

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,197

<- 3O|1|101595914209||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F9F

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,291

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,353 <4R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|4.51|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104226AC 2012-04-10, 13:45:01,447

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,509

<- 5P|10|10159591380||||||F|||||3F

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,571

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,634

<- 6O|1|101595913809||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA7


Page 29-47


->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,946

<- 0L|1|N03

2012-04-10, 13:45:01,977

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,039

<-

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,164

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,227


2012-04-10, 13:45:02,289

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,351

<- 2P|1|10159591340||||||M|||||E9

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,414

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,476

<- 3O|1|101595913409||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA0

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,570

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,788

<- 5P|2|10159591410||||||M|||||01

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,851

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:02,913

<- 6O|1|101595914109||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA1

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,007

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,225

<- 0P|3|10159591350||||||F|||||2D

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,287

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,350

<- 1O|1|101595913509||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F9F

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,443

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,662

<- 3P|4|10159591230||||||F|||||70

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,724

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,787

<- 4O|1|101595912309||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F9F

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,880

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:03,943 <5R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|15.8|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104412AE 2012-04-10, 13:45:04,036

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,099

<- 6P|5|10159591490||||||F|||||D6

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,161

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,223

<- 7O|1|101595914909||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FAA

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,317

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,535

<- 1P|6|10159591450||||||M|||||96

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,598

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,660

<- 2O|1|101595914509||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||FA1

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,754

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,816 <3R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|25.9|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104455B5

Page 29-48



->

2012-04-10, 13:45:04,972

<- 4P|7|10159590120||||||F|||||FD

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,035

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,097

<- 5O|1|101595901209||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F9D

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,191

->


->

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,409

<- 7P|8|10159590700||||||F|||||40

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,471

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,534

<- 0O|1|101595907009||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F9C

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,627

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,690 <1R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|21.7|ng/mL||N||F||||20120410104536AD 2012-04-10, 13:45:05,783

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,846

<- 2L|1|N05

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,877

->

2012-04-10, 13:45:05,939

<-

Note: as it can be derived from the time stamps, these results belong to the same “upload to LIS” action, please note in “red” where the LIAISON®XL splits the transmission into two parts.


Queries for “?” SID

Description: When the sample barcode scanner is not able to detect the Sample ID it may transfer a “?” character to the LIS instead of the Sample ID. This query is harmless but useless and it adds an unnecessary transmission additional workload. On the LIS side there are surely no test orders available for “?” SID, hence the LIS should respond with an empty message containing header and terminator records only. The terminator record should contain an 'I' flag (no information available) in the Termination Code Field. Example: H|\^&|||LIS|||||LIAISON XL||P|1 L|1|I Note: It is also possible for the host not to reply at all or to reply with a message with completely “empty” P and O records, for example: H|\^&|||LIS|||||LIAISON XL||P|1 P|1 O|1 L|1|I


Page 29-49

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Example: 2012-04-11, 10:00:04,913

<-

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,069

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,132


2012-04-11, 10:00:05,194

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,257

<- 2Q|1|?||ALL||||||||OFB

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,319

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,381

<- 3Q|2|101256601109||ALL||||||||O1E

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,444

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,506

<- 4Q|3|101256004409||ALL||||||||O20

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,569

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,631

<- 5Q|4|101256802509||ALL||||||||O29

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,693

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,756

<- 6Q|5|101607523809||ALL||||||||O2E

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,818

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,881

<- 7Q|6|101607527809||ALL||||||||O34

2012-04-11, 10:00:05,943

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,005

<- 0Q|7|101256000709||ALL||||||||O1F

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,068

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,130

<- 1Q|8|101607511609||ALL||||||||O27

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,193

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,255

<- 2Q|9|101607700609||ALL||||||||O29

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,317

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,380

<- 3Q|10|101076630309||ALL||||||||O51

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,442

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,505

<- 4Q|11|101184194409||ALL||||||||O59

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,567

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,629

<- 5Q|12|101380338509||ALL||||||||O5A

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,692

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,754

<- 6L|1|N09

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,785

->

2012-04-11, 10:00:06,848

<-

Workaround: So far no issues have been reported regarding the fact that the “?” is used in the transmission. 29.13.3.5

Combi Son results not transmitted

Description: This situation occurs only if the following combination of events happens: •

Page 29-50

an Host is connected

•

the automatic sending of results to the Host is enabled

•

some special combi assays are used (e.g. HIVAbAg)

•

the Host shall receive all results from the combi family (e.g. HIVAbAg as well as HIVAb and HIVAg)


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol If the Host requires only the combi father test order, the LIAISON®XL sends back only the combi father result to the Host (expected behavior). Workaround: In order to receive both the father and the sons results the Host shall request the complete family i.e. both the father and the involved sons within the same transmission (H-L) Note: the order the father and the sons are requested does not play any role in receiving the results, but to full accomplish to complete/repeat family logic on LIAISON®XL SW, it is necessary to follow the order specified in the next table:

Order

Test orders sent by the host

1

HIVAbAg

2

HIVAb

3

HIVAg

29.13.3.6

PID

Description: LIAISON®XL uses field P^3 (Practice Assigned Patient ID) for transmitting the PID, LIAISON® uses field P^4 (Laboratory Assigned Patient ID). The system can conduct the tests no matter if a PID is present, so no issue is expected. Description for field P^3 is: 0..11 characters, Patient ID (PID) field.

Example: H|\^&|||LIAISON XL|||||LaborEDV|||1|19941115202738 P|1|PatID01|||MeierÂnna||19741001|F|||||MARTINEZ O|1|SAMPLE01||^^ÂFP||19980506|||||||||S||||||||||F R|1|^^ÂFP^^DOSE|13.1|IU/ml||H||F||||19980506123145|Liaison […]


Abnormal Flag

Description: LIAISON® cannot send the complete result string in case of any result outside the assay range, i.e. LIAISON only sends the threshold value. LIAISON®XL can send to the host the complete correct string for any out-of-assayrange result (e.g. the sent result is <4.00 and not just 4.00) within field R^4.


Page 29-51

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol In addition, please note that both LIAISON®XL and LIAISON® use field R^7 for transmitting the information regarding the result Abnormal Flags.

Description for field R^4 is: 1-15 characters. If the Result Aspect in R3^6 is DOSE: the concentration value plus alphanumeric such as "< value", or "> value" . In case there is no assay range defined, the system shall send the result in decimal format, never in scientific notation. If the Result Aspect in R3^6 is INTR: the qualitative result label or the logical combi result.

Description for field R^7 is: Zero or more repetitions of 1 character. The repetitions represent some of the LIAISON®XL system result flags and are one of the following: […]



If the result is flagged as under assay range, this field contains <.



If the result is flagged as over assay range, this field contains >.

[…]

Example: 1H|\^&|||LIAISON XL5|||||LaborEDV||P|1|2A 2P|1|10007650380||||||F|||||86 3O|1|100076503809||^^^25OHD^|R||||||||||||||||||||F98 4R|1|^^^25OHD^^DOSE|<4.00|ng/mL||<||F||||20120410101509D1 […]


Results < 0

Description: LIAISON®XL SW 4.0.0.4SP3 generates a result dose “<0” if the patient RLU value is below the 1st recalculated standard RLU value for those assays whose assay range low limit is “0”. The same value is passed to the LIS communication in case the result is sent to Host. Example: N.A.

Workaround: N.A.

Page 29-52


29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol 29.13.3.9

Fields O^28 and P^26

Description: LIAISON®XL does not make any use of fields O^28 and P^26. The system can conduct the tests no matter if the values of fields O^28 and P^26 are present, so no issue is expected. ASTM 1394 description for field O^28 is: Location or Ward of Specimen Collection – This field defines the ward of specimen collection if different from the patient ward ASTM 1394 description for field P^26 is: Location – This text value shall reflect the general clinic location or nursing unit, or ward or bed or both of the patient in terms agreed upon by the sender and receiver.

Example: N.A.


SID Case-Insensitive

Description: LIAISON®XL handles patient Sample IDs case-insensitive. Therefore sample IDs, that are received from the host are automatically converted to uppercase. Patient Sample IDs are sent to the host always in uppercase. Workaround: In case the Host is case sensitive and has issues receiving upper case converted Sample IDs please use only upper case characters or numbers. 29.13.3.11 Further Host Related Unsolved Anomalies for SW V4.0.0.4SP3 ID

Description

Severity

50480

Changed delimiters may lead the system not to properly handle the LIS exchange

Minor

80751

LIS: it happened once during software development that too many messages about rejected test order due to wrong instrument are sent from the system

Minor


Additional Informations Minor user inconvenience (it is sufficient to not change the default delimiters) Minor user inconvenience (it is not expected to occur in a real environment)

Page 29-53

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol ID

81249

82696

91587

97842

129285

Description The system may send to LIS a flag that should be masked by another sent flag (e.g. “out of normal range” may be sent even in presence of “out of assay range”) A test with full patient information is sent from LIS for some samples. If a user without patient privileges assigns some additional assay for the same sample, then this new test has PID, Gender, Birthday but Name field is empty.

Illegal barcode ID are transmitted to host

In case the host communication falls during data transmission, no event is given and the countdown on the transmission pop-up stops If the user manually schedules a job for a SID few seconds before receiving the orders from LIS for the same SID, two WLEs are created for that SID

Severity

Additional Informations

Minor

No impact (the flag is redundant but correct)

Minor

Minor user inconvenience

Moderate

User inconvenience (no test would be started, however the host would receive an unexpected character)

Minor

Minor user inconvenience

Minor

User inconvenience

29.13.3.12 Differences between LIAISON and LIAISON® XL configuration parameters The following table lists the differences between LIAISON and LIAISON®XL as far as configuration parameters are concerned and assessment of potential impact on the connection. Parameter DataBits

LIAISON 8 (cannot be changed)

LIAISON XL

Possible Impact

Parameter

None, more flexibility

StopBits

1 (cannot be changed)

Parameter


Parity

None (cannot be changed)

Parameter


NumFormat

Parameter

Not a LIS parameter

Values are stored as string in LIAISON®XL, depending on assay specific settings. It is not transformed for transmission to LIS. No issues expected.

Send frame

Page 29-54

15 (cannot be

Parameter



29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol Parameter timeout

LIAISON changed)

Bad frame send (NAK) timeout


Parameter


Busy (contention) timeout


Parameter


Send compressed comments

Not present

Parameter

Upload frequency

Parameter

LIAISON XL

Not present

Possible Impact

Added functionality. No issues expected Automatic upload is triggered by auto-archiving in LIAISON®XL. No issues expected.

Number of upload retries

Parameter

Not present

Results affected by transmission failure are transmitted with the next automatically transmitted results. This is a change functionality in respect to LIAISON®. No issues expected. LIAISON®XL accepts all queries from the host, independently from any query frequency.

Host query frequency

Parameter

Not present

If LIAISON®XL is busy, the host cannot send the query, if LIAISON®XL is free, it answers. This is a change functionality in respect to LIAISON®. No issue expected.

Enable/disable

Result flag style

Not present

Not present

Parameter

Parameter

Added functionality. No issue expected Added functionality to keep compatibility with LIAISON®. No issue expected

Enable manufacturer record

Not present

Parameter

Result Aspect

Not present

Assay Parameter

Added functionality.

Send Replicate Results to Host

Not present

Assay Parameter

Added functionality.


Added functionality. No issue expected

No issue expected

No issue expected

Page 29-55

29. Appendix B – LIS Interface Protocol 29.13.3.13

New features

Sample replicates The Host can require the desired number of replicates for any of the requested tests. The value shall be inserted in field O5^6 If this field is empty, default value of the assay is ordered. It is not possible to ask for Combi Fathers with sons which have a different number of Replicates. It is not possible to ask for less replicates than the minimum defined for the involved assay.

Page 29-56


30. Glossary

30 Glossary 00h; 0x00

Shows hexadecimal (hex) code, used in trouble shooting error messages.

AM

Analytical Module

APH

Air Pipettor Head Module:

APM

Aspirate Pressure Monitoring system

APP

Air Pipettor Pump Module:

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII), pronounced is a character encoding based on the english alphabet.

ASTM

American Society for Testing and Materials. ASTM 1381 and ASTM 1394 are determinations for the communication between computers.

CCW

Counter clock wise

CE

Conformite Europeene

COM

COM is the original, yet still common, name of the serial port interface on PCs. It might not only refer to physical ports, but also to virtual ports, such as ports created by RS/232 or USB adapters.

COP

Central operating processor

CSA

Canadian Standards Association

CU

Control Unit

CV

The abbreviation CV stands for 'coefficient of variation' and is the relative standard deviation, which is the quotient of the absolute standard deviation and the mean of a measured value. %CV: The CV multiplied with 100%

CV/CVS

Cuvette Supply

DICV

DI Cleaning Valve

DITI

Disposable Tip

EEPROM

An Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory is a type of nonvolatile memory used in computers and other electronic devices to store small amounts of data that must be saved when power is removed, e.g. calibration tables or device configuration.

EIA

Enzyme Immuno Assay

ELISA

Enzyme Linked Immuno Sorbent Assay

Fatal Error

An unexpected and non-recoverable termination of instrument operation including, but not limited to assay processing,maintenance, service, start-up, and shut-down.

Host

In computer networking a host is a main computer (e. g. server, central computer).


Page 30-1

30. Glossary HT1

Heater Tube 1

HT2

Heater Tube 2

HTR

Heater Transport (Incubator)

IC

Integrated circuit

ID

Identification (Number).

IFU

Instructions for Use manual

IVD

In-vitro Diagnostic

LAN

A Local Area Network is a computer network.

LAS

Laboratory Automation System

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LIMS

A Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS) is computer software that is used in laboratories for the management of samples, laboratory users, instruments, standards and other laboratory functions such as invoicing, plate management, and work flow automation.

LIS

A Laboratory Information System, is a class of software which handles receiving, processing and storing information generated by medical laboratory processes.

LLD

Liquid Level Detection B-LLD - Barometric Liquid Level Detection C-LLD - Capacitive Liquid Level Detection

LWDV

Liquid Waste Distribution Valve

LWP

Liquid Waste Pump

ms

Milli seconds (1000 ms = 1 s

nm

A nanometer is a unit of length in the metric system. (1 nm = 0.000001 mm = 1*10-9 m = 39.37*10-9 in)

NVM

Non volatile memory. is computer memory that can retain the stored information even when not powered.

OD

Optical Density

OLV

Optical Liquid Verification

PC

Personal Computer

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

PIW

Pusher I-W (Incubator-Washer)

PRP

Reagent Probe Rinsing Pump

PS2

The PS/2 (PS2) connector allows the connection of a keyboard or a mouse to a computer.

PWI

Pusher W-I (Washer-Incubator)

QA

Quality control Analysis.

Page 30-2


30. Glossary RAM

Random Access Memory When the computer is shut down, anything contained in RAM is lost.

RFID

Radio frequency identification

RLU

Relative Light Unit

RS232

Serial bus standard to connect devices to a computer.

SCTL

Servo Motor Controller (off the shelf)

SP

Starter Pump

SRP

Syringe Reagent Pump

USB

The Universal Serial Bus is a serial bus standard to connect devices to a computer.

V

Volt

VC

Vaation Criteria

VCD

Proximity coupling device (reader IC)

VGA

The Video Graphics Array is a standard interface to connect a screen to a computer.

VICC

Proximity integrated circuit card (tag or smart label)

WAP

Wash Aspiration Pump

WB

Wash Buffer

WBCV

Wash Buffer Cleaning Valve

WDP

Washer Dispense Pump

WDVB

Washer Distribution Valve Block

WLE

Work List Entry

WPAP

Wash Probe Aspiration Pump

WPRP

Wash Probe Rinsing Pump

ZSPIP

Gear Rack Pipettor

µl

A microliter is a unit of volume in the metric system. (1 ml = 0.001 ml = 1*10-6 l)


Page 30-3

Liaison XL Service Manual 2.0 (M0200008696) Revision 02

Recommend Documents